JP6941368B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, some of these game consoles are equipped with display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
A amusement machine having a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is the first effect display .
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display .
Before Stories second effect display, the case of changing the first effect display of the display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first case".) And the effect display there is,
In the case of the first, the first effect display of the display mode is changed to the third aspect of the first aspect,
The second effect display is an effect display in which the display mode of the first effect display is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon.
The display means can display a symbol variation display, and can display the symbol variation display.
The symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon in the second display mode is the jackpot symbol than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon in the first display mode. Is easy to confirm,
The first effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the hold icon.
The direction of the first effect display the third aspect of said first effect display than the first embodiment tends to change the Hold icon in the second display mode,
The second effect display is Ri effect display der that may be started during the display of the first effect display the first aspect,
The second effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the variable icon in the second case.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows an example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect which entwined the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the effect which entwined the operation means A and the effect which entwined the operation means B. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the production which entwined the operation means. It is a figure showing the movable accessory arranged on the back side with respect to the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. It is a figure which showed the flow of an example from a pseudo continuous production to a big hit step by step without performing a transparent effect. It is a figure which showed an example of a transparent effect step by step. It is a figure which showed the example in which the transmission effect is executed stepwise in the state which the 1st movable accessory 251 is in a 2nd position after the pseudo continuous effect is started. It is a figure which showed the example in which the transmission effect is executed stepwise in the state which the 1st movable accessory 251 is in a 1st position. It is a figure which showed stepwise an example of the case where the transmission effect is executed in the state which the 1st movable accessory 251 is in a 1st position, and then the transmission effect is executed also in a state which is in a 2nd position. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the 1st movable accessory 251 and the 4th movable accessory 254 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example and the modification which follows from FIG. 20 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example which continues from the same situation as FIG. 20 (m) step by step. It is a figure which shows the example and the modification which follows from FIG. 22 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example which combined the effect using the 1st movable accessory 251 and the effect of a timer notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown in FIG. 22 step by step. It is a figure which shows the further modification example of the example shown in FIG. 25 (b') to FIG. 25 (i'). It is a figure which shows a plurality of examples of other productions using the 4th movable accessory 254. It is a figure which shows the example which combined the transparent effect and the effect using a sub window step by step. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a transparent effect and various displays. It is a figure which summarized the typical example of the production explained so far. It is a figure which shows the modification of the structure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the structure of the effect device 206 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the transmission effect using the effect device 206 of 2nd Embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 33. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows the modification of the transmission effect described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. It is a figure which shows the further modification example of the modification example in the right column of FIG. 36. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect of the light guide plate IL. It is a figure which shows the structure of the effect device 206 of 3rd Embodiment, and the structure of the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the effect device of 3rd Embodiment and the modified example thereof. It is a figure which shows the structure of the effect device 206 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the production apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the effect device 206 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the embodiment described so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the accessory different from the conventional one is arranged on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated hitting effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the explanatory display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 67. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows an example of a meter effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 80 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is performed stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. 82 step by step. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail about various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank-up effect which fortune-tells whether the meter display changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 86 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 87 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 88 (41) step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini-game which fortune-tells whether or not the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the big hit is decided by the fluctuation when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame step by step. It is a figure which shows the example step by step which the mini-item is acquired and stocked when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display step by step. It is a figure which shows the example step by step that the meter display in a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display. It is a figure which shows the example step by step that the item is digested without being stocked even if the meter display becomes full and an item appears. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear stepwise. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 step by step. , It is a figure which shows the example in which the display is started stepwise in the state where the meter display of an increase type is accumulated halfway. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter effect by the meter display which shows a numerical value step by step. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes according to the operation of the operating means. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect different from the meter effect described so far step by step. It is a figure which shows an example step by step when an error occurs during display of a meter display. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 104 step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process. It is a flowchart of the process during a symbol change. It is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process. It is a flowchart of a special electric function operation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric duty control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation pattern data table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation data table. It is a flowchart of the special electric function residual sphere detection processing. It is a flowchart of the special electric duty operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight processing. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 135 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 136 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. 137. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 141. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 142. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 143. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 142. It is a figure which shows the other modification example. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the top menu screen and the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a variable icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 151. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. 151. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigator character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154, the modification example and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification and the like shown in FIG. 157. An example of an effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which there is a period in which a navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which there is another period in which a navigator character YM is not displayed. This is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of the production in which the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is entwined with the navigator character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which the change notice display is standby display. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the holding frame different from the holding frame explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box which has been used as the icon of the change notice notice appears as a hold icon. An example of the production in which the meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 167. It is a figure which shows still another modification of the example described with respect to FIG. 167. An example of a production in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the 2nd display device below the decorative pattern display device 208 (the first display device). It is a figure which shows an example of the case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by a player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 175. It is a table which summarized the music which can be output from a speaker 120. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection described with respect to FIG. 177 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 178. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 180. It is a figure which shows the example which the holding frame selected by a player is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 182. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which was set to the auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 184. It is a figure explaining the overlap relation with the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW, and the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of a pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of a pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the error notification by the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. An example of a display symbol on the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, and (b) is an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2. (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (B) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 and special figure 2 provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the hit / fail determination table for a normal drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, and the example of a symbol sorting and a hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the hit / fail determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol sorting table for special figure 1 and the operation at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol sorting table for special figure 2 and the operation at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the processing in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, (b) is the 1st. 1 The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric chulong opening effect executed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric Chulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the processing in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, (b) is the 1st. 2 The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Examples 5-7 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Examples 7 and 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the production example in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the production example in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in chronological order. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the production example in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the production example in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Examples 15 to 17 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 18 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in the example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, and the modified example of Example 19 in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the production example in the modification of Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in the Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, and the modified example thereof in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the production example in Examples 21 and 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the production example in Example 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending change effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold change 2nd effect is performed together with the hold change 1st effect. The left half shows an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined, and the right half shows an example of the hold change third effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example in which the character BC of the bancho of the hold change 3rd effect appears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the right half of FIG. 232, and is the figure which shows the 4th effect of a pending change. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th effect of pending change. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold change 1st effect is performed together with the hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows another example in which the hold change 1st effect is performed together with the hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the 4th effect of a pending change shown in FIG. 233. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold change 5th effect is performed together with the hold change 4th effect, and the example of the hold change 6th effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the 6th effect of pending change. It is a figure which shows the example which the hold change 1st effect is performed in the state which the curtain effect is executed. It is a figure which shows another example which combined the curtain effect and the hold change 1st effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the curtain effect and the hold change effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a curtain effect. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative pattern executed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change effect including the hold icon change effect. (4) -2 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246, and (11) -1 and after show an example of the change effect including the timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example which combined the effect using a timer display and the change effect. It is a figure which shows an example different from the example shown in FIG. 248 which combined the effect using the timer display and the change effect. It is a figure which shows the example which the change production using a ninja character NJ is performed in a different manner. It is a figure which showed the example in which the operation means display is displayed stepwise across the continuous symbol variation display. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which an operation means display is displayed, which continues from FIG. 251. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the operation means display is displayed, which continues from FIG. 252. It is a figure which shows the example in which the 1st operation means display Od1 is changed to the 2nd operation means display Od2 in the pachinko machine provided with the game board which is different from the structure of the game board shown in FIG. 195. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 254 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which changes from the 1st operation means display Od1 to the 3rd operation means display Od3, and further changes from the 3rd operation means display Od3 to the 2nd operation means display Od2. It is a figure which shows the example step by step which there is a period in which two kinds of operation means display are displayed at the same time. It is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a display imitating an operating means is displayed at the same time. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation means display is displayed stepwise on each of the 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where the effect is different before and after the change of the operation means display step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where the effect is the same before and after the change of the operation means display step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button 136 was operated stepwise during the execution of the variation display of the 3rd symbol pd3 which was performed at the timing when the hold increased. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where the operation of a chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. 262 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation means display once disappears after the chance button 136 is operated stepwise. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method of the operation means display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side).

Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The term "enclosed type" as used herein refers to an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as external structures. .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, a lamp having an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is referred to as a lamp if it emits light. The one that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is partitioned between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 separate from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 can rotate in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the bottom. Further, the transmission unit 190 has a built-in light emitting diode (LED). The transmission unit 191 of the transmission unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transparent portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136. And. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided on the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod (not shown) that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod. Equipped with a launching mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play a game according to this configuration. Pay out the ball to the person.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength with which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player, the normal drawing start port 228 and the second special figure start port 232, which will be described later, and the second It can be divided into 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area) provided with the first special drawing start port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124 is the second. A game ball that is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the special figure start port 232, and conversely, rolls in a second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure start port 232. 1 It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board of the right-handed machine, but can be widely applied to the pachinko machine provided with the general game board.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, it is sufficient that the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the mode. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device also shown in FIG. 3 The left end side portion of the 208N overlaps the front side portion of the right end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be located on the left side of the screen). Further, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be located at a distance). Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions in which they come into contact with each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine equipped with only one or a pachinko machine equipped with only two. It may be a pachinko machine equipped with one or more. Further, the positional relationship of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device referred to here means that at least a part (may be only a part or a whole) of the display screen can be in a transmissive state, that is, can be transparent. It is a possible device. In other words, it is a device capable of changing the amount of light transmitted in at least a part of the display screen. As a specific configuration, a known configuration may be used, and for example, a liquid crystal cell, a shutter (adjustment means), and a light source are arranged in order from the front side. A liquid crystal cell is a light that passes by filling a liquid crystal substance between two transparent glass substrates provided with transparent electrodes facing each other with a gap between them and applying a voltage to the transparent electrodes to change the orientation state of the liquid crystal. It changes the state of. The liquid crystal cell is driven and controlled according to the acquired image data to display an image. The shutter is configured to be able to switch between a closed state in which it becomes cloudy and an open state in which it becomes transparent. As the shutter, for example, a so-called liquid crystal shutter can be used. That is, the shutter is configured by arranging two-dimensionally elements that transmit (open state) and block (closed state) light by causing an arrangement change of liquid crystal molecules by applying an electric field to a liquid crystal substance or removing an electric field. The closed state of the shutter is a state in which the light source functions as a backlight of the liquid crystal cell, and the open state of the shutter is a state in which an accessory or the like arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is passed through the liquid crystal cell to the front side. It is in a state where it can be visually recognized from. The accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described later. This shutter is controlled so that only an arbitrary part can be opened, but it may be controlled so that only a predetermined part can be opened. It is also possible to open the entire surface. In addition, the liquid crystal cell and the shutter are shared to partially create a transparent state and an opaque state, and an image can be displayed (reproduced) in the opaque state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the transmissive state. May be.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may also be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a lens cut in the transmission region. An irradiation means (light emitter) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light emitted from the irradiation means is reflected forward at the lens cut portion to determine a transmission region. It is configured so that it can be made to look like it is emitting light with the pattern of. For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern that imitates a character's face and a lens cut that has a pattern that imitates an effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 will be described later.

The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here, they are configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display can be displayed. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured so as to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix. Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here. These first special figure display device 212 and second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball will enter the starting port 228 by hitting the right side. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

Only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special drawing start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the ball will enter by hitting the right side. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure start port 232 is reached. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second feature, which is a variable starting area, is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is a fixed starting area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. The central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is arranged under the second special figure starting opening 232, and the ball is entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are sometimes called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 keeps the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. It is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one of the states) to the other, and when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variable game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. It should be noted that, in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if it is slightly opened, it may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

According to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right side. Hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player, and in a non-electric support state, left hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable). Win a prize at the winning opening 235) or the starting port (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), without winning any winning opening or starting port, or at the normal drawing starting port 228. It reaches the out port 240 only by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, the above-mentioned three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, which decorative symbol the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify it. Further, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield all of. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both a shielding means and an effect movable means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of executing the advance / retreat operation and the transmissive portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable means.

Further, as the effect movable means, a family crest accessory 224E (see FIG. 46 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest accessory 224E is arranged at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest accessory 224E starts operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the initial position, the family crest accessory 224E is more difficult for the player to see than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is controlled by the control means (for example, the main control means (300), the first sub control means (400), and the second sub control means (500). ))), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One unit including the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, or the like. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. Various solenoids 332 that open and close the drive circuit 330 and predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234, and the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in the above is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current position of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. , Detection signals from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, and the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. Is read out from the sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display three decorative symbols. A VDP434 (video display processor) for displaying an image is connected to each of the devices 208L to N.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward operation, transmission unit 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, Yashiro accessory 224F, general accessory 224Fb, family crest accessory 224E) are provided. Based on the drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from various movable means sensors 424. The sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191. Although 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various movable means 136,6. 191,224Fa, 224Fb, 224E may be controlled, or one of the sub-control units may control both.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 also controls the display of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, even when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may send a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub-control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit (not shown in FIG. 4), and the DC current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5V). ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power supply management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error, a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraudulent act, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT3141. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovered, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to check whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 The types of special drawings and general drawings to be stopped and displayed will be explained. FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stopped symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. After that, a definite display is performed to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec).

Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the end of the final display after the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the special figure The period from the stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 to the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. FIG. 5A shows 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special figure G" and "special figure H" are "dare to be". By providing "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is also provided with a symbol other than the “special figure A” as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, the order of "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch the display with. At the beginning of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed (scroll display) for each symbol display area. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

Further, among the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, one decorative symbol display device or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices has a fifth symbol. May be displayed. The fifth symbol is a display of decorative symbols smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b) may be reduced, or the number may be different from the display mode of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b). When the fifth symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N also display the symbol. It is a kind of means. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fifth symbol is displayed in an area outside the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is in the variable display or the stop display.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure, "Public figure A" which is a hit symbol and "Public figure B" which is a missed symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6A, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, for each special figure 1 and 2, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, and a random number counter at the time of a small hit Special figure determination random number counter Initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holds, the random value for determining the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the special figure at the time of loss are determined for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The random value for use, the hit / fail pre-judgment result, the special figure pre-judgment result, the hit / fail judgment result, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, the reserved storage units of the special figures divided into the maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be held are separately set in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the hold storage unit of the special figure 1, the random value for determining the special figure 1 big hit, the random value value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit, the random value value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit, and the random value value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of loss. These four random value values are set as one set, and one set of each set of these four random value values is stored in each area in the winning order (holding order). Further, in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random value, the small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and the lost special figure 2 determination are stored. The four random values of the random values are set as one set, and these four random values are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, first, as the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initially set, and various types are stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT314, setting of initial values, etc. are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT314. Next, the value of the counter of the WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 has the power supply management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to the WDT process, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the initial process is performed. Make setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a thirth). 1 Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to RAM 308, and the like.

Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value update process here, there are three initial values for generating the initial values of the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of loss. Update the value generation counter. After the completion of this basic random number initial value update process, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the effect random number update process is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for determining timer numbers for special figures and normal figures, and all of these counters determine timer numbers that can take values in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value for. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After the completion of this effect random number update process, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every about 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, and the WDT314 is periodically (for example, once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt). ) Restart.

First, in step S201, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined prize determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before the previous time, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). (Information indicating), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or is normal. Figure It is determined that the start port 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. It is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and for example, every time the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of a big hit makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of a big hit. The same applies to other random number counters.

In step S207, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

Subsequently, the winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) in which the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize. If, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, the jackpot determination random value and various special figure determination random values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) obtained from the random value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a processed value of the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the random number counter for determining a special figure provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information derivation means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area according to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of the special figure provided in the RAM 308. The hold storage unit of this special figure has a predetermined upper limit number of start information derived based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 (here, four). It corresponds to an example of a start information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random value values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure. In this case, the temporary area is started. The information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reserved special figures is incremented by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding means.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 and the number of reserved normal figure variable games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the normal figure winning random number at that timing The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in the random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for the special figure, as the normal figure winning random number value which is the starting information.

Further, in this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to reach the first special figure starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning opening 234, or the right variable winning opening 235. When the winning (winning ball) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the central variable. Winning reception information indicating whether or not there is a winning (winning ball) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of the start information of the special figure or the start information of the normal figure, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the look-ahead process is called. In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the previously executed look-ahead process. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds so far (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt processing, which is referred to as the old hold number), and the CPU 304 stores the number of holds. The number of holds at the time of executing the current look-ahead process that has undergone the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the number of old holds, and it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased. If the number of holds has not increased, this look-ahead process ends without pre-reading the start information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increasing, the increase in the random number value for determining the jackpot of special figure 1 in the holding storage unit of special drawing 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the special feature in the holding storage unit of special drawing 2 is read. Fig. 2 Pre-read the increase in the random value for jackpot determination. As for the look-ahead here, only the increase is read ahead, but all may be read ahead. Note that the look-ahead here means that the start information is read before the hit / fail judgment (final lottery), but in the subsequent look-ahead processing, the word look-ahead is used as the result of the win / fail judgment (final lottery). ) May be used to mean reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in a control state of either a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or a special figure high probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Being in a special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change flag. When this probability fluctuation glag is set to on, the special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to off, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-determination table used in the look-ahead processing. In this hit / fail pre-determination table, a random number range is defined separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is preliminarily determined. Determine which random number range in the table to belong to. That is, with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random value is in a predetermined numerical range. Occasionally, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "big hit", and in other cases, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "miss". In the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is performed again using the hit / miss judgment table having the same contents as the hit / miss pre-judgment table. The determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination.

If the result of the pre-judgment is "big hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the random value for determining the special figure 1 in the special figure 2 is stored. Special figure 2 at the time of big hit Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-judgment is "small hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of a small hit in the hold storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the hold memory of the special figure 2 is stored. Special figure 2 for small hits in the department Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-determination of whether or not the result is "missing", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the random value for determining the special figure 1 in the special figure 2 is stored. Special figure 2 at the time of loss Pre-read the random value for determination. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure pre-determination table used in the look-ahead processing. The special figure pre-judgment table defines a random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. 5 (a), and the read-ahead special figure. The special figure pre-determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained depending on which random number range the drawing determination random number value belongs to. It should be noted that the determination result of the special figure here is also the result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. ..

The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-judgment using the pre-read start information are executed before the pass / fail judgment (final lottery) of the special figure-related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first start information look-ahead means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination random value and various types. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the random value for determination in FIG. 2 corresponds to an example of the second start information pre-reading means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination is performed. The main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the random number value and various special figure 2 determination random value values corresponds to an example of the second pre-determination means.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each hold. Has been done. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (also referred to as information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit.

If the number of holds has not increased, the look-ahead information "no hold" is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit. Further, in the look-ahead processing, when the jackpot game is in progress, or when the current control state is the electric support state (the time saving flag is on), the look-ahead and advance judgment of the start information of the special figure 1 are performed. However, in these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the pre-read special figure 1 has not been performed is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Remember in. That is, it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support based on the fact that the ball has entered the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 in which the state is a fixed starting area) in which the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided. The pre-judgment based on the start information is not performed, and the notification of the pre-judgment result (pre-reading notice) is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is guaranteed. In addition, although the start information itself is not pre-read, the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-judgment and the result notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the pre-judgment are performed, but the pre-judgment result (Pre-reading notice) may not be given.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the winning determination process in step S209 is followed by the general diagram-related process (step S211). In this normal map-related process, first, as the normal map state update process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state is performed. For example, in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the value of the above-mentioned normal symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. conduct. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are processed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is performed so that the display mode is one of the normal figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c). Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal drawing-related processing here but also in various processing. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the lost symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed winning symbol is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is lost, the normal map loss flag is turned on. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive.

Subsequently, in this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure fluctuation game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by a random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, a special figure-related process (step S213) is performed following the normal figure-related process in step S211 described above. In this special figure-related process, first, the special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then the special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process). Processing). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), in the special figure related lottery process described later. Based on the special figure determination result (the stop symbol mode of the special figure), the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). FIG. D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first lost symbol (special symbol) A definite display of any one of the symbol I) and the first lost symbol (special diagram J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In that case, the time reduction flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is changing. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state) or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is set to the non-electric support state (first approach rate control state) when it is in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (during the special game state).

In addition, a symbol indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The processing is terminated after the special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

The RAM 308 also has a jackpot flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the jackpot flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, an image notifying the player that a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the jackpot game is to be started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to wait for the period of time. Further, in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233), 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the open state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2351, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 or the right side of the central variable winning opening 234 is used. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and is provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit. An effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image notifying the player that the game is to be ended is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the jackpot gaming state (during the special gaming state). It corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door members 2341 and 351. get.

Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to on at the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is "special figure A" or "special figure C" in the special figure lottery process described later. .. When the special figure determination result is "special figure E", only the probability change flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to on. Further, when the special figure determination result is "special figure B" or "special figure D", only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the number of electric support times to 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the approach rate control state, which is the state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start area) is controlled. It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-electric support state which is the approach rate control state and the electric support state which is the second approach rate control state.

Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a loss flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 2 is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next process without doing anything.

When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process described above is completed, the special figure-related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure-related lottery process, first, the special figure 2 related process (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed, and then the special figure 1 process (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at the same timing (a predetermined trigger). When the start information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 230 in S209), and the start information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start opening 232. Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize at the second special figure start port 232. The notification of the result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230, and the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure are provided as the start information in which the lottery is not performed. If only the start information of special figure 1 remains among the start information of 2 and the start information of special figure 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of special figure 2. The notification of the lottery result is performed before the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of the special figure 1. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (win / fail determination means).

In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery (win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined winning / failing determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure fluctuation display or the stop display, and if either display is being performed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. Return, if it is not in any of the displays, it is determined whether it is set while the special figure is operating or not, and if it is set while the special figure is operating, the timer interrupt process of the main control unit If it is set while the special figure is not operating, it means that the hit / fail judgment prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined pass / fail judgment condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is greater than 0. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, and if it is 1 or more, a predetermined hit / fail determination condition is satisfied.

If the predetermined hit / fail judgment condition is satisfied, the random value for one set of the start information stored in the past from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random value). , The random value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of a big hit, the random value value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of a small hit, and the random value value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss) (Set of numerical values) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 and the start information is further stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the Nth oldest start information is held in the special figure 2. This means that it is set as the N-1th oldest start information in the storage unit. Also, the number of holds stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by 1. One set of random numbers from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and loss The main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition means.

Next, a hit / fail determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a winning / failing determination table. The contents of the pass / fail determination table are the same as the contents of the pass / fail pre-determination table described above. In this hit / fail judgment process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the random number value for the special figure 2 jackpot judgment is set in the hit / fail determination table according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which random number range of the above, a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" is derived as a winning / failing determination result. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Derivation of a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" corresponds to a win / fail determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the win / fail determination process here corresponds to a lottery means (win / fail determination means). Corresponds to one example. In addition, the "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific hit / fail judgment result.

When the execution of the pass / fail judgment process is completed, the process proceeds to the symbol determination process of the special figure. A special drawing determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure pre-determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the winning / failing determination result is "big hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table. The special figure determination result is determined to be one of "special figure A" to "special figure F". In addition, when the winning / failing determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the special figure 2 determination random number value at the time of small hit belongs. Determined to be "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the result of determining whether or not the result is "missing", the result of determining the special figure is set to "special" based on which random number range in the table for determining the special figure belongs to the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of losing. It is decided to be "Fig. I" or "Special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special symbol corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

Following the symbol determination process of the special figure, the variation display period in the variation stop display of the special figure is determined in the variation time determination process. In this fluctuation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation, but it may be the timing for acquiring the start information. The timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts to change the symbol to when the stop symbol indicating the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed, that is, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner. Although it represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), it may be the fluctuation table time period of the decorative symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, which is a super-shortened special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 is that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 5 seconds, which is a shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents to be. It should be noted that determining the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 3 has no reach.

The timer 4 indicates that the special symbol variation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The normal reach generally means that decorative symbols having the same two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are stopped and displayed (strictly speaking, temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed). ), The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is in a variable display state, that is, the variable display symbol display area is a specific symbol (stop-displayed symbol display area). If a stop display (third stop or final stop) is displayed (a symbol equal to), a predetermined combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a normal reach with a special variation display added to improve the effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, and the like, and when the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. NS. The probability that the timer 8 will be selected is much lower than the probability that another timer will be selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the premier reach.

The term "reach" simply means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

This reach is performed after the hit / fail judgment is performed so that the result of the hit / miss judgment (final lottery) in the special figure-related processing becomes a specific hit / fail judgment result (a predetermined result in which the player has a high advantage). It is a notice effect that notifies the player in advance before notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment, and whether or not to perform the reach is determined after the hit / miss judgment is made.

In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for determining the timer number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holds, the number of holds in the current special figure 2 can be used in addition to the random number for determining the timer number. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

The timer number representing the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Before the special figure lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning determination process S209), the special figure pre-determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers which are one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on or by a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and here, the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined even if the lottery is not performed. .. Further, the timer selection table may be selected in this special figure lottery-related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

Subsequently, in the special drawing-related processing, the special drawing 1-related lottery processing is performed. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process of replacing "special figure 2" with "special figure 1" in the content explained in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, the explanation thereof is described. Omit.

With the above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B is completed, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission processing (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Types (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of winning rounds specified command, large winning opening opening command, large winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type), such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a normal figure hold increase command, which can specify the type of the command.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control status (information indicating the setting status of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and information indicating the timer number. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command. , Information indicating the control state, etc., and in the case of a command for specifying the number of hit rounds, information indicating the control state, the number of hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a central variable winning port 234 has won a prize. Includes the presence or absence of a prize, the presence or absence of a prize in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, the information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), the information indicating the control state, the information indicating the timer number, and the hold, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being played is set. In the above-mentioned general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of reserved first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game start command. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Upon receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays an image notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the end of the jackpot game is completed, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The jackpot game ends. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as the command data of the large winning opening opening command. .. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, and the reserved first special figure variable game are used as the command data of the large winning opening closing command. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games and the like is set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, the special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, and the control state. Information representing the above, and information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure pre-judgment result) are set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command general command hold increase process is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, information indicating the control status is set in the command data of the hold increase command. Further, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as a command related to the normal map, a normal map fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal map has started is also transmitted. From the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a command to stop the fluctuation of the normal figure indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal figure has stopped, and a pair of blade members 2321 have started to open. It is also possible to send an electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the winning rounds based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

Further, in this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and the bit 7 is the strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that the data is set), and the bit 6 is the power-on information. (If it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after the power is turned on.) Bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are after encryption processing. The number of withdrawal requests is shown.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read out, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored, and the front frame door is opened. When an error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the presence / absence of the lower plate full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special drawing start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, but before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to the original register. Set or set interrupt permission. Also, before returning, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when it detects that the power supply is cut off), it returns to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery. A specific variable or stack pointer for this purpose is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power cut processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed, and then the main control unit main processing is restored. May be good.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. The effect involving the operating means, which will be described below, is also controlled by this effect control process. That is, when a symbol variation start command including information on the symbol variation time is received, whether or not to execute an effect involving the operation means according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined by the lottery process and executed, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. Image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read out here, and for the movable means control, the effect read out here by the second sub-control unit 500. A control command according to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 is pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected as a result of the determination here, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or pressing the chance button 136. When the operation is valid, a process of preparing the effect data corresponding to the operation reception effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read in step S309, this The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, a control command related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, , Set to output this control command, and return to step S303. If a door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with the timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

The above description has been the image reproduction process for the transmissive liquid crystal display device, but the CPU 404 controls the transmissive liquid crystal display device to increase the amount of light transmitted through the display screen only partially or completely. Also do. If this control is not performed in the transmissive liquid crystal display device, the image is displayed (reproduced) on the display screen in the initial state. On the other hand, in the region where the amount of light transmitted is increased by performing this control, the accessory or the like arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device can be easily visually recognized from the front side through the region. However, even if this control is not performed, depending on the color (for example, yellow, white, etc.) of the image reproduced on the display screen, the accessory arranged on the back side may be visible.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control process here, from the first sub-control unit 400, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward operation, transparent unit 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction, and eight-generation accessory that can move up and down). When a control command related to 224Fa, a general character 224Fb, and a family crest character 224E that can move up and down is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written in parentheses next may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following figures).

In FIG. 9, of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the central portion of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-shaped image showing the position of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 208e. This frame-shaped image is always displayed, but when the display conditions are satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, and a reach effect is performed. It may be displayed only when it is not displayed. It should be noted that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9A. All of these four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed as black circles, and the display of the white circles by the dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or the start of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure is suspended, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically that of the special figure variation game. It is the same number as the number on hold. However, before and after the hold digestion, there may be a timing when the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes a hold icon of special figure 1 and a hold icon of special figure 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be a display area for each of both icons. In addition, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. Animations related to the hold icon include, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the order of the hold changes due to the previous hold being exhausted, and the hold is held. The movement animation executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), the change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc., the hold is digested. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and save animation executed when the hold icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is saved when the hold of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine. And so on. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the above animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease in hold or change in the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the above animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed length animation) can be given as an example. It should be noted that each animation of increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

One variable icon can be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variable icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the variable icon display area 208e, the moving icon is called a variable icon, or the variable icon is expressed as moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing.

Animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon include the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and the variable icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. There is a movement animation that moves the icon as a variable icon, and a change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and performed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

Animations related to the variable icon include a standby animation executed during the execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the variable icon is deleted after the special figure variable game ends, and a variable icon. There is a change animation or the like that is executed when the display mode of is changed in the middle. These animations may be combined with each other and performed at the same time. In addition, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation or the changing animation.

It should be noted that both the hold icon and the variable icon described above correspond to the icons related to the symbol variable display.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display), and white indicates that the lost symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display). Indicates that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

Further, in FIG. 9, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are shown. It is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 9, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 has a white display indicating the white lighting state or the extinguishing state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which the chance button 136 is urged to be pressed. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Further, although it is set to "lighting" here, it may be "blinking" (hereinafter, the same applies).

The background image of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes prepared. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a disjointed pattern. A certain "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Four of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1. The variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 9B, the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are continuously updated (variable display) in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and there are three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) in the hold icon display area 208f in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Is displayed, and the star-shaped variable icon c is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Of the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in the figure (a), the hold icon h1 having the earliest start winning timing becomes a variable icon, and the variable icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to the changing display (gray).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced to the left corner and is in the reach state by the number 3. ..

In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that predicts the development to super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that predicts the type of super reach that is developing. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and an operation of the chance button 136 are performed. The arrow display 136b and the character display "press" as a promotion display prompting (press), and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. Are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9 (d) starts to light in red to encourage pressing.

In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which had been lit in red until then, is switched to lit in white or turned off.

When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice suggesting whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display "CHANGE" interrupts the background image so as to overlap, and then develops into Super Reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). doing. The character "Super Reach A" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), indicating that the production of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the production display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Further, when the effect display of Super Reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and become invisible. On the other hand, the frame-shaped image showing the positions of the fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the variable icon display area 208e continues to be displayed. The fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the frame-shaped image may also be erased to make them invisible. Super Reach A is not a super reach with a confirmed jackpot, and just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean that it will be a jackpot. In addition, even if a display called "CHANGE" that is expected to develop into a super reach is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. In some cases. Further, the display "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 9 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g') showing another example following from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as "sorry", and then "sorry" is displayed. As shown in the figure (h'), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is lost. The combination is displayed as stopped. Even if the message "Sorry" is displayed, it may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state in which the execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated (operation valid state). However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission unit 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 10A shows that the chance button 136 and the transmission unit 191 are in their respective initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission portion 191 is also in a state of being substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be vibrable only at the pushed position.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 rotates about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part from the initial position and tilts forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10B, it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Further, the transmitting portion 191 may rotate in small steps in the front-rear direction as a strong vibration having a large vibration width. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state of the transmissive portion 191 (second state) shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state at the initial position (first state) shown in FIG. 10A. The player can operate the transparent unit 191 by manually pushing it toward the initial position, and the transparent unit 191 corresponds to an example of the operating means. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission unit 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

FIG. 10C shows how the chance button 136 has begun to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, FIG. 3D shows how the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in multiple stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates in the lateral direction or the vertical direction in the advanced (protruded) state. At this time as well, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 may be one that automatically retreats toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

The vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may be functions that are exhibited only in a certain set state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or a switch setting on the game clerk side. That is, depending on the set state, it may not vibrate at all, or it may vibrate only partially.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Here, as the operating means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be referred to as the operating means A, and the transmissive portion 191 will be described as the operating means B. Comparing the operating means A and the operating means B here, the operating means B is an operating means larger than the operating means A (an operating means having a large operating surface), and the operating means A can be operated even at the initial position, but the operation is performed. There is a difference that the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, but the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, and both may be operating means of the same size, or the initial position may be the same. It may be an operating means that can be operated together, or it may be an operating means that cannot be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be good.

Further, the operating means described as the transparent unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operating means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is a big hit than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectations are high. Further, although the function A is provided with both, the function B is provided only with the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at the operating position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operating means B is inferior in the number of functions to the operating means A.

However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

The number of functions may be the same in the operating means A and the operating means B.

FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is "liquid crystal", the operation data in the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb and the family crest accessory 224E is "movable means", and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is "movable means". "Sound", the frame lamp 122, the LED, and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operating means A is displayed as "vibe". “...” in the figure indicates omission of data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in 1 is "E0", and this "E0" indicates that it does not vibrate. Production No. The data of the "vibe" in 2 is "E1", and this "E1" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, according to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of the "vibe" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 3 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production No. The data of 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because there are cases where each effect data of "liquid crystal display", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" can be used as the effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The effect according to each effect data of "liquid crystal display", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in the data of 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the production No. The data of 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before the operation of the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal display" is data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B By the operation of, the production No. When reading the data of 2, the data of the "vibe" is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as the "liquid crystal display". In addition, the production No. 2 data and production No. When the data of "liquid crystal" is different from the data of 3 at least as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the production No. Not the data of No. 3, but the production No. It is necessary to read the data of 2.

The effect data related to the operating means B may also be called when the operating means A is operated, and after the operating means A is operated, the "liquid crystal display", the "movable means", and the effect data related to the operating means B The effect according to each effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing of the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), in order from the top, the “operation means B-related effect” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191), and the operation means B is operated. When the operation means B related effect is started, the "operation means B operation enabled state", the "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B has been operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136) The "operation means A-related effect" that is started in response to the operation, the "operation means A operation enabled state" that the operation means A-related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A are operated. The "operation means A operation" indicating that is shown. The "operation means B-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. Further, the "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the "operation means A-related effect" may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. Note that the notification prompting the operation of the operation means B may or may not be performed during the "operation means B operation valid state", and the operation may be performed even during the "operation means A operation valid state". A notification prompting the operation of the means A (operation promotion notification) may or may not be performed. If these notifications are given, the player can know that the operation is in the valid state, but if not, each operating means becomes a so-called back button.

In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B was not operated while the operation means B operation was enabled, but the operation means B-related effect was started at the same time as the end of the operation means B operation enable state. As described above, the "operation means B-related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The "operation means B-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means B-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operating means A, the operating means A-related effect is started at the same time as the operation means B-related effect is started without going through the "operating means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operating means A. .. As described above, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The "operation means A-related effect" may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means A-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the operating means B is operated and the operating means B is operated while the operating means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operating means B operation enabled state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operating means A, the operating means A-related effect starts at the same time as the operation means B-related effect starts without going through the "operating means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operating means A. Has been done. In this example as well, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated while the operation means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operation means B operation enable state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operating means A, the operating means A-related effect starts at the same time as the operation means B-related effect starts without going through the "operating means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operating means A. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 12 (c), the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect. The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of the operating means A ends first, and after the vibration of the operating means A ends, the vibration of the operating means B ends.

The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. You may. On the contrary, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. good. Further, the end time may be the same, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. On the contrary, the operation means A-related effect may start first, then the operation means B-related effect may start, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together. ..

Further, when the operation means B-related effect is executed without operating the operation means B as described with reference to FIG. 12A, for example, the operation means B-related effect is effective for the operation means B operation. In the mode in which the operation means is executed from the start of the state until the first time elapses, it is possible to configure the operation means B so that the earlier the operation means B is operated, the longer the execution time of the operation means B-related effect is. become able to.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c) represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed, the operation is performed. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The judge production here is a judge production for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of the first production. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Further, the first effect is not a notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the shaking fluctuation display. Eventually, the shaking fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13A, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol has already been determined, so that the vibration fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. The execution period of the operation means A is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the execution period of the shortened shaking fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result related to the profit of the player such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is terminated so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during the big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The judge in the judge production here is a judge who is linked to whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L notifies that the specific winning opening (for example, the V winning opening) is aimed at in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this notification. Eventually, the next round will start, and it will be notified again that the specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed at.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum permissible time for one round has already been determined, so the specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period for notifying the fact is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period for the notification.

As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds in which the specific winning opening should be aimed at are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed. For this reason, the round that should aim at the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the production such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished, and the player I am trying to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

Further, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operating means A does not change and is constant even if the operating timing of the operating means B changes.

The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the operation means B operates while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed. Then, the operation means A (chance button 136) is started to vibrate, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like starts the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The vibration of the operating means A continues until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, the vibration of the operating means A also ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation display is started, the number of pseudo-reams becomes the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this nth pseudo-variation display.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. , The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbol ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 13 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

Summarizing with the above description, the operating means A can vibrate at least during the period when the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. Further, the operating means A may be vibrable during at least a part of the period during which the judge effect corresponding to one example of the first effect is being executed. For example, the vibration may end at the same time as the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even after the end of the judge effect, or the vibration may end before the end of the judge effect. Further, the vibration period in which the operating means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means B and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means A. The final judge effect is a judge who decides whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a judge who indicates the end of the reach effect (the final stage reach effect such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is the period during which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes long, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes long. Further, even if the operating means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started according to the operation of the operating means B, and the vibration of the operating means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are the same, and the period length between the two becomes zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period of time. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136).

In addition, while the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means B, the vibration of the operating means A is upward when it is started by operating the operating means A after the operation of the operating means B. If the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operating means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes longer.

Subsequently, the accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described.

FIG. 14 is a view showing a movable accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 14A, the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. The first movable accessory 251 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14A. The character "Change" is displayed on the first movable accessory 251 and an LED is built in. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14A has a second display mode (for example, a blue display mode). It is lit. The LED is provided with a plurality of types of lighting modes and blinking modes. The first movable accessory 251 is a kind of effect means, and is also a moving means capable of moving from the initial position to the first position via the second position.

Here, for example, the first display mode corresponds to a white display mode, the second display mode corresponds to a blue display mode, the third display mode corresponds to a green display mode, and the fourth display mode corresponds to a green display mode. The red display mode corresponds to the red display mode, the fifth display mode corresponds to the gold display mode, and the sixth display mode corresponds to the rainbow-colored display mode. Various LEDs, various icons, and various displays can be displayed in the first display mode to the sixth display mode. Of the display modes of the first display mode to the sixth display mode, the larger the number is, the more advantageous the display mode is for the player. For example, the larger the number is, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is, or the easier it is to start a certain effect. What has been described here is the same for each of the following production examples. For example, the second display mode is blue lighting or light emission, and the fourth display mode is red lighting or light emission.

A fourth movable accessory 254 is arranged on the back side of the first movable accessory 251. The fourth movable accessory 254 is provided with LEDs 2541 to 2543 in each of the upper, middle, and lower stages, and in the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14A, all of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the second display mode. doing. The upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 can be individually turned on, off, or blinking, and a plurality of types of lighting modes and blinking modes are prepared for each of these three LEDs 2541 to 2543. There is also a lighting mode and a blinking mode that are a set of. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14A, all of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the second display mode. The fourth movable accessory 254 is also a kind of effect means, and is also a moving means that can be moved from the initial position. However, the fourth movable accessory 254 may be fixedly arranged without moving. Further, since the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 are arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction, they do not collide even if they move at the same time, but both 251,254 are moved in the front-rear direction. They may be aligned and arranged. In this case, the movement may be controlled so that the two 251,254 do not interfere with each other, or the movable regions may not overlap in the first place. Alternatively, the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 may not be executed at the same time. That is, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the visible state, the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the invisible state and is turned off. The fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved or may remain stationary as long as it is invisible. When the fourth movable accessory 254 is in a visible state, the first movable accessory 251 is turned off. The first movable accessory 251 may be moved or may remain stationary as long as it is invisible.

FIG. 14B is a diagram showing how the first movable accessory 251 moves. In FIG. 14B, the first movable accessory 251 shown by a solid line represents the first movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the first movable accessory 251 is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (a position on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the first movable accessory 251 is the initial position thereof. It is possible to move to the second position and the first position which overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second position is on the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first position is on the back side of the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Become. In FIG. 14B, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is represented by a alternate long and short dash line.

The first movable accessory 251 can be stopped at an arbitrary position between the initial position and the first position, but may be stopped only at the second position. Further, it may be possible to move beyond the first position to the back side of the upper part of the left symbol display area 208a.

In a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special symbol (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 is the first. In the case of being in the 1st position, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of being in the 2nd position. The details of the first notice effect referred to here will be described later, but for example, it is a notice (so-called normal notice) related to the icon variation display currently being performed, such as a pseudo continuous effect, a super reach effect, and the like. It may be a change effect of the display mode of the variable icon. However, the production of the first notice may be the production of the look-ahead notice. Further, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 , The jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of being in the first position than in the case of being in the second position. That is, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit may be high. Further, even when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the effect of the first notice may be executed, and the jackpot symbol mode may be finally displayed. However, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the effect of the first notice does not have to be executed at all, and the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. Does not have to be at all.

The first movable accessory 251 may move or emit light even in the start effect of the big hit game.

FIG. 14C is a diagram showing how the fourth movable accessory 254 moves. In FIG. 14C, the fourth movable accessory 254 shown by the solid line represents the fourth movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable accessory 254 is also a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the initial position is a position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable accessory 254 can be moved from its initial position to the seventh position, the eighth position, and the ninth position, which overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position is on the back side of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 14C, the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position is represented by a alternate long and short dash line, and the fourth movable accessory in the ninth position is represented by a chain line. 254 is represented by a chain double-dashed line.

The fourth movable accessory 254 can be stopped at an arbitrary position between the initial position and the ninth position, but it may be stopped only at the seventh position and the eighth position. Further, the fourth movable accessory 254 may be movable in a position other than the position described with reference to FIG. 14 (c).

In a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special symbol (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory 254 is the third. In the case of the 8th position, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of the 7th position, and in the case of the 9th position, the above-mentioned first notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of the 8th position. 1 It is easy to perform the production of the notice. Further, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory 254 , The case of being in the 8th position may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the case of being in the 7th position, and the case of being in the 9th position is in the 8th position. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than in the case. Further, the fourth is more than the variation of the decorative symbol in which only the effect using the first movable accessory 251 is performed out of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254. It may be easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the effect using the movable accessory 254 is performed. That is, it is the relationship of the degree of expectation of the big hit, and only the effect using the first movable accessory 251 of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 was performed. Rather than the variation of the decorative symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol in which only the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 was performed. May be easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode. Alternatively, the relationship of the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the opposite of the relationship described here (the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 is easier to hit) (the effect using the first movable accessory 251). Is easy to hit).

The fourth movable accessory 254 may also move or emit light in the start effect of the big hit game.

As described above, the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIG. 14 are production examples described below in which these movable accessories are not particularly shown. , Applicable. For example, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the effect example shown in FIG. 40, and the effect example shown in FIG. 42, the first position, the second position, and the seventh position of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L The region corresponding to the ninth position may be partially transparent, and the first movable accessory 251 and / and the fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved to each position.

As one of the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, an effect of increasing the amount of light transmitted through a part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device (hereinafter, transmissive effect). ) Can be mentioned.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a stepwise flow of an example from a pseudo continuous effect to a big hit without performing a transparent effect.

In FIG. 15, of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Further, in order to distinguish between a state in which the transmission effect is performed and a state in which the transmission effect is not performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmission liquid crystal display device, a normal state (light) in which the transmission effect is not performed is performed. In the state where the transmission amount is low), the entire display screen is displayed in gray, and the area where the transmission effect is performed (the area where the light transmission amount is high) is displayed in white. Hereinafter, these things are the same up to FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 15A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area on which four pedestals are arranged is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. In this hold icon display area, one hold icon is displayed on each pedestal. At the timing shown in FIG. 15A, three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Has been done. The variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are all in the default display mode (first display mode: white circular display mode). On the other hand, only the first hold icon h11 has a second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the look-ahead notice. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. Nothing is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 15A, but the tutorial display unit TT1 may display not only the explanation display but also the notice display and the demo effect display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the background display of the sunny sky. The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by the stop display of the combination of the chance eyes. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 15A, the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the state of the fourth symbol display device 284a1,284a2 is shown in the upper right of each figure, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 is a quadrangle, and the variation of the special figure 1 During the display, it lights up in white, and during the stop display of FIG. 1, it lights up in a lost lighting mode (here, a gray lighting mode) or a jackpot lighting mode (here, a black lighting mode). Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 is circular and lights up in white during the variable display of the special figure 2, and the lost lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 2 ( Here, it lights in a gray lighting mode) or a jackpot lighting mode (here, a black lighting mode). Below that, the appearance of the chance button 136 is also shown. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 15A is lit in the first display mode.

In FIG. 15B, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15B, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display are displayed. High-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed in each of the regions 208c. Further, the first hold icon h11, which is the second display mode which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice in FIG. 15A, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in FIG. 15B. In FIG. 3B, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the second display mode, and is displayed in the display mode of the normal notice. When the variable icon h0 is displayed in the normal notice display mode, the transparent effect is more likely to be performed than when it is displayed in the default display mode. However, in the example shown in FIG. 15, the transparent effect is performed. I can't. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one shift, and in FIG. 15B, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are display modes of the default, are displayed.

In FIG. 15 (d), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol is a display indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in the left symbol display area 208a, and the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 15 (e), the re-variation in the pseudo-ream effect is started, and the character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. It should be noted that as the number of pseudo-reams increases, the degree of expectation of a big hit (reliability of a big hit) in the currently performed symbol variation display increases. That is, the character display representing the pseudo-ream number of "x3" has a higher expectation than the character display representing the pseudo-ream number of "x2".

In FIG. 15 (g), the decorative symbol of “continuation”, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in FIG. 15 (h), the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous production starts again. At the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "x3" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed.

In FIG. 15 (i), the pseudo continuous effect is finished and the super reach effect is started. The super reach production here is a swordsman reach production. In addition to this, there are the swordsman reach production and the princess discovery reach production, which will be described later, but the swordsman reach production has a higher expectation of a big hit than the swordsman reach production. In addition, the princess discovery reach production is also more expected to be a big hit than the chance reach production. In the swordsman reach production and the princess discovery reach production, the swordsman reach production may have a higher expectation of a big hit, or conversely, may be lower. As shown in FIG. 15 (i), when the swordsman reach effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the swordsman reach effect is started, the UI part UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed. Further, since the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, the hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this hold number display, the number on the left side (here, "2") represents the hold number of special figure 1, and the number on the right side (here, "0") represents the hold number of special figure 2. Furthermore, in the swordsman reach production, the background display changes.

In FIG. 15 (j), the main character, Tonosama YM, and the swordfighter KG, who plays the role of an enemy, are facing each other, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. The later state, that is, the state after pulling out the swords to each other and fighting, is displayed, but it is still unknown which one won.

In FIG. 15 (l), the button effect is started. The button production here corresponds to the final judge production that displays which of the lord YM and the swordsman KG won. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136, which has been lit in the first display mode, changes to the fourth display mode. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (l), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. The arrow display 136b and the character display of "blow" as the prompting display, and the remaining period meter display 136c as the display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. .. A part (both ends) of the remaining period meter display 136c overlaps a part of each of the lord YM and the swordsman KG.

The effect related to the chance button 136 is referred to as a button effect, but the button effect is an effect related to an operation means other than the chance button 136 (for example, the transparent unit 191 or the second chance button, the operation lever, etc.). The same applies to the following description.

As shown in FIG. 15 (l), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the button images and the like 136a to c disappear. , The scene where the lord YM collapsed is displayed. That is, the swordfighter KG, who plays the enemy role, wins, and the current symbol change display is lost. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the combination of loss ("6"-"7"-"6") fluctuates. When the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

Next, an example of a big hit will be described. The button effect is also started in FIG. 15 (l-1), which is a modification of FIG. 15 (l), but in the button effect here, the button image 136a is displayed in a large size, and a part of the button image 136a. However, it overlaps with a part of each of Tonosama YM and Swordsman KG. In this way, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed by the button effect, and depending on the display mode, the success rate of the effect (here, the probability that the lord YM wins) and the jackpot Expectations may change.

As shown in FIG. 15 (l-1), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (l-2), the button image or the like 136a ~ C disappears, the background display is once switched to the background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed in the upper left, and in the fifth symbol pd5 displayed in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of jackpots ("6"-" 6 ”-“ 6 ”) has begun to sway. The background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed on the upper left may be a background display for notifying that the lord YM will win, or a background display for notifying the confirmation of the big hit. Subsequently, the scene in which the swordsman KG collapsed is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m'). That is, the lord YM wins, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (n), the decorative symbol display is restored in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. However, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed. Further, the stop display is also performed in the fifth symbol pd5. Even if the confirmation display is performed, the display of the UI unit UI3 is not resumed (return display), but when the confirmation display is performed, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be resumed, and the confirmation display of the jackpot may be resumed. In that case, the return display may not be displayed, and in the case of the confirmation display of the loss, the return display may be displayed.

As described above, the effect example described with reference to FIG. 15 is an effect example in which the transparent effect is not performed, but when the variable icon is in the display mode of the normal notice, the transparent effect is always performed. Alternatively, in the case of a big hit, a transparent effect may be always performed. Further, even in the case of loss, a transparent effect may be performed. Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is performed without performing the transparent effect.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the transmission effect step by step.

Hereinafter, the differences from the example from the pseudo-continuous production to the big hit, which have been described with reference to FIG. 15, without the transparent effect being performed, will be mainly described, and the description of the common points may be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of chance eyes, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 16B, the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in an initial position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 16C, the first movable accessory 251 that was in the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 16C, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line. The first movable accessory 251 represented by this dotted line is in the extinguished state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is in a normal state (a state in which the amount of light transmission is low) in which the transmission effect is not performed as a whole, and the first movable accessory 251 in the extinguished state that has moved to the second position is on the front surface. It is invisible from the side. Depending on the color of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the normal state, the first movable accessory 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be visible although it is difficult to see. You may be able to do it. Also in the following description, invisible may include difficulty in visual recognition. Further, the second position may be the initial position of the first movable accessory 251.

In FIG. 16D, the transparent effect is started. Of the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16D, a region including an area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 in the second position from the front side is included. 2 Only the display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the amount of light transmitted is increased. That is, all of the first movable accessory 251 in the second position overlaps the second display area 208-2 from the front side. The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16D is in a transparent state, but does not have to be in a completely transparent state. Hereinafter, a state in which the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased even if the state is not completely transparent is not limited to the second display area 208-2, and is referred to as a transparent state for convenience. In the following explanation, the transparency (transparency) may be different even if the state is uniformly transparent. Further, in this example, only the second display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the light transmission amount is increased, but the light transmission amount is also increased in the areas other than the second display area 208-2. It may change to the specified state. That is, a state in which the amount of light transmitted is increased even in a display area other than the display area including the area located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device and overlapping from the front side with the effect means such as a movable accessory or a fixed accessory. This may be the same in each of the subsequent production examples. However, when there are a plurality of areas that change to a state in which the amount of light transmitted is increased, the effect means such as a movable accessory or a fixed accessory located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device overlaps from the front side. The display area including the area where the light is transmitted may be the area where the amount of light transmitted is the highest, or the amount of light transmitted may be increased to the same extent in any of the areas.

The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16D is a region larger than the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, but is the same size as the first movable accessory 251. May be good. Further, the second display area 208-2 is an area that overlaps the entire first movable accessory 251 in the second position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the first movable accessory 251 in the second position. You may. That is, it may be a region smaller than the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, or may be a region deviated from the front side of the first movable accessory 251. In FIG. 16D, the first movable accessory 251 in the light-off state in the second position is easily visible through the second display area 208-2 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In this example, after the first movable accessory 251 has moved to the second position, the second display area 208-2 has changed to the transparent state, but the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. At the same time, the second display area 208-2 may change to a transparent state. Further, in some cases, the area corresponding to the second display area 208-2 may be in a transparent state even before the first movable accessory 251 is located in the second position. Further, the second display area 208-2 may change to a transparent state as a part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, and may change to a transparent state even in a part or all of the jackpot game. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-2 may change to the transparent state before the transparent effect here, or may change to the transparent state after the transparent effect here. There may be. Further, during the period of change to the transparent state, the transparent effect here may be the longest, and if it is longer than the transparent effect here, it may be in another state, and the transparent effect here may be longer. May be the shortest, and the case where it is shorter than the transparent effect here may be another state.

The first movable accessory 251 can be lit in a display mode other than the second display mode, and can be driven in a plurality of types of modes such as blinking. Such a plurality of display modes (including a mode in which the lights are not lit) in the first movable accessory 251 are executions of subsequent effects (for example, pseudo continuous effect, super reach effect, judge effect, etc.). It may represent a probability or a jackpot expectation (reliability). In this example, after the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, as shown in FIG. 16E, the first movable accessory 251 lights up in the second display mode, but the second display At the same time that the area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, it may be lit in the second display mode. Further, the first movable accessory 251 may be lit in the second display mode even before the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state.

In FIG. 16 (f), the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, in FIG. 16 (g), the transmission effect is completed, and the second display area 208-2 is returned to a state in which the amount of light transmitted is low. Although the transparent state is continuous from FIGS. 16 (d) to 16 (f), it may be intermittently transparent, it may be intermittently transparent, or only when it is continuous. It may be. In each of the subsequent production examples, even if the transparent state is continuous over a plurality of stages, the transparent state may be intermittently transparent, or the transparent state may be intermittently transparent, or may be continuous. It may be only when As described above, the intermittent or continuous transparent state described here may be applied to all transparent effects, but may be applied only to a certain transparent effect.

Further, in the state of FIG. 16C, the button effect is started, and the button image or / is displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And the operation promotion display is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated while the button effect display is displayed, the transmissive effect is started in response to the operation, that is, the movable accessory located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display area including the area overlapping from the front side with the effect means such as a fixed accessory or a fixed accessory may be changed to a transparent state. Further, the size of the display area to be in the transparent state may be changed (for example, enlarged or reduced) according to the repeated hitting operation of the operating means such as the chance button 136. In addition, a long press operation or the like may be performed instead of the continuous striking operation, and any operation mode different from the normal single press operation may be used. Further, in this case, if the size of the display area changes to a certain size, it will be successful and the effect of the first notice may be started. For example, if the size of the display area is expanded to a certain size, it is successful, and in the case of failure, after the display area is expanded to a certain size (before it is expanded to a certain size), it returns to the opaque state. It may be in a (disappearing) mode. The various button effects described here can also be applied to the following production examples.

The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16 (g) is a state in which the transmission of light is completely blocked in this example, but it does not have to be a state in which the transmission of light is completely blocked. Hereinafter, a state in which the amount of light transmitted is relatively low even if the light transmission is not completely blocked is not limited to the second display area 208-2, and is referred to as an opaque state for convenience. In the following description, even if the state is uniformly opaque, the state changes depending on the hue of the image displayed in the second display area 208-2. For example, if an image having a yellowish hue or a whiteish hue is displayed, the back side may be visible to some extent even if it is in an opaque state. The opaque state is the initial state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but in some cases, the transparent state may be the initial state.

In this example, after the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, the second display area 208-2 is returned to the opaque state, but at the same time as the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, the second display area is turned off. 208-2 may return to an opaque state. Further, in some cases, the second display area 208-2 may return to the opaque state while the first movable accessory 251 is lit.

In FIG. 16H, the first movable accessory 251 that had been in the second position until then has returned to the initial position that is out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, it can be seen that the first movable accessory 251 moves from the second position to the initial position and the first movable accessory 251 moves. Although it is difficult or invisible, in some cases, the first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the initial position when the second display area 208-2 is in a transparent state. The moving first movable accessory 251 may be in a light-off state, or may be in a lit or blinking state in a second display mode or the like.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the transmission effect is executed in the state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the transmission effect is simulated as compared with the case where the transmission effect is executed in the state in which the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position. It is difficult to execute the continuous production (the production of the first notice), and the pseudo continuous production may be started. However, in this example, the pseudo continuous production is not started, and as shown in FIG. 16J, the first production is performed. On the decorative pattern display device 208L, a combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 7") is confirmed and displayed. According to the example shown in FIG. 16, it can be said that the notice of the variable icon according to the display mode of the normal notice was a false notice. Further, although the pseudo continuous effect may be lost even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it can be said that the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 16 (d) to 16 (f) was also a false notice.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a transparent effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position after the pseudo continuous effect is started.

Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the description using FIG. 16 may be omitted.

In FIG. 17B, the decorative symbol of “continuation”, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, the first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position ((d) in the same figure) during the first revariation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the second display area 208-2 is transparent. The state changes (FIG. (E)), and subsequently, in the second position, the first movable accessory 251 lights up in the second display mode (FIG. (f)). After that, while the first re-variation continued, the first movable accessory 251 was turned off (FIG. 17 (g)), and then the second display area 208-2 returned to an opaque state (FIG. 17 (h)). After becoming opaque, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position (Fig. (I)). In the pseudo-ream effect, the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit. However, in this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, and the number of pseudo-reams is not 3 times, but is shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in)) has a definite display of a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 7”). In some cases, the pseudo-continuous production continues up to the third time.

As described above, the transparent effect may be started even after the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the continuity (development degree) of the pseudo-continuous effect is determined depending on the place where the transparent effect is started. be able to. That is, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the production of the first notice is more likely to be continued than when it is in the second position. Here, the production of the first notice is a pseudo-continuous production, but it may be a production of a step-up notice, or a development production from normal reach to super reach.

FIG. 18 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position.

In FIG. 18B, the decorative symbol of “continuation”, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, the character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, during the first re-variation of the pseudo-continuous production, the first movable accessory 251 moves from the initial position to the first position via the second position (FIG. 18 (d)). .. The first movable accessory 251 may temporarily stop at the second position, or may move to the first position at once. Since the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, it is difficult or invisible to see how the first movable accessory 251 is moving.

In FIG. 18E, the transparent effect is started. Of the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18E, the first movable accessory 251 in the first position includes an area overlapping from the front side. 1 Only the display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state. That is, all of the first movable accessory 251 in the first position overlaps the transparent first display area 208-1 from the front side. The first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 18E is a region larger than the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, but is the same size as the first movable accessory 251. May be good. Further, the first display area 208-1 is an area that overlaps the entire first movable accessory 251 in the first position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the first movable accessory 251 in the first position. You may. That is, it may be a region smaller than the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, or may be a region deviated from the front side of the first movable accessory 251. In FIG. 18E, the extinguished first movable accessory 251 in the first position is easily visible through the first display area 208-1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In this example, after the first movable accessory 251 has moved to the first position, the first display area 208-1 has changed to a transparent state, but the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position. At the same time, the first display area 208-1 may change to a transparent state. Further, in some cases, the area corresponding to the first display area 208-1 may be in a transparent state even before the first movable accessory 251 is located in the first position. Furthermore, the first display area 208-1 may change to a transparent state as a part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, and may change to a transparent state even in a part or all of the jackpot game. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-1 may change to the transparent state before the transparent effect here, or may change to the transparent state after the transparent effect here. There may be. Further, during the period of change to the transparent state, the transparent effect here may be the longest, and if it is longer than the transparent effect here, it may be in another state, and the transparent effect here may be longer. May be the shortest, and the case where it is shorter than the transparent effect here may be another state.

In FIG. 18 (f), the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode, but at the same time that the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, it is lit in the second display mode. May be good. Further, the first movable accessory 251 may be lit in the second display mode even before the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. Further, the first movable accessory 251 can be lit in a display mode other than the second display mode as described above in the first position, and can be driven in a plurality of types of modes such as blinking.

After that, while the first re-variation continued, the first movable accessory 251 was turned off (FIG. 18 (g)), and then the first display area 208-1 returned to an opaque state (FIG. 18 (h)). After becoming opaque, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position (Fig. (I)).

In FIG. 18 (k), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swayed) again in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 18, since the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position (shown in FIG. 17). Compared to the example), the pseudo-continuous production (the production of the first notice) is easier to continue (develop), and in FIG. 18 (l), the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous production is started again, and the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. Is displayed with the character display of "x3" indicating the number of pseudo-runs.

Then, in FIG. 18 (m), the pseudo-continuous production is completed and the super reach production of the swordsman reach is started. The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in (o) displays the state after the protagonist YM and the swordsman KG played a sword, that is, the state after the swords were pulled out from each other and the game was played. The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in) shows a scene in which the swordsman KG collapsed. That is, the lord YM wins, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (q). Has been done. Even if the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, or even if the number of pseudo-reams is extended to three times, there may be a loss. However, when the transmission effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, a big hit may be made without fail.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the button effect shown in FIG. 15 (l) and FIG. 15 (l-1) is not started, but the button effect may be started (the same applies to the examples after FIG. 19). ). Also, when the button effect is started, it may be a big hit, or conversely, it may be lost.

Further, the fact that the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position may be a notice about the continuation of the pseudo continuous effect (the second temporary stop), or the super reach effect. It may be a notice that (for example, swordsman reach) will start.

Further, FIG. 18 (m') is a modified example of FIG. 18 (m). In the modified example shown in FIG. 18 (m'), the transparent effect is not executed during the pseudo continuous effect, but the transparent effect is executed during the super reach of the swordsman reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (m'), a part of the character display (“swordsman reach”) of the start effect of the swordsman reach overlaps with a part of the first display area 208-1. .. In addition, all of the first display area 208-1 and a part or all of the character display of "Swordsman Reach" may overlap, or the character display of "Swordsman Reach" may be reduced, or the first display area 208 may be displayed. -1 may be increased so that the entire character display of "Swordsman Reach" and a part or all of the first display area 208-1 overlap. As shown in FIG. 18 (m'), when the character display of "swordsman reach" and the first display area 208-1 overlap, a part of the character display of "swordsman reach" becomes invisible. That is, a part of the character display of "Swordsman Reach" becomes transparent, and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen behind the transparent part. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 18 (m') is lit in the second display mode.

In addition, a part of the character display of "Swordsman Reach" also overlaps with a part of the second display area 208-2, and when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" The second display area 208-2 may become transparent while the character display is displayed.

Further, if the first position of the first movable accessory 251 is changed from the upper position to the lower position of the middle symbol display area 208b, at least a part of the notice display by the change icon h0 of the display mode of the normal notice can be obtained. At least a part of the first display area 208-1 is overlapped, a part of the variable icon h0 is cut out, and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen in the back. In this case, even if the second position of the first movable accessory 251 is changed from the upper position to the lower position of the right symbol display area 208b, at least a part of the notice display by the change icon h0 of the display mode of the normal notice Then, at least a part of the second display area 208-2 does not overlap, and only the first display area 208-1 overlaps with the area where the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the normal notice is displayed.

In addition, when the number of pseudo-reams is the third re-variation (FIG. 18 (l)) and the swordsman reach is developed, the number of pseudo-reams is the second re-variation (FIGS. 18 (c) to (k)). ) Immediately before) and the re-variation (FIG. 18 (l)) in which the number of pseudo-reams is the third time, the transparent effect may be executed, or even if only one of them is used, the transparent effect is executed. good. That is, when a certain reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started after a plurality of revariations in the pseudo continuous effect, the transmission effect is executed by at least one revariation out of the plurality of revariations. It may be a configuration.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the transparent effect is executed even when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position and then the transparent effect is executed even when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. Is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 19 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of chance eyes, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 19C, the first movable accessory 251 moves from the initial position to the first position and is positioned in the first position in the off state. ing. In FIG. 19D, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and subsequently, in the first position, the first movable accessory 251 lights up in the second display mode (FIG. 19D). After that, before the pseudo continuous effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 is turned off (FIG. 19 (f)), and then the first display area 208-1 returns to an opaque state (FIG. 19 (g)). , The transparent effect ends. After the transmission effect in the first display area 208-1 is completed, in FIG. 19 (j), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swayed and fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pseudo-ream is generated. The effect is started, and in the figure (k), the revariation in the pseudo-ream effect is started, and the character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

During the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 lit in the second display mode in the second position becomes visible (FIG. 19). (M)). In FIG. 19 (g), after the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, the first movable accessory 251 becomes invisible or difficult to see, and after returning to the initial position once, the first movable accessory 251 becomes invisible or difficult to see. In some cases, it moves to the second position, in other cases it stays in the first position and moves to the second position by the timing of FIG. 19 (m), and as soon as the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. It may move to the second position. In this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, the number of pseudo-reams is not three, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 19 (o) has a combination of lost decorative symbols (““ "Decoration 6"-"Decoration 8"-"Decoration 7") is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 19 (m') shows an example different from that of FIG. 19 (m), in which the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state again during the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous production, and in the first position. The first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode is visible. In FIG. 19 (m'), since the transmission effect is executed again with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the second temporary stop is also performed. Specifically, it is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 18 (g) to 18 (q).

FIG. 20 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254.

20 (a) to 20 (h) are the same as those in FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (h), and the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position. .. That is, in FIGS. 20D to 20F, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position can be visually recognized.

As described above, the transparent effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, but in this example, the pseudo continuous effect is started. That is, in FIG. 20 (j), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in FIG. 20 (k), the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts. The character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-runs is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. As in the example here, even when the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, the first notice effect (here, the pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. However, the effect of the first notice may be started only when the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state.

Then, the darkening effect is started during the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect. In the darkening effect, the entire front screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes darker than before the darkening effect is started. Depending on the hue of the image displayed on the opaque first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, yellowish hue, white hue, etc.), the first movable accessory on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 are difficult to see, they may be visible, but when the darkening effect is started, even on the back side of the area where the yellowish or white shades are displayed. Even if there is, it tends to be invisible.

When the darkening effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started in the upper right. Further, the UI section UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and the variable icon h0 is also hidden. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position. In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line. In FIG. 20 (n), all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 represented by the dotted line are in the extinguished state.

In FIG. 20 (o), the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. The entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and a darkening effect is performed. However, the light from the upper LED 2541 passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is transmitted from the front side. , You can see how it is emitting light. The lighting is not limited to the second display mode, and may be lit by another display mode or may be blinking. In FIG. 20 (p), the upper LED 2541 is turned off.

The position of the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position. Further, in the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 20 (n) to 20 (p), the upper LED 2541 at a certain position overlaps from the front side. The fourth display area 208-4 including the existing area includes other areas (second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 20 (d), first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 19 (d), etc.). It also remains opaque. As described above, in FIG. 20 (o), the fourth display area 208-4 is in an opaque state, but the LED 2541 in the upper row is emitting light. The fourth display area 208-4 is represented by a alternate long and short dash line, but all of the upper LEDs 2541 at a certain position overlap with the fourth display area 208-4 from the front side. Further, the fourth display area 208-4 is a region larger than the upper LED 2541 at a certain position, but may be a region having the same size as the LED 2541. Further, the fourth display area 208-4 is an area that overlaps the entire upper LED 2541 at a certain position, but may be an area that overlaps only a part of the upper LED 2541 at a certain position. That is, it may be a region smaller than the upper LED 2541 at a certain position, or it may be a region deviated from the front side of the upper LED 2541.

The fourth display area 208-4 is an area different from the second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 20 (d), and is also a different area from the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 19 (d). be. However, since the fourth display area 208-4 is an area immediately to the left of the first display area 208-1, the fourth movable combination in the seventh position remains in the opaque state of the fourth display area 208-4. When the LED 2541 on the upper stage of the object 254 lights up, the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position because the LED 2541 itself on the upper stage and the fourth movable accessory 254 cannot be seen due to the fact that the darkening effect is in progress. In some cases, the player may be able to move to a position where the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is more likely to be executed, and make the player think that the light is being emitted.

In FIG. 20 (q), the fourth movable accessory 254 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 20 (r), the darkening effect is completed.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing stepwise examples and modified examples following from FIG. 20.

The left column of FIG. 21 shows an example continuing from FIG. In a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special symbol (during the display of the symbol variation), the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable combination in the seventh position. When the upper LED 2541 of the object 254 is lit, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than when the upper LED 2541 is not lit. The production of the first notice here is a super reach production by the chance reach production, in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the swordsman reach production. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), even in the super reach effect by the start-up reach effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the UI section UI3 also disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display changes in the Okkake Reach production.

In FIG. 21 (b), the lord YM is running toward the merchant EG who runs away with a lot of oval coins, and in the figure (c), the lord YM is quite close to the merchant EG, but the figure (d) Then, the merchant EG was missed, and the chance reach production ended in failure. Although the subsequent figures are omitted, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The middle column of FIG. 21 shows an example of a successful start-up reach effect. Similar to FIG. 21 (c), in the same figure (c'), the lord YM is quite close to the merchant EG, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (c-2), the display of the variable icon h0 disappears. The background display is once switched to the background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed in the upper left, and the fifth symbol pd5 displayed in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of jackpots ("6"-"6"-"6". ") Has begun to sway. The background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed on the upper left may be a background display for notifying that the lord YM will catch the merchant EG, or a background display for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot. Then, in FIG. 21 (d'), the lord YM caught the merchant EG, the chance reach production was successful, and the display of the variable icon h0 was restored. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21 (e) following FIG. 21 (d'), a scene in which the swordsman KG has fallen is displayed. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is definitely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (n).

The right column of FIG. 21 shows an example in which the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position did not light up. FIG. 21 (m) shows the same situation as in FIG. 20 (m), and the darkening effect is started. In the following FIG. 21 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 21 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 are turned off.

In FIG. 21 (q), the fourth movable accessory 254 has returned to the initial position as in FIG. 20 (q). Therefore, in this example, the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position did not light up.

In FIG. 21 (r), the darkening effect is completed as in FIG. 20 (r), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 8"-"Decoration 7") is confirmed and displayed. In the example in the right column where the LED 2541 on the upper row of the 4th movable accessory 254 in the 7th position did not light up, the production of the first notice (super reach production of the chance reach production) was not started, and it was lost. The combination of decorative patterns is confirmed and displayed. Even if the upper LED 2541 does not light up, the first notice effect (super reach effect of the wake-up reach effect) may be started. However, if the upper LED 2541 does not light up, the first notice effect (super reach effect of the wake-up reach effect) may not be started.

FIG. 22 is a diagram stepwise showing another example following the same situation as in FIG. 20 (m).

FIG. 22 (b) shows the same situation as in FIG. 20 (m), and the darkening effect is started during the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous effect. In the following FIG. 22 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 22 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 are turned off.

In the fourth movable accessory 254 which is provided with the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 and can be moved to the 7th position, the 8th position, and the 9th position, a certain state (for example, determination of a special figure) The upper row is when the LED 2542 (second light emitter) in the middle row is lit before the display (during the variable display of the symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, the state before the reach, etc.). It is easier to execute the effect of the first notice than when the LED2541 (first light emitter) of the above is lit, and when the lower LED2543 (third light emitter) is lit, the middle LED2542 (second light emitter) is lit. The effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than when the light emitter) is lit. That is, the more the LED below is lit, the easier it is for the first notice effect to be executed. Further, as described above, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable When the accessory 254 is in the 8th position, it is easier to execute the effect of the 1st notice than when it is in the 7th position, and when it is in the 9th position, it is in the 8th position. It is easier to execute the production of the first notice. When these things are combined, when only one of the LEDs is emitting light, the state in which the upper LED 2541 of the 4th movable accessory 254 in the 7th position is emitting light is the effect of the first notice. Is the most difficult to execute, and the first notice effect is most likely to be executed in the state where the LED 2543 in the lower stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position emits light. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 20 described above, a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and a state before the reach). Etc.), in the state where the 4th movable accessory 254 is in the 7th position and only the upper LED 2541 is lit (hereinafter referred to as the expected weak state), the production of the first notice is the most difficult to be executed, but on the other hand. , The weak expectation state is the most likely to appear. Therefore, the expected weak state, the state in which the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than the expected weak state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during the symbol variation display), the variation display of the decorative symbol). (In the state where If this can be done, the weak expected state appears more frequently than the strong expected state, so that the player can be thanked even in the weak expected state and enjoy the game without getting bored.

Further, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 Among them, when two LEDs are lit, it is easier to execute the effect of the first notice than when only one LED is lit, and when three LEDs are lit, two LEDs are lit. The effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than when only the LED is lit.

In FIG. 22D, only the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. It can be seen that the light from the LED 2541 in the upper row passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emits light from the front side. The lighting is not limited to the second display mode, and may be lit by another display mode or may be blinking.

The fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the upper LED 2541 is lit in the second display mode, and in FIG. 22 (e), the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position and stops. ing. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 22 (f), in the eighth position, the LED 2542 in the middle stage also starts lighting in the second display mode, and the two LEDs 2541 and 542 are lit. Next, the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the ninth position with these two LEDs 2541, 542 lit in the second display mode, and in FIG. 22 (g), the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the ninth position. Reached and stopped. The fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved by turning off the LED or changing the light emitting mode while moving. Further, in this example, the fourth movable accessory 254 temporarily stopped at the eighth position, but the LED 2542 in the middle stage moves to the eighth position while moving (for example, when passing through the eighth position) without stopping once. 2 The lighting may be started in the display mode.

In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 22 (h), in the ninth position, the lower LED 2543 also starts lighting in the second display mode, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit. The state in which all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the ninth position is the state in which the effect of the first notice is most likely to be executed. In this way, when the effect of the first notice is most likely to be executed, the display mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 may change (for example, the display mode may change to red), or the drive mode (light emission mode) may change. It may change (for example, it may change to blinking). Further, when the effect of the first notice is most likely to be executed, the LED 2541, 542, 2543 is not lit in the second display mode, but in a special drive mode (for example, red lighting or blinking) in advance. It may be made to emit light with. Further, the light emitting mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be changed not only in the state where the effect of the first notice is most likely to be executed, but also in the state where the effect of the first notice is executed with a considerably high probability or surely. The LED 2541, 542, 2543 may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode in advance even when the effect of the first notice is likely to be executed with a high probability or inevitably.

In FIG. 22 (i), the transparent effect is started. Of the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (i), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position includes an area overlapping from the front side. 5 Only the display area 208-5 is changed to the transparent state. That is, all of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position overlaps the fifth display area 208-5 from the front side. The fifth display area 208-5 shown in FIG. 22 (i) is a region larger than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position, but is the same size as the fourth movable accessory 254. May be good. Further, the fifth display area 208-5 is an area that overlaps the entire fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position. You may. That is, it may be a region smaller than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position, or may be a region deviated from the front side of the fourth movable accessory 254. At the back of the fifth display area 208-5, which has changed to a transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 that are lit in the second display mode can be visually recognized. As described above, the fifth display area 208-5 changes to the transparent state when the first notice effect is most likely to be executed, or the first notice effect has a fairly high probability. It may be limited to the case where it is always executed, but it may be the case other than that. For example, when only the upper LED 2541 is lit, but the fourth movable accessory 254 moves to the ninth position, or when the lower LED 254 is lit regardless of the position of the fourth movable accessory 254, or when the fourth movable accessory 254 is lit. Even when all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit regardless of the position of the object 254, the fifth display area 208-5 may be changed to the transparent state.

In FIG. 22 (j), the fifth display area 208-5 returns to an opaque state, and subsequently, in FIG. 22 (k), all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are turned off. It should be noted that the fifth display area 208-5 returns to the opaque state and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be turned off at the same timing, or may be turned off and then returned to the opaque state. .. Further, all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be turned off at the same time, may be turned off in the order in which they started to be turned on, or may be turned off in the reverse order in which they started to be turned on. You may.
Further, the change of the fifth display area 208-5 to the opaque state may change the entire fifth display area 208-5 to the opaque state at once, or partially gradually change to the opaque state. May be good.

In FIG. 22 (l), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the ninth position until then, returns to the initial position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 22 (m), the darkening effect is completed. doing. When the blackout effect is completed, the princess discovery reach effect is started as a super reach effect here as the first notice effect. As mentioned above, the princess discovery reach production is a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the chance reach production. In addition, although the chance reach effect may be started, only the princess discovery reach effect may be started, or only the princess discovery reach effect may be started without fail.

As shown in FIG. 22 (n), even in the princess discovery reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the UI section UI3 also disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display changes even in the princess discovery reach production.

In FIG. 22 (o), the lord YM appears, and in the figure (p), the lord YM arrives in front of the sliding door. The sliding doors are closed, but in FIG. 22 (q), the sliding doors begin to open, and it looks like there is something behind the sliding doors.

In FIG. 22 (r), the button effect is started. The button production here corresponds to the final judge production that clarifies whether or not the princess will appear from the back of the sliding door. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136, which has been lit in the first display mode, changes to the fourth display mode. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (r), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. The arrow display 136b and the character display of "blow" as the prompting display, and the remaining period meter display 136c as the display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. .. These button images and the like 136a to 136 overlap with the fusuma image.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing stepwise examples and modified examples following from FIG. 22.

In the left column of FIG. 23, an example continuing from FIG. 22 is shown. In this example, the chance button 136 was not operated (pressed) within the operation valid period. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23 (a), the button images and the like 136a to c have disappeared, and the appearance of nobody behind the sliding door is displayed. In other words, the princess discovery reach production has ended in failure. In FIG. 23 (c), a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”) is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Even if the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) within the operation valid period, the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the same as the display in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c). be.

In the right column of FIG. 23, an example in which a princess appears from the back of a sliding door is shown. The button effect is also started in FIG. 23 (r-1), which is a modification of FIG. 22 (r), but in the button effect here, the button image 136a is displayed in a large size. In this way, the display displayed by the button effect (operation promotion display) has a plurality of display modes, and depending on the display mode, the success rate of the production (here, the success rate of princess discovery) and the jackpot Expectations may change. Here, too, the chance button 136 was not operated (pressed) within the operation valid period, but in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23 (r-2), the button images and the like 136a to c disappeared, and the button images and the like disappeared in the upper left. The background display is once switched to the character "celebration", and the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of jackpots ("6"-"6"-"6"). Has begun to sway. The background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed on the upper left may be a background display for announcing the discovery of the princess, or a background display for announcing the confirmation of a big hit. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (a'), the princess HM appeared from the back of the sliding door, and the princess discovery reach production was successful. In FIG. 23 (b'), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) overlaps with the character image of the princess HM.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a combination of a transparent effect and a timer advance notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of chance eyes, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 24B, the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in an initial position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (b), the effect of the timer notice has been started. In the timer advance notice effect here, the timer advance notice display TM1 that counts down the time (remaining time) until the start of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. This timer notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode. In the timer advance notice effect here, the timer advance notice display TM1 that counts down the remaining time is displayed, and the pseudo continuous effect may be started after the remaining time is exhausted, but it may not be started. This timer notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode.

In FIG. 24 (c), the first movable accessory 251 that was in the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 24 (c), the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line. In FIG. 24D, the transmission effect is started with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, and the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state. The transparent effect here is also an effect that announces the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, both the timer advance notice effect and the transparent effect are notices regarding the pseudo continuous effect, in other words, the notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed. As is clear from FIG. 24D, a part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlap each other. The size of the second display area 208-2 is smaller than the size of the timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that the entire timer notice display TM1 and a part or all of the second display area 208-2 may overlap, or the timer notice display TM1 may be made smaller or the second display area 208-2 may be made larger. , The whole of the second display area 208-2 and a part or all of the timer notice display TM1 may overlap. Further, as shown in FIG. 24D, when the second display area 208-2 and the timer notice display TM1 overlap, a part of the timer notice display TM1 is missing and cannot be seen. That is, a part of the timer notice display TM1 becomes transparent, and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen behind the transparent part. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 24C is in a light-off state.

In this example, the timer notice effect is started before the transparent effect, but the transparent effect may be started before the timer notice effect, or both are started at the same time. You may.

In FIG. 24E, the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is lit in the second display mode on the back side of the portion where the part is in the transparent state. You can see the first movable accessory 251.

In FIG. 24 (f), a part of the second display area 208-2 changes to an opaque state. That is, in the second display area 208-2, the portion overlapping the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to an opaque state, the missing portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is restored and displayed, and the entire timer advance notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. become. On the other hand, a part of the first movable accessory 251 that overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 becomes invisible.

In FIG. 24 (g), the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, and after the opaque state is reached, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position (FIG. 24 (h)). Further, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00" indicating that the remaining time has run out. The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00" may be the same as when the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, or the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state. It may be before. After the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", in this example, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), the character display "Go!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the pseudo continuous effect starts. Will be done. In FIG. 24 (k), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swayed and fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. As described above, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, it is more difficult to start the pseudo-continuous effect than when it is in the first position, but the timer notice effect is also performed. , The probability that the pseudo-continuous production is started increases, and in this example, the pseudo-continuous production is started. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect may be always started when the transparent effect and the timer notice effect are performed.

In FIG. 24 (l), the re-variation in the pseudo-ream effect is started, and the character display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

Here, the effect of the timer notice is related to the pseudo continuous effect, but it may be related to whether or not the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. That is, it may be related to the look-ahead notice.

Further, also in the effect of the timer notice, the pseudo continuous effect and the look-ahead notice are started when the timer notice display TM1 is the display of the fourth display mode rather than the display of the third display mode as in this example. Cheap. Therefore, if the transmission effect is started with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, and then the timer notice display TM1 in the fourth display mode is started, the timer notice display in the third display mode is started. It may be easier to start the pseudo-continuous effect or the look-ahead notice than when TM1 is started, and the transparent effect is started with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, and then the fourth display mode. When the timer notice display TM1 of the above is started, the pseudo continuous effect or the look-ahead notice may be started without fail.

Further, in the above description, although the explanation is related to the start probability of the pseudo-continuous production (normal notice) and the look-ahead notice, it may also be related to the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot. For example, even if the transmission effect is started with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, the jackpot may be confirmed as long as the timer notice display TM1 is also executed.

In the right column of FIG. 24, a modification of FIG. 24 (e) is shown.

In FIG. 24 (e-1), the transmission effect is performed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the entire timer notice display TM1 can be seen, and the transparent first display area 208-1 is passed. In addition, all of the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode is also visible. That is, the first display area 208-1 and the timer notice display TM1 are completely misaligned and do not overlap. Compared with the example shown in FIG. 24 (e), when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position where the transparent effect is difficult to start, it overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 and the transparent effect is likely to be started. If it is in the position, it will not overlap with the timer notice display TM1. Note that this relationship may be reversed, and when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position where the transparent effect is likely to be started, it overlaps with the timer notice display and is in the second position where the transparent effect is difficult to start. In some cases, it does not have to overlap with the timer notice display.

FIG. 24 (e-2) is an example in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display unit TT1. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 and the second display area 208-2 are separated from each other, and they do not overlap.

On the other hand, FIG. 24 (e-3) shows an example in which another second timer notice display TM2 is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display unit TT1. be. The second timer notice display TM2 is a display related to an effect different from the timer notice display TM1 (for example, a button effect), but the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 24 (e-3) counts down. The display has not started yet, and the characters in preparation are displayed. A part of the second timer notice display TM2 and a part of the second display area 208-2 overlap each other, and a part of the second timer notice display TM2 becomes transparent and becomes transparent. On the back side, the first movable accessory 251 can be seen. As shown in FIG. 24 (e-2), if only one timer notice display is displayed, it does not overlap with the second display area 208-2, but if a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, the second display is displayed. It will overlap with area 208-2. That is, it overlaps with the second display area 208-2 only when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a stepwise modification of the effect shown in FIG. 22.

Similar to FIG. 22 (b), in FIG. 25 (b), the darkening effect is started during the revariation display in the pseudo continuous effect. However, in the example shown in FIG. 25, even if the darkening effect is started, the UI unit UI3 does not disappear, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 continue to be displayed. In the following FIG. 25 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 25 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 are turned off. In FIG. 25D, only the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As mentioned above, this state is a weak expected state. The light from the upper LED 2541 in the weak expected state does not overlap with any of the UI unit UI3, the hold icons h11 and h12, and the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 25 (e), the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the upper LED 2541 is lit in the second display mode. In this example, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special symbol (during the symbol variation display), a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory The farther the 254 goes to the right, the easier it is for the first notice to be produced. In addition, the hold indicated by the hold icon displayed on the right side is digested earlier. Therefore, the direction in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed and the direction in which the hold icons indicating the digestion order of the hold are arranged are the same.

As shown in FIG. 25 (f), the number of LEDs that are lit increases as the fourth movable accessory 254 moves. That is, before the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the eighth position, the LED 2542 in the middle stage also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g)). Neither the light from the upper LED 2541 nor the light from the middle LED 2542 in the eighth position overlaps with any of the UI unit UI3, the hold icons h11, h12, and the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 25 (h), the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 overlaps with the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the normal notice, also overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, and also overlaps with a part of the UI unit UI3. As a result, at least the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are more difficult to see than before the lower LED 2543 was turned on. However, the light of the lower LED 2543 is blue, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 25 (h) is white, and the LED from the back side depends on the relationship between the color of the light from the LED and the color of the icon. In some cases, the light illuminates the icon, making it easier to see.

The light from the LED 2543 in the lower row may overlap only the variable icon among the variable icon and the hold icon, or may overlap only the hold icon. Further, the lower LED 2543 may be turned on only when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the display mode of the normal notice.

In FIG. 25 (i), the transparent effect is started. Of the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 25 (i), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position includes an area overlapping from the front side. 6 Only the display area 208-6 is changed to the transparent state. That is, all of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position overlaps the sixth display area 208-6 from the front side. The sixth display area 208-6 shown in FIG. 25 (i) is a region larger than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position, but is the same size as the fourth movable accessory 254. May be good. Further, the sixth display area 208-6 is an area that overlaps the entire fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position. You may. That is, it may be a region smaller than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position, or may be a region deviated from the front side of the fourth movable accessory 254. At the back of the sixth display area 208-6, which has changed to a transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 that are lit in the second display mode can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 have disappeared. In a certain state (for example, before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), the state where the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed, the state before the reach, etc.) shown in FIG. 25 (i). A certain state (for example, a definite display of a special figure) shown in FIG. 22 (i) above, rather than the state in which all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position are lit. In the front (during symbol variation display) state, the decorative symbol variation display state, the state before reach, etc.), all three LEDs of the 4th movable accessory 254 in the 9th position are LEDs 2541 to 2543. The effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed when is lit.

The sixth display area 208-6 may overlap only the variable icon or only the hold icon among the variable icon and the hold icon. Further, the sixth display area 208-6 may be in a transparent state only when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the display mode of the normal notice.

Next, another modification will be described.

In FIG. 25 (b') as in FIG. 25 (b), the darkening effect is started during the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous effect. Again, the UI part UI3 does not disappear, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 Continue displaying. In the following FIG. 25 (c'), as in FIG. 25 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254, which had been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position while being turned off. Also in FIG. 25 (c'), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 are turned off. In FIG. 25 (d'), only the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As described above, in a certain state (for example, before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), the state where the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed, the state before the reach, etc.), the lower LED 2543 lights up. In this case, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than in the case where the upper LED 2541 is lit. In this way, the light from the lower LED 2543 in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed overlaps with the second hold icon h12 when the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position. The position of the lower LED 2543 of the 4th movable accessory 254 in the 7th position is such that the 4th movable accessory 254 overlaps with the hold icon displayed closest to the initial position of the 4th movable accessory 254. Although the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode, the lower LED 2543 may be turned on only when the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 25 (e'), the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the lower LED 2543 is lit in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 in the moving fourth movable accessory 254 overlaps with the first hold icon h11 in addition to the second hold icon h12, and further begins to overlap with the variable icon h0. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (f'), the number of LEDs that are lit increases while the fourth movable accessory 254 is moving. That is, before the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position, the LED 2542 in the middle stage also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g')). The light from the lower LED 2543 in the eighth position overlaps a part of the variable icon h0, a part of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the UI unit UI3.

In FIG. 25 (h'), the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit. become. This state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 25 (h).

In FIG. 25 (i'), the same transmission effect as in FIG. 25 (i) is started, and three LEDs 2541 lit in the second display mode are lit in the back of the sixth display area 208-6 which has changed to the transparent state. ~ 2543 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 have disappeared.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing further modifications and the like of the examples shown in FIGS. 25 (b') to 25 (i').

26 (b) to 26 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 25 (b') to 25 (e'), and the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the lower row during the revariation display in the pseudo-continuous production. Only the LED 2543 of the above moves toward the eighth position while being lit in the second display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the fourth movable accessory 254 lights only the lower LED 2543 in the second display mode in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed without increasing the number of LEDs to be lit while moving. It reaches the 8th position while keeping it (Fig. 26 (f)). The light from the lower LED 2543 in the eighth position overlaps a part of the variable icon h0, a part of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the UI unit UI3. Even when the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position, the transmission effect is started without increasing the number of lit LEDs. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (g), in the back of the sixth display area 208-6 which has changed to the transparent state, only the lower LED 2543 of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is lit in the second display mode. There is. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 have disappeared. In this example, the transmission effect is executed regardless of the number of LEDs lit. However, since the lower LED 2543, which is easy to execute the first notice effect, is lit, the transmission effect is executed, and when only the upper LED 2541, which is difficult to execute the first notice effect, is lit, the transmission is transmitted. The production may not be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (i'), the transmission effect may be executed only when all the LEDs are lit, or only when a plurality of LEDs are lit. The transparent effect may be executed.

FIG. 26 (f') is the same state as in FIG. 26 (f), and during the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous production, the fourth movable accessory 254 lights only the lower LED 2543 in the eighth position. There is. In this eighth position, only the lower LED 2543 is lit. The position of the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position corresponds to a certain position.

In FIG. 26 (g'), the seventh display including the area of the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L that overlaps the lower LED 2543 at a certain position from the front side. Only the area 208-7 changes to the transparent state, and the area overlapping the LEDs 2541 and 542, which remain extinguished, from the front side remains opaque. As described above, in the transmission effect, only the area overlapping the lit LED from the front side may be changed to the transparent state. Further, only the region overlapping the LED lit in a certain light emitting mode from the front side may be changed to the transparent state. As shown in FIG. 26 (g'), the width of the seventh display area 208-7 is wider than the width of the fourth movable accessory 254.

FIG. 26 (c') is the same state as in FIG. 26 (c). During the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous production, the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 are turned off. It is in a state. Further, two hold icons are displayed, and both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are the default display modes (white display modes). Here, the position of the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position.

In FIG. 26 (d'-1), in the display screen (total display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the area including the area overlapping from the front side with the lower LED 2543 at a certain position is included. 8 Only the display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the default, is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543, which is lit in the second display mode, is located behind the eighth display area 208-8. appear. As shown in FIG. 26 (d'-1), the width of the eighth display area 208-8 is the same as the width of the fourth movable accessory 254, and the width of the eighth display area 208-8 is the same as the width of the fourth movable accessory 254. 7 It is narrower than the width of the display area 208-7.

In FIG. 26 (d'-2), the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (first display mode), while the second hold icon h12 is a look-ahead notice display mode (second display mode). Here, as in FIG. 26 (d'-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is behind the eighth display area 208-8. Can be seen.

In FIG. 26 (d'-3), the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode (first display mode), while the first hold icon h11 is the look-ahead notice display mode (second display mode). Here, as in FIG. 26 (d'-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state, and a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode, is missing and becomes transparent. In the back of the eighth display area 208-8, the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode can be seen.

In FIG. 26 (d''), the position of the LED 2542 in the middle stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position, and the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Of these, only the ninth display area 208-9 including the area overlapping the LED 2542 in the middle stage at a certain position from the front side changes to the transparent state. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26 (d''), a cut-in notice display CIY, which is a kind of normal notice, is displayed from the left symbol display area 208a to the right symbol display area 208c. ing. The ninth display area 208-9 overlaps with the display CIY of the cut-in notice, and a part of the display CIY of the cut-in notice is missing and becomes transparent. The lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode can be seen. The display of the cut-in notice may be a kind of pre-reading notice. On the other hand, the ninth display area 208-9 does not overlap with the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 26 (d''), and the second hold icon h12 can be seen as a whole. There is.

The cut-in notice display CIY shown in FIG. 26 (d'') may be started in response to an operation of an operation means such as the chance button 136, or may not be displayed unless it is operated. Alternatively, the display may be displayed even if it is not operated after the operation valid period in the button effect has elapsed.

Further, in this example, since the fourth movable accessory 254 can position three LEDs, the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543, respectively, in the 7th to 9th positions, 9 The display area of the part can be changed to a transparent state. In this way, when a plurality of display areas can be changed to the transparent state, a selection effect (for example, a roulette effect) may be performed to encourage which one of the display areas is changed to the transparent state. .. For example, in a certain position from the 7th position to the 9th position, the display areas from the upper row to the lower row are changed to the transparent state in order at predetermined time intervals, and then only a certain display area is changed to the transparent state. The LED corresponding to the display area may be made to emit light. In other words, when the execution probability of the effect of the first notice changes or the expectation (reliability) that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed changes depending on the position of the light emitting means to be issued, which issuing means is issued. It is also possible to indirectly incite the effect by using the transmission of the region on the front side of the light emitting means.

Further, if the number of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is large, the probability of executing the effect of the first notice is high, and the expectation (reliability) that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is high. , The size of the display area that becomes transparent changes (for example, enlargement or reduction) according to the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 (for example, the continuous hit operation or the long press operation), and finally the display area The number of LEDs to be lit may be determined according to the size. In addition, if the operation means is not operated (for example, repeated hit operation or long press operation), none of the LEDs emit light, or the display area that becomes transparent after the button operation valid time expires expands at once. Only one or more LEDs located on the back side of the enlarged display area may be lit.

In addition, depending on the display mode of the LED, the execution probability of the effect of the first notice may change, or the degree of expectation (reliability) for finally confirming the jackpot symbol may change.

If the timing at which the display area changes to the transparent state is earlier than the timing at which the LED located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above starts lighting, the change to the transparent state itself means that the display area changes to the transparent state. It corresponds to a fanning effect that is conscious of LED lighting, and corresponds to an indirect effect. That is, since changing the display area to the transparent state is used as a precursor of the advance notice effect, the player who knows that the LED, which is the advance notice effect, starts lighting after the display area changes to the transparent state. , It is possible to convey in an easy-to-understand manner the timing when you should have a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in a normal liquid crystal display device that does not transmit light, the light emitting means emits light after being fanned by the display on the display screen, and the player needs to move the line of sight from the display screen to the light emitting means, or even to the display screen. It is necessary to move the light emitting means on purpose, but if this is done, other displays may be hidden by the light emitting means and the visibility may be deteriorated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the display area is changed to the transparent state, the light emitting means on the back side of the display area emits light, and the player does not need to move the line of sight, and the light emitting means is the display screen. It does not hide the image, and has an advantageous effect compared to the production using a normal liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of other effects using the fourth movable accessory 254.

In the left column of FIG. 27, the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice, is displayed, and an example in which the explanation of the swordsman reach is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3 is shown. ing. In FIG. 27B, the fourth movable accessory 254 is located at the seventh position during the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous production. The positions of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position correspond to a certain position, and are in a certain position on the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Three areas including each area overlapping the LEDs 2541 to 2543 from the front side (fourth display area 208-4 (area corresponding to LED 2541 in the upper row) shown in FIG. 20 (n)), FIG. 26 (d'. The ninth display area 208-9 (area corresponding to LED2542 in the middle row) and the eighth display area 208-8 (area corresponding to LED2543 in the lower row) shown in FIG. 26 (d'-1) are transparent. Change to state. Further, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 27 (b), is missing and becomes transparent, and the second display mode is behind the eighth display area 208-8. You can see the lit lower LED 2543.

The fourth movable accessory 254, which was in the seventh position at the timing in FIG. 27 (b), starts moving toward the ninth position. When the movement of the fourth movable accessory 254 is started, the transmission effect ends once.

The fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 27 (d) has reached the ninth position via the eighth position. The positions of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position correspond to a certain position, and are in a certain position on the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The three display areas 208-10 to 208-12 including the areas overlapping the LEDs 2541 to 2543 from the front side are changed to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the explanation display of the swordsman reach in the tutorial display unit TT1 is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode can be seen in the back.

The fourth movable accessory 254 may continue the transparent effect even during the movement, and the region to be in the transparent state may be moved to the right side in accordance with the movement of the fourth movable accessory 254. However, if it is a movable accessory that moves on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it overlaps with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and if you look into it, even the overlapping part It is possible to see it, but if the transparent area moves to the right, the display itself of that part will not be displayed, and there is a disadvantage that it cannot be enjoyed. Further, it may be technically difficult to move the transparent region in accordance with the movement of the movable accessory that moves on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In the center column of FIG. 27, the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice, is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3 is displayed as "super heat" instead of the explanation display of the effect. An example is shown in which a notice display (normal notice display) regarding the currently performed symbol change display is displayed. In this example, when the 4th movable accessory 254 is in the 7th position, it is the same as the example shown in the left column, but when the 4th movable accessory 254 is in the 9th position, the lower LED 2543 is displayed. When the corresponding display area 208-12 changes to a transparent state, a part of the notice display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is missing and becomes transparent, and in the back, the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is lit. Can be seen.

When the notice display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the lower LED 2543 is more likely to move to the back side and the transmission effect is more likely to overlap than when the explanation display of the effect is displayed. Or conversely, when the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation display of the effect, the lower LED 2543 is more likely to move to the back side than the notice display is displayed, and the transmission effect is more likely to overlap. good.

In the right column of FIG. 27, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is erased and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are hidden. In FIG. 27 (b ″), the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the initial position. In the figure (c ″) following FIG. 27 (b ″), an animation in which three arrows are driven in a vertical row is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Also in FIG. 27 (c''), the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the initial position, but when this animation is displayed, the fourth movable accessory 254 moves to the eighth position, and the first decorative symbol display device. While the entire display screen of 208L remains opaque, all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 start lighting in the second display mode. The fourth movable accessory 254 may be in the eighth position before the animation is displayed. In this example, the display of the animation suggests in advance the start of lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543. In the conventional movable character production, the player can detect the movement of the movable character while moving to the production position of the movable character and can enjoy the effect performed there from the beginning. Since it is difficult for the player to notice the movement of the movable accessory (here, the fourth movable accessory 254) that moves on the back side of the device 208L, advance suggestions are given by displaying an animation or the like. Although the transmission effect is not performed, all the lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 in the eighth position corresponds to an effect in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed to some extent. Therefore, starting from the animation of the advance suggestion, the light emitting effect on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L using the fourth movable accessory 254 is executed, and then the effect of the first notice is executed, and finally. The flow will be whether or not to make a big hit, and the interest of the game will improve.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a transparent effect and an effect using a sub window are combined.

The UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28B, two hold icons h11 and h12 and a variable icon h0 are displayed, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area are displayed. In each of 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes, whereas the variable icon h0 is a normal notice display mode.

In FIG. 28 (c), a fanning effect is started as a certain effect, a character display of "reach by finding an enemy" is displayed, and an animation in which the lord YM is searching for an enemy is displayed. When this fanning effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started in the upper right corner of. In addition, the UI section UI3 disappears, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are hidden. In addition, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the image previously displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the sub window SW provided under the fifth symbol pd5.

In FIG. 28E, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the sub window SW overlap, and a part of the sub window SW is also made transparent because the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state. .. However, the variable icons h0 representing the normal notice and the hold icons h11 and h12, which are the default display modes but may represent the look-ahead notice, are visible in the sub window SW. The second display area 208-2 may overlap with these icons h0, h11, and h12 of the sub window SW.

Further, in this example, when the transparent effect is performed, it is easier to succeed in the fanning effect (Den-sama YM finds the enemy) than when the transparent effect is not performed. Further, the case where the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position is more successful due to the fanning effect than the case where the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. It will be easier to do.

In FIG. 28 (g), the transparent effect is completed, and the lord YM is displayed slightly larger. In FIG. 28 (h), a merchant EG who escapes with an oval of an enemy role is discovered, and the fanning production is successful. Although a part of the character display of the merchant EG overlaps with a part of the sub window SW, various icons h0, h11, and h12 are visible. However, there may be cases where these various icons h0, h11, and h12 are overlapped so as to be hidden.

If the fanning effect is successful, the reach effect (an example of the effect of the first notice) is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (i), the reach state is started.

In addition, the fanning effect may be an effect of discovering the target character of the super reach. That is, when the merchant EG is discovered, it develops into the chance reach described with reference to FIG. Alternatively, the discovered character and the type of reach may be completely irrelevant. For example, even when the merchant EG is discovered, it may develop into the swordsman reach described with reference to FIG. 15 and the like.

It can be said that the fanning effect described above is a kind of mini game. Next, an example in which other mini-games and transparent effects are combined will be described.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (a), the pseudo-continuous symbol is re-variated after two temporary stops (sway fluctuations), and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b are performed. The preparing image RDY is displayed between them. This preparing image RDY is a display of the third display mode.

In FIG. 28 (a), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the first display area 208-1 and a part of the image RDY being prepared overlap each other, and a part of the image RDY being prepared is also made transparent because the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state. ing. As a result of the transmission effect being executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position in this way, the swordsman reach is started in FIG. 28 (c). In addition, a part of the image RDY in preparation overlaps with a part of the character display ("Swordsman reach") of the start production of the swordsman reach.

In FIG. 28 (d), the mini game is started in the area where the image being prepared is displayed. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the horizontal axis as the rotation axis (not shown). A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. Also, in the production of the swordfighter reach, the main character, Tonosama YM, and the enemy swordfighter, KG, are facing each other.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (e), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "extreme heat" is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the word "super heat" is derived from the drum DRM, so that a notice is usually given. Also, in the production of Swordsman Reach, the state after the swordsman YM and the swordsman KG played a sword, that is, the state after pulling out the swords and fighting each other is displayed, but it is still unknown which one won. There is no state.

In FIG. 28 (f), the display of the mini game (display of the drum DRM) disappears, and the button effect is started. Similar to FIG. 15 (l-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (f) has a large button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode. ing. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136, which has been lit in the first display mode, is changed to the fourth display mode.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the transparent effect and various displays.

In the left column of FIG. 29, the relationship between the transparency effect and the display of the ball removal notification notified when a dish full tank error occurs is shown. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (a), a dish full tank error occurs while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, and a ball removal notification is displayed (“Please remove the ball”. Character display) is displayed from the left symbol display area 208a to the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the dish full tank error is not resolved to the end, and the display of the ball removal notification is continuously displayed until the end. The first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position (FIG. 29 (b)), a transparent effect is performed, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state (FIG. 29 (c)), and so on. Then, in the second position, the first movable accessory 251 lights up in the second display mode (FIG. (D)). The second display area 208-2 overlaps with the display of the ball removal notification, and when the transmission effect is performed, a part of the ball removal notification display is missing and becomes transparent, and the second display area 208-2 In the back, the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode can be seen.

In FIG. 29 (d'), the transmission effect is performed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 is the first. It is a figure which shows the state which is lit in 2 display modes. As shown in this figure, even if the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, when the first display area 208-1 overlaps with the display of the ball removal notification and the transmission effect is performed, the ball removal notification is performed. Part of the display of is made transparent.

In FIG. 29 (d''), in a state where the ball removal notification is displayed, the cut-in notice display CIY', which is a kind of normal notice, is displayed, and further, the transparent effect is performed, and the second position. It is a figure which shows the state that the 1st movable accessory 251 is lit in the 2nd display mode. The second display area 208-2, which has changed to a transparent state, overlaps with the cut-in notice display CIY', and a part of the cut-in notice display CIY'is also transparent and invisible. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the cut-in notice display CIY', but since it overlaps with the second display area 208-2 that has changed to the transparent state, a part of the ball removal notification display is also transparent. It has become invisible. The cut-in notice display CIY'may be displayed at the same time as the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, may be displayed before the change to the transparent state, or may be transparent. It may be displayed after changing to the state.

Although the display of the ball removal notification has been described here as an example, the same applies to the display related to other errors and the display related to the warning. As the display related to other errors, as the display related to the error related to the main control unit 300, the display of magnetic (magnet) detection error, the display of external clock abnormality error, the display of magnetic field (radio) detection error, the display of switch level abnormality error, Switch unconnected error display, impact error error display, winning rate error error display, big prize opening winning excess error display, big winning opening discharge excess error display, solenoid error error (large winning opening error) display Etc. can be listed. In addition, an error display such as "The door is open." Or a warning display such as "Please close the door." Can be displayed as a door opening error. That is, as the display of other errors, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, as the display of the warning / error regarding the first sub-control unit 400 and / and the second sub-control unit 500, the display of the impact warning, the display of the striking method warning, the display of the movable accessory error, and the like can be listed. However, here as well, all of the above-listed items may be used, and some of the above-mentioned items may not be applied.

The central column of FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transparent effect and the display of the button effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the button effect is started. When the button effect is started, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and the promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. The arrow display 136b and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. Further, in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (A), a character of Princess Chibi SH appears and is looking for an old man. If the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the grandfather character will appear if the button effect is successful, and the grandfather character will not appear if the button effect is unsuccessful. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the grandfather character may appear after the operation valid period elapses.

The first movable accessory 251 moves to the first position (FIG. 29 (B)), a transparent effect is performed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state (FIG. 29 (C)), and so on. Then, in the first position, the first movable accessory 251 lights up in the second display mode (FIG. (D)). The first display area 208-1 overlaps most of the remaining period meter display 136c, and also slightly overlaps the button image 136a. When the transmission effect is performed, the remaining period meter display 136c becomes transparent except for both ends, and the first movable accessory lit in the second display mode is behind the first display area 208-1. You can see 251.

It should be noted that the button image 136a shown here does not overlap with the second display area 208-2, but overlaps only when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position where the effect of the first notice is likely to be executed. become. However, if the large button image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 28 (f) are used, they overlap with the second display area 208-2, and when the transparent effect of the second display area 208-2 is performed, the large button is displayed. A part of the image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c will be transparent.

In FIG. 29 (D), the remaining time of the remaining period meter display 136c is unknown, but the chance button 136 is operated, and the old man GI is in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (E). Character appears, and the button production is successful. In FIG. 29 (E), the transparent effect is continued, but the display of the character of the grandfather GI and the display of the dialogue are displayed at a position away from the first display area 208-1, and the first display area. It does not overlap with 208-1.

The right column of FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transparent effect and the display of the mini character (mini character). The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (a). Whether the variable icon h0 or the two hold icons h11 and h12, the display mode is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA is displayed in the vicinity of the right symbol display area 208c. There is. In FIG. 29 (a), a fanning effect that may change the display mode of the hold icon is started. That is, the ninja NJA mini-character throws a shuriken at one of the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed here. Further, the first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position.

In FIG. 29 (c), the shuriken hits the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image EFG and disappears. In addition, a transparent effect is performed, and the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state. The first movable accessory 251 in the second position is in the extinguished state. The second display area 208-2 overlaps with the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and when the transparent effect is performed, a part of the display of the ninja NJA mini character (just the face part) becomes transparent.

In FIG. 29 (d), the effect image EFG covering the second hold icon h12 disappears, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, the second display mode). The second hold icon h12, which has changed to the look-ahead notice display mode, continues to be displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode until the second hold is exhausted, and the look-ahead notice continues. The Ninja NJA mini-character can also be seen as the character that appears at the beginning of the hold change animation, and corresponds to a part of the look-ahead notice effect (more specifically, the hold change effect). In some cases, the shuriken does not hit the hold icon and no change occurs. Also, just because the shuriken hits the hold icon does not mean that the hit hold icon is always covered with the effect image EFG, and the display mode of the hold icon may end without any change. Although covered with the effect image EFG, the display mode of the hold icon may not change at all. If the display mode of the hold icon does not change, it means that the hold change effect has failed.

Here, the display mode of the hold icon has changed, but the display mode of the variable icon may also change. That is, the shuriken thrown by the mini character of Ninja NJA hits the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and then the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes to the display mode of the normal notice (for example, the second display mode). In some cases. In this case, the Ninja NJA mini-character corresponds to a part of the normal notice production. Further, in the above description, the icon of the default display mode changes, but the icon of the display mode of the look-ahead notice or the normal notice may change to a display mode having a higher expectation (reliability) of the jackpot.

Further, in FIG. 29 (d), the first movable accessory 251 in the second position starts lighting in the second display mode, and the state can be seen through the second display area 208-2 which has changed to the transparent state. .. The display mode of the hold icon of the Ninja NJA mini character has changed, but it is still displayed, and the face part cannot be seen, and in the back, the first movable accessory 251 that started lighting in the second display mode. Is visible. The display of the Ninja NJA mini-character may be a display that is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. Alternatively, it may be a display displayed during a part or all of the currently performed symbol variation display. For example, the display may be displayed before the reach effect is started or before the reach effect is developed. Furthermore, the display of the Ninja NJA mini-character may disappear when the display mode of the hold icon changes.

FIG. 29 (d') shows a modified example, in which a transparent effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position lights up in the second display mode. doing. It is displayed in the vicinity of the symbol display area 208b, which corresponds to a part of the look-ahead notice effect. The first display area 208-1 overlaps with the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and when the transparent effect is performed, the face part of the ninja NJA mini character becomes transparent, and the second display is in the back. The first movable accessory 251 that lights up in the mode can be seen. That is, a part of the area where the look-ahead notice effect is displayed overlaps a part of the first display area 208-1, and the display of the look-ahead notice effect (here, the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA) is displayed. In, the first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state. In this modification, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap with the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and other display areas such as the second display area 208-2 may display the ninja NJA mini character. Does not overlap with. However, other display areas may also overlap with the display of the ninja NJA mini character.

In addition to the display of the look-ahead advance notice effect, the display of the Ninja NJA mini character may be the display of the normal advance notice effect, and whether or not a certain effect such as a super reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect is started. It may be a display of a fortune-telling effect, a display used for a tutorial (explanation of the effect), or a dedicated display for each of these displays (for example, a dedicated display for a look-ahead notice effect). Display).

As described above, a large number of production examples in the game table (pachinko machine 100) provided with the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIG. 14 have been described. The examples will be summarized and explained again.

FIG. 30 is a diagram summarizing typical examples of the effects described so far.

30 (a) to 30 (d) show an example in which the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, which has been described with reference to FIG. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is lit in the second display mode. .. In this example, the execution of the first notice effect such as the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect is not started after the transparent effect, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (d). There is.

In FIGS. 30A to 30E, the pseudo continuous effect is started after the transmission effect is executed in the state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, which was described with reference to FIG. An example is shown. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is lit in the second display mode. .. When the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the effect of the first notice is executed as compared with the case where the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. It is easy to start, in FIG. 30 (D), the execution of the pseudo-ream effect is started, and in the following FIG. The character display "x2" indicating the number of times is displayed.

In FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (d), after the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position as described with reference to FIG. 18, the pseudo continuous effect continues. , An example is shown in which the super reach production is started. That is, in FIG. 30 (a), the transparent effect is executed during the revariable display in the pseudo continuous effect, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position. Is lit in the second display mode. When the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the effect of the first notice (for example, when the transparent effect is executed while the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position) is compared with the case where the transparent effect is executed. It is easy to continue the pseudo-continuous production), or it is easy to start the production of the first notice (for example, super reach production). In FIG. 30 (d), the execution of the swordsman reach production, which is one of the super reach productions, has started.

30 (A) to FIG. 30 (E) show an example of the production using the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 21. That is, although not shown here, as in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory in the second position. After the 251 is lit in the second display mode, a pseudo continuous effect is performed, and further, a darkening effect is started. Then, during the execution of the darkening effect, as shown in FIG. 30 (i), the upper stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position remains opaque while the entire display area including the fourth display area 208-4 remains opaque. Only the LED 2541 of the above lights up in the second display mode. Such a lighting state of only the upper LED 2541 in the 7th position is a weak expected state when the execution of the first notice effect is expected to be started, but the darkening effect is completed and FIG. 30 In (E), one of the productions of the first notice, the Okake Reach production, has started.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the configuration of the movable accessory. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is different from the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14 in the initial position and the moving range. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and moves along the diagonal line of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is possible to move from the upper right of the initial position toward the diagonally lower left, and the position in the right symbol display area 208c (the position on the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c) becomes the tenth position, and the middle symbol. The position in the display area 208b (the position on the back side of the center of the middle symbol display area 208b in the vertical direction) becomes the second position, and the position in the left symbol display area 208a (the position on the back side of the lower part of the left symbol display area 208a). ) Is the first position. In FIG. 31A, the first movable accessory 251 in the tenth position is represented by a dotted line, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a two-dot chain line, and the first movable accessory in the first position is represented by a chain double-dashed line. The object 251 is represented by a alternate long and short dash line. The first position is the position farthest from the initial position. The tenth position may be set as the initial position. In a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special symbol (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 is the first. In the case of being in the 1st position, the effect of the 1st notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of being in the 2nd position, and in the case of being in the 2nd position, the 1st notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of being in the 10th position. Is easy to perform.

In FIG. 31 (b-1), the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) in the tenth position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the second display mode. It is a figure which shows the state that it is lit. Of the display screen (all display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 in the tenth position from the front side includes the UI unit UI3, the hold icon, and the like. It does not overlap with the variable icon.

In FIG. 31 (b-2), the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) in the first position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the second display mode. It is a figure which shows the state that it is lit. The first display area 208-1 here overlaps with a part of the second hold icon h12, and the first display area 208-1 becomes transparent due to the transparent effect, so that one of the second hold icons h12. The portion is in a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 lit in the second display mode is visible on the back side of the transparent portion.

In FIG. 31 (b-3), the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) in the first position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the fourth display mode. It is a figure which shows the state that it is lit. Also in this example, a part of the second hold icon h12 becomes transparent, and the first movable accessory 251 lit in the fourth display mode can be seen behind the transparent part. In a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during the display of the symbol variation), a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 , In the case of the fourth display mode, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than in the case of the second display mode.

In the modified example here, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap with the display of the hold icon, which may be the hold icon of the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and other display areas such as the second display area 208-2. The display area does not overlap with the display of the hold icon.

The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) is the same as the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14, but the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is shown in FIG. It is different from the fourth movable accessory 254 shown. Here, a combination of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) and the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) will be described.

In FIG. 31B, the fourth movable accessory 254 shown by the solid line represents the fourth movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable accessory 254 is a position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable accessory 254 can be moved from its initial position to the seventh position and the eighth position, which overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 31B, the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position is represented by a alternate long and short dash line. The fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is different from the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14, and the eighth position is the maximum moving position from the initial position, up to the ninth position. Does not move.

The fourth movable accessory 254 is provided with LEDs at the top and bottom. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B), an LED corresponding to the LED 2542 in the middle stage provided in the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided above, and hereinafter, the LED above this is referred to. The middle LED 2542 is referred to, and an LED corresponding to the lower LED 2543 provided in the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided below, and the lower LED is hereinafter referred to as the lower LED 2543. Further, the LED built in the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) can play the role of the upper LED 2541 provided in the fourth movable accessory 254.

The fourth movable accessory 254 and the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31B described above are arranged so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction, but the moving areas do not overlap and they may interfere with each other. No.

When the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) is in the first position and the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is in the eighth position, it is built in the first movable accessory 251. The LED that plays the role of the LED 2541 in the upper row and the two LEDs 2542 and 2543 provided in the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) can be lit in a vertical straight line. This state is the state in which the production of the first notice is most likely to be executed.

Of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, only the area on the front side of each LED may be made transparent by the transmission effect, or the entire fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) may be in a transparent state. The area on the front side of the LED may be transparent. However, with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) in the first position and the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) in the eighth position, the entire middle symbol display area 208b If the transparent state is set, the division between the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 can be seen. Therefore, in this state, each LED is lit in an opaque state without making the whole transparent. You may try to perform the production.

With a conventional effect device, the movable accessory can be moved to the front of the display screen to focus on a specific display, but other displays other than the specific display can be placed at the target position of the movable accessory. There may be a problem that the movable accessory arm or the like interferes with the movement before moving. On the other hand, according to the first embodiment described so far, since the movable accessory moves on the back side, such an inconvenience does not occur, and the display itself is partially transparent (substantially erased). ) Therefore, there are cases where the display can be emphasized more, or the back side can be made more visible by making a part of it transparent to give a sense of depth and make the back side more noticeable. That is, there are cases where the display can be emphasized by inevitably reaching the surroundings through which the part is transparent. In addition, although the display is two-dimensional, when a sense of depth is given, it becomes possible to create a three-dimensional effect that was difficult to reproduce by the display alone, and it is possible to make people wonder what is behind the display. You may be able to do it.

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect device of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect device 206 of the second embodiment.

In FIG. 32 (a), the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. Similar to the effect device 206 of the first embodiment, the family crest accessory 224E is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (a). However, the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E of the second embodiment is a position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 (b) is in the initial position. When the family crest accessory 224E starts operation, it descends from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in the third position, the front side (player side) is displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Overlap. In FIG. 32 (b), the family crest accessory 224E in the third position is represented by a solid black line. The family crest accessory 224E can move further down from the third position to the sixth position. In FIG. 32 (b), the family crest accessory 224E in the sixth position is represented by a solid gray line. In the 6th position, about 3/4 of the family crest accessory 224E overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and the lower side of about 1/4 is below the display screen. Will be located. In the initial position, the family crest accessory 224E is more difficult for the player to see than in the third position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. The family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 is lit in the second display mode.

Further, the first movable accessory 251 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (a). The first movable accessory 251 has a structure in which a ring-shaped accessory is divided into left and right, and includes a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512. The left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 (c) are at their respective initial positions. That is, the left arc portion 2511 has an initial position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right arc portion 2512 has an initial position on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the first movable accessory 251 starts operating, the left arc portion 2511 moves from the initial position to the right side, and the right arc portion 2512 moves from the initial position to the left side. It is united so as to surround the circular region S3'on the back side of the third position of the above, that is, on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this way, the position of the ring-shaped first movable accessory 251 that is united on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first position. In FIG. 32 (c), the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is represented by a dotted line. The area inside the first movable accessory 251 represented by the dotted line is the circular area S3'.

FIG. 32 (d) shows a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, with the family crest accessory 224E in the third position and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position. When the first display area 208-1 including the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 in the first position from the front side of the entire display area) is changed to the transparent state by the transparent effect. It is a figure which shows the state. Although there is a difference in position in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the family crest accessory 224E on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first movable accessory 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Surrounded by. That is, the left arc portion 2511 is located on the outer peripheral portion of the left half of the circular family crest accessory 224E, and the right arc portion 2512 is located on the outer peripheral portion of the right half. Here, the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode, and the player is given a family crest accessory 224E lit in the second display mode and a first movable accessory 251 lit in the same second display mode. However, it looks three-dimensionally combined. That is, a gorgeous family crest three-dimensional structure has been completed. In addition, the first movable character 251 on the back side is used as the character of the Japanese drum, and the character of the drumstick is introduced in place of the family crest character 224 on the front side, and the character of the Japanese drum and the character of the drumstick are combined. The Japanese drum being played may be completed. That is, the back side accessory and the front side accessory may be combined to form a certain one (a new one that has never existed before is constructed).

Further, a third movable accessory 253 is arranged on the back side of the first movable accessory 251 in place of the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment. The third movable accessory 253 is an accessory on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn. The initial position of the third movable accessory 253 is a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e) is in the initial position (fourth position). When the operation is started, the third movable accessory 253 rises from the initial position and can move to the fifth position on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 32 (e), the third movable accessory 253 in the fifth position is represented by a dotted line. Although the fifth position of the third movable accessory 253 and the first position of the first movable accessory 251 are displaced in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are almost the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. In position. The effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the third movable accessory 253 may not be executed at the same time. That is, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the third movable accessory 253 is overlapped with the first movable accessory 251 even if the third movable accessory 253 is in the fifth position. The effect using the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is executed without being seen. When the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, the effect using the third movable accessory 253 in the fifth position can be executed.

Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the family crest accessory 224E as in the first embodiment, and the player can display the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. The state is visible. In the light guide plate IL of the second embodiment, a lens cut having a pattern of the face of the character of the lord is applied to the transmission region. The light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 32 (a) is in a state in which the light emitted from the side is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, and a pattern shaped like the face of the character of the lord is emitted. looks like.

In FIG. 32 (f), the family crest accessory 224E and the first movable accessory 251 are both in the initial position, the third movable accessory 253 is in the fifth position, and the light guide plate IL is emitting light. 1. Of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208L, the third display area 208-3 including the area overlapping the third movable accessory 253 in the fifth position from the front side is in a transparent state by the transparent effect. It is a figure which shows the state when it changed to. The face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the character of the lord who emits light from the light guide plate IL are the same size and are in the front-back direction (Z-axis direction). Although there is a difference in position, they are the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and appear to overlap.

Even if the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment are provided at positions that do not interfere with each of the first movable accessory 251 and the third movable accessory 253 of the second embodiment. good.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a transmission effect using the effect device 206 of the second embodiment, FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 33, and FIG. 35 is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in 34.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of chance eyes, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the look-ahead notice. The dotted line below the first decorative symbol display device 208L represents the upper end portion of the third movable accessory 253 at the initial position (fourth position).

In FIG. 33B, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (c), the entire display screen is as dark as the darkening effect, or darkened to a certain extent even if it is not darkened to that extent. This is to make the light emission of the light guide plate IL more visible. In FIG. 33 (c), the pattern appears on the transparent light guide plate IL arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the light guide plate shown in FIG. 33 (c), the pattern in which the face of the character of the lord is shaped appears to emit light in the second display mode. The timing at which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark and the timing at which the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL may be the same, or the timing at which the pattern appears may come earlier. Alternatively, on the contrary, the timing of darkening may be later. The appearance of the pattern on the light guide plate IL is a chance up, and when the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the first notice effect starts compared to the case where the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL. Easy to be done. When the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the effect of the first notice may always be started, and even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the effect of the first notice may not be started. If the pattern does not appear, the execution of the production of the first notice may not be started.

In FIG. 33 (e), a pseudo continuous effect is started as the effect of the first notice. The transmission effect may be executed at the timing of FIG. 33 (d) with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 32 in the first position. The pseudo-continuous effect started here may be an effect due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the effect of the light guide plate IL may be a notice effect that the transparent effect is performed. , The effect may be completely unrelated to the transparent effect or the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of the first notice). In FIG. 33 (f), the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous production is started.

In FIG. 33 (g), during the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed again, and the face of the character of the lord is molded in front of the darkened display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. A sloping pattern has appeared. The pattern here appears to emit light in the third display mode. The fact that the pattern reappears on the light guide plate IL is a chance up, and the production of the first notice continues when the pattern reappears on the light guide plate IL than when the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL. Easy to (develop). When the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL again, the effect of the first notice may be continued (developed), or even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the effect of the first notice may not be continued. However, if the pattern does not appear, the production of the first notice may not continue.

In FIG. 33 (i), the pseudo-continuous production is continued, and the second temporary stop is performed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 33 (h), the transparent effect may be executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, and the continuation of the pseudo continuous effect means that the transparent effect is executed. It may be directed by. Further, the effect of the light guide plate IL in FIG. 33 (g) may be a notice effect that the transmission effect is performed after that, and is completely unrelated to the transmission effect or the pseudo continuous effect (the effect of the first notice). It may be a production. In FIG. 33 (j), the second re-variation in the pseudo-continuous production is started.

In FIG. 33 (k), during the second re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed three times, and the character of the lord is in front of the darkened display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. A pattern that resembles the face of is appearing. The pattern here appears to emit light in the fourth display mode.

Eventually, the pseudo-continuous production ends, and the production that fuels the development to super reach (fanning production) is started. When the fanning effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started in the upper right. In addition, the UI section UI3 disappears, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are hidden. In addition, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark. It should be noted that this display screen may be continuously darkened from the time when the effect of the light guide plate IL is performed. When the display screen becomes dark, the movement of the movable accessory arranged on the back side of the display screen becomes harder to see than before it becomes dark, which is suitable for preparatory movement.

In FIG. 33 (m), the family crest accessory 224E arranged on the front side of the display screen starts moving from the initial position. The family crest accessory 224E that has started moving is lit in the fourth display mode. In FIG. 33 (n), the family crest accessory 224E has reached the third position, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable accessory 251 has started moving from the initial position. The first movable accessory 251 starts moving with the family crest accessory 224E not at least in the initial position. Although the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L is in an opaque state, the back side may be visible depending on the color of the displayed image, but the display screen is dark and the player Is distracted by the family crest accessory 224E that appears in front of him, and it becomes difficult to notice the movement of the first movable accessory 251 on the back side. In FIG. 33 (o), the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are united so as to surround the circular region S3'shown in FIG. 32 (c).

In FIG. 33 (p), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen behind the first display area 208-1. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in a state of being turned off. In FIG. 33 (q), the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the fourth display mode, and the player is given the family crest accessory 224E lit in the fourth display mode and the first lit in the same fourth display mode. Movable accessories 251 appear to be three-dimensionally combined. Such a collaborative production by the first movable character 251 and the family crest character 224E is a kind of normal advance notice production, and is executed in a production other than the fanning production (the production before developing into super reach). (For example, when it is executed in the final judge effect during super reach, which will be described later), it may be executed only in the fanning effect. In addition, when this collaborative production is executed, it is more likely to develop into super reach than when it is not executed. In addition, the term "easy to develop" here includes the case where it always develops. Further, even if this collaborative effect is executed, it may not develop, but it may not develop unless this collaborative effect is executed. Furthermore, when the collaborative effect is executed, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when it is not executed. It should be noted that the term “easy to be confirmed and displayed” here includes the case where the confirmation is always displayed. In addition, even if this collaborative effect is executed, it may be lost, but unless this collaborative effect is executed, a big hit may not be made.

Further, the display modes of the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest accessory 224E may be different, but both may be the same, such as lighting in the fourth display mode, as in the example here. Further, each of the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest accessory 224E can be displayed in the above-mentioned first display mode to the sixth display mode, and the larger the number is, the easier it is to develop into super reach. Alternatively, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot may be high.

In FIG. 33 (r), the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, and in FIG. 34 (a) following FIG. 33 (r), the transmission effect ends and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. In FIG. 34 (b), the first movable accessory 251 has started the return operation to the initial position on the back side, and in the following FIG. 34 (c), the family crest accessory 224E is lit in the fourth display mode. The return operation to the initial position is started. In FIG. 34 (d), the family crest accessory 224E disappears from the front of the display screen, but the display screen remains dark.

In FIG. 34 (e), the display screen becomes brighter and develops into a swordsman reach, which is one of the super reach. When the swordsman reach is started, only the variable icon h0 is returned and displayed.

During the swordsman reach, a button effect is executed as in the example shown in FIG. 15 (l-1), and as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed in large size, and the arrow display 136b, the character display of "blow", and the remaining period meter display 136c are also displayed.

In FIG. 34 (g), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in the figure (h), the button image 136a and the like disappear, the character display of the lord YM and the swordsman KG also disappears, and the background display with the characters "celebration" displayed in the upper left. The same production (at least the positional relationship) as the collaborative production by the first movable character 251 and the family crest character 224E, which was executed in FIGS. 33 (m) to (r) as a fanning effect before the development of Super Reach. Is the same production) is executed again. However, the collaborative effect here is that the family crest accessory 224E emits light in the sixth display mode from the time when it starts moving, and the first movable accessory 251 also finally emits light in the sixth display mode. As shown in FIG. 34 (l), the family crest accessory 224E lit in the sixth display mode and the first movable accessory 251 lit in the sixth display mode appear to be three-dimensionally combined. The background display in which the characters "celebration" are displayed in the upper left may be a background display for notifying that the lord YM will win, or a background display for notifying the confirmation of a big hit. Further, the character "celebration" on the upper left is displayed while the first movable accessory 251 is moving or while the first display area 208-1 is in an opaque state, but the first movable accessory is displayed. The timing of FIG. 34 (j) when the object 251 reaches the first position, the timing of FIG. 34 (k) when the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state (the timing when the transmission effect is started), or the first. 1 The movable accessory 251 may be extinguished at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (l) when the movable accessory 251 starts to light up. Since the word "celebration" is a display related to a big hit, it is easy to attract the attention of the player. On the other hand, even in an opaque state, the movement of the first movable accessory 251 may be visible if the eyes are squinted. However, if the first movable accessory 251 is moved while paying attention to the characters "celebration", the movement of the first movable accessory 251 becomes less noticeable. The first movable accessory 251 that was lit in the sixth display mode is turned off at the timing of FIG. 34 (m), and in FIG. 34 (n), the transmission effect is completed and the first display area 208-1 is displayed. Return to opaque state. The character "celebration" on the upper left continues to be displayed, but it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 34 (m) when the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, or in FIG. 34 (n) when the transparent effect is completed. It may disappear at the timing. Further, when the transparent effect is completed, the family crest accessory 224E, which has been in the third position until then, starts moving toward the sixth position. That is, unlike the case of the fanning effect, the family crest accessory 224E does not return to the initial position. It can be said that the third position of the family crest accessory 224E is the production position, and the production role has already been completed. In FIG. 34 (p), the family crest accessory 224E reaches the sixth position, and a part of the family crest accessory 224E is placed on the upper end portion of the third movable accessory 253 in the initial position (fourth position) from the front side. It overlaps. The whole family crest accessory 224E may overlap a part or all of the third movable accessory 253 from the front side.

The third movable accessory 253 starts ascending from the initial position (fourth position) with the family crest accessory 224E remaining in the sixth position. The third movable accessory 253 is hidden between the initial position (fourth position) and the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the family crest accessory 224E that remains in the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode. , The movement of the third movable accessory 253 is made difficult to notice. In FIG. 34 (q), the third movable accessory 253 is rising toward the sixth position, and has already risen to the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 34 (r), the third movable accessory 253 has reached the sixth position and stopped at the sixth position. Even if the third movable accessory 253 reaches the sixth position, the family crest accessory 224E remains in the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode. Just as the first movable accessory 251 can emit light, the third movable accessory 253 may also be capable of emitting light, and even if the third display area 208-3 is in an opaque state, it is in the sixth position. When a certain third movable accessory 253 emits light, the light passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is the same as the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 20 (o). You can see how the light is emitted from the front side.

In FIG. 35 (a) following FIG. 34 (r), the transparency effect is executed, the third display area 208-3 is changed to the transparent state, and in the back of the third display area 208-3, the character of the lord is displayed. The third movable accessory 253 with a face drawn on it is located. The effect by the light guide plate IL is started while the transmission effect is executed, and in FIG. 35 (b), the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the lord who emits light by the light guide plate IL. The patterns that model the character's face appear to overlap. That is, the collaborative effect by the light guide plate IL and the third movable accessory 253 is executed.

Eventually, the production by the light guide plate IL was temporarily completed, the pattern of the light guide plate IL disappeared, and the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord was drawn was passed through the transparent third display area 208-3. It becomes visible (Fig. 35 (d)). Then, the production by the light guide plate IL is started again, and in FIG. 35 (d), the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the character of the lord who emits light by the light guide plate IL are molded. The sloping patterns appear to overlap again. Such an effect can be easily realized by repeatedly turning on / off the irradiation means (light emitter) such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate with light.

Eventually, in FIG. 35 (f), the transmission effect ends, the third display area 208-3 returns to the opaque state, and the third movable accessory 253 becomes invisible. In FIG. 35 (g), the family crest accessory 224E, which had been in the sixth position until then, started to rise toward the initial position while emitting light in the sixth display mode, and the third movable accessory 253 was the first. On the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208L, the descent is started toward the initial position (fourth position). In FIG. 35 (h), the third movable accessory 253 has returned to the initial position (fourth position), but the family crest accessory 224E continues to rise, and in FIG. It has returned to its initial position.

The above-described collaborative effect by the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest accessory 224E, which was performed after the chance button 136 was pressed, and the transparent effect in which the third display area 208-3 changes to the transparent state are It is a part of the final judge production, and it can be said that it is a fanning production, but in any case, it corresponds to a normal notice production.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (j), a scene in which the swordsman KG collapsed is displayed as a result of the final judge effect. That is, the lord YM wins, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (k). ing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the character of the lord who emits light from the light guide plate IL have the same size. The third display area 208-3 was one size larger, but the closer it is to the front, the larger it may be to make the sense of depth easier to understand. In the example shown in FIG. 35 (A), the pattern that emits light from the light guide plate IL is the pattern of the outline of the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253, and has the largest size. The third display area 208-3 is made one size smaller than the contour pattern so as to be inside the pattern. The face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 was made one size smaller than the third display area 208-3 so that it would be inside that area. By doing so, it may be easy to see that the light guide plate IL is on the front side, the transmissive liquid crystal display device is on the back side, and the third movable accessory 253 is on the back side.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a modified example of the transmission effect described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

(B-1) in the left column of FIG. 36 is in the same state as in FIG. 33 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 33, when the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is darkened, but in this example, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started. Before that, the darkening effect is started (FIG. 36 (b-2)). The darkening effect may be a precursory effect of the light guide plate IL, a notice effect, a transparent effect (a collaborative effect of the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest accessory 224E), a notice effect, or a light guide plate IL. It may be a precursory effect or a notice effect of the collaborative effect by the third movable accessory 253. By using the darkening effect as a precursor effect or a notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the subsequent execution of the effect, and the effect may be effective even when the effect is actually executed. In the light guide plate shown in FIG. 36 (c), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it seems that the pattern in which the face of the character of the lord is shaped is emitting light in the sixth display mode. 36 (b'-1) to (b'-2) in the middle row of FIG. 36 are the same as those of FIGS. 36 (b-1) to (b-2), and FIG. 36 (b). In'-2), the blackout effect has started. In FIG. 36 (c-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has stopped in a different first position. That is, in this example, for the left arc portion 2511, the back side of the left symbol display area 208a is the first position (hereinafter, referred to as “the first position on the left side”), and for the right arc portion 2512, the right symbol is displayed. The back side of the area 208a is the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "the first position on the right side"). In FIG. 36 (d-1), the left arc portion 2511 in the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the darkening effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed overlaps from the front side. Both the first display area 208-1L on the left side including the area and the first display area 208-1R on the right side including the area overlapping the right arc portion 2512 in the first position on the right side from the front side are transparent. It changes to a transparent state depending on the effect, and the left arc portion 2511 in the off state can be seen on the back side of the first display area 208-1L on the left side, and the right in the off state on the back side of the first display area 208-1R on the right side. The arc portion 2512 can be seen. Both the first display area 208-1L on the left side and the first display area 208-1R on the right side are semicircular areas.

In FIG. 36 (e-1), both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 emit light in the sixth display mode.

In the modified example in the middle row of FIG. 36 described above, the transparency effect is executed with the left arc portion 2511 in the first position on the left side and the right arc portion 2512 in the first position on the right side. This transparent effect is an effect that announces that the first notice effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect will be started after this.

The first position on the left side may be the second position on the left side with respect to the first position described with reference to FIG. 32 (c), and the first position on the right side may be similarly used with reference to FIG. 32 (c). It may be the second position on the right side with respect to the first position described.

36 (b ″ -1) to FIG. 36 (b ″ -2) in the right column of FIG. 36 are the same as FIGS. 36 (b-1) to FIG. 36 (b-2). In (b''-2), the darkening effect is started. In FIG. 36 (c'-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it seems that the pattern in which the face of the character of the lord is shaped is emitting light in the second display mode. Further, during the production of the light guide plate IL, the third movable accessory 253 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts moving and moves from the initial position (fourth position) to the fifth position. It is rising. In this example, the pattern of the light guide plate IL is easy to see due to the darkening effect, and the movement of the third movable accessory 253 is also difficult to see. As described above, the darkening effect functions as a precursor effect or a notice effect, but in this example, it also has a function of hiding the preparatory operation of the effect to be started after that. In FIG. 36 (d'-1), the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position, and in FIG. 36 (e'-1), the third display is in a state where the light guide plate IL is continuously produced. Area 208-3 changes to a transparent state, and the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the character of the lord who emits light from the light guide plate IL appear to overlap. .. That is, the collaborative effect by the light guide plate IL and the third movable accessory 253 is executed, and this collaborative effect announces that the first notice effect such as the pseudo continuous effect will be started after that. It is a production.

In the modified example in the right column of FIG. 36 described above, the pattern of the light guide plate IL is easy to see due to the darkening effect, and the collaborative effect is started without realizing the movement of the third movable accessory 253.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a further modified example of the modified example in the right column of FIG. 36.

The example in the left column of FIG. 37 corresponds to a further modification of the variant in the right column of FIG. Hereinafter, the differences will be mainly described, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

FIGS. 37 (b-1) to (b-2) are the same as those of FIGS. 36 (b ″ -1) to FIG. The production has started. In FIG. 37 (c-1), the third movable accessory 253 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts moving before the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and the initial position ( It is rising from the 4th position) to the 5th position. That is, in this example, unlike the modification in the right column of FIG. 36, the third movable accessory 253 starts moving after the start of the darkening effect and before the start of the effect of the light guide plate IL. In FIG. 37 (d-1), the third movable accessory 253 has reached the fifth position. In addition, the effect of the light guide plate IL has been started, and it seems that the pattern of the character's face is emitting light in the second display mode. The effect of the light guide plate IL may be started at the same time when the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position, or may be started after the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position. Alternatively, the third movable accessory 253 may be started before reaching the fifth position. In FIG. 37 (e-1), the third display area 208-3 changes to a transparent state while the light guide plate IL is being produced, and the character of the lord drawn on the third movable accessory 253. The face and the pattern of the character's face that emits light from the light guide plate IL appear to overlap.

From the center to the right column of FIG. 37, an example in which the operation of the first movable accessory shown in FIG. 32 is different from the conventional one is shown.

In FIG. 37 (b'-1), the left arc portion 2511 constituting the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position on the left side described with reference to FIG. 36 (c-1), and is the first movable accessory. The right arc portion 2512 constituting the 251 is in the first position on the right side described with reference to FIG. 36 (c-1). In FIG. 37 (b'-2), the darkening effect is started in this state. When the darkening effect is started, the left arc portion 2511 rotates around the left vertical axis (not shown) in the first position on the left side, and the right arc portion 2512 is not shown in the first position on the right side. Rotate around the vertical axis on the right side of. In FIG. 37 (c'-1), the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 after rotation are shown by dotted lines, respectively. By executing the darkening effect, the rotational movements of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are less likely to be noticed. When the rotation of each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 is completed, as shown in FIG. 37 (d'-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and the pattern in which the face of the character of the lord is shaped is the first. It seems that it is emitting light in two display modes. Next, in FIG. 37 (e'-1), the left arc portion 2511 rotated in the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the darkening effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed is overlaid from the front side. The first display area 208-1L'on the left side including the overlapping area and the first display area 208 on the right side including the area overlapping from the front side with the right arc portion 2512 rotated in the first position on the right side. Both -1R'change to a transparent state due to the transmission effect, and the rotated left arc portion 2511 can be seen behind the first display area 208-1L' on the left side, and the first display area 208-1R' on the right side. On the back side of, the rotated right arc portion 2512 can be seen. In both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512, the LED is built in the surface (front surface) that was on the front side before the rotation, but it becomes the front side after the rotation. There may be an example in which the LED is not built in the front surface (back surface), but in this example, the LED is built in both the front surface and the back surface, and in FIG. 37 (e'-1), the LED is built in. In the figure (f'-1), both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 emit light in the fourth display mode.

As described above, in this example, the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 each perform a rotation operation, but the darkening effect prevents the player from noticing the rotation operation. Since the chance button 136 vibrates and the transmission unit 191 vibrates, the rotation operation may be performed while attracting the player's attention by these vibration operations, but these vibration operations may be performed. It is also possible to correspond to the rotation operation only by the darkening effect without performing the above.

The position of the left arc portion 2511 rotated in the first position on the left side may be set as the second position on the left side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be set as the second display area on the left side. Similarly, the right side may be used. The position of the right arc portion 2512 rotated in the first position may be set as the second position on the right side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be set as the second display area on the right side.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect of the light guide plate IL.

FIG. 38 (b) shows the same situation as in FIG. 33 (m), but in FIG. 38 (b), the darkening effect has not yet started. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E remains in the initial position. The darkening effect is started in FIG. 38 (c), and the family crest accessory 224E starts moving from the initial position in FIG. 38 (d). The family crest accessory 224E that has started to move is also lit in the fourth display mode. In FIG. 38 (e), the family crest accessory 224E has reached the third position, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable accessory 251 has started moving from the initial position. Even while the first movable accessory 251 is moving, the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and the preparatory operation of the first movable accessory 251 is not noticed only by the darkening effect. In FIG. 38 (f), the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are united so as to surround the circular region S3'shown in FIG. 32 (c).

In FIG. 38 (g), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the extinguished state can be seen behind the first display area 208-1. .. Then, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started at the timing of FIG. 38 (h). In the production of the light guide plate IL here, it seems that the pattern imitating the effect image is emitting light in the fourth display mode. Then, after the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the first movable accessory 251 in the first position once emits light in the fourth display mode, and then turns off (FIG. 38 (j)).

In FIG. 38 (k), the transmission effect is completed and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, but the effect of the light guide plate IL continues. In FIG. 38 (l), the first movable accessory 251 has started the return operation to the initial position on the back side. The effect of the light guide plate IL is continued at least until the first movable accessory 251 is completely returned to the initial position so that the player does not notice the returning operation of the first movable accessory 251.

In the right column of FIG. 38, an example of adjusting the amount of light such as the LED built in the family crest accessory 224E and the LED incorporated in the first movable accessory 251 is shown.

The menu screen is called by operating the chance button 136 or the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 while the symbol is stopped or the demo is displayed. During the demo display, the screen may automatically switch to the menu screen. Further, even during the symbol variation display, the menu screen may be called by performing a call operation. A menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (A). On this menu screen, various adjustments and customizations can be made. Selection operations (cursor movement) are performed using the up or down keys of the cross key 181a of the operation key unit 181, and the decision operation is performed by pressing the OK button 181b. Can be done. In FIG. 38 (A), the light amount adjustment is selected, and when the OK button 181b is pressed in this state, the screen switches to the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B). On this light amount adjustment screen, an indicator showing the magnitude of the light amount is displayed, and the light amount is determined by increasing or decreasing the level of the indicator using the left key or the right key of the cross key 181a and pressing the OK button 181b. do. In the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B), the level is 6, but in the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (C), the level is lowered by one level to level 5.

On the other hand, FIG. 38 (E) is an example of a display screen when the menu screen shown in FIG. 38 (A) is called and light amount adjustment is selected while the transmission effect is actually executed. That is, the light amount adjustment screen during the production is displayed. The state in which the transparent effect is actually executed is also the state in which the symbol variation display is performed. In FIG. 38 (E), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the third position on the front side of the display screen, and the first display area 208-1 of the display screen is in a transparent state. The size indicator is almost invisible, but on the contrary, the LED itself that adjusts the amount of light is clearly visible. That is, the family crest accessory 224E lit in the fourth display mode and the first movable accessory 251 lit in the fourth display mode are clearly visible. Therefore, by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key 181a, adjustment can be performed while checking the actual amount of light of the LED. However, in FIG. 38 (F), it is not known whether the indicator level is 3 level, 4 level, or 5 level.

Since the level of the indicator is clearly visible on the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B), the actual light amount can be confirmed even for the light amount of the LED which is located at the initial position or the like and cannot be actually visually recognized. You can't, but you can rely on the level of the indicator to adjust it. However, the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38B may be limited to a screen in which the light amount can be adjusted only for the LEDs that can be visually recognized.

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect device of the third embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration of the effect device 206 of the third embodiment and a configuration of a modified example thereof.

In FIG. 39 (a), the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. A movable accessory on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (a). This accessory has the same configuration as the third movable accessory 253 in the effect device 20 of the second embodiment, but is the first movable accessory 251 in the effect device 206 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. It is arranged at the position of the accessory, and is hereinafter referred to as the first movable accessory 251. Further, a fixed accessory 255 is arranged on the back side of the first movable accessory 251. The fixed accessory 255 is an accessory on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn, and is a fixedly arranged accessory that does not move. The fixed accessory 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the accessory that was the third movable accessory 253 in the effect device 206 of the second embodiment.

The initial position of the first movable accessory 251 in the third embodiment is a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (b) is in the initial position. When the operation is started, the first movable accessory 251 rises from the initial position and can move to the first position on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 39B, the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is represented by a dotted line. Although the first position of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the fixed accessory 255 is fixedly arranged are displaced in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are almost the same positions in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. be. Therefore, the fixed accessory 255 is located behind the circle represented by the dotted line in FIG. 39 (b).

The first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with each of the first movable accessory 251 and the fixed accessory 255 of the third embodiment. Further, the first movable accessory 251 (left arc portion 2511 and right arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment is provided at a position where the first movable accessory 251 and the fixed accessory 255 of the third embodiment do not interfere with each other. You may. Further, the family crest accessory 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the effect device 206 of the third embodiment. However, in the effect device 206 of the third embodiment, the family crest accessory 224E may be omitted, or the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect device 206 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (a).

Also in FIG. 39 (c), the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. On the back side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (c), the face of the character of the lord is drawn upward, and the face of the grandfather character is drawn downward. The thing 251 is arranged. In this modification, the first movable accessory 251 can move up and down. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the first movable accessory 251 is first movable between the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located above and the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below. The accessory 251 is movable. The position where the first movable accessory 251 is located above is the initial position (second position) of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is. It may be the first position, and conversely, the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is the initial position (second position) of the first movable accessory 251 and is the first position. The position where the movable accessory 251 is located above may be the first position. The dotted circle shown in FIG. 39 (d) is a part of the first movable accessory 251 that overlaps the first display area 208-1 that becomes transparent due to the transmission effect from the front side. That is, whether it is the first movable accessory 251 labeled Change in the first embodiment or the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 in the second embodiment. Even in the first movable accessory 251 on which the face of the character of the lord was drawn in the third embodiment, all of them overlapped with the first display area 208-1 from the front side. Then, only a part of the first movable accessory 251 is overlapped. Further, the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 can be regarded as the first effect means, and the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 can be regarded as the second effect means. In this case, the effect using the first effect means on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn and the effect using the second effect means on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn shall not be executed at the same time. become. Further, the face of the grandfather character may emit light, or the face of the character of the lord may emit light. In this case, even if the first display area 208-1 is in an opaque state, the face of the character located on the back side of the first display area 208-1 emits light, and the light is emitted from the first decorative pattern. It can be seen that the light is transmitted from the front side through the display device 208L and is emitted from the front side in the same manner as the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 20 (o). Further, it may be easier to display the final display of the jackpot symbol mode when the face of the character of the lord is displayed than when the face of the character of the grandfather is displayed.

The first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable accessory 251 of this modified example. Further, the first movable accessory 251 (left arc portion 2511 and right arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment may be provided at a position that does not interfere with the first movable accessory 251 of this modified example. Further, the family crest accessory 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in this modified example. However, the family crest accessory 224E may be omitted, or the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an effect example in the effect device of the third embodiment and a modified example thereof.

The example shown in the left column of FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the effect device of the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

In FIG. 40 (b), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 40B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal notice. Further, the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (b) represents the upper end portion of the first movable accessory 251 in the initial position. ing.

In FIG. 40 (c), the transparent effect is started, and the display area 208-13 including the area overlapping the fixed accessory 255 from the front side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transparent. Change to state. As described above, since the fixed accessory 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the accessory that was the third movable accessory 253 in the effect device of the second embodiment, this display area 208-13. Is the same display area as the third display area, and is also the same display area as the first display area 208-1 corresponding to the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, which is shown by the dotted line in FIG. 39 (b). .. Hereinafter, this display area 208-13 will be referred to as a common display area 208-13. The common display area 208-13 may be slightly different from the third display area, may be slightly different in size, may be slightly different from the first display area, and may be slightly different in size. good. That is, the common display area 208-13 may overlap at least a part with the third display area, and at least partly overlap with the first display area, and only a part overlap with the third display area. , The first display area may be partially overlapped, the third display area may be entirely overlapped, and the first display area may be entirely overlapped. In the back of the common display area 208-13, which has become transparent, a fixed accessory 255 on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn can be seen. Even when the transmission effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 remains in the initial position.

In FIG. 40 (d), the transparent effect is temporarily terminated, and the fixed accessory 255 becomes invisible. Once the transmission effect is completed, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained in the initial position (second position) starts to rise toward the first position, and in FIG. 40 (e), the first movable accessory 251 251 has reached the first position. Although the darkening effect has not been started here, the darkening effect may be started before the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position, or at the same time as the movement starts.

When the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40 (f), the transmission effect is restarted, and the common display area 208-13 becomes transparent again. The fixed accessory 255 is overlapped from the front side by the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, and the face of the character of the lord is drawn from the front side through the common display area 208-13. The movable accessory 251 is easier to see than the fixed accessory 255. That is, the term "easy to see" as used herein includes the fact that the fixed accessory 255 is completely invisible and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen.

If the first movable accessory 251 on which the face of the lord's character is drawn, which is placed in front of the fixed accessory 255 on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn, appears by the transparent effect, the character of the grandfather It is easier to start the production of the first notice than when the fixed character 255 with the face of is visible. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end. As described above, in the effect device of the third embodiment, after narrowing down the visible area of the common display area 208-13 to one place, the movable accessory having a high expectation (reliability) is expected (reliability). ) Is placed closer to the player (front side) than the low movable accessory so that it looks larger.

The example shown in the middle column of FIG. 40 is a modified example of the example shown in the left column.

Similar to FIG. 40 (b), in FIG. 40 (b') in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown in FIG. 40 (b') is the initial position. It represents the upper end portion of the first movable accessory 251 at the position.

In FIG. 40 (c'), the transparent effect is started, and the common display area 208-13 is changed to the transparent state. In this modification, at the same time as the transmission effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained in the initial position starts moving toward the first position, and thereafter, in the left column of FIG. 40. It is the same as the example shown. The first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the first position even before the transmission effect is started. Alternatively, after this, the transmission effect is temporarily terminated, but the first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the first position after the transmission effect is started and before the transmission effect is completed. By doing so, the fixed accessory 255 is switched to the first movable accessory 251. That is, after the face of the grandfather character with low expectation appears once, the face of the character with high expectation It is possible to quickly perform promotion effects such as switching between.

The example shown in the right column of FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the modified example of the effect device of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c).

In FIG. 40 (B), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 40B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal notice. Further, here, the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located above is the initial position of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is the first position. It will be one position. In FIG. 40 (B), the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (B) is the first movable accessory 251 in the initial position. Of these, the lower end of the portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is represented.

In FIG. 40 (C), the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. In the first movable accessory 251 at the initial position, the portion overlapping the first display area 208-1 is the portion 251G on which the face of the grandfather character is drawn, and in FIG. 40 (C), it is in a transparent state. The face of the grandfather's character can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1 which has changed to.

In FIG. 40 (D), the transparent effect is temporarily finished, and the face of the grandfather character becomes invisible. Once the transmission effect is completed, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained in the initial position starts descending toward the first position, and in FIG. 40 (E), the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position. Has reached. Although the darkening effect has not been started here, the darkening effect may be started before the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position, or at the same time as the movement starts.

When the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40 (F), the transmission effect is started again, and the first display area 208-1 becomes transparent again. In the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the portion overlapping the first display area 208-1 is the portion 251Y in which the face of the character of the lord is drawn, and in FIG. 40 (F), it is transparent. The face of the character of the lord can be seen behind the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the state. The dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (F) is the portion 251G of the first movable accessory 251 in the first position on which the face of the grandfather character is drawn. It represents the upper end.

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect device of the fourth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment.

In FIG. 41 (a), the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. A fixed accessory 255 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a). The fixed accessory 255 in the fourth embodiment is an accessory in which the face of the character of the lord is drawn above and the face of the character of the grandfather is drawn below, and is a fixedly arranged accessory that is not movable. The face of the lord's character and the face of the grandfather's character drawn on the fixed character 255 appear by the transparent effect, but when the face of the lord's character appears, it is more than when the face of the grandfather's character appears. However, the production of the first notice is likely to start. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end.

On the other hand, a second movable accessory 2521 for a weak effect is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a second movable accessory 2522 for a strong effect is further arranged on the front side. Have been placed.

The second movable accessory 2521 for weak production is a pot accessory that constitutes a helmet, and the initial position of the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Become a position. The second movable accessory 2521 for weak effect shown in FIG. 41 (b) is in the initial position. When the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production starts to move, it descends from the initial position and covers the position of the fixed accessory 255 that appears to cover the head of the lord's character and the head of the grandfather's character. Stop at a position that looks like a head.

The second movable accessory 2522 for strong production is an accessory other than the bowl (for example, a roller, a blowback, an eyebrow, a stag beetle, etc.) that constitutes a helmet, and the second movable accessory for strong production is this. The initial position of 2522 is also a position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second movable accessory 2522 for strong production shown in FIG. 41 (c) is in the initial position. When the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production starts to move, it descends from the initial position to the position of the fixed accessory 255 that matches the face of the lord's character and the position that matches the face of the grandfather's character. Stop.

The moving directions of the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable accessory 2522 for the strong effect were both descending directions from the initial positions, but even if the moving directions of the two are different. Good, for example, the initial position of the second movable accessory 2522 for strong effect is set to a position lower than the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the second movable accessory 2522 for strong effect rises from the initial position. It may be. Alternatively, the initial position of the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is set to a position lower than the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect rises from the initial position. May be good.

Although the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production are displaced in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable accessory 2522 for the strong effect form a helmet when viewed from the front side. In both FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c), the circle represented by the dotted line above looks like the head of the character of the lord is covered with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production. Weak production when the second movable character 2522 for strong production matches the face of the character of the lord, and the second movable character 2521 for weak production and the second movable character 2522 for strong production are combined. Indicates the positions of the second movable accessory 2521 for strong production and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production. Further, in both FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c), the circle represented by the dotted line below appears to cover the head of the grandfather's character with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production. At the same time, when the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production matches the face of the grandfather character, and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production are combined, It represents the positions of the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production.

In FIG. 41 (e), it appears that the head of the character of the lord of the fixed accessory 255 is covered with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production, and the face of the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production is covered. Is a diagram showing how the character of the lord appears to be wearing a helmet by combining the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable accessory 2522 for the strong effect.

According to the fourth embodiment, a pattern in which the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production appears to cover the head of each character (hereinafter referred to as "first pattern") and for strong production. A pattern in which the second movable accessory 2522 of the above is positioned to match the face of each character (hereinafter referred to as "second pattern") and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production cover the head of each character. The second movable accessory 2522 for strong production can also perform three patterns of production with a pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third pattern") in a position that matches the face of each character. be. The larger the number, the easier it is to start the production of the first notice. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end. The second pattern may not be executed.

In addition, the character is given priority, and the third pattern is executed when the first pattern is executed and the character of the lord appears to wear the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production on his head. The production of the first notice is more likely to start than when the grandfather's character appears to be wearing a helmet. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end. Or conversely, when the second movable accessory is prioritized and the third pattern is executed and the grandfather's character appears to be wearing a helmet, the first pattern is executed and the character of the lord is The production of the first notice may be easier to start, or the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production appears to be worn on the head.

In addition, when the first pattern is executed with the face of the lord's character appearing, the first notice is produced more than when the third pattern is executed with the face of the grandfather's character appearing. Is easy to get started. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end.

The first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment. Further, the first movable accessory 251 (left arc portion 2511 and right arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment may be provided at a position that does not interfere with the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment. Further, the family crest accessory 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment. However, in the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the lens cut of the pattern that imitates the face of the character of the lord, the light guide plate IL is provided with the lens cut of the pattern that imitates the effect image, as will be described later. ing. In the production device 206 of the fourth embodiment, the family crest accessory 224E may be omitted. Further, the first movable accessory 251 and the fixed accessory 255 in the third embodiment may be provided in place of the fixed accessory 255 in the fourth embodiment, or the first movable accessory in the modified example of the third embodiment may be provided. The accessory 251 may be provided in place of the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an effect example in the effect device of the fourth embodiment. The circle represented by the upper dotted line shown in FIG. 42B and the like represents the position where the face of the character of the lord is drawn in the fixed accessory 255, and the circle represented by the lower dotted line represents the old man in the fixed accessory 255. Represents the position where the face of the character is drawn.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b), the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed on the upper right, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42, a darkening effect is performed. As described above, although the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L is in an opaque state, the back side may be visible depending on the color tone of the displayed image, but the display screen is dark. , The face of the lord's character and the face of the grandfather's character drawn on the fixed accessory 255 tend to be invisible.

In FIG. 42 (c), the effect of the first pattern is executed, and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak effect is lowered from the initial position to a position where it looks as if it covers the head of the grandfather character. .. However, the transparent effect has not started, and the grandfather's character is not visible.

In FIG. 42 (d), the transparent effect is started, and among the display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower display area 208-U of the fixed accessory 255 that overlaps the face of the grandfather character is displayed. It becomes transparent, and in the back of the lower display area 208-U, the face of the grandfather character in the fixed accessory 255 can be seen, and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production is placed on the head of the grandfather character. It looks like it's covered.

In FIG. 42 (e), the transparent effect is completed and the face of the grandfather character cannot be seen, but the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect remains as it is. In the following FIG. 42 (f), the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect starts to rise toward the initial position, and in FIG. 42 (g), the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is in the initial position. Returning once, in the figure (h), the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production starts descending again from the initial position, and this time descends to a position where it seems to cover the head of the character of the lord. .. The second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect may start ascending at the same time as the end of the transparent effect, and the position that seems to cover the head of the character of the lord without returning to the initial position once. When it rises to, it may stop at that position.

In FIG. 42 (i), the second movable accessory 2522 for strong production descends from the initial position to a position that matches the face of the character of the lord, and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production and the strong production are used. The second movable accessory 2522 of the above is combined to form a helmet when viewed from the front side. That is, the production of the third pattern is executed.

In FIG. 42 (j), the transparent effect is started again, and this time, in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the upper display area 208-overlapping with the face of the character of the lord in the fixed accessory 255. H becomes transparent, and in the back of the upper display area 208-H, the face of the character of the lord in the fixed accessory 255 can be seen, and the character of the lord is strong with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak production. It seems that he is wearing a helmet combined with the second movable accessory 2522 for directing. That is, the production in which the production of the first notice is most likely to be started is executed. In some cases, it can be considered that the effect that the jackpot symbol is most likely to be displayed is finally executed.

In FIG. 42 (k), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started while the character of the lord appears to be wearing a helmet through the transparent upper display area 208-H. In the effect of the light guide plate IL here, it seems that the pattern imitating the effect image is emitted in the fourth display mode at the position on the front side of the lower display area 208-U in the opaque state. Since the lower display area 208-U is displayed dark rather than transparent, the effect of the light guide plate IL is even more prominent, and the effect can be given a flashiness, and the character of the lord wears a helmet. It is possible to appeal the high degree of expectation for the production of the first notice or the big hit of the production that seems to be present.

In this example, the second movable accessory first moves to the effect position, then the transparent effect is executed, and the face of each character appears, but vice versa, and the face of each character appears. After appearing, the second movable accessory may move to the production position. Alternatively, the timing at which the face of each character appears and the timing at which the second movable accessory reaches the effect position may be the same.

Further, the effect start timing of the light guide plate IL may be before or at the same time as before the completion of the helmet, or before or at the same time as the start of the transmission effect.

FIG. 42 (d-1) shown above the right column of FIG. 42 is another production example following from FIG. 42 (d). It descends to a position that matches the character's face, and it appears that the grandfather's character is wearing a helmet over the transparent lower display area 208-U.

FIG. 42 (J) shown below the right column of FIG. 42 is a diagram for explanation, and the fixed accessory 255 is omitted for the sake of clarity. In FIG. 42 (j), the entire area of the upper display area 208-H was made transparent by the transparent effect, but here, a part of the upper display area 208-H is also made transparent by the transparent effect. Instead, as shown in FIG. 42 (J), the star display st is performed as an example of the decorative display, and the surrounding area becomes transparent. The decorative display is not limited to the star display st, the position and size of the decorative display are not limited, and the decorative display is variable depending on the effect and the situation. When this decorative display (star display st) is displayed, the final display of the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be displayed than when it is not displayed. That is, the expectation of a big hit in the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed when the decorative display was displayed increases. Alternatively, the decorative display may be a look-ahead notice. In FIG. 42 (j') shown below FIG. 42 (J), the star display st is located in front of the eyes of the face of the character of the lord drawn on the fixed accessory 255, and is viewed from the front side. And, the star display st overlaps in the eyes of the character of the lord. In addition, it may be easier to display the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode when the face of the character of the lord is displayed than when the face of the character of the grandfather is displayed. In this case, the character of the lord and the grandfather are displayed. Of the characters in the above, the decorative display (star display st) may be displayed only on the character of the lord who has a relatively high expectation of a big hit. Further, instead of the fixed accessory 255, the first movable accessory 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c) may be used, and further, the family crest combination shown in FIG. 32 (b). The object 224E may be provided. In addition, it may be easier to display the confirmation display of the jackpot pattern mode when the face of the character of the lord is displayed than when the face of the character of the grandfather is displayed. In this case, the decorative display (display of stars) may be displayed. The timing at which the display of st) is started may be before the character's face is displayed. In addition to the expectation of which character's face will be displayed in the first movable accessory 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c), the decorative display (star display st) is in front of it. By displaying the character's face, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and entertain even in the period before the character's face is displayed. In the effect shown in FIG. 42 (j'), the effect means (fixed accessory 255) arranged on the back side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first 1 The effect means (second movable accessories 2521, 2522) arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208L, and the light guide plate IL provide a collaborative effect. In particular, in addition to overlapping the effect means arranged on the back side and the effect means arranged on the front side, it is an advantage that the decorative display can be changed by the transmissive liquid crystal display device between them.

According to the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment described above, the effect means (fixed accessory 255) whose effect position cannot be changed is the effect means (upper display area 208-H) which can change the effect position. With the help of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) whose effect position can be changed in the lower display area 208-U, the range of the number of patterns of the effect can be expanded. Further, in the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of display areas (upper display area 208-H, lower display area 208-U) and a plurality of effect means arranged on the front side of the effect display means. One of the differences from the effects described so far is that the effect is a combination of (second movable accessories 2521 and 2522). The first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like may be combined with the first movable accessory 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32 and the like. The third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character is drawn may be combined, or the family crest accessory 224E arranged on the front side may be combined. Further, the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like are combined with the first movable accessory 251 in the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c). You may. Further, the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the second movable accessory 2521 and the strong for weak production arranged on the front side shown in FIG. 41 and the like. A second movable accessory 2522 for directing may be combined. Alternatively, the first movable accessory 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32 and the like, the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn, and the family crest accessory 224E arranged on the front side, and FIG. 39. The first movable accessory 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in (c) may be combined, or the second movable accessory 2521 for weak effect or the strong effect arranged on the front side shown in FIG. 41 or the like may be combined. 2nd movable accessory 2522 for use may be combined. Alternatively, the first movable accessory 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c), the second movable accessory 2521 for weak effect arranged on the front side shown in FIG. 41 and the like, and the strong effect The second movable accessory 2522 of the above may be combined. Further, three embodiments of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined, or all four embodiments may be combined.

Next, the configuration of the effect device of the fifth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect device 206 of the fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 43A, the diagonally front left side is the front side, and the diagonally right back side is the back side. The effect device of the fifth embodiment includes a movable accessory 256 that can move in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction). That is, the movable accessory 256 can move across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and in the state shown on the left side of FIG. 43A, the movable accessory 256 is more than the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is also on the back side, and in the state shown on the right side thereof, it is on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The movable accessory 256 is a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display, and is sometimes referred to as a versatile lighter. More specifically, the movable accessory 256 has a single LED array 2561, a rotating shaft 2562 extending in the longitudinal direction central portion of the LED array 2561 in the longitudinal direction, and an elevating arm (not shown). A plurality of LEDs are arranged in the LED array 2561 in the longitudinal direction. The LED array 2561 rotates about a rotation shaft 2562, and an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation loci of each of the plurality of LEDs to represent a pattern. Further, the LED array 2561 is attached to a tip portion of an elevating arm (not shown). The elevating arm performs an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion.

The initial position of the LED array 2561 is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L and on the front side or the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the LED array 2561 is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is lowered by the elevating arm to a position overlapping with the display screen (hereinafter referred to as "effect position"), and is rotated at the effect position (first position). The LED array 2561 shown on the left side of FIG. 43A is rotated at the effect position on the back side, and the LED array 2561 shown on the right side is rotated at the effect position on the front side.

A view of the effect device 206 of the fifth embodiment as viewed from the front side is shown stepwise from left to right in the upper part of FIG. 43B, and from the side directly below each figure. The figure you saw is shown. In the view viewed from the side, the right side is the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left side is the front side, and the player's eyes eye are shown on the left side.

In the effect device 206 shown at the left end of FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the back side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the pattern on the back side is due to the afterimage effect of light. Is formed. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, does not perform a transmissive effect, and the entire display screen is in a non-transparent state. However, no darkening effect is performed, and an image with a white hue is displayed, and the pattern due to the afterimage effect of the light formed on the back side can be seen vaguely through the display screen even from the front side. In the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the region overlapping the rotation region of the LED array 2561 may be made transparent.

In the effect device 206 shown second from the left in FIG. 43B, the LED array 2561 rotating at a constant speed on the back side has stopped rotating and is in the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture. For this reason, the pattern due to the afterimage effect of light has disappeared. Moreover, all of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 2561 are turned off, and no light emission on the back side can be seen from the front side.

In the effect device 206 shown third from the left in FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 returns to the initial position on the back side in the initial posture by raising the elevating arm (not shown). It is preferable that the display screen is darkened to make the LED array 2561 in the initial posture difficult to see from the time when the LED array 2561 stops rotating until it returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the display screen may be darkened at the timing when the elevating arm starts to rise, that is, when the LED array 2561 starts moving, so that it is difficult to see how the LED array 2561 is moving.

In the effect device 206 shown third from the right in FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 is moved from the initial position on the back side to the initial position on the front side. The LED array 2561 may be visible but not visible from the front side regardless of whether it is in the initial position on the back side or the initial position on the front side.

In the effect device 206 shown second from the right in FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 at the initial position on the front side is kept in the initial posture by lowering the elevating arm (not shown), and the first decorative symbol is maintained. It has moved to the effect position on the front side of the display device 208L.

In the effect device 206 shown at the right end of FIG. 43, the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the front side, and a pattern due to the afterimage effect of light is formed on the front side and formed on the back side. No, it looks clear.

When the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the back side, the area overlapping the effect position on the back side on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is made transparent. The pattern due to the afterimage effect of the light formed on the back side may be visible through the area. Further, when the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the front side, the background is darkened by darkening the display screen, and the pattern due to the afterimage effect of the light formed on the front side is made easy to see. May be good.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a modified example of the embodiment described so far. The modified example referred to here may be an example in which the embodiment is replaced with the embodiment described so far, or may be an example performed in addition to the embodiment described so far.

FIGS. (B) to (e) shown at the left end of FIG. 44 are modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 40 (B) to 40 (F).

In FIG. 44 (b), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 44B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal notice. Further, in FIG. 44 (b), the button effect is started. The button effect here corresponds to a judge effect that determines whether the face of the character of the lord or the face of the character of the grandfather appears. When the face of the character of the lord appears, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently performed than when the face of the grandfather character appears. When the face of the character of the lord appears, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, it may be easier for a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) to be started when the face of the character of the lord appears than when the face of the character of the grandfather appears. May be started. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136, which has been lit in the first display mode, changes to the fourth display mode. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (b), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. The arrow display 136b and the characters "press" are displayed as prompting prompt displays, and the remaining period meter display 136c is displayed as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. .. These button images and the like 136a to c and the like correspond to operation promotion displays. It should be noted that the button images and the like 136a to c and the like overlap with a part of the decorative symbols that fluctuate at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

The remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (b) is reduced by 1/5 or more, and at this timing, the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and the second display shown in FIG. 44 (c). 1 In the decorative symbol display device 208L, the button images and the like 136a to c disappear, the transparent effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. A portion 251G on which the face of the grandfather character is drawn is located behind the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, and the face of the grandfather character appears. Even in FIG. 44 (c) where the face of the grandfather character appears, the decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

In FIG. 44 (d), the transparent effect is finished and the button effect is started again. That is, the first display area 208-1 has returned to an opaque state, and the face of the grandfather character has disappeared. Instead, the button images and the like 136a to c are displayed again, and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (d) is reduced by 1/5 or more, and at this timing, it lights up in the fourth display mode. The chance button 136 is pressed again.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (e), the button images and the like 136a to c disappear, the second transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state. Behind the first display area 208-1 that has changed to a transparent state, a portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is located, and the face of the character of the lord appears. While the button effect shown in FIG. 44 (d) is being performed, that is, while the button images and the like 136a to c are being displayed, the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) moves. , The portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is located on the back side of the first display area 208-1. Even in FIG. 44 (e) where the face of the character of the lord appears, the decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

In the example described above, the button effect is performed twice in one decorative symbol variation display, but even if the button effect is performed only once in one decorative symbol variation display. good. That is, the button images and the like 136a to c are displayed before the effect that the face of the grandfather character appears, and the button images and the like 136a to c are displayed before the effect that the face of the character of the lord appears. The button images and the like 136a to c may be displayed only in one of the cases. In this case, if the face of either the character of the lord or the face of the grandfather appears once, the face of that character is confirmed. In other words, in the examples shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to 44 (e), after the face of the grandfather character with a low jackpot expectation appears, the face of the lord character with a high jackpot expectation appears. It also corresponds to a step-up notice. In addition, when the face of the character of the lord who has a high expectation of big hit appears first, the second button effect may not be performed, or the second button effect may be performed. There may be a case where the face is demoted to the face of the grandfather character, and a case where the face is promoted to the face of the lord-like character or the face of a different character in the light emitting mode (for example, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode) indicating the jackpot confirmation.

Further, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the transparent effect may not be started. That is, no face of any character appears. Or conversely, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the transparent effect is started after the operation valid period has elapsed (when or after the elapsed period), and the grandfather's character. Face may appear. In other words, the effect in which the face of the lord character appears may be started only when the operation is performed within the operation valid period.

Further, the means for producing the face of the grandfather character and the face of the lord character provided on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal is not limited to the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), and the face of the grandfather character can be used. The drawn production means and the production means may be a production means in which the face of the character of the lord who is different from the production means is drawn. In this case, of the two effect means, both effect means may be movable means, or only one of them may be movable means. When both effect means are movable means, the drive source may be one or may have different drive sources. When only one of the movable means is movable, the effect means fixed to the back side (back side) of the first display area 208-1 is arranged and fixed to the first display area 208-1. Movable effect means will be arranged between the effect means, and the fixed effect means will not be visible when they are overlapped by the movable effect means. Even in the case of the production means in which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn and the production means in which the face of the character of the lord who is different from the production means is drawn, the first movable combination shown in FIG. 39 (c). Even in the case of the object 251 the effect in which the face of the grandfather character appears and the effect in which the face of the lord character appears are not executed at the same time.

Further, both of the two effect means may have a light emitting means (for example, an LED). Alternatively, only one of the effect means may have the light emitting means. That is, only the effect means on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn may be the effect means including the light emitting means (for example, the LED is built in or arranged around), or the face of the character of the lord may be. Only the drawn effect means may be an effect means including a light emitting means (for example, an LED is built in or arranged around the object).

Further, in a certain effect, it may be configured to be selectively executed from a plurality of options including at least an effect in which the face of the grandfather character appears and an effect in which the face of the character of the lord appears. Further, before the start of the effect in which the face of the character of the lord appears, the large button image 136a shown in FIG. 15 (l-1) may be displayed, or the large button image 136a must be displayed. You may. That is, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed by the button effect, and the success rate of the effect (here, the execution of the effect in which the face of the character of the lord appears) depending on the display mode. And the expectation of big hits may change.

In addition, the effect of the appearance of the grandfather's character's face and the effect of the appearance of the lord's character's face were performed by changing the first display area 208-1 to a transparent state, but the face was used by using the light emitting function. You may leave it in an opaque state so that you can see the outline of. In this case, it may be possible that only one of the characters remains opaque, and the case where the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state is a big hit than the case where only one of the characters remains opaque. Or the expectation that a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is started may be high.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Further, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to 34 (r), the face of the character of the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like is The drawn part and the directing means of the face of the character of the lord may be arranged.

FIGS. (A) to (C) shown in the center of FIG. 44 show a second movable accessory 2521 for a weak effect and a second movable accessory 2522 for a strong effect shown in FIG. 41 (hereinafter, these two). This is an example in which the accessory is collectively referred to simply as the second movable accessory 252) on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 44A, the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and the second movable accessory 252 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown by a dotted line. Has been done. The second movable accessory 252 shown by the dotted line in FIG. 44 (A) is the first display area 208- in a state where the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable accessory 2522 for the strong effect are combined. It is located on the back side of 1. The second movable accessory 252 may be a combination of a second movable accessory 2521 for a weak effect and a second movable accessory 2522 for a strong effect, or a second movable accessory 2521 for a weak effect and a strong effect. It is not limited to the one that can be separated from the second movable accessory 2522, and may be an integrated accessory that cannot be separated by being combined from the beginning. The second movable accessory 252 has an initial position at a position deviated from the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a accessory that can be moved to a position behind the first display area 208-1.

In FIG. 44 (B), the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. Behind the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, the production means 2510Y for the face of the lord's character is located, and the face of the lord's character appears. The face effect means 2510Y of the character of the lord is also an accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. The second movable accessory 252 is arranged between the first display area 208-1 and the effect means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord. That is, the second movable accessory 252 is arranged in front of the effect means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord, and is located at the initial position in FIG. 44 (B). Both the lord's character's face production means 2510Y and the second movable accessory 252 may be movable means, and in this case, the drive source may be one or each has a different drive source. You may.

In addition to the lord's character's face directing means 2510Y, a grandfather's character's face directing means may be provided. Further, the size of the face of the character of the lord in the example shown in the center of FIG. 44 is smaller than that of the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, but may be the same size. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) may be provided instead of the above. That is, the example shown in the center of FIG. 44 may be an example that replaces the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, or may be an example that is performed together with the example shown at the left end of FIG. Here, too, whether it is the case of the lord's character's face directing means 2510Y and the grandfather's character's face directing means, or the case of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), the grandfather The effect that the face of the character appears and the effect that the face of the lord character appears are not executed at the same time.

The transparent effect is also executed in FIG. 44 (C), and in this transparent effect, the effect means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord and the second movable accessory 252 are combined. That is, the second movable accessory 252 is arranged between the first display area 208-1 and the effect means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord, and the effect means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord and the second movable accessory 252. By collaborating with each other, it looks like the lord is wearing a helmet.

The face effect means 2510Y of the character of the lord is fixedly arranged at a position on the back side of the first display area 208-1, and the second movable accessory 252 is set to the first display area 208-1 from the initial position. It may be moved between the directing means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord. In this case, the expectation of a big hit or the state where the face of the character of the lord appears, the face of the character of the lord who does not wear the helmet appears, and the face of the character of the lord who wears the helmet appear. The expectation that the production (for example, super reach production, pseudo-continuous production, etc.) will be started may be high.

Further, both the effect means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord and the second movable accessory 252 may have a light emitting means, or only one of them may have a light emitting means. When the first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state and the light emitting means emits light, the expectation of a big hit or a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) is higher than when the light emitting means does not emit light. May be higher in expectation that will be started. Further, when the grandfather character's face directing means is also provided, the grandfather character's face directing means may also have a light emitting means, and the grandfather character's face directing means may have a light emitting means. It is not necessary to have.

The uppermost figure (A) shown at the upper right end of FIG. 44 is a diagram showing shutter accessories 246L and 246R, which are shielding means, arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 44 (A), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not shown, but on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the face effect means 2510G of the grandfather character, or the lower half. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) on which the face of the grandfather's character is drawn is also arranged. The shutter accessory 246L and 246R are arranged between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the grandfather character's face effect means 2510G or the first movable accessory 251. That is, it is arranged in front of the effect means 2510G of the face of the grandfather character or the first movable accessory 251. The shutter accessories 246L and 246M can be opened and closed, and in the fully closed state, even if the first display area 208-1 is in the transparent state, the face of the grandfather character is completely invisible. On the other hand, in the fully open state of the shutter accessories 246L and 246M, if only the first display area 208-1 of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in the transparent state, the shutter accessories 246L and 246M cannot be seen at all. , The face of the grandfather character can be seen behind the first display area 208-1 (see FIG. 44 (c)). The shutter accessories 246L and 246M shown in FIG. 44 (A) are in a slightly open state, and a part of the face of the grandfather character can be seen between the shutter accessory 246L on the left side and the shutter accessory 246L on the right side. ing. According to the combination with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, the shutter accessories 246L and 246M can be used to incite the effect of the appearance of the face of the grandfather character and the effect of the appearance of the face of the character of the lord. That is, the effect that the face of the grandfather character appears and the effect that the face of the character of the lord appears are not executed at the same time, but in either effect, the effect using the shutter characters 246L and 246M is used. May be executed at the same time. Further, according to the combination with the example shown in the center of FIG. 44, the shutter accessories 246L and 246M can be used to incite whether or not the grandfather's character appears wearing a helmet.

The first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state, the shutter accessories 246L and 246M start to open from the fully closed state, and one of the faces of the grandfather's character is between the left shutter accessory 246L and the right shutter accessory 246L. When the part starts to be seen, in the state immediately before the shutter accessories 246L and 246M start to open (the shutter accessories 246L and 246M are fully closed), the shutter accessory is located at a position where it overlaps with the entire face effect means 2510G of the grandfather character. This means that 246L and 246M are located. When the shutter accessory 246L, 246M is provided with a window, the shutter accessory 246L, 246M is located at a position overlapping a part of the effect means 2510G for the face of the grandfather character.

Further, the shutter accessories 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44A are the accessories arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above (for example, the first to fifth embodiments and theirs. It is an accessory that can be arranged between the accessory) and the transmissive liquid crystal display device. For example, the fully closed shutter accessories 246L and 246R can hide the movable accessory that moves on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device, making it difficult to notice the movement, or starting the transmissive effect. Until then, the existence of the movable accessory itself can be made less noticeable.

The examples of FIGS. (A) to (D) shown below FIG. 44 (A) are examples in which an image of a sliding door is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This example may be an example that replaces the example shown in FIG. 44 (A), or may be an example that is performed together with the example shown in FIG. 44 (A). That is, on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the face effect means 2510Y of the character of the lord, the face effect means 2510G of the grandfather character, or the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c). Have been placed.

An image of a sliding door in a fully closed state is displayed on the full display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (a), and in FIG. 44 (a), a transparent effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the sliding door in the fully closed state gradually opens is displayed, and the part of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L in which the image of the sliding door is opened becomes transparent, and in the back, A part of the face of the grandfather character drawn on the directing means 2510G or the first movable accessory 251 is visible.

Further, the image of the sliding door in the fully closed state is also displayed on the full display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (c). FIG. 44 (c) may be in a state where the sliding doors are closed from FIG. 44 (a), or after the image of the sliding doors in the fully open state is once displayed (for example, after all the faces of the grandfather character are visible). ) May be in a closed state. Also in FIG. 44 (d), a transparent effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the sliding door in the fully closed state gradually opens is displayed, and the part of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L in which the image of the sliding door is opened becomes transparent, and in the back, A part of the face of the character of the lord drawn on the directing means 2510Y or the first movable accessory 251 can be seen. While the image of the sliding door in the fully closed state shown in FIG. 44 (c) is being displayed, the effect means 2510Y or the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) moves to make the face of the character of the lord. It is located in the central part.

In this example as well, a part of the character's face can be seen, which is a fanning effect. In particular, if the face of the character seen in the back changes or the face of the character cannot be seen even in the half-opened state by repeating the fully closed state and the half-opened state, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the expectation of a big hit or a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is started when the face of the character of the grandfather appears than when the face of the character of the grandfather appears. Expectations may be high. Alternatively, the greater the number of times the fully closed state and the half-opened state are repeated, the higher the expectation of a big hit or the expectation that a certain effect will be started. Further, the opening / closing speed may be changed, and the degree of opening may be changed (1/5 open or 1/3 open).

Again, the effect of the grandfather's character's face appearing and the effect of the lord's character's face appearing are not executed at the same time, but in either case, the effect of displaying the fusuma image is It may be executed at the same time.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Further, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to 34 (r), the face directing means 2510Y of the character of the lord may be arranged.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example in which a different accessory is arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 45 is an example in which the ring-shaped accessory 251R is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This ring-shaped accessory 251R is used for the variable icon change effect. That is, it is used for one of a plurality of types of variable icon change effects.

In FIG. 45A, the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. Has been done. The ring-shaped accessory 251R is a movable means, but may be fixedly arranged.

In FIG. 45 (b), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 45B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal notice. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 45 (c), the ring-shaped region 208-R surrounding the variation icon h0 in the second display mode is changed to a transparent state. The ring-shaped area 208-R covers a part of the display area of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the first hold icon h11 is not visible. In the state shown in FIG. 45 (c), nothing can be seen behind the ring-shaped region 208-R, but in the following state shown in FIG. 45 (d), the fourth ring-shaped region 208-R is behind. A ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light is visible in the display mode. That is, the ring-shaped accessory 251R, which was located in the region outside the region on the inner side of the ring-shaped region 208-R in the state shown in FIG. 45 (c), started to move, and the ring-shaped region It is located in the region on the back side of 208-R in FIG. 45 (d). The size of the ring-shaped region 208-R corresponds to the size of the ring-shaped accessory 251R, and in FIG. 45 (d), the ring-shaped accessory 251R emitting light in the fourth display mode. Inside, the variable icon h0 of the second display mode is displayed. The position of the circular area inside the ring-shaped accessory 251R shown in FIG. 45 (d) and the position of the display area of the variable icon h0 are deviated from each other in the depth direction (front-back direction), but are one in the vertical and horizontal directions. I am doing it.

Subsequently, in FIG. 45 (e), the variable icon h0 of the second display mode is changed to the same fourth display mode as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light. The ring-shaped accessory 251R may continue to emit light in the fourth display mode until the variable icon h0 disappears (the state of FIG. 45 (e) may be continued), or the ring-shaped accessory 251R changes after the variable icon h0 changes. The transmission effect may end before the icon h0 disappears, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may disappear. Alternatively, before the variable icon h0 changes, the transmission effect may end and the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light in the fourth display mode may disappear.

In this variable icon change effect, the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes suggests the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. , The variable icon h0 does not always change to the same display mode as the display mode of the light emitting ring-shaped accessory 251R, and may or may not change to a different display mode. good. However, the variable icon h0 may always change to the same display mode as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light, or the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R has a certain display mode (for example, the sixth display mode). In the case of the display mode or the display mode of the fourth display mode or higher), the display mode may be changed to the same display mode without fail.

As shown in FIG. 45 (c), the ring-shaped region 208-R changes to the transparent state when the ring-shaped accessory 251R is not located behind the ring-shaped region 208-R. You may not do that.

Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change at the same time as the timing when the light emitting ring-shaped accessory 251R appears, or the variable icon h0 may change before the timing when the light emitting ring-shaped accessory 251R appears. The display mode of is changed. In other words, there may be a period in which the variable icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R have the same display mode.

Furthermore, the variable icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may not have the same display mode, but may have corresponding or related display modes. For example, one of the variable icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R is blinking in a certain color (red), the other is lit in the same color (red), or one is lit in a light color. And the other may be dark lighting of the above-mentioned certain color.

Further, between FIG. 45 (c) and FIG. 45 (d), the ring-shaped accessory 251R once emits light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the variable icon h0 or in a corresponding display mode, and then emits light. The light may be emitted in the same display mode as the display mode after the change or in a corresponding display mode. That is, in the case of this example, the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light once in the second display mode and then emit light in the fourth display mode.

Further, there may be a failure pattern, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may remain emitting light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the variable icon h0 or in the corresponding display mode, and the display mode may not change. It may be possible that the display mode is downgraded (for example, the display mode is changed to the first display mode), or the display mode may be turned off. Further, the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light in the first display mode from the beginning, or may not emit light at all from the beginning.

The example shown from the center to the right end of FIG. 45 is an example in which a circular accessory 251C larger than the variable icon h0 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This circular accessory 251C is also used for the variable icon change effect. That is, it is used for one of a plurality of types of variable icon change effects. In the variable icon change effect in which the circular accessory 251C is used, it is expressed that the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes only by the circular accessory 251C, or it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. ..

In FIG. 45 (A), the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and the circular accessory 251C arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown by a dotted line. ing. The circular accessory 251C is a movable means, but may be fixedly arranged.

In FIG. 45 (B), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 45B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the normal notice display modes. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 45 (C), an animation is displayed in which the variable icon h0, which has been placed on the pedestal until then, emerges from the pedestal and rises. In addition, the character display "Dodeca hold change" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 which has not been displayed until then.

In FIG. 45 (D), the circular central region 208-C completely including the decorative symbol that is fluctuating at high speed in the medium symbol display region 208b that fluctuates at high speed is changed to the transparent state. As the circular central region 208-C changes to a transparent state, the variable icon h0 that has emerged from the pedestal and has risen is no longer visible. That is, it seems that the variable icon h0 that has emerged from the pedestal and has risen has disappeared once. In the state shown in FIG. 45 (D), nothing can be seen behind the circular central region 208-C, but in the following state shown in FIG. 45 (E), nothing can be seen behind the circular central region 208-C. A circular accessory 251C that emits light is visible in the same second display mode as the display mode of the previous variable icon h0. That is, the circular accessory 251C, which was located in the region outside the region behind the circular central region 208-C in the state shown in FIG. 45 (D), started to move, and the circular central region 208 started to move. It is located in the area on the back side of −C in FIG. 45 (E). The size of the circular central region 208-C corresponds to the size of the circular accessory 251C. The position of the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) and the position of the circular central region 208-C are deviated from each other in the depth direction (front-back direction), but coincide with each other in the up-down, left-right directions. In the state of FIG. 45 (E), the variable icon h0 once disappeared seems to be enlarged and displayed on the back side.

Subsequently, in FIG. 45 (F), the circular accessory 251C that was emitting light in the second display mode is changed and is emitting light in the fourth display mode. It seems as if the display mode of the enlarged variable icon h0 has changed to the fourth display mode.

In FIG. 45 (G), the transmission effect is completed, the circular central region 208-C returns to the opaque state, and the circular central region 208-C, which has been transparent until now, has a variable icon of the fourth display mode. h0 is displayed. It seems as if the variable icon h0, which has grown and changed to the fourth display mode, has returned to its original size. However, the variable icon h0 changed to the fourth display mode is still floating from the pedestal, and the descending animation is displayed.

In FIG. 45 (H), the variable icon h0 of the fourth display mode returns to the pedestal and is placed on the pedestal. The character display "Dodeca hold change" is still displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, but even if the character display "Dodeca hold change" disappears at the timing when the circular accessory 251C changes to the fourth display mode. Alternatively, it may disappear at the timing when the transparent effect ends, or it may disappear at the timing when the variable icon h0 of the fourth display mode returns to the pedestal.

In the above-described example, after the variable icon h0 moves to a certain position, the region including at least the region to which the variable icon h0 has moved (circular central region 208-C) changes to a transparent state and is in a transparent state. The circular accessory 251C is visible through the region (circular central region 208-C). Even if the region (circular central region 208-C) remains opaque without becoming transparent, if the circular accessory 251C emits light, the light is emitted by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be configured so that the appearance (light emission mode) of the circular accessory 251C emitting light from the front side can be seen. That is, even if the state remains opaque, if the light emitting mode of the circular accessory 251C changes, it is known that the change is made, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or it is as if the variable icon h0. It suffices to express how the has changed. Then, after the circular accessory 251C emits light in a certain light emitting mode, it is configured to be in the display state as shown in FIG. 45 (H) through a predetermined effect operation.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Further, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to 34 (r), the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) or the like may be arranged.

The variable icon change effect using the ring-shaped accessory 251R shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e) and the circular accessory 251C shown in FIGS. 45 (A) to 45 (H) are used. The variable icon change effect that was present is not executed at the same time. Further, in each of the production examples, the variable icon h0 was changed to the fourth display mode, but one of the variable icon change effects was a big hit than the other variable icon change effect. Expectations may be high. For example, the expectation of a big hit may be higher in the variable icon change effect using the circular accessory 251C than in the variable icon change effect using the ring-shaped accessory 251R.

The example shown in FIG. 45 (1) is an example in which the display means 251D is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display means 251D is a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, or the like, and is movable, but may be fixedly arranged. In FIG. 45 (1), the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and the display means 251D arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown by a dotted line. ..

The display means 251D shown in FIG. 45 (1) may be used for a timer advance notice effect. For example, it is used for a strong timer advance effect with a relatively high probability of a big hit, or when the timer advance effect is used for the final judge effect, it is used when the remaining time reaches a certain time (for example, 3 seconds remaining). .. That is, the transparent effect is started, and the rectangular area including the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes transparent, and the rectangular area becomes transparent. The display means 251D is located in the back of the, and displays a number indicating the remaining time.

When the display means 251D is an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the face effect means 2510Y of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 44 (B) and the face of the old character shown in FIG. 44 (A). The display means 251D can be used instead of the effect means 2510G, the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), and the second movable accessory 252 shown in FIG. 44 (C). In this case, even if the display means 251D is fixedly arranged, the face of the character of the lord can be moved or the image of the helmet can be moved by displaying the movement animation. Further, the accessory (for example, the first to fifth embodiments and modifications thereof) arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above is not limited to the effect means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord. The display means 251D can be used instead of the accessory) in the example.

The example shown in FIGS. 45 (α) and 45 (β) is an example in which the movable means 251 W is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The movable means 251W is movable as a whole, and the eight-generation accessory 251W1 and the general accessory 251W2 that constitute the movable means 251W are individually movable. That is, the movable means 251W can move in the first direction (here, the upper limit direction) as a whole, and the Yashiro accessory 251W1 can move independently in the second direction (here, the left direction), and is a general accessory. The 251W2 can independently move in the 32nd direction (here, to the right).

The transmission effect is started in FIG. 45 (α), and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L are similar to the example of FIG. 45 (1). The rectangular region 208-S including the region 208c becomes transparent. The movable means 251W is located behind the rectangular region 208-S that has become transparent. The movable means 251W shown in FIG. 45 (α) is located at the first position on the upper side of the area on the inner side of the rectangular area 208-S, and the Yashiro accessory 251W1 and the shogun accessory 251W2 are in contact with each other. There is.

In FIG. 45 (β), the movable means 251W is lowered to the second position which is the lower side of the region on the inner side of the rectangular region 208-S. Further, in the movable means 251W, at the second position, the Yashiro accessory 251W1 moves in the second direction (left direction), the general accessory 251W2 moves in the third direction (third direction), and the Yashiro accessory 251W1 The space between the general character 251W2 is open, and in the meantime, the super character 251W3 appears. In FIG. 45 (α), this super-role 251W3 is located behind the Yashiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 and was not visible, but the Yashiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 were opened. As a result, it advances from the back side, exceeds the Yashiro character 251W1 and the Shogun character 251W2, and is located in front of the Yashiro character 251W1 and the Shogun character 251W2. That is, the super accessory 251W3 is arranged between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 251W1, and the general accessory 251W2. The Yashiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may start moving laterally after reaching the second position (at the time of reaching or after reaching). Alternatively, the Yashiro accessory 251W1 and the shogun accessory 251W2 may start lateral movement while moving toward the second position, or may move laterally before moving toward the second position. May be started.

The position of the super accessory 251W3 in the front-rear direction may be the same as that of the eight-generation accessory 251W1 and the general accessory 251W2, or the position behind the eight-generation accessory 251W1 and the general accessory 251W2. May be good. Further, the super accessory 251W3 is also movable in the vertical direction, and the moment when the space between the eight generation accessory 251W1 and the general accessory 251W2 is opened is above or below the area on the inner side of the rectangular area 208-S. It is in the position of, and is invisible to the player, and after opening, it may move between the Yashiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2.

Further, the Yashiro accessory 251W1, the general accessory 251W2, and the super accessory 251W3 can emit light, and each of them may emit light in different display modes, or all of them may emit light in the same display mode. Alternatively, the eight-generation accessory 251W1 and the general accessory 251W2 may emit light in the same display mode, and only the super accessory 251W3 may emit light in a different display mode.

Further, in each of the above production examples, the display displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, together with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol. The mode may be displayed on the display device 208N, or may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N instead of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. You may. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may also be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the transmissive effect may be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol. This may be performed by the three decorative symbol display devices of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 79. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 46 to 79 is an effect in which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is opaque, and each effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 79 can be executed. In the pachinko machine 100 of the above, the transparent effect and the effect entwined with the effect means on the back side are the effects described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 43.

FIGS. 46 to 79 are diagrams for stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 46 to 79, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, FIGS. 46 to 79 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Although various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices in the present embodiment, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. .. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can be made to look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 46 to 79, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 46 to 79 show the state of the fourth symbol display device 284a1,284a2, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 has a square shape and is special. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights in the loss lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 1. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variable display of the special figure 2, and is a lost lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights up in a jackpot lighting mode. Further, in FIGS. 46 to 79, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

FIG. 46 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the character of the panda and the character of the lord is explained. This tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be displayed as a preview or a demo effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the characters appearing, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree may be configured to be able to be notified depending on the display mode of the tutorial display (for example, display in blue, display in red, etc.). In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In this specification, for convenience, the description described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this production example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame constituting the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46A has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the reception count display 850 of the character string image of "0 more times" is displayed, and the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception number display 850. Three lines are drawn in the stock button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), all four regions of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is 0.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This lord's character may be called a navigation character. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed all the time. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of the lord may be displayed included in the Ui unit UI3, or at least a part of the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of the lord may be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the UI unit UI3.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged, and can move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed. It can be said. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (c), the state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed is shown by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a preparatory image notice display that is displayed before the display of the preparatory image RDY, which will be described later, is started. Further, the shutter image may be displayed even when the notice is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayable in a plurality of types of display modes so that the expected degree of jackpot differs depending on the display mode of the shutter image, or the shutter image may be displayed in only one type of display mode. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is not shown only by itself.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (d), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the characters "preparing" are displayed. In other words, it can be said that the prepared image RDY is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and overlaps with the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (d), the background color of the preparing image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 46 (d) is the default display mode. .. The prepared image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even if the prepared image RDY is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) at the start of display. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the above-mentioned shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easily). In this effect example, a certain effect (for example, timer notice, mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this production example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to the gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in this golden display mode functions as a look-ahead notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI part UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and functions as a direct look-ahead notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. May be done. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be the default mode before the hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of whether or not the change in the look-ahead target changes. (For example, display of a decorative symbol indicating that it is a big hit or a loss) may be configured to be the default mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. This ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be focused on. There is.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (g), the hold change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11, and the first one. The state of hitting the hold icon h11 of is shown. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire first hold icon h11, making it difficult to see as compared with the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire hold icon h11. The effect EF4 also extends to the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the second hold icon h12 also overlaps with the effect EF4. In this production example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change pre-effect display. Further, only the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be used as the pending change pre-effect display. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change pre-effect display. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the display of the preparing image RDY may be started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Further, it may be configured so that the prepared image RDY is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the look-ahead mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, if the hold icon is changed after the ninja character NJ4 appears, the appearance of the preparing image RDY can be expected, so the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). Icon change and in preparation The target may be different, such as RDY, or the pre-reading notice and the target change may be different, such as the notice).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (h), the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 46 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light according to the display mode of the first hold icon h11. The family crest accessory 224E may emit red light after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or the first hold icon h11 may emit red light after the family crest accessory 224E emits red light. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of the chance eyes. The chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead display mode, but the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the chance eye is displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in sequence, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (i), the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 46 (j), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move onto the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It can be said that the tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the preparing image RDY, that is, the preparing image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (k), it is shown that "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is swaying and fluctuating, and the middle symbol is fluctuating and displayed at high speed. In addition, the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is reached, and the UI part UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI part UI3 remains until the super reach is started. It is not hidden.

After that, FIG. 46 (l) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest accessory 224E is started, or the super The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden when shifting to a specific super reach. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, or the UI unit UI3 may be hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, when the preparing image RDY is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI section UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach differs depending on whether or not the preparing image RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured so that a certain notice display or a certain mode of effect can be specified. It should be noted that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even after shifting to the swordsman reach.

FIG. 46 (m) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. When the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display is maintained only for the preparation image RDY, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the prepared image RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same positions. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest character 224E may return to the initial position after the swordsman reach starts, the swordsman reach may start after the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest character 224E. The swordsman reach may be started when the player returns to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (n), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and it can be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY ends (becomes hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This mini-game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, but the mini-game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the mini game is started, but the display of the image RDY being prepared may end and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the winning / failing determination may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters "iron plate" may be displayed without performing the mini game or the timer advance notice effect. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four regions (the upper region in the production example shown in FIG. 46 (o)) is the hit region. By hitting the hit area with an arrow, a highly reliable notice of the big hit is given. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, the certain types of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (configuration 1). On the contrary, another type of mini-game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or one of the configurations may be provided.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success. The display showing the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed in a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 46 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this production example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain production. When a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of the "iron plate" may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after the certain effect.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (q), the characters "iron plate" are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted by about 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed according to the result of the mini game, that is, another notice display is performed according to the result of the notice display. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Further, when the timer notice effect is performed, another notice may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the fact that another notice display is started just before the value becomes 0).

FIG. 47 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. It should be noted that at least one example of the plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

FIG. 47 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the production is illustrated as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 46, but the production may be performed in another scene, or may be a production performed only as a continuation of the production example of FIG. May be good. This also applies to the following figures. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 47 (a1) to 47 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini game as a notice display has failed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between the failure and the success of the mini game is made, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that the timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice effect that does not display anything even if the timer display countdown is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display. When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the word "chance" may be displayed small somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 47 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 47 (b1) to 47 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but it is shown that the arrow is stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game was successful but not a great success.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b5), the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays the princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, when comparing whether the mini-game was successful or a great success, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. ..

FIG. 47 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 47 (c1) to 47 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. It is shown. The mini-game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is also an example of a notice display in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and is started. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, it is configured so that it is easier to succeed when the mini-game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started. The mini-game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started. However, the mini-game shown in FIG. 46 (o) may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "iron plate" is derived, indicating that the mini game has been very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed.

In addition, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 46, the mini game was played in the effect shown in FIG. 46, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 47, the timer advance notice effect may be performed, or vice versa. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

FIG. 48 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 48 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 46 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 48 (a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest accessory 224E is also displayed in red accordingly.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a3), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

As described above, in this production example, the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY, but this may be executed only during the super reach. It may be executed not only during super reach, or may be configured to be executable during or without super reach. Further, after the third display ends in the first state, there may or may not be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may straddle the next variation. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

FIG. 48 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started instead of the mini game in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of the notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared ends. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started before the timer advance effect ends before "0:00". In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. It may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when is started. The timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example,) in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after the countdown reaches "0:00" indicating 0 seconds. , Iron plate image TP), but after "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, "iron plate") is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed. In a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after performing a certain effect display such as identifiable display or a display related to a certain effect display such as "chance"). It may be configured to perform the effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP). Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of performing the countdown, but may display up to "1" indicating 1 second. , May be configured to display up to "00:01". Specifically, "10" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display such as "iron plate" that can identify a certain effect display in the display area where the timer display was performed, or a "chance" After performing a certain effect display (display related to such a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, the iron plate image TP). Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of "1", just before another effect display is displayed, or up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1" (approximately the same). It may be different (that is, it is displayed at the timing of "0" in "2"-> "1"-> "0"). When a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing "NEXT" or "continuation" may be displayed as another effect display. Further, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is configured to be displayed immediately after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, another display is displayed after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed. (For example, a display showing how the timer display is counted up from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until the next chance up") is displayed, and then the timer display is displayed. It may be configured so that no other display is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, the timer notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In addition, in each effect example shown in this embodiment, an effect other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

FIGS. 48 (c1) to 48 (c3) are effects following FIG. 48 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 48 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to be gradually shortened according to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the number in the timer display and the display in the display mode other than the number. At first, only the reduction display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time reaches 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the start of the countdown by the timer display. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided and each may display a length according to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. Further, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the reduction speeds of the meters are different from each other.

Further, in this effect example, an effect may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance notice effect is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number 0 may be erased and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the time of the timer notice. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of one meter is long, but for example, as a result of the decrease rate increasing in the middle, the length of one meter may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numbers are also displayed.

FIG. 49 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 49 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 46 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. After that, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 49 (a2) to 49 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a4) performs a united animation and displays it. A pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of button production or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started by combining them. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice effect. The pair of translucent button images 136q are moving toward the center while being close to each other. In this production example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent button images 136q are united may be performed. In this case, two semi-transparent buttons are combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is more likely to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the images 136q is performed. It may be. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted. Further, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the combined animation may be performed using the same semitransparent button image 136q, or the translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL may be used. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a5), it is shown that the pair of translucent button images 136q are closer to each other.

Then, when the coalescence animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 49 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the character "press" is displayed together with the animation showing how the button image 136a is pressed, and the character remains below the button image 136a. The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

49 (b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b5). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 (b4) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescence animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown of the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced. Note that the countdown may not be started immediately after the timer advance notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, but the timer display countdown may be started at the start of the combined animation. According to this, it may be possible to easily specify the advance notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared during the display of the combined animation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (b5), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be set to "0:00" after the coalescence animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" when the coalescing animation is completed.

FIG. 49 (b6) shows how the combined animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the operation acceptance state was started. In this production example, the deca button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

FIG. 49 (c1) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIGS. 49 (b3) to 49 (b6). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to 49 (c2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 49 (b3) to (b4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (c3), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 49 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

Then, when the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the deca button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 49 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 49 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 49 (b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 49 also shows an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during the execution of the super reach. It should be noted that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the timer notice starts during the display of the introduced animation.

FIG. 50 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 50A, a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 50A, one variable display of special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (a). The background color of the preparing image RDY is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 50A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 50 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (b), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY being prepared has been started. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY is completed except for the super reach.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 50 (c), "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, it is shown that the timer notice production is started before the development into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, and the expectation for the big hit may be improved. As described above, in this production example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", it is relatively short time such as "10:00". It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to start with a long time in the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this production example, the timer display has a long time and the background is red, so that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved.

FIG. 50 (d) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to see because the family crest accessory 224E overlaps. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. At the timing shown in FIG. 50 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 50 (e) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, too, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescence animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown on the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (f), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but the same may be applied. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same depending on whether the timer notice display has the default background color or the red background color.

FIG. 50 (g) shows that the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, the remaining time meter MT was displayed, and the operation acceptance state was started. There is. In this production example, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 51 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 51 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1). The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 51 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a2), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and the hit area is hit by an arrow to determine the reliability of the jackpot. High notice is being given. In this production example, it is shown that a mini game is being played before the transition to super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord is stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the variable icon h0. It is shown that the notice by is increasing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. After the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest accessory 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light. After changing to the mode or the golden light emitting mode, the variable icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the golden display mode, or the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode. Then, the family crest accessory 224E may be changed from a red light emitting mode to a golden light emitting mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini-game is shifted to the invisible state by the shutter image. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image shows how the shutter image is released. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state in which no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini game may be started. Further, the display may be grayed out after the shutter image is released.

Subsequently, an example showing how the mini-game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (b1) to 51 (b8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b1), since one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and a notice is displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 51 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of the mini-game, which will be described later, is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this production example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game is started is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini-game is shown to start without displaying the preparing image RDY. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (b4) to 51 (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (b4) to 51 (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (a3) to 51 (a7), the description thereof will be omitted. After the mini-game is finished, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation or gray out the display.

FIG. 52 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 52 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 52 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (notice display) is performed. .. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display, which is displayed before the notice display, which will be described later, is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" is displayed instead of the preparing image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect. This "super heat" notice display may be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, even if it is displayed as a result of the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed without going through the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect. good. Further, the notice display of this "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of performing the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the notice such as "extreme heat".

FIGS. 52 (b1) to 52 (b8) show an example of an effect showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display unit TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (b1) to 52 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (a1) to 52 (a3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, it is shown that the timer advance notice icon I81, which gives notice that the timer advance notice effect is performed, appears. As a result, it is announced that the timer advance notice effect will be performed. In addition, other notice icons may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b7), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. In this production example, the timer advance notice icon I81 is maintained in the state of being displayed until the shutter image is completely closed, and the timer advance notice icon I81 is notified that it will be stocked. , It may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (b8), the preparing image RDY is in the default display mode. This preparing image RDY is displayed because the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is announced by the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notice effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. You may do it. Further, the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the preparing image RDY.

FIG. 53 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start or end timing of a certain notice display, and the start or end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state. It may be in the same state.

FIG. 53 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 47 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 46 (m), the description thereof will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 53 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and " The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the preparing image RDY is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is made. In addition, to congratulate the big hit, the family crest character 224E, the eight generation character 224Fa, and the shogun character 224Fb emit light in a multicolored rainbow display mode.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 53 (a5), "3:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started before the timer advance effect ends before "0:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is notified that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. The display of the characters "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a8), it is shown that the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol has been started. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, it corresponds to the advance notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started, the default display instead of the big button image 136aL is displayed. The button image 136a of the aspect may be displayed. Further, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a9), the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is changed from the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is changed to the combination of decorative symbols of, and it is notified that the probability variation jackpot has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

FIGS. 53 (b1) to 53 (b4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started during the continuation of the animation of the duel scene in the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene is continuing. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. The countdown may start before the development of the super reach, after the development of the super reach, or at the timing of the development of the super reach, or the reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b2), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge production has started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b4), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be promoted after that. In this production example, the timer display is configured so as not to be "0:00" even when the production button 136 is not operated in the final judge production. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". On the contrary, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 54 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 54 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. Only one type of display mode is prepared for the image RDY being prepared in this production example, and change display to another display mode is not performed. As described above, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot cannot be known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is to be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this effect example, one of a plurality of colors is selected as the background color in the timer notice display, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 54 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Note that the background color of the timer notice display may change before or after the timer display countdown starts, so that the reliability may be improved on the way.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. The timer display may be in the reach state after the timer display is set to "0:00", the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the timer display is set to "0:00", and the timer display may be set to "0:00". The reach state may be reached at the timing of "0:00". In this production example, there is a correspondence relationship with the display indicating that when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, it develops into super reach, and it always develops into super reach.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (e), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of "Go", the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and the process shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 54 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 54 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (k), a state in which the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed is shown. This princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without going through the button notice effect, timer advance effect, or mini game, and has low reliability, but the button advance effect, timer advance effect, or It may be displayed as a result of the mini-game being played. Further, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess.

FIG. 55 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (d) shows an animation in which the character of the lord as a navigator is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "Not yet", and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb goes to the tutorial display unit TT1 where the timer display countdown is performed, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display unit TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the state in which the preparing image RDY is displayed again is shown. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing when the button advance notice effect was started was notified, but due to the interruption of the timer advance notice effect, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigator character than when the timer advance notice effect is not interrupted by the navigator character. If the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the time until the timer display is increased and the count-up is extended instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared. It may be good, or the countdown speed may be slowed down. Further, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that the timing of 0 can be easily predicted because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the end timing of the preparing image RDY (that is, the start timing of the timer notice) shows the future. In some cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the preparing image RDY is continuously displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and the process shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 55 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 55 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer notice display after restarting has been changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. Further, in FIG. 55 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the start time of the timer advance notice effect is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the start of the super reach, after the start of the super reach, before the reach state, or after the reach state is reached, the super reach starts. May be started at a timing such as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be appropriately set to a time, and may be started from "9:00" indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 54, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not a development to super reach, but a cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer advance effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image is highly reliable. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is set to "0:00" at a good point in the super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. Further, the later the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (the start timing of a certain notice display) is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is.

FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 56A is the same as that shown in FIG. 54A, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56B, it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. At this time, "TIMER x 2" is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed, indicating that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be displayed at the same time as the display of the preparing image RDY, or may be displayed after the preparing image RDY is displayed. For example, the timer notice effect is initially displayed. You may make it think that it will be done once, but actually it will be done twice. Instead of displaying "TIMEr x 2", for example, two images RDY being prepared may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Here, the background color of the timer notice display may be the default display mode of green. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Further, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, when the timer display countdown is completed, the display of "TIMER x 2" displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be difficult to see by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes "0:00". Further, the display of "TIMEr x 2" may be left as it is without being erased. Further, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed.

Then, when the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (e), the characters "Go" are displayed in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock of the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is notified that the second timer advance notice effect is started. However, when the preparing image RDY is redisplayed, the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Is displayed in a larger size than when is displayed. Therefore, due to this preparing image RDY, the variable icon h0 and a part of the decorative symbol may overlap. In this way, the prepared image RDY may be hidden once and then overlapped with each other, which may have an effect of attracting more attention.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and as shown in FIG. 56 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to super reach. Displayed and developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the family crest accessory 224E is not overlapped. The prepared image RDY may be overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 56 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, a part of the variable icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of the swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the enlarged prepared image RDY may be displayed even during the execution of the super reach. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display and the second timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 56 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same as the size of the prepared image RDY that is enlarged and displayed, and when the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed, it is a big hit than when it is not enlarged and displayed. It is easier to confirm the design. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be enlarged and displayed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be enlarged and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer advance effect is more reliable than that of the first timer advance effect, but the timer display time is shorter. The timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice effect will be performed twice.

As described above, in this production example, when the number of clothes to be prepared is displayed and one prepared image RDY is digested, all the prepared images RDY are displayed in the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

FIG. 57 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (a1) to 57 (a2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 53 (a1) to 53 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord is drawn is arranged at the top, and the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn is arranged at the bottom. , The sizes of both areas are displayed to fluctuate relatively. The preparing image RDY is displayed even when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a4), it is shown that the acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect has started. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 57 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, the operation validity period and the countdown time of the timer display match. It does not have to be a perfect match. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

FIG. 57 (a5) shows how the player is performing a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is "4:00".

FIG. 57 (a6) shows how the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the swordsman placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Characters are shown to be dominant. This suggests that favorable results are likely to occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a7), the timer display is set to "0:00", the countdown is completed, and the characters "Go" are displayed. In addition, the long press effect is still being performed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In addition, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is further expanded, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is further reduced by that amount. It has been shown that the character of the lord is by far the dominant. The long-press effect may be terminated after the characters "Go" are displayed, the characters "Go" may be displayed after the long-press effect is completed, or "Go" may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the characters "" are displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character "Go" is displayed, the character "Go" may be displayed after the operation valid period ends, or "Go" may be displayed. The operation validity period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a8), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button notice effect, and the operation is valid. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that it shows an example in which a plurality of (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect has ended, or may be continuously set to the operation valid period in the long press effect. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a10), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the eight generation character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light emitting mode so as to congratulate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the preparation display ends in the long press part and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or near the end of the long press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example is shown in which the button effect performed in the next part becomes good.

FIGS. 57 (b1) to 57 (b5) show that the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b1), after the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long-press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice production is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the long press effect display, the character of the lord arranged above is drawn. The area has been reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn has been expanded accordingly, indicating that the character of the lord is inferior (the character of the swordsman who is the enemy character is superior). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain favorable results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b3), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button notice effect. It is shown that it has been started and the operation validity period has been set again. As described above, when the long press effect is performed and the timer advance notice effect is not performed, it is difficult to display the deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is likely to be displayed. If the timer advance notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b5), the main character, the lord, loses to the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4- The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is derived, and the shaking fluctuation is started. It should be noted that the flow may be such that the game may be a big hit even if the mini-game or the timer advance notice effect is not used.

FIG. 58 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button repeated striking effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of "set the meter to MAX in time by the button repeated striking" is given, and further. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), the effect button 136 is lit in white before the start of accepting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, the display of "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a can be said to be a display corresponding to the preparing image RDY (preparation effect display of the button repeated hitting effect). When the button repeated pressing effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 58A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (b), it is shown that acceptance of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has started. Specifically, the character "prepared" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation validity period is started. Along with notifying that, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button repeated press effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, it is displayed. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (c), "5" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since there is a possibility that a certain advance notice effect is performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by this countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 58 (d) shows how the player has started the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (d), "4" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 4 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 58 (e), the player continuously hits the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is one in red according to the number of repeated hits. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (e), "3" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 58 (f), the player continuously presses the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (f), "1" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 58 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is set to “0”, the operation valid period has expired, and the player has completed the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. It should be noted that the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in three red colors, that is, it is shown that the button repeated pressing effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is in a state of being lit in red, the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

If the button repeated striking effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (h) displays "Sorry ..." and notifies that the button repeated striking effect has failed. In this production example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display-like display.

FIG. 59 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 59 (a), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 59A displays the first preparing image RDY1. The function of the first preparing image RDY is the same as that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 59 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this production example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and it is shown that a plurality of preparing images are displayed at the same time. The first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are each subjected to corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.). All of these preparing images (first preparing image RDY1 and second preparing image RDY2) function as a look-ahead notice. In addition, the background color of each of the images being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, these preparing images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one may be started to be displayed and then the other may be started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 59 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 59 (b) shows how the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 59 (a) has ended and the next symbol variation display has started. Specifically, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. do. In addition, variable display of decorative patterns has started. It can be said that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are still displayed, that is, these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the production is started, all the other preparing images are also digested. Although all the images being prepared are digested in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display from the next time onward.

FIG. 59 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is notified that a corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (f), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and moves to the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. Preparing to do Image movement animation is being performed. In addition, a notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above is changed as shown in FIG. 46 (f), but is different. It may be a character. In this production, the preparatory image movement animation may start after the pre-start notice production has started, or the pre-start notice production may start after the preparatory image movement animation has started. Preliminary start notice The image moving animation being prepared may start at the timing when the production starts. Further, although the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 59 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, it may overlap with the second preparing image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (g), the hold change animation is started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire variable icon h0, making it difficult to see as compared with the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

FIG. 59 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, to reach the reach state, and then shift to the super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The number of receptions displayed 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the second preparing image RDY2. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

FIG. 59 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is still maintained. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (k), the timer advance notice display is switched from the second preparing image RDY2, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 59 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. The timer notice display is set to the default display mode at the start of display, and may be promoted such that the background color changes to gold after the display starts (for example, after the countdown starts). May be good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, the new preparing image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested, but the new preparation is performed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested. The medium image may be displayed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect by explanatory display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 60 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 46 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a2), it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the eighth shogun". .. In this production example, when the explanatory display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image described above is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanatory displays. In this effect example, it is shown that in one symbol variation display, when the explanatory display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display is performed between the explanatory displays.

FIGS. 60 (b1) to 60 (b3) show how the opening / closing display is performed by the shutter image when the explanatory display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 60 (b1) to 60 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which the notice display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but the notice display was not started and the explanation display was performed, which disappointed the player, and the opening and closing display of the shutter image was displayed. It may be possible to have expectations.

FIG. 61 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. 61 (a1) to 61 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 46 (e). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 61 (a1) to 61 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a3), the effect EF4 is erased, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as the default display mode. .. As described above, even if the above-mentioned pending change animation is performed with reference to FIG. 46, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change may be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared so that the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes differs depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

In the above-mentioned pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 was displayed overlapping with the UI section UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI section UI3 to display the UI. It may not overlap with the part UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

FIG. 62 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 62 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the circularly formed roulette board RR is divided into three equal parts. The grandfather's area is arranged in the upper part of the three sections, the princess area is arranged in the lower left, and the Chibi princess's area is arranged in the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each area in red, and finally the notice display corresponding to the area lit in red is prepared. The symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation display and the like end may be the same or different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends may be the same, or separately. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be called a look-ahead notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all the areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi are prepared respectively.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character appears, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the image being prepared is displayed, it is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the character itself that appears may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). Further, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi moves upward and overlaps with the lower left corner portion of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a6), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a8), the display in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a10), it is suggested that the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol displaying the characters “extreme heat” is derived, and there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is given by deriving the character "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect of changing the display mode of something, but an effect of giving a big hit notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a11), the display in a manner in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a12), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 62 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the character HME of the princess rises and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1, and notifies that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the above-mentioned "Go" display shown in FIG. 59 (m) is performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a14), the super reach transition display is performed, and it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to reach the swordsman. Further, although not shown, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this production example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the countdown by the timer display is completed, so that the display is hidden. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of Super Reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of Super Reach. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini-game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 62 (b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 62 (a2), only the grandfather's region out of the three regions was lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi, only the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character may be prepared. It has been notified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. Therefore, in this production example, only a mini game using drum DRM is performed.

FIG. 63 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 63 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a3), but "x2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. When a plurality of effects by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed for one prepared image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, it can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. On the contrary, one character may display a plurality of images in preparation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters, the Chibi princess character CHM1, moves upward to the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that they are overlapping. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a4), it is shown that the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Princess Chibi is started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a7), it is shown that the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variable icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display mode of the golden notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is ranked up.

63 (b1) to 63 (b4) show another example of production following FIG. 63 (a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 63 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 63 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi reaches the fluctuation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is darkened. Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in which the light extends in the horizontal direction from the portion. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden. If another mini-game is started while the display mode of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini-game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkening of the display screen. You may do it. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some of the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden. You may do so. In this way, the state in which the blackout display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this production example, the relationship between the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 is the first. The state may change to the fourth state, then the first state may change to the second state, or the first state may change to the second state, or the state may change to the second state. There may be a case where the first state is changed to the fourth state and then the second state is changed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the darkening display is completed, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Since the effect shown in FIG. 63 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 63 (a5), the description thereof will be omitted.

63 (c1) to 63 (c3) show another example of production following FIG. 62 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c2), display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game is about to start. The display of "Go" may start after the grandfather character GII starts vibrating, or the grandfather character GII may start vibrating after the display of "Go" starts. The display of "Go" may be started at the timing when the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to substantially the center of the display screen, and the production by rotating the drum DRM is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the preparing image is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini-game is started after the display of "Go" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini-game is started without the display of "Go". .. Further, the big hit may be more likely to occur when the mini-game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini-game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini-game, the timer advance notice effect, or the like may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the display of the third display system is easier to understand because the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different. It may have the effect.

FIG. 64 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left side effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right side effect display is performed may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (certain notice display) may be displayed on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64A, one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 64A displays the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 64A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (b), the multi-chance up notice has been started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left notice display area CUL, "Princess Chibi participates in SP reach due to annihilation" is displayed, and the princess Chibi Musou production with the mission of princess annihilating a large number of minions is performed, and the notice on the right side In the display area CUR, the display "Don't win the SP reach" is displayed, and the old man and the lord make a drinking comparison, and the drinking comparison production is performed with the mission that the lord wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production will shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions is achieved, and the reliability will increase when both missions are achieved. Has been done. In addition, the drinking comparison production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, or both productions are started at the same time. May be done. Further, in this production example, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production. There is. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be said. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters “chance” are displayed is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed. It has been reported that this makes it easier to accomplish the mission in the Chibihime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area where the notice display is performed do not match, which may give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the interest. .. The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance up in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. In the tutorial display unit TT1, it is hidden because the mini game is finished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (f), it is shown that the minions have been wiped out and the mission has been achieved in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (g), the character "annihilation" was displayed together with the up display of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the production of Princess Chibi Musou was achieved. Has been notified. In the right side notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking and comparing is continuing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (h), it is shown that the grandfather won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right side notice display area CUR, and the mission was accomplished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (i), the word "win" is displayed together with the up display of the lord in the right notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison production has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (j), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was completed, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production was completed, so Chibihime appears as an ally of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is completed and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production fails, it will shift to the swordsman reach, but Chibihime will not appear, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production will be completed, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in is unsuccessful, it will move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this production, the content of the subsequent production differs depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, but it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not the notice display started via the mini game started from the preparing image RDY or the timer notice effect. ing.

FIG. 65 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 64. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (c), it is shown that both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production are performed. In this production example, the display of the preparing image RDY is continued, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This production continues from FIG. 65 (c) to FIG. 65 (e). In FIG. 65 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 65 (f) to 65 (j) are performed. In the effect shown in FIGS. 65 (f) to (j), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effect shown in FIGS. 64 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except for this, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (k), the preparing image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the preparing image RDY ends, and the notice display corresponding to the preparing image RDY is displayed. It has been notified that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area, and when the arrow hits the hit area, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be said. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (m), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. In this way, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than that when the mini-game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

FIG. 66 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 66 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a2), the "reach if caught" display is performed, and it is shown that the chasing effect whose mission is to catch Echigoya is started. There is. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a3), it is shown that the lord is closing the distance from the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a4), it is shown that the lord caught Echigoya and the mission was accomplished. As a result, it is notified that the reach will be reached. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the preparing image RDY to indicate that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display will occur.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the chasing effect is completed, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the reach is reached in "decoration 4". The situation is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the reach was generated by the success of the mission in the chase production. When the main display is displayed in full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display becomes full screen display, the preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b2) show another example of the effect relating to the display of the sub-window during the execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 66 (a1) to (a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. Further, the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 66 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this production example, the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation are displayed at positions where they do not overlap, but the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3 and the image in preparation may overlap with the sub-window WP3. It may be overlapped.

FIGS. 66 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 66 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (c2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image. The RDY1 is displayed only in the sub-window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the first preparing image RDY1 displayed at the position displayed so far is erased.

FIGS. 66 (d1) to 66 (d2) show a display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is tilted. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 64 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the image RDY being prepared shows that the display does not tilt together with the background display.

FIG. 67 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a4), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a6), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIGS. 67 (b1) to 67 (b8) explain another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to 67 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a1) to 67 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. It is shown that it is displayed in this way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in. In this production example, the mission is more likely to succeed when the mini-game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is played on the first step-up display unit SUB. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is successful on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is successful on the first step-up display unit SUB.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b4), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, in the mini-game display area, "Cup in" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b5), a state in which the character of the lord puts and the golf ball heads toward the cup is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit. UI3 returns to the default position.

In this production example, an example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a display showing that all the pins have not fallen is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the cup has not been made may be displayed to notify the mission failure. Further, in this production example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appears. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 67. Since the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this production example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which something in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA has started to be displayed, or the first step-up display unit SUA may be started to be displayed after the explanation display has been deleted. The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is started to be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (a3) to 68 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 68 (a3) to 68 (a5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 67 (a3) to 67 (a5), and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed with explanations. Since it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a6), it is continuously shown that the mission has been achieved.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variable icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a8), it is shown that the variable icon h0 is redisplayed in the red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. It should be noted that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be passed through a mini game, a timer advance notice effect, or the like.

FIGS. 68 (b1) to 68 (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 68 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1), except that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this production example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed even though the hold icon h11 is moved upward of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps with the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that even if the UI unit UI3 moves, a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move.

FIG. 68 (b3) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini-game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 69 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69A, the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 69A, one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 69 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 69A has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 69 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 69B shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to its initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (c), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 69 (d) to 69 (f), the UI unit UI 3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained in a state where the display position is lowered as shown in FIG. 69 (f).

FIG. 69 (g) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (j), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission is accomplished. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (l), a preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. Will be done. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 69 (l) shows how the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out. At this time, the prepared image RDY overlaps with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 69 (m), at least one until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 70 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), one variable display of special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 70 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a1), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 70 (a2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a3), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a4) to 70 (a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first prepared image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 70 (a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed in a lowered display state. The display state of the first prepared image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.

FIG. 70 (a7) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed by lifting the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed so as to overlap with the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparing image RDY1 may overlap with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be raised, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps with the first preparing image RDY1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following productions.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a10), a character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini-game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. Can be done. The background color of the third preparing image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a12) to 70 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out.

70 (b1) to 70 (b2) are views showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 70 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 70 (a3). Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 70 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that the display is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered only on the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed. That is, it is shown that a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed even if the UI unit UI3 is framed out.

FIG. 71 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) displays the preparing image RDY. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is displayed on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. The middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a3), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol is slowed down, and it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the symbol of the lord is scrolling in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a4), it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the pseudo-ream symbol stop animation that directs whether or not to start the pseudo-ream is started. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the preparing image RDY. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be started. The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation is started. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in a certain state such as when a pseudo-ream effect is performed or when a pseudo-ream is established. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 71 (a5) to 71 (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of them is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol also overlaps with the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It also overlaps with the character of the lord displayed on 208N and the second hold number display. At this time, the family crest accessory 224E started to rise and overlapped a part of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (a8), the family crest accessory 224E rotates, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don", and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

FIG. 71 (a9) shows how the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been done. The UI part FI animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, the UI part FI animation may be started before the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started. The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. The decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-pseudo-ream pattern-decoration 7", and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. NS.

FIGS. 71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show an example of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 71 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each darken and display, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is shown that the center shines and the light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light rays are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, in this production example, it is also shown that the preparing image RDY is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, the preparing image RDY may be terminated during the blackout display, and a mini game or a timer advance notice effect may be started.

FIG. 71 (b3) shows how the Stechen production has been completed. In this production example, after the end of the Stechen effect, the same display as before the start of the Stechen effect is performed. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen production in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 72 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 72 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 72A has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during the execution of the swordsman reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they move toward the center while being close to each other. Is moving. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (c), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 72 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, in FIG. 72 (c), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI part UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI part UI3 is framed out, or the effect may be displayed at the timing when the UI part UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (d), the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the remaining time meter MT was also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance status. It is shown that it has started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period when the button notice effect is performed by the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6" is displayed. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in a loss display mode. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) has a notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 73 (a2), the state in which the symbol is still displayed is shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a3). , The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle framed in from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 73 (a3) to 73 (a5), it is shown that the character runs toward the right end. .. That is, in this effect example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, and the effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. , UI unit UI3 may be able to change the display mode naturally. For example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with a wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lord on the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is completed and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

In this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be displayed in the state where the preparing image RDY is displayed. If the UI section wipe display section WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unknowingly. It may be finished and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

73 (b1) to 73 (b4) show an example of the display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in gold, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 73 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generation accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 73 (b2) to 73 (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet. It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (b4), after the feet of the swordsman character are displayed, the swordsman character is scrolled and displayed in a manner in which the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top of the head and the feet of the swordsman character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this production example, an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling in the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not restarted or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI part UI3 is displayed), a certain part of the UI part UI3 is used to display a certain part. It can be said that an example of doing this is shown.

FIG. 74 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 74 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start port and a second special figure start port for one start port, and a symbol can be assigned in a normal gaming state. Examples thereof include so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 maintenance machines) capable of holding 8 variable displays. Here, a MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement in front and behind. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of special figures 1 and 2 are held, and therefore, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed. It has been. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 74 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight-generation accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 74 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the start port of the second special figure, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 that are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the grandfather imitating the face of the grandfather. In addition, the UI unit UI3 has also changed from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "pon" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, when the hold is full, the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once. In this production example, the number of times of symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the grandfather may be notified.

FIG. 74 (b1) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 74 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed, and according to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (b1). It has been notified that four are on hold and three special figures 2 are on hold.

FIG. 74 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the start port of the second special figure, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the second hold number display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120 Will output a "pon" voice to notify you that the hold is full.

FIG. 74 (b3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the hold was full during the production of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8. Has changed from the default display mode to the grandfather's display mode. In this production example, if the UI section UI3 is hidden by Super Reach and the hold is full, when the UI section UI3 is redisplayed, the UI section UI3, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of an effect of changing the display mode is shown.

74 (c1) to 74 (c4) are views for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 74 (b1) to 74 (b3). The effects shown in FIGS. 74 (c1) to 74 (c2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 74 (b1) to 74 (b2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 (c3) shows that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Further, in this production example, the hold was full during the execution of the swordsman reach production, but the display mode of the UI section UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 was not changed, and the hold was full. The character "MAX" indicating that the message is displayed is displayed above the variable icon h0. After that, the symbol is confirmed and displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 do not change.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold and changes. All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the grandfather display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 75 (a1) to 75 (a3) and 75 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display unit TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. Further, in this production example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI 4, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI 4. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned eight generation accessory 224F and the general accessory. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a2), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a3), it is shown that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparing image RDY4. The background color of the fourth preparing image RDY4 is green, which is the default display mode. As described above, in this production example, an example of displaying the preparing image in each of the plurality of explanatory display portions is shown.

75 (b1) to 75 (b2) are views showing another production example following FIG. 75 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 75 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 75 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (b2), the fourth preparing image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the display is shifted upward from the position. That is, it is shown that the image being prepared overlaps a part of the area where the explanatory display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode to the tutorial display unit TT4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather's character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech balloon TT3 is displayed with the dialogue "here", and the conversation notice is continuing. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also has a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E. It is shown that it appears above. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the balloon portion TT2 and overlaps with the balloon portion TT2, but does not overlap with the balloon portion TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this production example, the dialogue notice (speech balloon portion TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the figure of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the expansion animation includes the one in which the hold display frame FL1 is gradually expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 75 (c5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, FIG. 75 (c6) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display a notice to give the player a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (c7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY being prepared, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 76 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon h12 of the above is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode of lighting in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight generation accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , It is separated from the tutorial display unit TT7 and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the display area. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed in the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the prepared image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

76 (b1) to 76 (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 76 (a1) to 76 (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 76 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (b2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (a2) as described above. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 76 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden, but it may be displayed. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 79 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. The display position of the ball removal error warning display (hereinafter referred to as "ball removal error display") is set to a fixed position, but which position should be set as the display position can be appropriately set. be. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is deleted when the ball removal button 130 is operated to eliminate the lower plate full tank state and the ball removal error is resolved. Further, in the production example shown below, a display example of a ball removal error display is shown, but it can also be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, when the ball removal error is displayed, the error sound may be output together or may not be output.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (a1) to 77 (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 46 (c) to (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed by overlapping a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, "Please remove the ball" is displayed, and it is urged to produce the game balls stored in the lower plate to eliminate the lower plate full tank state.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the preparing image RDY, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing image RDY is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 48 (c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (b1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the display of one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlapping state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is in a state where it is easy to see. As a result, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is completed, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (c1) to 77 (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role, but overlaps with the semi-transparent button image 136q related to the coalescence animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the semi-transparent button image 136q in the coalescence animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q comes close to each other, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the coalescence animation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by watching the coalescence animation. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to watch the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (d1) to 77 (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 56 (f) to 56 (g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. It does not overlap with the UI part UI3 including TT1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (d2), the preparing image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1 to notify that the second timer advance notice effect is started, but the preparing image RDY is redisplayed. Occasionally, the image RDY being prepared for the first time is enlarged and displayed as compared with the case when the image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparing image RDY will be overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped with the tutorial display unit TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the enlarged image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (e1) to 77 (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 57 (a5) to 57 (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the swordsman character is drawn, but the character of the lord is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e2), as a result of the player pressing and holding the effect button 136, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn expands, and then the lord's character is drawn. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 will overlap the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Also, look at the superiority and inferiority of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the character of the lord and the character of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role is completed. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 77 (f1) to 77 (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 59 (e) to 59 (f). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the second preparing image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the characters "Go" are displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY is displayed).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f2), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1 is obtained. Preparing to move to Image moving animation is being performed. In addition, a notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. At this time, the overlapping state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not have to overlap with the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 can be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is completed, an opportunity to remove the ball can be given. In some cases.

The production example shown in FIGS. 78 (a1) to 78 (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production example shown in FIGS. 62 (a3) to 62 (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right part thereof, and is displayed on the upper left part of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this production example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with respect to a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of a plurality of preparing images (including characters). In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at a plurality of preparing images. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and a plurality of preparing images, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing images is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 62 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 78 (a2), the preparation image (character CHM of Princess Chibi) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, so that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in any display. Does not overlap with.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 64 (b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially in the center of the left side notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (e), a mini game is executed based on the preparing image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this chance-up cut-in image WCI. As a result, the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is completed, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d1), in the production example shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d2), the above-mentioned chasing effect is started. When the chasing effect is started, the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 78 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the sub-window WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 (d1) to (d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is being damaged. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the image RDY being prepared shows that the display does not tilt together with the background display. At this time, the display position of the ball removal error display ERR1 is not changed even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and the display state is maintained without tilting. At this time, the margin portion is represented in black due to the inclination of the background image. Then, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this margin portion. For example, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin portion and a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 67 (a1) to 67 (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the error display ERR1 without a ball may be noticed by watching the UI part UI3 rise. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 79 (a1) to 79 (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 69 (d) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a1), in the production example shown in FIG. 69 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is shown. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this production example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 with the UI part UI3 is eliminated while the UI part UI3 is framed out downward by the UI part FO animation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 79 (b1) to 79 (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 73 (a3) to 73 (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b1), in the production example shown in FIG. 73 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle displayed on the UI section wipe display section WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lord on the motorcycle is moving to the right end of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI unit wipe display unit WP3, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 79 (c1) to 79 (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 76 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part of the decorative symbol is overlaid on the decorative symbol. It is shown that it is wrapping. It should be noted that there is no overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 79 (c2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 79 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the sub window WP3, and the other part overlaps with the hold icon display area. The ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the enlarged hold icon display area. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by observing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area is completed, a trigger for removing the ball is given. May be possible.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 79 (d1) to 79 (d3) show variations in the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1), the display mode of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. In some cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2), and the display of "please remove the ball" is shown in white on a black background. It is said to be the mode represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been used, but the decorative symbol display device has been described. Needless to say, even a pachinko machine 100 equipped with only one of the above can be applied. Further, it can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, and can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. 266, which will be described later, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 267.

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (g). Pre-production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 46 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 46 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to (p)] is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (h), the ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the pre-effect display has been performed.],
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), preparations are being made in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. Image RDY display has started, etc.],
The display started in the first state, and the display may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (d) to 46 (n), the UI The image RDY in preparation, which started to be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, has finished displaying when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIGS. 46 (n) to 46 (FIG.) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q)] may be started [for example, FIGS. 46 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q) is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed].
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (l) to (m), it was displayed when shifting to the swordsman reach. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is held. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display [for example, FIG. 46 (Fig. 46). As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is overlaid on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 46 (d). The display position of the image RDY being prepared and the display position of the image RDY being prepared as shown in FIG. 46 (m) are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 46 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the golden display mode shown in FIG. 46 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to be started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is attached to the UI part UI3. Overlapping, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to do so. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. No etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q)]".
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q). ) Before the start],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q) is being executed]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to 46 (p)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q)].
The certain notice display is a display for notifying the start of the certain effect [for example, in the mini-games shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to 46 (p), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Foretells the display of the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain notice display may give a notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than the start of a certain effect. Further, a certain notice display may always give a notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give a notice that a certain effect will be started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may always be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 46 (Fig. 46). i) As shown in Fig. (J), the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Further, "The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display may be erased in a certain symbol variation display. The started first display may be erased other than before the next started symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variation display. The first display may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, "the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), the characters" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1. A notice display consisting of [may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to 49 (b6), the deca button image 136aL is prepared. The display is started after the medium image RDY is started to be displayed],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), the iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b6), the preparing image RDY. Is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may be such that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images RDY1 and RDY2 in preparation may be displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (a)],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the enlarged prepared image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIGS. 56 (b) to (k). As shown, the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example," Panda is the master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a)." Explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (g). ) Shown in the ninja character NJ4, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, the hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 46 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparation display, for example, a preparation image RDY or the like shown in FIG. 46 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to (p), or the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 48 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc. shown in] is waiting to be started.
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [Hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 46 (d)). As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display is started in the first state. The third display is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The preparation display ends when the hold icon is hidden, for example, the display starts when the UI unit UI3 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 46 (d) to 46 (n). The image RDY being prepared is displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [the hold icon is not. After the display of the preparation display is completed in the display state, the mini game or timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (n) to (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (c4), etc.] Is configured to start [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIGS. 46 (o) to (q). As shown, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button notice production by big button 136aL will start, etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 46. As shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI section UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the non-displayable state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed].
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second display. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol variation display that is being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of a display mode of a hold icon, or an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state,
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Further, the first state may be a state including the execution of the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol).

In addition, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display of the above is started. The display may be made. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

Further, "it is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state" means "the second state may occur following the first state". It may be "structured like this".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by a second state without going through another state (for example, a fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI part UI3 shown in FIG. 46A].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon is set to be displayable while an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example. The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed. For example, FIG. 46 (m). ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display overlaps with the decorative design. You may.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. [The hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparing display. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the preparing image RDY is a tutorial in the UI section UI3. It is overlaid on the display unit TT1 etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 46 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 46 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of is also configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 46 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is configured to be easy to start [The hold icon display is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. When it is displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. good.

In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. In addition, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display can be started more easily. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 46 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display. It overlaps with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display). For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), a part of the UI part UI3 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Wrapped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with only the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed in the sixth display. It may be configured so that it may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display other than the display of the sixth display may be displayed. The display may also be configured to overlap the first display.

Further, a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed as the first display. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state where both the image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. The character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display) is not overlapped. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4. Not etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping only with the first display. Alternatively, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with a display other than the first display. It may be configured in. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping with the first display.

Further, even if both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. Also, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. May be done. Further, even if the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. Also, in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may not overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q)]].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIGS. 46 (m) to the same. The state before the start of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and further, a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before reaching SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state is SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where the reach is being executed.

That is, there may be a case where the first state and the second state are one set.

Further, "The certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 49 (b3) to (b5)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), etc.].
It is configured so that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fourth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), etc.].
It is configured so that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [The preparatory display whose display has started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (i) to (j). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started [a certain symbol]. The character related to the change effect display (hold change pre-effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has started in the variation display is deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIG. 46 (f). ) ~ As shown in the figure (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next start symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. The first display, which is started to be displayed in the display, may be configured so that it may not be erased before the next start of the symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

Further, "In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. [The notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), a notice display consisting of the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the preparing image RDY is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. May be the case. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be the case.

In addition, it is equipped with "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to 49 (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparing image RDY is started to be displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is being displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is being displayed, the notice is given. When the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6) is being displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The in-preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to 49 (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may be such that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

The seventh display may be a deca button image of a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may be terminated only during the display of the eighth display, or may be terminated during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
The third display may be displayed twice. [Two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [After the display of one of the two preparing displays is completed, the other is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g). The displayed image RDY in preparation overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. May be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the display mode of the other may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is terminated in one symbol variation display. [Two preparation displays are displayed. If so, they are all digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [Explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [Explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example. , As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 46 (d). ), The preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display in preparation [for example," in preparation "in the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 46 (d)". Character display, etc.] "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 77 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display for urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to encourage the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Configured [In a state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a2). In addition, the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or may be a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that does not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

In addition, the eleventh display may be a display urging only the game ball to be discharged, or may be a display urging the discharge of anything other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. Or, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the third display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini game or timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game or timer notice overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, the figure. As shown in 77 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the certain notice display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary machine].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
First movable means [For example, from the first movable accessory 251 in which the character "Change" is displayed and the LED is built in, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the first movable accessory 251 on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn, and the movable accessory 256 which is the POV display shown in FIG. 43].
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The first movable means is the first position [for example, the first position (for example, the position on the back side of the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b) (FIGS. 18 (d), 19 (c), 24 (e-)). 1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (B), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 30 (B)), at the position on the lower back side of the lower part of the left symbol display area 208a. A first position (see FIGS. 31 (b-2) and (b-3)), a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) that is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3', and a first position on the left side. The 1st position, the 1st position on the right side (see FIGS. 36 (c-1) and 37 (e'-1)), and the 1st position where the face of the character of the lord is on the back side of the center (FIG. 40 (e)). ), It is a movable means that can be moved to the effect position on the back side (see FIG. 43 (a))].
At least a part of the first movable means in the first position is the first display area in the display area of the display means [for example, FIGS. 18 (e), 19 (d), 24. (E-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. -3), the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p), the first display area 208-1L on the left side and the first display area 208-1R on the right side in FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e). The left first display area 208-1L'and the right first display area 208-1R'in'-1), the common display area 208-13 in FIG. 40 (f), and the rotation area of the LED array 2561 overlap. Area] is configured to overlap from the front side,
The first display area is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and the amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]. And
The first display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)]. It is composed and
The second visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the first display area than the first visual state [for example, FIG. 18 (Fig. 18). e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. (B-3), FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e'-1), FIG. 40 (f)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), the first movable means is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d'). , FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. (B-3), FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e'-1), FIG. 40 (f). )],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, as an example of the state in which the second visible state is not obtained, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped (including the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol is The state in which the fluctuation is disclosed, the state in which the reach effect is started, the state in which the reach effect is executed, the state in which the super reach effect is developed, the state in which the super reach effect is executed, and the electric support state (time saving state). , Non-electric support state (non-time saving state), probabilistic state, non-probable change state, jackpot game state, demo display state, various setting screens are displayed, specific effect is being executed (for example, final judge) It is possible to enumerate a state in which the effect is being executed), a state in which a specific display is displayed (for example, a state in which the judge result in the final judge effect is displayed), and the like. That is, all of the above-listed states may be used as the state in which the second visible state is not obtained. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. In other words, the above-listed state may include the second visible state, and the second visible state is the total of the above-listed states. It may be a part or a part.

As an example of the second visual state, a variable display state of the decorative symbol, a state in which a specific effect is being executed (for example, a state in which a darkening effect is being executed, a state in which a pseudo continuous effect is being executed). , A state in which a button effect is being executed, a state in which a timer notice is being executed, a state in which a specific reach effect is being executed), a state in which a specific display is being displayed (for example, a dark background display is displayed). Is displayed, a partially dark image is displayed, a button symbol is displayed, a ball removal notification is displayed, a hold icon is displayed, and a variable icon is displayed. The state, the state in which the mini character is displayed), the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light, and the like can be listed. That is, all of the above-listed states may be used as the second visual state. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. In other words, the above-listed state may include the state in which the second visible state does not occur, and the state in which the second visible state does not occur is the total of the above-listed states. It may be a part or a part.

Further, at least a part of the first movable means that is not in the first position may be configured so as not to overlap the first display area from the front side. The first visual state may be configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is less visible through the first display area than the second visual state. In a state different from the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position or may not be configured to be in the first position. good.

When the first movable means is in the first position, it may not be in the first state, or it may not be in the first state.

When the first movable means is in the first position, it may be configured to be in the first state without fail.

"The first movable means can be moved to the first position" means that the first movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the second position. It may be that. The second position may be the initial position.

The first visible state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means can be visually recognized through the first display area. The second visible state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the first display area. The first visual state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the first display area than the second visual state. The first movable means is in the first position before the first state is reached, and the first movable means is in the first position after the first state is changed to another state. In this mode, the first movable means is always in the first position in the first state. The first movable means may be in the first state before reaching the first position, and the first movable means may be in the first state before the first state is changed to another state. The movement may be started to a position different from one position. Or conversely, the first movable means does not enter the first state until the first movable means reaches the first position, and the first movable means before changing from the first state to another state. May not start moving to a position other than the first position.

The first movable means may be a means for always moving to the first position. Only a part of the first movable means in the first position is configured to overlap a part or all of the first display area in the display area of the display means from the front side. The first movable means at the first position may be overlapped with a part or all of the first display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. It may be configured in. The first display area may be configured to be in the first visible state without fail. Further, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail. In the first visual state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the first display area, and even in the first visual state, the display may be invisible through the first display area. It may be configured so that the back side of the means can be visually recognized. The amount of light transmitted differs between the first visual state and the second visual state, and the second visual state has a larger amount of light transmitted than the first visual state. It may be. In the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position.

An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the first visible state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the second visible state. It may be.

The first movable means may be a movable means having a plurality of movable bodies.

again,
"The first movable means is the second position [for example, the second position (for example, the position on the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c, FIG. 16 (c), FIG. 17 (d), FIG. 19 (m). ), FIG. 20 (c), FIG. 24 (c), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 29 (a), FIG. Movable means that can be moved to the second position (see FIG. 31 (a)), which is the position on the back side, and the second position (see FIG. 40 (c)), which is the position where the face of the grandfather is on the back side of the center. And
The second position is a position different from the first position.
At least a part of the first movable means at the second position is a second display area [for example, FIGS. 16 (d), 17 (e), 19) in the display area of the display means. (M), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b), second display area 208-2, FIG. It is configured to overlap the common display area 208-13 in 40 (c) from the front side.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The second display area is configured to be in a third visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and the amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]. And
The second display area may be in a fourth visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)]. It is composed and
The fourth visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the second display area than the third visual state [for example, FIG. 16 (Fig. 16). d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b). , FIG. 40 (c)],
In one state in which the second display area is in the fourth visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), the first movable means is configured to be in the second position. [For example, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 ( C), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 40 (c)],
In the first state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visible state [for example, FIGS. 18 (e), 19 (d), 24 (e-1)). , FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG.
In the second state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visible state [for example, FIGS. 16 (d), 17 (e), 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b)],
After the first state is reached, the execution of the first notice effect [for example, the effect of the first notice (pseudo-continuous effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), look-ahead notice] is started. [For example, it is always started] [For example, FIG. 19 (j), FIG. 28 (c), FIG. 30 (D)],
After the second state is reached, the execution of the first notice effect may be started [for example, it may not be started, but it may be started] [for example, it may be started]. , FIG. 20 (j), FIG. 24 (j), FIG. 28 (i)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the first movable means that is not in the second position may be configured so as not to overlap the second display area from the front side. The third visual state may be configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is less visible through the second display area than the fourth visual state. The first movable means may be configured to be in the second position in a state where the second display area is not in the fourth visible state, and the first movable means is said. It may be configured so that it is not in the first position. The second display area may be configured to be in the third visible state in a state different from the first state, or the second display area may be in the third visible state. It may be configured so as not to be. In a state different from the second state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visible state, or may be configured not to be in the first visible state. You may. The execution of the first notice effect may be started before the first state is reached, or the first notice effect may be executed before the first state is reached. It may be configured so that it does not start. The execution of the first notice effect may be started before the second state is reached, and before the second state is reached, the first notice effect may be started. It may be configured so that the execution of the advance notice effect is not started.

When the first movable means is in the second position, it may not be in the second state, or it may not be in the second state.

When the first movable means is in the second position, it may be configured to be in the second state without fail. When the second display area is in the third visible state, it may be configured to be in the first state without fail. When the first display area is in the first visible state, it may be configured to be in the second state without fail.

"The first movable means can be moved to the second position" means that the first movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the first position. It may be that.

You may shift to the second state through the first state. When the state shifts to the second state after the first state, it may correspond to a demotion effect. On the contrary, it may shift to the first state through the second state. When the state shifts to the first state through the second state, it may correspond to a promotion effect. Only one state can be taken in one symbol variation display, and the state may be changed after the next symbol variation display is started. Alternatively, the state may be changed within one symbol variation display.

In addition, the probability that the first notice effect is executed may be different depending on the case where the first state is reached and the case where the second state is reached. The fourth visible state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the second display area. The third visual state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the second display area than the fourth visual state. The third visible state may be an opaque state, and the first visible state may also be an opaque state. Further, the third visual state and the first visual state may have the same amount of light transmitted. Further, the fourth visual state and the second visual state may have the same amount of light transmitted. The first movable means is in the second position before the second state is reached, and the first movable means is in the second position after the second state is changed to another state. In this mode, the first movable means is always in the second position in the second state. The first movable means may enter the second state before reaching the second position, and the first movable means may enter the second state before changing from the second state to another state. The movement may be started to a position different from the second position. Or conversely, the first movable means does not enter the second state until the first movable means reaches the second position, and the first movable means before the second state changes to another state. May not start moving to a position other than the second position. The second position may be the initial position of the first movable means, and the first movable means is movable from the second position to the first position, and the first movable means. It may return from one position to the second position. Further, apart from the second position and the first position, there may be an initial position of the first movable means. The execution of the first notice effect may be started in the second state, or the execution of the first notice effect may be started in the second state. The first state may be reached after the state of, and even if the execution of the first notice effect is started in the first state when the first state is reached. good. It should be noted that the meaning may include both the former and the latter, the meaning may be the former only, or the meaning may be the latter only.

The first movable means may be a means for always moving to the second position. Only a part of the first movable means at the second position is configured to overlap a part or all of the second display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. The first movable means at the second position may be overlapped with a part or all of the second display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. It may be configured as follows. The second display area may be configured so as to always be in the third visible state. The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual state without fail. In the third visual state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the second display area, and even in the third visual state, the display may be invisible through the second display area. It may be configured so that the back side of the means can be visually recognized. The amount of light transmitted differs between the third visual state and the fourth visual state, and the fourth visual state has a larger amount of light transmitted than the third visible state. It may be. In the second state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the second position. In the first state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third visible state without fail, or may be configured to be in the third visible state. You may. In the second state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visible state without fail, or may be configured to be in the first visible state. You may. It may be configured so that the execution of the first notice effect is always started after the first state is reached. After the second state is reached, the execution of the first notice effect may not be started or may be started.

An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area of the third visual state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area of the fourth visual state. It may be.

The first notice effect may be more easily executed in the case of the first state than in the case of the second state. That is, the case where the first movable means is in the first position in the first state is more than the case where the first movable means is in the second position in the second state. , The first notice effect is easy to be executed. Further, the case where the first movable means is in the first position in the first state is more than the case where the first movable means is in the second position in the second state. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot may be high].

again,
"The first display [for example, the display of the hold icon according to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the display of the mini character of Ninja NJA] can be displayed.
The first display is one of the pre-reading notice displays.
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 31 (b-2)). And the same figure (b-3)],
The area where the first display is displayed and the second display area are configured so as not to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. )],
In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visible state [for example, it may or may not be] [. For example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 31 (b-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first display area overlaps with the area where the first display is displayed. The area where the first display is displayed is referred to as a "first area". Further, at least a part of the first region is referred to as a "first partial region". Further, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the first display is not displayed and the second display area may be configured to overlap. In a state where the first display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state, or may be in the second visible state. It may be configured so that there is no case.

When the first display area is in the second visual state, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

The timing at which the display of the first display ends and the timing at which the second visual state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the second visual state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

When only a part of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, only a part of the first display is displayed. On the other hand, when the whole area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, the first display is not displayed (has disappeared). It will be. Further, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area may or may not overlap, and if they do not overlap, the first display area may overlap. The display of is that all are displayed. As a case where both the case where they overlap and the case where they do not overlap occur, there is a case where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes (the hold icon shifts) each time the hold is exhausted, so that the look-ahead notice mode The hold icon may move away from or closer to the first display area.

It should be noted that at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual state when the first display is displayed.

It may be configured to always display the first display. It may be configured so that only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, or the whole area where the first display is displayed. And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail, or the first display area may be the second display area. It may not be visible.

again,
"The first notice effect is one of the notice effects related to the changing symbol change [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first display [for example, the display of the hold icon according to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the display of the mini character of Ninja NJA] can be displayed.
The first display is one of the pre-reading notice displays.
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 31 (b-2)). And the same figure (b-3)],
In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visible state [for example, it may or may not be] [. For example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 31 (b-3)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap with the first display area.

At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state when the first display is not displayed, or may not be in the second visible state. It may be configured to have.

When the first display area is in the second visual state, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

The timing at which the display of the first display ends and the timing at which the second visual state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the second visual state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

When only a part of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, only a part of the first display is displayed. On the other hand, when the whole area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, the first display is not displayed (has disappeared). It will be. Further, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area may or may not overlap, and if they do not overlap, the first display area may overlap. The display of is that all are displayed. As a case where both the case where they overlap and the case where they do not overlap occur, there is a case where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes (the hold icon shifts) each time the hold is exhausted, so that the look-ahead notice mode The hold icon may move away from or closer to the first display area.

It should be noted that at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual state when the first display is displayed.

It may be configured to always display the first display. It may be configured so that only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, or the whole area where the first display is displayed. And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail, or the first display area may be the second display area. It may not be visible.

again,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), display of variable icon depending on the display mode of the notice] is configured to be displayable.
The second display is one of the notice displays related to the symbol change during change.
At least a part of the area where the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m')].
The area where the second display is displayed and the second display area are configured so as not to overlap.
In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visible state [for example, it may or may not be] [. For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m')],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first display area overlaps with the area where the second display is displayed. The area where the second display is displayed is referred to as a "second area". Further, at least a part of the second region is referred to as a "second partial region". Further, at least a part of the second display area is referred to as a "second partial display area".

At least a part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the second display is not displayed may be configured so that the second display area overlaps. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state when the second display is not displayed, or may not be in the second visible state. It may be configured to have.

When the first display area is in the second visual state, the second display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

When the first notice effect is one of the notice effects related to the symbol change during change, the first notice effect and the second display are the same "something" notices. You may. In a broad sense, "something" here is a big hit in a symbol change during fluctuation, and for example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. It may be a notice about Ruka, or more specifically, it may be a fanning effect of whether or not a certain effect is executed. Alternatively, conversely, the first notice effect and the second display may be different "something" notices. For example, one of the first notice effect and the second display may be a certain super reach effect and the other may be a pseudo continuous effect.

It should be noted that at least a part of the area where the display of the second display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the second display area.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual state when the display of the second display is displayed.

It may be configured so that only a part of the area where the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, or the whole area where the second display is displayed. And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail, or the first display area may be the second display area. It may not be visible.

The second display may be different from the display by the first notice effect.

again,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), display of variable icon depending on the display mode of the notice] is configured to be displayable.
The second display is one of the notice displays related to the symbol change during change.
At least a part of the area where the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m')].
In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visible state [for example, it may or may not be] [. For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m')],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap with the second display area.

At least a part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state when the second display is not displayed, or may be in the second visible state. It may be configured so that there is no.

When the first display area is in the second visual state, the second display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

When the first notice effect is one of the notice effects related to the symbol change during change, the first notice effect and the second display are the same "something" notices. You may. In a broad sense, "something" here is a big hit in a symbol change during fluctuation, and for example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. It may be a notice about Ruka, or more specifically, it may be a fanning effect of whether or not a certain effect is executed. Alternatively, conversely, the first notice effect and the second display may be different "something" notices. For example, one of the first notice effect and the second display may be a certain super reach effect and the other may be a pseudo continuous effect.

It should be noted that at least a part of the area where the display of the second display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the second display area.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual state when the display of the second display is displayed.

It may be configured so that only a part of the area where the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, or the whole area where the second display is displayed. And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail, or the first display area may be the second display area. It may not be visible.

The second display may be different from the display by the first notice effect.

again,
"Equipped with a second movable means [for example, family crest accessory 224E],
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means.
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a third position [for example, a third position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)].
It is configured so that the second notice production can be executed.
The second notice effect is performed in a state where the first movable means is located at the first position [for example, in FIGS. 33 (o) to (r) to 34 (a). It is a normal notice production which is a collaborative production by the first movable character 251 and the family crest character 224E].
The second notice effect is a notice effect performed in a state where the second movable means is located at the third position.
In the second notice effect, the first display area becomes the second visible state in at least a part of the states in which the first movable means is located at the first position. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in at least a part of the states in which the first movable means is not located at the first position in the second notice effect, the first display area is the second display area. It may be configured to be in a visible state, or may be configured not to be in the second visible state.

Even if the first movable means is always positioned at the first position in the second notice effect when the first display area is in the second visual state. good.

"The second movable means can be moved to the third position" means that the second movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the sixth position. It may be that.

The first movable means may be the second advance notice effect including the movement itself to the first position, and the movement itself may not be the second advance notice effect. Further, the second movable means may be the second advance notice effect including the movement itself to the third position, and the movement itself may not be the second advance notice effect. good.

The second notice effect may be a notice effect including an effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position, and the second notice effect is the second movable means. May be a notice effect including an effect located at the third position.

The first display area is configured to be in the second visible state in at least a part of the states in which the second movable means is located at the third position. You may. That is, in only a part of the state where the second movable means is located at the third position, or in all the states where the second movable means is located at the third position. , The first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state. The "state" referred to here can also be regarded as a "period".

The first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state in at least a part of the effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position. That is, in only a part of the effect in which the first movable means is located in the first position, or in all of the effects in which the first movable means is located in the first position, the first display area. May be configured to be in the second visible state.

It may be configured to always execute the second notice effect. The second advance notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position, or the first movable means is located at the first position. It may be a production including a production to be performed and other productions. The second advance notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the second movable means is located at the third position, or the second movable means is located at the third position. It may be a production including a production to be performed and other productions. In the second notice effect, the first display area is always in the second visible state in only a part of the state where the first movable means is located at the first position. It may be configured so that the first display area may not be in the second visible state. Alternatively, in the second advance notice effect, the first display area is configured to be in the second visual state without fail in all the states in which the first movable means is located at the first position. The first display area may not be in the second visible state. The "state" referred to here can also be regarded as a "period".

again,
"A third movable means [for example, a third movable accessory 253] is provided.
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The third movable means is from the fourth position [for example, the initial position (fourth position) which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to the fifth position [for example, FIG. 32. It is a movable means that can be moved to the fifth position, which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 represented by the dotted line in (e).
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a sixth position [for example, the sixth position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by the gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the fifth position is the third display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 35 (a) and the like. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side.
It is configured to be able to execute the third notice production,
The third advance notice effect is a advance notice effect performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the fifth position [for example, a normal advance notice effect which is a transparent effect in FIG. 35 (a)].
The third notice effect is a notice effect executed after the execution of the second notice effect.
At least a part of the states after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "third state") [for example, In the state of FIG. 34 (p)], the second movable means is configured to be in the sixth position.
In the third state, the third movable means is configured to be in the fourth position [for example, the third movable accessory 253 shown by the dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the fourth position [for example, the third movable accessory 253 shown by the dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] is the second movable at the sixth position. It is configured to overlap the means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)] from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third state may be one of the states after the execution of the second advance notice effect and before the execution of the third advance notice effect is started. In addition, there is a case where the state after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect is started is one state different from the third state. It may be configured as follows. The "another state" referred to here may be a state before the third state or a state after the third state. Further, the "another state" may have a longer period or a shorter period than the third state.

At least a part of the third movable means that is not in the fifth position may be configured so as not to overlap the third display area from the front side. In a state different from the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position or may not be configured to be in the sixth position. good. In a state different from the third state, the third movable means may be configured to be in the fourth position or may not be configured to be in the fourth position. good. At least a part of the third movable means that is not in the fourth position may be configured so as not to overlap the second movable means in the sixth position from the front side.

When the second movable means is in the sixth position, it may not be in the third state, or it may not be in the third state.

When the third movable means is in the fourth position, it may not be in the third state, or it may not be in the third state.

When the second movable means is in the sixth position, it may be configured to be in the third state without fail.

When the third movable means is in the fourth position, it may be configured to be in the third state without fail.

The fourth position may be the initial position of the third movable means.

"The second movable means can be moved to the sixth position" means that the second movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the third position. It may be that.

The third movable means may be the third advance notice effect including the movement itself to the fifth position, and the movement itself may not be the third advance notice effect.

The third advance notice effect may be an effect including an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position.

It should be noted that the third display area is configured to be in the seventh visual state.
The third display area is configured to be in the eighth visible state.
The eighth visual state may be configured so that the back side of the display means is easier to see through the third display area than the seventh visual state.

Further, the third movable means may be configured to be in the fifth position in a state where the third display area is in the eighth visible state.

The third movable means may be provided on the back side of the first movable means, or may be provided on the front side. Alternatively, the third movable means may be provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the first movable means.

A light transmitting means having light transmission and
An irradiation means capable of irradiating the light transmitting means with light,
With
The light transmitting means is a means provided on the front side of the second movable means.
The first region in the light transmitting means is a light emitting region, and is
The light emitting region is a region capable of emitting light at least toward the front side by the light emitted from the irradiation means.
The first region is a region in front of the third display region.
The third movable means is configured to be in the fifth position in a state where the third display area is in the eighth visible state.
The light emitting region may be configured to emit light in a state where the third display region is in the eighth visible state.

The third movable means may be a means for always moving from the fourth position to the fifth position. The second movable means may be a means for always moving to the sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means at the fifth position is configured to overlap a part or all of the third display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. The third movable means at the fifth position may be overlapped with a part or all of the third display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. It may be configured as follows. It may be configured to always execute the third notice effect. The third notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position, and the third notice effect may be an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position. May be an effect including the effect located at the fifth position and other effects. The third advance notice effect may be an effect that is always executed after the execution of the second advance notice effect, or may be an effect that may or may not be executed. The third state may be only a part of the states after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect is started. It may be in all states after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect is started. The "state" referred to here can also be regarded as a "period". In the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means at the fourth position is configured to overlap a part or all of the second movable means at the sixth position from the front side. Alternatively, all of the third movable means at the fourth position may be overlapped with a part or all of the second movable means at the sixth position from the front side. It may be configured.

again,
"The first light emitting means [for example, the LED built in the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14 and the like] and
A second light emitting means [for example, all of the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 shown in FIG. 14 and the like, or any one or two of these three LEDs 2541 to 2543].
With
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first movable means.
The second light emitting means is not provided in the first movable means [for example, is provided in the fourth movable accessory 254].
The second light emitting means [for example, the upper LED2541] at a certain position [for example, the position of the upper LED2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position shown in FIG. 20N] is the said. It is configured to overlap the fourth display area [for example, the fourth display area 208-4 shown in FIG. 20 (n)] of the display areas of the display means from the front side.
The fourth display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The fourth display area is a display area different from the second display area.
The fourth display area is configured to be in a fifth visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and the amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]. And
The fourth display area may be in the sixth visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)]. It is composed and
The sixth visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the fourth display area than the fifth visual state.
The second light emitting means may emit light in a state where the fourth display area is in the fifth visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth state") [for example, , Fig. 20 (o)],
In the fourth state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visible state [for example, the entire display screen is opaque as shown in FIG. 20 (o)].
In the fourth state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visible state [for example, the entire display screen is opaque as shown in FIG. 20 (o)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth state may be one of the states in which the fourth display area is in the fifth visible state. That is, even in a state different from the fourth state, the fourth display area may be configured to be in the fifth visible state.

The second light emitting means that is not at a certain position may be configured so as not to overlap the fourth display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. The fifth visual state may be configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is less visible through the fourth display area than the sixth visual state. In a state different from the fourth state, the second light emitting means may be configured to emit light or may not emit light. In a state different from the fourth state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visible state, or may be configured not to be in the first visible state. You may. In a state different from the fourth state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third visible state, or may be configured not to be in the third visible state. You may.

When the second light emitting means emits light, it may be configured to be in the fourth state without fail.

When the first display area is in the first visible state, it may be configured to be in the fourth state without fail.

When the second display area is in the third visible state, it may be configured to be in the fourth state without fail.

The first state may be followed by the fourth state, or the second state may be followed by the fourth state. Alternatively, conversely, it may shift to the first state through the fourth state, or may shift to the second state through the fourth state.

again,
"Equipped with a third light emitting means
The third light emitting means is not provided in the first movable means.
The third light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap the eleventh display area of the display area of the display means from the front side.
The position of the second light emitting means at a certain position is different from the position of the third light emitting means at the certain position.
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the first display area.
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the second display area.
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the fourth display area.
The eleventh display area is configured to be in the seventh visible state.
The eleventh display area is configured to be in the eighth visible state.
The eighth visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the eleventh display area than the seventh visual state.
The third light emitting means may emit light in a state where the eleventh display area is in the seventh visual state (hereinafter, referred to as "11th state"). ,
In the eleventh state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visible state.
In the eleventh state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visible state.
It is configured so that the execution of a certain effect is started after the fourth state is reached.
It may be configured so that the execution of the certain effect may be started after the eleventh state is reached. "
It should be noted that the certain effect may be the first reach effect (for example, a chance reach effect).

When the second reach effect (for example, the swordsman reach effect) has a higher expectation (reliability) that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed than the first reach effect, the first The second reach effect may be started after the state of one is reached. Moreover, the position of the first position and the position of the second light emitting means at a certain position are adjacent to each other, close to each other, or have a positional relationship that is easily misidentified by the player. In the fourth state, when the second light emitting means emits light, the player misunderstands that the first light emitting means is emitting light, and expects that the second reach effect is started. However, the interest of the game may be improved.

The second light emitting means may be provided in a movable means different from the first movable means, and the position where the other movable means has moved may be the certain position. When the second light emitting means is not provided in any of the movable means and is fixed, the fixed position may be the above-mentioned certain position. The fifth visible state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the fourth display area. The sixth visible state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the fourth display area. The sixth visual state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the fourth display area than the fifth visual state. In the fourth state, the first light emitting means may be configured not to emit light.

Only a part of the second light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap a part or all of the fourth display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. Alternatively, all of the second light emitting means at a certain position may be configured to overlap a part or all of the fourth display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. May be. The fourth display area may be configured to be in the fifth visible state without fail. The fourth display area may be configured to be in the sixth visual state without fail. In the fifth visual state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the fourth display area, and even in the fifth visual state, the display may be invisible through the fourth display area. It may be configured so that the back side of the means can be visually recognized. In the fourth state, the second light emitting means may be configured to always emit light, or the second light emitting means may not emit light. In the fourth state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visible state without fail, or the first display area may be in the first visible state. It may be configured to be. In the fourth state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third visible state without fail, or the second display area may be in the third visible state. It may be configured to be. In the fourth state, the first light emitting means may be configured not to emit light, or the first light emitting means may be configured to emit light.

An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the fifth visible state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the sixth visible state. It may be.

again,
"A fourth movable means [for example, a fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 and the like] is provided.
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the fourth movable means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth movable means may be provided on the back side of the display means. The second light emitting means may be a light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting bodies. The moving direction of the fourth movable means and the moving direction of the first movable means may be different or the same. The fourth movable means may be provided on the back side or the front side of the first movable means. Alternatively, the fourth movable means and the first movable means may be provided at the same position in the front-rear direction, and in this case, the fourth movable means and the first movable means. Move so that they do not interfere with each other.

again,
"Third display [For example, the display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a) and the like, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 29 (A) and the like, the arrow display 136b as the operation promotion display, and the rest. Period meter display 136c] is configured to be displayable.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C)].
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area are configured so as not to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (C)].
The first display area may be in the second visible state when the third display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 29 (d') and 29 (C). )],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first display area overlaps with the area where the third display is displayed. The area where the third display is displayed is referred to as a "third area". Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a "third partial region". Further, as described above, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may be configured to overlap. In a state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state, or may be in the second visible state. It may be configured so that there is no case.

The third display may be configured to be displayed without fail when the first display area is in the second visual state.

again,
"Third display [For example, the display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a) and the like, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 29 (A) and the like, the arrow display 136b as the operation promotion display, and the rest. Period meter display 136c] is configured to be displayable.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d'), FIG. 29 (C)].
The first display area may be in the second visible state when the third display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 29 (d') and 29 (C). )],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap with the third display area.

At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. In a state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state, or may be in the second visible state. It may be configured so that there is no case.

The third display may be configured to be displayed without fail when the first display area is in the second visual state.

The third display may be a display prompting the ejection operation of the game ball or a display prompting the operation of the effect operating means. At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area may not overlap. On the contrary, at least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap, and the third display is displayed. The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visible state.

It may be configured to always display the third display. It may be configured so that only a part of the area where the third display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area overlap, or the whole area where the third display is displayed. And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state without fail, or the first display area may be the second display area. It may not be visible.

again,
"The third display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, a display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a) or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A player-operable operating means [for example, chance button 136] is provided.
The third display includes a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 29 (A) or the like] that imitates the appearance of the operation means [for example, as another display, an arrow display as an operation promotion display. 136b and remaining period meter display 136c].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a second operating means (for example, a transparent unit 191, a second chance button, an operating lever, etc.) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the third display imitates the appearance of the second operating means. It may be a display including the image.

Further, the third display is a display that can be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is an image that imitates the appearance of the operating means. The first display mode including the above, one of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode including an enlarged image of the appearance of the operating means, and the third display is the first display mode. It is easier to succeed in a certain effect, it is easier to start a certain effect, and finally the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when it is displayed in the second display mode than in the first display mode. It may be easy to do. Further, in the area where the third display is displayed, when the third display is displayed in the second display mode, the third display is displayed in the first display mode. May easily overlap with the second display area. As described above, the area where the third display is displayed may easily overlap with or less likely to overlap with the second display area depending on the display mode of the third display, or the overlapping area may be wide or narrow. You may do it.

again,
"A player-operable operating means [for example, chance button 136] is provided.
The third display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 29 (A) and the like, the arrow display 136b as the operation promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
The third display is a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 29 (A) or the like] that imitates the appearance of the operating means.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the first display area [for example, FIG. 29 (C)].
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area are configured so as not to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (C)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first display area overlaps with the area where the third display is displayed. As described above, the area where the third display is displayed is referred to as a "third area". Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a "third partial region". Further, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may be configured to overlap.

again,
"The fourth display [for example, the display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a), etc." is configured to be displayable.
The fourth display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
The fourth display is a display that encourages the ejection of the game ball.
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the first display area [for example, FIG. 29 (d')].
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the second display area [for example, FIG. 29 (c)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the area where the fourth display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may be configured not to overlap. .. At least a part of the area where the fourth display is not displayed and at least a part of the second display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap.

again,
"Even in one state different from the second state [for example, a part of the state in the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the second display area is the second state. It is configured so that it may be in a visible state of four,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "other state" referred to here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on, or a part or all of the state during the jackpot game. Further, it may be a state before the second state or a state after the second state. Further, the "another state" may have a longer period than the second state. However, it may be a short period.

again,
"Even in one state different from the first state [for example, a part of the state in the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the first display area is the first state. It is configured so that it may be in a second visible state,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "other state" referred to here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on, or a part or all of the state during the jackpot game. Further, it may be in a state before the first state or in a state after the first state. Further, the "another state" may have a longer period than the first state. However, it may be a short period.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above explanation,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
The first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like] and
The second movable means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 and the like] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means.
The first movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a first position [for example, a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3'].
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is the first display area in the display area of the display means [for example, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)]. It is configured to overlap from the front side
The first display area is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and the amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]. And
The first display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)]. It is composed and
The second visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the first display area than the first visual state [for example, FIG. 33 (Fig. 33). p) ~ Figure (r)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), the first movable means is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a second position [for example, a third position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)].
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position [for example, FIGS. 33 (p) to 33 (r)].
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed.
The first effect includes an effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position [for example, 33 (p) to 33 (r) of the production shown in FIG. 33 (r)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second position is a position in the area that overlaps the first display area from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Even when the second movable means moves to the second position, the first display area does not enter the second visible state but remains in the first visible state. There is also a case (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain case") [for example, "a case where the first display area is not in the second visible state" described in paragraph 1313].
In some cases, the first effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned" effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position "means" the first The first movable means at the position of the above and the second movable means at the second position represent a certain thing [for example, a family crest in which a decorative member is arranged on the outer periphery].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The above-mentioned" effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position "means" the first It is an effect that the first movable means at the position of the above and the second movable means at the second position appear to be three-dimensionally combined.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A third movable means [for example, a third movable accessory 253] is provided.
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The third movable means is from a third initial position [for example, an initial position (fourth position) of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to a third position [for example, FIG. 32 (e). ) Is a movable means that can be moved to the 5th position, which is the position of the 3rd movable accessory 253 indicated by the dotted line.
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a fifth position [for example, a sixth position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by a solid gray line in FIG. 32 (b)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area in the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 35 (a) and the like. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side.
It is configured so that the second production can be performed,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect which is a transparent effect in FIG. 35 (a)] performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position.
The second effect is an effect executed after the execution of the first effect.
At least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "second state") [for example, FIG. 34. In the state of (p)], the second movable means is configured to be in the fifth position.
In the second state, the third movable means is configured to be in the third initial position [for example, the third movable accessory 253 shown by the dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the third initial position [for example, the third movable accessory 253 shown by the dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] is at the fifth position. It is configured to overlap the movable means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)] from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A fourth movable means [for example, a second movable accessory 2521 for a weak effect and / and a second movable accessory 2522 for a strong effect shown in FIG. 41] is provided.
The fourth movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means.
The fourth movable means is the fourth position [for example, the position where the second movable accessory 2521 represented by the upper dotted line in FIG. 41 (b) appears to cover the head of the character of the lord and / and the figure. It is a movable means that can move to the position where the second movable accessory 2522 represented by the upper dotted line in 41 (c) matches the head of the character of the lord.
It is configured so that the second production can be performed,
The second effect is an effect using the fourth movable means [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 42 (j) to 42 (k)].
The second effect is an effect that is executed separately from the first effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first display [for example, the display of the hold icon according to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the display of the mini character of Ninja NJA] can be displayed.
The first display is one of the look-ahead notice displays.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), display of variable icon depending on the display mode of the notice] is configured to be displayable.
The second display is one of the notice displays relating to the symbol change during change.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Third display [For example, the display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a) and the like, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 34 (g) and the like, the arrow display 136b as the operation promotion display, and the rest. Period meter display 136c] is configured to be displayable.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
The third display is a display including an image [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 34 (g)] that imitates the appearance of the operating means.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed overlaps with at least a part of the first display area [for example, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34 (k)]. Yes,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, a display of" Please pull out the ball "shown in FIG. 29 (a) or the like].
A part or all of the first display area is configured to overlap the entire area where the third display is displayed [for example, the description in paragraph 1353].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like] is located at the first initial position [for example, FIG. 32 (c)). It is a movable means that can move from the position of each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown by the solid line to the first position.
The first initial position is an initial position deviated from the area overlapping the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L].
The first initial position is an initial position on the back side of the display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second movable means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 and the like] is the second position from the second initial position [for example, the position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 (b)]. It is a movable means that can be moved to
The second initial position is an initial position deviated from the area overlapping the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L].
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with the first light emitting means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 that lights up in the fourth display mode in FIG. 33 (q) or the like].
In the first effect, the first light emitting means is configured to be capable of emitting light [for example, FIG. 33 (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a second light emitting means
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the second movable means [for example, a light emitting means such as a full-color LED described in paragraph 0448].
In the first effect, the second light emitting means is configured to be capable of emitting light [for example, FIG. 33 (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Even in one state different from the first state [for example, a part of the state in the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the first display area is the first state. It is configured so that it may be in a second visible state,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
The first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like] and
The second movable means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 and the like] and
With the third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253],
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means.
The first movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a first position [for example, a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3'].
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is the first display area in the display area of the display means [for example, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)]. It is configured to overlap from the front side
The first display area is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and the amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]. And
The first display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)]. It is composed and
The second visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the first display area than the first visual state [for example, FIG. 33 (Fig. 33). p) ~ Figure (r)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), the first movable means is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a second position [for example, a third position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)].
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position [for example, FIGS. 33 (p) to 33 (r)].
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed.
The first effect includes an effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position [for example, The production shown in FIGS. 33 (p) to 33 (r)].
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The third movable means is from a third initial position [for example, an initial position (fourth position) of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to a third position [for example, FIG. 32 (e). ) Is a movable means that can be moved to the 5th position, which is the position of the 3rd movable accessory 253 indicated by the dotted line.
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to a fifth position [for example, a sixth position that is the position of the family crest accessory 224E represented by a solid gray line in FIG. 32 (b)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area in the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 35 (a) and the like. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side.
It is configured so that the second production can be performed,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect which is a transparent effect in FIG. 35 (a)] performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position.
The second effect is an effect executed after the execution of the first effect.
At least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "second state") [for example, FIG. 34. In the state of (p) to (q) of the same figure], the second movable means is configured to be in the fifth position.
In the second state, the third movable means is configured so as not to reach the third position [for example, the third indicated by the dotted line in FIGS. 34 (p) to 34 (q)). Movable accessory 253],
In the second state, at least a part of the third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 shown by the dotted line in FIGS. 34 (p) to (q)] is in the fifth position. It is a state in which the second movable means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to (q)] is overlapped from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
First effect means [For example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like, and the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the grandfather's character is drawn],
Second production means [For example, the character of the upper half of the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 32 and the like is drawn, and the character of the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face is drawn]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
Multiple types of effects can be executed,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, a transparent effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m) and a transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (C)].
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d) and the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (F)].
One of the first effect and the second effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

again,
"At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter," a certain display area ") is in the first visible state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque and is not completely opaque, and is light. Permeation amount is relatively low)],
The certain display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)].
In the second visual state, the area on the back side of the display means is easier to see through the certain display area than in the first visual state.
The second effect means is on the movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 32 and the like is drawn, and the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the character of the half lord is drawn],
In the second effect, the second effect means is in the second position [for example, the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), FIG. 40 (F). It is a production performed in the state of being in the position of the first movable accessory 251].
The second effect is described in at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, "second display area" [for example, third display areas 208-3 and 40 shown in FIG. 35]. The display area 208-13]) is performed in a certain state in which the second visual state is obtained [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 40 (d), FIG. 40 (F)). [Transparent effect shown in]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a certain effect display [for example, the star display st shown in FIG. 42 (J), and the upper left" celebration "of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (h) to 35 (i). "Display" is a means that can be displayed.
A certain state of the state in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "second state") [for example, FIGS. 40 (D) to 40 (D) to FIG. In the state of E) and the state of FIG. 34 (q)], the second display area is in the first visual state.
In the second state, the certain effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first effect means is a movable means [for example, a first movable accessory 251 composed of a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like, a first movable accessory shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the old man's character is drawn in the lower half of the thing 251],
The first effect is shown in FIG. 40 (C), where the first effect means is in the first position [for example, the position of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m). It is a production performed in the state of being in the position of the first movable accessory 251].
The first effect is the display area of at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, "first display area" [for example, in the first display area 208-1 and FIG. 40 shown in FIG. 34. The display area 208-13]) is performed in a certain state in which the second visual state is obtained [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 40 (m), FIG. 40 (C). [Transparent effect shown in]
Of the first effect and the second effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol on which only the first effect is performed is better than the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the second effect is performed. It is easy to display the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first position is a position in the area where the first display area overlaps from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"A third production means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 and the like] is provided.
The third effect means is an effect means provided on the front side of the display means.
The third effect means is a movable means,
In a certain state where the second effect means is not in the second position, the third effect means is located at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the second effect means [for example, FIG. 34 (p) to the same figure (q)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second position is a position in the area where the second display area overlaps from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In a single variation display of a decorative pattern, one of the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and then the other effect may be performed [for example, FIG. 40 (Fig. 40). B) to the example shown in FIG. (F), the example shown in FIGS. 34 to 35],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed, the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is described above. "The variable display is easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode," means "variation of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed." The variable display of the decorative symbol in which only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed is easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode than the display. " That is
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
First effect means [For example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like, and the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the old man is drawn, the shutter accessories 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the effect means 2510G for the face of the old character shown in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (d) are shown. Ring-shaped accessory 251R] and
Second production means [For example, the character of the upper half of the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 32 and the like is drawn, and the character of the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. In the part where the face is drawn, the face directing means 2510G of the grandfather character shown in FIG. 44 (A), the face directing means 2510Y of the lord character shown in FIG. 44 (d), etc. The circular accessory 251C] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
Multiple types of effects can be executed,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), and FIG. 44 (a). ), The transparent effect shown in FIGS. 45 (d) to 45 (e)].
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), and FIG. 44 (d). ), The transparent effect shown in FIGS. 45 (E) to 45 (F)].
The first effect and the second effect are not executed at the same time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In this game table, a plurality of types of effects may be performed without fail. Further, "the first effect and the second effect are not executed at the same time" means that there is no period during which the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time. You may.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. One or two],
First effect means [For example, the first movable accessory 251 composed of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like, and the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the old man is drawn, the shutter accessories 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the effect means 2510G for the face of the old character shown in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (d) are shown. Ring-shaped accessory 251R] and
Second production means [For example, the character of the upper half of the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 32 and the like is drawn, and the character of the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. In the part where the face is drawn, the face directing means 2510G of the grandfather character shown in FIG. 44 (A), the face directing means 2510Y of the lord character shown in FIG. 44 (d), etc. The circular accessory 251C] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second effect means is an effect means [for example, an LED is built in or is provided around the LED] including a light emitting means [for example, an LED].
Multiple types of effects can be executed,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), and FIG. 44 (a). ), The transparent effect shown in FIGS. 45 (d) to 45 (e)].
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), and FIG. 44 (d). ), The transparent effect shown in FIGS. 45 (E) to 45 (F)].
The first effect and the second effect are not executed at the same time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In this game table, a plurality of types of effects may be performed without fail. Further, "the first effect and the second effect are not executed at the same time" means that there is no period during which the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time. You may.

again,
"At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, referred to as" a certain display area ") is in the first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it does not have to be completely opaque." , The amount of light transmitted is relatively low)]
The certain display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it does not have to be completely transparent and the amount of light transmitted is relatively increased)].
In the second visual state, the area on the back side of the display means is easier to see through the certain display area than in the first visual state.
The second effect means is on the movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 32 and the like is drawn, and the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The part where the face of the half lord character is drawn, the directing means 2510Y of the face of the lord character shown in FIG. 44 (d), etc., and the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E), etc.].
In the second effect, the second effect means is in the second position [for example, the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), FIG. 40 (F). The position of the first movable accessory 251; the position of the effect means 2510Y of the character's face shown in FIG. 44 (d), the position of the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E), etc.] It is a production that is
The second effect is the display area of at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, “second display area” [for example, in the third display area 208-3 and FIG. 40 shown in FIG. 35). The display area 208-13 shown, the area where the image of the sliding door shown in FIG. 44 is open, and the circular central area 208-C shown in FIG. 45]) are performed in a certain state where the second visual state is obtained. [For example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 44 (d), and the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 45 (E) to 45 (F). [Transparent effect shown in]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The certain display area may be the entire display area or only a part of the display area of the display means. In addition, the certain display area may always be in the second visual state.

Further, the second display area may be the entire display area of the display areas of the display means, or may be only a part of the display area.

again,
"The display means is a certain effect display [for example, the star display st shown in FIG. 42 (J), and the upper left" celebration "of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (h) to 35 (i). , Display of button images and the like 136a to c shown in FIG. 44 (d), display of images of sliding doors in a fully closed state shown in FIG. 44 (c)].
A certain state of the state in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position (hereinafter, referred to as "second state") [for example, FIGS. 40 (D) to 40 (D) to FIG. In the state of E), the state of FIG. 34 (q), the state of FIG. 44 (d), and the state of FIG. 44 (c)], the second display area is the first visible state.
In the second state, the certain effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q), FIG. 44 (d), FIG. 44 (c)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a certain effect display. Further, the second state may be a part of the state in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position, or may be the whole state. good. Further, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed in a state other than the second state, or is a display that is always displayed in a state other than the second state. You may. Alternatively, conversely, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second state, or is a display that is always displayed only in the second state. You may.

again,
"The first effect means is a movable means [for example, a first movable accessory 251 composed of a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 and the like, a first movable accessory shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the like. The lower half of the object 251 where the face of the grandfather character is drawn, the means for producing the face of the grandfather character shown in FIG. 44 (a) and the like 2510G, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R shown in FIG. 45 (d) and the like] And
The first effect is shown in FIG. 40 (C), where the first effect means is in the first position [for example, the position of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m). The position of the first movable accessory 251; the position of the grandfather character's face effect means 2510G shown in FIG. 44 (a) and the like, the position of the ring-shaped accessory 251R shown in FIG. 45 (d) and the like]. It is a production that is performed
The first effect is the display area of at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, "first display area" [for example, in the first display area 208-1 and FIG. 40 shown in FIG. 34. The display area 208-13, the portion where the image of the sliding door shown in FIG. 44 (a) is open, and the ring-shaped region 208-R shown in FIG. 45 (c) and the like) are in the second visual state. The effect performed in a certain state [for example, the transparent effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to 34 (m), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), the transparent effect shown in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (d). ) ~ Transparent effect shown in Fig. (E)]
Of the first effect and the second effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol on which only the first effect is performed is better than the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the second effect is performed. It is easy to display the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first effect may be an effect that may be performed while the first effect means is in the first position, or may be an effect that is always performed. Further, the first display area may be the entire display area of the display areas of the display means, or may be only a part of the display area. Further, the certain state may be all states in which the first display area is in the second visible state, or may be a part of the states.

again,
"The first position is a position in the area where the first display area overlaps from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first effect means is an effect means provided on the front side of the second effect means [for example, the face effect means 2510G of the grandfather character shown in FIG. 44 (A)] [for example, FIG. 44. The shutter accessory 246L, 246R shown in (A)].
In a certain state before the start of the second effect [for example, the fully closed state of the shutter accessories 246L and 246M], the second effect is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means. One production means is located,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first effect means may be located at a position where it overlaps with all of the second effect means, or the first effect means may be located at a position where it overlaps with only a part of the second effect means. It may be located.

again,
"A third production means [for example, the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 32 and the like] is provided.
The third effect means is an effect means provided on the front side of the display means.
The third effect means is a movable means,
In a certain state where the second effect means is not in the second position, the third effect means is located at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the second effect means [for example, FIG. 34 (p) to the same figure (q)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third effect means may be located at a position where it overlaps with all of the second effect means, or the third effect means may be located at a position where it overlaps with only a part of the second effect means. It may be located.

again,
"The second position is a position in the area where the second display area overlaps from the front side.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"In a single variation display of a decorative pattern, one of the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and then the other effect may be performed [for example, FIG. 40 (Fig. 40). B) to the example shown in FIG. (F), the example shown in FIGS. 34 to 35, the ray shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to (e), and the example shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to (d). ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the variable display of the decorative symbol once, one of the first effect and the second effect may be performed and then the other effect may be performed.

again,
"Rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed, the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is described above. "The variable display is easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode," means "variation of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed." The variable display of the decorative symbol in which only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed is easier to display the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode than the display. " That is
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 79].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means and
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display and
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number").
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is larger than the first number when the first number is digested. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when two numbers are digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 3.
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number and larger than the third number during the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
A hold display means capable of displaying according to the number of holds is provided.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console described in Appendix 5.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
Equipped with a look-ahead notice means that can execute look-ahead notice,
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 7.
During the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be read ahead is being executed, the notice icon may be digested by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 8.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in Appendix 9.
The fourth symbol variation is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol variation display") is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon, which is digested during the period when the display is being executed, may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
The hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 12.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 13.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While the first symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon.
The first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console according to Appendix 15 or 16.
As a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
During the display of one symbol variation display, the case where the first number of the first notice icons are digested is larger than the case where the second number of the first notice icons are digested. Easy to become
The second number is larger than the first number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 18.
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 19.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console described in Appendix 20
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fake notice indication.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display.
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
The symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be misaligned.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 21.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display.
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 22.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 23.
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 24.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, is configured to be surely digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 25.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 26.
Equipped with production control means
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console described in Appendix 27.
Main control means and
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 28.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
The first display means that can execute the symbol variation display,
The second display means,
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "pending number") in the reserved display area.
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the case where the notice icon is digested by the second number larger than the first number is a big hit than the case where the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become
The second display means is displayed in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”), which is the target of pre-reading, is started. A display means capable of displaying the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console according to Appendix 30 or 31.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode.
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console described in Appendix 33.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is an image display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is a hold display means.
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
The game table, characterized in that the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
The game console described in Appendix 34.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 36.
During the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 36.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 38.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console described in Appendix 39.
The notice icon that is digested during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to appear,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 40.
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 41.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display.
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 42.
Main control means and
Production control means and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 43.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the first notice icon.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the second notice icon.
By digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first number notice icons") in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon.
The game table characterized in that the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the second notice icon.

According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic display.

Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number icon is digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear to be a symbol change before the hold to be read ahead.

Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display B may be performed, or when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested, the effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be done.

Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, and only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. It may be displayed in.

(Appendix 46)
The game console described in Appendix 45.
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "second number notice icons") is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the first notice icon and the other notice icon of the second notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol variation display is displayed. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

In addition, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

Further, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may change according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be digested without fail.

Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to Appendix 45 or 46.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the third notice icon.
By digesting the third notice icon, the third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the production effect.

The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 47.
When the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is displayed after the third symbol variation display is started. The multiple notice icons may be digested before the end,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

Depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The minimum number of warning icons may be the same or different.

In addition, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. The maximum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. The minimum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that are digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

(Appendix 49)
The game console described in Appendix 48.
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. In some cases,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily become a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 49.
Equipped with a hold display means
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number").
A game table characterized by that.

The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The game console described in Appendix 50.
Depending on the number of times the notice icon is displayed, the number of holds is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A game console with multiple display means
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or a light guide plate may be lens-cut and a pattern may appear by irradiating the light guide plate with a light source from the side. , It may be configured by a light emitting means such as an LED, or it may be configured by a 7-segment display.

Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the stock of the notice icon, a display related to the digestion of the notice icon, or a notice of stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or it may be an effect display executed when the notice icon is digested.

Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The game console described in Appendix 54.
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be digested by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to Appendix 54 or 55.
In the first display means, a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, "display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means and
Movable means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "notice icon digestion effect") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The game console described in Appendix 59.
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means production may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means is always produced. Means may be directed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect by a movable means different from the 1st movable means may be performed, or the 21st notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may be always performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to Appendix 59 or 60.
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

Even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be done.

(Appendix 62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 59 to 61.
Equipped with operating means
The movable means is the operating means, and is
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, "change" means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Appendix 63)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 59 to 62.
Equipped with a second means of movement,
The movable means is the first movable means, and is
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon increase suggestion display.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The game console described in Appendix 64.
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game table characterized by that.

The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. By doing so, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
An icon of one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon is increased by one.

Further, the notice icon displayed on the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of the ghost that the notice icon does not increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is 3, only 2 may be increased.

Further, the notice icons other than the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
A game characterized in that the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleven number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. The stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means and
Hold display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the first A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be done,
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console described in Appendix 68.
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode.
In the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game console according to Appendix 68 or 69.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth hold display") of the lost symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that, when displayed, is displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of a selectable effect mode effect mode name. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a mode for changing the frequency of occurrence of the one-shot notification effect. There is a mode for making it.

Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, and the notice may be made closer to the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Further, here, the "notice icon" may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Further, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons, or a part including the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may be completely the same, or a part of the display period of the first display may overlap with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

Further, the frequency of display may differ between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the size of the first display area and the second display area may be different, or the roles of the first display area and the second display area may be different. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console according to Appendix 71 or 72.
The first display is a variable icon display.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as "first part").
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first part is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the relevant and after the next symbol change display is given, rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give new expectations to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the look-ahead notice display is digested.

In addition, the entire display of the second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be capable of at least suggesting an expectation for a big hit in the symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of the look-ahead.

Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayable only by a single number, or may be configured to be displayable by a plurality of notice icons. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icons can be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. good.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
While the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
A game table characterized in that the second display is not started when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a notice display, and is
A game table characterized in that when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 76.
The second display area is a line-delimited area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 77.
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" described in Appendix 71 is "the notice icon." Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed. "
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 78.
The number of the above-mentioned notice icons being digested is larger in the big hit symbol variation display than in the lost symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the explanation display of the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the first explanatory display.
The first explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The jackpot fluctuation has more digested notice icons than the loss fluctuation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console described in Appendix 80.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area") in which the first explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game console described in Appendix 81.
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 80 to 82.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the second explanatory display.
The second explanatory display is a display showing the current production stage.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") in which the second explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game console described in Appendix 83.
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 80 to 84.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of notice icons") as the notice icons.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon.
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect.
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The game table is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.

(Appendix 87)
The game console described in Appendix 86.
When the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The game console described in Appendix 87.
When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 88.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a notice display, and is
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 89.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the effect display.
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display that matches the display of the second display means.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 90.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means.
The game console is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The game console described in Appendix 91.
When the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability variation expectation degree.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the reach jackpot expectation level.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the jackpot expectation of the character.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice icon").
The second display is a display including a display showing the first notice icon in a large size.
After the second display is made, the first display may be made,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The game console described in Appendix 93.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a variable display of the decorative pattern.
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is in stock.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game console according to Appendix 93 or 94.
The third display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The third display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 95.
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 96.
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix 98)
The game console described in Appendix 97.
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game console according to Appendix 97 or 98.
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already acquired notice icons is enlarged and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is the display of the hold display frame.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The game console described in Appendix 100.
The display of the position among the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game console described in Appendix 101.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game console according to Appendix 101 or Appendix 102.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the sixth indication.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable.
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 100 to 103.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the fifth indication,
The fifth display is a line notice display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a decorative pattern variation display, and is
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game console described in Appendix 105.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable so as to overlap.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game console described in Appendix 106.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game console according to Appendix 106 or Appendix 107.
The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 108.
The third display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 109.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a line display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap with the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 110.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to overlap and display.
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 105 to Supplementary note 111.
The icon is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game console described in Appendix 112.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 105 to Supplementary note 114.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means and
The first area and
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The number of times the operation of the operation means is accepted in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased.
When the game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
The game console described in Appendix a1.
Equipped with display means
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "first display").
In the first button effect, if the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "second display").
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the operating means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed.
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3.
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game console according to Appendix a3 or a4.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display") in the first button effect.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display") in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may decrease.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a6.
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a7.
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a8.
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area and
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "first display").
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed.
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
The game console described in Appendix b1.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "second display").
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display.
The wipe display does not overlap with the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game console described in Appendix b2.
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b3.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third display").
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The first display is displayed as a display that changes the display mode of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game console described in Appendix b4.
The third display is a hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The first display is not started while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b6.
When the game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b7.
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b8.
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display") after the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display"). can be,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variation icon") can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variable icon can be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variable display.
The area where the notice icon is displayed is a different area from the area where the first variable icon is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The game console described in Appendix c1.
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variation icon") can be displayed.
Both the second variable icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayable.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The game console described in Appendix c1 or c2.
The icon that was displayed as a hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
The game console described in Appendix c3.
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
The game console described in Appendix c3 or c4.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c5.
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c6.
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c7.
The display means includes an image display device.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c8.
The icon displayed as the first variable icon in the non-electric support state is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is pressed and held for a long time.
The second display is a display in which the operation means is more likely to be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is long-pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting means is a means for turning on in the first state.
The light emitting means is a means for turning off the light in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the first light emitting mode.
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
The first display is a display that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third display is a display that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d4.
The second display is a display that is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
When the operating means is long-pressed, the first display can be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d6.
The long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display").
The second display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The first display is a display that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
In the second display, the operation means performs a second number of operations in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a display that is easier to start when
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The second number is more than one.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display mode is a display mode that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
The game console described in Appendix d8.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a light emitting state in the first state.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a non-light emitting state in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
The game console described in Appendix d8.
Equipped with light emitting means
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
In the second state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the second light emitting mode.
The second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
The game console according to Appendix d9 or d10.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d11.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d12.
The second display is a display that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d13.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
The game console described in Appendix d14.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to start displaying,
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d15.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d17)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d16.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can execute multiple types of production,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is different from the first effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
In the second effect, the operation means performs a second number of operations in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start when
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
The game console described in Appendix d18.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
One of the plurality of types of production is the third production.
The third effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
The game console according to Appendix d18 or d19.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
The game console described in Appendix d20.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is simulated the first number of times in the first operating mode. It is configured to be startable and
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d21.
The second effect is an effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d22.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that is in the first state when the operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a second state in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
The game console described in Appendix d23.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
The game console described in Appendix d23.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
The game console described in Appendix d25.
The first aspect is the first color,
The second aspect is the second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d23 to d26.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d27.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display").
The fourth display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The first display is a display that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The first display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is a selection display.
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operating means.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the first image.
The first image shows the operating means in the first operating mode rather than one operation performed by the operating means in the second operating mode during the execution of the fourth display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
The game console described in Appendix d29.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
The game console according to Appendix d29 or d30.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display mode is a display mode that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
The game console described in Appendix d31.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a light emitting state in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d32.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d33.
The first image is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d34.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game table described in Appendix d35
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d36.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d36.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can execute multiple types of production,
Display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first selection display.
The first selection display is a display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the first image.
The first image shows the operation in the first operation mode than when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by means.
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
The game console described in Appendix d39.
One of the plurality of types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is different from the first effect.
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
The game console according to Appendix d39 or d40.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
One of the plurality of types of production is the third production.
The third effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d41.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
The game console described in Appendix d42.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is simulated the first number of times in the first operating mode. It is configured to be startable and
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The game console according to Appendix d42 or d43.
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the first time or more, it is assumed that one operation is performed by the operating means. Is configured to be
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d44.
The first image is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d45.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second selection display.
The second selection display is a selection display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the second image.
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.
The third number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
The game console described in Appendix d46.
One of the plurality of types of production is the fifth production,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d47.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that is in the first state when the operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means that is in the second state during the execution of the first selection display.
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
The game console described in Appendix d48.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
The game console described in Appendix d48.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
The game console described in Appendix d50.
The first aspect is the first color,
The second aspect is the second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d51.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means that can display multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display").
The second display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started even when the operation means is long-pressed after the display of the third display is started.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to operate the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display").
The fourth display is different from the third display.
The second display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started.
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
The game console described in Appendix d54.
Equipped with a light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emitting states
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the first light emitting state.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state of accepting the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d56)
The game console described in Appendix d55.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the second light emitting state.
The first light emitting state is a lighting state.
The second light emitting state is the extinguished state.
When the light emitting means is set to the lighting state, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is accepted.
When the light emitting means is turned off, it means that the operation of the operating means is not accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
The game console described in Appendix d55.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the second light emitting state.
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode.
The second light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d57.
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d58.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display instructing the selection of one option from the plurality of options (hereinafter, referred to as "selection display").
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected (hereinafter, referred to as "fifth display").
The fifth display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started.
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
The game console described in Appendix d59.
The fifth display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number after the display of the selection display is started.
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d60.
When the operating means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started as if the operating means was repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d61.
The long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d62.
One of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operating means is the first state.
One of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operating means is the second state.
The second state is different from the first state.
The third display is a display displayed in the first state.
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
The game console described in Appendix d63.
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the first display is accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
The game console according to the appendix d63 or d64.
The second state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the second display is accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d63 to d65.
The first state is a state in which a predetermined time elapses after the first state is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d63 to d66.
The second state is a state in which a predetermined time elapses after the second state is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d67.
The second display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operating means is the second number after the display of the fourth display is started.
The second number is two or more.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d68.
The third display is a display including the first image.
The first image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
The game console described in Appendix d69.
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images.
The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
The game console described in Appendix d70.
The second image is an image whose display mode is different from that of the first image.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d71.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
The first means of operation and
The second production means,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second directing means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
The game console described in Appendix d73.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d73 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
The game console according to the appendix d73 or d74.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is an image display means, and is
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d73 to d75.
Equipped with a third production means
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
The game console described in Appendix d76.
The third effect means is an image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
The game console described in Appendix d73 to d77.
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
It is a game table equipped with the first operating means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
The second directing means is a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The game console described in Appendix d79.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d79 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The game console described in Appendix d81.
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is the first image display means,
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d82.
Equipped with a third production means
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game console described in Appendix d83.
Equipped with a fourth production means
The fourth effect means is a second image display means, and is
The fourth effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 79 to 84.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d85.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d86.
The "operation in the first operation mode" described in the appendix d79 means "multiple operations".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d87.
The "operation in the second operation mode" described in the appendix d79 means a "long press operation".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
The game console described in Appendix d88.
The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
It is a game table equipped with the first operating means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second effect is a back button effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The game console described in Appendix d79.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is an image display means, and is
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The game console described in Appendix d80.
The "effect executed by the first effect means" described in the appendix d80 means "the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the first display".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
The second effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game console described in Appendix 82.
The "effect executed by the first effect means" described in Appendix 82 means "the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the second display".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
Equipped with a second production means
The second directing means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
The game console described in Appendix d84.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d84 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The first means of operation and
The second operating means,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display that may be displayed depending on that the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode.
The second display is a display that may be displayed depending on that the second operating means is operated in the first operating mode.
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first display may be started.
When the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second display is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The game console described in Appendix d86.
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The game console according to the appendix d86 or d87.
The second display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display mini games,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") includes a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation promotion display"). And
The effect display related to the mini-game (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display") is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation promotion display"). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed during the first period.
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period.
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part of them overlap (hereinafter, referred to as "third period").
The result of the first effect display is given as a notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice").
The result of the second effect display is performed as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
The game console described in Appendix e1
If the operating means is operated during the third period, the first notice is given in response to the second notice after the second notice is given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
The game console described in Appendix e1
When the operation means is operated during the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is given.
After the second notice is given, the first notice may change according to the second notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e3.
In the third period, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e4.
The second effect display is a display including a display of the validity period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e5.
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is performed in the second aspect than when it is performed in the first aspect.
When the mini-game is started, the first notice is more likely to be performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect, the second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed in the fourth aspect than when it is executed in the third aspect.
The first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the second case.
The second case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the third case.
The third case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the fourth case.
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed in the fourth aspect than when it is executed in the third aspect.
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or the first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the second case, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the third case, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e9.
The number of times the operating means required to perform the result of the first effect display is operated, and the number of times the operating means required to perform the result of the second effect display is operated. Is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e10.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is played and the first notice is given than when the mini-game is played and the first notice is given. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying decorative pattern fluctuations.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game.
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game.
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area.
The second mini-game is a mini-game displayed using the certain display area.
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
The game console described in Appendix e12.
Equipped with a notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result suggesting that the second notice will be given (hereinafter referred to as "second result").
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
The game console according to Appendix e12 or e13.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
When the first mini-game is performed, the first effect is easier to perform than the second effect.
When the second mini-game is played, the second effect is easier to perform than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e14.
The appearance rates of the multiple types of mini-games differ between the non-electric support state and the electric support state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e15.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character appears.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character appears.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
The game console described in Appendix e13.
The first mini-game is a game in which the first character may appear and is played.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character may appear and is played.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character may appear and is played.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a fourth character may appear and is played.
In the first mini-game, the second result is more likely to be derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears.
In the second mini-game, the second result is more likely to be derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e17.
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "third effect display") is performed.
When the mini-game is started, the third effect display is deleted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e18.
The display area is divided by a frame.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e19.
The certain display area is a preset display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e20.
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a preset display area in connection with the start of the mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e21.
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e21.
A display means different from the display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means") is provided.
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
Display means that can display mini games,
It is a game table equipped with
The game console is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared.
One of the plurality of results is the first result,
One of the plurality of results is the second result,
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini game.
The second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
The game console described in Appendix e24.
It is suggested that the second notice is likely to be given because the result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
The game console according to Appendix e24 or e25.
Equipped with a production means that can execute the first production,
The effect means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect performed in connection with the decorative pattern variation display.
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared.
One of the plurality of production results is the first production result,
One of the plurality of production results is a second production result.
It is suggested that the result of the first effect becomes the result of the second effect before the result of the first effect is derived, which is an advantageous development.
The second effect result is more likely to give the player a privilege than the second result.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
The game console described in Appendix e26.
If the second effect result is derived, a big hit will be given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The game console according to Appendix e26 or e27.
The mini-game is a game that can be executed in the first period.
The first effect is an effect that can be performed during the second period.
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e26 to e28.
In one decorative symbol variation display, the mini-game is started earlier than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e29.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
When the operating means is operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is derived.
If the operating means is not operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is not derived.
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is more likely to be given than the second notice.
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e30.
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
The game console described in Appendix e31.
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed.
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed.
The mini-game is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
The game console described in Appendix e31.
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed.
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed.
The mini-game is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, when the result of the mini-game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is not changed to the second hold icon. The first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display that is started after the change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e29.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
In the mini-game, the same result is derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e34.
The mini-game starts before reach,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game.
The result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means.
The result of the mini-game changes depending on the operation status of the operation means.
The result of the mini-game may include a result that is not related to the result of the hit / fail judgment (hereinafter, referred to as "first result").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
The game console described in Appendix e36.
The mini-game is a game aimed at achieving a certain task.
Whether or not the certain task is achieved depends on the operation status of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The game console according to Appendix e36 or e37.
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means that can execute decorative pattern variable display,
The mini-game is a game that may be started in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended.
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
The game console described in Appendix e38.
The automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable.
In the mini-game in the first case, the automatic operation is configured to be infeasible.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The game console according to Appendix e38 or e39.
The mini-game may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game.
The first result is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game in the first case than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The game console described in Appendix e40.
The second period is a period that does not include the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The game console according to the appendix e40 or e41.
In the second case, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second result") is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than in the first case. A game table featuring that.

(Appendix e43)
The game console described in Appendix e42.
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a look-ahead notice.
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e43.
The types of mini games differ between the first case and the second case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e44.
In the mini-game in the first case, the validity period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first validity period display") is displayed.
In the mini-game in the second case, the valid period display of the operating means (hereinafter referred to as "second valid period display") is displayed.
The first validity period display is a meter display.
The second validity period display is a meter display.
The rate at which the meter decreases differs between the first validity period display and the second validity period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e45.
In the mini-game in the first case, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation promotion display") is displayed.
In the mini-game in the second case, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation promotion display") is displayed.
The first operation promotion display includes the first number of display patterns.
The second operation promotion display includes a second number display pattern.
Of the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e38 to e46.
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display multiple types of production display,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative pattern variation display.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display in which a big hit notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice") may be executed.
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as "second notice") may be derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous display will increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo-continuous display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
The first means of operation and
The second operating means,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operating means.
The second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
A game table characterized by that.

The first effect may be a notice effect. Further, the second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a smaller operating means.

(Appendix f2)
The game console described in Appendix f1.
The first state is a state during the entire period in which the first effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f3)
The game console described in Appendix f1 or f2.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
When the second operating means is operated within the second period, the second effect is started, and when the second operating means is operated, the second effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A game table characterized by that.

The second operating means may be an operating means that vibrates whenever the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
The game console described in Appendix f3.
The second operating means is configured to vibrate even in at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
The first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f4.
When the first operating means is operated within the first period, the first effect is started, and when the first operating means is operated, the first effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

That is, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate even when the first effect is not executed, or is configured to vibrate without fail.

(Appendix f6)
The game console described in Appendix f5.
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications.
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the first notification, and is
The first notification is a notification that prompts the operation of the first operating means.
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated while the first notification is being executed, and the second operating means always vibrates. It may be an operation means to perform.

(Appendix f7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f6.
One of the plurality of types of production is the third production.
It is configured so that one of the first effect and the third effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means.
In the state where the third effect is being executed, the second operating means is configured so as not to vibrate.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f7.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operating means is not operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f8.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f8.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a second indication,
The first display is a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operating means.
The second display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice display") is started in response to the operation of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g2)
The game console described in Appendix g1
The first notice display is a display including a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g3)
The game console described in Appendix g1 or g2.
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g4)
The game console described in Appendix g3.
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period.
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third notice display").
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g5)
The game console described in Appendix g4.
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period.
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated.
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g7)
The game console described in Appendix g6.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the second display mode.
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fourth display mode.
When the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than when the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is the case where the third display mode is used. It is configured so that the first notice display is easy to display.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g6.
One of the plurality of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
When the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first notice according to the third display mode is used. The display is configured to be easy to display,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g8.
The first notice display is a display displayed for at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g10)
The game console described in Appendix g9.
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g11)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display the first display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operating means.
The first display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice display") is started in response to the operation of the operation means.
The first notice display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g12)
The game console described in Appendix g11.
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g13)
The game console described in Appendix g12.
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period.
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third notice display").
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g14)
The game console described in Appendix g13.
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period.
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g14.
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated.
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g15.
One of the plurality of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
When the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode as compared with the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode. It is configured so that the notice display of
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g17)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g16.
The first notice display is a display displayed for at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g18)
The game console described in Appendix g17.
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g19)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple displays.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a second indication,
The first display is a display related to a certain effect.
The second display is a display related to the certain effect.
The first display is a display that may be temporarily displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols.
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g20)
The game console described in Appendix g19.
The certain effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g21)
The game console according to the appendix g19 or g20.
The first display is a display provided with the number of patterns of the first number.
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns.
The second number is larger than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g22)
The game console described in Appendix g21.
The first number is one,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g22.
The combination of the decorative patterns is three.
The certain effect is an effect that is started once the first display of the three is displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the display modes of the first display of the three may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g22.
The combination of the decorative patterns is three.
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence.
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol that is once displayed at the end of the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g25)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g24.
The display means is a means for displaying a notice display for notifying that the first display may be displayed once during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
The first display is more easily displayed when the notice display is displayed than when the notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g26)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g25.
The decorative symbol variation display is configured so that the combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the pass / fail judgment after the variation of the decorative symbol is started.
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g26.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
The certain effect is an effect using the operation means.
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operating means.
The first display is a display that does not include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operation means in the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g28)
The game console described in Appendix g27.
The first display is a display displayed before the operation validity period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g26.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
The operating means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is the first state,
One of the plurality of states is a second state.
The first state and the second state are different states.
The first display is a display provided with a display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first display pattern") corresponding to the operation means in the first state.
The second display is a display pattern according to the operating means in the second state (hereinafter,
It is called "second display pattern". ) Is displayed,
The second display is a display including the first display pattern.
The second display is a display including the second display pattern.
After the first display is displayed in the first display pattern, the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first case". )
The operating means in the first case is configured to be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix h1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix h2)
The game console described in Appendix h1
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
The game console described in Appendix h1 or h2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h4)
The game console described in Appendix h3.
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
The second image display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h4.
Even if the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h5.
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h6.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h7.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One type of movement among the plurality of types of movements is a directing movement.
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix h10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h9.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than when it does not occur.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h10.
A hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h11.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h14)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
The game console described in Appendix h14.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display.
The period display may not notify the timing at which the third effect display is displayed.
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
The game console described in Appendix h15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h17)
The game console described in Appendix h16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed due to a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h15 to h17.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
During the display of the third effect display, the power output movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h19)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h18.
After the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easy to see.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h20)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h19.
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h19.
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h21.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and in some cases, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", or may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Appendix h23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h23.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h25)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
Before the first timing is reached, the third display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h26)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h27)
The game console described in Appendix h26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a time display.
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h28)
The game console according to the appendix h26 or h27.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
When the second time elapses, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h29.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix h31)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display that notifies the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h32)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation validity period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h33)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
The first type of display is a period display, and is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h33.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h35)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h36)
The game console described in Appendix h35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h37)
The game console according to the appendix h35 or h36.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h37.
When the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode is always changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
The countdown display is started and ended within the period of one symbol change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h40.
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h42)
The game console described in Appendix h41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h43)
The game console described in Appendix h41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h45)
The game console described in Appendix h44.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h45.
It may not change to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h48)
The game console described in Appendix h47.
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h48.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h48.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h51)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a notice display, and is
The first display is a display that notifies the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h52)
The game console described in Appendix h51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h53)
The game console described in Appendix h52.
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h54)
The game console described in Appendix h53.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h52 to h54.
Equipped with a directing movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h56)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h57)
The game console described in Appendix h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed by the time when the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h58.
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h60.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h62)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at the timing when a certain effect is performed.
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h63)
The game console described in Appendix h62.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h64)
The game console described in Appendix h63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h65.
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h67.
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h70)
The game console described in Appendix h69.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix h71)
The game console described in Appendix h69 or h70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display changes due to the movement display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h72)
The game console described in Appendix h71.
Even while the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h73)
The game console described in Appendix h71.
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h73.
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h75)
The game console described in Appendix h74.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h76)
The game console described in Appendix h74 or h75.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h77)
The game console described in Appendix h76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h79)
The game console described in Appendix h78.
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h79.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h79.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h82)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display, and is a display including a time display.
It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started.
It is configured so that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started.
The display of the timer display is started, and the certain effect may be started in response to the time display reaching a certain time.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h83)
The game console described in Appendix h82.
If the time display reaches the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is started.
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h84)
The game console described in Appendix h82 or h83.
The certain effect is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices.
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is a third notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the fourth notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
The third notice is a notice that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, and the fourth notice is a notice that can notify that it will be a big hit. Is,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first notice may be a hold change notice, a look-ahead mode, or a continuous notice.

Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-ream or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

Further, the third notice may be a cut-in notice or a next notice.

Further, the fourth notice may be a big hit notification.

(Appendix h85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h84.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a mini game display.
Depending on the result of the display of the mini game, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h86)
The game console described in Appendix h85.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item, and is
The notice item may be displayed depending on the result of the display of the mini game.
The notice item includes a display suggesting that the timer display is started to be displayed.
After the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
If the notice item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h87)
The game console according to the appendix h85 or h86.
It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived before the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h88)
The game console according to the appendix h85 or h86.
It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived after the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h85 to h88.
The result of the display of the mini-game may be derived as a result not related to the certain effect.
It is configured so that the display of the mini-game is started before the timer display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h89.
The timer display when the certain effect is not started is configured so that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h90.
The timer display is a display that is started to be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
It is configured so that the certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h92)
The game console described in Appendix h91.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
The third aspect is different from the first aspect, and is different from the first aspect.
The third aspect is different from the second aspect, and is different from the second aspect.
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, a state advantageous to the player is given, which is different from the big hit game performed in response to the final display of the big hit symbol. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h93)
The game console described in Appendix h92.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the timer display is erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h94)
The game console described in Appendix h92.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h95)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h92 to h94.
The first aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the first time.
The second aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the second time.
The third aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the third time.
Of the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only when the advantageous state is granted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h96)
The game console described in Appendix h95.
The time display that is first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is configured so that the display after the decimal point can also be displayed.
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is 0.
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is 0.
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is other than 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h97)
The game console described in Appendix h95 or h96.
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h98)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h97.
Equipped with an effect display means that can execute the effect display
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
It is configured so that the timer display may be displayed on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
Both the display means and the effect display means are configured to display the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
In the first case, the effect may not be started.
In the case of the above, it is configured so that the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h99)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h98.
The timer display is a display in which the time display is displayed by the source.
The certain time is 0,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h100)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is one of the notices related to the notice.
The second display is a look-ahead notice display performed by displaying the hold icon in a certain manner.
The third display is one of the displays for notifying the start of the execution of the effect (display indicating that the effect is waiting to be executed).
The fourth display is a notice display of one of the notice displays different from the second display.
The display of the first display may start before the display of the second display starts.
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h101)
The game console described in Appendix h100.
The third display, which started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may end in the next symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h102)
The game console according to the appendix h100 or h102.
The display of the position among the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a background display in the hold icon.
The fifth display is configured to be displayable in the first state.
It is configured so that the fifth display is not displayed in the second state.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.
The second state is a state in which a certain reach effect is being executed.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h103)
The game console described in Appendix h102.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h104)
The game console according to the appendix h102 or h103.
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h105)
The game console according to the appendix h102 or h103.
The area where the first display is displayed is configured so as not to overlap with the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h106)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h100 to h105.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h107)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h100 to h105.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h108)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The first display is a display that at least suggests that the second display may be started.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display for notifying that the execution of a certain effect is started.
The fourth display is a notice display regarding the symbol change display being executed.
The fifth display is a display indicating that the area is at least the area where the hold icon is displayed.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
In the first state, the display of the third display may be started,
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon.
In the second state, the fifth display is not displayed together with the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h109)
The game console described in Appendix h108.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h110)
The game console according to the appendix h108 or h109.
At least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h110.
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h112)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h110.
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h113)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h112.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h112.
The first display and the fifth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h114.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h115.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h117)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h115.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The sixth display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the sixth display, the display of the fourth display is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the sixth display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h118)
The game console described in Appendix h117.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display foretelling that the display of the sixth display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the seventh display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h119)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h118.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a variable icon display.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h120)
The game console described in Appendix 119.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h121)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h120.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The ninth display, when displayed, is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h122)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 108 to h121.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h123)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started.
The fourth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
In the first state, the third display may be started,
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state.
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed.
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed.
The first state is one of the states in which the sixth display can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the sixth display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h124)
The game console described in Appendix h123,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect will be started.
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h125)
The game console according to the appendix h123 or h124.
It is configured to be able to perform a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h126)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h125.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h127)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h126.
At least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h128)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h127.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h129)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h127.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h130)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h129.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h131)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 123 to h130.
The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h132)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h131.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h133)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h132.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h134)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h133.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h135)
The game console described in Appendix h134.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a display foretelling that the display of the seventh display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h136)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h135.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h137)
The game console described in Appendix h136.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h138)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h137.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display.
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h139)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h138.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h140)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
In the first state, the third display may be started,
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state.
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h141)
The game console described in Appendix h140.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed.
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h142)
The game console described in Appendix h141.
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h143)
The game console according to the appendix h141 or h142.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h144)
The game console according to the appendix h141 or h142.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h145)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h141 to h144.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h146)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h141 to h144.
The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h147)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h146.
It is configured to be able to perform a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h148)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h147.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect will be started.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h149)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h148.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next start symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h150)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note h140 to Supplementary note h149.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h151)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h150.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h152)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h151.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h153)
The game console described in Appendix h152.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a display foretelling that the display of the seventh display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h154)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h153.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h155)
The game console described in Appendix h154.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h156)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h155.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display.
The tenth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h157)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h156.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-1)
Display means and
The first means of movement and
The second means of movement and
With the third movable means,
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device.
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means.
The first movable means is a movable means that can move to the first position.
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is configured to overlap the first display area of the display area of the display means from the front side.
The first display area is configured to be in the first visible state.
The first display area is configured to be in a second visible state.
The second visual state is configured so that the back side of the display area of the display means is easier to see through the first display area than the first visual state.
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visible state (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), the first movable means is configured to be in the first position. And
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to the second position.
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position.
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed.
The first effect is an effect including an effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position.
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means.
The third movable means is a movable means that can move from the third initial position to the third position.
The second movable means is a movable means that can be moved to the fifth position.
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is configured to overlap the third display area of the display area of the display means from the front side.
It is configured so that the second production can be performed,
The second effect is a notice effect performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position.
The second effect is an effect executed after the execution of the first effect.
In at least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), the second state. The movable means of the above is configured to be in the fifth position.
In the second state, the third movable means is configured so as not to reach the third position.
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the third movable means is overlapped with the second movable means at the fifth position from the front side.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1.
The second position is a position in an area that overlaps the first display area from the front side.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The game console described in Appendix R0-2.
Even when the second movable means moves to the second position, the first display area does not enter the second visible state and remains in the first visible state. (Hereinafter referred to as "in some cases")
In some cases, the first effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-3.
The "effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position" described in Appendix R0-1 is "the effect performed by the cooperation of the second movable means". It is an effect of expressing something by the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-3.
The "effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position" described in Appendix R0-1 is "the effect performed by the cooperation of the second movable means". It is an effect in which the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position appear to be three-dimensionally combined.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-5.
The first movable means is a movable means that can move from the first initial position to the first position.
The first initial position is an initial position deviated from the area overlapping the display means.
The first initial position is an initial position on the back side of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-6.
The second movable means is a movable means that can move from the second initial position to the second position.
The second initial position is an initial position deviated from the area overlapping the display means.
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-7.
The first display area may be in the second visible state even in a state different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-8.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-8.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

Next, the meter effect will be described.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of meter production step by step.

In FIG. 80 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is shown on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown on the right side.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E, which was not shown in FIG. 3, is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 80 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Regarding the front-back relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction) between the family crest accessory 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the family crest accessory 224E is on the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the most. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest accessory 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the rear side.

Not shown in FIG. 80, the variable display symbol (special figure) executed by the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 etc.) and the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 etc.) are executed. The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Further, the variable display symbol (general diagram) executed by the non-illustrated general diagram display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B, which is variablely displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500. As described above, on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side, the timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Therefore, between the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs by a predetermined cycle of the timer interrupt processing on the sub-control unit 400,500 side, but when the first symbol starts the variable display, the third symbol is displayed. The symbol pd3 also starts the variable display, and when the first symbol becomes the stop display, the third symbol pd3 also becomes the stop display. Hereinafter, the description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3, but the same applies even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

Further, in FIG. 80, the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the shogun's character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display, the square display corresponds to the special figure 1, and the circle display corresponds to the special figure 2. Regardless of whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the loss stop symbol is being displayed on the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates that the special figure display device is displaying. (212, 214) indicates that the jackpot stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the special symbol display device (212, 214) is displaying the symbol variation. The fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. It should be noted that the lighting of the LED lamp or the like on the board may be used to distinguish between the variable display and the stop display. Further, a mini-decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is reduced and displayed is shown on the upper portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and this mini-decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display mode of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and like the fourth symbol pd4, has a role of clearly indicating the variable display and the stop display of the third symbol pd3. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 all correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

The state shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost in both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a display of a gray square and a display of a gray circle, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 indicate that the stop display is in progress.

Further, the hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 80 (1). This hold frame UI can be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be seen as a user interface that provides various information to the player. Further, in the hold frame UI, a variable icon display area is arranged in the center, a hold icon display area is arranged on the left side thereof, and an effect display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of hold balls of special figure 1 or special figure 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. It should be noted that a stage corresponding to the total number (for example, eight) of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variable icon display area, a stage cs higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variable icon is displayed on the stage cs. Further, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 80 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending to the left and right with a vertical stripe pattern, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area, and The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be seen as a stage icon displayed so as to overlap the base icon UIb from the front side. Further, the tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. 80 (1). This tutorial display ts can also be seen as a tutorial icon that overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side.

One hold icon h1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 80 (1), and it is notified that the number of holds of the current special figure is one. That is, the hold icons are displayed for the number of hold balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing, the closer to the center (right side). The first hold hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode which is a look-ahead notice display mode. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and each display mode has a jackpot expectation (reliability) in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold. Represents. However, even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold does not always result in a big hit, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. In addition, after the hold icon starts to be displayed in the look-ahead notice mode or is started to be displayed in the default display mode, the timing of changing to the look-ahead notice mode is at the start, change, stop, and hold of the look-ahead target. The time of winning is given.

Further, on the stage cs of the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 80 (1), the variable icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 80 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are in the stop display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also in the stop display, but in FIG. 80 (1), the stop display is in progress. It is the state immediately after becoming, and the variable icon c does not disappear and still remains. In FIG. 80 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears.

Further, a numerical display hn of the number of pending numbers is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 80 (1). The numerical display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is "1" and the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 is "0". Further, a mini character display (hereinafter, referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display (so-called constant display) that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is in variable display or stopped display, and is displayed over a plurality of times in the variable display of the third symbol pd3. NS. In the example shown in FIG. 80, the display of the character cd of the main character, the lord, is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the character cd of the lord shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the initial posture.

Further, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 80 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 80, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "castle town" is displayed on the information display unit ST1, and the townscape of the castle town is commonly displayed in the background of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to N. The information display unit ST1 may display the effect mode, the current control state (for example, during probabilistic change), the look-ahead notice, and the currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

Further, in FIG. 80 (1), the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operating means) is also shown in the lower left corner. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operating means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1, or may be an operation means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

The display positions, sizes, and number of displays of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 80 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap the 4th symbol pd4 or the 5th symbol pd5 from the front side, the 4th symbol pd4 or the 4th symbol from the beginning. 5 A plurality of symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

As shown in FIG. 80 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the variable icon c disappears, in FIG. 80 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The symbol change display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 80 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started in the fifth symbol pd5. The third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. The thick, short white arrows represent low-speed fluctuations (the same shall apply hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the fluctuating symbol. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 80 (2) moves to the stage cs of the variable icon display area, and the variable icon c in the red display mode is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it was a hold icon up to that point and the display mode (red) of the icon after it became a variable icon match. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being displayed. That is, the notice is usually executed depending on the display mode of the variable icon. Even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, the symbol variation display being displayed does not always result in a big hit, and it may be lost. In FIG. 80 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” for both special figures 1 and 2. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 80 (3), the display of the square corresponding to the special figure 1 is changed from gray to white, indicating that the variable display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In FIG. 80 (3) when the symbol variation display is started, there is no change in the display content of the tutorial display ts.

The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 80 (4) fluctuates at high speed. The thin, long white arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (the same shall apply hereinafter). With high-speed fluctuations, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbols. In FIG. 80 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. Further, the display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the variable icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon c is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (when the hold increases). At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production Alternatively, when continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the meter display may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. When the meter display appears, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed to the display content related to the meter display. In the meter display shown in FIG. 80 (4), the meter frame mf is white, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of the first meter display. Further, the meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 80 is an increasing type, has five scales, and fills up at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 80 (4) is started to be displayed in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

In FIG. 80 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 80 (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, "" Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 80 (6), the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 7 (7) following FIG. 80 (6), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter, the same applies), and the display position of this meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that sways (temporarily stops). The position overlaps from the front side, but the display position is not limited to this position. Further, the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative symbol that is swaying (temporarily stopped), but the display size is not limited to this size. Further, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is, in addition to the timing of the first stop, when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, and to the special symbol start port. At the time of winning (when the hold increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production, or continuation Time (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of the super reach, during the super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter on the meter display. The meter rise item UpI shown in FIG. 80 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rise item UpI are prepared, and the meter rise rate differs depending on the type.

In FIG. 80 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side with the decorative pattern that is shaking (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 80 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 6”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the meter rise item UpI has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW has risen (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself that increases or decreases is different from the meter frame mf (blue in this case), but it may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which this meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the timing of the second stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon c is completed, and the special figure. At the time of winning the start port (when the hold increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), when a certain production succeeds, the provisional third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production It is possible to enumerate at the time of stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, the timing of meter increase may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

In FIG. 80 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter rising item UpI is a position that overlaps from the front side with the right symbol that has started the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop). In FIG. 80 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 80 (12), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) by one scale again. With this, the meter of the white meter display MW has risen to the second scale.

In FIG. 80 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 80 (14), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 80 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, the lord, appears and the line "Still more" is displayed, which encourages the possibility that re-variation will start. In FIG. 80 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and is temporarily stopped. The character display of "x2", which is the number of continuation times, is displayed so that a part of the symbol on the left overlaps. In FIG. 80 (17), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start high-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 80 (18), the character display of “x2”, which is the continuation number display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 80 step by step.

In FIG. 81 (19) following from FIG. 80 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side starts a notice that a mini item will appear. .. That is, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 81 (20), the closed treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the information display unit ST1. This treasure chest icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of mini items. In FIG. 81 (21), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and the meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI has appeared.

Note that the treasure chest icon I1 shown in FIG. 81 (20) disappears without opening and remains closed, or nothing appears even when opened, or an item different from the meter rise item UpI (for example, a question mark item). Items marked with or x, items with unfortunate characters, etc.) may appear. That is, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, it may be a false notice as a notice that the mini item will appear.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 84 (22), the moving meter raising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is obstructing, and a part of the meter rising item UpI cannot be seen.

In FIG. 81 (23), the meter rising item UpI reaches the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 81 (24), the meter rise item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW is further raised by one scale, and the white meter display MW is raised to three scales.

When the meter rise item UpI is displayed, the meter may rise, but the meter may not rise in some cases. For example, the meter rise item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches the meter display.

In FIG. 81 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 81 (26), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the shaking fluctuation is started. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 81 (26). In FIG. 81 (27), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slower, and in the following FIG. The right symbol, which has moved to the upper left corner of the 208L and has also fluctuated, moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (29), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still display the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd of the lord on the display stage ss. The information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure box icon I1 has disappeared.

In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears, and the tutorial display ts also disappears. In addition, the hold icon did not remain here, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the change icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol change continues to be displayed. However, the variable icon c may also disappear. Alternatively, if the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may continue. Further, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

In FIG. 81 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are switched to the wilderness background, the display of the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. The display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical display hn of the number of pending numbers is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (30), and the duel scene between the two is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 81 (31) is a state in which the meters are accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). And, the word "power-up" is also displayed to announce that the main character's lord will power up as much as the meter is accumulated. From FIG. 81 (32) to FIG. 81 (33), the meter is used, the white meter display MW decreases, and in FIG. I'm back. In FIG. 81 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the character of the main character, the lord. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. For example, a green aura icon has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a blue aura icon, a red aura icon has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a green aura icon, and a golden aura icon has a rich jackpot. The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes to seven colors has the highest expectation of a jackpot, and corresponds to a level higher than the jackpot rich (for example, a jackpot confirmed).

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (35), a scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the figure (36), the scene in which the character of the lord is defeated is displayed. Is displayed, and "Decoration 3", which is different from "Decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner, is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. After that, the symbol variation display ends, and the third symbol pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device On the 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was a hassle super reach production.

The example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. Become.

FIG. 82 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 81 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 82 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 80 (1), and both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop indications of the combination of the lost decorative symbols. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6". Further, the hold icon (first hold icon) h1 of the first hold shown in FIG. 82 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode which is a look-ahead notice display mode. There is. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

In FIG. 82 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and after the variable icon c disappears, in FIG. Based on the symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs of the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 82 (3), the variable icon c in the green display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 82 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord. The display of the line "Ikuzo" also corresponds to the notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 82 (6), the changing ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord bears the changing ball icon cI. In FIG. 82 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI, and the movement animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 82 (7), the change ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 82 (8), the change ball icon cI is displayed on the white meter MW. Is hit, and the white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 82 (8) has changed, and the effect display ed1 has been added. In FIG. 82 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The effect in which the character cd of the lord continues to appear, which is shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to 82 (8), corresponds to an example of the meter change effect. Further, the red meter display MR corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. This red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effect shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to 82 (8) is a kind of rank-up effect. Corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) is also in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). Further, a sound effect for notifying a change in the meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (9).

In FIG. 82 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 82 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, ““ Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. Further, the character cd of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 82 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 82 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, as in FIG. 80 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 82 (13), as in FIG. 80 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 82 (14), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales at a stretch. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 is more likely to accumulate meters than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 80. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state will change to the full state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state will change to the full state. It is configured to be. This is the amount of one state change in the red meter display MR (the amount of increase due to one meter rise item UpI) rather than the amount of one state change in the white meter display MW (the amount of increase due to one meter rise item UpI). There will be more. The color of the meter itself that increases or decreases is different from the red color of the meter frame mf (also blue), but it may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter is increased is the same as the timing variously described with reference to FIG. 80. Further, in FIG. 82 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 begins to slow down, and in FIG. (15), the fluctuation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration”). 7 ”) becomes recognizable, and eventually it enters the reach state. In FIG. 82 (16), the reach state is reached, and the second meter raising item UpI appears on the right symbol so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 82 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 82 (18), the meter rise item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) again by 3 scales, and the red meter display MR is in a full tank state. The "reach" sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (18), in which the meter raising item UpI has disappeared and the raising effect of the red meter display MR has been completed.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step.

In FIG. 83 (19) following from FIG. 82 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and in the following diagram (20), the left symbol that fluctuates swaying. , The right symbol that has been shaken and fluctuated moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (21), it evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and as in FIG. 80 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold frame UI disappeared and the castle town The background screen of the swordsman has changed to the screen of the swordsman. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In the super reach effect here, as shown in FIG. 83 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1 remains. , In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here as well. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 81 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83, and conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 81. It may be.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (23), the full tank red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. There is. And, the word "power-up" is also displayed to announce that the main character's lord will power up as much as the meter is accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, the lord will greatly power up and win, that is, the expectation of a big hit will be high. From FIG. 83 (24) to FIG. 83 (25), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, the state of 0 (fourth state) in FIG. It corresponds to an example of the state). In FIG. 83 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the main character, the lord. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to the color suggesting the jackpot richness in the currently performed symbol variation display. The color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a level higher than the jackpot rich (for example, jackpot confirmed).

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (27), the scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the figure (28), the scene in which the character of the lord wins. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 7" as the "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 83 (29), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full state, the jackpot symbol finally becomes larger than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. Easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the state changes from the empty state to the full state than when the state does not change from the empty state to the full state. Further, the super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 83 corresponds to an example of a notice display in which the display is started when the red meter display MR changes to the full tank state.

FIG. 84 is a diagram stepwise showing a modified example of the effect by the changing ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. 82.

FIGS. 84 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 82 (1) to (6). In FIG. 84 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI and changes. The movement animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 84 (7), the change ball icon cI is moving from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the variable icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 8 (8), the change ball icon cI is moving. The icon cI hits the variable icon c, and a part of the variable icon c is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. Further, the display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 84 (8) has changed, and the effect display ed2 has been added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display is hit as shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 84 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c, which was previously green, has changed to red. The red variable icon has a higher probability of being a big hit in the displayed symbol variable display than the green variable icon, and is ranked up here. In addition, the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variable icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 85 is of the increasing type.

The meter displays shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (f) correspond to the white meter display MW (one example of the first meter display) shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 and FIGS. 82 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is the default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85A is an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of the first state. In addition, FIG. 85 (a) also shows the white meter lift item UpI. The meter rise item UpI is an item in which the rate of rise of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rise item UpI is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by the first amount.

FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which was in an empty state, is raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. 85 (a). The white meter raising item UpI is an item that raises the white meter display MW by one scale. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85B corresponds to an example of a second state which is a state between a full tank state and an empty state.

FIG. 85 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb of the same color as the meter itself that increases or decreases. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by a second amount.

FIG. 85 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which was in an empty state, is raised by two scales by the blue meter raising item UpIb shown in FIG. Has been done. The blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the white meter display MW by two scales.

FIG. 85 (e) shows the red meter rise item UpIr. This red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by a third amount.

FIG. 85 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the white meter display MW meter, which was in an empty state, is raised by four scales by the red meter raising item UpIr shown in FIG. 85 (e). Has been done. The red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the white meter display MW by 4 scales.

In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The white meter display MW meter, which was empty, becomes a state where it is raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (state where it is raised by 6 scales) depending on the golden meter rising item. .. As described above, the rate of increase of the meter may not be constant and may change depending on the lottery result or the like.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to 85 (l) is a red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a larger amount of meter accumulation than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full tank state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot. Therefore, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state where the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol mode to be finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state where the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous jackpot referred to here is, for example, a jackpot with a probability variation or a jackpot with a large number of rounds with a ball.

FIG. 85 (g) shows the default white meter rise item UpI, and FIG. 85 (h) shows the empty red meter display MR meter, which is the white meter rise item. UpI shows a state in which the value is raised by 3 scales at a stretch (fifth state). The white meter raising item UpI is an item that raises by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

FIG. 85 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb, and FIG. 85 (j) shows a meter of a red meter display MR that was in an empty state by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It is shown that the tank has risen by 6 scales at a stretch, that is, the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the red meter display MR by 6 scales (all scales).

As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled as compared with the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

FIG. 85 (k) shows the green meter rise item UpIm. This green meter raising item UpIm is an item that raises by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the tank is full, the surplus scale (overflow scale) may be invalidated, but here, in order to effectively handle the surplus scale, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Will be done. The type of meter display additionally displayed may be the same type as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 85 (l), the same type of red meter display MR as the type of meter display that is full is additionally displayed below the meter display that is full. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 85 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is gold may be displayed under the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 (l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the surplus scale.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 85 (m) and 85 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN in which the meter frame mf is a rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. In the state where the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full regardless of the color of the meter rising item displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is empty and the white meter rising item UpI, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 85 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the tank is always full, and the big hit is confirmed.

However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if the tank is full and there is an extra scale (overflow scale), the jackpot is confirmed, so a new meter is shown as shown in FIG. 85 (l). The display is not additionally displayed, and the remaining scale is invalidated.

It should be noted that, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of the color, the meter rising item may always be raised by the same scale (for example, one scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the expected degree of jackpot.

In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above, but supplementing here, the meter rising item is a temporary design of a big hit during symbol fluctuation, long-term fluctuation, before super reach, during super reach, and decorative symbol. It may be easy to appear when stopped.

The meter display described above may be a big hit notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol change display (the change) being displayed at the time when the meter display starts to be displayed, or is started after the change. It may be a big hit notice (look-ahead notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, when the expectation of a big hit is mentioned above, it may be the expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation, or it may be the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started after that.

Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to 85 (l), and FIGS. 85 (m) and (n). ), The color of the meter frame mf may be different, the display sizes may be different from each other, and the display positions may be different from each other. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

Further, when viewed on a single meter display, the first state is the state in which the meter frame is white and empty, as shown in FIG. 85 (a) and the like, and FIG. 85 (b), FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f), in which the meter frame is white and neither empty nor full, is the second state, and the state in which the meter frame is white and full, which is not shown in FIG. 85, is the third state. The fourth state is the state in which the meter frame is red and empty as shown in FIG. 85 (g) and the like, and the intermediate state in which the meter frame is red and is neither empty nor full as shown in FIG. 85 (h). Is the fifth state, and the state in which the meter frame is red and the tank is full, as shown in FIG. 85 (j), is the sixth state.

Hereinafter, the meter effect will be described, but the description may be omitted for items that overlap with the items described so far.

FIG. 86 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a rank-up effect fortune-telling whether the meter display changes.

The state shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost in both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3". In this state, there is no reservation of the special figure, and the first symbol pd1 continues the stop display until the special figure start ports 230 and 232 are won. Further, the white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (1). The white meter display MW here is in an empty state. The white meter display MW has been continuously displayed from the stage prior to FIG. 86 (1), and may already be continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 86 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and in FIG. 8 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Then, on the stage cs of the variable icon display area, the display of the variable icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Further, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed. Continues until FIG. 86 (18).

Even in FIG. 86 (4) in which the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in the same figure (5) has a ball. The display of the hold icon (first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, has started. Further, in FIG. 86 (6), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) in the green display mode is started.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 86 (8), "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (9), the loss is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs of the variable icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during the stop display (including the final display) of the third symbol pd3 in FIGS. 86 (1) and 86 (8) to (9). In some cases, the meter display is always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of fluctuation displays in the third symbol pd3.

In FIG. 86 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 due to the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the variable icon c. doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 86 (10) is the default display mode as in the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 86 (9), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 in the look-ahead notice display mode is shifted and moved as it is in the display mode, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. There is.

In FIG. 86 (11), a rank-up effect for predicting whether the meter display changes is started, a change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and in FIG. 86 (12), information is displayed. The change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The character "Weird" is written on the change icon I2.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 86 (13), the character cd of the lord draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. If it hits, it has been changed to ".

In FIG. 86 (14), the character cd of the lord shoots an arrow, and the arrow icon representing the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying towards the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 86 (15), the icon of the flying arrow is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the arrow icon is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is obstructing, and a part of the arrow icon is not visible.

In FIG. 86 (16), the arrow icon brilliantly hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 86 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears and the change icon disappears. The display mode of I2 has changed, and the effect display ed3 has been added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display such as different colors. It should be noted that the character cd of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different pose from the initial posture. In FIG. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is white. It is displayed on the meter display MW so as to overlap from the front side.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 86 step by step.

In FIG. 87 (19) following FIG. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It's changing. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 87 (19) is also in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in upgrading from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but it may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the lord's character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the bow is pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the effect display disappears without being added, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW In some cases, the icon disappears without moving, and the meter display remains the white meter display MW and does not change at all. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the character cd of the lord does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or it does not move to the white meter display MW. Then, the change icon I2 disappears, and the meter display may remain the white meter display MW without any change. Further, even if the effect display ed3 overlaps the added change icon I2 or the non-added change icon I2 on the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself does not rank up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Further, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR may be changed to the white meter display MW).

In FIG. 87 (20), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Character cd has returned to its initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 87 (21), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period when the third symbol pd3 is stopped or confirmed. The red meter display MR here is in an empty state.

In FIG. 87 (22), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (21) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 87 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts to fluctuate at high speed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 87 (24) starts a notice that a mini item appears. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 81, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 87 (25), the closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 87 (26), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 87 (27), the moving meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 87 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. It is displayed on the meter display MR so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 87 (29), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR where the meter is more likely to accumulate than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by three scales at once.

In FIG. 87 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 87 (31), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the shaking fluctuation is started. In the following FIG. 87 (32), the left symbol that was swaying and fluctuating moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that was also swaying and fluctuating was moved to the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. Then, in FIG. 87 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 81, the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. It's changing. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

In FIG. 87 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are all switched to the wilderness background, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The duel scene has begun. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state in which three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). And, the word "power-up" is also displayed to announce that the main character's lord will power up as much as the meter is accumulated.

It should be noted that the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIGS. 86 (3) and (10) before the meter display changes.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 87 step by step.

From FIG. 87 (36) to FIG. 88 (37), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and in FIG. 88 (37), the state becomes 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 88 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 that suggests a big hit is added behind the character of the main character, the lord.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (39), the scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the figure (40), the scene in which the character of the lord wins. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 4" as the "decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 88 (41), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) has been won.

In the example shown in FIG. 81 and the examples shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. 81, which is the white meter display MW, the loss super reach effect is produced. In contrast, in this example, which was a red meter display MR, it was a jackpot super reach effect. In this way, apart from the accumulation of meters, the expectation of big hits changes depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf). That is, if the accumulation of meters (including the empty state) is the same, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the red meter display MR than in the white meter display MW.

FIG. 89 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 88 (41).

In the example shown in FIG. 88, the red meter display MR having a higher expectation of a big hit than the white meter display MW was displayed, and the red meter display MR was not in an empty state but in a state in which three scales were accumulated. .. Therefore, there is a high expectation that a favorable jackpot will be won, and as shown in FIG. 89, a re-lottery may be performed. That is, a jackpot with 3 scales accumulated on the red meter display MR is more advantageous than a jackpot with 3 scales accumulated on the white meter display MW (for example, a jackpot with a probability variation or a jackpot with a large number of rounds with balls). The degree of expectation to do is high.

Here, FIG. 89 (42') shows the state in which three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" shown in FIG. 88 (41) are swayed and displayed. As shown, the button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button effect here is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period for accepting the operation as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

In FIGS. 89 (43') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation validity period is reduced, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of FIG. 89 (45'). As shown in FIG. 89 (46'), in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is changed to "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" The display changes to the shaking display of "Decoration 7", and in the figure (47'), the combination of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won. There is. That is, it has been promoted from a jackpot with a short time (electric support) to a jackpot with a probability change.

Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation validity period, after the operation validity period elapses, the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is displayed as "decoration 7"-"decoration". It changes to the shaking display of "7"-"Decoration 7", is confirmed, and is promoted to a jackpot with probability change.

FIG. 90 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a mini-game fortune-telling whether or not a meter display appears.

In FIG. 90 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 90 (2), the definite display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 90 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini game such as "If you win the comparison with drinking". In FIG. 90 (4), the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image that used to be the townscape of the castle town is changed to the background image of the mini game in which the lord and the grandfather drink and compare. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed. In FIG. 90 (6), the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game displays an explanatory display indicating that the sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when the grandfather wins the mini game. In FIG. (7), a drinking comparison mini-game has started. In FIG. 90 (8), the victory of the lord in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 90 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

In FIG. 90 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize how many colors the sword dance meter is displayed due to the effect of the effect display ed4. In addition, the term "difficult to see" in the present specification means that it is relatively difficult to see as compared with the state before and after that. In FIG. 90 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

If the lord is defeated in the mini-game, the sword dance meter will not be displayed. The effect of the mini-game described with reference to FIG. 90 also corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

FIG. 91 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a big hit is determined by the fluctuation when the meter display is full.

FIGS. 91 (1) to 91 (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 80 (1) to (9). In FIG. 91 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation has started (second stop), and the golden meter rising item UpIg has appeared. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 91 (10), the white meter display MW accumulated by one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the jackpot is confirmed by the fluctuation. That is, the appearance of a meter rising item (gold here or red shown in FIG. 85 (e)) in which the meter is easy to accumulate is a big hit than the case in which a meter rising item (for example, white) in which the meter is difficult to accumulate appears. Expectations are high. In FIG. 91 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 91 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 scales, there is a surplus of 1 scale, but the jackpot is confirmed by the fluctuation, and the next fluctuation is after the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining 1 scale is up to the next fluctuation. It cannot be carried over and will be invalidated. Further, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 91 (12) outputs the sound "Congratulations". The audio output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound that notifies that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

In FIG. 91 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. Then, in FIG. 91 (14), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIG. 91 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. The final jackpot symbol is when the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full state than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full state. Is easy to confirm. Further, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the empty state is changed to the full state is more than the case where the empty state is not changed to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81. However, in the end, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

The hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 92 also has a base icon UIb'with a vertical stripe pattern extending to the left and right, but the base icon UIb'shown in FIG. 92 is a base icon UIb shown in FIG. 80 and the like. Higher than. Further, in the effect display area provided on the right side of the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 92, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. Since the base icon UIb'shown in FIG. 92 is high, this white meter display MW is completely embedded in the hold frame UI'and is integrated with the hold frame UI', but the meter display is a hold frame. It suffices if part of the UI'is covered. In other words, the meter display may partially or wholly overlap the hold frame UI', and the hold frame UI' corresponds to an example of a hold display area in a broad sense, and also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 92, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI'. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period when the hold frame UI'is displayed, and when the hold frame UI' disappears, the meter display also disappears. However, the tutorial display ts may be displayed at all times, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

In FIG. 92 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 92 (2), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 92 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 92 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the appearance of the mini item is announced. In FIG. 92 (6), a white meter rising item UpI appears, and the character cd of the lord is responsible for the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 92 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI'. The meter rise item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps with the base icon UIb', but partially or partially overlaps with the white meter display MW. All may be displayed so as to overlap.

In FIG. 92 (8), the meter rising item UpI has disappeared, and the white meter display MW has changed to a state in which one scale has been accumulated. A tutorial display such as "Continue when the meter is full" is displayed in the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 92 (9).

In FIG. 92 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 92 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, ““ Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 92 (11), the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 92 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 92 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to the top of the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI'. In FIG. 92 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg has disappeared, and the white meter display MW meter has risen (increased) to full at once.

In FIG. 92 (15), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 92 (16), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 92 (17), similarly to FIG. 80 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 92 (18), the cut-in display disappears, the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous production is started, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed fluctuation, and a part of the left symbol is displayed. The character display of "x2", which is the continuation number display, is displayed so that The white meter display MW that was in the full tank state continues to be displayed until the re-fluctuation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to the empty state according to the start of the re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous production continues, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In the pseudo-continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 92, the meter display (here, the white meter display MW is used, but other meter displays (for example, the red meter display MR) may be used) is full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that starts displaying when it changes.

The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the white meter display MW in the full tank state may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous effect) in FIG. 92 (16), and may return to the empty state.

In addition, regarding the timing when the meter display returns to the empty state, it may be the symbol fluctuation display (including the symbol fluctuation display to be notified when the meter display is a normal notice) or the meter display. If is a look-ahead notice, it is the symbol change display immediately before the look-ahead notice target symbol change display, or in the look-ahead notice target symbol change display, it is empty at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state of. For example, in each of the above symbol variation displays, the empty state may be returned when the symbol is stopped without becoming full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, the lost symbol may always return to the empty state at the timing when the stop display or the definite display is displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, the configuration may be such that the lost symbol always returns to the empty state at the timing when the stop display or the definite display is displayed. In addition, the meter display may return to the empty state and continue to display the empty state only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol fluctuation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but may continue to be displayed in an empty state. In addition, if there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR in the holding frame UI', or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of acquiring and stocking a mini item when the meter of the meter display is full.

FIGS. 93 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 80 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 93 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, the red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

In FIG. 93 (8), the movement animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW in the empty state from the front side. In FIG. 93 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the red meter rise item UpIr has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW has risen (increased) by 4 scales.

In FIG. 93 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the formation of the reach state or at the timing before and after the formation of the reach state. In FIG. 93 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white meter display MW accumulated by four scales. In FIG. 93 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter raising item UpIg here is an item that raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales, and if the white meter display MW has accumulated 4 scales, 3 scales are left over (overflow). However, in Fig. 93 (12), no extra scale is displayed, and in Fig. 93 (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full tank state. Along with the appearance of a kind of pseudo-ream notice item NI, the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol or the like that is temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3 from the front side. The pseudo-ream notice item NI is an icon that announces that the pseudo-ream effect will be started after this, and the character display of "GET" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been acquired.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state, the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-ream notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Then, it is displayed on the information display unit ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, which means that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (15), three scales of the remaining scales are added to the white meter display MW in the empty state. That is, the display of the overflowed portion when the tank is full is started at this timing. The chance to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

The white meter display MW in FIGS. 93 (12) to (15) described above is not downgraded, but the portion that is full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the surplus portion. Is displayed again.

In FIG. 93 (16), the pseudo-continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested. In addition, the character display of "activate" is displayed under the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of this "activation" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been activated, and the pseudo-ream effect is started immediately after that.

In FIG. 93 (17), the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-ream symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-ream production starts. Will be done.

In the example described above, when the meter display is full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to a big hit (for example, a pseudo-ream notice item NI), the fact that the meter display is full corresponds to a high expectation of a big hit, and by extension, Finally, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank of the meter display.

FIGS. 94 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 80 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 94 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, two meter rise items, a red meter rise item UpIr and a blue meter rise item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. That is, a plurality of meter rising items are appearing at the same time.

In FIG. 94 (8), the movement animation of the two meter rising items is started, and both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move to a position where they overlap the white meter display MW in the empty state from the front side. do. As explained earlier with reference to FIG. 85, the red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 4 scales, and the blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the meter by 2 scales. be. In FIG. 94 (9), the meter rise items of both the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter, which was previously empty, is replaced with the red meter rise item. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 94 (9) is in a full tank state.

In FIG. 94 (10), two pseudo-ream notice items NI, which are a kind of mini items, appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in a full tank state, and the "decoration 7" of the right pattern that is temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 93 above, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rise item UpIr, but in this example, there are two items, the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb. The white meter display MW is full with the meter rise item. Whether it is the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb , It can be said that it is an item that makes it easy to store meters. From this, it can be said that it is more likely that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that makes it easy to store the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 94 (11), the white meter display MW, which had been full until then, changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears. The two pseudo-continuous notice item NIs move to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the two pseudo-continuous notice item NIs are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 94 (12), the empty white meter display MW is still displayed, and the chance to raise the white meter display MW still remains after this. If there is no chance, or conversely, if the jackpot is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be turned off when it becomes empty, or it may be turned off after returning to the empty state. In addition, one of the two pseudo-ream notice item NIs stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and under the pseudo-ream notice item NI, " The text display of "Activate" is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 94 (12), one pseudo-continuous notice item NI is first digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped once and the revariation is started. Then, the second temporary stop and the start of the re-variation are performed by the second pseudo-continuous notice item NI in stock.

Among the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over to the next symbol change display or later (for example, pre-reading notice type items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-ream notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol variation display.

Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 94, a plurality of items may be stocked in one meter full tank, but conversely, items may not be stocked even when the meter is full. You may. For example, when the white meter display MW is filled with the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo-continuous notice item NI itself does not appear, or even if it appears, it is not stocked.

FIG. 95 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the meter display in the full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

FIGS. 95 (1) to (8) are the same as those of FIGS. 94 (1) to (8). In FIG. 94 (9), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 fluctuates at a low speed. Then, the right pattern (here, "decoration 1") becomes recognizable. In addition, both the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb have disappeared, and the white meter display MW meter, which was previously empty, is now full in the example of FIG. 95. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 95 (10), in this example, items such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI do not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Further, in the third symbol pd3, "decoration 1" different from the left symbol of "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol, and the shaking fluctuation is started. That is, it has not entered the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. 94. Further, in FIG. 95 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the full tank of the white meter display MW, and the display content is related to the look-ahead notice such as "next chance". ..

In FIG. 95 (11), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, “decoration 1”) becomes recognizable. Then, in FIG. 95 (12), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" are swayed and displayed. This combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is a chance eye, and in FIG. 95 (13), the first decorative pattern display device 208L is corresponding to the shaking display (temporary stop) of the chance eye. The flash pattern fd emits light from the transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the. Instead of the light guide plate, the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 95 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 95 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, in response to the confirmed display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance eye such as "the arrangement of 711". Even if the third symbol pd3 is stopped or confirmed, the white meter display MW in the full tank state is still displayed. In FIG. 95 (16), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Has been done. The white meter display MW in the full tank state is still displayed in the full tank state even when the next symbol variation display is started, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. The full white meter display MW in FIGS. 95 (9) to 95 (15) corresponds to a look-ahead notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 95 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which even if the meter display is full and an item appears, it is digested without being stocked.

FIGS. 96 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 80 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 96 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

In FIG. 96 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW in the empty state from the front side. In FIG. 96 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW is in a full tank state.

In FIG. 96 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swaying fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as or before or after the formation of the reach state, the operation means notice display icon 136I, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full tank state, and the third symbol pd3. Among them, the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon that gives a notice that the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started after that, and the character display of "GET" has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display indicating that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 96 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, the effect (for example, the advance notice effect) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operating means was not accepted, and it can be said that the operation was invalidated if it was accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operating means is invalid in combination with the fact that the operation of the operating means is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated if it is accepted, and the white color here indicates the operating means. A color that indicates that the operation of is invalid.

In the reach-state first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (11), the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation to change the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 96 (13), the button effect is started in the middle symbol. In the button effect here, as in the button effect shown in FIG. 89, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display "press" as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation of the operating means, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to encourage pressing.

In FIG. 96 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation validity period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of the next figure (15). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 96 (16), the character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display usually corresponds to a notice.

In the example shown in FIG. 96 described above, the item acquired by filling the meter is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device different from the decorative symbol display device from which the display has started. It is also used during the symbol variation display that is being performed when the display is started. However, the operation means notice display icon 136I may be stocked in white until the operation validity period of the operation means is reached, and in some cases, it may be stocked until the next and subsequent symbol variation displays. May be good.

Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed after the operation valid period elapses, and the normal notice is executed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear.

In FIG. 97 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The four symbols pd4 are also displayed as gray squares and gray circles, showing the loss of special figure 1. In FIG. 97 (2), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 97 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 97 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the white meter display MW in the empty state) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3. , Corresponds to an example of the first meter display) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the two white meter display MWs are started to be displayed separately, but the two may be started to be displayed together.

In FIG. 97 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of the temporarily stopped "decoration 7", and in FIG. 97 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed in the white meter display MW on the left side. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 97 (9), the red meter rise item UpIr disappears, and only the meter of the white meter display MW on the left side rises by four scales.

In FIG. 97 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of the temporarily stopped “decoration 7”, and in FIG. 97 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the white meter display MW on the right side. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 97 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter of the white meter display MW on the right side rises by 5 scales.

In FIG. 97 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and in FIG. 97 (14), the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-series symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 97 (15), the pseudo-series symbol sways (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-series symbol from the front side. Three white meter rise items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (16), two of these three white meter rise items UpI move to the white meter display MW on the left side, and the other one moves to the meter of the white meter display MW on the right side.

In each of the two white meter display MWs shown in FIG. 97 (17), the meter is raised by the moved meter raising item UpI. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, the chance-up item CUI appears on the white meter display MW on the left side, the character display of "GET" is displayed, and the swordsman reach item RI appears on the white meter display MW on the right side. As it appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed. The chance-up item CUI that appeared on the white meter display MW on the left is an icon that indicates that the expectation for a big hit has increased in the current symbol variation display, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the white meter display MW on the right. RI is an icon that announces that it will develop into a swordsman reach, which is a kind of super reach production, in the pattern variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 97 (18), each of the two white meter display MWs that were full disappears, the character display of each "GET" disappears, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative design. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is possible to change each of the two white meter display MWs that were in the full tank state to an empty state without erasing them, but if it is confirmed that a big hit will be made in the currently performed symbol variation display. , As shown in FIG. 97 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 98 (1), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (2), the loss is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs of the variable icon display area.

In FIG. 98 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 due to the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the variable icon c. doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 98 (3) is the default display mode as in the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 98 (2), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 in the look-ahead notice display mode is shifted and moved as it is, and in FIG. 98 (3), it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (4), after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the white meter display MW in an empty state (for example, the first) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3. Corresponds to an example of the meter display of) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 98 (6), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 98 (7), the changing ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord bears the changing ball icon cI. In FIG. 98 (8), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 98 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the white meter display MW on the right side and the white meter display MW on the right side. It is displayed on the right end so that it overlaps from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 98 (9) has changed, and the effect display ed1 has been added. At the right end of the white meter display MW on the right side, the change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is. In FIG. 98 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). There is. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display changes from the first state to the fourth state. The plurality of meter display MWs may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR together with the white meter display MW on the right side in an empty state (the state where the meter is 0).

In FIG. 98 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 98 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (first). Stop). In addition, the blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of "Decoration 7" from the front side.

In FIG. 98 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left side and the white meter display MW on the right side. Red meter display in the empty state A blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed for each MR. As described above, the blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the white meter display MW by 2 scales and the red meter display MR by 6 scales. In FIG. 98 (14), the blue meter rise item UpIb on each of the left and right disappears, and the white meter display MW meter on the left side rises only by two scales, while the red meter display MR meter on the right side. It has risen to full at once. Then, the swordsman reach item RI appears on the red meter display MR on the right side when the tank is full, and the character display of "GET" is displayed. No item has appeared on the white meter display MW on the left side, which has not reached the full tank state.

In FIG. 98 (17), of the two meter displays, only the red meter display MR on the right side, which was in a full tank state, disappeared, and the character display of "GET" also disappeared. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 98 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 98 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears. After all, the stocked swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol variation display at the time of appearance. Therefore, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a look-ahead icon that announces that it will develop into a swordsman reach, which is a kind of super reach production, in the next symbol variation display.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 step by step.

In FIG. 99 (19) following FIG. 98 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the look-ahead notice mode of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 98 (18) is started, and the second Low-speed fluctuation is started in 3 symbol pd3. The variable icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and usually functions as a notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side, which is shown in FIG. 98 (18) and has accumulated up to two scales, is still displayed even when a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, with the meters accumulated, the continuous symbol fluctuation display is straddled.

In FIG. 99 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 99 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 99 (22), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes slower, the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also fluctuates from high speed to low speed. Has changed to.

In FIG. 99 (23), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that.

In FIG. 99 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 99 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. Further, at the timing of FIG. 99 (25), the reach state is entered, and the sound "reach" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 99 (25).

In FIG. 99 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display of "activate" is activated in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 99 (27), the left symbol that was swaying and fluctuating moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that was also swaying and fluctuating was moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed in the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (28), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 99 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIGS. 83 (22) and later, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW was stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 99 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 81, in the power-up from the white meter display MW in which only up to 3 scales were stored, the green aura icon OI1 was shown as shown in FIG. 81 (34), but this is shown in FIG. 99. In the example, when multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol fluctuation display, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when only one meter display is displayed, and the color of the aura icon is also the color with high expectation of jackpot. It becomes easy to become. Further, even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR, etc.) is displayed rather than displaying only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed, it is easier to hit the jackpot, and the color of the aura icon is more likely to be a color with a higher expectation of the jackpot.

All of the meter displays so far are of the increasing type, and the display was started in the empty state (the state where the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full tank state. The display may start in the state of (second state or fifth state).

FIG. 100 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the display is started with the increase type meter display accumulated halfway.

In FIG. 100 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 100 (2), the definite display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

In FIG. 100 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as "when the meter appears in a state where it is slightly accumulated" scrolls to the tutorial display ts. Is displayed.

In FIG. 100 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts to fluctuate at high speed, and the display is started in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle on the third symbol pd3. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4) is a state in which one scale is accumulated, and corresponds to an example of the second state. Further, the sound of "chance" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 100 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in the state where the meter is halfway accumulated.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 100 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 100 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the lord carries the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 100 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 100 (8), the golden meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 100 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from the state in which one scale is accumulated to the state in which the tank is full. Since the golden meter rise item UpIg is an item that raises the meter by at least 5 scales, if the display is started with the meter display halfway accumulated, when the golden meter rise item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

In the white meter display MW, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed when the state is changed from the half-stored state to the full tank state than when the half-stored state is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Further, in the white meter display MW, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display is started in the state where the display is halfway accumulated than when the display is started in the empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled as compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state).

So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

FIG. 101 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of meter effect by meter display showing numerical values.

In FIG. 101 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as "when the meter is red". A white numerical meter display DW appears in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 101 (2), and a sound effect (appears) from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 101 (2) in accordance with the appearance. Sound) is being output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%, and this state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 101 (2), the tutorial display ts is changed to have a display content such as "when the meter MAX is reached".

In FIG. 101 (3), the Yashiro accessory 224F, which is one of the movable means, falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. According to the operation of the movable means, as shown in FIG. 101 (4), a white meter raising item UpI appears. However, the falling Yatsushiro accessory 224F is located on the front side of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to see. In FIG. 101 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro accessory 224F is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 101 (6), the Yashiro accessory 224F rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started. The white meter raising item UpI moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter-raising item UpI shown in FIG. 101 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter-raising item shown in FIG. UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (7) is temporarily difficult to see due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 101 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display rises from 00% to 10%. There is. The state of the white numerical meter display DW showing a numerical value of 10% shown in FIG. 101 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

In FIG. 101 (9), the shogun's accessory 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 101 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general accessory 224Fb according to the operation of the general accessory 224Fb, which is a movable means. A part of the changing ball icon cI is relatively difficult to see. In FIG. 101 (11), the changing ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general character 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the changing ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 101 (12), the general character 224Fb rises and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 101 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW up to that point is changed to the red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display). That is, it has been replaced with a different type of meter display. The change in the meter display here is not performed by the accumulated numerical values, but by a change effect (here, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase of the numerical value changes depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numerical meter display and the type of the item, as in the explanation using FIG. do.

In FIG. 101 (14), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 101 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, making it difficult to confirm the existence of the first hold icon h1. .. In FIG. 101 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves to a position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR from the front side, and in the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The existence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. The hold icon may be displayed in front of the meter rise item.

The appearance of the meter-raising item here is triggered by a prize at the first special figure start port 230, but it may be triggered by a prize at the normal figure start port with a prize ball, or with a prize ball. Regardless of whether or not it is, it may be triggered by passing the game ball at the normal drawing start gate, or it may be triggered by winning a prize at the second special drawing starting port 232 (electric chew), or there is only a prize ball. It may be triggered by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226 or by entering a ball in the out opening for production.

In addition, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be won or won at the special figure start ports 230, 232, etc. than when it is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

In FIG. 101 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR has increased from 10% to MAX. This MAX is, for example, a display representing 100%. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (17) corresponds to an example of the sixth state.

In the meter effect shown in FIG. 101, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 101 (18), the character display of "Gekiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. .. The character display of "Gekiatsu" may be a display indicating that the big hit in the fluctuation is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes according to the operation of the operating means.

In FIG. 102 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating at high speed, and in FIG. 102 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the hold shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a white round icon on which a button image 136a imitating a chance button 136 is displayed in red to prompt an operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is the so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the operation, and in FIG. 102 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

In FIG. 102 (5), the white numerical meter display DW is changed to the red numerical meter display DR in response to the operation of the chance button 136. On the other hand, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is such that the button image 136a is eliminated and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the look-ahead notice display mode even though the first hold icon h1 is the button hold display mode. , The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit in the change, and in the case of the look-ahead notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. The numerical meter display can also be used as a look-ahead notice (for example, carry-over to the next fluctuation after the MAX display is displayed).

In this way, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for holding the button is more likely to be displayed when winning or winning a ball at the special drawing start ports 230, 232, etc. than when the meter display is not displayed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far.

In FIG. 103, as in the meter display described so far, a display representing a certain amount or number is displayed, but here, the number of characters appearing is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of this character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

In FIG. 103 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 103 (2), the definite display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

In FIG. 103 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is "when a character appears". In FIG. 103 (4), the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 103 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image that used to be the townscape of the castle town disappears. The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 103 (5) corresponds to an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) in the meter display (a state in which the meter is 0), that is, a first state or a fourth state, in which no character display is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 103 (6), the character display cd1 of Princess Chibi appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "three more people". In FIG. 103 (7), the grandfather's character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "two more people". In FIG. 103 (8), the character display cd3 of the princess appears on the left side of the character display cd1 of the princess Chibi, and the character display changes to "one more person". Each of the state shown in FIG. 103 (6), the state shown in FIG. (7), and the state shown in FIG. (8) corresponds to the second state or the fifth state.

In the example shown in FIG. 103, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 103 (9), the character display of "failure" is displayed, and all the members cannot be gathered. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is also resumed. Then, in FIG. 103 (11), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 103 (12), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

Normally, the color of the silhouette of the character is gray, but when the remaining one is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the gathering of all four people is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state on the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four players are gathered, the expectation of a big hit is very high, and it may be a big hit rich or a level higher than the big hit rich (for example, a big hit confirmed). In addition, even if all four people do not gather, it may be given a certain degree of expectation of a big hit without making a "failure", and even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the fluctuation. Alternatively, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts after the variation.

FIG. 104 is a diagram stepwise showing an example when an error occurs during the display of the meter display.

FIGS. 104 (1) to 104 (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 98 (1) to (4), and in FIG. 104 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, which is shown in FIG. An error display ER1 such as "Please pull out the ball" is displayed in the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (directly above the third symbol pd3). This error display ER1 hides more than the right half of the empty white meter display MW displayed in the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a transparent display, and may overlap the meter display or the like from the front side, or the overlapping portion may be seen through.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 104 (6), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop), but a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") during the temporary stop from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the decorative symbol from the front side. As described above, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

Further, in FIG. 104 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 104 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved to a position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps a part of this red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 104 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr should disappear and the meter of the white meter display MW should be raised by 4 scales, but the error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the white meter display MW. It is not possible to check how far the meter has risen because it has been closed. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (9), one note is raised by one scale, and the sounds of four notes are output here. It should be noted that the accumulated state (rising state) of the meter can be notified not only by the output sound from the speaker 120 but also by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as a lamp or a frame lamp around the decorative symbol display device.

In FIG. 104 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in FIG. 104 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), 2 The white meter-raising item UpI, which is the first meter-raising item, appears on the right symbol so as to overlap from the front side. As shown in FIG. 104 (12), the white meter raising item UpI is also moved to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps a part of this white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 104 (13), the white meter rise item UpI should have disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by one scale, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter rises. Although it is not possible to confirm whether or not this has been done, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (13).

In FIG. 104 (14), a white meter rising item UpI appears without notice of the appearance of the mini item shown in FIG. 92 (5) and the like, and the character cd of the lord is responsible for the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 104 (15), the character cd of the lord throws the white meter rise item UpI, and the white meter rise item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed above the white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 104 (16), the white meter display MW should have been further raised by one scale due to the white meter rise item UpI, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has risen. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partly shown in FIG. 104 (16) is in a full tank state, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (17) emits a full tank notification sound. It is being output.

In FIG. 104 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in a full tank state, and at the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3. Although the character display of "GET" is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps with both the pseudo-ream notice item NI and the character display of "GET", and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been acquired. ..

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 104 step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (19) following from FIG. 104 (18), the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (20), the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 105 (21), the pseudo-ream notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-ream notice item NI is digested. The error display ER1 overlaps from the front side of the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, and it is difficult to see. In FIG. 105 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 105 (23), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps the pseudo-series symbol (“continue”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo-series symbol.

In FIG. 105 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, if the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is automatically hidden. In other words, when the error is resolved, the error display ER1 disappears automatically.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the accumulation condition), so that the player who is concerned about the state of the meter display May be able to perform the ball removal operation early by displaying the error display ER1 on the meter display. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, it is easy for the player's line of sight to always gather, and by displaying the error display ER1 overlaid on the meter display, the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. It also has an effect.

Further, in this example, a winning abnormality error that is more serious than the dish full tank error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Then, the error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of the winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps with the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. By superimposing another error display ER2 on the error display ER1, it may be possible to convey that a serious error has occurred. The error displays do not necessarily overlap, and the more serious the error, the larger the display size may be. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a clerk, and an error display are automatically displayed even if the error is resolved. It is possible to list errors that do not disappear (do not disappear). That is, all of the above-listed serious errors may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Alternatively, the more serious the error is, the more it is described above in the list described in FIG. 190, which will be described later. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the contrary, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display when the error is resolved are displayed. It is possible to list errors that are automatically hidden (disappeared). That is, all of the above-listed errors may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, among the minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

Further, the error display in FIGS. 104 and 105 is the same as the display of various errors described in FIGS. 190 to 192, which will be described later. In particular, the notification content described as "liquid crystal display" in the "mode" in FIG. 192, which describes the notification mode of error notification of various errors, can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 104 and 105.

In addition, the description to the effect that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" in the present specification should be read as "at least a part of a certain display overlaps at least a part of another display from the front side". It is possible that all of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front, all of one display may overlap some of the other displays from the front, or one of the displays. A part may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of another display from the front side. Further, the description to the effect that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" in the present specification can be read as the opposite, that is, "another display overlaps a certain display from the front side".

In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only increases, but even if the meter display is an increase / decrease type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number increases or decreases. Often, it may be of a reduction type that only reduces the indication of a certain quantity or number.

The meter display includes the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 and the like, the red meter display MR, the rainbow meter display MN, the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the red numerical meter display DR. The display using the number of characters appearing shown in 103 has been described, but the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or may be a display using the number of figures or symbols displayed. May be good.

Further, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, conversely, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless it changes from the white meter display MW.

Further, the red meter display MR may change in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway, and the meter of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started in the state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself in the state of being accumulated halfway may be started independently. In these cases, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display is started in a state where the display is halfway accumulated than when the display is started in an empty state.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the red meter display MR is halfway accumulated than when the white meter display MW is halfway accumulated.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol in the end. The statement to that effect is that "it is easier to win an advantageous jackpot than a disadvantageous jackpot." It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

The meter effect using the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, an accessory (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for displaying a meter display is arranged on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) as in the display means 251D shown in FIG. 45 (1). Then, the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 may be made feasible.

Alternatively, conversely, the meter display is displayed on a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 is executed, while FIGS. 14 to 45 are shown. The transparency effect described in use may be made feasible.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 106 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 106, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 107), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 107) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two bets are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the inserted medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) arranged behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). It has a structure that appears on the side). Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, the operation means include the bet button 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop button 1037 to 1039, and the like, as well as the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And the effect button 1091 (an example of the second operating means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device or the like can be projected toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 107 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, a pushing operation can be performed, and the display panel 1070 functions as an operating means (button) in the same manner as the transparent portion 191 and is an example of the operating means (for example, the first). It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and a red color meter display. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 103, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 or the like, and the meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 97 (4) to 97 (17). , The meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 98 (4) to 98 (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102].
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 and the meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 97 (5) to 97 (17). , The meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 98 (5) to 98 (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or the display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 103]. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state [for example, the empty state (the state where the meter is 0)] to the third state [for example, the full state].
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state [for example, the empty state (the state where the meter is 0)] to the sixth state [for example, the full state].
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change to the third state while remaining in the first state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 91 and the example shown in FIG. 97], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change to the sixth state while remaining in the fourth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 and the example shown in FIG. 98], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed at the same time for a period of time. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be always displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed separately without the period.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. Further, the first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

again,
"The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth, rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. It is configured so that the probability of changing to the state of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the amount of one-time state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one-time state change in the first meter display.

Further, when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. , Finally, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed.

again,
"The first meter display is a display in which there is a case [for example, in the case of FIG. 82 (4)] when the display is started in the first state.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state is changed [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Further, although the first meter display in the third state does not change to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the second state changes to the fourth meter display. If you do, you may.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display is always started in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is always started in the fourth state. Further, when the display changes from the first meter display to the fourth meter display, the display always changes from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the display may always change from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

again,
"The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (8). Change production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may be changed to the fourth meter display according to the operation of the operation means.

The fourth effect may always be started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed.

Further, the first meter display is a display whose display is terminated by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display whose display is started by the fourth effect. May be good. That is, the first meter display disappears and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect is completed, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. It may be configured so that the display of the fourth meter display is started.

again,
"The fourth effect is an effect using the fourth character.
When the fourth character is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of decorative symbols by the display means [for example, FIGS. 82 (1) and (2), and (3) and subsequent figures). ] Is a certain character [for example, the character cd of the lord],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the "variable display of the decorative symbol" means that the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display in between. In addition, the period from the start of the variation display to the final display can be regarded as one variation. Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the decorative symbol. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be continuously displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be a character that temporarily disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. It may be a character that is present.

The fourth character may be a character that is always displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol.

again,
"The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means [for example, FIG. 86 (1) and FIGS. 86 (8) to (9). ) Is the white meter display MW],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display in which the display may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display may be started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be continued until the stop display is displayed.

The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the first meter display is a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is the display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display whose state always changes during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may change state.

Further, the fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is the display of the decorative symbol by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be stopped and displayed than the lost symbol when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started when the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the jackpot symbol is stopped is displayed, rather than in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is always started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times.
The variation display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the variation display of the first decorative symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 86 (1)].
The variable display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variations is the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of FIGS. 86 (3) to (9)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 86 (10) to 87 (21)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 87 (22) to 88 (42)].
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
When the state of the first meter display is different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the first meter display is empty at the timing of FIG. 86 (1). On the other hand, when the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 86 (7)] is displayed.
The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 87 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 87 (29), whereas it is in the state of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is completed, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is completed, the fourth decorative symbol is completed. After the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is completed and the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is completed, the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is completed, the sixth The variable display of the decorative symbol of is may be started. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is completed, or the jackpot symbol may be stopped when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is completed. It may be displayed.

The first meter display may be a display in which the state is always different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol may be displayed in different states without fail.

again,
"The fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started in the fourth state [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) and the like],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

By doing so, it is possible to have an expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time when the meter appears or changes.

The fourth meter display may be a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state, or may be a display in which the display is always started in the fourth state. ..

again,
"The fourth meter display is from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state in which the three scales shown in FIG. 82 (14) are accumulated]. It is a display that may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 82 (18)].
The fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) or the like].
The fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fifth state.
When the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth meter display is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that may or may not start the display in the fifth state, or may start the display in the fifth state. May be good.

Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is a combination of the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be a quantity or number in between.

The fourth meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the fourth state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Further, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the fifth state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. ..

again,
"The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated up to one scale shown in FIG. 91 (9)]. It is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 91 (12)].
The first meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the first state [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (4) or the like].
The first meter display is a display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4)] in which the display may be started in the second state.
When the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display is more likely to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the first meter display may be a display that may or may not start the display in the third state, or may start the display in the third state. May be good.

Further, the second state may be a state representing a second quantity or number, and the second quantity or number is a combination of the first quantity or number and the third quantity or number. It may be a quantity or number in between.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the first state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the first state to the second state. Further, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the second state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the second state to the third state. ..

again,
"The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated up to one scale shown in FIG. 91 (9)]. It is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 91 (12)].
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state in which the three scales shown in FIG. 82 (14) are accumulated]. It is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 82 (18)].
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the fourth meter display is in the fifth state than when the first meter display is in the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display in which the display may be started in the first state, and the first meter display may start the display in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be started, or the fourth meter display may be a display that may start the display in the fourth state. , The display may be started in the fifth state.

Further, it is finally a big hit when the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display of the first meter display is started in the second state. The design may be easily displayed.

Here, the display start pattern of the first meter display is summarized. The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state and may change to the second state, and the display is started in the first state and the second state. It is a display that may change to the third state through the above, a display that starts in the first state and may change to the third state, and is displayed in the second state. Is started and may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is passed, and the fifth state is passed to the sixth state. It is a display that may change to the fourth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display may change to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state. It is a display that may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and may change to the sixth state through the fifth state, and is the display that may change to the sixth state. The display is started at, and may change to the sixth state. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

It is not necessary that the display is started in the fourth state and does not change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not change to the first state.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
The first meter display is described by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (c)] the first time [for example, three times]. It is a display that changes from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is described by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (i)] four times [for example, once]. It is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.
The fourth number is less than the first number.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the fact that the state changes with a small number of times means that the amount of change at one time is large.

again,
"The first meter display is a display that may be started by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be the acquisition effect of the first meter display.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display is always started by the first effect.

again,
"The display means can display the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area [for example, the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 92]. Means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is also a display displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [for example, the rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 85 (m) and (n)].
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot may be rich. Further, when the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, the empty state] to the ninth state [for example, the full tank state], even if the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

Further, when the first meter display changes to the third state, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the first meter display changes to the third state. When the jackpot symbol is always confirmed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the fourth meter display is displayed on the display means when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display, and is
The notice display is a display in which the display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 92].
The notice display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state [for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, as the notice display, a pseudo continuous effect display, an operation means related display, a notice display about a big hit (normal notice display or a look-ahead notice display), a notice display about a production (for example, a super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can be done. That is, the notice display may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo continuous effect display, and the pseudo continuous effect display may start to be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state. It is a display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display in which the display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo-continuous effect display is the fourth meter. The display may be started whenever the display changes to the sixth state.

The notice display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and in the notice display, the fourth meter display is the sixth. The display may be started whenever the state changes to.

Here, also, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, the display means is a means capable of displaying the operation means-related display, and the operation means-related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means-related display is a display in which the display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started when is changed to the sixth state. The operation means-related display may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the validity period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation validity period (remaining period display)), or a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of, or it may be a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means-related display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display is the fourth meter display. May be a display in which the display is always started when is changed to the sixth state.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. The normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the first. The display may be started when the meter display of the fourth changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be, for example, a super reach effect display. Further, the normal notice display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and in the normal notice display, the fourth meter display is the display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

again,
"The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state].
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [for example, a full tank state or vice versa, an empty state].
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state].
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full tank state or vice versa, an empty state].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first quantity or number and the third quantity or number are different quantities or numbers, and the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number are different quantities or numbers. You may.

Also, the third quantity or number is less than the first quantity or number, and the sixth quantity or number is less than the fourth quantity or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is the above. The case where the fourth state changes to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

Further, the third quantity or number is a larger amount or number than the first quantity or number, and the sixth quantity or number is larger than the fourth quantity or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is the above. The case where the fourth state changes to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

Further, the first state is a full tank state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full tank state, and the sixth state is an empty state. May be present, or conversely, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full tank state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state. The state may be a full tank state.

Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. There is also a case where the fourth meter display changes from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. be.

again,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partially [for example, only the meter frame mf] or all colors are different [for example, white and red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the different colors make it possible to distinguish between the first meter display and the fourth meter display. The colors may be continuously different. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the color may change, and it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or it may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, are different. Further, it is sufficient that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors at the end (disappearance) of the display may be different from each other.

Further, the first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. It includes an increase / decrease display, and the first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ only in the color of the frame display, or may differ only in the color of the increase / decrease display. , The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

The colors of only a part of the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different.

again,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the difference in size (display size). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the magnitude may change and may differ between the first state and the fourth state, or may differ between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, are different. In addition, the sizes when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the sizes at the end (disappearance) of the display may be different from each other.

again,
"The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the difference in the display position. The display position may be continuously different. Alternatively, the display position may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, are different. Further, it suffices that the display positions when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

The "meter display" in the above description may be replaced with a "display representing a certain quantity or number", the "first meter display" is the "first display", and the "fourth meter display" is "the fourth meter display". It may be replaced with "fourth display".

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 86 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and a red color meter display. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 103, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 82, 86, etc., the left side shown in FIGS. 97 (4) to (17). The meter display of the above, the meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 98 (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102].
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 86 and the like, and the meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 97 (5) to 97 (17). , The meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 98 (5) to 98 (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or the display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 103]. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, shown in FIG. 91. In the case of an example or the example shown in FIG. 97], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, FIGS. 82 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in 83 and the example shown in FIG. 98], the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end.
The fourth meter display displayed in an empty state is configured to be more likely to change to a full tank state than the first meter display displayed in an empty state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

again,
"The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)].
The size and display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are the same [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display differ in some or all colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 82 (4)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 82 (9)].
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain production stage [for example, a castle town stage].
In the certain production stage, if the first meter display is not displayed, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, when shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 83 (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, there is a case where the first meter display is displayed [for example, when shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"It is configured so that the first meter display in the empty state may change to display the fourth meter display in the empty state [for example, FIGS. 82 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon [for example, the icon of the white meter rising item UpI].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the first rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of one scale].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at the fourth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of three scales].
The fourth rate of increase is a higher rate than the first rate of increase.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When a game ball wins a prize opening [for example, 1st special drawing start port 230, 2nd special figure start opening 232, normal drawing start opening, general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. It is configured to be,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the second rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of two scales].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fifth rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase of 6 scales].
The fifth rate of increase is a higher rate than the second rate of increase.
The second rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for two scales] is higher than the first rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for one scale].
The fifth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for six scales] is higher than the fourth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for three scales].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character [for example, the character cd of the lord] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, FIGS. 82 (6) to 82 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The fourth character may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of decorative symbols [for example, FIGS. 82 (1) and (2), and (3) and subsequent figures." ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (6)].
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display [for example, FIG. 92 (8)].
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second production may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon [for example, the example shown in FIG. 84].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area [for example, the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 92]. Means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [for example, the rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 86 (m) and (n)].
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed.
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, display of various errors and display of warnings].
A certain error display [for example, a dish full tank error display] among the plurality of types of error displays is a display in which a part or all of the error display may overlap a part or all of the first meter display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The certain error display is a display that may overlap with the portion of the first meter display indicating the accumulation state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a storage plate that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full tank error display, and is
The plate full tank error display is a display that urges the player to eject the game ball from the storage plate [for example, a character display such as "please pull out the ball"].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means [for example, FIG. 86 (1) and FIGS. 86 (8) to (9). ) Is the white meter display MW],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times.
The variable display of one of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the plurality of times is the variable display of the first decorative symbol [for example, the variable display stopped and displayed in FIG. 86 (1)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 86 (3) to (9)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 86 (10) to 87 (21)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 87 (22) to 88 (42)].
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
When the state of the first meter display is different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the first meter display is empty at the timing of FIG. 86 (1). On the other hand, when the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 86 (7)] is displayed.
The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 87 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 87 (29), whereas it is in the state of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first meter display is a display that may be started by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display, and is
The notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to a full tank state [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 92].
The notice display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state [for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 2-1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the first state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the fourth state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the sixth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state.
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations for big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , High expectations for big hits,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-2)
In the game table described in Appendix 2-1
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-3)
The game console described in Appendix 2-1 or 2-2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix 2-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-3.
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-4.
The state of one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state.
The expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-5.
Of the plurality of types of displays, one display is the first icon.
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the first icon a second number of times.
The second number is less than the first number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-6.
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display, and is a jackpot display.
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed.
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the sixth state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-8)
The game console described in Appendix 2-7.
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed.
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed.
The jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-8.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-9.
One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 2-1 to 2-10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect.
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The final big hit is when the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is structured so that it is easy to confirm and display.
The final big hit is when the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is structured so that it is easy to confirm and display.
The fourth meter display displayed in an empty state is configured to be more likely to change to a full tank state than the first meter display displayed in an empty state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-2)
The game console described in Appendix A2-1.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed.
The size and display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are the same.
The first meter display and the fourth meter display differ in some or all colors.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-3)
The game console described in Appendix A2-1 or A2-2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen.
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain production stage, and is
In the certain production stage, if the first meter display is not displayed, the fourth meter display may be displayed, and if the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter may be displayed. The display is configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-3.
The first meter display in the empty state may be changed to display the fourth meter display in the empty state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-4.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the first rate of increase.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at the fourth rate of increase.
The fourth rate of increase is a higher rate than the first rate of increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-6)
The game console described in Appendix A2-5.
When the game ball wins a prize in the winning opening, the first icon may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-7)
The game console according to Appendix A2-5 or A2-6.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon.
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the second rate of increase.
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fifth rate of increase.
The fifth rate of increase is a higher rate than the second rate of increase.
The second rate of increase is a higher rate than the first rate of increase.
The fifth rate of increase is a higher rate than the fourth rate of increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-8)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-5 to A2-7.
The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-9)
The game console described in Appendix A2-8.
The fourth character is a character that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-10)
The game console according to Appendix A2-8 or A2-9.
The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character.
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display.
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-8 to A2-10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second production may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area.
The first meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-12.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display.
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed.
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-14)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-13.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays.
A certain error display among the plurality of types of error displays is a display in which a part or all of the error display may overlap a part or all of the first meter display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-15)
The game console described in Appendix A2-14.
The certain error display is a display that may overlap with the portion of the first meter display indicating the accumulation state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-16)
The game console according to Appendix A2-14 or A2-15.
Equipped with a storage plate that can store game balls
The certain error display is a dish full tank error display, and is
The plate full tank error display is a display that urges the player to eject the game ball from the storage plate.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-17)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-16.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-18)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-17.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times.
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the first decorative symbol.
The variable display of one of the multiple decorative symbol variation displays is the variable display of the second decorative symbol.
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol.
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the multiple variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol.
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The first meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol.
The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-18.
The first meter display is a display that may be started by the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A2-1 to A2-19.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display.
The notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to a full state.
The notice display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to a full state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix AA2-1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The final big hit is when the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is structured so that it is easy to confirm and display.
The final big hit is when the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is structured so that it is easy to confirm and display.
The fourth meter display displayed in an empty state is configured to be more likely to change to a full tank state than the first meter display displayed in an empty state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to be raised by the first amount.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount.
The fourth amount is a larger amount than the first amount.
The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth display (for example, character display, icon display, character display, symbol display, etc.) changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 108 to 192 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 108 to 192, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in FIGS. 108 to 192. In the description using FIG. 192, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 108 to 192 are prioritized.

As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 108 to 192 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105 and 193 to 265, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105 and 193 to 265 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 108 to 192. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 108. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is in a state of being electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). When the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other), and the speaker 120 can output sound. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a treble speaker that outputs treble) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been done. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like that emits light may be referred to as a lamp, and the one that emits light is an example of a light emitting means. Corresponds to.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate may be provided to detect that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 110) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 that is built in the chance button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the card unit is instructed to return the player's balance. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged as cross keys, and the enter key is arranged at the center of the cross keys. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

When the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (may include the door 108 with a ball storage dish) is open to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. If the front frame door 106 is provided with an effect movable body, the effect movable body is also included), the display of the ball rental display unit, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142 and It is configured so that the operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower plate full tank detection sensor can be detected.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 in which the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is housed is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) are attached. The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured so that the power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. The ball launch handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the launch (injection) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the operation of the player, and the player touches the ball launch handle 134. It is equipped with a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state while the demo screen is being displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame) can be mentioned. The production may be performed by four types of production means, or may be performed by one or more types of production means. Further, even if the same type of production means is used, there may be a production means that performs a dedicated production and a production means that does not. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. Does not perform a dedicated production, etc. This example can be applied to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 108, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 110.

FIG. 109 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 108 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening opened upward, and is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls and the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole formed at the bottom of the slingshot to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is removable from the main body 104, and when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 111). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 111) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 111). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 111), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. A power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180. The power supply board case 184 for accommodating the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 110 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Liquid crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight when the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 109 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 108 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 109 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure start port 232 is reached. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second feature, which is a variable starting area, is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is a fixed starting area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are provided, but three start ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special drawing starting ports may be provided, one second special drawing starting port may be provided, and conversely, one first special drawing starting port is provided. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 110, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variation game, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. In addition, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out-sensor is a game ball that has passed through the sensors of the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and a game that has passed through the sensors of the starting opening (first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out port. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 108, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2nd special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 112 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 112 (a), nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 112 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get a ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get a ball out in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and if the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 112 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 112 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 112 (b), six types of special figures of "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 112 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols with the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1" or "decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 1-Den-sama-Decoration 1", "Decoration 4-Den-sama-Decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 112 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 112 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the main control unit power-on processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 113 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (this). In the example, it is determined whether or not the voltage is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the weight is waited until the voltage value of the power supply becomes the predetermined value or more, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes). The process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the internal register is initialized. In this internal register initial setting, the process of starting the WDT 314, the access permission of the RAM 308, the process of setting the numerical value that determines the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the process of setting the main control unit 300 After processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the maximum value setting of the hardware random number, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial start-up process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check is performed. Determines if the sum result is a particular value (eg 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal) (step S106: No), the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later.

Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). When the return start process is started, in step S201, the initial setting at the time of return start is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to off, and the device error (error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Performs processing such as clearing, clearing the previous device error status, and clearing the device error status for security signals.

Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 as the address for starting the RAM clear, the return activation process is terminated.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (c). When the initial startup process is started, in step S301, the initial setting of the soft random number is performed. Specifically, the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special drawings and ordinary drawings are initially set.

Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 is set as the address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial startup process is terminated.

In addition, in the initial startup process, for example, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial start processing of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the command setting transmission processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 113 (a), after the return start process or the initial start process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Subsequently, in step S110, the sub-control-related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the process of setting the initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, the output port is set. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, normal figure hit signal, normal electric accessory (2nd special figure start port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (however, limited to models equipped with small hit), special figure fluctuation signal, special figure fluctuation time shortened state signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) Operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, grand prize opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. are set. Set the output port, etc. Further, after the processing of step S111 is completed, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop processing. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate an electric support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-mentioned main control power-on processing, the main control unit 300 then starts executing the main control unit main loop processing. In step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing, interruption is prohibited. After making the setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, the basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update process, a process of updating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure and the random number counter for generating the initial value for generating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal figure is performed. To update the initial value generation random number counter, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

In step S404, after setting the interrupt permission, in step S405, the subcommand transmission process is performed). In this subcommand transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, a process of transmitting the command or the like is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update process, processing such as updating the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if it is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if it is less than a predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power failure process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to "suspend". Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Then, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal of the main control unit is used as an opportunity to interrupt the timer of the main control unit. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S502 and step S503, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used by the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the random number counter for determining the normal figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original value is obtained. Random number counter Stored in the storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 2 may be provided separately.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In case) (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), step S505 is performed. move on. Here, the term "interrupt function limited" means that the start wait counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on processing is not set to 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When bidirectional communication is possible with the first sub-control unit 400, a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring, and if a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If a specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening period , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port state is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure start port (first special figure start port 230, second special figure start port 232), normal figure start port 228, and out port 240 are passed through the input port of the I / O 310. , The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time. Further, when it is determined that the winning of the starting port and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted as the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning opening winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S507 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if detection is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S507, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won.

For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning opening counter update process is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 is filled with each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize acceptance process, whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable prize opening 234 have been won matches the prize determination pattern information. Judgment is made using the judgment result. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is set from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And the value is acquired as the special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

Further, when the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When a prize is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. When the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure look-ahead process (pre-reading judgment, symbol, and variable time look-ahead lottery) is also performed. The special figure look-ahead processing will be described in detail later.

In step S509, a winning-related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a process of confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, the outswitch input update process is performed. In this out-switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for the production.

In step S511, the serial command management process is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication status with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the lapse of the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is turned on. (Command to notify the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300), the number of prize balls command to instruct the payout of the game balls for the designated prize balls, and the like.

The commands received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300) and a test firing test signal. Command (prize ball signal output request), command including information on the occurrence status of payout error (including no error), prize ball payout operation status command (prize ball payout operation / non-operation) There is a command to indicate and a display (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED or the like) indicating that the payout is in progress).

Next, in step S512, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure processing state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

In step S513, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the miss symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, during 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a lottery process related to a general drawing is also performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S507, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Set the device information indicating the presence or absence of an error in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S515, the external output signal management process is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, the subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first subcommand unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, The command type can be specified such as a RAM clear command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included. , In the case of the command to specify the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize in the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. Information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, which is stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S516, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "number of reserved balls, symbol combination", status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. of normal and special figures is displayed. Performs processing such as setting the data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, the sub-control start wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control start-wait wait processing, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, one sub-control start-wait counter is subtracted, and this start-wait counter becomes 0. If so, prepare to send the specified command. In addition, as a predetermined command, a power-on command, a command related to the payout control unit 600, one or more of the commands (for example, a command indicating that all errors are cleared, and a lower plate full tank error have occurred). Command indicating that there is, an error indicating that an insufficient number of payout balls error has occurred, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There is a command indicating that is in the generated state, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing is executed according to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 118, and the special figure shown in FIG. 119 will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 120 (a), special electric service operation process shown in FIG. 121, special electric service remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 124, special electric service operation end process shown in FIG. 125, FIG. 126. One of the indicated hit end display weight processes is executed.

In step S603, the winning easy status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change of the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined, and the special figure processing is performed. If there is no change in the state of the state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated and there is a change in the state of the special figure processing state. If (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", and if applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "hit start display weight state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S607: Yes). Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, the transmission request of the subcommand is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request of the game state command including the game state of the special figure and the normal figure, the launch position including the information on whether or not it is in the right-handed state. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update process is terminated. The order of transmission requests for subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be collectively performed in one process.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

This special figure-related lottery process is a process called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure-related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0, and the number is 0. In the case of (when there is no hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S705 in order to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

In step S703, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0, and if it is 0 (special figure 1). When there is no hold of the variable game (step S704: Yes), the special figure-related lottery process is completed, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 1 variable game) (step S704: No). , Step S705 proceeds to execute the process related to the special figure 1.

In step S705, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one, and when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed, the RAM 308 is used. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, the special figure random number transfer process is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 is transferred to the hold 1 to the special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the process related to the special figure 1, the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 is supported. The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. In addition, up to four special drawings 2 and four special drawings can be stored.

In step S707, a lottery process for each special figure is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this special drawing per lottery process, the winning / failing of the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is determined. In step S708, the display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the second special figure is based on the result of the special figure per lottery process and the random number value in step S707 with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table). A lottery is performed for the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212).

FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the display symbol data of the special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128 (a), and refer to the special figure 1 symbol lottery process of step S707. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the hit / fail result of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, the result is a small hit. If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the display symbol data of the special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special figure 2 symbol lottery process of step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128 (b). The display symbol data of the special figure 2 is drawn by lottery based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is a special figure. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, the symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display display setting process (step S517) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if there is a loss, this process ends.

When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process of setting the data set for the hit end (data setting process after the hit end) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting the game state to be set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 117 (a), in step S709, the special figure variation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, the variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the special figure per lottery process in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value are used. After selecting the timer for the special figure fluctuation time, the special figure-related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, the lottery process per special figure (step S707) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process (step S707) in the special figure related lottery process.

In step S801 of the special figure per lottery process, the special figure per lottery is performed with reference to the winning / failing determination table. In the present embodiment, the lottery for each special figure is performed using the same hit / fail judgment table for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have different hit / fail judgment tables. You may prepare it.

FIG. 127 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 127 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed in the lottery process for the special figure in step S801, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 127 (a) is referred to. In the case of the low-probability state shown in FIG. 127, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 127 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as a winning / failing determination result.

Further, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed in the lottery process for the special figure in step S801, similarly, when the special figure is in the high probability state, refer to the high probability table for the hit / fail judgment shown in FIG. 127 (a). Then, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the hit / fail determination low probability table shown in FIG. 127 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a loss is selected as a winning / failing determination result.

Returning to FIG. 117 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing hit lottery in step S801 is other than the “big hit”, and if it is other than the “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of a “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

FIG. 127 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. In the special figure small hit lottery process of step S803, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 127 (c) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Select the winning / failing judgment result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Returning to FIG. 117 (b), in step S804, the RAM 308 is based on the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure winning lottery in step S801 and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure small winning lottery in step S803. One of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" information is set in the winning / failing judgment type stored in. In the next step S805, the information indicating "the special figure is changing" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 118 is called and executed.

In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, in the next step S807, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure fluctuation start command) is set, and in the next step S808, the special figure is set. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that 2 (or special figure 1) is changing, the lottery process for each special figure is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol change processing is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure changing" in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S901 of the symbol change processing, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to the special figure operation type. ..

In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the timer of the special figure fluctuation time set in step S709 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired, and whether the timer of the special figure fluctuation time is 0. Judge whether or not. As a result of the determination, if the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and if it is not 0 (the set special figure fluctuation time). If has not passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is not the update timing of the special symbol display symbol, and if it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the processing during symbol change is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), Proceed to step S904. In step S904, after updating the special symbol display symbol data, the process during symbol change is terminated.

By this special figure display symbol data update process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Variation display of special figure 1" is performed, and in the case of special figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Variation display of special figure 2" is performed.

In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. do. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 119 is called and executed.

In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step is In S909, the symbol confirmation number information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol confirmation number information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 112 (a), or the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 112 (a), or After acquiring (one of the symbols of the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 112 (b)) and setting the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the stop display of the special figure based on this symbol type information, the symbol End the processing during fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. Is.

In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol change processing process is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (special figure display confirmation time). If (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight processing is completed, otherwise (if the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002. Proceed to.

In step S1002, the symbol confirmation number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol changing process is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status (special symbol variation game) when the symbol is stopped. (In this embodiment, the status indicating any of the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state) is stored in the RAM 308 as the storage special figure variation time shortening status described later.

In step S1004, the winning / failing determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning / failing determination type is "big hit". As a result of this determination, if the hit / fail judgment type is "big hit" (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the hit / fail judgment type is other than "big hit" (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Proceed and update the number of time reductions of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 (subtract one time reduction number).

In step S1007, the winning / failing determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning / failing determination type is "small hit". As a result of this determination, if the hit / fail judgment type is "small hit" (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the hit / fail judgment type is other than "small hit" (step S1008: No), the step Proceed to S1009, and set the information indicating the "variation waiting state" in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a) is called and executed.

In step S1010, basic signal information (for testing) indicating the special figure winning / failing type and the symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, the RAM clear in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / failing type, the number of times the special electric role is operated, the number of winnings of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operation pattern of the special electric role, the operating state of the special electric role, the total number of winnings per winning, the flag related to the winning abnormality of the large winning opening, In addition to clearing information such as the hit end display timer type, at the time of a big hit, the winning easy status and the special figure normal figure status are also cleared.

In step S1012, information indicating "hit start display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 120 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the total number of winning prizes is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

In step S1015, the symbol type information is set, in step S1016, the hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set, and in step S1017, the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display confirmation weight processing is terminated.

Next, the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a). FIG. 120A is a flowchart of the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "hit start display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. ..

In step S1101 of the hit start weight processing, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight processing is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed). If not (step S1101: Yes), the hit start weight process is completed, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, after executing the special electric function opening process described later, the hit start weight process is terminated.

Next, the special electric function opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

In step S1201 of the special electric service opening process, information indicating the "special electric service operating state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric service operation process shown in FIG. 121 is called and executed.

In step S1202, the value of the number of winnings of the large winning opening in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "main control unit winning counter") and the operating state of the special electric function are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the transmission request of the role release command). As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special figure display confirmation weight processing is acquired, and in the next step S1205, the special electric service operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. As shown in FIGS. 123 (a-1) to 123 (a-3), for example, as many special electric service operation pattern data tables as the number of types of special figures for big hits and small hits are prepared. Note that FIG. 123 illustrates only a part of them. The special electric service operation pattern data table stores special electric service operation data indicating the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 234 for each round. As shown in FIGS. 123 (b-1) to 123 (b-3), the special electric function operation data includes information (open timer pattern, closed timer pattern) indicating the open / closed state of the variable winning opening 234, and the open state or the closed timer pattern. It is configured by storing one or a plurality of timer pattern data including information on the time for maintaining the closed state (special electric function opening / closing timer). This makes it possible to give various variations to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 during one round.

For example, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-1), in the 1st to 15th rounds, the special electric service operation data 1 shown in FIG. 123 (b-1) is referred to. Then, after the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29,500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 to end the operation.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. While the data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed, at the 5th and 9th rounds, the special electric function operation data 4 shown in FIG. 123 (b-3) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Be controlled. That is, in the 5th and 9th rounds, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened by the opening timer pattern 1 for 180ms, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the closed state by the closing timer pattern 1 for 2820ms four times. After that, the open timer pattern 3 opens the variable winning opening 234 for 17,500 ms, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the variable winning opening 234 to close and end the operation.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-3), in the 1st to 4th rounds, the above-mentioned special electric service operation data 1 is referred to and the above-mentioned operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5th to 15th rounds, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled with reference to the special electric function operation data 2 shown in FIG. 123 (b-2). That is, in the 5th to 15th Rths, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened by the opening timer pattern 1 for 180ms, then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the closed state by 2820ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern. By 3, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled so as to be maintained in the closed state as it is and the operation is terminated. It should be noted that another closing pattern timer (for example, closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

In step S1206, the number of operations (number of rounds) of the special electric service is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the number of times of operation (number of rounds) of the acquired special electric service is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special electric combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of times the special electric function is operated (the number of rounds) is read out and the operation pattern of the special electric function is set. Then, in step S1209, the special electric combination control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, after clearing the special electric combination winning detection timer, the special electric combination opening process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special electric service operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of a special electric service operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric service operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special electric power operation state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S1301 of the special electric service operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not (the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special electric function opening / closing timer corresponding to the running open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern set in step S1208 of the special electric function opening process is larger than 0, and if it is large (special electric function). If the open / close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric function operation process is completed, and if not (when the special electric function open / close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 Proceed to. In step S1305, the special electric function control process (details will be described later) is performed, in the next step S1306, the special electric function opening / closing timer pattern is acquired, and in the next step S1307, the closing timer pattern among the acquired special electric function opening / closing timer patterns is acquired. It is determined whether or not the special electric service is in operation (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

As a result of the determination, when the special electric function is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special electric service operation process is terminated. If the special electric service is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the "remaining sphere detection state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric function remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 124 is called and executed.

In step S1309, the special electric service operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, the other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a subcommand (large winning opening closing command) transmission request is made. To set.

In step S1312, the special electric function winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric role winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting the game ball remaining inside the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is closed. Is. In step S1313, the drive signal (large winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is set to OFF, and then the special electric function operation process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes to a difficult-to-enter state when the maximum number of winning game balls pass through the passing area after the easy-to-enter state. It functions as an example of variable winning means.

Next, the special electric service control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special electric service opening process and the special electric service operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a special electric service control process executed in the special electric service opening process and the special electric service operation process.

In step S1401, the special electric service control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, among the operation patterns of the special electric service to be executed, which are set by reading the special electric service operation data in step S1208 of the special electric service opening process, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired. do. For example, the operation pattern of the special electric service shown in the special electric service operation data 1 is set, and at the start of the round, the “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 123 (b-1) is set. The control data of "" will be acquired. Further, after the operation pattern shown in the control data shown in "(1)" of FIG. 123 (b-1) is completed, the "closed timer" shown in "(2)" of FIG. 123 (b-1) is completed. The control data of "Pattern 3" will be acquired.

Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening 234 is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric service. For example, in the case of the "open timer pattern", the data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is acquired, and in the case of the "closing timer pattern", the data for closing the variable winning opening 234 (closing). Information) is acquired.

Then, in step S1403, the opening / closing timer of the special electric function is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric function acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open / close information is "open information", a 29500 ms open timer is acquired. Further, when the "closed timer pattern 1" is acquired and the open / close information is the "closed information", the closed timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

In step S1404, the information indicating that the special electric service winning / non-winning status stored in the RAM 308 can be accepted is set. It is possible to accept that the game ball has passed through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening when the information indicating that the special electric role winning / non-winning status can be accepted is set. If there is information indicating that acceptance is not possible, the game ball becomes invalid even if it passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening. In step S1405, the special electric function signal information (test signal) is set, and in step S1406, preparation for updating the large winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparations are made for driving the large winning opening solenoid, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, after setting the special power combination opening timer or the special power combination closing timer among the special power combination opening / closing timers, the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the special electric function remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the special electric function remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric function residual sphere detection process is a process called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "remaining sphere detection state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. be.

In step S1501 of the special electric service remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special electric service operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special electric service operation process is operating, and if it is operating (the special electric service operation interval time elapses). If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric function remaining ball detection process is completed, and if not (when the special electric function operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), step S1502 is performed. move on.

In step S1502, the special electric service operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special electric service operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric service operation end process shown in FIG. 125 is called and executed. That is, it is in the state of the interval between rounds.

In step S1504, after clearing the special electric service signal information (test signal), the special electric service remaining ball detection process is terminated. After clearing the special electric service signal information, a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special electric service operation termination process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the special electric service operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special power operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. be.

In step S1601 of the special electric service operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special electric service operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special electric service remaining ball detection process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric service operation termination process is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, it is determined whether or not the special figure winning / failing type is a small hit, and if it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is dealt with in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure winning / failing type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum number of times the large winning opening stored in the RAM 308 is opened. In step S1605, the maximum number of times the special electric function is opened is compared with the number of times the special electric function is opened, and it is determined whether the number of times the special electric function is opened is less than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened, that is, whether or not the hit is not completed. .. If the hit is not completed (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric service opening process, and the special electric service operation end process is completed. That is, a process for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the hit is completed (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, the hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating "hit end display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display weight process shown in FIG. 126 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting the transmission request of the sub command (hit end command), the special electric service operation end process is ended.

Next, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "hit end display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. be.

In step S1701 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric service operation end process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight process is completed, and if not (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, in step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared, and in step S1704, the special figure processing state is "variable". Set the information indicating "waiting state". As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a) is called and executed.

In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the total number of winnings are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the game ends with a small hit, and if it ends with a small hit (step S1709: Yes), the hit end display weight processing is performed. If it ends and ends with a hit other than a small hit (if it ends with a big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, the set data (probability change, time saving, hidden probability change) is acquired after the hit is completed, and in step S1711, the data corresponding to the set data after the hit is completed (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)). , Time saving number (special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation number, fluctuation time correction fluctuation number, winning easy status change number), time saving status (special figure fluctuation time shortening status, normal figure fluctuation time shortening status, opening extension status), fluctuation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table, etc.) is set, and after the setting data is cleared after the winning end, the winning end display weight processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of the game control means capable of executing the jackpot game.

Next, the special figure look-ahead process in the winning opening winning process in step S508 shown in FIG. 115 will be described.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure pre-reading process). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 130A to 130C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S508a). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508b, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S508d.

In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value) is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117. Look ahead from. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 127, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. It is determined in advance before the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 117. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S508d.

In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508e, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S508e, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value value) is stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117. Look ahead from. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 127, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. It is determined in advance before the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 117. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S508h, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 129, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 130A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), "special figure I" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Out of place) is remembered.

FIG. 130B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 130 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 130 (c) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 130 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result and the special figure fluctuation time are preliminarily determined, and these information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as the pre-reading result information. Can be sent.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 131 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 131 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. .. In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S4009 following step S4007, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S4007, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4011 following step S4009, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 is converted into the effect data corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform the process of changing to.

In step S4013 following step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S4015 following step S4013, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game table frame lamp 452 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is given to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. Output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S4017 following step S4015, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4009, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S4003.

FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 131 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S4041 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S4043 following step S4041, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 132 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. .. In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S5009 following step S5007, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S5009, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S5003.

FIG. 132B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 132 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043, which is next to step S5041, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 132 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S5051, transfer instructions for image data (movie data and texture data described later) are given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S5055, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061, otherwise (step S5059: No), the generation end interrupt signal is waited to be input.

In step S5061, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133. Here, FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigator character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, and a hold of the symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 133 (a), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as the variable icon, or the variable icon may be expressed as moving. good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain game state (one or two or more of a normal game state, a probability change state, a hidden probability change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (a), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is given the letters "large", and the second is given the letters "board". The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, above the decorative pattern display device 208, a Senryobako accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryobako accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 133 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured so as to be able to slide and move in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the effect itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is invisible. The decorative member may be made transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be made visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on the pedestal hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 133 (b), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 133 (b), the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round patternless and white display mode), but the progress of the game. The display mode may change depending on the situation. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is displayed as stopped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain game state (one or two or more of a normal game state, a probability change state, a hidden probability change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (b), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 133 (b) is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryobako accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 133 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a) or FIG. 13 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. Here, FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 134 (A1) to 134 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 134 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 134 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, from the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryobako accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is considered to be more difficult to see. The Senryobako accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the Senryobako accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the Senryobako accessory 224H.

In FIG. 134 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made easier to see by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

FIGS. 134 (C1) to 134 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 134 (C1) to (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided instead of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. conduct. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 134 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial position.

FIG. 134 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 134 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 134 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 134 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to see.

FIGS. 134 (E1) to 134 (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are considered to be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a).

FIG. 134 (F1) shows how the Senryobako accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryobako accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (F1), the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the Senryobako accessory 224H, so that it is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In this production example, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the evacuation operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 134 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid to be visually recognized by the sliding movement. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to make a display that has become. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward and moves to the second position. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 134 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

FIGS. 134 (I1) to 134 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 134 (I1) to (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 134 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 134 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIGS. 134 (K1) to 134 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 134 (K1) to 134 (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 134 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 134 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 134 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (K2'), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 134 (K3) to 134 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 134 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N match the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. A display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated in a direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 134 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 134 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 134 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub display device 208S performs the cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. Here, FIG. 135 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 136 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 135. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 136 stepwise, and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 137 stepwise. ..

In FIG. 135, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b) can also be applied. In the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 133 (a) is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 135 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is shown in special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 135 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 135 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 135 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 135 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 135 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 135 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 135 (3), it is shown that the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 135 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the pedestal hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time as the start, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 133). .. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 135 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 135 (6), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The display starts. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 135 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". In addition, there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "extreme heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the character of the grandfather is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat", or the grandfather's conversation image CI2 may be displayed in the balloon after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 135 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 135 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the chance button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 135 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "It's intense heat" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May occur. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period is long without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it has passed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 135 (17). 7 ”is displayed as a stop and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 135 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 135 (20) to (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. The icon h0 is left and the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 135 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 224 Gd of the four large board behavior accessories. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior may be performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 136 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 135 (22) to (24), it is better to perform a series of effects performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 136 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (26) displays a large image of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (27) follows a duel scene between the main character and the swordfighter who plays the enemy role. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (29), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (30) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 136 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is difficult to see the cut-in image CI3 of the lord as compared with the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (35), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (36) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. Further, the operation validity period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 136 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large panel The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 224 Gd of the four large board behavior accessories. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed in some cases. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38), and further, the effect display that causes a loss may be displayed. After that, the revival effect may be displayed so that a big hit effect display is performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 136 (39), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 136 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 136 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (42), the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 136 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 136 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 136 (46). In FIG. 136 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordfighter who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 136 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 137 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 137 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 137 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game that was started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (53), the right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 137 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. Further, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 137 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 137 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the jackpot end effect display. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (57), a display (warning display) is performed to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 111). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

FIG. 137 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probability variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative design also has a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 137 (58) to 137 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 137 (58) to 137 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for ease of explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (61), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 137 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

In FIG. 137 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is held in four positions. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 138 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 136 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 135 to 136, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 138 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 138 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 136 (37). FIG. 138 (38b) shows that the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the decorative symbol is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordfighter who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in Fig. 137 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 138 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from the lower part of the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 138 (46b), the variation icon h0 disappears in the animation display. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can be customized in various ways.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation display was stopped, the mode shifts to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the demonstration mode. It becomes a demo screen. From the time when the special symbol symbol variation display is stopped until the transition to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is used. When you operate it, a dedicated animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (decorative symbols are composed of images such as characters and character images (including numbers), images of characters etc. are displayed on the demo screen. Only is displayed and the character image may be hidden, or both the image such as a character and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (Note that the degree of expectation) In addition to displaying a production introduction movie that introduces high notices and reach with high expectations, there is also a period when menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. .. The demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop displays of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 108, the volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 108 and the like can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 111 and the like. The amount of light from the LED can be increased or decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 133 and the like, but it may not be included. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. If you operate the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window will be displayed.

As will be described in detail later, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is provided in the option menu, and if you operate the chance button 136 with the cursor on this icon, you will return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the option menu is automatically terminated, and the decoration symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) while the option menu is displayed, the demo screen is automatically returned.

If the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the screen returns to the demo screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the left / right key or the up / down key. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window automatically disappear, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram showing the structure of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection".

In the "auto button mode" of the "effect customization", the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated may be performed without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in "option" of FIG. 139 (b) means setting / non-setting and valid / invalid. "Long-press auto-continuous hitting" means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and the pressing is repeated at high speed during the long-pressing period (continuous hitting). ) It is a function that produces the same response effect as at the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The "group notice" is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation with the group notice displayed will be a big hit! ?? Although it is lower than, if you want to increase the frequency of appearance of the group notice as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency of the group notice to appear as the notice of the change to 50%. Although it is low, if you want it to be displayed in the fluctuation as a notice of big hit rich (big hit confirmed), the reliability is 100%! ?? Set to. "Prize sound notice" is a kind of look-ahead notice when a prize is won at the special figure start opening and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or does not notify that the operation valid period of the operation means is in progress. When "Navigation" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation validity period of the operation means, or a character display such as "It may be good to operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be done. "No look-ahead notice" does not mean all look-ahead notices other than the look-ahead notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the look-ahead notice by the movable means (directing movable body) and the look-ahead notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( It is a setting to make it (corresponding to "ON"). "Premier up" is a setting that increases the frequency of appearance of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No change in hold” is a setting that does not give a pre-reading notice (corresponding to “ON”) depending on the display mode of the hold icon. A "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit rich or big hit confirmation (for example, a directing operation by a directing movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. A notice by a light emitting effect by a part or all of decorative LEDs can be mentioned.)

In addition, "big hit confirmation" in this specification means a symbol change in which the notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of pending look-ahead target when the notice of big hit confirmation and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice of the jackpot confirmation is displayed, it indicates that the change or the pre-reading target hold is always a jackpot (the same applies to the following explanation).

Further, the "big hit rich" in the present specification means that the expectation for the big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich look-ahead notice is displayed for the symbol change or the symbol change of the look-ahead target pending, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). In addition, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

Further, the description of "hot" in the present specification also means that the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hotness and / or the look-ahead notice is displayed, the symbol variation in which the hot notice is displayed is displayed. Alternatively, it indicates that even if a hot look-ahead notice is displayed toward the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). Further, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that of the jackpot rich, and "extreme heat" may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation). Same for).

In addition, "Daitomo" described in FIG. 139 (b) is a member service that accesses a Web server through an Internet line by registering as a member, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience points. It is a service that you can get various benefits depending on the level. When executing the membership service of "Daitomo", the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". For models with specifications that support the membership service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 139 (b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" is released only by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the hold frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the hold frame is selected. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 133 and the like. The "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can be enrolled before formal membership registration, and the enrollment experience person can use the grandfather's character in character selection as a trial play.

In addition, as one of the above benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected without raising the level of Daitomo. That is, among "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection", the item in which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "open condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 140 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "Customize production", "Character selection", "Hold frame selection", "Hold display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", they are connected by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "effect customization" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "hold frame selection screen", "hold display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the option menu screen. Further, the option menu screen may be returned to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the "effect customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Hold frame selection screen", "Hold display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen" also shift to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140 will be specifically described with reference to a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". The opening condition of FIG. 139 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. When the icon is displayed, the colorless and unpatterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and the icon displayed in another mode (colored or / and with a pattern) indicates an operable operating means.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. In this state, when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 141 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the special symbol has expired, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the confirmation of the stop symbol of the special symbol in the state where there is no hold). If it is (immediately after the display period has elapsed), these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the cross key of the operation unit, etc.). Even if these icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, in addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the final display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended. good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds) by operating the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137. The window and the brightness adjustment window may be hidden.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include display (character display or image display) of the customized contents. For example, if the menu icon MI is used, the character display or icon display for customizing the effect, if the volume adjustment icon VI is used, the gauge display indicating the volume level is displayed, and if the brightness adjustment icon BI is used, the gauge display indicating the light intensity level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include the display of the major items shown in FIG. 139 (b) (for example, "character selection", etc.), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 141 (1). May be good.

In FIG. 141 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the upper key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key is lit in red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW has a larger display than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW, which is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI, is displayed. In this example, the amount of light of LEDs such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

In FIG. 141 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 (5), the brightness adjustment window BW is lowered by one step to 4 levels.

In FIG. 141 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen returns to the demo screen displaying the three icons MI, VI, and BI, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the period is fixed. The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. In addition, it may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

In FIG. 141 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. It is the same even if the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9). The volume adjustment window VW has a larger display than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times as large as the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is 3 levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 141 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 141 (11), the level is raised by one step to four levels. Even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest 5th level, the volume does not increase any more. Also, even if the left key is operated in the 1st level state, the volume does not decrease any more. Also, if no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen will return to the demo screen where the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the left key or right key is operated, the demo screen will be restored. The period can be extended. In addition, it may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the speaker 120 maintains mute.

Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 141 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (15) displays the option menu screen. The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. On this option menu screen, the background display, hold frame UI, navigation character YM, 1st decorative symbol (3rd symbol), and 2nd decorative symbol (5th symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "Menu". , In order from the top in a vertical row, there are 7 types of icons such as production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and back icon to return to the demo screen. It is displayed. On the left side of any one of these seven types of icons, a cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed. In FIG. 141 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 141 (2) to 141 (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but it may be displayed. .. Further, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the effect customization icon at the top, the back icon, or another icon. Alternatively, it may be the icon of the item currently being customized.

In FIG. 141 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 141 (17), the effect customization screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and the list shows the five sub-items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 139 (b) from the top ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back". "Button navigation") and each option (for example, "OFF ON") are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial values at once are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. ing. Further, on the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is the return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon with the cursor display has a highlighted frame and is lit in red. In addition, among the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. On the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, and r among the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 141 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 141 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 141 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the result may be the same as when the right key 137r is operated.

In FIG. 141 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one item below the auto button mode (long press auto repeated hits). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (23), the frame of the item of long-press auto-continuous hitting is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may move to the confirmation icon or the back icon with or without the setting change.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the back button navigation at the bottom. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed.

In FIG. 141 (26), the down key 137d is operated one more time, the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 141 (27), and the auto is 01 in FIG. 139 (b). The button mode item has disappeared, and the cursor display has moved to the newly added item in FIG. 139 (b), which was 06 without pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 141 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 141.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 142 (29) following FIG. 141 (28), the final sub-item of the effect customization in FIG. 139 (b) is 09. The cursor display has moved to the item of one notification.

As shown in FIG. 142 (30), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon and the confirmation icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 142 (31). , Furthermore, it is lit in red.

In FIG. 142 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the effect customization setting is to be updated may be displayed. On the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 142 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 142 (35).

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen can be displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (36) (see FIG. 142 (37)), FIG. 142 (38). ), The cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the production customization icon has moved down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 142 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 142 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list contains the top five options (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) in the character selection display shown in FIG. 139 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 142 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and the character pattern of the item in which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed on the left side of the character selection screen. Has been done. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. Also, at the bottom right of the character selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the decision operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

As shown in FIG. 142 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one item below Yoshimune as shown in FIG. 142 (42). The picture is previewed.

In FIG. 142 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (44) is shown in FIG. 139 (b). The cursor display has moved to the item of Copanda in 07, which is the last choice of character selection.

As shown in FIG. 142 (45), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the back icon and the back icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 142 (46). , Furthermore, it is lit in red.

Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 142 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 142 (48), the Yoshimune of 01 is displayed. Returning to the first list at the beginning, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 142 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display was performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the character settings are to be updated, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the settings of the selected character are automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 142 (51).

Even if the animation display indicating that the character is determined ends, the character selection screen remains, and the option menu screen can be returned by operating the back icon located on the character selection screen. good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 142 (52)), as shown in FIG. 142 (53), the character until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold frame selection icon, and the hold frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 142 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 142 (55), the hold frame is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list shows the top five options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) (“01 Hold frame A” to “05”. Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 142 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the hold frame A, and in the window on the left side of the hold frame selection screen, the hold frame of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is a hold icon and a variable icon. It is previewed with. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the hold frame selection is the hold frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated hold that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Also, at the bottom right of the hold frame selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 142 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 142.

In response to one operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 142 (56) following from FIG. 142 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (57), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A. The next item is moved to the hold frame B, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

In FIG. 143 (58), the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136. On the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (59), an effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated, and when the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the hold frame setting is to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (61)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 143 (62). The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 143 (63), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold display selection screen. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list shows the top five options (“01 icon A” to “05 icon”) in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 143 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for the hold display selection is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. In addition, at the bottom right of the hold display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icon h1 to h4 or as the variable icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (65), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the icon settings are to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (67)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 143 (68). The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 143 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 143 (70), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) are displayed in the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 143 (70), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the background A, and the background of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the background display selection is the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. At the bottom right of the background display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here will be displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a notice of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and the background display in the electric support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (72), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the selected background setting is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the background setting may be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 143 (75), until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 143 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the back icon, and as shown in FIG. 143 (77), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a demo screen. Will be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, the hold frame UI is different from the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 141 (1), and the frame RW at the upper right of the screen is set to ON by the effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, the customization numbers are displayed alternately in ascending order. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and the back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen. If it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but it may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. Further, the group notice of the reliability setting and the long-press auto-continuous hitting of the continuous hitting speed setting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only as, for example, "Production customization in progress".

In FIG. 143 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp are shown. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the ordinary symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are in stop display. Further, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are being stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 143 (79) is being stopped and displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are all turned off, and are located in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not been started since the final display of the stopped symbol has been performed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 143 (80) has started the symbol variation display. However, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. 143 (80) are decorative symbols. The variation display has not been started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, also remains displaying the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 143 (80), the black square represents the stop display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the gray circle represents the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display and the second hold number displayed in the upper right corner. On the display, the number of pending special figures 1 is displayed as "1" for a moment.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (82), of the second hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 which was previously displayed as “1” for a moment is “0”. It should be noted that since the first special figure start port 230 is won and immediately digested, the second hold number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment and may remain as "0".

In FIG. 143 (83), the increasing animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 143.

In FIG. 144 (84) following from FIG. 143 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 144 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of the effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped patternless and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 144 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol has not been started yet, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the volume adjustment icon VI are delayed from the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI has started, and the display is transparent. The erasure here may be an animation tailoring, but it does not necessarily have to be an erasure animation, and in FIG. 144 (86), the erasure of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

In FIG. 144 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 144 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. , The variable icon h0 of the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area. Then, in FIG. 144 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation. Regarding the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and finally the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display at the same time. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation in which the decorative symbol is displayed once in a large size and then returns to the original size, or an image and characters in which the decorative symbol is a character or the like are displayed. When it is composed of an image (including a number), an image such as a character may be animated before the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate) may be displayed.

In FIG. 144 (91), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 144 (92)), FIG. 144 (93) As shown in, a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level and reduces the sound, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level and increases the sound. , Volume is adjustable.

In the present embodiment, only the volume adjustment is always possible even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated for a certain period of time. For example, during the start production of the jackpot game, during the interval between rounds, during the end production of the jackpot game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, and the decorative symbols. The result screen (for example, the number of balls or / and) at the end of the confirmation display, the confirmation display of the lost symbol, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol, or the end of the electric support (time reduction) state (for example, the end of ST). The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used in the production may be restricted while the screen for displaying the number of consecutive villas and the like is being displayed. If the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of the victory or defeat is notified, and then it may be adjustable, or it may be adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. It may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be regulated.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Further, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is not possible, but the light amount adjustment bar. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, and the amount of light may be adjustable, or the amount of light may be adjustable without displaying the bar. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. The volume may be adjustable. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured so that the count start for that fixed period can be updated (ie, the period before returning to the demo screen can be extended). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI etc. is erased by the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the erasing animation is canceled in the middle and immediately. The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be redisplayed without canceling the erasure animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erasure animation is performed to the end.

Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is determined until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, the amount of light may be adjustable, and the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, even if the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 142.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in a frame and lit in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 145 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 145 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a back icon for approving the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the back icon (FIG. 145 (33b5-1)), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 145 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 145 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 145 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 145 (33c5)). )). On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33c5), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “yes icon” (FIG. 145 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 145 (33c8-1). When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, the initialization of the effect customization is executed. The initialization here returns to the initial value for all the settings made by the player in the effect customization. In particular, nothing in particular. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is superimposed on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 145 (33c9-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 145 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is displayed. In this example, in particular. Nothing was set, but all the items are turned off by default.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing other modified examples.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 146 (74b1) instead of the two operations of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 143 (74a), as shown in FIG. 146 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 146 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 146 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 146 (74b4), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “yes icon” (FIG. 146 (74b6-1)), or the cursor display is displayed in the “no icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 146 (74b6-2)).

When the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1) (FIG. 146 (74b7-1)), all the settings are initialized. NS. In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 146 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 146 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 146 (74b10-1).

When the player does not return to the option menu screen after making various customizations and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Further, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 146 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 145 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the "yes icon" may be removed from the confirmation screen so that the confirmation screen is initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a "yes icon", if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when "Initialize" is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon"). ..

Further, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or the brightness may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for volume initialization and brightness initialization. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed that initializes all the settings, volume, and brightness settings.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once in 100 fluctuations, when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since it was last displayed, or when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since the first fluctuation. Or may be displayed randomly (for example, when a display lottery is won).

FIGS. 146 (I) to 146 (V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during a jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select music in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. A certain round here is a round in which a V-attacker can win a prize, and specifically, there are five rounds. In FIG. 146 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that encourages the winning of the V attacker is displayed. In addition, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 146 (II) shows the period corresponding to the interval between rounds when the V attacker is closed. Even if the interval is between 5 rounds and 6 rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 146 (III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (III) displays a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a symbol of the chance button 136. That is, in this example, the production customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the fifth round in which the V attacker can win a prize. It may be possible to execute only in the 6th round, or it may be possible to execute in a plurality of rounds after the 6th round.

In FIG. 146 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

Further, in FIG. 146 (V) shown as a modification of FIG. 146 (V), a display relating to only one row (only one item) of the five-row list (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. ..

In the example of FIG. 146 (V) and the example of FIG. 146 (V'), only a part of the effect customization may be changed.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning is performed with a so-called V-certain machine). In addition, it is not limited to the V confirmation machine, and customization may be performed from a certain round.

Further, during the period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot game, the music cannot be customized, and the music may be customized from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected from the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if the music is selected in the round, if the selected music is output. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, customization may be possible from the end of a particular round at the same time as the end of a particular round, or from the beginning of the next round of a particular round, between a particular round and the next round. Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

In addition, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Further, the customization may be executed at any time during the jackpot game. The term "during the jackpot game" as used herein means a period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, which is between the eaves and includes the round.

From the point of view of the main control unit 300, the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to the start of the first round is the period from when the accessory continuous operation device is turned on to the special electric accessory ( It is the period from off to on (attacker), but includes the period during which the jackpot game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display displayed in the jackpot game start effect (for example, the display of the special bonus) may continue to be displayed even after the first round is started, but it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is the period until the eyes start. Further, the final display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the final display of the decorative symbol, but based on the final display of the symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214. In addition, if the game table provides a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in Special Figure 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also the big hit symbol. Is included in the period from the confirmation display to the start of the first round.

During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be possible, or vice versa.

In addition, customization may not be possible in the period from the end of the final round to the start of symbol variation at the earliest. For example, customization may not be possible during the jackpot end effect.

Further, while the prepaid card forgotten warning is displayed, customization may not be possible, or vice versa.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, V winning production, music selection, probability change suggestion production, etc.). Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during the period during which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may not be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used in the customization, or the customization may be restricted even before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the examples shown in FIGS. 146 (I) to 146 (V'), customization may not be possible once a certain round is reached. For example, customization can be performed from 1R to 14R, but it may not be possible when it reaches 15R. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when the two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during the jackpot game, or when the two-dimensional code is displayed by the operation of the player (for example, "press the button to display the two-dimensional code" is displayed. When a two-dimensional code is issued by operating a button while it is being executed), it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and conversely, a part or all of the display related to customization may be displayed in two dimensions. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

Although FIGS. 146 (I) to 146 (V') have described the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a probability variation region, the jackpot of a pachinko machine having a variable winning slot without a probability variation region has been described. It can also be applied to the big hits of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models, which start big hits by winning a V prize.

FIGS. 146 (VI) to VIII (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. be. Further, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), it is displayed that the ode button mode is currently customized, and the effect customization is executed below it. A character display notifying that it is possible and a design of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 146 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. The display related to only (only one item) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. In this example as well, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

FIGS. 146 (IX) to XI are diagrams showing another example that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. be. Further, in FIG. 146 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The display screen of the second display device 208P is smaller than that of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 146 (IX) is in the initial position and can be moved up and down. A part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

The model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW'indicating that the ode button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, under the display RW', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 146 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. XI, the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like. A part of the contents of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like (for example, the customized display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining contents may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like may be displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to the display related to customization during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the customization may be executed at any time during the symbol variation display. For example, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is being displayed. The super-reach production referred to here includes the production of the fanned part and the precursory production from the reach state to the start of the judge production such as the duel production. For example, the left and right symbols of the decorative symbols assumed to enter the reach state change the display position, and the effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach is also included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, it is included in the super reach effect until the screen is switched to the display screen of the decorative pattern.

In addition, it may be possible to customize the production of the fanned part or the precursory production, or it may not be possible to do the opposite. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or the display screen of the decorative pattern from the judge effect, customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, even during the simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game consoles, customization may be possible, and conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, customization may be possible during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be possible only when it finally becomes a big hit, or vice versa, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be possible, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, customization may be possible or may not be possible until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, during the look-ahead mode), customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, if customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. good.

In addition, the mission list and game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, etc.) achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) , The number of big hits in this play, the maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.) can be displayed, and the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed. It may have been done. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the mission list and game history achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, etc. , Hold display, etc. may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications compatible with the membership service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition shown in FIG. 139 (b) is adopted. Further, the pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

The top menu has a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

FIG. 147 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", you can operate the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137 between the items connected by the arrows. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "Daitomo" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "Back" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customization screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136. Then you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, the "Daitomo screen" and "Daitomo screen" Even if it is the "model customization screen" or "initialization confirmation screen", the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 147 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 147 (2) is the same except for the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 140, "Return to top menu" at the bottom, and "Top menu screen" on the right side thereof. Therefore, the duplicate description will be omitted. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to top menu" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 148 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Trial play", "Password input", "Data save", "Data clear", "Quick start", and "Return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected to each other by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the "trial play" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, you can move to the new registration screen or start the trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136, or the top menu screen. You can go back to. Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and by deciding the chance button 136. ..

If the cursor is moved to the "password input" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen is switched to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

If the cursor is placed on the "data save" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data save confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, if "Yes" is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136, the screen shifts to the two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same way, a two-dimensional code is issued and it is possible to move to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, "No" was determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136 on both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen. If so, each display is repeated.

If the cursor is moved to the "data clear" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is moved to the "quick start" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen". If you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the Daitomo screen. Further, the user may be able to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, the "trial pre-screen" Even if it is, the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

Further, the parenthesized reference numerals shown in FIG. 148 are associated with the parenthesized figure numbers in FIG. 149.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

The top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a). On this top menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in a vertical row from top to bottom: the Daitomo icon, the model customization icon, the initialization icon, and the back icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 148 (a), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon at the bottom, and the return icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started becomes the back icon. Also on the top menu screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a), in which the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon, and the chance button 136 is pressed. This is the Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. To return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in a vertical row from top to bottom under the character display of "Daitomo" on this Daitomo screen. Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 148 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, the frame of the trial play icon is highlighted, and the trial play icon is lit in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and a picture of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as a privilege of the membership experience of Daitomo. Below that display is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, and a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, if the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "new registration icon", and when the chance button 136 is pressed there to perform the decision operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows FIG. 149. The new registration screen shown in (b1-2) is displayed.

On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function and displayed on the two-dimensional code QR1. A sentence recommending that you access the embedded URL website (Daitomo site) and obtain a password from it is displayed. Below the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but it may be possible to display the new registration screen without going through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1) in addition to the trial play icon and the like, and the new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 149 (b1-b1-) The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols, and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)) using the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r, and the character specified by the cursor. Is entered in the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136, one character at a time according to the password obtained from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)). Below the dial kW, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating the completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor display displayed on the completion icon. If the password is entered incorrectly, the typo window shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and when this window disappears, the password can be entered again. The password entered last time may be cleared from the password input area pw, or may remain as it is. If the password is entered correctly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode. ..

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and the explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data save icon can not be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1), a "Yes" icon for accepting the data to be saved and a "No" icon for not saving the data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 149 (b3-2)). In addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, this two-dimensional code QR2 includes the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive villas, the level of the Daitomo mode, and experience. Values, mission achievement information, etc. are embedded), and this 2D code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function, and the URL website (Daitomo site) embedded in the 2D code QR2 is embedded. ), The data is saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of this data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, select the end icon and operate the chance button 136 to confirm the end. Is displayed.

In FIG. 149 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “no” icon that does not end are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and the data such as the game history information this time may be deleted from the pachinko machine. FIG. 149 (b3-2-1). It may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 when the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or it may not be deleted until the data is cleared, which will be described later.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or this data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1), a "Yes" icon for approving the deletion of the data such as the game history information this time and a "No" icon for not deleting the data are displayed. There is. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 149 (b4-1-1), and the erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time and returns to the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the back icon, and the return to the top menu screen is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customization icon from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 150 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Although the effect customization screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c1), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17) is that the input sound notice option and the back button navigation option are not released. It's different. If the password of Daitomo is not entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition is not reached, the screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c1) is displayed.

Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c2), the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (40) is different from the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (40) because all the other options are unreleased except for Yoshimune's option. The difference is that the choices do not even show what kind of character they are. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized (a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized. For example, a display including "Princess opens at Daitomo Lv.20" etc.) may be displayed. Here, regarding the display related to the unreleased options, other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display) can also be applied. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather's character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c3), the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (55) is such that all the other options are not released except for the option of the hold frame A. Yes, the difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold slot is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c3) is displayed. Only the hold frame A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c3'), since the password is entered, the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c4), in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (63), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c4) is displayed. Only icon A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c4'), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although the background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c5), in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (70), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of background A. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, since the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, it cannot be selected.

Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 150 (d1), the description is omitted because it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1). Although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (d2), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b8-1).

FIG. 150 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 150 (e1). For example, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo" is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, "Trial" is displayed. When the voice "Start playing" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. In addition, different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, or when Daitomo is started by password input. , The same sound effect may be output in all cases, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. In addition, the sound effect may change depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) after model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed with or in place of the corresponding sound effect. If the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output as it is to the end.

Also, when the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time. It may be configured so that the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) can be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time.

FIG. 150 (e1-1) shows a state in which the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has passed since the demo screen shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows.

After displaying the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a), the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, 1 minute). May be good. If the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalid. However, it may be valid.

Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without holding), the figure is shown. The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 141 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1).

If the stop symbol is displayed without hold, the menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI will not be displayed for a certain period of time, and FIG. 150 (c) will be displayed for a certain period of time. ) May not be able to call the model customization screen.

Further, even during the period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 can be called. May be possible.

Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 and the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also the screens shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1). In some cases, neither of them is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be feasible or may be restricted so that they cannot be performed.

FIG. 150 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 149 (b3-2-1) after issuing the two-dimensional code in FIG. 149 (b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120 here, the voice "Thank you for your hard work" is output. In addition, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a variable icon.

Here, the variable icon h0 will be summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is called a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. Further, the variable icon h0 may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variable icon h0 are prepared as normal notice display modes, and depending on the display mode, The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the following description, the color indicates the high or low degree of expectation of a big hit. The default white is when "no change" is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. The default white variable icon does not foretell the expectation of a jackpot, but you may foretell the expectation of a jackpot (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of a jackpot). Blinking white has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is the so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of expectation of big hit. The gold color is a big hit, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit. For example, it may be said that the big hit is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the look-ahead notice display mode by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the term is red or higher, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 151 (A1). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the symbol variation display may be completed and may be continuously displayed even while the stop display is being displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is started continuously, it may be continuously displayed, or it may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. In addition, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during the display of the symbol variation display once, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. This navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 151 (A2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons and the like may change when the display is made. Other icons, such as the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the decorative design. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started becomes the target to be changed. However, even if the display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display is started, or the display is started later, it may be the target to be changed. At the time when the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what will be changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, there may be a case where it is a false notice in which nothing changes depending on the change notice display. In addition, the change notice display may be determined to change only one object, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

The treasure chest icon I1 shown in FIG. 151 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. The appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display is when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special figure start port (when the hold increases). , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the time of super reach At the start, Super Reach Middle etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the change notice display icon may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (difference in size, color, animation) of the treasure box or carpet. May be good. In addition, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, which is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, the probability of changing the display mode is high, which is advantageous for the player. Or the display mode may be changed to a higher probability. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but may change an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change, look-ahead notice display, etc.). There may be. In addition, among the effect displays other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), look-ahead notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode, etc.), etc. It may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the notice display that changes one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all the effect displays), but even if the navigation character is changed. good. Further, the change notice display may be configured so that the navigation character is changed more frequently than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character. It may be less frequent than changing the display, and the two frequencies may occur at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is changed by "notice for changing the effect display (change notice display, notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is less frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, the effect display that is frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit, or may not be configured.

In FIG. 151 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 remains. The treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 151 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I1 changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, the treasure chest opens, an effect smoke image appears from inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigator character YM, making it clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon or the like other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure chest is opened, other notices may be given. In FIG. 151 (A5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the lord of the navigation character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the lord of the navigator character YM to a red kimono may indicate that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be confirmed that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow-colored kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed according to the color of the hold icon and / or the variable icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed on the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. It changes to a kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and / or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variable icon changes a plurality, it is digested first. The color of the hold icon or variable icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character. The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, or conversely, the color with low jackpot expectation may be preferentially displayed, and the jackpot expectation level may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or the variable icon itself. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with a high value may be displayed, or the color of the hold icon or variable icon with a low expectation of a jackpot may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or the variable icon itself, and it changes. The colors of the pending and / or variable icons may all be reflected in the color of the navigator, and the colors of the navigator are randomly displayed from the changing colors of the pending and / or variable icons. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed, the treasure box icon I1 with the lid open is still displayed. The treasure chest icon I1 may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The treasure box icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 151 (A6-1), and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display high-speed fluctuations.

In FIG. 151 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 151 (A8), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative symbol display device. The right symbol, which is also temporarily stopped, moves to the upper left of the 208, and moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared, and the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach effect. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0')). , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or vice versa, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may all be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

In FIG. 151 (A9), the navigation character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front until then, turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held. In FIG. 151 (A10), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord, and in FIG. 151 (A11), the variable icon h0, which was previously white, has changed to red. As described above, the variation icon of the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 151 (A12), the navigation character YM of the lord returns to the posture of standing facing the front. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 151 (A12) remains in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

Although not shown in FIG. 151 (A13), the button effect is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image and the remaining time display meter, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the above operation validity period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image of the lord, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The cut-in image of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be what is done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the second button production after developing into super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation validity period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

In the remaining time display meter, the above operation validity period is started and the gauge is reduced. The operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. Then, the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect after developing into super reach. Further, the operation validity period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large board behavior accessory shown in FIG. 133 (a). 224Ga to 224Gd of the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 224 Gd of the four large board behavior accessories. The effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without any notice. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is not performed and the effect display is lost. Often, it is also possible to display the revival effect after the effect display that is a loss is performed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit is performed. When the effect of operating the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, the Senryobako accessory 224H shown in FIG. 133 (a) operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, after that, the light guide plate IL emits light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the initial position, respectively. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 151 (A 14-1). In FIG. 151 (A 14-1), the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 151 (A9) to 151 (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon h0 (hereinafter, referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but it can also be seen as a different effect from the super reach effect, which was started with the start of the super reach effect. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (hold). (Increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , At the start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

In addition, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes is also during the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol changes start, when the movement of the variable icon h0 is completed, and a prize is given to the special symbol start port. At the time (when the hold increases), at the start of the look-ahead notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), reach It is possible to enumerate the start of the state, the start of super reach, and the like. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production explained here is also a game production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed. Further, when the navigation character YM performs an animation to change the display mode of the variable icon, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. You may. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and there are cases where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (success) and cases where the display mode is not changed (failure). There may be.

In addition, there may be cases where the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a pre-reading notice of the next symbol variation display. , The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 151 (A 15-1), the scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM also poses for victory. However, the middle design is not displayed yet, and the middle design of "Decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration. The design is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 151 (A 15-1), an animation for a big hit may be executed by the main character, the lord.

Here, up to Fig. 151 (A 15-1) before the middle design is displayed can be seen as a super reach effect, but it seems that the victory has been confirmed once the middle design is displayed (A 16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach production, or further, it can be seen as a super reach production until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and the super reach effect is being executed until the result of the final judge effect is confirmed (for example, until just before the stop display is performed). May be good.
After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where it has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed and stopped. Therefore, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. 4 In the symbol display device, the symbol is displayed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big hit start effect display.

During super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappear. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappear, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation may be configured. Both characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed up to that point.

As shown in the figure (A2-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A2-1), a balloon display such as "Change !?" may be added to the navigation character YM of the lord, or the figure (A2-2). As shown in A 2-3), a balloon display such as "Preparing for change" may be added. After that, the process returns to FIG. 151 (A3-1), and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to a warning effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notification display. That is, it is a notice that the navigation character itself may change, such as "change !?", or the navigation character is about to change ("preparing for change" is displayed, such as "preparing for change". It may be a notice suggesting that it will always change within the fluctuation or after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation where "Preparing for change" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (A3-2-1) instead of FIG. 151 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and then again. The carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (A4-1) instead of FIG. 151 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the change mode and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced. In the case of FIG. 151 (A4-2), it is foretold that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. Further, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the expected degree of the change or the jackpot in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (A 5-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change, but the navigation character YM itself may become larger. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A5-2) may be dark blue (default color), but may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap all the icons I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

In addition, the probability of changing the variable icon h0, and thus the expectation of a big hit, is higher in the display mode in which the default color is large than in the display mode in which the default color is small, and is higher than in the display mode in which the red color is small. The red and large display mode may be higher. Further, in terms of size and color, color may be prioritized, and for example, a display mode in which a red color is small may be higher than a display mode in which a default color is large. Alternatively, on the contrary, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the display mode is small in red. Further, regarding the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as a large case and a small case, and an intermediate size thereof.

When the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to gold and the rainbow. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variable icon h0 may change to rainbow colors. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose jackpot expectation is red or higher. That is, if the change of the variable icon h0 is successful, it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more, or it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is displayed in a red kimono, the expectation of the jackpot may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, blinking white, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono which is the premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may always change to rainbow-colored. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of a display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it will be easier to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be determined by the display mode of the navigation character YM. It can be notified indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the variable icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Further, the character of the main character, the lord, is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. Further, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, and only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization has the variable icon. It may be possible to use it as a character that changes h0.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 151.

A change notice display so as to return to FIG. 151 (A7) via FIG. 152 (A6-2-1) to FIG. (A6-2-3) following FIG. 151 (A6-1). The navigator character YM may change a plurality of times until the treasure chest icon I1 is hidden. The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, while the navigator character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeatedly opens and closes.

Further, following FIG. 151 (A6-1), a change animation as shown in FIGS. 152 (A6-3-1) to FIG. 152 (A6-3-1) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the change notice display (here, the UFO icon UFI). In the figure (A 6-3-3a) following FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. , As shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Alternatively, in the figure (A 6-3-3b) following FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2), a gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. After being irradiated, the navigator character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-4b).

Although promotion has been described here, there may be cases where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode and the default display mode are used. There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case where the display becomes smaller (when demoted).

In addition, FIG. 152 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 151 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6", which is different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7"), is displayed in a large size (shaking display), and in the following figure (A 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed. Decorative symbols All symbols are temporarily displayed lighter than normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between the super reach effect scene (effect display) and the normal background (background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 151 (A1) and the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 152 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is completed, and the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is swayed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the variable icon h0 itself may be erased. good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigator has changed is not visible because the navigator is hidden, but the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigator has changed is displayed. May be visible. (For example, a display that switches from a state in which the display mode of the navigator character has changed to the default state, an animation display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigator character has changed to the default state, and the like can be mentioned.)
At the time of wiping out (Fig. 152 (A 14-2-6) to Fig. (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM is displayed, but it is not displayed. In some cases, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Further, in FIGS. 152 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. 152 (A 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (pedestal hs0'and right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the holding frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 151.

Following FIG. 151 (A16-1), the display as shown in FIGS. 153 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 153 (A16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen has begun to become thin. After that, it may disappear once by the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of victory of the lord) shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 151 (A 14-2-3) may be displayed. ) May be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a jackpot combination or a loss) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (A16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (may be a combination) is swayed.

Further, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, probability change) is made. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be fixed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow-colored premium. If so, an advantageous jackpot may be fixed.

Further, FIGS. 153 (1) to 153 (i 12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 153 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 153 (i2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (i3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 153 (I4-1), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navigation character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front (initial posture) until then, turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held. In FIG. 153 (15), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord, but in the figure (i6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 153 (I7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 153 (I8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (i9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 153 (I11), the variable icon h0, which had been white until then, has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 12 (i12), the navigator character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode wearing a red kimono. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 153 (I 4-1), in the same figure (I 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. , In the figure (I4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, "business trip" on the signboard is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display) described as "Medium" may be displayed.

It should be noted that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). good. Further, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only in the state where the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the variable icon h0.

Further, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variable icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not exit the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the hold frame UI, or may be movable outside from the hold frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next variation of the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red to the variation of the hold of the look-ahead target. There may be a change in which the change animation is not performed between the change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change in the look-ahead target. In addition, a change animation may be performed for the fluctuation in which the navigation character YM turns red.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a change effect of the hold icon and a change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 154 (U1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 154 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the hold frame UI and approaches the hold frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 154 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 154 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is , The display mode changes from the default display mode to the display mode of blinking white. That is, it has succeeded in promotion production. There are a plurality of types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, if the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and if the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If a third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 154 (U4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 154 (U5), the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 154 (U6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 154 (U8), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 154 (U9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 154 (U10), an arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 154 (U11), it hits the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of blinking white. In FIG. 12 (U12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blinking white to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, it may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, as long as the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the promotion effect may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only on one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). However, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 154 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, in FIG. (U14), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (U 15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 154 (U 16), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The variable icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 154 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box appears. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 154 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 154 (U 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 154 (U21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigator character YM represents the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot of the symbol variation display currently being performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 154 (U 23), the reach state is entered, and in FIG. 154 (U 24), the super reach effect is developed. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold frame UI disappear, and if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 154 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navigation character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS has sunk, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 154 (U25) during the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue display mode variation icon h0 is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 151. Further, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (U 27-1), a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness as a continuation of the super reach effect. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154 and a modified example.

In FIG. 155 (U29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord collapsed is displayed. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (U30), the super reach effect is completed, the normal background is returned, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 155 (U31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that had been sunk until now has begun to rise with the variable icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is swayed and displayed, and the hold frame UI is also redisplayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, instead of FIG. 154 (U 20-1), in FIG. 155 (U 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier rainbow-colored kimono. In this case, the jackpot is confirmed because the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0. The display mode of the variable icon may also be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM functions as a look-ahead notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be read ahead may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Further, instead of FIG. 154 (U27-1), in FIG. 155 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here, treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) becomes a temporary stop display. It is configured so that after one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, no notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After that, the effect icon and / or the change notice display may be performed. Although described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols or all decorative symbols. Further, when the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and / or the change notice display is configured so as not to give a notice, but it may be given.

FIGS. 155 (E1) to 4-1 (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 155 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 155 (E3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in FIG. 155 (E4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

Further, instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), in the same figure (E 3-2), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and after that, the navigator character YM is a red kimono. It changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may foretell the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to red or higher if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is confirmed that the display mode will be changed to red or higher. It may be a notice display.

Further, instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), in the same figure (E 3-3), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the pattern variation display currently being performed, or The big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) in the symbol variation display started after this. In this way, the change animation itself may give a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. The rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to the rainbow-colored color if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary that the pattern variation and / or the holding area where the color smoke image is displayed is confirmed as a big hit (the big hit may be rich).

Further, in the figure (E4-2) instead of FIG. 155 (E4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess navigation character. The changing character type may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the above-mentioned customization, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, instead of FIG. 155 (E4-2), in the same figure (E4-3), the navigator character is changed to a navigator character (for example, a character with a bancho) that the player cannot select. In addition, the navigator character of the bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold in which the navigator character has changed. It may be configured so that the expectation of the big hit is high.

It should be noted that the navigator character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol variation in which the navigator character is changed and the navigator character may be changed. / Or it may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high, or it is configured so that the notice of the appearance of the princess (bancho) and / or the super reach effect is likely to occur (or will always occur). You may be.

When the navigator character YM changes to another navigator character, it may be configured to change only to the navigator characters that can be selected by the player, and the navigator character may be changed to a non-selectable navigator character. It may be configured, and may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player selects the navigator character rather than the navigator character that can be selected by the player. The disabled navigation character may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily, and the expectation of the jackpot in the hold and / or the changed symbol of the navigation character is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player is more likely to play than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigator character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuate icon is more likely to be performed, or the symbol change in which the navigator character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold. It may be configured to have a high degree.

Further, instead of FIG. 155 (E4-1), in the same figure (E4-4), the character does not change, and the change production of itself fails.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode by itself, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but the color of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is used. , The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be certain that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode equal to or higher than red.

Further, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be used to foretell the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed or the symbol variation display to be started later. That is, a normal notice or a look-ahead notice may be given depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (1). Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 156 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 156 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 156 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. Further, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (4).

In FIG. 156 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 156 (6), the background change notice, which is a kind of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of the background change notice (holding for pre-reading target) here is the holding increased at the timing of FIG. 156 (2) (second holding at this timing). In the background change notice, images of sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors by the animation of closing the sliding doors (see FIG. 156 (7)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be produced so that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 156 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

Further, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) color may indicate the jackpot expectation of the look-ahead target hold, or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the sliding door color appears. , The navigation character YM functions as a change notice and corresponds to a change notice display. Also, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 156 (8), the sliding doors open, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. It's gone. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character of the lord has changed to the character of the robot. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 156 (11), the reach state is entered. Further, between FIGS. 156 (9-1) and FIG. 156 (11), the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 have all disappeared. After that, it develops into a super reach production and changes to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (13) shows a scene in which the lord was defeated in the background of the wilderness. The robot navigation character YM overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 156 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 156 (15), in the wipe display here, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 156 (16), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 156 (17), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

In FIG. 156 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7".

After that, after the first hold is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 156 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the symbol variation of the look-ahead target pending has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 156 (21), the background change notice is started again, the images of the sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the animation that the sliding doors are closed makes the entire display screen an image of the sliding doors (FIG. 156 (22)). reference). In FIG. 156 (23), the sliding doors open, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. It's gone. As shown in FIG. 156 (24), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigator character YM has also returned to the character of the lord.

Further, in the figure (9-2) instead of FIG. 156 (9-1), the display mode of the robot navigation character YM is changed to a display mode different from the default display mode. The display mode of the background-dependent character (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) may also change depending on the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

The navigation character YM may change depending on the production background regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when the coastal background, the castle town background, and the castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may change depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Further, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the production background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed than when the navigation character that matches the production background is displayed. It may be configured so that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), or the effect. It may be configured so that the notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and / or the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

Alternatively, conversely, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or it may never change.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 157 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 157 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of this balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (old man or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently displayed navigation character YM. In addition to the navigation character YM of the lord, the display of the navigation character YM1 of the princess is added to the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode in which it appears instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, the animation may be an animation in which the character cannot be seen at the beginning by a smoke image, or an animation in which the character appears by walking from the right edge of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

In FIG. 157 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 157 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of fluctuations. However, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the navigation character YM of the lord) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 157 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling the old man is additionally displayed on the two navigator characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigator characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandfather's navigator character YM2 has been added, and the grandfather has been successfully called. In other words, all three are now ready. In this production, the more navigator characters gather, the higher the probability that the variable icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the color will change to the premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation that the fluctuation will make a big hit. Or the expectation of a big hit after the next fluctuation may be high. In addition, when all three people are present, the rainbow color of the premiere may be confirmed or the jackpot may be confirmed. In FIG. 157 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with all three people aligned, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 2-1), in the same figure (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 157 (or 2-1), the navigation character YM
In this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of other navigation characters, or may also give other notices (holding change notice, etc.). In FIG. 157 (or 2-2), the characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, the grandfather's navigation character YM2) may appear. It may appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but the characters of the characters that have already appeared may be configured to appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess navigation character is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 people are displayed), promotion effects of characters that have already appeared may be performed (for example, 3 characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). If the stop is displayed, the princess will appear the first time, the princess's kimono will change to red the second time, and the princess's kimono will change to gold the third time).

Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-2), there is a case where no navigator character appears and it fails.

Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), in the same figure (or 3-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess's navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigator characters displayed next to each other. For example, in Fig. 157 (or 3-1), the lord's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the grandfather's navigation character YM2 came and a surprised animation was displayed. The grandfather may come before the princess in the premiere production. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variable icon h0 will change will change, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to the premier will change, the expectation of a big hit will change due to the change, and the big hit will occur after the next change. Expectations do not have to change or affect them at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be predetermined depending on the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed at the left end, and the navigation character YM1 of the princess is displayed one person apart. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. In this way, even if the order of display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, there may be cases where the order is broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere production (Big hit confirmation effect) or big hit rich.

In addition, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in the figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is notified by character display (here, "princess stock"). ”), It may be notified by voice from the speaker, or it may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 157 (or 3-5-3), it is notified by a character display that all the members have gathered. In addition, when all the members were successfully set, a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") was displayed instead of the usual character display of "All members". In that case, it may be a premier effect (big hit confirmed effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be always started. Further, here as well, the notification may be performed by voice from the speaker, or by blinking of a lamp or the like, together with the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display.

Also, instead of Fig. 157 (or 6-1), as shown in Fig. 157 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandfather (here, the haniwa character YM3 that imitates a cactus) have increased. In that case, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich.

If "Grandfather" is displayed even though "Princess" is specified and called, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich, and "Princess" is called. If the "old man" is displayed more frequently even though it is displayed, if the character ("princess") as called appears, the jackpot may be rich (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (in this example, the lord) that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may be easy to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Further, depending on the type of the navigation character that calls the other navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may not appear (stock) easily. For example, it may be easier for other navigator characters to appear (stock) when the princess navigator character calls it than the lord's navigator character. Further, the characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation character. For example, a plurality of navigation characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord × 3. Further, even if the navigation characters are of the same type, the display mode (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Further, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when a character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the lord is released, a hold may be promoted when the princess is released, and a timer notice may be started when the old man is released. .. Also, a plurality of characters may be emitted. Further, when a plurality of characters are emitted at the same time, an effect different from that of a single character may be emitted. For example, if the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification and the like shown in FIG. 157.

In FIG. 158 (ki 1), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of the navigation character YM in the default display mode, the princess navigation character YM1 in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 for displaying a change notice is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 158 (Ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside. Of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1, only the princess's navigation character YM1 smokes. Wrapped in the image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 158 (Ki 4), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 158 (ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

Instead of FIG. 158 (Ki 2-1), in the same figure (Ki 2-2-1), the pose of the navigator character YM of the lord is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 158 (Ki 2-2-2), the lord's navigation character YM makes a smoke image appear, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 158 (Ki 2-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In addition, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

In the figure (ki 3-2-1) instead of the figure 158 (ki 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure box icon I1 is shown in both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 158 (Ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 are changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them have changed to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, a princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigator characters may be promoteable. In that case, the change of one character (for example, a princess) may be hotter than the change of the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the expectation of the jackpot may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Further, it may be hotter when one character changes depending on the change mode than when both characters change. For example, the combination of the default display mode of the lord's navigator YM and the display mode of the princess's navigator YM1 wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the display mode of the princess's navigator YM wearing a red kimono and the same red color. With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Also, both characters may be made to change without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or it may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the fluctuation is hot, and if the navigation character YM1 of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is easy to develop into super reach. May be good. In addition, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is the jackpot confirmed, and if it is the princess navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, when one navigator character is always displayed and another navigator character is newly called by the navigator character, or when a plurality of navigator characters are always displayed, the navigator character YM is displayed. This embodiment is also applicable when there is a period during which the navigation character is not displayed and one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7) show an example of an effect in which a button effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 158 (ku 1-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 158 (ku 2-1). The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode, and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 158 (ku 3), the operation validity period is started, and in FIG. 158 (ku 4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 158 (ku 5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (ku 6), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 158 (ku 7), it is changed to a navigator character of a lord in a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 158 (Ku 1-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 158 (ku 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the figure (ku 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

When the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) overlap, both may be changed, the back button effect may be prioritized, or another button effect may be prioritized. Further, the same may be applied when the back buttons are duplicated.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be given priority.

Further, in the figure (ku 2-2) instead of FIG. 158 (ku 2-1), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but is located at a position away from the navigation character YM. , The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at a position outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the hold frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed before the valid period starts.

FIG. 159 shows an effect example in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 159 (ku-3-1), the navigation character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 159 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3a), and the smoke image causes navigation. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, making it clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 has been erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not change at all (for example, a change in the display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. be. When the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself is configured not to change. However, there may be a case where the state shifts to the same figure (ku 1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-3a).

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2a), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3b1), the button image 136a disappears and the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button hold icon. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-3b2) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

Alternatively, from FIG. 159 (K1-3-3b1), as shown in FIG. 159 (K1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Here, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is not a change animation when passing through FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is momentarily switched, and the same figure (ku 1-3-3b1) is shown. When passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when passing through FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-3b1). The chance button 136 may change immediately after being operated, or may change with a slight delay. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-4) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Also, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 159 (ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started (the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is still started). If the second decorative symbol has started to fluctuate, although not, the fluctuating icon h0 may become the button hold icon, as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-2b2). In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears and as shown in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2b3'). , The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the variable icon h0, but there is no change (for example, a change in the display mode) in the white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon fails. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next fluctuation is started, the button hold icon may be configured so that it does not change, and the button hold icon is a chance. It may be configured to change automatically after the next fluctuation is started without operating a button.

Further, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 159 (Ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started, the same figure (Ku 1-3-2b1) is started. As shown in -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, it may shift to FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2b3') or to FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2b3).

The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 159 (ku-3-1) had the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, in FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-4), the promotion is performed for the second time. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button by displaying the button hold icon.

When eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are accumulated, some or all of the hold icons change to button hold icons, and the hold icon, variable icon, and navigation character YM change according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 1).

In FIG. 160 (Ke 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 160 (Ke 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 160 (Ke 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variation display. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (ke 5-1), and in the same figure (ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 160 (ke 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 160 (Ke 7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode, which is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here, is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is placed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The display mode of the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 151 (A4-1) (Fig. 160 (Ke 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be performed.

In FIG. 160 (Ke 13), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed even during this fluctuation. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not displayed at first, but after it is displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

The navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the look-ahead target hold that is currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigator character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (shaking display) and the symbol stop in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on hold for pre-reading, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear when is temporarily stopped (first stop or second stop).

Further, the navigation character YM disappears at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 160 (Ke 7), and does not have to be displayed across fluctuations.

Further, instead of FIG. 160 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when it is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when it is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the display position. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 160 (ke 5-1), as shown in the figure (ke 5-3), the navigation character YM can be moved within the hold icon display area HIS (in the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 160 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform an animation for moving a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-1) displays the navigation character YM in the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

After that, the pending digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is swayed and displayed in the state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed without holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-6), in the state where there is no hold, the first special figure start port 230 has a prize, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not started to change yet. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-7), an increasing animation of the hold icon indicating the hold that has already been digested (the hold of the started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Actually, FIGS. 161 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but the erasing animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears when the symbol variation display starts from the state where there is no hold. The timing of disappearing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. good.

Further, instead of FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3a), as shown in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to remain unchanged, or conversely, may change during reach. Further, the display mode of the variable icon may also be configured so as not to change during the reach state depending on the navigation character YM, or conversely, it may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b2), a super reach production is developed, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the villain are confronting each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

The display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted when it develops into super reach, and conversely, it does not develop into super reach, and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. You may. Alternatively, on the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a look-ahead notice after the next change. In addition, if the "Navi character promotion" symbol stops at the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

After that, in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIGS. 152 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, is swayed and displayed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b6), the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. Is displayed as it is.

When FIGS. 161 (ke 6-2-1) to (ke 6-2-8) and (ke 6-2-3b1) to (ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, the symbol change of the look-ahead target pending is completed. , Even when the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as the notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. It has been erased at the time. Note that the navigation character is used before the end of the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed as one or more temporary stops, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Before all (in this example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are temporarily stopped, at the same time as the temporary stop, after the temporary stop, the symbol (special symbol) is displayed as a stop. It may be deleted before (such as before), or it may be deleted after the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) is displayed as a stop or after the display is stopped).

FIG. 162 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, the effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (a1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display, it is displayed that the hold number of the special figure 1 is "3" and the hold number of the special figure 2 is "2", and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are the default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 162, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh stage is displayed. , The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until 3 holds are accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when 4 holds are accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and subsequent stages are accumulated. Stage turns gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this a1).

In FIG. 162 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, the hold increase animation is performed in the figure (ko a3), and the hold icon is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a4). Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage becomes only the eighth stage hs8.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "two more are full" is added. The navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 162 (this a6), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (this a7), seven hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon saying "One more tank is full" is added to. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. The final eighth stage hs8 also turned white, and the gray stage disappeared.

In FIG. 162 (this a8), the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (this a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon called "Full tank" is added to. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigator character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of holds, but it does not have to be.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight holds are accumulated (when the tank is full). In FIG. 162 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 162 (this a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The holding is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a look-ahead notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the hold may be announced by the advance notice displayed in the balloon. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol change when the hold is full, but the navigation character may be changed according to the next change of the symbol change when the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change each time the symbol changes, and the change in the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol change.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. In addition, there are a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navigator character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigator character of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character of the bancho is hotter than the navigator character of the lord wearing a red kimono. good.

FIG. 163 shows an example of an effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a normal drawing.

In FIG. 163 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11 indicating the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 163 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure, and the outcomes are "○" and "×", as well as "Geki" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the change. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 163 (this b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the roulette drawing lottery has been won.

In FIG. 163 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the general drawing lottery is won. In the following FIG. 163 (this b4), since the general drawing lottery was won, the electric chew is released, and the navigator character YM notifies that the electric chew is being opened. In FIG. 163 (this b5-1), since the electric chew is open, there is a prize in succession to the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 increases to four which are full. In FIG. 163 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the hold of 2 are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and as for the hold icon, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of special figure 1, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is the special figure 1. It is displayed so that it overlaps from the front side with a part of the hold icon of.

In FIG. 163 (ko b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following figure (ko b8), the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward because the opening time of the electric chew is finished. I'm talking. The roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the pending symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed. In FIG. 163 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 163 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 163 (ko b12), the hold of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (ko b13), the variation icon of special figure 2 is started. A diamond-shaped variable icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 163 (this b14), the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 163 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "this fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. There is. Further, the advance notice is usually executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 163 (this b15-1), in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect fails. In addition, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

After that, the pending digestion of the special figure 2 progresses, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-3) performs the final symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Here, too, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM continues to produce the effect from FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 163 (this b15-2-4), a balloon "Farewell" is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the production by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the production by the navigation character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigation character YM may always disappear. Further, even if the super reach effect is started between FIGS. 163 (ko b15-2-1) and FIG. 163 (ko b15-2-4), the effect by the navigator character YM continues and the navigator character YM is displayed. It may continue to be performed, or conversely, the effect by the navigator character YM may end and the navigator character YM may disappear.

The navigation character YM described in FIGS. 163 (ko b1) to the same figure (ko b15-1) and the same figure (ko b15-2-1) to the same figure (ko b15-2-4) has the variation. Only the advance notice is given and the look-ahead notice is not given, but the look-ahead notice may be given.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (Sa 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (Sa 1).

In FIG. 164 (Sa 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the look-ahead target hold.

In FIG. 164 (Sa 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 164 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display, it is notified (notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2.

In FIG. 164 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 164 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 164 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 164 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby. In this way, the treasure chest icon I1 may be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (Sa 11-1), and in the same figure (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM of the lord appears in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 164 (12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear, and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may always be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 164 (Sa 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon and the navigation character YM of the change notice display are the same look-ahead notice for the same look-ahead target hold (hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 164 (Sa 2) in this example). However, the treasure chest icon of the change notice display and the look-ahead target hold of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 164 (12), when the lord's navigation character YM appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears after that, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 164 (14), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the look-ahead target hold. In FIG. 164 (Sa 15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, wrapping the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 164 (16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord has changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 164 (Sa 2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Also, instead of Fig. 164 (Sa 10-1), in the same figure (Sa 10-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord has not appeared, but the carpet icon I2 has disappeared, and the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 of is finished. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (Sa 10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0 and is a navigation character. The display position of YM and the variable icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 164 (Sa 10-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared and the navigator character YM has not appeared, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Further, instead of FIG. 164 (Sa 11-1), in the figure (Sa 11-2), the carpet icon I2 disappears while the smoke image is displayed but the navigator character YM is not visible. , The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. As described above, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. After the standby display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but even after the wait display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is displayed for the same look-ahead target hold. (For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation at which the standby display ends, or within the fluctuation at which the standby display ends). Further, even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, the change notice display is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same look-ahead target hold (for example, the standby display). Changes after the next change of the change that ended, and within the change that the standby display ended).

Further, instead of FIG. 164 (Sa 13), in the same figure (Sa 13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. In 13-2-2), both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM do not open, the navigation character YM does not change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change. Has disappeared. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. If both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an effect example using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, the holding frame UI and the components (pedestal hs0, etc.) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 165 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the hold frame UI. Is not displayed. The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (1) is the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white. Is promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 165 (2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in the same figure (3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 appears. , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 165 (4), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and an icon displaying the characters "frame promotion" appears from the inside to notify (notice) the promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 165, the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Even if the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may not be promoted. Also, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be promoted without fail.

Further, instead of FIG. 165 (2-1), in the same figure (2-2-1), the lower body of a huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. The lower body of this giant panda overlaps the variable display of the first decorative pattern from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the front side of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom and eventually enters the area of the hold frame UI, where some or all of the hold frame UI is overlapped from the front by the giant panda, FIG. 165. In the state shown in (-2-2), only a part of the upper left and upper right of the hold frame UI has not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in the same figure (-2-3). Now, the entire hold frame UI overlaps the panda's image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. The entire hold frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire hold frame UI.

FIG. 165 (2-2-4) shows one aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the blue display mode (1st hold icon h11). (Promotion), the navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM such as the left frame UIf1 may be changed, or only a part of them may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may change to red and the hold frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, changes may occur outside the hold frame UI.

FIG. 165 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda has finished passing, in addition to the changes within the hold frame UI. Changes are occurring outside the hold frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increasing. When this level rises, it becomes easier to start the reach effect, it becomes easier to start the pseudo-continuous effect, and the mode of the symbol is switched to the symbol of the mode that appears at the time of a big hit with a probability change. Also, if the reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of a big hit will be high. The background may change.

In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a huge panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern overlaps the image of the passing panda from the front side, or the big hit. Even if it is a notice, the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, instead of FIG. 165 (2-1), in the same figure (2-3-1), a fusuma image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and the same figure (2-3-1). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example in which the treasure box icon I1, which has been used as the change notice notification icon, appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (Su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure chest icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 166 (Su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 of the above is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variable icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variable icon h0 here.

In FIG. 166 (4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon, which is the variable icon h0, opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image displays the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being performed. In FIG. 166 (5), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the variable icon h0. The smoke image corresponds to a change notice, but the smoke image does not have to overlap the change icon h0, which is a change candidate, or the smoke image does not have to appear.

Further, instead of FIG. 166 (Su 1-1), in the same figure (Su 1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure chest icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation of a big hit overlaps with at least a part of a hold icon with a relatively low expectation from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part of the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 166 (Su 1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps with the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 166 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappeared, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke image overlapped was changed.

Further, instead of FIG. 166 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigator character YM, and in the figure (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the fluctuating icon h0 and the navigator character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both change to the same red color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

Further, instead of FIG. 166 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-3-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the variable icon h0 among the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 166 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

The icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image are also the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change in the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change in the display mode or after the change in the display mode).

FIG. 167 shows an example of an effect in which a meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (Se 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (Se 1-1) is in an empty state. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when the tank is full. By changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give a notice of the ease of accumulation of the meter, a look-ahead notice, and / or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 167 (se 2), the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (first stop), and "decoration 4" is swayed and displayed. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the design of this "decoration 4", and in FIG. 167 (se 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 167, the meter rise item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by one level. In addition, the degree of rise of the meter differs depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rise item UpI raises the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 167 (se 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold has been exhausted and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 167, the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In the roulette production here, there are cases where something always happens (when there is no loss) and cases where something does not happen (when there is a loss). Examples of such things include a change in the hold icon and a normal notice (notice of the change). Also, for example, if there is a character-based super reach including Tono Super Reach, Princess Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of Super Reach, as an example of something above, the type of super reach that develops (for example, Notice of character super reach), notice of specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), etc. can also be given.

In FIG. 167 (se 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 167 (se 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and is white. It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167, the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter rise item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by 2 levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (Set 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 167 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 167 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode, and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps with a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 167 (Set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 167 (Set 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 167 (se 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (se 17), the meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigator character YM in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The meter rise icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 167 (se 17) displays a green meter rise item UpIm. This meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes a display other than the meter rise icon MUI, and if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, the display of the meter rise icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display. Further, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, the meter increases only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 167 (se 18), the green meter rise item UpIm in the meter rise icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW and displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167, the green meter rise item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels, and FIG. 167. The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 167 (se 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation (not shown) is started. In the figure (se 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display of "promotion" shown in FIG. 167 (se 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 167 (se 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is foretold. The change animation may be omitted. Further, although the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 has returned to an empty state, it may remain in a full tank state. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed (promoted) without fail, or may not be changed (promoted) (in the case of failure).

Instead of FIG. 167 (Se 1-1), as shown in FIG. 167 (1-2-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 167 (Se 1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 167 (Se 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (Se 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be displayed at the same time as the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 167 (se 1-2-2) and the same figure (se 1-2-3).

In FIG. 167 (Se 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rise item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 167, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter does not rise (corresponding to false). Alternatively, the meter rise item may not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

Further, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a look-ahead notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the meter display may accumulate meters within the fluctuation. It will be a notice that there is.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 167.

Instead of FIG. 167 (se 1-1), in FIG. 168 (se 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in a state where there is no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 167 (Se 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 168 (Se 1-3-1) was full. MW is full at 5th level.

In FIG. 168 (se 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. The golden meter rise item UpIg is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 168 (Se 1-3-3a). The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 168 (Se 1-3-4a) is filled up at once by the golden meter rising item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is still stored, even if it is full with the blue gauge. Alternatively, the golden gauge may be full due to the fact that the golden meter rising item UpIg fills the tank at once.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 168 (se 1-3-3b), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 168 (Se 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. If the item is still stored, the blue gauge may be full, or the rainbow-colored gauge may be full because the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn fills the tank at once. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow-colored items are available as meter-raising items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the golden meter-raising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rise item UpI is raised by 1 level, the blue meter rise item UpIb is raised by 2 levels, the green meter rise item UpIm is raised by 3 levels, and the red meter rise item UpIr is raised by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn also functions as a notice of jackpot confirmation. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter rise item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red). The meaning is different from the case where the meter is full with the combination of meter rise items.

In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is white, blue, green, and red meter rising items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed by the color.

Further, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be always linked. For example, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM also easily changes to the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the display that the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono. In the aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Further, the order of appearance and the color combination of the meter rising items may function as a look-ahead notice or a normal notice. In addition, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. Or conversely, the order of appearance and color combinations of meter-raising items may be completely independent of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in this example, the meter is accumulated until the meter reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In the meter display of FIG. 167, which is full at 6 levels, the meter is stored until the meter is 18 (also the meter is full 3 times). Here, if the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rise item (for example, if the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may try to save what you haven't saved. For example, if the red meter rise item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled once and the meter is further accumulated by two levels.

If the meter overflows when the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled and the amount that has not been accumulated may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the look-ahead target change or the change ends, or the meter may remain displayed regardless of the look-ahead target change or the change. In addition, the portion that has not been accumulated may be rounded down. For example, when the meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in the 0 state, may be in the full tank state, may have a special display, or may be in the meter non-display state. good. Furthermore, it may be configured so as not to overflow. For example, when three items have already been accumulated, only two white meter rise items UpI or one blue meter rise item UpIb are displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 168 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 167 (Set 1-1), in the figure (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and as shown in Fig. (1-4-3), the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and "Up high accuracy is in progress." "Is attached. By this "Up high accuracy middle", it is notified that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may occur or may always occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may differ depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, if the red navigation character YM is used, "Up high accuracy is in progress" is notified, if the gold navigation character YM is used, the intense heat display is displayed, and if the rainbow-colored navigation character YM is used, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (notice of the same type).

Instead of FIG. 167 (se 5-1), in FIG. 168 (se 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is blinking white at one level, and the kimono of the navigator character YM is also blinking white. There is. After that, once the meter was full and returned to an empty state, in FIG. 168 (Se 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to a display mode wearing a green kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to green and has risen to 3 levels. After that, after the meter became full again and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 168 (Se 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , The white meter display MW gauge also changes to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the state of accumulation of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond to each other.

It should be noted that when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which the jackpot is confirmed or the expectation of the jackpot is high and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to produce an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged up to the 2nd level, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when the meter is released when the meter is accumulated up to the 4th level, an effect equivalent to red is performed. Is done.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 167.

Instead of FIG. 167 (se 6-1), in FIG. 169 (se 6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rise icon MUI are placed on the white blinking meter display MW'in which the meter frame mf blinks white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps with a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to see than the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 167 (se 7-1). The meter rising icon MUI may overlap all of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI overlaps at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI from the front side. You may. As the priority to be displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rise icon is displayed by displaying the white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that it may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, and it may not be notified by the meter frame. It may be configured so that it is not notified that the meter rise icon may be displayed. Further, the notice that the meter rise icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by other display or production means.

Instead of FIG. 167 (set 7-1), in FIG. 169 (set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to see because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap. When the meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the one with the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be prioritized. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, in the navigation character YM, the meter rise icon does not overlap from the front side, but may overlap.

Further, instead of FIG. 167 (se 7-1), in FIG. 169 (se 7-3-1), an image up that notifies (notices) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter rise icon will be displayed, and after that, some color of the meter rise icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is notified that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 169 (7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI The effect display Ed1 with an aura is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 169 (se 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is unknown how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 169 (7-3-4), the display that overlaps the roulette display icon RI and looks like an enlarged blue meter rise icon becomes the blue meter rise icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW. It moves to'and is displayed overlapping with the white flashing meter display MW'. In addition, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes faint, and it gradually disappears. It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. After that, the blue meter rising item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

A blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI, and it may be incorporated into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, the blue meter rise item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as the effect display Ed1 is displayed. It may be displayed after it is displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged may be displayed before it is displayed, or it may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed after it is displayed.

Instead of FIG. 167 (se 20-1), in FIG. 169 (se-20-2-1), the white meter display MW in the full tank state is once changed to the character display of "stock", and is in an empty state. Returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. By opening the treasure box icon I1, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variable icon) and other effect displays may be changed.

As described above, the description regarding the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 can be applied to the description using FIGS. 167 to 169. That is, all the descriptions including the description that the rise rate of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, conversely, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105.

FIG. 170 shows an example of an effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (No. 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 170 (No. 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in progress" or a character display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in preparation" is played from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and depending on the telop display, "○○ high accuracy", "XX & ○○ high accuracy", "○○ high accuracy" It may be notified in advance that "preparing", "XX or XX high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy preparation", etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high accuracy in progress", "XX & ○○ high accuracy in progress", "○○ high accuracy in preparation", "XX or ○○ high accuracy in preparation" , "Highly accurate preparation", etc. may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high-accuracy preparation", "XX or XX high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy preparation", etc. are displayed, and a high-probability state may occur for the telop-displayed production from now on. You may notify that in advance. "XX" and "○○" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and / or variable icon) change, pseudo-ream, notice in high expectation color, high expectation for big hit The name of the notice (so-called super hot notice) is shown.

It should be noted that the high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect in which the notice notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is notified by the telop as compared with the case where the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. It shows a state in which it is performed more frequently. That is, "Navi character change high accuracy" in FIGS. 170 (1) to (14), (2-2), 2-3 (2-3), and (8-2). "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the telop display does not notify "Navi character change is highly accurate". In addition, "high probability preparing" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or XX high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. is notified by telop display. The effect being performed is in a high-probability state. The change after the next change of the change in which the display of the telop including "Highly accurate preparation" is started or the change in which the display of the telop including "High probability is being prepared" is started. (Inside) (or there is a possibility of becoming a high-probability state).

In FIG. 170 (No. 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 170 (No. 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is also started in FIG. 170 (No. 6). The telop display trp is ongoing.

In FIG. 170 (No. 7), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 170 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 170 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 170 (No. 11).

The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 may be opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high accuracy" of the telop display trp foretells the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 170 (No. 12), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started again, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 170 (No. 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing.

While the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM may be changed many times. However, if the navigation character YM is changed once while the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigation character YM is changed thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 170 (14), the reach state has been entered, but the telop display trp is still ongoing. The timing at which the telop display trp display disappears is when the super reach starts (for example, in FIG. 154 (U24)) and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, when the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop]. , Symbol stop character, when the next fluctuation starts, etc.

In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured so that only the change effect by the navigator character itself is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 170 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 170 (No. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages, upper and lower. Then, different contents may be displayed between the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In the telop display, the high-accuracy middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as they are for the same look-ahead target hold, they may be displayed at the same timing, and one may be later than the other. Further, when one telop display of "○○ high accuracy medium" is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another look-ahead target hold. In that case, the telop display related to the same notice (for example, "Navi character high accuracy") may be displayed separately, or the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of starting the display, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 170 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 170 (No. 2-3), the same content may be displayed on the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp. That is, the same telop display may be displayed more than once. It may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of them are displayed, the expectation of the jackpot may be the same as when only one is displayed. Moreover, you may repeat displaying the same telop display a plurality of times. That is, each time the display of the telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 170 (No. 8-1), as shown in FIG. 170 (No. 8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), it should not be changed any more. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display "completed" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

FIG. 171 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 171 (Ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "Decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. The shift to reach production has shifted, and all the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM have disappeared.

In FIG. 171 (4a), the pattern of the swordfighter who plays the enemy role is displayed on the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 171 (5a), the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the super reach effect, is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other.

Here, instead of FIG. 171 (1a-1), in the same figure (1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon is displayed. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the display screen.

Further, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

It should be noted that even if the display is not enlarged as shown in FIG. 171 (1a-2), there may be a case where a plurality of display devices are straddled. For example, a pattern that straddles from the beginning of display, a pattern that moves from the original position and is displayed straddling, a pattern that changes the image and is displayed straddling, or an image that is enlarged and displayed straddling. On the contrary, there are patterns in which the image is reduced and displayed across the image. Further, when the enlarged display is performed as shown in FIG. 171 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is high, the hold icon is easy to change, the variable icon is easy to change, or the navigation character YM. May change easily. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the foreground, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in the above.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 171 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 171 (1a-1), in the same figure (1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS has moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed above the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may change easily, the expectation of a big hit may increase, or a change in other effects (for example, hold) may occur. Changes in icons and variable icons, etc.) may be facilitated. In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, the change of the hold icon and the variable icon) are easy. They may be different or they may be the same with no effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM may change may be higher when the navigation character YM is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when the navigation character YM is moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, but the same applies when the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 171 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame UI is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 171 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 171 (1a-1), in the same figure (1a-4), the navigator character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation of the jackpot may be high, or other changes in the production (for example, the hold icon or the like). (Change of variable icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the place where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 171 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased), and may be divided (increased) without fail.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

In FIG. 172 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 172 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 172 (2b), the background display of the sea has disappeared.

In FIG. 172 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon of the signboard "Searching" is displayed instead. In addition, the same character (Den-sama) YM'as the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, and is running. In addition, a character display indicating that the search is in progress is displayed above it. Similarly, on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with an image of a question mark.

The icon of the sign "Searching" may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM will be successful. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the signboard is blue than when it is white, and the probability of success is higher when the color of the signboard is red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Further, the color, display characters, and the like of this signboard may change, but may not change. In addition, it may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigator character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 172 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state), are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Will move. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fanning production.

In FIG. 172 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to a fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contact.

FIG. 172 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM'takes a pose with his thumb raised, and above that. The character display indicating the level up is displayed in. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the Senryobako is displayed. It should be noted that the display mode of the Senryobako may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the Senryobako is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Further, the color, open / closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 172 (7b), the character (lord) YM'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 172 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N, respectively. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 172 (9b) are in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M Also, the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (10b), a smoke image is displayed at a position where the signboard icon has been displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (11b), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. In this example, the wipe-in animation (the animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (the animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but they may be the same animation. In FIG. 172 (12b), the wipeout is completed and the sea background is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And, there is a production that promotes the navigation character.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 172 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four hold icons of the special figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 173 (1a-3-2), a movement animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 173 (Ta 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located exactly between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also here, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes with the navigation character YM displayed straddling the display. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-3) displays a navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

On the other hand, in FIG. 173 (1a-3-2'), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-2') displays only the toes of the right hand and the right foot of the navigation character YM, but the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-3') displays a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. When the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed in this way, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and others may be higher than when the navigation character YM is not enlarged. Changes in the effect of the above (for example, changes in the hold icon and the variable icon) may be facilitated, or they may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not be enlarged.

The movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 173 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 172 (8b), FIG. 173 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 172 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped on the way, also return to the initial state, but the notification of the failure of the change effect (promotion effect) is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (5b-2), the character (lord) YM'is in a depressed pose facing backward. Note that the failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the failure notification may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may always fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the production that is divided into success and failure as explained above.

In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM may change for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or from the promotion failure until the end of N times of fluctuations). Changes may be restricted until the end of the look-ahead hold fluctuations associated with the promotion failure, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 172 (6b-1), in FIG. 173 (6b-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol are shown up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) fails even though the display device 208N has moved is shown. Similarly to the previous case, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (6b-2) also displays the character (lord) YM'in a pose that faces backward and is depressed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, conversely, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 173 (6b-2), and conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The second display device 208S may be a fixed device or a device capable of ascending / descending operation.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (1c), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

A fusuma image for wiping effect is displayed on the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (2c), and the state shown in FIG. 174 (3c) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). Is. The wipe-out is started in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (4), and the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state) in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (5c). The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (5c) at which the wipe effect is completed does not display the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, or the navigation character YM. The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, due to the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are hidden, and the golf mini bet (promote) the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even if it is the same mini-game, there may be a mini-game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 174 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and the mini-game of FIG. 174 (5c) is shown. I don't know until the stage. For this reason, it may be possible to pay attention to at least the second display device 208S until the explanation about the mini-game (here, "promotion of Yoshimune if it enters the cup") is given.

The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (6c-1) succeeds in cup-in brilliantly. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, the fusuma image starts to close again in FIG. 174 (7c), and the state shown in the figure (8c) is the state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). be. The wipe-out is started in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (9c), and the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state) in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (10c). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipe-out is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 174 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigator character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 174 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, in the figure (6c-2) instead of FIG. 174 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. In this way, if the mini-game betting on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

In addition, when wiping out from FIG. 174 (8c), the wipe effect may be able to suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM may be promoted, or the display mode in which the navigation character YM changes may be displayed. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 174 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. In addition, at the time of success (Fig. 174 (6c-1) in this example) and at the time of failure (Fig. 174 (6c-2) in this example) and fanning effect (Fig. 174 (5c) in this example). A different production operation may be performed in. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, the effect operation by the effect movable body may be performed.

The mini-game described with reference to FIG. 174 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, 07 "Copanda" is set in "Character selection" shown in FIG. 139 (b), 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold frame selection", and 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold display selection". The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a1), and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 175 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. The Copanda navigation character YM is also displayed.

In FIG. 175 (aa3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (aa4-1), the carpet icon I2 appears. Disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 175 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used, or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 175 (a6), the smoke image disappears, and the navigator character YM changes from copanda to bancho. As shown in FIG. 139 (b), the Bancho character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player. The character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, an old man or a princess), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 175 (a7), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 175 (a8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigator character YM of the number length shown in FIG. 175 (a8).

In FIG. 175 (a9), the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of the lord) is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in the same figure (a10), the character of the lord and the character "continue" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a12), the display of “x2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is added again to the navigator character YM of the Bancho shown in FIG. 175 (a13), and the continuation of the pseudo-ream can still be expected. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, 1 time or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the swordsman reach effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 contains the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the chief navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

A balloon icon of "chance" that incites a big hit is added to the navigator character YM of the bancho shown in FIG. 175 (a16), and the navigator character YM of the bancho is executing the incitement effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a18) displays a scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other in the super reach effect. The "decoration 6", which is different from the design ("decoration 7"), is displayed in a large size (shaking display). Although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. In addition, the navigator character YM of the Bancho is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a19) is in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (a20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the background of the background E (the background of the sky) is returned, and the navigation character YM of Copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 175 (a22), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is resumed. Further, a blue hold icon (look-ahead hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

As shown in FIGS. 155 (E2) to 4-1 (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its own display mode by itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is executed but lost, but when the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state that is advantageous to the player than the case where the treasure box icon I1 is not used and the change (for example, the change is made by oneself). The advantageous state referred to here includes a transition to a jackpot gaming state, a transition to a jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probability change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold is increased while the hold icon is hidden, when the hold icon is displayed from hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden is displayed. Pre-reading notice may be given. If the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, it may be until the hold is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or it may be deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate look-ahead notice and / or notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden, or subject to changes with increased hold. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon may be regulated so that the look-ahead notice and / or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, while the look-ahead notice by one hold icon is being executed, the look-ahead notice by another hold icon may be given, but while the look-ahead notice by one hold icon is being executed, the look-ahead notice by another hold icon is given. , It is regulated until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area or deleted from the variable icon display area). May be good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may not let it break. In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigator character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigator character selected by the player. You may not let it break. Further, in this example, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more easily performed than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character is changed. It may be configured so that the expected degree of big hit in the symbol fluctuation and / or hold is high (or the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich)), and the notice and / or the appearance of the navigator character. It may be configured so that the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 175.

Instead of FIG. 175 (a3-1), in FIG. 176 (a3-2), a change notice is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the treasure box icon I1. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by an effect means different from the effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a3-1), in FIG. 176 (a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice display is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the family crest accessory 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. There is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps with the hold icon. After that, the family crest accessory 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest accessory 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest accessory 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position. In addition, the easiness of change to the navigator character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emitting effect by the LED provided on the family crest accessory 224E.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a3-1), in FIG. 176 (a3-4), the change notice is displayed by the sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a4-1), as shown in FIG. 176 (a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, while the treasure box is displayed. In some cases, the icon I1 rides on the carpet icon I2 and flies away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (aa6-1), in FIG. 176 (aa6-2), although the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 was opened, the display mode of the navigator character YM did not change. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (aa6-1), in FIG. 176 (aa6-3), the copanda's navigation character YM is the same copanda, but the clothes are different in color (here, red clothes). It has changed to Copanda) and succeeded in the change production (promotion production) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a3-1), in FIG. 176 (ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 174, the second display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Is arranged, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. Further, in the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the Copanda navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (Ab1), a conversation notice is given by a notice of the character display of the grandfather character and the character "Navi character changes", and the change notice is displayed by this conversation notice. It has been. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is announced by an effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the effect means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 176 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from a copanda to a bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 176 (ac1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 141 (9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 (3) are set as "user set values". It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or are used for the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described as an "actual set value" at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 176 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which the “super heat” notice may be given, notifies that the “super heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual set value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user set value. After that, in FIG. 176 (ac3), the "super heat" notice is executed, the word "super heat" is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sound is output from the speaker 120, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual set value) at the time of executing the "super heat" notice exceeds the user set value and is level 5, and the brightness (actual set value) also exceeds the user set value and is level 5. That is, it is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, when the effect is executed, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or forcibly fall below the user-set value (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, the timing at which the volume and brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example, and for example, the brightness may be changed at the timing when the sound during intense heat approaching is output, or the sound during intense heat approaching. The volume and brightness may change while is output. Further, at the time of executing a specific effect, only the volume of the volume and the brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and emit light, in this example. In some cases, both exceed.

It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and the brightness may be possible even in a game table that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. 141. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness will do. Further, the technical idea here can be applied even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (hereinafter, the same applies).

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 176 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 177 is a table summarizing the music that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 177 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot. For example, if you don't hit the jackpot 15 times in a row, you can't select the song "Oban Behavior". Further, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

In addition, the songs with serial numbers 12 are songs that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start production), and when the back button navigation mode is set, the jackpot is set. The guidance for operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

In addition, the songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" here is a super reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in the swordsman reach). "Big hit" means that the premier character "Kaede" appeared in the cut-in image during Super Reach and made a big hit.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 177 is performed.

In FIG. 178 (a 1), it is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a 1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and in FIG. 178, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are default display modes. In addition, it is the third big hit. Further, the song title display section MN on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a1) shows the song title of the currently output song (here, the default "may be there"). Is displayed, and the music of the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music name display unit MN, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background screen of the universe, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for a probabilistic state.

In FIG. 178 (a 2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the figure (a 3), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to "mega giga summer". Since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay from the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. It should be noted that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 178 (a4), the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is also output from the speaker 120. When a song is changed, the song is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time of the song is determined by turning on the power or producing an RTC (Real Time Clock), or when the song is output from the continuation of the previous output. If so, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 178 (a 5), the number of holds in special figure 2 increases, and special 2 becomes full (the number of holds displayed in the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the 4th hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in the figure (a 6), the 4th hold icon 24 of the look-ahead notice display mode (blinking white) is displayed. Has been done. After that, three reservations of the special figure 2 are exhausted, in FIG. 178 (a 8), the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. The number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is 1, and the first hold icon h21 is changed to a red display mode.

In FIG. 178 (a 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 178 (a 10), the selected music is still "mega giga summer", and in the same figure (a 11), the chief character C11 appears and the music change notice is given. The music change notice is a big hit notice including an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or a pre-reading notice. .. In this example, since the music change notice is displayed, the big hit confirmation (or big hit rich) is announced for the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed is missed. May be the case. For example, if "Todoroki DREAM", which is the theme song of the character's bancho, is output, it is successful (the expectation of a big hit is high, or the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich)), but "Todoroki DREAM" If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation in which the music change notice is displayed may be missed. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot is rich) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, or the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a notice other than the music change notice is given. A look-ahead notice may be given to give a notice that the degree is high. Further, even if the music change notice fails, another effect (for example, a resurrection effect) may be configured to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced. Therefore, as a compensation, if the music change notice is started, a big hit It may be confirmed.

A song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (a 12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output by the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. The Bancho character C11, who appeared in the music change notice, raised one hand, and that hand overlapped with a part of the music title display unit MN.

In FIG. 178 (a 13), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “Disstance”, but no music is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in FIG. 178 (a 12) to the figure (a 15-1) during all or a part of the period. Alternatively, the output of the "Disstance" changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 177, "Disstance" is not a song released after "Mega Giga Summer", but a song different from "Todoroki DREAM". However, "Disstance" is the song immediately before "Todoroki DREAM" in the order of opening. In the music change notice here, the music of "Distance" is sandwiched between them, and finally "Todoroki DREAM" is output. At the stage of FIG. 178 (a 13), "Todoroki DREAM" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN.

In FIG. 178 (a 14), the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again, and the bancho character C11 raises one hand. Although the music of "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music name of the music name display unit MN was changed to "Distance", the music of "Distance" may be output.

In FIG. 178 (a 15), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to "Todoroki DREAM", and the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again. At the stage when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music change notice may be successful, and in FIG. 178 (a 16), the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the song "Todoroki DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed, there may be a case where the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Todoroki DREAM" is always output, but in FIG. 178 (a15), the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed on the music title display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "mega giga summer". Alternatively, if "Distance" is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 178 (a 15), it is also a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "Distance". , The original "Mega Giga Summer" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the "Mega Giga Summer" song may be started.

Depending on whether "Distance" is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 178 (a 13) or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. It may represent the expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and / or symbol fluctuations in hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Disstance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed for the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold depending on the number of times the music is changed due to the music change notice. For example, it may be configured so that it is easier to make a big hit about the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold when the music is changed twice than when the music is changed once due to the music change notice. .. Further, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit confirmed (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, the animation of "Todoroki DREAM" is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a 16). Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a 19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is swayed and displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Roaring DREAM", and then the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120, and the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output to the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and it becomes a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roaring DREAM", the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and / or, "Roaring DREAM" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be configured so that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost if the production display corresponding to the music is not performed next.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 178.

The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (a 21), and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the big hit start interval (the big hit start effect is being executed). Is.

The timing of FIG. 179 (a 22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are the music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round production is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed (“1R”) indicating that it is the first round and the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is displayed (0pt).

The music release list GR is displayed on the music select screen. Since we achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Universe" has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The "Kiseki Universe" display is marked with "New". In this example, since the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, it is already released "may be there" and "mega giga summer". Is hidden. Here, the newly opened "Kiseki Universe" is selected, and the rust portion of the "Kiseki Universe" is output from the speaker 120. The previous "Todoroki DREAM" is not displayed in this music release list GR, and "Todoroki DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, "Todoroki DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroki DREAM" in the song release list GR may be the position directly under the song ("Kimi no Kakera") released up to the previous time, or the position of "Kiseki no" released this time. It may be located directly below the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 179, since the opening order is the sixth song, it may be the position of the sixth song counting from the first song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, the music released according to the number of consecutive villas this time ("Kiseki no Uchu") and the music of "Todoroki DREAM", "Todoroki DREAM" Only may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 179 (a24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is set to the display in which the three question marks under the display of "Kiseki's universe" are lined up in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks lined up is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, it is unclear what songs are scheduled to be released in the music release list GR in the future. At the timing of FIG. 179 (a24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is placed on the display with three question marks lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 179 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and is "there" at the beginning. Maybe "return to. In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. Also, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the title of a song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the music release list GR may not display the display itself in which three question marks are lined up, but may display only the released music name.

Even in FIG. 179 (a 27), the automatic scrolling does not end, and the rust portion of the “Kiseki universe” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (the chorus part in this example) is output in a loop, but it is not necessary to loop. For example, when the output for a certain period is completed, the next song is output. The music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or the entire music may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the chorus part).

Also in FIG. 179 (a 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the universe of miracle", " The output of the chorus part of "May be there" has started. It should be noted that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is set to "may be there". FIG. 179 (a 30) shows how the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in the same figure (a 31), the cursor csd may be at the beginning "may be there". It has returned to "I don't know" and the automatic scrolling has ended. Originally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is set to the display of the target music (it may be at the same time as the cursor is set or before it is set). The output of the music is started, but since "may be there" is output in the middle of automatic scrolling, the music that was output at the time of FIG. 179 (a 31) in FIG. 179 (a 31). The continuation of is output as it is. After the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (it may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), a new "may be there" is added. The song may be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song select).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 179 (a 33). In this state, as shown in FIG. 179 (a 34), the chance button 136 is operated to determine "mega giga summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 179 (a 35), the determined "mega giga summer" display is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

When the music is decided in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round production screen. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a 36) displays the second round effect screen, and the title of the selected song “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. Further, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round production. If not only the chorus part but all the music is output from the beginning of the music when the music is selected, it may be output from the continuation of the music at the start of the round production.

Further, instead of FIG. 178 (a 15-1), in FIG. 179 (a 15-2-1), the song name of "CREA" is displayed on the song name display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The music with this song title is a music not included in the table shown in FIG. 177. That is, it is a song that the player cannot select. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (a 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "CREA" is displayed. The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when the music that the player cannot select is output, the expectation of the big hit may be high, or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of loss. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" has been output once, it may be added as one of the music that can be selected in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Addition may be prohibited. In addition, it may be possible to select a song during a jackpot game and not select it when selecting a song during a symbol change, or conversely, it may not be selectable when selecting a song during a jackpot game and select it when selecting a song during a symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of the effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

Further, in FIG. 180, similarly to FIG. 176 (ac1), the “user setting value” of “volume” and “luminance” is written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is shown in the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of "brightness" is described. In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the actually executed effects are also described.

In FIG. 180 (wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may be instructed to ignore the user set values and execute at the values specified in the effect data, or the user settings may be performed. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may be self-managed by the table in which the effects of ignoring the values are summarized, or may be managed based on the command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 180 (wa3), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is also temporarily stopped. The right symbol moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 180 (wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 follow the super reach development lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value.

In FIG. 180 (wa4), the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to reach the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 180 (wa4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during the movement of the accessory during super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp during movement of the accessory during super reach development. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. As described above, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL perform the directing operation, but the volume and the brightness remain the user-set values.

The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

On the background screen of the wilderness, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa6) displays a scene after the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy battle, and the lord and the swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 180 (wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set values, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 180 (wa8), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started, in FIG. (Wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and then as shown in FIG. , The chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation valid period. During this period (FIGS. 180 (wa7-1) to 180 (wa11-1)), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result fanning sound effect is output. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user-set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same 3 levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 180 (wa10), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa11-1) displays an effect image from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 180 (a11-1) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value, and is for jackpot confirmation. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of brightness exceeding the user-set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 180 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the revival effect.

In FIG. 180 (a12), the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate again, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. Then, in FIG. 180 (wa13), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In the figure (a14), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this period (FIGS. 180 (a12) to 180 (a14)), as in FIG. 180 (a11-1), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with a brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern.

Even when the accessory does not perform the effect operation due to a failure or the like, the volume / brightness may be changed from the user-set value, or in this case, the user-set value may be left unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 as shown in FIG. 180 (wa7-1) is displayed. That is, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the result of the button effect (by extension, a notice of the big hit), and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmed effects.

Further, here, although the volume and brightness were forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button production, the operation of the accessory such as the Senryobako accessory 224H was started and the movement to the effect position of the accessory was completed. The volume and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, and the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times with one symbol change, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed only once with one symbol change. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed in the same manner, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies thereafter).

Eventually, in FIG. 180 (a15), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL ends, and the sub-control unit 400,500 receives a command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position, and the Senryobako accessory 224H moves upward. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the jackpot confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is reduced to the user-set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern, also reaches the user-set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user set value when the sub-control unit 400,500 side receives the command to return the Senryobako accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out, becomes thinner, and gradually disappears. The display of the scene after the swordsmen slash each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have begun to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIGS. 180 (wa16) to 180 (wa17)), as in FIG. 180 (wa15), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user, and the jackpot is output. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, also emit light with the brightness set by the user.

Note that the volume and / or brightness changes from the user-set value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIGS. 180 (a11-1) to 180 (wa17), and another sound data. And / or the volume and / or the brightness may be configured to return to the user-set value when switching to the light emission data. On the contrary, the volume and / or the brightness may change from the user set value over a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched once or a plurality of times.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 180.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 181 (wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. The timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original values is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 180 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (Senryobako accessory 224H) starts returning from the production position to the initial position), and this timing (background). It may be the timing of switching the display), the timing of confirming the victory of the duel scene (the timing of FIG. 181 (wa19-1)), or the timing of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot. May be.

In FIG. 181 (wa19-1), a scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM also poses for victory. In FIG. 181 (wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the main character's “Yatte” voice is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the super reach win use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the final display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 180 (wa11-1), in FIG. 181 (wa11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 180 (wa10), the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is greatly displayed (shaking display) as the middle symbol. This is a display suggesting a button effect failure. At this time, the BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board is output according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat. And the game table frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. In this way, when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or the brightness does not have to be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or the brightness is changed from the user set value. May be good.

Further, instead of FIG. 180 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (wa11-2') is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (wa11-2). This is the same as the display screen of, but in this example, the volume is at a level lower than the user-set value, and the brightness is also at a level lower than the user-set value. In this way, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

Instead of FIG. 180 (wa7-1), in FIG. 181 (wa7-2-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (wa7-2-2), the button effect is not started. An enlarged display of the character of the main character, the lord, is displayed to inform you that you have won. In this way, even when the effect using the operating means such as the chance button 136 or the accessory (movable means) such as the Senryobako accessory 224H is not involved, when a specific effect display is displayed, the effect is displayed. The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (wa7-2-3), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is returned, and the volume and brightness are also returned to the same level as the user set values. ing.

It should be noted that the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the production by other production means, not limited to the accessory and the display. Examples of other production means referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a versa writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like, and are specific. The volume or / and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 181 (wa19-1), in the example following the figure (wa19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the figure (wa19-2-1). The display of the scene where the main character's lord won is faded out as shown in the figure (wa19-2-3), and then the first decorative pattern is displayed as shown in the figure (wa19-2-4). The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swaying manner. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 180 (wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 181 (wa19-2-3), and then the value is returned to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until three of the same decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judge effect is completed.

Although the volume and / and the brightness are forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, it may be decreased. Further, when the user set value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume and / and the brightness do not have to change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, the value may be changed to a value larger than the maximum value set by the user or a value smaller than the minimum value set by the user. good.

Further, the brightness may be increased and the volume may be decreased, and conversely, the volume may be increased and the brightness may be decreased. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Further, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain as it is, or the value that is forcibly changed is displayed. You may. Further, the volume or brightness may be adjusted by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjusted when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the variable icon changes. In addition, there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume and / and the brightness are not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot changes to a display mode that is not so high, the volume and / and the brightness do not have to be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit goes up in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color, the volume or / and brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is more than red. May be good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed without fail.

FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. As the hot effect, red, gold, and rainbow colors are used, and in this case, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, the amount of change may be different depending on whether it is red (for example, 1 level up), gold (for example, 2 levels up), or rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), and is the same. There may be.

FIG. 180 (ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the lost decorative symbol is temporarily stopped once. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Ud-2), a revival effect accompanied by a wipe effect is subsequently executed. In this case, the volume and / and the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time as the start of the revival effect.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 139 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "hold frame selection", the "hold frame D" of 04 to which the fusuma image for the wipe effect is added is set. It is set, and 03 "icon C" is set in "hold display selection", and 05 "background E" is set in background display selection.

In the explanation here, the colors used in the production represent the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon can be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction of increasing the expectation of a big hit may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. This also applies to the above description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (d1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (d1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

After that, the number of holds in Special FIG. 1 is increased by two, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 182 (d3). Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 182 (d4), one hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (d4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (d5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 have been started. Images appear from the left and right. During the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect, the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed. In FIG. 182 (d6), the sliding door image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 182 (d7), the first decorative symbol also starts to fluctuate, and in the same figure (d8), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed. Also in FIG. 182 (d8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 182 (d9-1), the wipe-out is started and the fusuma image for the wipe effect is starting to open, and in the figure (d10), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the wipe effect here, the hold frame has changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (d10) is a "hold frame R" different from the "hold frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and the hold frame UI is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable. The red frame makes the legs of the navigation character YM invisible. The "hold frame R" is a hold frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state where it is easy to change, and next to the copanda of the navigation character YM, "hold change !? Time" is called. The character display is displayed. The hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold has been exhausted in FIG. 182 (d4). Here, the "pending change !? Time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of production".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (d12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the hold frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile at the hold icon, which hits the hold first hold icon h11, which is subject to pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile has changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (d13) has changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect has been successful. In addition, even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not launched, the missile does not hit any of the hold icons or the variable icon, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 182 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 182 (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by two stages, and when the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 182 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 182 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (d19), the medium symbol, which has been a red pending change symbol, is changed to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 182 (d20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 182 (D22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11, has moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even if the hold for the look-ahead notice is exhausted, the character display "Hold change !? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 182 (D23), a golden ray is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 182 (D24), the variable icon that was previously red is changed to gold.

In FIG. 182 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 182 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the background of the sky is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI has disappeared except for the pedestal hs0, and the hold icon has also disappeared. However, the variable icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 182 (d 28) is the pedestal of the "holding frame D" before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after the change due to the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variable icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 182 (d26)). In addition, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is completed, hidden items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is completed, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol change. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the hold frame UI remained red even in the reach state, but if the color of the frame of the hold frame UI also changes, the expectation of the jackpot will increase. May be good.

It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, "hold frame R") is larger than the case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame selected by the player (for example, "hold frame D"). When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") which is not selected by the player, rather than when the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D"). However, even if the display mode is the same look-ahead hold icon, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in the final symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 182.

Instead of FIG. 182 (d 9-1), in FIG. 183 (d 9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon are once changed to a special mode (character). In addition, the navigation character YM has also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color changes to reflect the expectation of the jackpot. Here, the ease of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 183 (D-9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character who wins the mini-game changes to a color icon (hold icon or variable icon) with high expectation of a big hit. The grandfather character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord character has a 100% chance of winning. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon with a color that confirms the jackpot (here, rainbow color).

In FIG. 183 (D 9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game was played as a mini-game, and everyone played rock-paper-scissors all at once. As a result, both of the grandfather's characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 183 (D-9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the fusuma image in FIG. (D 9-2-6)) In the hold frame UI shown in the figure (D 9-2-7), the second hold icon h12 is changed to a blue hold icon. The hold frame UI remains as "hold frame D".

FIGS. 183 (e1) to 183 (e-12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

The hold frame UI of the hold frame D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (e1), and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (e1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 183 (e2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 183 (e3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (e4), one hold is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (e4). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In FIG. 183 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold subject to the look-ahead notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 183 (e7), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 continues to be displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 183 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold for the look-ahead notice, is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 183 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 183 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigator character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 183 (E12), the smoke image disappears, and the Copanda navigation character YM selected by the player in the above-mentioned customization setting is changed to the Bancho navigation character YM. The Bancho navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable.

In this example, in addition to the navigation character YM, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is also displayed across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigator character YM that is always displayed changes due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-ream, or before the change. The change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to fluctuations, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo-ream, and at the third pseudo-ream, the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed. It may change.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an example of production in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and it is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 that the pachinko machine 100 is set to the auto button mode.

In FIG. 184 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols on the background of the sea. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the hold frame UI. Further, a chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 184 (A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the valid period of the chance button operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the valid period of the chance button operation. It may be.

In FIG. 184 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that urges the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is composed of a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. At the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the grandfather is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation image CI1 of the grandfather is more than the case where they are not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to see. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A6), the player may be able to see the effect corresponding to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A6) is white and has started blinking.

At the timing of FIG. 184 (A7), the hold of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not yet begun to appear at this time. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has passed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 184 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and the red button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) turns blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button hold icon.

In FIG. 184 (A10), a certain period of time elapses from the start of the operation valid period of the button effect in the conversation notice. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 184 (A11), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is updated, and the response display for the auto button is "Summer vacation still?" The character display is displayed. As for the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 184 (A12) to (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode for the button hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A15), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A15) has finished vibrating and has returned from the blue lighting to the normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 184 (A14), the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting. This is because the operation validity period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation validity period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined validity period has elapsed, may be terminated when the decorative symbol is first stopped, or the decorative symbol may be terminated. It may end when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 184 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display, and the button hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 184 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. , The button hold icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19). In the figure (A20), the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 185 (A23), the first decorative symbol is performing high-speed fluctuation.

In this example, the auto button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated until the symbol change display changed to the button hold icon was confirmed regardless of whether the auto button mode was set or not. In that case, the display mode changes automatically after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the hold icon is in the display mode of the button hold icon, the hold icon changes to the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold reduction animation is started (variable icon h0). (When the variable icon h0 is reached), the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Further, the auto button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the auto button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed, or the chance button may be configured even while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed. The auto button mode may be terminated by operating 136.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode may not be changed, or the default. It may change to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not have ended. Further, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same regardless of whether it is in the auto button mode or the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, as shown in FIG. 184 (A11), the character display "Summer vacation is not yet?" The conversation image is not updated to CI2. However, it may be updated.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes even if the button is not operated. There is.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. After the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 185 (Aa5-4), one button effect image is displayed on the second display device 208S, but one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are auto. The button function may not work.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-1), a notification for prompting the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous striking effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The auto button function does not work for the button repeated pressing effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous striking of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous striking meter RHM shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and the response is displayed. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) is shown. The vibration continues and the blue lighting continues. In the examples so far, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since it is necessary to repeatedly hit the chance button 136, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the case of repeated hits, so that the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. It should be noted that the auto button function may be configured to operate when the operation is performed once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period of time, the same response display as when performing the continuous hit operation is displayed. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hit function may not work either.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 184.

In the example following FIG. 186 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), after the operation valid period of the button hold icon has started, for the button effect in the conversation notice. This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the look-ahead notice, and the update of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the look-ahead notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. Further, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 184 (A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

It should be noted that only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may not be updated. Alternatively, conversely, only the response effect of the person whose auto button function works may be displayed.

Further, one operation of the chance button 136 may display only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work, and the second operation may display the response effect of the person whose auto button function works. However, on the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who works the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not work the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

Further, the above description using FIGS. 186 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-4) was given while the auto button mode was set, but the auto button mode was not set. The same applies to.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (blue in this case) even when the auto button mode is not set. Is shown. Note that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3'), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (here, blinking white). Here is an example of how to do it.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 186 (Ab1), a notification is given to prompt the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 during the big hit game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (Ab2) displays a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) together with the display of the third round, but the auto button function is displayed during the jackpot game. May not work, or conversely, the auto button function may work.

FIGS. 186 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 186 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of an effect relating to the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 186 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 186 (Ba2), when the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 186 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 186 (Ba1-5)).

FIG. 186 (Ba1-2) is the same state as shown in FIG. 186 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 186 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It turns blue and is a point that notifies the back button.

The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation valid period described so far will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a decrease display is performed), and the remaining time display area MT1 and the display mode located behind the remaining time display area according to the passage of time. It is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 in which is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). For example, when it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode and the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed with the passage of time, it is displayed in a special display mode with the passage of time. Since the area to be displayed is reduced, it may be possible to draw attention to the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, the time elapses. As the area displayed in the special display mode increases, the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136, etc. in this example). It may be possible to increase the variation of how to enjoy and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is such that the remaining time meter is displayed first when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible only after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In addition, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, it may be configured so that various notices are not given by the navigation character. Further, while the navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character A") is being displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character B") may be displayed. In that case, the navigation character B displayed later may be configured to overlap with the navigation character A displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may overlap first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions where they do not overlap with each other. For example, there may be a case where the constantly displayed navigation character YM is overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice during one or more fluctuations. Further, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display suggesting that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a little transparent, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes a little visible. Hereinafter, the fact that they are displayed so as to overlap from the front side or that they are displayed on the front side layer may be simply expressed as "overlapping". The display of the ball removal notification may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible. Further, the speaker 120 also outputs a sound such as "Please pull out the ball".

The display of the ball removal notification is different from the second decorative symbol on the upper left and the second hold number display on the upper right, and does not overlap with these displays. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / and the second hold number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and does not overlap with this frame RW. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the frame RW, or may overlap with each other. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the hold frame UI, and does not overlap with this hold UI. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI, or may overlap with each other.

In FIG. 187 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is placed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden. 1 The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation has not yet been performed, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies when the dish full tank error is once resolved by performing the ball removal operation, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 187 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, the bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. , The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for brightness adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume or the bar display for adjusting the brightness may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only for a certain period of time. Further, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, or may overlap.

Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is shifted between the hold icon and the variable icon, and does not overlap with these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / and the variable icon, or may overlap with each other. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap with the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α4), a super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here, too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the left symbol of "decoration 7" moved to the upper left and the right symbol of "decoration 7" moved to the upper right. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. The volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α4) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5) displays the start screen of the big hit game, but the display of the ball removal notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display (display different from the right-handed warning. Corresponding to the mini right-handed display in FIG. 137 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap with the right-handed suggestion display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the start screen of the jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big hit (first consecutive villa), but the latent probability change state. The first big hit (1st consecutive villa) from (special high accuracy Fuzu low accuracy) and the 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from the sudden change state (special high accuracy Fuzu high accuracy) In addition, the latent probability change state and / or the sudden probability change state described above indicates only the state shifted from the normal state, and excludes the state generated in the probability change state and the time saving state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. On the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, the right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 136 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display when the right-handed warning in FIG. 192 is described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although it is not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 192, which will be described later) is not displayed while the right-handed hitting instruction screen is displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handed suggestion display is performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, the right-handed suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed.

In FIG. 187 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of the round effect. The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the round number display on the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with this round number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the ball ejection number display (0pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the ball ejection number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of balls released, or may overlap.

In Fig. 187 (α8) in the 4th round, a promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not there will be a big chance that the 2nd variable winning opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V in the 5th round. As a result, a success production indicating that the promotion production was successful is being executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily satisfied. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of this success effect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α8), the display of the star mark “V chance GET” has also started to be displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is different from the display of "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may overlap.

In FIG. 187 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and encourages the player to pass V in this round. The message "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to ensure that the player passes through the V. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed. The display of "V" is displayed large. That is, the display of "V", which is a notification that the acquisition of the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that the V has passed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "V". At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), the display of the star “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round is completed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 187 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure) while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game. High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating the transition to the probabilistic state is performed (probability change effect). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". Even in the end effect of the big hit game, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α12) displays a prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned warning display in FIG. 137 (57)). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with this prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of jackpot consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right-handed suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. In addition, the song title display unit MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the icons of the up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side of the song title display unit MN. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the song title display unit MN because the display position is deviated from that of the song title display unit MN. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the up / down key icons, and does not overlap with the up / down key icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 187 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 187 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the music selection screen shown in FIG. 179 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α15). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 187 (α16), the music selection is completed and the round production is started. The title of the currently selected song is displayed in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α16). The display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the song title display, and does not overlap with this song title display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the song title display, or may overlap.

Further, in FIG. 187 (α17) of the fourth round, the display “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 187 (α18) of the fifth round, “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 187 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the four rounds. Further, FIG. 187 (α18) shows the start of 5 rounds, and may correspond to the time when the special electric service operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from off to on. In this case, the period between FIGS. 187 (α17) and 187 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of the 4th round to the start of the 5th round, and the special electric function operating signal of the main control unit 300 is output. It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 187 (α19), the display of “V” based on the passage of V is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume does not overlap with the display of "V".

Note that FIG. 187 (α20) may be a state in which a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V during the execution of 5R, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). It may be in the state of (the period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses to the 15th round (FIG. 187 (α21) to FIG. (23)), and in FIG. ) Is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". In FIG. 187 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Since a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, and various controls are performed, there is a time lag between the timing of the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

Further, in FIG. 187, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the interval between rounds. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

The same applies to the end of the 15th round, and the rounds may be displayed or hidden during the inter-round interval period.

In this example, a right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but on the other hand, a left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but a left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not notified.

Although the display of the ball removal notification has been described above as an example, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 190 and 191). It can be applied to the display of notifications about.

FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (β) is such that the display behind the display of the ball removal notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. The display of the ball removal notification may overlap all of the brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap all of the volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 187, and the display on the rear side is slightly visible. However, the display on the rear side may be completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (β).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ2) overlaps with the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) may be a display in which the display on the rear side is completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,same.). Not limited to the volume adjustment bar, the functions that can be set by the player during the symbol change and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo, etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 141 (V) and (V'), etc., List of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation status of the symbol while the song title display unit MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 178 (a1) and the like are being set. And game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed. As shown in the figure (γ3-2), the bar display VB is displayed. In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, the display of the ball removal notification has priority and is displayed on the front side. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed on the front side with priority. Further, in any case, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM, respectively, and may also overlap with the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 188 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 188 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume.

In FIG. 188 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the ball removal. It overlaps with the display of. Here, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or a part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to other error indications described below.

In FIG. 188 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification is not a frame display but only characters.

FIG. 188 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 108). A part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is overlapped by the peripheral image display 132G.

In FIG. 188 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 187 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 188 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 187 (α17).

In FIG. 188 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 188 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 188 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap with all of the bar display VB for adjusting the volume. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the character display of "Aim for V" and the display of the star "V chance GET".

In FIG. 188 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 189 will be described later. The ball removal notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 189 (ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 189 (ι1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

In FIG. 189 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigator character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 188 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 188 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 189 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error that occurs becomes error A. The latest error E warning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all the displayed errors occur.

In FIG. 189 (ι3-2), since the error E is resolved, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last error that occurred is cleared, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 189 (ι3-2'), the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlaps with the transparency display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. Note that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed at the top, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Will be done. The high-priority error is a high-priority error (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, it may be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 190. In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 189 (ι4-2), since the error B is resolved, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 189 (ι5-1), error A occurs, the transparency display of error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display related to the error Z. ing. The error of stopping the game referred to here is an error in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error). That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or even if it can be performed, it is prevented from performing. An error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as error Z is not limited to an error of stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later or an error of stopping the payout operation. May be good. Further, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 192, which will be described later, may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 192. May not be displayed in the display mode of error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, and as a result, the sub control units 400 and 500 also do not perform various lottery.

In FIG. 189 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display in FIG. 189 (κ1) is such that the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display so that the display of the ball removal notification overlaps from the front side. If it is displayed in, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 189 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 189 (κ1). Here, the ball removal notification error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (errors A to E), but is included in the plurality of types of errors (errors A to E). May be good. Instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error having a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (errors A to E).

A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) overlaps with the plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

The error notification display related to the control of the sub control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting method warning display may be overlapped by the ball removal notification display, or conversely, the ball removal notification display may be overlapped by the hitting method warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub control units 400 and 500 side and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. May be good.

FIG. 189 (λ1-1) is displaying the symbol variation, and the simultaneous effect executed on the plurality of game consoles is started from the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 189 (λ1-2) shows an example of the display screen of the simultaneous effect in the normal state (no error occurs and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 189 (λ1-2), in the normal state, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true. Further, regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 189 (λ2') described later, but the error display may be displayed overlapping with the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true.

FIG. 189 (λ2) shows an example of a case where a simultaneous effect occurs during the super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the game table is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. You may.

FIG. 189 (λ2') shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during the error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach effect is being produced also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbol or during the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and multiple types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the same manner as before the simultaneous effect occurs, and the separate frame display unit The display of the simultaneous effect in OFD overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays.

The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may overlap with the display of the simultaneous effect on the separate frame display unit OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the display of the simultaneous effect in the separate frame display unit OFD may overlap with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume.

Further, in a game table provided with a second display device 208S, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, or a third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means"). ) Overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter, referred to as “first display means”), the first display is made according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display in the means may be displayed in the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, the words "error" and "warning" are used in the explanations using FIGS. 187 to 189, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and the notification that an error has occurred is used. It may be a notification that there is an error or that it is instructed to resolve the error that has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set with a higher priority than what is described as a warning.

<Error notification / Error that can be detected by the main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) unconnected error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), big winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, big winning opening excess discharge error, big winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormality error, solenoid abnormality error, etc. can be mentioned.

A magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and that state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. This is an error that returns when A switch (sensor) disconnection error is when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and one of the special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the above state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This is an error that returns when it is detected. The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormal errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value, and is an error of the starting opening 2. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 110) is not operating, and is an error of the big winning opening. Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the large winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value.

The large winning opening excess discharge error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area valid period, and the next main control unit timer in which the large winning slot discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The large winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered> the number of ejected balls after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric function operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered = the number of ejected balls. This is an error that returns when the power is turned on again or when the power is turned on again. In the recovery process of the large winning opening winning excess error, the number of passages related to the probability variation area is set to 0.

An impact abnormality error is defined as a state in which the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the valid period of the probability variation area (specific area). It is an error that occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probabilistic region valid period to the outside of the probabilistic region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photosensor does not perform the operation of changing from OFF to ON or the operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the valid period of the probability variation region, and the following solenoid abnormality error occurs. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 190 is the highest priority error because the operation of the main control unit 300 is prohibited (gaming is not possible). Although less frequent, the other errors may be the highest priority errors and the higher priorities may not be in the order listed in FIG. 190. The details of the error occurrence condition, the return condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in the figure. In addition, "when the end display period of the big hit or small hit ends" of the recovery condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big prize opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error notification / error that can be detected by the payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, a plate full tank error), a payout number shortage error, a payout quantity switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example)), CR unit unconnected error, glass frame open error , Inner frame opening error, door opening error, magnetic error, external clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, impact sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

Further, the conditions for generating each error, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 191 (a). In addition, "stop" described in the item "launch stop" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the launch permission signal.

FIG. 191B is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error is in the generated state when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and is in the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch disconnection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, etc. The error may have a higher priority than the payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, the door opening error, and the upper plate full tank error), but the priorities may be the same.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error occur at the same time, and the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After that, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 are notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, speakers 120, etc.) may be configured to switch (overwrite data), with only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) being overwritten and others. One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 192 indicates an error display by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example), and displays the character display described in "". Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is cleared, and is hidden when the error is cleared. However, even after the error is cleared, it is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or it may be configured to be hidden after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

The sound effect shown in FIG. 192 may be a notification by a sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the sound in "" is repeatedly output by voice. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is cleared, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. Then, it may be configured so that the sound is not output, or it may be configured so that the sound is output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is cleared.

The error lighting LED shown in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is configured to light only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up part or all of various errors related to power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control), or it may be configured not to light up partly or all. good. Further, in the warning related to the sub control (in this example, the impact warning and the striking method warning), the error lighting LED is configured not to be turned on, but it may be turned on. The error lighting LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout lighting LED shown in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is lit during the payout period by the payout device 152. , The light is turned off during the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, the payout lighting LED is turned on even when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout number shortage error) occurs, but it may be turned on only during the payout period by the payout device 152. It may be configured to light up when an error related to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 192 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decorative LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102. It may be a lamp provided in (may be configured so as not to be provided), and a light emitting effect is performed according to various effects. Further, the decorative LED shown in FIG. 192 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in a light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when an error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be advanced in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of recovery from the error may be restored when the error is recovered. It may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until the timing when it is easy to recover (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or it may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and then turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared. It may be configured to light or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or it may be configured to turn off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. You may be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) a main control (main control unit 300). It can be roughly classified into four types: an error related to the above, and (4) a warning related to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to payout>
First, the error related to the payout will be described. The "errors related to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a dish full tank error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, and an illegal payout error. The number of payouts switch error, main control communication error, CR unit non-connection error, CR unit communication error, door opening error can be mentioned. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible (transparent or highly transparent) only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. (Visible via a payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a bottom pan full tank error occurs, the number "2" is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification is performed by the light emitting means, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the lower saucer full tank error has occurred), and the sound output means. (In this example, the speaker 120) notifies (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a lower saucer full tank error has occurred) is performed. In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, when the lower plate 128 is full, a case where a lower plate full tank error occurs is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (in this example, the decorative LED (decorative LED). Blinking of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed.

When a door opening error occurs, the number "1" is added to the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification is performed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (in this example, decorative LED (frame)). Blinking of lamps and panel lamps), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred). Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, output of a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be the notification of the glass frame opening error, and the notification mode of a part of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, notification by the display means) is different. , Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game ball may be interrupted, and when the inner frame is opened, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

When an insufficient number of payout errors occurs, the number "3" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) (in this example, the LED for payout lighting is lit). The mode of notification of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 192.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, an error related to the power supply will be described. Examples of the "error related to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)" include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 192. Although the error related to the power supply is not notified in this example, it may be notified by a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs. Further, the power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit from power-on and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs, or conversely, when the power is turned off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be lit.

<Error notification / Specific example of notification mode / Error related to main control, etc.>
Next, errors related to main control and the like will be described. The "errors related to the main control (main control unit 300)" in this example include magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error, magnetic field (radio) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, and impact error. Examples include an error, a winning rate abnormal error, a large winning opening winning excess error, a large winning opening excessive discharge error, and a solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, it is notified by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp in this example). Flashing), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). In this example, notification is performed by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

When a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used to notify (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel)). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). Notify (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when a large winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a large winning opening winning excess error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the sound effect indicating that the large winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a large winning opening excess discharge error occurs, the error notification is not performed. Note that the error notification (light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used for notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) blinks) and the display means (in this example). In this example, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of the character indicating that the large winning opening emission excess error has occurred) and the notification by the sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example). Then, a sound effect sound indicating that a large winning opening excess discharge error has occurred)) may be performed.

In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (in this example). Flashing of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book). In the example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, the winning rate abnormal error includes the general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), the starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special drawing starting opening 232), and the large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). Although it is configured to perform the same error notification for 234), different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening in which the error occurs. In addition, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error is a target winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226, second special figure starting opening 232, variable winning opening 234, etc.) under certain specific conditions (for example, when N balls are launched, during a big hit). Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of prizes are detected in the electric support (other than during the high accuracy state of the normal figure). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measures of the gaming machine may be the same as those for the winning rate abnormal error.

The error related to the main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). (Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (indication that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. In addition, the notification mode of other error notifications related to the main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 192.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error related to sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning / error related to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" include an impact warning, a striking method warning, and an effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) notifies (in this example, a character indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed, but the light emitting means. Will not be notified by.

In addition, when a hitting warning occurs, a notification by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a character indicating that a hitting warning has occurred) and a sound output means (in this example) In this example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound effect of the hitting warning has occurred) is performed, but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

The effect movable means error means that when the power is turned on, various effect movable means (in this example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako). The effect movable means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). The effect movable means is provided on the frame. If so, it is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include the effect movable means, and the frame is not provided with the effect movable means). This is an error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not performed normally. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect movable means (ON when it is at the initial position) is in the OFF state. It may indicate the case where it is not turned on even if the retry operation is performed once or a plurality of times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor continues to be in the ON state. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. The sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position where the effect movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the effect movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C is After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured to perform the initial operation for the other effect movable means after the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the sensor at the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial operation of the effect movable body B is started. The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having the highest priority is initially performed. It may be configured so that an operation (initial operation including origin return operation or origin return operation) is performed.

Further, in the effect movable means error, the effect movable means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit 422 of FIG. 111, etc.) due to the case where the connector of the effect movable means is not correctly connected, the harness of the effect movable means is broken, or the connector is damaged. ) Is an error that occurs even when the connection is not successful. In addition, "errors related to poor connection (wiring failure) of the effect movable means" and "errors that occur when it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of various effect movable means is performed when the power is turned on" are separate errors. It may be notified separately.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured so as not to be displayed during the display of the returning display.

Note that the error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and may be displayed in a different display mode. An error message may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, due to an error related to sub-control (in this example, an error of the effect movable means), in addition to the error display by the display means, even if the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is configured to light or blink. Alternatively, the sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured so that a part or all of the error notification is terminated by the operation of the operating means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect movable means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means ends, and the game The blinking display by the decorative LED on the board ends, a part of the decorative LED on the frame goes out, and the blinking by the other part continues as it is. By operating the operating means in this way, an error in the effect means A occurs. It is conceivable that the notification continues, the error notification of the effect means B ends, a part of the effect means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. The effect means A to C are sound output means, display means, and so on. Decorative LEDs, etc. are applicable.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. NS. The returning display is a display displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol change or a big hit, and if the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer reaches 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It should be noted that the display may be configured to return from the resetting display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during the symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, the start or end of a specific round, the start or end of the jackpot start effect, the start or end of the jackpot end display). Here, during the display of the returning display, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but all or part of the other error display is not displayed. You may. Further, although all the above error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icons B to G that can be selected by the player when the hold look-ahead notice is started. In some cases, the icon A may change to an icon mode that the player cannot select when the hold look-ahead notice is started.

In addition, a plurality of operation means related to the effect may be provided. Here, when the operating means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operating means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operating means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operating means A or an "operating means" is provided. Character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A") is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or "" Character display such as "press the operation means B". Hereinafter, "operation means image B") may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the display is displayed. The image relating to the operating means in which the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, and the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is more successful than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but vice versa. Often, it may be configured so that the success level of the change in the display mode of the navigation character does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, when the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured so that it is easy to do, but it may be reversed, and it may be configured so that the display mode in which the navigation character is easily changed does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but the opposite may be true, and even if they are the same. good. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A is changed to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and before the operation valid period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation valid period of A and during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means B. It may be during the operation valid period of the operation means A and during the operation valid period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operating means.

In addition, the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure start port, the normal figure start port, the general prize opening and / or the effect gate (even if the player enters the gate and the sensor detects it, the prize ball is not performed and only the effect is produced. It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect obtained may be in a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become specific points, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208. The "display (gacha effect) for performing the effect of drawing the effect to be acquired from now on" may be performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 may be acquired.

The display and non-display of the navigation character may be switched by the player operating the operating means (for example, the chance button 136). It may be possible to switch the display / non-display of the navigation character at all times, or it may be possible only while the navigation character is being displayed, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or It may be possible (for example, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), and it may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character cannot be switched during the execution of the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is being executed. It may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character can be switched, and the display / non-display may be switched only when the symbol is stopped (when the special figure is stopped).

The effect using the navigation character described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192 can be combined with the transparent effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, an accessory on which the navigation character YM is drawn is arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the navigation characters described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192 are used. The production may be made feasible. In this case, the navigator character YM may continue to appear by continuing the transparent effect across a plurality of consecutive variable displays, or the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holds is 0. (For example, the state of the symbol demo in which the decorative symbol is displayed, or the state of the animation demo that starts after the symbol demo), the transparent effect is executed, and the navigation character YM appears behind the transparent liquid crystal display device. You may.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the navigator character YM is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the effect using the navigator character described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192 is executed. The transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45 may be made feasible.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. 919, which will be described later, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 920.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon [for example, the variable icon h0].
The first icon is an icon related to the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”).
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 153 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 153 (i-9) to 11]. It is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, and a robot. Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed at the same time in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon that is displayed at the same time as the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions from each other.

Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display of the symbol (fluctuation stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

Further, the "icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays" is an "icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of displays.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once for the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition referred to here, there are n or more holds, there is a hold for which a look-ahead notice is being made, customization is being made by the player, and a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, etc.) (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a look-ahead notice notice display, the second icon is in stock, and the expectation of a big hit in the running symbol variation display is It is possible to list things such as high prices and winning the advance notice lottery. That is, all of the above-listed conditions may be used as the above-mentioned certain conditions. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

again,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 151 (A3-1) to FIG. (A6), FIG. 152. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 167. 165 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 176 (ab1) to (b2), 156 (6) to (8), 183 (8) D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about the change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, conversely, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon. In this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is hidden.

again,
"The second icon is a case where the display mode does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 151 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 159 (. 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2), FIG. 176 (A4-2), FIG. 176 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, as compared with the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is easy to confirm [for example, high expectation of big hit],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is the second icon." It may be "when the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode".

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode has a final jackpot symbol mode as compared with the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the display.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 154 (U 20-1), FIG. 163 (ko b15-1)] about a jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display," means "the notice of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is the second icon. It may be "done by".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice display mode for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 159 (ke 5-1) to the same figure (ke 13), FIG. 162 (ko a11)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of the look-ahead notice" may mean "a look-ahead notice is given by the second icon".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, when both the icon of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when one of the variable icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, none of the icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the case.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the icon is displayed is the variable icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the state in which both of the icons are displayed.

Or conversely, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than in the state where both of the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the end. You may. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may always be confirmed and displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. good. Further, even if the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (for example, a jackpot with probability variation, a jackpot with a long round is confirmed), a rare reach (for example, a full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or another premier production appears. It may be easy to make a big hit, or it may be easy to make a big hit. Or conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. Further, the mode of the operating means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emitting mode (for example, a rainbow light emitting mode that changes to seven colors)). .. You can also get the benefits of customizing the production, increase the number of productions you can select during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, and open a special jackpot round (for example, a second attacker opens). Round) may be started.

In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is the lord and the display mode of the second icon is the swordsman, it may be suggested that the swordsman reach where the lord and the swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variable icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, only when the two icons are displayed, it functions as a notice of the change (normal notice). It may be configured in.

Further, the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the variable icon in the first display mode, the second icon in the fourth display mode, the variable icon in the second display mode, and the variable icon in the third display mode. The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be different from that of the second icon combination.

again,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the second icon than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is such that the variable icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more likely than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be expensive.

Here, "than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the variable icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "more than when the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed".

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily have to change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth, as compared with the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. May be good.

Further, the variable icon in the easily changeable display mode may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

again,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 157, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

Further, depending on the combination of the plurality of the second icons (the combination of the second icons in the same display mode or the combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, or the hold icon or the variable icon. The display mode may change easily, or the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo-continuous notices, timer notices, look-ahead notices) may change.

again,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, for example, the display mode may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode according to the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode that imitates the operation means, or a display mode that encourages the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display mode). It may be a display mode relating to the operation validity period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation validity period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. It may be a combination of these display modes, or it may be a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of is may change.

Further, when the operating means is operated in the so-called back button state in which the notification prompting the operation of the operating means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operating means, the display mode of the second icon is displayed. May change.

In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change in the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customized operation by the player.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)].
The fourth display mode is a display mode that the player has not selected [for example, the display mode of the number length shown in FIG. 155 (E4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode is a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select, or the game. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIGS. 155 (1) to 3-1) and 158 (ku 2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the second icon may be changed by the effect of the second icon". May change. "

again,
"The variable icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 166 (Su 3) to FIG. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the variable icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the variable icon may change due to the effect of the variable icon". It may be that.

again,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.].
The third icon is an icon according to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”).
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, icons A to G of the hold display selection in FIG. 139 (b), FIG. 154 (U2), FIG. It is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. You may.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icons h0, etc.].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 153 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 153 (i-9) to 11). Etc.], which is an icon that may be used for
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, and a robot. Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed.
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIGS. 155 (1) to 3-1) and 158 (ku 2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained. again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once for the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 151 (A3-1) to FIG. (A6), FIG. 152. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 167. 165 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 176 (ab1) to (b2), 156 (6) to (8), 183 (8) D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is a case where the display mode does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 151 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 159 (. 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 176 (A4-2), FIG. 176 (A6-2))] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 154 (U 20-1), FIG. 163 (ko b15-1)] about a jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 162 (a11)] in FIGS. 159 (5-1) to 13 (13).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 157, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 166 (Su 3) to FIG. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means "the display mode of the first icon is given by the notice of the first icon". May change. "

again,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is the" icon of the concept including both the hold icon and the variable icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
The variable icon is an icon [for example, the variable icon h0] representing a held hold that has been digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The" icon for hold display "above is the" hold icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "icon related to the hold display" described above is a "variable icon", and the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold [for example, the variable icon h0]. good.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Effecting means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game underframe lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet done?” In FIG. 184 (A11). ~ "Response display] may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (time from FIG. 184 (A6) to immediately before FIG. (A11))] elapses after the first period is started, the said The first production may be performed,
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the second period [for example, the operation valid period (the period from FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14)]] in the non-auto button mode, the second operation means is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hit meter RHM in FIGS. 185 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. In some cases,
In the auto button mode, even if the second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses from the start of the second period, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 184. Example, the state of the continuous striking meter RHM in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, if the operation of the operation means is performed from the start of the second period to the elapse of the second time, the second effect is executed. And
The state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting].
When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIGS. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.]
A game table characterized by that. "
Was explained.

According to the invention described in this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic operating means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect may be performed according to the operation of the operating means even if the operating means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

Even during the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may be accepted or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the production of A and not accepted in the production of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the operation means of A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the operation means of B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

Further, during the period of the second period, the effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.

again,
"When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 186 (Aa8-3)). ] There is
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operating means can be guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, it is necessary to notice that the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and to improve the motivation to operate the operation means. May be possible.

again,
"At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [eg, just before FIGS. 184 (A8-1) to (A11), FIG. 185. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, FIGS. 184 (A8-1) to (A11). In the period up to immediately before, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect At least one of these effects is executed [for example, FIGS. 186 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

If the operating means is operated from the start of the first period to the elapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The button mode function does not work, and there is a sense of incongruity that you have to operate the buttons yourself, which may improve the interest of the game.

again,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, the first And at least one of the second effects are executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

again,
"If the operation means is not operated during the period of the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the first period.

again,
"If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, the second effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the second period.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all of them). (Including), 2nd display device 208S, etc.]
The plurality of types of effects are a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a response display.
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated.
The first effect is the first response display of the response effects [for example, the response display of "Is summer vacation still?" In FIG. 184 (A11)].
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"A display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation display, and is an operation display.
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means.
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) and the like] is displayed as the operation display. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the first response display may be displayed.
When the operation of the operation means is performed when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. A second response display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may include an image [for example, button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, character display of "press", display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.] may be included.

again,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the running symbol variation display [for example, a notice effect on a jackpot in the symbol variation display (normal notice)].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the case, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

again,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is being executed ends [for example, the symbol variation that is started next]. It is a display, a symbol variation display that starts next, or a notice effect (pre-reading notice) about a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts next next.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the case, only the first effect may be the case, and only the second effect may be the case. You may.

again,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as" first operation valid period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation valid period").
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display showing at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1)]. ] May be displayed even during the auto button mode. In addition, the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a gauge display (bar display that increases or decreases), or a display in which the shade of the display color changes with the passage of time and is grayed out when the remaining period is exhausted, for example. good.

Alternatively, conversely, the meter indicating the operation validity period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 184 to 186] is not set [for example, FIGS. 184 to 184]. There may be a button variable icon or a button hold icon shown in 186].

again,
"The operating means is a means that may perform an effect operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, and a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example. , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, even if the effect means is provided with an effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. good.

Further, the second state is a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advance state, a backward state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, and a hardening state). Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as turning on, blinking, or turning off.
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the second mode.
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is off, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is on.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game table frame lamp 452, Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
The effect means is a means capable of performing at least a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, (b) effect by each option of character selection in FIG. 139 (b), (c) effect by each option of reservation frame selection, ( e) Production by each option of hold display selection, (f) Production by each option of background display selection, music output production of the song title shown in FIG. 177].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect,].
When the third effect [for example, change notice by the treasure box icon I1, music change notice, wipe effect, background change notice, etc.] is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is described. When changing to the second effect [For example, shown in FIGS. 175 (a3-1) to (a6-1), 178 (a11) to (a15-1), and 182. For example, when the background A is selected by the player in FIG. 156 (1), the background change notice (wipe-in and wipe-out of the 襖 image for the wipe effect) in the figures (6) to (7). ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in the figure (8) to the figure (21) changes].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the third effect is one type of effect among the plurality of types of effect, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in the demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display. May be good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game, which can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

As an example of the effect means, display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. Further, as an example, a light guide plate in which light is incident from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed. As the effect means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, a light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed depending on the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

again,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), Second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is the first effect display [for example, the effect display by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 139 (b) or the effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e). The effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) the effect display by each option of the background display selection, and the song name shown in FIG. 177 displayed on the song name display unit MN of FIG. 178].
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the hold frame UI, the song title display unit MN "Disstance" in FIGS. 178 (a 13) to (a 14). , The song title display unit MN "Todoroki DREAM" in Fig. 178 (a 15-1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

again,
"The third effect is the third effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character" Navi character Conversation notice including the character display "change", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wipe production, character C11 of the chief of Fig. 178 (I11) to Fig. (I15-1)].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the third effect display and at least a part of the first effect display may overlap. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display and a part of the first effect display overlap, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May overlap with all of the third effect display, or only a part of the first effect display may overlap with all of the third effect display, or may overlap with all of the third effect display. In some cases, all of the first effect displays may overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display may overlap. At least a part of the above may overlap with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

In addition, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of reserved balls, and an icon (variable icon) related to the running symbol variable display. May occur. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative symbol, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or it may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.

again,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 155 (1) to 3-1). Fig. 158 (Ku 2-1) to Fig. 158 (Ku 7)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change of the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change of the effect mode is Even if there is a case where the change is made according to the operation of the operation means and a case where the change is made according to the start of execution of the look-ahead notice (entering the look-ahead mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). good.

again,
"When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIGS. 175 (a4-1) to (a6-1)". ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without executing the third effect [for example, in FIGS. 155 (e2) to (e4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the configuration may be such that when the third effect is executed, the state always shifts to a state advantageous for the player. Alternatively, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, it may not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, a probabilistic state or an electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, the round promotion state may be in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

again,
"The operation means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, in the case of FIGS. 142 (37) to (50)].
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"During the execution of the first effect, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 151 (3-2-1) to FIG. 159 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. 159 (K 1-3-3b2), FIG. 176 (A 4-2), and FIG. 176 (A a6-2). If] there is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display, and the effect may not be changed. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect, and the effect means may output sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

Alternatively, conversely, if the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

again,
"The second effect is one of the effects that can be selected by the player.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

again,
"A sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music is provided.
The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying the music display [for example, the music name display unit MN of FIG. 178 (a 15-1), the same figure (a 16) to the same figure (a 18), etc.].
The music display is a display related to a music output by the sound output means [for example, display of a music title or lyrics].
The first production is the first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"].
The second production is a second music display [for example, "Todoroki DREAM"].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode].
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow kimono]. That is
The second icon is an icon that has a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, in the case of FIG. 175 (a1) to FIG. 175 (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the symbol. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

again,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a second icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0].
The second icon is an icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays.
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and is different from the hold icon.
The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area [for example, the variable icon display area CIS of the hold frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Is an icon that may be
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS in the hold frame UI].
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI].
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the first mode [for example, "holding frame D"].
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the second mode [for example, "holding frame R"].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which the area icon is displayed, an area in which the hold frame is displayed, or an area in which the user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigator icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

again,
"One of the above-mentioned multiple types of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 170] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the running symbol variation display [for example, a normal notice effect by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the character C11 of the bancho]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is the effect of the look-ahead notice [for example, the effect of the look-ahead notice by the color of the treasure box icon].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 243, other game consoles (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail. .. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 193 to 243, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 193 to 243 are used. In the description using FIG. 243, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 are prioritized.

As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 193 to 243. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 193. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with a passage, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball removal button 130 to be operated, a ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and a launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game board 200 into the game area 124, and a chance button that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 193) by the operation of the player. For 136, the chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137 that can perform various settings by the operation of the setter (for example, a player, a game clerk), and the card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction, a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit (FIG. (Not shown) and. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The setting operation unit 137 confirms, as a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, an confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, and a lower button located below the confirm button. It includes a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 195) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may be.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 194 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 193 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 and the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 196). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are related. A first sub board 160 for accommodating a first sub board 160 including a rotary type volume adjustment switch 161 that constitutes a first sub control unit 400 that performs control processing and adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk. A board case 162, a second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to production based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-board case 166. A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and control for launching a game ball. A power source that configures a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs processing, and a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game machines, and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a switch 178 and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, a payout control unit 600, and a card unit. The CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals, and the relay board 188 that relays between the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, etc., and the hall computer, etc. in order to output the information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer, etc. And are arranged.

Since the main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. need to be changed for each model, they are provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. are provided. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 195 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 195 is a so-called right-handed game board. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength with which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player, the normal drawing start port 228 and the second special figure start port 232, which will be described later, and the second It can be divided into 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area) provided with the first special drawing start port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124 is the second. A game ball that is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the special figure start port 232, and conversely, rolls in a second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure start port 232. 1 It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board of the right-handed machine, but can be widely applied to the pachinko machine provided with the general game board.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, it is sufficient that the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. 195. It is not limited to the mode. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device also shown in FIG. 195. The left end side portion of the 208N overlaps the front side portion of the right end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be located on the left side of the screen). Further, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be located at a distance). Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions in which they come into contact with each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine equipped with only one or a pachinko machine equipped with only two. It may be a pachinko machine equipped with one or more. Further, the positional relationship of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG. 195.

Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can be made to look like it is. For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 will be described later.

The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here, they are configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display can be displayed. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured so as to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix. Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here. These first special figure display device 212 and second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball will enter the starting port 228 by hitting the right side. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 194 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

Only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special drawing start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the ball will enter by hitting the right side. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure start port 232 is reached. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second feature, which is a variable starting area, is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is a fixed starting area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided with two variable winning openings. The central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is arranged under the second special figure starting opening 232, and the ball is entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are sometimes called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 keeps the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. It is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one of the states) to the other, and when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variable game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. It should be noted that, in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if it is slightly opened, it may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

According to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right side. Hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player, and in a non-electric support state, left hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable). Win a prize at the winning opening 235) or the starting port (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), without winning any winning opening or starting port, or at the normal drawing starting port 228. It reaches the out port 240 only by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, the above-mentioned three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, which decorative symbol the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify it. Further, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield all of. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both a shielding means and an effect movable means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, as the effect movable means, a family crest accessory 224E (see FIG. 206 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest accessory 224E is arranged at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest accessory 224E starts operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the initial position, the family crest accessory 224E is more difficult for the player to see than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

The fourth symbol may be displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or a dedicated fourth symbol lamp or the like may be separately displayed. Means may be provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 196. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is controlled by the control means (for example, the main control means (300), the first sub control means (400), and the second sub control means (500). ))), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One unit including the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, or the like. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. Various solenoids 332 that open and close the drive circuit 330 and predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234, and the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in the above is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current position of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. , Detection signals from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, and the setting operation unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the setting operation unit 137. Is read out from the sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display three decorative symbols. A VDP434 (video display processor) for displaying an image is connected to each of the devices 208L to N.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of various movable means (8th generation accessory 224Fa, general accessory 224Fb, family crest accessory 224E), and various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current position and a sensor circuit 518 that outputs detection signals from various movable means sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502 are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb. Although the 224E is controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control may be performed, or one of the sub-control units may control both.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, even when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may send a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub-control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 196, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5V). ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power supply management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error, a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraudulent act, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT3141. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovered, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to check whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

Next, using FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop and display. The types of figures and general figures will be described. FIG. 197 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and FIG. 197 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. On the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the start port sensor detects it. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol referred to in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The process up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, after the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays up to this point is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 197 (a) shows seven types of special figures, “special figure A” to “special figure G”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 197 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit and the number of rounds are determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the big hit game is completed. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. Further, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game, and after the end of the 7R big hit game, the time is shortened (electric support state). The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure B" are symbols that are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and are 7R jackpot symbols. "Special figure C" is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These "special figure A", "special figure B", and "special figure C" are symbols in which the advantage to the player is relatively large.

"Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called a sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R and "Special Figure B" which is 7R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability change or hidden probability change. As will be described later, when "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called) after the big hit game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. If "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state after shifting to the latent probability change state), the special figure high probability normal is after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms x 2R) is completed. The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b)). That is, in "special figure E", the operation during the big hit game and the game state that shifts thereafter are determined by the game state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether or not the special figure is a low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different pattern.

"Special figure F" is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the "special figure G" is an out-of-line symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small.

FIG. 197 (b) shows four types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure d”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is an outlier symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special figures (of which five are big hits) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, whereas special figure 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four types of special figures (three of them are big hits) of "special figure a" to "special figure d" are used. With this configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a probable change among the big hits. In this example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes in which almost no balls are released, whereas the jackpot in Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. , The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

FIG. 197 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 9" and "Decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ...-> "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

Then, the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure B", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure C", the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure b". , When notifying the 7R jackpot of "special figure c", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-" Decorative 2-Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-") "Decoration 3", "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", etc.) are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called the latent probability change (hidden probability change) of "special figure E" or the small hit of "special figure F", "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. do. When notifying a 2R jackpot called a sudden change in "Special Figure D", "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special figure G" and the "special figure d", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 197 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 197 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are three types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: the hit symbol "Public figure A" and "Public figure B", and the outlier symbol "Public figure C". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Public figure A" or "Special figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal figure fluctuating game, and "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed when notifying the loss of the normal figure fluctuating game. do. Also in FIG. 197 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than (9 V in this example). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first 1 Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used. In the case of setting the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 are added to the 1-byte register having an initial value of 0. By doing so, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Will be sent to.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the command setting transmission process (command setting transmission process) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, like the power recovery command. In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115 following step S113, interrupt prohibition is set, and then the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, for generating the initial values of four random number counters for generating the normal figure winning random number value, the normal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value, respectively. The four random number counters for generating initial values, the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure, and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map provided in the RAM 308, and the value is acquired. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 199. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process of the main control unit is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

First, in step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In the step S203 following the step S201, the WDT is periodically scheduled so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). (In this example, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S205 following step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting port 228. It is judged that there was a passage at. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, the information indicating that the detection signal is present two times before, the previous detection signal is not present, and the detection signal is not present this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In the next step S207 of step S205, the basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, the basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure used by the main control unit 300 are used. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter is obtained. Set to.

For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value of the normal figure has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value of the normal figure and the random number value generation of the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for the purpose and the random number counter for the special figure 2 random number value generation have each made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 following step S209, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the special diagram 1 display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Update various timers including a timer for timing the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215 following step S213, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step S217 following step S215, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the normal drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a prize in the special figure 1 start port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 is used. The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is used as a special figure. 1 Random number values are acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set with the highest hold order (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 hold decreases by one. At the same time, the data is processed so that the holding order of the remaining data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set is incremented by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 hold increases by one, a new special figure 1 is added to the next hold order of the data of the set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set having the lowest (last) hold order. The data of the winning random number value and the set of the special figure 1 random number value are written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 start port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, it is stored in the special figure 2 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 holds decreases by one, the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value having the highest hold order is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. The data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set are processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 holdings increases by one, a new special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 data of a set of random numbers is written.

In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) is newly acquired. In that case, the special figure look-ahead process is executed using the start information. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later.

If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding normal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. , The normal figure random number value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal figure random number value provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the normal figure random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value in the normal figure random value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold number storage area. In the normal figure random value storage area, every time the number of normal figure hold decreases by one, the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value with the highest hold order (first) is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. It is processed so that the hold order of the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of holdings of the normal figure increases by one, a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new holding order of the data of the set of the winning random number value of the normal figure and the random number value of the normal figure having the lowest holding order (last) are added. The data of a set of random values is written. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

In step S219 following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221 following step S219, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the normal figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to display the normal figure display mode. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal figure display device 210 has one of a hit symbol (a normal figure A or a normal figure B shown in FIG. 197 (d)) and an outlier symbol (a normal figure C shown in FIG. 197 (d)). The symbol of is confirmed and displayed. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When the normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the normal operation in the setting area, the vane member is set to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 during a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is wrong, the normal map hit flag is turned off. When this normal figure hit flag is off, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this lottery process related to the normal figure, the number of the variable game of the normal figure and the number of the variable game of the normal figure which is not controlled to open / close the special figure 2 start port 232 (the state of the normal figure is not operating) and is held. Is executed using the set of the earliest Fuzu winning random value and the Fuzu random value in the Fuzu random value storage area, with the condition that is 1 or more.

The main control unit 300 acquires the fuzu start information (a set of the fuzu winning random value and the fuzu random value) from the earliest (most previously stored) hold position in the fuzu random value storage area. A winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the acquired random number value for winning the normal figure in the start information of the normal figure and the value of the probability fluctuation flag for the normal figure in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b) described later). (See) is used to determine whether to win or miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 sets the normal map determination table (the hit shown in FIG. 201 (c)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the normal map random value in the acquired normal map start information and the determined hit / fail determination result. (Refer to the time operation table) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the normal diagram. Next, the main control unit 300 selects various tables (for example, a timer number (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal diagram, and the like. The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the normal map is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal map fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map fluctuation display time.

After extracting the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area and stores the number of reserved numbers in the normal figure. The number of reserved maps in the area is subtracted by 1. At this time, the normal map start information extracted from the normal map random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the normal map start information stored in this temporary area. May be good.

The main control unit 300 sets the normal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 to on when the winning / failing determination result is a hit (winning), and sets the normal figure hit flag to off when the result is unwinning.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 7R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on. Is the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 197 (b) is on, the special figure b, 7R jackpot flag is on when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special figure c and the out-of-order flag are on, the 7-segment LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 are turned on and off so as to be in the respective modes of the special figure d, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is specially controlled. Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that the stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures a to d.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state). Further, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is added. Turn off.

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning openings 234 and 235. In addition to outputting a signal for holding the door member in the open state, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, the opening / closing control of the door member was repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of the special figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of the special figure 1), and the process was completed. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, the player waits for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. In order to set to, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation / shortness). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew opening). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because, if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 and 235 are entered during the jackpot game, and many of the special figure 2 starting openings 232 are reached before the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases due to the entry of game balls and the gambling property increases.

If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. However, in this example, since the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2, the timing at which the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figures A and 7R jackpot flags shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B and 7R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C and 2R jackpot flags are on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D and 2R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure E, when the small hit flag is on. The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off so that the special figure F and the special figure G are in the respective modes when the off flag is on, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is prioritized over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. .. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in (see FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (d) described later) is used to make a big hit, or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in special figure 1). It is determined whether or not the item is out of order (whether it is correct or not). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table (FIG. 203 (a), FIG. (Refer to the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 204 (a)) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and also deletes the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game or the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the special figure variable game is won in the start opening prize. It may be forward fluctuation. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit of the hold is four in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of pending items.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special figures may be displayed in one area. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol change start command and a symbol change stop command related to a normal figure are also included.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the special figure symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. In the case of the start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are displayed. I try to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Includes information indicating the presence or absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data is information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the like. Included in.

In addition, if the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure, the command data includes the values such as the normal figure hit flag, the normal figure miss flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, and the normal figure related lottery process. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the normal map, indicates the values of the normal map hit flag, normal map miss flag, normal map probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 1. Fig. 2 Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the normal drawing display device 210 and special drawing 1 are displayed via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 198.

FIG. 200A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process executed in the prize acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-reads the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination process. The determination is made, and the pre-determination result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 200 (b) to (e)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased can be determined, for example, by the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 reserved number stored area. Fig. 2 Compare with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, and when the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number. It is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage area as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the number of pre-reads in Special Figure 1 stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt is used. The process returns to the winning process (step S217) of the interrupt process.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-reading result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the present embodiment, the increased start information of the special figure 2 is always pre-read, and the increased start information of the special figure 1 is always pre-read except during the electric support. , Whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of special figures 1 and 2 may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the read-ahead result.

FIGS. 200B to 200E exemplify a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 200B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (b), "special figure G" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure G" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure F "(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure A "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". (15R special jackpot) is memorized.

FIG. 200C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (c), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (c), "special figure d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 200 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

FIG. 200 (d) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 200 (d), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

As shown in FIG. 200 (e), in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is the look-ahead result. It may be remembered as. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (e), the storage area "hold 1" stores "timer 3" as timer number information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "timer 5" as timer number information. Timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 3" and "hold 4". In FIG. 200 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". Further, when the timer number information is stored in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the pass / fail result.

In the above explanation, an example is given in which the stop symbol and the timer number are preliminarily determined and the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit. It may be stored in the result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 201 to 204 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

FIGS. 201A and 201B show an example of a winning / failing determination table used when making a winning / failing determination in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223). The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b) is composed of each item of "normal figure probability", "random number range", and "hit / fail result". The item of "probability of normal figure" indicates the probability of normal figure (low probability of normal figure or high probability of normal figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of "random number range" indicates the numerical range to be compared with the acquired random number value for winning the general map. Here, the range of the winning random numbers in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

The pass / fail determination table shown in FIG. 201 (a) is a pass / fail determination table for a normal map used when the probability of the normal map at the time of the pass / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when this pass / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 201 (b) is a pass / fail determination table for a normal map used when the probability of the normal figure at the time of the hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 201 (b), when this pass / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 201 (a), the probability of winning is 100 times. In this way, in the high probability state of the normal figure (during the time saving operation), it may be designed so that only the hit is selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% during the time reduction operation, but the probability that the hit is selected is higher during the time reduction operation than when the time reduction is not operated (normally low probability state).

FIG. 201 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for ordinary drawings. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the normal symbol random number value when determining the stop symbol in the general symbol-related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, the distribution rate of each symbol). Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 201 (c), the distribution rate of each hit symbol when the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal figure variation game is a hit is 50% for the normal figure A and 50% for the normal figure B. The normal figures A and B are symbols in which the electric chew opening operation is executed after the normal figure variable game. In addition, since there is only one out-of-order symbol selected when the hit / fail determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of out of order. When the normal figure C is selected, the electric chew opening operation is not executed after the normal figure fluctuation game.

As shown in FIG. 201 (c), the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is not activated for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 100 ms, then closed only for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened only for 5400 ms. do. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, opened again for 1800 ms, and then opened. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (c), the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the normal drawing B is not activated in a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing B is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 2400 ms, then closed only for about 2000 ms, then opened only for 1450 ms, and then again. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for only 1450 ms.

FIGS. 202A to 202D show an example of a winning / failing determination table used when performing a winning / failing determination in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (d) is composed of each item of "special figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail determination result". The item of "special figure probability" indicates the special figure probability (low probability of special figure or high probability of special figure) at the time of hit / fail judgment. The item of "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the range in which the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example can be taken is 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (b) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (c) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 202 (c), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (d) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 202 (d), when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 202 (c), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

FIG. 203A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit) and the special figure B. (7R special jackpot) is 25%, special figure C (7R jackpot) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability change jackpot) is 10%, and special figure E (latent probability variation jackpot) is 10%. be. Special figures A, B, D, and E excluding special figure C are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. Special figure 1 The ratio of the probability variation jackpot (special figures A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

Special figures A, B, and D are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (during time reduction operation), low probability of normal figure (time reduction not activated) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when symbol stop is displayed). Regardless of time)), it is a symbol in which the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of the winning / failing determination. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time reduction is activated after the jackpot game is completed only when the game state at the time of winning / failing is the special figure high probability state or the normal figure high probability state. That is, when the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, if the special figure E is stopped and displayed multiple times as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure). (It will be in a low probability state), but after the second and subsequent stop indications, the time reduction will be activated (it will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). The probability that the time reduction is given in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and 100% in the other game states.

In this example, there is only one type of small hit symbol and one type of miss symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is obtained. If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and missed symbols may be provided as in the case of the big hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

FIG. 203B shows an example of the operation at the time of a big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), in the big hit game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special figure B or the special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R.

Regarding the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol stop display is displayed. Special figure low probability In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released for 2R at 100ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 204A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the distribution rate of each big hit symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit) and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. The special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variation game.

The special figures a and b are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (when short-time operation), low probability of normal figure (when short-time operation is not performed) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when the symbol is stopped). ), It is a symbol in which the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of the winning / failing determination. Special Figure 2 The probability that a time reduction will be given in a jackpot of a variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 2. However, a plurality of types of missed symbols may be provided as in the case of the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using the special figure 2 random value.

FIG. 204 (b) shows an example of the operation at the time of a big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the big hit game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a time reduction as compared with the special figure 1, and the attacker opening time is long (or the number of Rs is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. 205A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 205 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric chulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 206.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 205B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 205 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

FIG. 205 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is not input. Wait for the incoming signal to be input.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

FIG. 206A shows the flow of the electric chulong opening effect processing executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 206B shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chew long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the normal figure variable game, and the special figure 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter,) after winning the normal figure variable game. , Sometimes referred to as long opening). It should be noted that even after the normal map fluctuation is stopped, the electric chew long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "electric chew is being opened!") May be continued based on the normal figure stop symbol.

In the electric chulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 206 (a), in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. (Start rotation) Executed when the command is received.

First, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag that regulates the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted by referring to the value of the electric chulong opening effect execution restricting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. For example, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. .. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure fluctuation game during the display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened and the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric chulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to perform an electric tulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game or the demonstration effect.

When the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted, and regulates the electric chulong opening effect. Other control processes are executed to end this process, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

When the electric chulong release effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric chulong release effect can be executed, proceeds to step S803, and starts the symbol variation (start of rotation) of the normal figure. From the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss judgment of the variable game of the normal figure is a hit by referring to the information about the flag for hitting the normal figure and the flag for missing the normal figure.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / miss determination of the normal figure variation game is a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 and proceeds to the normal figure from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is the normal symbol A.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game is normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects an effect whose production type is "success pattern", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "success pattern", ends this process, and controls the effect of the main process. The process returns to the process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is not normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern A", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern A", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / miss determination of the normal figure variation game is not a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric chulong open false (gase) effect execution lottery process. In the electric Chulong open fake effect execution lottery process, a random number value is taken out from the random number counter for the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric chulong open false effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination in step S815 (step S817).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong opening false effect is to be executed, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets it as the electric chulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern B", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong opening fake effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes other control processing for not executing the electric chulong opening effect, ends this processing, and ends the main processing. Return to the effect control process (step S409) of.

In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 206, when the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit. The execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the loss, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Further, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set when the electric chew is opened for a short time (short open) (normal figure B), and the "failure pattern" is set when the electric chew is not opened (normal figure C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed when the hit (normal figure B) and the off (normal figure C) are performed.

FIG. 206B shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect. FIG. 206B shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. In front of the background effect, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" move sequentially from top to bottom. Is being executed. A variable icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, and a variable icon having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. An electric chulong open effect area d is arranged on the lower right side of the effect display area 208d. The non-figure variable game is started by the non-figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chewlong opening effect is not regulated, and the electric chewlong opening effect is executed in the electric chewlong opening effect area d. As an electric chew long opening effect, along with the display of "Help chance lottery", the image of the samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is won by winning the normal figure fluctuation game. A fanning effect is being performed that makes the player expect the player to open for a long time. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric chulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the area on the right side of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. In this way, when the electric Chulong opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or when the variable display of the decorative symbol makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the electric Chulong opening effect. There may be.

Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 207 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S901. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. .. In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S909 following step S907, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S911 following step S909, a lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S913 following step S911, the movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body (224Fa, 224Fb, 224E), this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, the process returns to step S903.

FIG. 207 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 207 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 228. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (a). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 195 as display means. Have. Hereinafter, although there are some overlaps with the explanations so far, they will be described.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 195, similarly to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are display areas smaller than the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and have a vertically long rectangular display area. If the first decorative symbol display device 208L is used as the main display device, it can be said that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N correspond to the sub display devices. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but various effects and various game information can be displayed even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc. Display device may be adopted.

Here, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N will be described. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is defined as "front" (front, front, etc.), and the opposite is "rear" (rear, rear). And. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the vertical upper side as seen from the player is "upper" (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and the opposite is "lower" (lower, lower, etc.). Bottom, bottom, etc.). Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the horizontal left side as seen from the player is "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and the opposite is "right" (right side, right side, etc.). Right end, etc.).

The first decorative symbol display device 208L is arranged substantially in the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 195, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration The symbol display device 208N is arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the front-rear direction are the same. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and move in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. It can be moved in the left-right direction. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are located at the initial positions, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are viewed in the front-rear direction. A part of the decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 196. A control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that executes display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be separately provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIGS. 208-228, the decorative pattern is displayed surrounded by a rectangular frame display. The display color in the frame display surrounding the odd number of decorative patterns ("decoration 1", "decoration 3", "decoration 5", "decoration 7", "decoration 9") is red, and the display color of the even number of decorative patterns ("decoration"). The display color in the frame display surrounding "2", "decoration 4", "decoration 6", "decoration 8", "decoration 10") is blue. The pachinko machine 100 displays in red or blue the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, so that the success or failure of the special figure variation game can be determined with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree). It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the inside of the frame display surrounding "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1" is displayed in red (indicated by grid hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). The pre-reading notice display in which the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in red is the display of the pre-reading notice of the red chance eye. The jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice of the chance eye is set higher in red than in blue. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative pattern itself in red or blue and execute the pre-reading notice of the chance.

A variable icon display area e is provided in the lower center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The variable icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the columnar stage (pedestal image) displayed in the variable icon display area e. The variable icon is an icon displayed in the variable icon display area e when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variable icon, it is possible to execute a notice of the change with a predetermined jackpot reliability as to whether or not the special figure variable game is correct or not. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the variable icon e1 is displayed in a white circular shape (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). The white circular aspect is the default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of aspects.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area f is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area e. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holds of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the hold icon display area f of the special figure 1 of the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 1, and the hold icon is set to the hold according to the mode of each hold icon. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding the success or failure of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. An elliptical stage (pedestal image) indicating the display position of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the lower part of each of the first to fourth regions. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth hold ranks, respectively. The hold icon of the special figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (most previously stored) hold is displayed in the first area, and similarly, the special figure corresponding to the second to fourth hold is displayed in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, respectively. .. The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed so as to overlap the upper end of the pedestal image. Further, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a white circular shape. The white circular aspect is the default aspect, and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of aspects. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result is "undetermined" may be displayed in the default mode. The reliability of the default mode in this case is not set.

As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the hold icon is displayed in a smaller display size than the variable icon. This may make it easier to distinguish between the hold icon and the variable icon.

As shown in FIG. 208 (a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area g is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area e. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, the number of hold icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holds of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 related to the hold depending on the mode of each hold icon. It is possible to give a pre-reading notice of the success or failure of a variable game with a predetermined jackpot reliability. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed in the hold icon display area g of special figure 2. When the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), a horizontally long rectangular display area h is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area g. Be done. In the display area h, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as a description of how to play a game, a description of the production content, a description of a character, and a notice display as a character image.

The fifth symbol is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining three symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. While the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game is being executed, each symbol on the left, middle, and right of the fifth symbol is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> ...-> "9"-> "0"-> " The variable display of the fifth symbol, which is switched in the order of "1" → ..., is executed. In each figure, the variable display of the fifth symbol is indicated by a downward arrow. In the fifth symbol, three symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol variable game.

A horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and information about the current production stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the production stage is the castle town stage, the character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

In the upper left portion of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The number displayed on the left indicates the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, and the number displayed on the right indicates the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. "And the numbers" 0 "are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an eight-generation character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb. The Yashiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 195. The Yashiro accessory 224Fa is arranged on the upper left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the general accessory 224Fb is arranged on the upper right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right end of the Yashiro accessory 224F is. It is located adjacent to the left end of the Shogun's character 224Fb. The positions of the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb in the front-rear direction are the same, and are on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (“Yatsushiro” in this example) is written, and the shogun accessory 224Fb is the pachinko machine 100. It has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name etc. (in this example, "Shogun") is written. Further, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the Shogun character 224Fb have a full-color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the eight-generation accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb emit white light (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228).

The Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move up and down in a plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. be. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb are located at the initial positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment has a family crest accessory 224E. The family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. The family crest accessory 224E is arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 195. The position of the family crest accessory 224E in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. The family crest accessory 224E has a circular flat plate on which the family crest pattern is written. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a full-color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light (indicated by hatching rising to the right in FIGS. 208 to 228).

The family crest accessory 224E is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move in the vertical direction in the plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position.

The drive control (movement control) of the eight-generation accessory 224Fa, the general accessory 224Fb, and the family crest accessory 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the Yashiro accessory 224Fa, the shogun accessory 224Fb, and the family crest accessory 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 208 (a) and the subsequent drawings, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100, which is necessary for the explanation of the embodiment, is extracted and shown in the area on the paper surface separated by the alternate long and short dash line. As shown in FIG. 208 (a) and the subsequent drawings, the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left of the figure, and the chance button 136 and the operation buttons 710 such as the second chance button are shown in the lower left of the figure. Is schematically shown, and the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically shown in the upper right part of the figure. A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The operation button 710 is an operation means that can be operated by the player arranged on the front side of the front frame door 106. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for notifying the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special figure 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for special figure 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks white when it is lit during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and turns off during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks when it is lit during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and turns off during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The fourth symbol may be displayed on a display device such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.
(Example 1)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (r). FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (r) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was out of place. Is displayed as a stop (confirmed display, main stop display). Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-7-1" combination is stopped and displayed. The inside of the frame display surrounding each decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 1" is displayed in red, and the look-ahead notice of the red chance eye is executed. In this embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading notice of the chance eye, the character string image of "Stop of the same color symbol is ..." is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading notice of the chance eye is executed. It has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice of the chance eye is Hold 2 of Special Figure 1.

At the time shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icons f1 and f2 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle.

Further, in this embodiment, the castle town stage is set as the production stage. The background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A character string image of "castle town" is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current production stage name is notified.

FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which the variable icon e1 is erased. In this embodiment, the variable icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol. The variable icon e1 may be erased at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, may be erased at the same time as the variable display of the fourth and fifth symbols is stopped, and the variable icon e1 may be deleted at the same time as the variable display of the next decorative symbol. It may be erased at the same time as the start.

In FIG. 208 (c), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 208 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed at which the player can recognize the decorative symbol. It represents the state of being done. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and becomes the change icon. It moves to the display area e, and the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Each of the arrows in the figure represents the locus of the variable icon e2 and the locus of the hold icon f2. At the time shown in FIG. 208 (c), the hold icon reduction animation has ended, and the movement of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2 has been completed.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area h. In this example, the character string image "chance due to pending change" is displayed in the display area h.

FIG. 208 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In FIG. 208 (d), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed in a variable manner at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol. Represents the state of being. The variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a low-speed variation display at the beginning, and is displayed in a high-speed variation display after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation.

FIG. 208 (e) shows a state in which the change notice display has started to be displayed. The change notice display j of this embodiment is a pattern of a treasure box, and the display is started in a manner of gradually moving downward to the right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change. In this case, the change notice display j may be a look-ahead notice display. The change notice display j may be a display for notifying that the mode of the change icon will change. The change notice display j in this case may be a notice display of the change.

FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which the movement of the change notice display j has stopped and the display start of the change notice display j has been completed. A change notice display j is displayed in the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown in the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

FIG. 208 (g) shows a state in which the change notice display j of the treasure box is opened and the animation in which the blue circular change candidate display (change candidate icon) k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change. In this case, the change notice icon k may be a look-ahead notice display. The change notice icon k may be a display for notifying that the mode of the change icon will change. The change notice display JJ in this case may be a notice display of the change.

FIG. 208 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The target of the look-ahead notice is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, and the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 208 (h), the change notice icon k is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the change notice icon k is the display of the change notice, an animation in which the change notice icon k moves toward the change icon is displayed.

FIG. 208 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f2. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

FIG. 208 (j) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k overlaps a part of the hold icon f2, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f2 changes is displayed. When the change notice icon k overlaps the entire hold icon f2, the change notice icon k may be deleted and the effect image m may be displayed instead. Further, when the change notice icon k overlaps at least a part of the hold icon f2, the effect image m may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the change notice icon k and the hold icon f2. Further, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon f2.

FIG. 208 (k) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f2 has changed from a white circle to a blue circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display. When the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may be changed to either a green circle or a red circle instead of the blue circle. Further, when the hold change display is performed by the green change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may be changed to any of a green circle, a red circle, and a gold circle. Further, when the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may not change to a golden circle. Further, when the red hold icon is displayed, the green change candidate display or the blue change candidate display may be displayed. In this case, in addition to the red hold icon, the white circular hold icon may be displayed, or the white circular hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the green change candidate display or the blue change candidate display is displayed, the mode with higher jackpot reliability (for example, red circle) than the mode of the hold icon corresponding to these change candidate supplementary displays. The hold icon does not change. When a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed and a hold change display in which a hold icon with a high jackpot reliability such as a red circle or a gold circle changes is performed, the hold change display is performed. The icon may change to a premier aspect (eg, iridescent circle).

FIG. 208 (l) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f2 is no longer performed.

FIG. 208 (m) shows a state immediately before the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a due to the slow speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a. The downward arrow shown below the "decoration 7" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 208 (n) shows a state in which the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation display) in the left symbol display area 208a in a mode in which the "decoration 7" slightly shakes up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variable display.

FIG. 208 (o) shows a state immediately before the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c as the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c becomes further slowed down. The downward arrow shown below "Decoration 6" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the low-speed variable display.

FIG. 208 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the "decoration 6" slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display becomes further slower, and the state immediately before the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The downward arrow shown below the "decoration 6" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol.

FIG. 208 (q) shows a state in which the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed (swaying fluctuation display) in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly shakes up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. As a result, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a design mode, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 208 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can change the mode of the hold icon to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to suggest the changed mode of the hold icon depending on the mode of the change candidate display.
(Example 2)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (p). Each of FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (p) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 209 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle.

Further, in this embodiment, the castle town stage is set as the production stage. The background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A character string image of "castle town" is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current production stage name is notified. In the display area for displaying the effect stage name, it may be notified that the mode of the hold icon is likely to change.

FIG. 209 (b) shows a state in which the change notice display j is started to be displayed. The change notice display j of this embodiment is a pattern of a treasure box, and the display is started in a manner of gradually moving downward to the right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change.

FIG. 209 (c) shows a state in which the movement of the change notice display j has stopped and the display start of the change notice display j has been completed. A change notice display j is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown in the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

FIG. 209 (d) shows a state in which the change notice display j of the treasure box is opened and the animation in which the blue circular change notice icon k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change. The change notice display j is a display for causing the change notice icon k to appear, and may be deleted after the change notice icon k appears. While the change notice display j is hidden, no new change candidate display is displayed.

FIG. 209 (e) shows a state in which the character display n of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune n”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed.

FIG. 209 (f) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display (hereinafter, referred to as “change item”) o. The change item o is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed.

FIG. 209 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 209 (g). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 209 (h) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

FIG. 209 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o overlaps a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

FIG. 209 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and as a result of the change display, the type of the change notice icon k changes from a blue circle to a green circle (indicated by cross-hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). There is. There are multiple types of change candidate displays, one of the multiple types of change candidate displays is a blue circular change candidate display, and one of the multiple types of change candidate displays is green. It is a circular change candidate display. The hold icon is set to be more likely to change to a mode with high jackpot reliability when the change candidate display of the green circle is displayed than when the change candidate display of the blue circle is displayed. In this way, the change candidate display of the blue circle may change to the change candidate display of the green circle.

FIG. 209 (k) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display targeting the change notice icon k is no longer performed. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display targeting the change notice icon k may be displayed again.

FIG. 209 (l) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. Since the target of the look-ahead notice is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 209 (l), the change notice icon k is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 209 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

FIG. 209 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 209 (o) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same green circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 209 (p) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display targeting the hold icon f1 is no longer performed.

The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and are blue. The circular change candidate display may change to a green circular change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the change candidate display may change, so that the change candidate display may be enjoyed until the change candidate display is deleted.

The mode of the hold icon is set with high jackpot reliability in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and rainbow color circle. The jackpot reliability of the change candidate display may be set in the same manner. In addition, when the mode changes, the hold icon always changes to a mode with higher jackpot reliability than the mode before the change.

The types of change candidate display are set with high expectations in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and rainbow circle. The higher the degree of expectation here, the more easily the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, which is the change display target, is set. In the case of the hold icon or the variable icon, the mode may be set so as to always change to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display, or may change to a mode different from the mode corresponding to the change candidate display. May be good. In addition, when the change candidate display changes, it always changes to the change candidate display mode having a higher degree of expectation than before the change.

Further, when the change candidate display of the green circle is displayed, the hold icon in the white circle mode is configured to be more likely to change to the green circle mode than in the blue circle mode. The jackpot reliability of the hold icon is set to increase in the order of the white circular mode, the blue circular mode, and the green circular mode. For this reason, the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circular mode is digested rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the white circular shape. The variable display of the decorative symbol to be started is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circular mode is digested and started. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the green circular mode, is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is configured as follows.
(Example 3)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (m). Each of FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (m) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 210 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, in FIG. 210 (a), the change notice display j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change.

Further, in this embodiment, the castle town stage is set as the production stage. The background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A character string image of "castle town" is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current production stage name is notified.

FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the change notice display j of the treasure box is opened and the animation in which the blue circular change notice icon k1 appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k1 in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change.

FIG. 210 (c) shows a state in which an animation in which a green circular change notice icon k2 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, the upper right arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change. As in this example, the change notice icon k1 may be started to be displayed, and then the change notice icon k2 may be started to be displayed, or the change notice icons k1 and k2 may be started to be displayed at the same time. When a plurality of change candidate displays are started to be displayed, the display may be started in order from the change candidate display having the lowest expectation.

FIG. 210 (d) shows a state in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are different types of change candidate displays. In this way, a plurality of different types of change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of blue circular change candidate displays may be displayed, or a plurality of green circular change candidate displays may be displayed. Multiple change candidate displays of the same type may be displayed.

FIG. 210 (e) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 210 (e), the change notice icon k1 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change notice icon k1 is displayed. A part of k1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 210 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 approaches the hold icon f1. The change notice icon k1 of this example passes on the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1.

FIG. 210 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 disappears from the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice icon k1 of this example passes through the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1 and is erased. As described above, the change notice icon k1 of this example is not displayed before the start of the hold change display, but is displayed as a ghost effect display of the hold change display.

FIG. 210 (h) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is erased. The change notice icon k1 is completely erased in such a manner that it disappears from the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 210 (i) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. Since the target of the look-ahead notice is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 210 (i), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 210 (j) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 210 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 210 (l) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same green color as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 210 (m) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display targeting the hold icon f1 is no longer performed.

The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of change candidate displays. In this embodiment, the change notice icon k1 is not displayed before the start of the hold change display, but is displayed as a ghost effect display of the hold change display, and the change notice icon k2 is displayed before the start of the hold change display, and is held. The icon f1 changes to a mode corresponding to the change notice icon k2. In this way, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may be changed to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of change candidate displays. The first display is the state in which only one change notice icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (b), and the change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (d) is the change notice icon k1. The case where two of, k2 and k2 are displayed may be used as the second display. Further, the change notice icon k1 may be the first change candidate display, or the change notice icon k2 may be the second change candidate display.
(Example 4)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (m). Each figure of FIGS. 211A to 211M is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 211A, since the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is 0, the holding icon f1 is displayed in the holding icon display area f of the special drawing 1. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

Further, in this embodiment, the castle town stage is set as the production stage. The background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A character string image of "castle town" is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current production stage name is notified.

FIG. 211B shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed.

FIG. 211 (c) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed.

FIG. 211 (d) shows a state in which the animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 211 (d). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in FIG. 211 (e), a part of the change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2. In this example, the change item o is an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k1 and is not an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k2. Therefore, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. do. When the change item o is an effect display for changing the type of the change notice icon k2, the change display of the change notice icon k2 may be started immediately after the time shown in FIG. 211 (e). The change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. By displaying an animation in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2, it may be possible to know which of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes until the change display is started.

FIG. 211 (f) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k1. When the change item o passes the change notice icon k2 on the right side as in this example, there is a high possibility that the change notice icon k1 on the left side will change. Even when the change item o is displayed, neither of the change notice icons k1 and k2 may change.

FIG. 211 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o overlaps with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 211 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from a blue circle to a red circle. One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a red circular change candidate display.

FIG. 211 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display targeting the change notice icon k1 is no longer performed. When Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display targeting the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

FIG. 211 (j) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. Since the target of the look-ahead notice is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 211 (j), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 211 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 211 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 211 (m) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same green color as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 211 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are erased. When the change notice icon k1 is deleted, the hold change display of the hold icon or the change display of the change icon using the change notice icon k1 is not displayed. Further, when the change notice display j is deleted, the change display by the change candidate display targeting the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1 is no longer performed. If the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j continue to be displayed, there is a possibility that the change display for the hold icon or the change icon is performed using the change notice icon k1. Further, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display changes from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having the lower jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) among the plurality of change candidate displays. Here, the jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the hold icon after the change. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), when the blue change candidate display and the green change candidate display are displayed, the change is changed from the blue change candidate display. The green change display may also change after the blue change candidate display changes.
(Example 5)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e). Each of FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 212, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 212 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, Yoshimune n having the change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which the animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 212 (b). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, even when the change item o is displayed, the change display that changes the change notice icons k1 and k2 is not performed, and the change item o faces the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It does not overlap with the change notice icons k1 and k2.

FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is erased. The change item o is erased in a manner of moving downward on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The disappointing Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is suggested that the failure effect in which the effect of changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 was not executed was executed.

FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the effect display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 by the change item o is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, a failure effect is executed in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 do not change even when the change item o is displayed. The failure effect of this example may be executed when only one change candidate display is displayed, or may be executed when three or more different types of change candidate displays are displayed. However, it may be executed when two or more change candidate displays of the same type are displayed.
(Example 6)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (f) to 212 (i). Each of FIGS. 212 (f) to 212 (i) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 212, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 212 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 212 (f), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is placed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Before the state shown in FIG. 212 (f) is reached, an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change icon o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the change icon o changes a part of the change item o. It is displayed overlapping with a part of the notice icon k2. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown on the right side of the change icon o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 212 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed to be stopped between the change notice icons k1 and k2 in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The target of the change display by the change item o in this example is the change notice icons k1 and k2.

FIG. 212 (h) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image M is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icons k1 and k2. When the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image M, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed. The effect image M may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icons k1 and k2.

FIG. 212 (i) shows a state in which the effect image M is erased. The deletion of the effect image M is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from a blue circle to a red circle, and the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from a green circle to a gold color ( It changes to a circle (indicated by vertical hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228).

In this embodiment, the two change notice icons k1 and k2 are changed by one change display. Even when the effect image M is displayed overlapping with both the change notice icons k1 and k2 as in this example, only the change candidate display of either one of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes. You may.
(Example 7)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (j) to (o) and FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c). Each figure of FIGS. 212 (j) to 213 (c) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 212 and 213, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 212 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 212 (f), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is placed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

Further, before the state shown in FIG. 212 (j) is reached, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are started to be displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and FIG. 212 In the state shown in (j), the movement animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, since the pre-reading notice target is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. The change notice icon k1 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a part of the change notice icon k1 is a part of the change notice icon k2. It is displayed overlapping with.

FIG. 212 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

FIG. 212 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k1 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 212 (m) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f2 has changed from a white circle to a blue circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 212 (n) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 212 (o) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 213 (a) continues to show the state from FIG. 212 (o). In FIG. 213 (a), the change notice icon k2 is erased, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 213 (b) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a blue circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the look-ahead notice target changes to the same green color as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 213 (c) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display targeting the hold icon f1 is no longer performed.

In this embodiment, the mode of the hold icon f1 changes twice. In this way, the mode of one hold icon may change a plurality of times.
(Example 8)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 (d) to 213 (o). Each of FIGS. 213 (d) to 213 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 213, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 213 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 213 (d), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is placed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 213 (e) shows a state in which the character display of the roar (hereinafter referred to as “roar”) p is started to be displayed in the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The roar p is displayed so as to overlap almost the entire change notice display j. Even while the roar p is displayed, the change notice display j is difficult to see, but it continues to be displayed. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change candidate display is shattered using the roar p.

FIG. 213 (f) shows a state in which the animation in which the change candidate display is shattered has been started. Todoroki p is posing when crushing the change candidate display.

FIG. 213 (g) shows a state in which a cracked animation is displayed on the change notice icon k1. In this example, the blue change notice icon k2, which has a lower expectation than the green change notice icon k2, is deleted. In this way, when one of the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display having a low expectation is likely to be deleted. When one of the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display having a low expectation may be deleted without fail. Further, when the change candidate display having a low expectation is deleted, the expectation of success of the pending change display by the remaining high-expectation change candidate display may be high.

FIG. 213 (h) shows a state in which an animation in which the change notice icon k1 is shattered into pieces is displayed. In this example, the change notice icon k1 is erased in a crushed manner.

FIG. 213 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is erased. The state in which only one change notice icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 213 (i) is set as the second display, and the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 213 (d) to 213 (h) is displayed. The case where two change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed may be the first display.

FIG. 213 (j) shows a state in which the roar p has been erased. When the roar p is deleted, the change notice icon k2 is deleted. The animation is not performed. If the roar p is not erased and continues to be displayed, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 is erased may be displayed in the same manner as the change notice icon k1.

FIG. 213 (k) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, since the change notice icon k2 is displayed for the effect display that changes the mode of the change icon, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the change icon e1 is displayed. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 213 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 213 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon e1. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 213 (n) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the mode of the variable icon e1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the variable icon e1 changes to the same green color as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the variable icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 213 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the change display by the change candidate display targeting the change icon e1 is no longer performed.

In this embodiment, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one of the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted. In addition, a plurality of change candidate displays may be deleted. After the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (j) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to 213 (i) may be performed, or the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to 213 (i) are shown. After the effect shown is performed, the change display in which the type of the change candidate display changes may be performed. In this embodiment, the change display of the variable icon is performed in FIGS. 213 (j) to 213 (n), but even if the hold change display is performed in which the hold icon changes instead of the change display of the change icon. good.
(Example 9)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (o). Each of FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 214, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 214 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is placed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 214B shows a state in which a movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves has been started. In this example, the change notice icon k2 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the figure, the upper right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the change icon e1. In the figure, the upper right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

FIG. 214 (d) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m1 is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m1 is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m1, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

Further, FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is erased and the effect image m2 is displayed so as to overlap the entire variable icon e1. When the change notice icon k1 overlaps with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m2 is displayed in its place. By displaying the effect image m2, a change display in which the mode of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 214 (g) shows a state in which the effect image m1 is erased. The erasure of the effect image m1 is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same green color as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 214 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m2 is erased. The erasure of the effect image m2 is the end of the change display of the variable icon, and the change display is performed, so that the mode of the variable icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the variable icon e1 changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the variable icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

FIG. 214 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which a red circular change notice icon k3 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k3 represents the locus of the change notice icon k3. In this embodiment, the change notice display j is not erased even after the change effect of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 shown in FIGS. 214 (e) to 214 (g) is completed, and further change candidate displays appear from the change notice display j1. An animation is displayed.

FIG. 214 (j) shows a state in which the animation in which the change notice icon k3 appears has ended. The stationary start of the change notice icon k3 is the end of the animation.

FIG. 214 (k) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k3 moves is started. The change notice icons k and 3 are displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k3 moves toward the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. This makes it difficult to understand whether the change target is the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1, and whether it is both the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1, so that the player pays attention to the change target icon. May be possible.

FIG. 214 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k3 has moved between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. The change notice icon k3 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1 and a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

FIG. 214 (m) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are displayed. The effect image m1 is displayed overlapping the hold icon f1, the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping the change notice icon k3, and the effect image m3 is displayed overlapping the change icon e1. Due to the effect images m1, m2, and m3, the hold icon f1, the variable icon e1, and the change notice icon k3 become invisible. When the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are started to be displayed, the change notice icon k3 may be deleted.

FIG. 214 (n) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are erased. Prior to the effect images m1, m2, and m3 being erased, the change notice icon k3 is erased. Erasing the effect images m1, m2, and m3 is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed. Therefore, in this example, the mode of the variable icon e1 changes from a blue circle to a red circle, and the hold icon f1. Aspect remains a green circle. In this example, the change notice icon k3 is a display used for the change display that changes the mode of the change notice icon e1, and the change icon e1 changes to the same red color as the change notice icon k3. The change notice icon k3 may be a display used for the hold change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1, and the change notice icon k3 is used for the change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. May be done.

FIG. 214 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display j is erased. When the change notice display j is deleted, the change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 is no longer performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), the movement animation of the change notice icon k1 is started before the result of the change display by the change notice icon k2 is displayed. The change display by the change notice icon k2 targets the hold icon f1, and the change display by the change notice icon k1 targets the change icon e1. When a plurality of hold icons are displayed, the change display by the change notice icon k1 may target a hold icon other than the hold icon f1. Further, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), even after the change notice icons k1 and k2 are erased, the change notice display is not erased, and a new change notice icon k3 appears. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be difficult to understand which icon the change display by the change candidate display is intended for, and the player may be able to pay attention to the target and the result of the change display.
(Example 10)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (n). Each of FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (n) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 215, the family crest accessory 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 215 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is placed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 215 (b) shows a state immediately before the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a due to the slow speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a. The downward arrow shown below the "decoration 7" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a mode in which the “decoration 7” is slightly shaken up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variable display.

FIG. 215 (d) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c as the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c becomes further slowed down. The downward arrow shown below "Decoration 6" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the low-speed variable display.

FIG. 215 (e) shows a state in which the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a mode in which the “decoration 6” is slightly shaken up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display becomes further slower, and the state immediately before the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The downward arrow shown below the "decoration 6" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol.

FIG. 215 (f) shows a state in which the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed (swaying fluctuation display) in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly shakes up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. As a result, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a design mode, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 215 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the change notice display j and the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even during the stop display of the decorative symbol (during the symbol stop display).

FIG. 215 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon erasing animation is started. The variable icon e1 is erased in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the figure, the downward arrow shown above the variable icon e1 represents the locus of the variable icon e1. The variable icon erase animation of this example is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable icon erasing animation may be started during the variable display of the decorative symbol and ended during the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. You may end up inside.

FIG. 215 (i) shows a state in which the variable icon erasing animation is displayed. The variable icon e1 moves downward and is gradually erased.

FIG. 215 (j) shows a state in which the variable icon erasing animation is completed. The completion of erasing the fluctuating icon e1 is the end of the fluctuating icon erasing animation.

In FIG. 215 (k), with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. The variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a low-speed variation display at the beginning, and is displayed in a high-speed variation display after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 0.

FIG. 215 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and starts moving toward the change icon display area e. In the figure, the upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the variable icon e2 represents the locus of the variable icon e2.

FIG. 215 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of moving the variable icon e2 to the variable icon display area e is the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

FIG. 215 (n) shows a state in which the display size of the variable icon e2 is enlarged. The display size of the variable icon is expanded after the movement to the variable icon display area e is completed. The display size of the variable icon may be enlarged during the movement display (during the hold icon reduction animation display).

In this embodiment, the change notice icons k1 and k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation games. The change notice icons k1, k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure change games than when the change notice icons k1 and k2 and the change notice display are displayed during one special figure change game. In the case, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon or the variation icon that is the target of the change display.
(Example 11)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (j). 216 (a), (c) to (e), and (g) to (j) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 216 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 216 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. In this example, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one.

FIG. 216 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. A numerical image of "2" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is notified that the number of reserved special figures 1 has increased by 1 to 2. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon increase animation has been started. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in a manner of gradually moving from the bottom toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The display of "2", which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the display of the hold icon increase animation are started at the same time, and the game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Almost at the same time. The aspect of the hold icon f2 is a blue circle.

FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation has ended. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is the end of the hold icon increase animation. Further, after the hold icon increase animation ends, the display of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image q1 is an image that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136. In the gauge image q2, the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) of the chance button 136 is displayed by the length of the blue portion (indicated by hatching rising to the right). The operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. The button image q1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 is displayed in red during the operation valid period. The button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are displays prompting the player to operate (press) the chance button 136. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 may be started before the button image q1 gauge image q2 is started to be displayed, or may be started after the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. good. The display of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 start at the same time as the start of the hold icon increase animation (almost at the same time as the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230). There may be.

FIG. 216 (e) shows the state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue part of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is notified that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion of the gauge image q2 becomes shorter toward the left as the operation valid period elapses.

FIG. 216 (f) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

FIG. 216 (g) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are erased, and the effect image m4 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M instead. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

FIG. 216 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m4 is erased. The change notice display j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M instead of the effect image m4.

FIG. 216 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 216 (j), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and becomes the change icon display area. Moves to e, and the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. At the time shown in FIG. 216 (j), the hold icon reduction animation has ended, and the movement of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2 has been completed.

In this embodiment, the change notice display is displayed as the operation response display of the chance button 136. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the change notice display and the change candidate display may not be displayed.
(Example 12)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 (a) to 217 (o). FIGS. 217 (a) and 217 (c) to (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 217 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 217 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. In this example, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one.

FIG. 217 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. A numerical image of "2" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is notified that the number of reserved special figures 1 has increased by 1 to 2. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon increase animation has been started. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in a manner of gradually moving from the bottom toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The display of "2", which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the display of the hold icon increase animation are started at the same time, and the game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Almost at the same time. The hold icon f2 is displayed in a circular shape that turns white when lit (hereinafter referred to as a “white flashing circular mode” (indicated by vertical hatching of thin vertical lines in FIG. 217)). The white flashing circular mode is a mode in which the mode is more likely to change to a blue circle, a green circle, a red circle, or an iridescent circle than the white circular mode.

FIG. 217 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation has ended. The hold icon f2 has completed the movement to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area is the end of the hold icon increase animation. Further, after the end of the hold icon increase animation, the change notice display r1 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r1 is a display including a character display of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune") and a display imitating a signboard (hereinafter referred to as "signboard"). A character string image of "changes with the next fluctuation !?" is displayed in the signboard, suggesting that the mode of the hold icon changes during the next special figure movement game. The change notice display r1 of this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon will change, similar to the change notice display j shown in FIG. 208 and the like. In this example, the change notice display r1 is a display for notifying that the hold icon f2 in the mode of blinking white is changed. The hold icon for the change notice display r1 may always be in the mode of blinking white. The change notice display r1 may be started to be displayed during the hold icon increase animation, or may be started to be displayed at the same time as the hold icon increase animation ends.

FIG. 217 (e) shows a state in which the character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 is erased. The character string image in the signboard is deleted at the end of the special figure variable game or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. The change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol being temporarily stopped even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 217 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the "decoration 7" displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding the "decoration 7".

In FIG. 217 (g), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. It shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and becomes the change icon display area. Moves to e, and the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon reduction animation has ended, and the movement of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2 has been completed. After the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a. In this way, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative symbol except during the stop display of the decorative symbol. In addition, a character string image of "Ho 1 is! Blue!" Is displayed in the signboard of the change notice display r1, suggesting that the hold icon f2 corresponding to hold 1 may change to a blue circular mode. There is. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 after FIG. 217 (g) is a display of the change candidate display. The hold icon f2 may change in a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard.

FIG. 217 (h) shows a state in which Yoshimune r2 having a bow and arrow is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The Yoshimune r2 is a display corresponding to the Yoshimune n and the change item o shown in FIG. 209 and the like, and is a display for changing the change notice display r1.

FIG. 217 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune r2 shoots an arrow is displayed. The arrow is flying toward the sign of the change notice display r1.

FIG. 217 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m4 is started to be displayed by overlapping substantially the entire signboard of the change notice display r1. When an arrow sticks in the signboard of the change notice display r1, the effect image m4 starts to be displayed. The effect image m4 displays a change in the mode of the change notice display r1.

FIG. 217 (k) shows a state in which the effect image m4 is erased. After erasing the effect image m4, the change notice display r1 in which the character string image in the signboard is changed to "Ho 1 is! Red !!!" is displayed. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 suggests that the hold icon f2 corresponding to hold 1 may change to a red circular mode.

FIG. 217 (l) shows a state in which Yoshimune r2 is erased. When Yoshimune r2 is deleted, the change display for the notice change display r1 is no longer performed. If Yoshimune r2 is continuously displayed, the change display targeting the change notice display r1 may be displayed again.

FIG. 217 (m) shows a state in which the pending change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the pending change display.

FIG. 217 (n) shows a state in which the pending change display has ended. The erasure of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. In this way, the hold icon f2 changes in a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 may change during the hold change display, or may change at the same time as the end of the hold change display.

FIG. 217 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display r1 is erased. When the change notice display r1 is deleted, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 is no longer performed. Even after the change notice display r1 is erased, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG. 217.

In this embodiment, the change candidate display is displayed in the change notice display r3. The expectation of change candidate display is set for each color like the change notice icon k, etc., and is set to increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow". ing. The change candidate display including the "blue" character image shown in FIGS. 217 (g) to 217 (i) is the first display, and the change including the "red" character image shown in FIGS. 217 (k) to 217 (n). The candidate display may be the second display.
(Example 13)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 219 (a) to (r). 218 (a) to (r) and 219 (a) to 219 (r) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was out of place. Is displayed as a stop (confirmed display, main stop display). Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-7-1" combination is stopped and displayed. The inside of the frame display surrounding each decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 1" is displayed in red, and the look-ahead notice of the red chance eye is executed. In this embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading notice of the chance eye, the character string image of "Stop of the same color symbol is ..." is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading notice of the chance eye is executed. It has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice of the chance eye is Hold 1 of Special Figure 1. Further, since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a red circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this embodiment, Yoshimune n is a character display that is always displayed. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 218 (b) shows a state in which the variable icon e1 is erased. In this embodiment, the variable icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol.

In FIG. 218 (c), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 218 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed at which the player can recognize the decorative symbol. It represents the state of being done. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and becomes the change icon. Move to the display area e. The arrow in the figure represents the locus of the variable icon e2. At the time shown in FIG. 218 (c), the hold icon reduction animation has ended, and the movement of the variable icon e2 has been completed.

FIG. 218 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the variable display is displayed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes in the left symbol display area 208a. The display has changed to a slow variable display.

FIG. 218 (e) shows a state immediately before the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a due to the slow speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a. The downward arrow shown below the "decoration 7" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 218 (f) shows a state in which the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a mode in which the “decoration 7” is slightly shaken up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variable display.

FIG. 218 (g) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c as the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c becomes further slowed down. The downward arrow shown below "Decoration 6" in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative pattern is displayed.

FIG. 218 (h) shows a state in which the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a mode in which the “decoration 6” is slightly shaken up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

FIG. 218 (i) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is changed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Immediately before the "continuation" decorative symbol including the "continuation" character string image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The downward arrow shown below the "continue" decorative symbol in the figure indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol. The "continue" decorative symbol is displayed when the pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing a pseudo-variation as if the change display of the decorative symbol was performed a plurality of times during one special figure change game, and is a notice effect of the change. The variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 218 (c) to 218 (j) is the first pseudo variation. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display as the number of continuations of the pseudo variation of the pseudo-ream increases.

FIG. 218 (j) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of “continuation” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner of slightly swinging up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "continuation" decorative symbol indicate that the "continuation" decorative symbol is slightly swaying up and down. The decorative symbol of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 218 (k) shows a state in which the cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the second pseudo-variation is started. The cut-in display overlaps with the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Continued-Decoration 6".

FIG. 218 (l) shows a state immediately before the start of the second pseudo-variation. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of "x2" is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is notified that the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The "x2" image is displayed so as to overlap a part of "decoration 7".

FIG. 218 (m) shows a state in which the second pseudo-variation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display is performed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

FIG. 218 (n) shows a reduced state of the “x2” image.

FIG. 218 (o) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is changed to a low-speed variable display.

FIG. 218 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Due to the temporary stop display of "decoration 4", the reach effect display in which "decoration 4" is displayed is started in the variable display of the decorative design. Further, a character string image of "If SP stops ..." is displayed in the display area h, and it is suggested that SP (super) reach is started when the decorative pattern of "SP" is displayed. ing.

FIG. 218 (q) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the low-speed variable display.

FIG. 218 (q) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of “SP” including the character string image of “SP” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The decorative symbol of "SP" is displayed when the SP reach is started.

FIG. 219 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 218 (q). In FIG. 219 (a), SP reach is started, the left symbol display area 208a is reduced to the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol display area 208c is the first decorative symbol display. It is reduced to the upper right corner of the display area of the device 208L. During SP reach, the frame display surrounding the decorative pattern is hidden.

FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which candidates for the development destination of SP reach are displayed. A character string image of "Where is the development?" Is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, candidate display s1 is displayed on the left side of the display area, and candidate display is displayed on the right side of the display area. s2 is displayed. The candidate display s1 includes a character string image of "drinking comparison", and the candidate display s2 notifies that the candidate of the development destination is a drinking comparison effect. Further, the candidate display s2 includes a character string image of "bowling", and the candidate display s2 notifies that the candidate for the development destination is a bowling effect. The number of "★" images included in the candidate displays s1 and s2 is a display suggesting the jackpot reliability of each effect. In this example, one image of "★" is included in the candidate display s1, and two images of "★" are included in the candidate display s2. Therefore, the bowling effect is better than the drinking comparison effect. Is set with high jackpot reliability. Further, a roulette display is displayed between the candidate displays s1 and s2.

FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which the roulette display is started. During roulette display, the arrows in the roulette display are rotated clockwise. In the figure, the arrows shown above and below the roulette display indicate that the arrows in the roulette display are rotating clockwise. Further, the character string image of "Ikuzo" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The character string image is a display suggesting that the change display of the candidate display is started.

FIG. 219 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is started to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this embodiment, the change item o is used for the change display in which the modes of the candidate displays s1 and s2 change.

FIG. 219 (e) shows a state in which the animation in which the change item o is thrown by Yoshimune n is displayed. In this example, the target of the change display is the candidate display s1, and the change item o is flying toward the candidate display s1. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown to the right of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 219 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed so as to overlap the candidate display s1. After the change item o is displayed so as to overlap the candidate display s1, the change display in which the mode of the candidate display s1 changes is started.

FIG. 219 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m6 is started to be displayed instead. The effect image m6 is displayed so as to overlap the entire characters of the candidate display s1 and the “★” portion. By displaying the effect image m6, a change display is performed in which the mode of the candidate display s1 changes.

FIG. 219 (h) shows a state in which the change display is completed. Erasing the effect image m6 is the end of the change display. A character string image of "swordsman" and three "★" are displayed in the candidate display s1, and the mode of the candidate display s1 is changed. In the candidate display s1 after the change display, it is notified that the candidate for the development destination is the production of the swordsman confrontation. In addition, three "★" are displayed in the candidate display s1, and the jackpot reliability is set higher in the swordsman confrontation production than in the bowling production.

FIG. 219 (i) shows a state in which the blessing effect that succeeds in displaying the change is being executed. The mode of Yoshimune n displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has changed to a mode in which the guts pose is performed, and the blessing effect is executed by the Yoshimune n in the guts pose. In addition, as the effect of the change display of the candidate display s1, the effect of the failure pattern in which the mode of the candidate display s1 does not change may be provided. When the effect of the change display of the candidate display is a success pattern, the effect shown by the candidate display after the change display has higher jackpot reliability than the effect shown by the candidate display before the change display. Further, the effect shown by the candidate display (candidate display s1) after the change display may have a higher expectation of big hit than the effect shown by the candidate display (candidate display s2) that is not the target of the change display.

FIG. 219 (j) shows a state in which it is notified that the development destination is the production of the swordsman confrontation. The arrow in the roulette display is stopped in the direction pointing to the candidate display s1 (to the left), and it is notified that the development destination is the production of the swordsman confrontation.

FIG. 219 (k) shows a state in which it is notified that the development destination is the production of the swordsman confrontation. The effect image m7 is displayed so as to surround the candidate display s1, and it is notified that the development destination is the production of the swordsman confrontation.

FIG. 219 (l) shows a state immediately before the production of the swordsman confrontation is started. Prior to the start of the swordsman confrontation, the character string image of "Where is the development?", Candidate displays s1, s2, roulette display, and Yoshimune n are deleted.

FIG. 219 (m) shows a state in which the production of the swordsman confrontation has started. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L, an animation in which a swordsman appears is displayed.

FIG. 219 (n) shows a state in which the confrontation between Yoshimune and the swordfighter has started. The production of the swordsman confrontation is a production in which an animation of a duel between Yoshimune and the swordsman is displayed. The character display of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display of the swordsman is displayed on the right side of the display area. Further, in this example, the variable icon e2 is displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation. The pedestal display in the variable icon display area e may be displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation.

FIG. 219 (o) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and a swordfighter slash each other is displayed.

FIG. 219 (p) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune won the confrontation is displayed. While the scene is being displayed, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 219 (q) shows a state in which the production of the swordsman confrontation is completed and "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The end of the swordsman confrontation production is the end of the SP reach, and after the end of the SP reach, the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is started. The variable icon e2 is deleted during the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4". The variable icon e2 may be displayed during the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4".

FIG. 219 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit (“special figure C”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game was a jackpot. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "4-4-4" combination is stopped and displayed. Further, when the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is turned on in the light emitting mode of the big hit.

In this embodiment, the candidate display of the development destination changes. The candidate display changes to a display showing an effect display with higher jackpot reliability than before the change. It should be noted that the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 and 219 can be performed after the hold icon, the change icon, and the change display of the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 208 to 217 are displayed.
(Example 14)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 (a) to 220 (p) and FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (h), a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 14th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. 220 (a), (c), (d), (f) to (p) and 221 (a), (b), (d) to (h) are the pachinko machines according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows 100 in time series. FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 220 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. In this example, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one.

FIG. 220 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball wins a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230. A numerical image of "2" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is notified that the number of reserved special figures 1 has increased by 1 to 2. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon increase animation has been started. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in a manner of gradually moving from the bottom toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The display of "2", which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the display of the hold icon increase animation are started at the same time, and the game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Almost at the same time. The aspect of the hold icon f2 is a white circle. Further, in the present embodiment, the button icon t1 is started to be displayed together with the hold icon f2 by the hold icon increase animation. The button icon t1 is a display that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and is displayed in red. The button icon t1 is displayed above the hold icon f2 and moves upward along with the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 may be a part of the hold icon f2, or the button icon t1 may be displayed as the hold icon f2.

FIG. 220 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation has ended. The hold icon f2 has completed the movement to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the button icon t1 has completed the movement. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area and the completion of the movement of the button icon t1 are the ends of the hold icon increase animation. When the button icon t1 completes the movement, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. After that, while the button icon t1 is being displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is set. The button icon t1 is a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, when the operation valid period starts, the chance button 136 emits red light.

FIG. 220 (e) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

FIG. 220 (f) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, the change notice display r3 of the image imitating the signboard is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. As described above, the change notice display may be started when the chance button 136 is operated while the hold icon in the form of the button icon is displayed. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2, which is the target of the hold change display. Further, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with the change display of the decorative pattern. A character string image of "blue or red" is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include the change candidate display. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

In FIG. 220 (g), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the left symbol display area 208a at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol, and “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 220 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with the "decoration 7" in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 220 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping with the "decoration 7" displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding the "decoration 7".

In FIG. 220 (j), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. It should be noted that the illustration of the variable icon erasing animation displayed during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game is omitted. The variable icon e1 is deleted by the variable icon erase animation. Further, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 220 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation has started. Due to the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the variable icon e2 and moves to the variable icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the above moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The change notice display r3 moves together with the hold icon f2.

FIG. 220 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation has ended. The movement of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed. After the hold icon reduction animation ends, the princess character display (hereinafter referred to as "princess") r4 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Princess r4 is a display suggesting that the change candidate display changes. The princess r4 may be started to be displayed at the same time as the start of the change of the decorative symbol, may be started to be displayed during the display of the hold icon reduction animation, or may be started to be displayed at the same time as the end of the hold icon reduction animation. ..

FIG. 220 (m) shows a state in which it is notified that the change display of the change candidate display is started. A character string image of "change" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and it is notified that the change display is started.

FIG. 220 (n) shows a state in which the change display of the change candidate display is started. In the change display, an animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is displayed. The start of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the start of the change display. At the time of the change display, the player may be able to recognize the character string image (“blue or red” or “green or red”) of the change candidate display.

FIG. 220 (o) shows a state in which the change display of the change candidate display is completed. The change candidate display included in the change notice display r3 has changed from "blue or red" to a character string image of "green or red". The end of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the end of the change display.

FIG. 220 (p) shows a state in which the princess r4 is erased. Even after the princess r4 is erased, the change display of the change candidate display may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG. 220.

FIG. 221 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 220 (p). In FIG. 221 (a), the button image and the gauge image are displayed so as to overlap the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image and the gauge image are started to be displayed. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation valid period.

FIG. 221B shows a state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue part of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is notified that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion of the gauge image q2 becomes shorter toward the left as the operation valid period elapses.

FIG. 221 (c) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

FIG. 221 (d) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image and the gauge image are erased, and the effect image m6 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M instead. The change display of the change candidate display is performed by displaying the effect image m6.

FIG. 221 (e) shows a state in which the change candidate display is completed. Erasing the effect image m6 is the end of the change display of the change candidate display. The change candidate display has changed to a "red" character image. The change candidate display is a display suggesting that the hold icon f2 changes to a red circular mode.

FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the pending change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the pending change display.

FIG. 221 (g) shows a state in which the pending change display is completed. The erasure of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. In this way, the hold icon f2 changes in a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 may change during the hold change display, or may change at the same time as the end of the hold change display.

FIG. 221 (h) shows a state in which the change notice display r3 is erased. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 is no longer performed. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG. 221.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k), a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. Each figure of FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in chronological order. 221 (i) to 221 (k) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 220 (g) to 220 (i), except that the ball removal display er1 is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k), the ball-excluded display er1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol and the change notice display r3. The ball removal display er1 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball and a lower plate full tank error occurs. The ball removal display er1 is a display that notifies the lower plate full tank error and prompts the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. In this way, the error display such as the ball removal display er1 is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. In addition, error displays other than the ball removal display er1, for example, a door release error display for notifying a door release error, an error display for notifying an abnormal prize or an illegal prize, an error display for notifying magnetic detection or magnetic field detection, etc. are also decorated. It may be displayed overlapping with the symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. It should be noted that the ball removal display er1 and these error displays may be displayed overlapping with all the effect displays other than the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display.
(Example 15)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e). Each of FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the hold change display of the hold icon f1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the hold icon f1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (b). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 222 (c) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the hold icon f1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the hold icon f1.

FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change item o overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 222 (e) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a blue circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the variable icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display. Since the change notice icon k is blue and the hold icon f1 is also blue, and the mode of the change notice icon k and the mode of the hold icon f1 are the same, the hold change display using the change notice icon k is the hold icon. Although it is not used for the pending change display for f1, it may be used for the change display for the white circular variation icon e1.

As in this embodiment, the change item o may be used to display the change of the hold icon. The mode of the hold icon changes to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display.
(Example 16)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 16th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j). Each of FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

FIG. 222 (f) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the change display of the change icon e1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 222 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change icon e1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 222 (h) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change icon e1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change icon e1.

FIG. 222 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change icon e1. When the change item o overlaps a part of the change icon e1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 222 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the mode of the variable icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the mode of the variable icon e1 changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate display are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate display.

As in this embodiment, the change item o may be used to display the change of the change icon. The mode of the variable icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. In this embodiment, the change notice icon k is displayed, but even when the change notice icon k is not displayed, the effect display shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) may be performed.
(Example 17)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 17th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (k) to 222 (o). Each of FIGS. 222 (k) to 222 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

FIG. 222 (k) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 222 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 222 (m) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this embodiment, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

FIG. 222 (n) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o has passed the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k is displayed. In the case of the effect of the failure pattern in which the change display of the change notice icon k is not performed, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

FIG. 222 (o) shows a state in which the change item o is erased. The change item o is erased in such a manner that it moves to the left and disappears out of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As in this embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display may be provided with a failure pattern in which the change candidate display does not change. It should be noted that the change display of the hold icon and the change icon may also be provided with a failure pattern in which the mode does not change.
(Example 18)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 (a) to 223 (o), a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 18th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 223 (a) to 223 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 223 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the change notice icon k is displayed on the sub-table device 700, and the princess n1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Princess n1 is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the display of the princess n1 with the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display suggesting that the type of change candidate display is changed.

FIG. 223 (c) shows a state in which an animation in which the princess n1 throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 223 (c). In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

FIG. 223 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o overlaps a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

FIG. 223 (g) shows a state in which the effect image m has been erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k changes from a blue circle to a red circle. In this way, the change candidate display of the blue circle may change to the change candidate display of the red circle.

FIG. 223 (h) shows a state in which the princess n1 is displayed even after the change display of the change candidate display. When the princess n1 is continuously displayed, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

Since the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (i) to 223 (m) is the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (b) to (g), the description thereof will be omitted. In this embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

FIG. 223 (n) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k changes from a red circle to a golden circle. In this way, the red circular change candidate display may change to the golden circular change candidate display.

FIG. 223 (o) shows a state in which the princess n1 is erased. When the princess n1 is erased, the change display targeting the change notice icon k is no longer performed.

In this embodiment, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. In this case, the change display of the change candidate display is always performed, and the change candidate display changes to a type with a high degree of expectation. The change candidate display is more expected when the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed than when Yoshimune n is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. Is easy to change to a higher type. For example, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed and Yoshimune n is displayed, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed and the princess n1 is displayed, the blue change candidate is displayed. The display tends to change to a green change candidate display. The same applies when the change display of the hold icon or the variable icon is performed, and the change of the hold icon or the variable icon is different than when Yoshimune n is displayed when the change display of the hold icon or the variable icon is performed. When the princess n1 is displayed when the display is performed, the hold icon and the variable icon are more likely to change to a mode with a high degree of expectation. If the princess n1 is deleted, the change display by the princess n1 is not performed during the special figure 1 variable game, and if the princess n1 continues to be displayed, the change display using the princess n1 may be performed again. There is. When the change display is performed twice or more, the target of the change display may be different for each change display.
(Example 19)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 19th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g). FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol variation display is performed on the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the fifth symbol variation display is performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is being done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 224 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 1 is 1 and the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the hold number is displayed by the numbers "1" and "0" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. Further, the variable icon e1 is displayed in the variable icon display area e. The aspect of the variable icon e1 is a white circle. Further, the treasure box u1 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the treasure chest u1 is opened and an animation in which the pseudo-ream icon u2 appears from the treasure chest u1 is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the pseudo-ream icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo-ream icon u2. The pseudo-ream icon u2 in this example is a display suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The aspect of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a white square aspect including the letter "N". The pseudo-ream icon u2 is provided with a white square, a blue square, a green square, a red square, a golden square, and a rainbow square. The expectation of the pseudo-ream icon is set to increase in the order of white square, blue square, green square, red square, gold square, and rainbow square.

FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the treasure chest u1 has been erased. The treasure box u1 is a display for making the pseudo-ream icon u2 appear, and is deleted after the pseudo-ream icon u2 appears. No new icons (excluding hold icon and variable icon) are displayed while the treasure chest u1 is hidden.

FIG. 224 (d) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves to the upper right. In the figure, the arrow pointing to the upper right shown on the left side of the pseudo-ream icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo-ream icon u2.

FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo-ream icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 224 (f) shows a state in which the pseudo-ream icon u2 is erased. When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 ends, the pseudo-ream icon u2 is deleted.

FIG. 224 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of “Decoration 7-Continued-Decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and is in the same state as shown in FIG. 218 (j). be. It is suggested that the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol of "Continue" starts the second pseudo-variation of the pseudo-ream. After that shown in FIG. 224 (g), the second pseudo-variation shown in FIG. 218 (k) and after is performed. In this embodiment, unlike Example 13 shown in FIG. 218, Yoshimune n is not displayed.

When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed during the special figure variable game, the decorative symbol of "continue" is temporarily stopped and displayed during the special figure variable game. Further, when the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed during the second pseudo-variation, the third pseudo-variation is always performed. When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the special figure variation game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (o), an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described. 224 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 224 (h) shows the same state as in FIG. 224 (c).

FIG. 224 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n in this example is a display suggesting that the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is changed.

FIG. 224 (j) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display suggesting that the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2 of this example is changed.

FIG. 224 (k) shows a state in which the animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the figure, the upper left arrow shown on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

FIG. 224 (l) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the pseudo-ream icon u2.

FIG. 225 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 224 (l). In the state shown in FIG. 225 (a), the change item o is erased, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire pseudo-ream icon u2. When the change item o overlaps with a part of the pseudo-ream icon u2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is changed is displayed.

FIG. 225 (b) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is changed from the white square to the red square. The red square pseudo-ream icon is a display that warns that the "continue" decorative symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed twice or more after the activation display, and the red square pseudo-ream icon is activated during the second pseudo-variation. When the display is displayed, the fourth pseudo-variation may always be executed, or the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed by the full rotation reach. When the activation display of the red square pseudo-ream icon is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the special figure variation game. When the princess n1 is displayed instead of the Yoshimune n, the mode of the pseudo-ream icon may be changed without fail.

FIG. 225 (c) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves to the upper right. In the figure, the arrow pointing to the upper right shown on the left side of the pseudo-ream icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo-ream icon u2.

FIG. 225 (d) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo-ream icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 225 (e) shows a state in which the pseudo-ream icon u2 is erased. When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 ends, the pseudo-ream icon u2 is deleted.

FIG. 225 (f) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. After FIG. 225 (f), the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (m) is displayed. The illustration and description of the effect display similar to the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (m) will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (g) shows a state in which the second pseudo-variation is performed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display is displayed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

FIG. 225 (h) shows a state in which the speed of variable display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is slowed down.

FIG. 225 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 225 (j) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is changed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Immediately before the "continuation" decorative symbol including the "continuation" character string image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

FIG. 225 (k) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of “continuation” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner of slightly swinging up and down. The decorative symbol of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 225 (l) shows a state in which the cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the third pseudo-variation is started. The cut-in display overlaps with the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Continued-Decoration 6".

FIG. 225 (m) shows a state immediately before the start of the third pseudo-variation. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of "x3" is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is notified that the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The "x3" image is displayed so as to overlap a part of "decoration 7".

FIG. 225 (n) shows a state in which the third pseudo-variation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display is performed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

FIG. 225 (o) shows a reduced state of the “x3” image.

In this modification, the mode of the pseudo-ream icon is changed. When the third pseudo-variation is started, it may always develop into SP reach. In addition, the greater the number of pseudo-variations, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol mode to be definitively displayed.
(Example 20)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (h), an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 20th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 226 (a) shows the same state as in FIG. 211 (f). The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k1.

FIG. 226 (b) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o overlaps with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 226 (c) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from a blue circle to a green circle.

FIG. 226 (d) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display targeting the change notice icon k1 is no longer performed. When Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display targeting the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

FIG. 226 (e) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. Since the target of the look-ahead notice is the hold 1 of the special figure 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

FIG. 226 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the downward-right arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

FIG. 226 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

FIG. 226 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The erasure of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold icon f1 has changed from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the look-ahead notice changes to the same green color as the change candidate display 2.

In this embodiment, the change notice icons k1 and k2 of the same type (green circle) are displayed. When all the displayed change candidate displays are of the same type, the mode of the hold icon or the change icon may change. For example, when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k2 is a failure effect display, the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k1 becomes the success effect display and the hold icon or the change display. The mode of the variable icon may change.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 (i) to 226 (k), a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of the twenty embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 226 (i) to 226 (k) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. Since FIG. 226 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (a) and FIG. 226 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 226 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from a blue circle to an rainbow color (in FIGS. 208 to 228, it is indicated by white dot hatching on a black background). It is changing to a circle. In the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the rainbow-colored circular hold icon is digested, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed. Further, when the change display is performed by the change candidate display of the rainbow-colored circle, the hold icon or the change icon of the change target is always changed to the rainbow-colored circle. When the change display is performed by the change candidate display other than the rainbow-colored circle change candidate display, the hold icon or change icon of the change display target is rainbow than when the change display is performed by the change candidate display other than the rainbow-colored circle change candidate display. It easily changes to a circular shape. Further, at the stage when the rainbow-colored circular change candidate display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the changing or pending symbol variation display. Further, when the princess n1 is displayed, it is more likely to change to the rainbow-colored circular change candidate display than when the Yoshimune n is displayed. It should be noted that a character display that is displayed only when the change candidate display is changed to a rainbow-colored circular change candidate display may be provided. After the effects shown in FIGS. 226 (a) and 226 (b), the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to 213 (i) may be performed, or the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to 213 (i) may be performed. After the effect is performed, a change display in which the type of change candidate display changes may be performed.
(Example 21)
Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (d). FIGS. 227 (a), (c), and (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machines 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. Since FIG. 227 (a) shows the same state as that of FIG. 220 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 227 (b) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

FIG. 227 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping with the hold icon f2. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

FIG. 227 (d) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The hold change display is performed by displaying the effect image m, and the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle.

The jackpot reliability of the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is set higher than the jackpot reliability of the pending change display according to this embodiment. It should be noted that the hold icon and the variable icon are more likely to change to a mode in which the jackpot reliability is higher in the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 than in the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is more likely to perform a successful effect in which the mode of the hold icon or the variation icon is changed than the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment.
(Example 22)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (e) to 227 (n) and FIGS. 228 (a) to 228 (h), a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 22nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. 227 (e) to (l) and (n and FIGS. 228 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 227 (e) is a diagram showing FIG. 220 (e). Since it shows the same state as d), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the special figure 1 variable game. Further, the illustration and description thereof from FIG. 227 (e) to the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6" will be omitted. FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a symbol mode, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 227 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order (“special figure G”). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6", which is a missed symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol of the "7-6-6" combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is interrupted at the same time as the change stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The button icon t1 is displayed in a white mode outside the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and does not emit light in red of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, even if the button icon t1 is being displayed, the chance button 136 is out of the operation valid period while the symbol is being confirmed and displayed (while the fluctuation is stopped). When the next symbol variation display is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started again.

FIG. 227 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon erasing animation is started. The variable icon e1 is erased in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 227 (i) shows a state in which the variable icon erasing animation is completed. The completion of erasing the fluctuating icon e1 is the end of the fluctuating icon erasing animation.

In FIG. 227 (j), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol are started. Shows the state. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. Further, in FIG. 227 (k), the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the variable icon e2 and is moved toward the variable icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the area f is moved toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the figure, the upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2 represents the locus of the variable icon e2 and the hold icon f2. Further, the button icon t1 moves to the right together with the hold icon f2.

FIG. 227 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of the movement of the variable icon e2 to the variable icon display area e and the completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the first area are the ends of the hold icon reduction animation.

FIG. 227 (l) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is restarted. During the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in a red mode, and the chance button 136 emits light in red.

FIG. 227 (m) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

FIG. 227 (n) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, the change notice display r3 of the image imitating the signboard is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2, which is the target of the hold change display. Further, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with the change display of the decorative pattern. A character string image of "blue or red" is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include the change candidate display. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

FIG. 228 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 227 (n). In FIG. 227 (a), the button image and the gauge image are displayed so as to overlap the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image and the gauge image are started to be displayed. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation valid period.

FIG. 228 (b) shows the state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue part of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is notified that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion of the gauge image q2 becomes shorter toward the left as the operation valid period elapses.

FIG. 228 (c) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has expired. In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

FIG. 228 (d) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. When the operation validity period of the chance button 136 ends, the button image and the gauge image are deleted.

FIG. 228 (e) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is ongoing.

FIG. 228 (f) shows a state in which the pending change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the pending change display.

FIG. 228 (g) shows a state in which the pending change display has ended. The erasure of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. In this way, the hold icon f2 changes in a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 changes during the hold change display, but may change at the same time as the end of the hold change display.

FIG. 228 (h) shows a state in which the change notice display r3 is erased. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 is no longer performed. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG. 221.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b), a “red” change candidate display is displayed as shown in FIG. 220 (e). Alternatively, the change notice display r3 may be deleted without the hold change display being performed, or the change candidate with the lowest expectation among the multiple change candidate displays (green or red in this example) with the hold icon. It may be confirmed that the mode changes to the mode corresponding to the display (green in this example).

Even during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the gauge image (meter image) indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period may not be displayed. In this case, it may be notified that the operation is valid by the button image which is the operation suggestion, the mode of the operation suggestion display (red display or the like), the lamp color of the operation means (red light emission, etc.) or the like. After the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to 227 (n) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o) may be performed, or the effects shown in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o) are shown. After the effect shown is performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 228 (a) to 228 (n) may be performed.

The icon change effect described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the change candidate display representing the candidate whose display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be displayed by the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) by the transparent effect.

Alternatively, conversely, the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) displays the icon change effect described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228, while the display is described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. The transparent effect may be made feasible.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228.

(1)
Display means (for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N), and
It is provided with a holding means (for example, a special figure 1 random value storage area, a special figure 1 holding number storage area, a special figure 2 random value storage area, and a special figure 2 holding number storage area) that can store the start information as a hold. It ’s a game table,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of displayed hold icons.
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes (for example, white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, golden circle, iridescent circle).
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of aspects to another.
The display means includes a plurality of types of change candidate displays (for example, a blue circle change candidate display, a green circle change candidate display, a red circle change candidate display, a golden circle change candidate display, and an rainbow-colored circle. It is a means that can display change candidate display),
The mode of the hold icon may change to the corresponding mode of the change candidate display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is the first display (for example, the blue circular change notice icon k1).
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2).
The first display may change to the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the change candidate display may change, so that the player may be able to entertain the effect display by the change candidate display until the change candidate display is erased.

(2)
The game console described in (1) above.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect (for example, a white circle).
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, a blue circle).
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, a green circle).
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second aspect is digested rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first aspect. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which is started after the operation, is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third aspect is digested rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second aspect. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which is started after the operation, is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first aspect is configured to be easily changed to the third aspect by the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(3)
The game console described in (2) above.
When the first display (for example, the blue circle change notice icon k1) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode (for example, the white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the second mode (eg, blue circle).
When the second display (for example, the green circular change notice icon k2) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first aspect (for example, the white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (eg, green circle).
A game table characterized by that.

(4)
The game console according to (2) or (3) above.
When the second display (for example, the change candidate display of the green circle) is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode (for example, the blue circle) changes, The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (eg, green circle).
A game table characterized by that.

(5)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first character display (for example, Yoshimune n).
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display, and is different from the change candidate display.
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon.
It is configured so that the first display is more likely to change to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having such a configuration, it may be possible to expect whether or not the first character is displayed.

(6)
The game console described in (5) above.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second character display (for example, princess n1).
The second character display is different from the change candidate display, and is different from the change candidate display.
The second character display is different from the hold icon.
It is configured so that the first display is more likely to change to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(7)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game table characterized by that.

(8)
The game console described in (7) above.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game table characterized by that.

(9)
The game console described in (8) above.
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is the first change candidate display (for example, the blue circular change notice icon k1).
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2).
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the display of the second change candidate display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(10)
The game console according to any one of (7) to (9) above.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may be changed by one change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(11)
The game console according to any one of (7) to (10) above.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the hold icon after the change.
A game table characterized by that.

(12)
The game console according to any one of (7) to (11) above.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display of one of the plurality of change candidate displays (for example, the blue circular change notice icon k1) is the other of the plurality of change candidate displays. It may change to the same type of change candidate display as the change candidate display (for example, the green circular change notice icon k2).
The hold icon changes to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display when the same type of change candidate display is displayed more than once than when the same type of change candidate display is displayed more than once. It is configured to be easy,
A game table characterized by that.

(13)
The game console according to any one of (7) to (12) above.
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed and the number of display of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display to the mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(14)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice display (for example, change notice display j).
The game table is characterized in that the change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display will be displayed.

(15)
The game console described in (14) above.
The change notice display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(16)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (15) above.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, chance button 136)
The change notice display is started by the operation of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(17)
The game console according to (16) above.
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect (for example, a button icon aspect).
The fourth aspect is an aspect that imitates the operating means.
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated while the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(18)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (17) above.
The game table is characterized in that the second display does not change to the first display.

(19)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (18) above.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display (for example, a rainbow-colored change candidate display).
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is determined in the variable display of the decorative symbol in either the running variable display of the decorative symbol or the reserved variable display of the decorative symbol. A game console that is configured to be displayed.

(20)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (19) above.
The game table is characterized in that the display means includes a display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device 208N) that does not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(21)
The game console according to any one of (1) to (20) above.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

The hold change display of the hold icon, the change display of the change icon, and the change display of the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be performed by an effect display other than the effect display by the effect image. There is no directing display and it may be performed instantaneously.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not be provided, and the effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed only by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, only one sub-display device is provided, and the effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the sub-display device, or the first decorative symbol display device may be displayed. The effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed on the 208L and three or more sub-display devices. The effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N by any display device. ..

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp or lighting is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube (hereinafter, the same applies).

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a ball is enclosed and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine to be used. The payout of the ball may be carried out by electronic display.

The items described in the above detailed description, particularly the items described in Examples 1 to 22 and the modified examples, can be combined.

In the above description, the pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been used as an example, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. 266, which will be described later, is used. It may be a machine or a slot machine also shown in FIG. 267, which will be described later.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
Display means and
A holding means that can store the start information as a hold, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of displayed hold icons.
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes and can be displayed.
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of aspects to another.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change candidate displays.
The mode of the hold icon may change to the corresponding mode of the change candidate display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is the second display.
The game table, characterized in that the first display may change to the second display.
(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second aspect is digested rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first aspect. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which is started after the operation, is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third aspect is digested rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second aspect. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which is started after the operation, is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first aspect is configured to be easily changed to the third aspect by the second aspect. A game table featuring.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 2,
When the first display is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the second mode. It is composed and
When the second display is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the third mode. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 2 or 3.
When the second display is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second aspect changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the third mode. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first character display.
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display, and is different from the change candidate display.
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon.
It is configured so that the first display is more likely to change to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console described in Appendix 5.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second character display, and is a means capable of displaying the second character display.
The second character display is different from the change candidate display, and is different from the change candidate display.
The second character display is different from the hold icon.
It is configured so that the first display is more likely to change to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 6.
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 7.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console described in Appendix 8
The display of one of the plurality of change candidate displays is the first change candidate display.
The display of one of the plurality of change candidate displays is the second change candidate display.
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the display of the second change candidate display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 7 to 9.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may be changed by one change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 7 to 10.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the hold icon after the change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 7 to 11.
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display of one of the plurality of change candidate displays is the same type of change candidate display as the other change candidate displays of the plurality of change candidate displays. May change to
The hold icon changes to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display when the same type of change candidate display is displayed more than once than when the same type of change candidate display is displayed more than once. It is configured to be easy,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 7 to 12.
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed and the number of display of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display to the mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 13.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice display.
The change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display will be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game console described in Appendix 14,
The change notice display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game console according to Appendix 14 or 15.
Equipped with operating means
The change notice display is started by the operation of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console described in Appendix 16.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
The fourth aspect is an aspect that imitates the operating means.
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated while the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 17.
The second display may not change to the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 18.
The display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is the third display.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is determined in the variable display of the decorative symbol in either the running variable display of the decorative symbol or the reserved variable display of the decorative symbol. It is configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 19.
The display means is a means including a display device that does not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 20.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Subsequently, a specific example of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 229 to 243. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 229 to 243, and conversely, in FIGS. 229 to 243. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 208 to 228. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

In the configuration of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 229 to 243, the point that the holding frame UI is provided in the effect display area 208d is that the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 208 to 228 is provided. It is different from the display screen configuration. This hold frame UI can be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be seen as a user interface that provides various information to the player. Further, in the hold frame UI, the variable icon display area e is arranged at the left end, and the hold icon display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the examples of FIGS. 229 to 243, it is in the non-electric support state, and only the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed as the hold icon display area, but the special figure 2 hold together with the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The icon display area may be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, four areas corresponding to the maximum number of hold balls of the special figure 1 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each area. In the variable icon display area e, the hold icon display area is provided with a stage higher and larger than the stages provided in each area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the variable icon is placed on this stage. Is displayed.

Here, I will summarize the variable icons again. The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area (for example, special figure 1 hold icon display area f) to the variable icon display area e, the moving icon is designated as the variable icon. It may be referred to or expressed as a variable icon moving. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about the propriety of the change (normal notice which is the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing.

On the other hand, the hold icon can give a notice (pre-reading notice) as to whether or not the symbol variation display is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested, depending on the display mode.

In addition, the hold frame UI is provided with a base icon UIb extending to the left and right, and the four areas prepared in the hold icon display area can be regarded as area icons displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. The stage prepared in the variable icon display area can also be seen as a stage icon displayed on the base icon UIb from the front side.

Further, the chance roulette display CR is displayed on the hold frame UI. The chance roulette display CR shown in FIG. 229 (a) is displayed in a closed state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are in contact with each other. On the other hand, the chance roulette display CR shown in FIG. 229 (r) and the like is displayed in an open state, the upper and lower frame portions CRf are separated from each other, and display spaces CRs are provided between them. In the chance roulette display CR, variable display is performed in these display spaces CRs (see the figure (s)), and tutorial display, notice display, etc. are displayed in the display spaces CRs.

A pattern may be attached to the base icon UIb or the frame portion CRf of the chance roulette display CR. This pattern may also be attached to various icons such as hold icons and variable icons. In addition, it may be attached to various indications described later. The pattern may be attached to the whole or only a part of the pattern. That is, a pattern is attached to at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the chance roulette display CR, the hold icon and the variable icon. In addition to the default display mode, a plurality of types of this pattern are prepared as other display modes. Other display modes include a look-ahead notice display mode, a normal notice display mode, and a notice display mode in which a notice (look-ahead notice, normal notice) about these jackpots is given. .. If it is a display mode of a notice about a big hit, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit differs depending on the display mode. The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the following description, the pattern indicates the high or low degree of expectation of a big hit. The default pattern is a dot pattern, which is the display mode when "no change" is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode. In the default pattern, the expectation of the big hit is not announced, but the expectation of the jackpot may be announced. In that case, the pattern of the icon with the lowest expectation of big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%) is obtained. The pattern of the display mode of the notice about the big hit is a diagonal line pattern, a diamond pattern, a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern in ascending order of the degree of expectation of the big hit. The diagonal pattern has a higher expectation of a big hit than 0%. On the other hand, the vertical line pattern has a rich jackpot, and the horizontal line pattern has a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, 100%), and it may be said that the jackpot is confirmed, for example. In the following explanation, when the term is more than a checkerboard pattern, it means a checkerboard pattern, a vertical line pattern, or a horizontal line pattern.

Here, the expectation of the big hit is expressed by the pattern, but the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the color instead of the pattern. For example, the default dot pattern may be blinking white, the diagonal line pattern may be blue, the diamond pattern may be green, the lattice pattern may be red, the vertical line pattern may be gold, and the horizontal line pattern may be iridescent. In addition, the color may be attached to the whole or only a part. That is, at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the chance roulette display CR, the hold icon and the variable icon is colored.

Further, the pattern of the display mode of the notice that the notice about the big hit is given is also the same, and the degree of expectation (reliability) that the notice about the big hit is given differs depending on the display mode.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a pending change effect.

The background of the castle town is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 229 (a), and the effect mode display provided below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the area, "castle town" indicating the castle town mode is displayed. Further, although the stage SG is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, nothing is displayed on the stage SG. In FIG. 229 (a), the decorative symbols that had been continuously displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are stopped by the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1". Is displayed. The variable icon e1 in the default mode is still displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 229 (a). Further, two hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the default mode.

In FIG. 229 (b), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. When the final display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is started, and the variable icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 229 (b). In 229 (c), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 229 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "2" to "1". However, two hold icons are displayed.

In FIG. 229 (e), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon (first) displayed in the first area (the area closest to the variable icon display area e) of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon) f1 has started moving toward the variable icon display area e, and is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (the area second closest to the variable icon display area e). The hold icon (second hold icon) f2 that has been used has started moving toward the first area.

In FIG. 229 (f), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The first hold icon f1 in the default mode is displayed. That is, there is no change in the display mode before the start and after the completion of the movement animation. However, it may change to the notice mode or the look-ahead notice mode during the movement of the icon or after the movement is completed.

In FIG. 229 (g), the character NJ for the hold change effect jumps down on the stage SG in the third decorative symbol display device 208N in an upright posture. There are many types of hold change effects, and when the hold change effect here is distinguished from other hold change effects, it is called "hold change first effect". In the following FIG. 229 (h), the character NJ decides a pose, and a balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed above the character NJ. In FIG. 229 (i), the character NJ holds a shuriken in his hand, and in the following FIG. 229 (j), the shuriken is thrown. It may be considered that the first effect of the pending change starts from the timing when the character NJ in FIG. 229 (g) appears, or the timing when the character NJ in FIG. 229 (h) poses and the balloon is displayed. It may be considered that the character NJ in the figure (i) starts from the timing when the shuriken is picked up, or the character NJ in the figure (j) holds the shuriken. It may be seen that it starts from the timing of throwing.

In FIG. 229 (k), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 229 (l), the first hold icon f1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image mf and are not visible. When the shuriken overlaps the icon, it can be seen that the shuriken hit the icon (the same applies below). It may be considered that the first effect of the pending change is started from the timing when the display of the effect image mf is started. In the following FIG. 229 (m), the effect image mf becomes smaller and the first hold icon f1 begins to appear. That is, the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a diagonal pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 229 (n), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diagonal line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The character NJ shown in FIG. 229 (n) takes a success pose when the icon display mode is successfully changed. In FIG. 229 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and disappears. In FIG. 229 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ also disappears, returning to a state in which nothing is displayed on the stage SG. The first effect of the hold change may be regarded as ending when the effect image mf of FIG. 229 (n) disappears, that is, when the mode change of the hold icon is completed, or at the timing when the character NJ of the figure (p) disappears. You can see it as the end.

Further, in FIG. 229 (p), the chance roulette display CR in the closed state has begun to vibrate, and the roulette effect has started. In the following FIG. 229 (q), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open and the display spaces CRs begin to be visible. The display of the fanning effect is displayed. This fanning effect corresponds to an effect that announces that the variable display will start on the chance roulette display CR, and can be said to be a precursory effect. Then, in FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. It should be noted that the variable display may not be started even if the fanning effect is performed. In addition, there are cases where the fanning effect is not performed in the first place and the variable display is not started. Alternatively, there are cases where the fanning effect is not performed and the variable display is suddenly started. In this case, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than when the fanning effect is performed and the variable display is started. However, on the contrary, it may be lower. In FIG. 229 (t), the variation display in the chance roulette display CR is completed, the character display of "next expectation" is displayed, and the pre-reading notice for the next variation is performed. In FIG. 229 (u), the chance roulette display CR has begun to close, and in FIG. 229 (v), the chance roulette display CR has returned to the closed state. The chance roulette effect may be viewed from FIG. 229 (p) to FIG. 229 (v), or from FIG. 229 (r) to FIG. (T).

In FIG. 229 (w), among the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, which have been continuously displayed in a variable manner at high speed, the decoration in the left symbol display area 208a. The fluctuation speed of the symbol drops to the extent that the symbol can be recognized, and in the figure (x), the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and this time, the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuation speed of is reduced to the extent that the design can be recognized. In FIG. 229 (y), the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the reach state is not reached, and the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b recognizes the symbol. It has fallen to the extent possible. In FIG. 229 (z), a temporary stop is performed in the remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" fluctuates (temporarily displayed). Then, in FIG. 229 (END), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. As in FIG. 229 (a), the variable icon e1 remains displayed immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example in which the hold change second effect is performed together with the hold change first effect. FIG. 230 shows two examples, an example on the left half and an example on the right half.

First, an example of the left half will be described. FIG. 230 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the movement animation of the hold icon is completed and one hold icon f1 in the default dot pattern mode is displayed, and the decorative symbol is changed. The display is being made. The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 230 (a) shows a part of the design of the treasure box displayed as the change notice display j in FIG. 208 (f) and the like. That is, an appearance animation in which the treasure box TB gradually appears from the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed. When the hold change effect related to the treasure box TB displayed as the change notice display is distinguished from other hold change effects, it is called "hold change second effect". In FIG. 230 (b), the appearance animation is completed and the entire closed treasure box TB is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the following figure (c), the treasure box TB is opened and from the inside. The change candidate icon HKI appears. This change candidate icon HKI is a round icon in the form of a diagonal line pattern, and is displayed on the treasure box TB. The treasure chest TB shown in FIG. 230 is displayed in the dot pattern mode, which is the default mode, and has nothing to do with the mode of the change candidate icon HKI appearing from the inside. The mode of the change candidate icon HKI appearing from may be matched. For example, the change candidate icon HKI of the horizontal line pattern may appear from the treasure box TB of the horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the change candidate icon HKI does not always appear from the treasure box TB in any case, and the aspect of the treasure box TB may represent the ease of appearance of the change candidate icon HKI. That is, there is a high possibility that the change candidate icon HKI will appear in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, and horizontal line pattern, and if it is a horizontal line pattern, the change candidate icon HKI will always appear. You may do so.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 230 (d), the character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears on the stage SG. In the following FIG. 230 (e), the character NJ decides a pose and a balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed, and in the following figure (f), the character NJ holds a shuriken. Then, in FIG. 230 (g), the character NJ throws a shuriken. Further, in FIG. 230 (g), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. The change candidate icon HKI, which had been stopped and displayed on the treasure box TB until then, starts moving, and the change candidate icon HKI is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. That is, the left end portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right end portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the central portion of the change candidate icon HKI.

The second effect of the pending change may be regarded as starting from the timing when the appearance animation of the treasure box TB is started, or is started from the timing when the appearance animation is completed as shown in FIG. 230 (b). It may be seen that it is started from the timing when the change candidate icon HKI shown in the figure (c) appears, or it is started from the timing when the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. You can see that it is.

In FIG. 230 (h), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with the variable icon e1 in the default mode (dot pattern mode). On the other hand, the change candidate icon HKI that has moved to the first decorative symbol display device 208L passes over the change icon e1. In the following FIG. 230 (i), the variable icon e1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image me and disappear. In FIG. 230 (j), the effect image me becomes smaller and the variable icon e1 begins to appear. That is, the effect image me is smaller than the variable icon e1, and the variable icon e1 that has changed in the form of the diagonal line pattern is beginning to be seen. Further, in FIG. 230 (j), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps with a part of the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 230 (k), the effect image me covering the variable icon e1 has disappeared, but this time, the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. From FIG. 230 (j) to FIG. 230 (k), both the effect image me covering the variable icon e1 and the effect image mf covering the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed. There may be a period of time. In FIG. 230 (l) that follows, the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to the same shaded pattern as the change candidate icon HKI is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (m), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diagonal line is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ is in a successful pose. I'm taking. After that, the treasure box TB displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M disappears. Further, the continuation of FIG. 230 (m) leads to FIG. 229 (o).

The second effect of the hold change may be regarded as ending when the effect image mf of FIG. 230 (m) disappears, that is, when the mode change of the hold icon is completed, or when the subsequent treasure box TB disappears. May be good.

In the example on the left half described above, the variable icon e1 is changed from the default mode to the normal notice mode (diagonal pattern mode) by the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ, and the first hold icon is changed. f1 is changed from the default mode to the look-ahead notice mode (diagonal line pattern mode) by the second effect of the pending change by the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the mode of the different icons has changed.

The change candidate icon HKI in the second effect of the pending change suggests a candidate for a mode to be changed from the time of appearance according to its own mode, and corresponds to a change mode candidate display. That is, in this example, the change candidate icon HKI has a diagonal line pattern from the time of appearance, and the first hold icon f1 has finally changed to a diagonal line pattern. It should be noted that the change candidate icon HKI may change to the mode of the candidate of the mode to be changed after the appearance, instead of the mode of the candidate of the mode to be changed at the present time. Further, the change candidate icon HKI suggests the icon of the change target candidate at the timing of FIG. 230 (j), which corresponds to the change target candidate display. Therefore, at the time of appearance, it is unclear which icon (if a variable icon or a plurality of hold icons is displayed, which hold icon) is a candidate for change.

In addition, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ in the first production of the pending change also suggests the icon of the candidate to be changed at the timing of FIG. 230 (h), which corresponds to the display of the candidate to be changed. Similar to the change candidate icon HKI, it is also possible to suggest a candidate for the mode to be changed by the mode (pattern) of the shuriken by its own mode. Further, it is possible to suggest a candidate for a mode to be changed not by the mode (pattern) of the shuriken but also by the mode (pattern) of the kimono of the ninja character NJ.

Next, the example on the right half will be described, but the description overlapping with the explanation on the example on the left half may be omitted.

FIG. 230 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and the change candidate icon HKI of the mode of the diagonal line pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and the pending change number is displayed on the stage SG. The character NJ for 1 production is also displayed. In FIG. 230 (2), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started, and in FIG. 230 (3), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect decides a pose and “goes”. The balloon "Zo" is displayed. In FIG. 230 (4), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps with a part of the first hold icon f1. In addition, a shuriken is thrown from the character NJ. In FIG. 230 (5), the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and are not visible. On the other hand, the shuriken thrown by the character NJ has not hit any of the icons yet. In FIG. 230 (6) that follows, the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to the same shaded pattern as the change candidate icon HKI is beginning to be seen. Further, a part of the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with a part of the first hold icon f1. Here, since the effect image mf becomes smaller, the mode (pattern) of the first hold icon f1 after the change can be seen, but when the effect image mf or the like keeps the invisible state. There may be. For example, when a part of the shuriken overlaps, the effect image mf may not be reduced, but the size may be maintained as it is, and the effect image mf obtained by hitting the shuriken may take over as it is. In FIG. 230 (7), the first hold icon f1 is again covered with the effect image mf and disappears. Also, the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. The next effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7) may be displayed before the effect image mf that has become smaller in FIG. 230 (6) disappears, or the effect image mf disappears once. The next effect image mf may be displayed from. In FIG. 230 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (9), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ is in a successful pose. I'm taking. The continuation of FIG. 230 (9) leads to FIG. 229 (o). The ninja character NJ in the first effect of the hold change and the treasure chest TB in the second effect of the hold change will disappear after this, but either of them may disappear first or may disappear at the same time.

In the example on the right half described above, both the first effect of the hold change by the ninja character NJ and the second effect of the hold change by the change candidate icon HKI use the first hold icon f1 as the icon to be changed, which is the default. The first hold icon f1, which was the aspect, is finally changed to the aspect of the diamond pattern in which the reliability of the jackpot in the look-ahead notice is increased by two steps. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is different, but it may be simultaneous. Further, in the example on the right half, the mode change due to the hold change second effect preceded the mode change due to the hold change first effect, but conversely, the mode change due to the hold change first effect , Hold change It may precede the mode change due to the second effect.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined in the left half, and an example of the hold change third effect in the right half.

First, the example on the left half will be described, but the description overlapping with the description in the example shown in FIG. 230 may be omitted.

FIG. 231 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and the change candidate icon HKI of the mode of the diagonal line pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and the pending change number is displayed on the stage SG. The character NJ for 1 production is also displayed. In FIG. 231 (b), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started, and in FIG. 231 (c), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect decides a pose and “goes”. The balloon "Zo" is displayed. In FIG. 231 (e), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the shuriken hits the change candidate icon HKI, and the icon that acts on these final change target icons (change candidate icon HKI) is not the change target variable icon or hold icon, but the change target. It has become. In the following FIG. 231 (f), the change candidate icon HKI is covered with the effect image mh together with the shuriken and disappears. In FIG. 231 (g), the effect image mh is smaller than the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to the shape of the diamond pattern one step higher than the shape of the diagonal line pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 231 (h), the effect image mh disappears completely, and a part of the change candidate icon HKI changed to the shape of the diamond pattern overlaps with a part of the first hold icon f1. The change candidate icon HKI changed to the diamond pattern mode corresponds to the change mode candidate display, and the change candidate icon HKI overlapping a part of the first hold icon f1 corresponds to the change target candidate display. In FIG. 231 (i), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf together with the change candidate icon HKI and is not visible. In FIG. 231 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 231 (k), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ is in a successful pose. I'm taking. The continuation of FIG. 231 (k) leads to FIG. 229 (o). Also here, the ninja character NJ in the first effect of the hold change and the treasure chest TB in the second effect of the hold change will disappear after this, but either of them may disappear first or may disappear at the same time.

In the example on the left half described above, the first effect of the hold change by the ninja character NJ and the second effect of the hold change by the change candidate icon HKI are combined, and the mode change of the hold icon is raised by two steps at one time. It has changed to the mode of. The shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ did not hit the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI remained in a diagonal pattern, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ hit the change candidate icon HKI. If the change candidate icon HKI remains in the diagonal pattern mode in spite of this, the first hold icon f1 changes only in the diagonal line pattern mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that in the diamond pattern mode.

Next, an example of the right half will be described.

FIG. 231 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230. In FIG. 231 (2), the increase animation of the hold icon is started in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon gradually becomes larger. In FIG. 231 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon ends, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

In FIG. 231 (4), the first hold icon f1 starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 231 (5), the enlarged display of the first hold icon f1 is started. The first hold icon f1 is expanded until it exceeds the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. This expanded aspect corresponds to an aspect that foretells that the pending change effect will start. The enlarged first hold icon f1 and the adjacent second hold icon f2 may or may not overlap. The pending change effect that is started after this is referred to as a "pending change third effect" in order to distinguish it from other pending change effects.

In FIG. 231 (6), the character BC of the Bancho for the third effect of the hold change appears on the hold frame UI, and in FIG. 231 (7), the character BC of the Bancho determines the pose. Then, the enlarged first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf'(FIG. 231 (8)). This effect image mf'covers a part of the adjacent second hold icon f2, but the entire adjacent second hold icon f2 may be covered, and the adjacent second hold icon f2 may not be covered. It may be.

It may be considered that the third effect of the pending change starts from the timing when the character BC of the Bancho in FIG. 231 (6) appears, or from the timing when the character BC of the Bancho in FIG. It may be considered that it has started, or it may be considered that it has started from the timing when the effect image mf'in the figure (8) is displayed.

In FIG. 231 (9), the effect image mf'is smaller than the enlarged first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf'disappears completely, and in FIG. 231 (10), the enlarged first hold icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed. In the following FIG. 231 (11), the size of the first hold icon f1 is restored, and in FIG. 231 (12), the character BC of the bancho for the hold change third effect disappears. In addition, the variable display of decorative patterns is still continuing.

The third effect of the hold change may be regarded as ending when the effect image mf'in FIG. 231 (10) disappears, that is, when the mode change of the hold icon is completed, or the first hold icon f1 in FIG. It may be regarded as the end when the size returns to the original size, or it may be regarded as the end when the character BC of the chief of the figure (12) disappears.

The hold icon whose mode is likely to be changed by the hold change third effect is the first hold icon f1 rather than the second hold icon f2, and the first hold icon f1 is most likely to be changed among all the hold icons. It may be possible that the earlier the hold is held, the more likely it is to change. Alternatively, only the first hold icon f1 may be changed among all the hold icons. Further, the hold change third effect is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than that of the hold change first effect. That is, the aspect of the icon is raised by only one step in the hold change first effect, but is raised by two steps in the hold change third effect. Similarly, the hold change third effect is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than that of the hold change second effect.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the character BC, who is the chief of the third effect of pending change, appears. FIG. 232 also shows two examples, an example on the left half and an example on the right half.

First, an example of the left half will be described, but a description that overlaps with the description of the example shown in the right half of FIG. 231 may be omitted.

FIG. 232 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the character BC of the bancho for the hold change third effect appears on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 232 (b), the first hold icon f1 in the default mode starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 232 (c), the first hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. By jumping out of the first area of the above and moving to the center of the display screen, it overlaps with the character BC of the chief who sits cross-legged. In the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f in which the first hold icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first hold icon f1 that has popped out is displayed as a silhouette display sil. Here, the silhouette display sill is represented by a dotted line, but the silhouette display sill may also be displayed in the same mode as the mode of the first hold icon f1 (in this example, the mode of the dot pattern). Further, regarding the color of the first hold icon f1, regardless of the color of the first hold icon f1, the silhouette display Silk may display the color in gray. For example, the color of the first hold icon f1 may be displayed. If is blue, the silhouette display sill may be displayed in dark blue so that the color of the first hold icon f1 and the color of the silhouette display sill are unified in the same color system.

In FIG. 232 (d), the chief character BC poses, and it appears that the chief character BC has the first hold icon f1. In the following FIG. 232 (e), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb, and in FIG. 232 (f), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a diagonal pattern. The first hold icon f1 is beginning to appear. In FIG. 232 (g), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it appears that the character BC of the Bancho has the first hold icon f1 changed in the form of a diagonal line pattern. When the first hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 232 (g) changes to blue, the silhouette display Silk shown in FIG. 232 (g) may also change to dark blue. In FIG. 232 (h), the character BC of the Bancho disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the diagonal pattern pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Eventually, the movement animation is started, and the first hold icon f1 in the aspect of the diagonal line pattern starts moving toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (FIG. 232 (i)), and FIG. In j), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diagonal line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

Next, an example of the right half will be described. The example on the right half is an example in which the first effect of the hold change by the ninja character NJ and the third effect of the hold change by the character BC of the bancho are performed.

FIG. 232 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the character BC of the Bancho for the third effect of the hold change is displayed on the hold frame UI, and the hold change is on the stage SG. The ninja character NJ for the first production is displayed. The timing at which the Bancho character BC appears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ appears may be earlier or the same. In FIG. 232 (2), the default mode (dot pattern mode) is the first. 1 The hold icon f1 jumps out of the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f that has been displayed so far, and moves to the center of the display screen so that it overlaps with the character BC of the Bancho who is sitting in the air. .. As in the case of the left half, in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f where the first hold icon f1 was displayed until then, the trace of the popped out first hold icon f1 is displayed as a silhouette. Is displayed as. In FIG. 232 (3), the ninja character NJ in the first effect of the pending change poses and a balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed. In the following FIG. 232 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken, and in the following figure (5), the shuriken overlaps with the first hold icon f1 moved to the center of the display screen. In FIG. 232 (6), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf together with the shuriken and disappears. In FIG. 232 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to the diagonal pattern pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 232 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the diagonal pattern mode overlaps with the longest character BC. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change first effect, and the character NJ shown in FIG. 232 (8) is in a successful pose. In addition, this character NJ continues to take a successful pose until it disappears.

In FIG. 232 (9), the chief character BC poses, and it appears that the chief character BC has the first hold icon f1. In the following FIG. 232 (10), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb, and in FIG. 232 (11), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a diamond pattern. The first hold icon f1 is beginning to appear. In FIG. 232 (12), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it appears that the character BC of the Bancho has the first hold icon f1 changed in the form of a diamond pattern. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change third effect. In FIG. 232 (13), the character BC of the Bancho disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Although the ninja character NJ has also disappeared, the timing at which the chief character BC disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier or the same.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the right half of FIG. 232 and a diagram showing a fourth effect of pending change.

In FIG. 233 (14) following from FIG. 232 (13), the movement animation of the first hold icon f1 is started, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the mode of the diamond pattern is the first in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In FIG. 233 (15), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

In the example on the right half of FIG. 232 described above, the first hold icon f1 is set as the icon to be changed in both the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the hold change third effect by the bancho character BC. The first hold icon f1, which was the default mode, is finally changed to a diamond-shaped pattern in which the reliability of the jackpot in the look-ahead notice is increased by two steps. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is different, but it may be simultaneous. Further, the mode change due to the hold change 1st effect preceded the mode change due to the hold change 3rd effect, but conversely, the mode change due to the hold change 3rd effect is the mode change due to the hold change 3rd effect. It may precede the mode change due to.

Next, the fourth effect of the pending change will be described.

FIG. 233 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230. In FIG. 233 (b), the second hold icon f2 is newly displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The second hold icon is a roulette icon for the fourth effect of hold change, and the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 233 (b), is in a variable display mode. The roulette icon in this variable display mode corresponds to the change target candidate display. That is, it is a mode for notifying that oneself will change after this from the time of winning (at the time of appearance). In FIG. 233 (b), the hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 233 (c), the variable display of the decorative pattern performed in FIG. 233 (b) is completed, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variable icon e1 remains displayed. Further, the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 233 (c), remains in the variable display mode. In FIG. 233 (d), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. When the final display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is started, and the variable icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 233 (d). In 233 (e), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. Even during the final display, the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2, remains in the variable display mode.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 233 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "2" to "1". However, two hold icons are displayed, and the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2, remains in the variable display mode.

In FIG. 233 (g), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, moves toward the first area while maintaining the variable display mode. Has started.

In FIG. 233 (h), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. 1 displays a roulette icon in a variable display mode as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. In this example, the roulette icon of the mode during the variable display was continuously displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol (which can be said to be the symbol variable display of the special symbol), but during the super reach effect or the confirmed display. The roulette icon (hold icon) may disappear once inside, and the roulette icon (hold icon) may be displayed when the next decorative symbol variation display (which can be said to be a special symbol symbol variation display) is started.

In FIG. 233 (i), the roulette icon, which has been in the variable display mode, has changed to the mode in which the variable display is finished and the character “lattice” is stopped and displayed. The roulette icon in the mode in which the characters of "lattice" are stopped and displayed corresponds to the change mode candidate display. That is, it is a mode for foretelling that it will change to a grid pattern mode after this.

In FIG. 233 (j) that follows, the roulette icon, which is the first hold icon f1, is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. In FIG. 233 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a grid pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 233 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed in a grid pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. That is, the mode change of the hold icon is completed, and the hold change fourth effect ends at the timing of FIG. 233 (l). It should be noted that the fourth effect of the pending change may be regarded as starting from the timing when the roulette icon appears as shown in FIG. 233 (b), or the roulette icon is stopped as shown in FIG. 233 (i). It may be considered that the start is started from the timing when the displayed mode is changed.

As described above, the roulette icon corresponds to the pending change notice display for itself.

FIG. 233 (i') is a diagram showing an example different from that of FIG. 233 (i). In FIG. 233 (i'), the roulette icon, which was in the variable display mode, ends the variable display and changes to the stop display mode, and at the same time, the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display are displayed. The pattern of the CR frame portion CRf is changed to a grid pattern. Further, the characters "chance up" are displayed above the first hold icon f1. Even if the roulette icon changes to the mode in which the characters "lattice" are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself does not necessarily change to the form of the checkered pattern. However, when the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display CR changes to a checkered pattern in this way, the roulette icon itself has a checkered pattern as compared with the case where it does not change (see FIG. 233 (i)). It is easy to change to the mode. Alternatively, it may always change.

Further, the timing at which the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display CR changes to a grid pattern may be after the roulette icon changes to the mode in which the characters “grid” are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, when the roulette icon changes at the stage of the variable display mode and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display CR changes, the characters representing the pattern are likely to be stopped and displayed on the roulette icon. You may do it.

It should be noted that the pattern of only one of the pattern of the base icon UIb and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the chance roulette display CR may change, and in this case, the roulette pattern is more than the case where both are changed. The icon itself may be less likely to change to a checkerboard pattern. Alternatively, when the pattern changes before the stop display of the roulette icon, the characters representing the pattern are stopped and displayed on the roulette icon when the pattern of only one of them changes than when both change. It may be difficult.

FIG. 233 (l') is a diagram showing an example different from that of FIG. 233 (l). FIG. 233 (l') is an example continuing from FIG. 233 (i') above, and although the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display CR has changed to a checkerboard pattern, the roulette This is an example in which the icon itself does not change to the checkered pattern and has become the default mode. However, as described above, when the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the chance roulette display CR changes to a checkered pattern, the roulette icon itself may always change to the checkered pattern. In addition, the fact that the roulette icon changed to the mode in which the characters "lattice" were stopped was not foretelling the change in its own mode, but other displays and icons (here, the base icon UIb and chance roulette). It may be foretold that the mode (at least one pattern of the frame portion CRf of the display CR) will change.

When the roulette icon changes to the mode in which the characters "lattice" are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself may always change to the mode in which the lattice pattern is displayed.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of the fifth effect of pending change.

In FIG. 234 (1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed with the two hold icons f1 and f2 in the default mode displayed. In FIG. 234 (2), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI is beginning to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI is gradually descending, and in FIG. 234 (3), the target icon TI passes through the central portion of the display screen. Eventually, the target icon TI is attached to the second hold icon f2, and the appearance animation ends (FIG. 234 (4)). The hold icon with the target icon TI is more likely to change its mode than the hold icon without the target icon TI. Even if the hold icon has the target icon TI, the mode change does not always occur, and may not occur. Alternatively, the hold icon with the target icon TI may ensure that the mode change occurs. The target icon TI attached to the icon corresponds to the change target candidate display.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 (5), the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth effect of the pending change, appears, and in the following figure (6), the character YM of Yoshimune bows. I'm ready. In FIG. 234 (6), an arrow icon YI indicating that the Yoshimune character YM is aiming at the target icon TI is displayed. The rear end of the arrow icon YI slightly rests on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed so as to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the tip of the arrow icon YI may or may not be in contact with the target object (here, the target icon YI), but it is sufficient to know that it is defined as an aim. The arrow icon YI is one type of aiming icon or designated icon, and the aiming icon or designated icon is not limited to the arrow and may be in the form of light irradiation. Further, the aiming icon or the designated icon such as the arrow icon YI corresponds to the change target candidate display. Further, the aiming icon such as the arrow icon YI or the designated icon may be displayed in a pattern in which the aiming or designated icon changes thereafter. That is, the display itself of the aiming icon such as the arrow icon YI or the designated icon may correspond to the change mode candidate display.

Eventually, the variable display of the decorative pattern performed in FIG. 234 (1) is completed, the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in FIG. 234 (7), and in FIG. The final display of the decorative pattern has started. When the final display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is started, and the variable icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 234 (8). In 234 (9), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. Even after the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the target icon TI remains attached to the second hold icon f2, and the same is true during the confirmed display. In addition, Yoshimune's character YM also keeps holding the bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed, and the same is true during the confirmed display.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 234 (10), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "2" to "1". However, two hold icons are displayed, the second hold icon f2 still has the target icon TI, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold the bow, and the arrow icon YI also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 234 (11), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f starts moving toward the first area with the target icon TI attached. ing.

In FIG. 234 (12), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. As the special figure 1 hold icon f1, the hold icon in the default mode with the target icon TI attached is displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the Yoshimune character YM is still holding the bow, and the arrow icon YI is also being displayed. However, since the target icon TI moves together with the hold icon, the direction of the arrow icon YI is slightly changed and the length is also slightly shortened.

After the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 234 (13), the character YM of Yoshimune holds a bow, but the display of the arrow icon YI disappears. The disappearance of the arrow icon YI can also be seen as a preliminary operation for the pending change effect. Then, when the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and in FIG. 234 (14), the fired arrow causes the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed across.

It may be considered that the fifth production of the pending change starts from the timing when the Yoshimune character YM in FIG. 234 (5) appears, or starts from the timing when the arrow icon YI disappears in FIG. 234 (13). It may be seen that it has been done, or it may be seen that it has started from the timing when the arrow was fired from the Yoshimune character YM.

In FIG. 234 (15), the arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in the following figure (16), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf and disappears. There is. The target icon TI and the arrow that hit the target icon TI are not covered by the effect image mf and are visible. However, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI may be covered by the effect image mf.

In FIG. 234 (17), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 234 (18), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune, who is the character of the fifth effect of the pending change, changes the pose, raises his thumb, and takes a successful pose to be taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. Subsequently, in FIG. 234 (19), the character YM of Yoshimune disappears, but the first hold icon f1 that has finished the mode change still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI is hit by an arrow. It remains. The fifth effect of the hold change may be regarded as ending when the effect image mf in FIG. 234 (18) disappears, that is, when the mode change of the hold icon is completed, or the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 234 (19) disappears. You may think that it ends at the timing.

Eventually, the variable display of the decorative pattern started in FIG. 234 (10) is completed, the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in FIG. 234 (20), and the decoration is displayed in FIG. 234 (21). The final display of the symbol has started. When the final display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is started, and the variable icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 234 (21). In 234 (22), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. Even after the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed, the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1 in the form of the diamond pattern, and the same is true during the final display.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 234 (23), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "1" to "0". However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the target icon TI hit by the arrow is still attached to the first hold icon f1.

In FIG. 234 (24), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is moved to the variable icon display area e with the target icon TI attached. It has started moving toward.

In FIG. 234 (25), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the variable icon e1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the arrow. ing. The arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 234 (25) is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the target icon TI hit by the arrow does not disappear even after the mode of the hold icon is changed, and remains attached to the hold icon whose mode has changed. By doing so, it also becomes a history display of which kind of pending change effect was performed. For example, even if the mode of the icon is changed to the same mode, when the icon is changed by the 5th effect of the hold change, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than when the icon is changed by the other effect of the hold change. Or, on the contrary, if it is low, it is useful information that the display of the target icon TI that the arrow hit remains.

Further, even if the icon whose mode has changed, that is, the icon with the target icon TI hit by the arrow changes from the hold icon f1 to the variable icon e1, the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the variable icon e1. Up to. In this case as well, the target icon TI hit by the arrow is displayed as a history, and also serves as information to inform that the jackpot is imminent.

If the mode of the target icon TI changes when the arrow hits (for example, when it changes from white to red or when a large hole is made), the arrow may be erased. In addition, the target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear. In this case, if the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it disappears. The degree (reliability) may be high, or if the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the jackpot may be confirmed. For example, even if the variable icon e1 is changed, as long as the target icon TI hit by the arrow is still attached, the symbol variation display currently being performed may be a big hit confirmation.

Further, although the parts after FIG. 234 (25) are not shown, the super reach effect may be developed after this. For example, even if the icon changes to the variable icon e1, if the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached, it may be easier to develop into a super reach effect than when it is not attached, and it is always necessary for the super reach effect. It may develop. Further, the target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear together with the variable icon during the confirmation display, or may disappear before the confirmation display. For example, it may disappear when the reach state is reached, or it may disappear when the super reach effect is started. When the super reach effect is started, the variable icon e1 may disappear, or the variable icon e1 may not disappear.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of the fifth effect of pending change.

FIG. 235 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 234 (15), and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. In this example, the effect image mf is enlarged, and in FIG. 235 (b), the target icon TI is also covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen, and a part of the arrow is also covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. ing.

In FIG. 235 (c), the effect image mf has become smaller, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a diamond pattern has begun to appear. At the same time that the effect image mf disappears, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI also disappear. In FIG. 235 (c), the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI have already disappeared.

In FIG. 235 (d), the effect image mf disappears completely, the first hold icon f1 changed in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the second decorative pattern is displayed. In the display device 208M, the character YM of Yoshimune, who is the character of the fifth effect of the pending change, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with his thumb raised. In the following FIG. 235 (e), the character YM of Yoshimune disappears.

The fifth effect of the pending change in FIG. 235 may be regarded as ending at the timing when the target icon TI in FIG. 235 (c) and the arrow hitting the target icon TI disappear, or the effect image mf in FIG. It may be regarded as the end when the button disappears, that is, when the mode change of the hold icon is completed, or it may be regarded as the end when the character YM of Yoshimune in the figure (e) disappears.

Subsequently, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect will be described.

FIG. 235 (1) is a continuation of FIG. 234 (12), and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears on the stage SG. In this example, the target icon TI, the Yoshimune character YM, and the ninja character NJ appear in this order, but the ninja character NJ, the target icon TI, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order. , The target icon TI, the ninja character NJ, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order, or they may appear at the same time.

In FIG. 235 (2), the ninja character NJ poses and a balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed, and in FIG. 235 (3), the character NJ throws a shuriken. This shuriken hits the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 235 (4), the first hold icon f1 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. In FIG. 235 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a diagonal pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 235 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diagonal pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this way, the target icon TI is displayed, but in the hold change first effect, the hold icon itself is directly changed without aiming at the target icon TI. The ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 235 (6) is in a successful pose. In FIG. 235 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM has been holding the bow, and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed.

Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from Yoshimune's character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 235 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears.

In FIG. 235 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a grid pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 235 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed in a grid pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In addition, Yoshimune's character YM, who is the character of the fifth production of the pending change, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with his thumb up. After this, it continues to FIG. 234 (19).

In the example described above, both the hold change 1st effect by the ninja character NJ and the hold change 5th effect by the Yoshimune character YM use the 1st hold icon f1 as the icon to be changed, which is the default mode. Finally, the first hold icon f1 is changed to a lattice pattern in which the reliability of the jackpot in the look-ahead notice is increased by three levels instead of two levels. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is different, but it may be simultaneous. In this way, when a plurality of hold change effects are performed in combination for the same object, the mode changes to a higher mode (a mode in which the hold change effects are raised by 3 steps instead of 2 steps) as compared with the case where the hold change effects are performed separately. .. Here, the combination of the 5th effect of the hold change and the 1st effect of the hold change may be a combination of the 5th effect of the hold change and the 2nd effect of the hold change, and the 5th effect of the hold change and the hold change. It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the fifth effect of the pending change and the fourth effect of the pending change, or any other combination.

FIG. 236 is a diagram showing another example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect.

FIG. 236 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 235 (1), in which the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appearing on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N decides the pose and " The balloon "I'm going" is displayed, and in the figure (2), the character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 236 (3), this shuriken overlaps with the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1 instead of the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 236 (4), the target icon TI hit by the shuriken is The attached first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. In FIG. 236 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a diagonal pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 236 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the diagonal pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the ninja character NJ. Is in a successful pose. As described above, the shuriken may hit the target icon TI even in the first effect of the pending change.

In FIG. 236 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM has been holding the bow, and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed. In addition, the target icon TI is still attached to the first hold icon f1 that has finished the mode change, and the shuriken still hits the target icon TI.

Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from Yoshimune's character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1. That is, the arrow also hits the target icon TI that the shuriken hit earlier. In FIG. 236 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and is not visible.

In FIG. 236 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a grid pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 236 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed in a grid pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In addition, Yoshimune's character YM, who is the character of the fifth production of the pending change, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with his thumb up.

Next, in FIG. 236 (11), the character YM of Yoshimune disappears, but the first hold icon f1 that has finished the mode change still has a target icon TI, and the target icon TI has a shuriken and an arrow. Remains hit. By doing so, it also becomes a history display of which kind of pending change effect was performed. That is, the history display in which the first effect of the hold change is performed by the shuriken is displayed, and the history display in which the fifth effect of the hold change is performed by the arrow is displayed.

Eventually, the variable display of the decorative pattern that had been performed so far is completed, the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in FIG. 236 (12), and the decorative pattern is confirmed in the figure (13). The display has started. When the final display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is started, and the variable icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 236 (13). In 236 (14), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. Even after the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed, the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1 in the form of the checkered pattern, and the same is true during the final display.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 236 (15), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "1" to "0". However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon f1 still has the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow.

In FIG. 236 (16), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow is the variable icon display area with the target icon TI attached. It has started moving toward e.

In FIG. 236 (17), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the variable icon e1 in the form of a checkerboard remains attached to the stage in the variable icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow. It is displayed. The arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 235 (17) is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In the example described above, the shuriken and the arrow hit the target icon TI at different timings, but they may hit at the same timing. Also, only one of the shuriken and the arrow may hit and the other may come off.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing another example of the fourth effect of the pending change shown in FIG. 233.

FIG. 237 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the movement animation of the hold icon is completed and the decorative symbol is changed in a state where one hold icon f1 in the default dot pattern mode is displayed. The display is being made. In FIG. 237 (2), one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230, and in FIG. 237 (3), an increase animation of the hold icon is made in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Is started, and the hold icon gradually becomes larger. The hold icon that gradually becomes larger due to the increase animation is the roulette icon of the fourth effect of the hold change, and becomes larger in the mode during the variable display. Further, the hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 237 (4), the increase animation of the hold icon ends, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 237 (4), is in a variable display mode and corresponds to a change target candidate display. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the icon may be enlarged in the default mode and changed to the roulette icon in the variable display mode at the same time as the enlargement is completed or after the enlargement is completed.

After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, the next hold is digested, and the hold icon movement animation is performed. In FIG. 237 (5), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. 1 displays a roulette icon in a variable display mode as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. In this example as well, the roulette icon of the mode in which the variable display is being displayed is continuously displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol (which can also be said to be the symbol variable display of the special symbol).

In this example, the roulette icon of the mode in which the variable display is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and disappears without changing from the mode in which the variable display is displayed to the mode in which the characters representing the pattern are stopped and displayed (FIG. 237). (6)). In FIG. 237 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a grid pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 237 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the mode of the first hold icon f1 is changed without displaying the change mode candidate display.

Subsequently, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fourth effect will be described.

FIG. 237 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (3), in which the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the roulette icon of the mode in which the variable display is being displayed is in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Is displayed as the second hold icon f2.

In FIG. 237 (b), the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following figure (c), the ninja character NJ appears. After deciding the pose, the balloon "I'm going" is displayed. In FIG. 237 (d), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 237 (e), the shuriken overlaps with the second hold icon f2. That is, the shuriken hits the roulette icon in the variable display mode. In FIG. 237 (f), the second hold icon f2 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. In FIG. 237 (g), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the roulette icon in the variable display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 237 (h), the effect image mf disappears completely, and in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, the roulette icon of the variable display mode changed to the rhombus pattern is the second hold icon. It is displayed as f2. Further, the character NJ shown in FIG. 237 (h) takes a success pose taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed.

In FIG. 237 (i), the ninja character NJ disappears. In this example as well, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variable display is displayed to another mode, and the roulette icon in the mode in which the variable display is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and disappears (FIG. 237 (j). )). In FIG. 237 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the second hold icon f2, and the second hold icon f2 changed to the vertical line pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 237 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the second hold icon f2 changed to the vertical line pattern is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The frequency of change to the vertical line pattern mode is low, and the change to the vertical line pattern mode is more likely to change from the roulette icon than from the normal hold icon.

In this example, the roulette icon in the variable display mode changed to the diamond pattern shown in FIG. 237 (h) corresponds to the change target candidate display, but as a result, the second hold icon f2 has a diamond pattern. Since the mode did not change, the roulette icon shown in FIG. 237 (h) does not correspond to the change mode candidate display. The roulette icon of the aspect changed to the rhombus pattern mode is merely foretelling that the mode is changed to the rhombus pattern mode by the hold change first effect, and the mode changed by the hold change fourth effect. It is due to the fact that it does not represent. Therefore, when the fourth hold change effect is a fake effect, the second hold icon f2 finally changes to a diamond-shaped pattern. In addition, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ does not hit the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2, and the mode of the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon) does not change, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ If the mode of the second hold icon f2 does not change even though the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon) is hit, the second hold icon f2 has a higher expectation of a big hit than the vertical line pattern mode. It may change only to a mode in which the value is low (a mode of a lattice pattern, a mode of a diamond pattern, or a mode of a diagonal line pattern), or a mode may not change.

In this example, the first effect of the hold change is performed first, and the fourth effect of the hold change is performed later. On the contrary, the fourth effect of the hold change is performed first, and the first effect of the hold change is performed later. The effect may be performed, or the hold change first effect and the hold change fourth effect may be performed at the same time. Further, the second effect of the hold change may be performed together with the fourth effect of the hold change, and the third effect of the hold change may be performed together with the fourth effect of the hold change.

Further, after the second hold icon f2, which is a roulette icon, changes to a hold icon in a diamond pattern mode at a certain timing in FIGS. 237 (b) to 237 (d), the second hold icon in the diamond pattern mode is changed. The shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the hold change may hit f2, and the second hold icon f2 may change to the hold icon in the form of a vertical line pattern. That is, the mode may change in two stages.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example in which the fifth effect of the hold change is performed together with the fourth effect of the hold change, and an example of the sixth effect of the hold change.

FIG. 238 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (5), and in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, the special figure 1 hold icon f1 is used as a roulette icon in a variable display mode. Is displayed. Further, the appearance animation of the target icon TI has started, and a part of the target icon TI has begun to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 238 (2), the appearance animation continues, the target icon TI continues to descend, and eventually the target icon TI is attached to the first hold icon f1 which is the roulette icon in the variable display mode, and the appearance animation ends. (Fig. 238 (3)).

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 238 (4), the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth effect of the pending change, appears, and in the following FIG. Hold, the arrow icon YI is displayed. After that, the arrow icon YI disappears, and an arrow is fired from Yoshimune's character YM.

In FIG. 238 (6), the arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in the following figure (7), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf and disappears. There is. In FIG. 238 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 238 (9), the effect image mf disappears completely and becomes the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. , The roulette icon of the mode in the variable display changed to the mode of the diamond pattern is displayed as the first hold icon f1. In addition, Yoshimune's character YM, who is the character of the fifth production of the pending change, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with his thumb up. Subsequently, in FIG. 238 (10), the character YM of the Yoshimune disappears, but the first hold icon f1 still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI is still hit by the arrow.

In this example as well, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variable display is displayed to another mode, and in FIG. 238 (11), the roulette icon in the mode in which the variable display is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and becomes invisible. ing. In addition, the effect image mf covers both the target icon TI and a part of the arrow and makes them invisible. In FIG. 238 (12), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the vertical line pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 238 (13), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the vertical line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

The arrow fired by Yoshimune's character YM does not hit the target icon TI, and the mode of the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change, or the arrow fired by Yoshimune's character YM is the target icon. If the mode of the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change despite hitting the TI, the first hold icon f1 is expected to be a bigger hit than the vertical line pattern mode. It may change only to a mode with a low degree (a mode of a lattice pattern, a mode of a diamond pattern, or a mode of a diagonal line pattern), or a mode may not change.

Next, the sixth effect of the pending change will be described.

FIG. 238 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in a state where one hold icon f1 in the default dot pattern mode is displayed and the decorative pattern is variablely displayed. In FIG. 238 (b), one ball is won at the start port 230, and in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, the hold icon increase animation is started, and the hold icon in the default mode is started. Gradually increases. Before the increase animation ends, one ball is won again at the first special figure start port 230 (FIG. 238 (c)), and in the following FIG. 238 (d), the special figure 1 hold icon display area f In the third area, the countdown icon is displayed as the third hold icon f3. This countdown icon is due to the 6th effect of the hold change, and the increase animation of the countdown icon is not performed or even if it is performed, the increase animation of the countdown icon is shorter than the increase animation of the hold icon in the default mode. Become an animation. Therefore, in FIG. 238 (d), the second hold icon f2 in the default mode of winning earlier is still in the middle of the increase animation, but the countdown icon won later has completed the display. The countdown icon is a plain gray aspect with a number that decreases over time. The number "3" is written on the countdown icon at the time of appearance in FIG. 238 (d). Further, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the third hold icon f3.

In FIG. 238 (e), the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 is completed, the display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 238 (f), the number of the countdown icon is "2". Further, in FIG. 238 (g), the number becomes “1”, and in FIG. 238 (h), it finally becomes “0”. Then, the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears (FIG. 238 (i)). In FIG. 238 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 238 (k), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a diamond pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

The timing at which the number of the countdown icon becomes "0" varies, but the interval of the countdown (decrease of the number with the passage of time) is constant. However, the interval may be limited to exactly 1 second, but may not be limited, and in some cases it is unified in 2 seconds, and in other cases it is unified to 0.5 seconds. It may have been done. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed when the countdown icon appears, the number of the countdown icon does not become "0", and the number of the countdown icon changes during the display of the variable display of the subsequent decorative symbols. It may be "0", but the above number does not decrease when a new decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, the hold icon of the countdown icon corresponds to the change target candidate display. Further, the hold icon of the countdown icon also corresponds to the hold icon in the form of the look-ahead notice, and the above number is always "0" before the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is started. However, there may be cases where the above-mentioned number does not become "0" (for example, the case changes to the default mode before it becomes "0"). Further, when the above number becomes "0", the mode change of the hold icon may always occur, and even if the above number becomes "0", the mode change of the hold icon may occur. It may not occur in some cases.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing another example of the pending change sixth effect. FIG. 239 shows three examples.

First, the first example will be described. The first example is an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change sixth effect. FIG. 239 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends with the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 completed first. The display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 239 (2), the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following FIG. 239 (3), the ninja character NJ appears. After deciding the pose, the balloon "I'm going" is displayed. In FIG. 239 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In addition, the number of the countdown icon of the third hold icon is "2". In FIG. 239 (5), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ overlaps with the third hold icon f3, and in FIG. 239 (6), the third hold icon f3 is covered by the effect image mf and disappears. There is.

In the examples shown in the figures after FIG. 229, a number of effect images were displayed, but all of these effect images were in a non-patterned manner. However, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of an icon pattern that changes thereafter. That is, the display of the effect image itself may correspond to the display of the change mode candidate. Alternatively, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of a pattern indicating the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the aspect of the icon will change after that. That is, there is a high possibility that the mode of the icon will change in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, diamond pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, and horizontal line pattern, and if it is the horizontal line pattern, the mode of the icon will surely change. You may do so.

In FIG. 239 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a grid pattern is beginning to be seen. In this example, the mode of the target hold icon is changed before the number of the countdown icon becomes "0". In FIG. 239 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to the grid pattern mode is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Further, the character NJ shown in FIG. 239 (8) takes a success pose taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. Although the number of the countdown icon has disappeared, the mode of the third hold icon f3 may be changed once again at the timing when the number becomes "0", but in this example, FIG. 239 ( At the timing of 7), the change for the sixth production of the pending change is also performed. Therefore, the aspect of the third hold icon f3 does not change any more. In this way, when the mode of the target hold icon is changed by the two types of hold change effects of the hold change 1st effect and the hold change 6th effect, the mode is changed by one type of hold change effect. It is possible to change to a mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is high (for example, a mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is three steps higher than the mode in which the jackpot is expected to be two steps higher), or to make sure that the mode is changed to a mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is higher. .. That is, when the mode of the hold icon that was the countdown icon changes before the number of the countdown icon becomes "0", it is easy to change to the mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is high, or the expectation of the jackpot is high. You may make sure to change to a higher aspect.

Here, the combination of the hold change 6th effect and the hold change 1st effect is used, but it may be a combination of the hold change 6th effect and the hold change 2nd effect, and the hold change 6th effect and the hold change 1st effect may be combined. It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the hold change 6th effect and the hold change 4th effect, or a combination of the hold change 6th effect and the hold change 5th effect. It may be a combination other than.

Next, the second example will be described. This second example is an example of simultaneous change production. FIG. 239 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends with the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 completed first. The display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 239 (b), the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Further, in FIG. 239 (c), the number becomes “1”, and in FIG. 239 (d), it finally becomes “0”. Then, the simultaneous change effect is started, and the effect image mfn covering all the hold icons displayed at this stage is displayed (FIG. 239 (e)). The effect image mfn here is a collection of a plurality of effect images, and is an effect image that covers all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. It may be one large effect image. In addition, the simultaneous change effect here is started according to the number of the countdown icon becoming "0", but when the hold is accumulated up to a certain number of holds, the simultaneous change effect may be started. You may. That is, there may be a case where the simultaneous change effect is started according to the winning of the special drawing start port. For example, in the third hold or the fourth hold, which is the maximum number of holds, or to win a prize at the special figure start port, which means that the hold has been accumulated up to the eighth hold, which is the maximum number of holds in which special figures 1 and 2 are combined. The simultaneous change effect may be started accordingly. Further, when the number of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a certain number of times, if the hold is accumulated, the simultaneous change effect may be started, or the number of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a certain number of times. If n or more holds are accumulated when the value is reached, the simultaneous change effect may be started. For example, the simultaneous change effect may be started every 15 fluctuations, and more specifically, the simultaneous change effect is started in response to the display start of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is the 15th variation. There may be a case where the simultaneous change effect is started after the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is the 15th variation is started. In FIG. 239 (f), each of the effect images mfn becomes smaller, and in FIG. 239 (g), the effect image mfn disappears completely, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area f has three hold icons f1, f2, f3. Is displayed. Of these three hold icons f1, f2, and f3, the second hold icon f2 remains in the default mode, but the first hold icon f1 has changed to a diagonal pattern, and is a countdown icon. 3 The hold icon f3 has changed to a lattice pattern. In the simultaneous change effect, the mode of all the displayed hold icons may change, the mode of only the hold icon that was the countdown icon may change, or the mode of one hold icon may change. It may not change.

Finally, a third example will be described. FIG. 239 (d') shows the state of FIG. 239 (d), that is, three hold icons are displayed, and the number of one of the countdown icons is "0". At the same time as "0", there is a prize for one ball at the first special figure starting port 230. It should be noted that the same applies even if one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 immediately before the number of the countdown icon becomes "0". In the same figure (e') following FIG. 239 (d'), the simultaneous change effect is started, the effect image mnf covering all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed, and the fourth hold icon f4 is increased. The animation is no longer visible. Eventually, in the figure (f'), the effect image mfn disappears, and four hold icons f1 to f4 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the increasing animation of the fourth hold icon f4 is canceled from the beginning and is not executed. However, as shown in FIG. 239 (f'), the hold increase sound of the fourth hold icon f4 is output from the speaker 120. If the number of the countdown icon becomes "0" while the increase animation of the hold icon is displayed, the increase animation is canceled in the middle, or even if it is not canceled, it cannot be seen by the effect image mnf. If the augmentation animation is not canceled in the middle, after the effect image mnf disappears, if the remaining scenes of the augmentation animation remain, that scene is displayed. Of the four hold icons f1 to f4 shown in FIG. 239 (f'), the first hold icon f1 to the third hold icon f3 are the same as those hold icons f1 to f3 shown in FIG. 239 (f). The fourth hold icon f4 shown only in FIG. 239 (f') is displayed in the form of a diagonal line pattern. That is, the increased fourth hold icon f4 is displayed in a mode changed by the simultaneous change effect. Even if the simultaneous change effect is performed, the fourth hold icon f4 may be displayed in the default mode.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example in which the hold change first effect is performed while the curtain effect is being executed.

The curtain effect is an effect executed by the display on the first decorative pattern display device 208L, is one of the overlap effects that overlaps the display displayed up to that point, and is one of the displays displayed up to that point. At least a part of the display changes to a silhouette display due to the curtain effect, and the existence and outer shape can be understood, but the pattern and color cannot be understood.

FIG. 240 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the movement animation of the hold icon is completed and one hold icon f1 in the default dot pattern mode is displayed, and the decorative symbol is changed. The display is being made. Further, in FIG. 240 (a), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This upper edge CHu overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side, and in the form of a diagonal line pattern, just below the stage prepared in the variable icon display area e and the four areas prepared in the hold icon display area f. It is displayed.

In FIG. 240 (b), the curtain display CH is raised, and the stage prepared in the variable icon display area e and the lower part of the hold icon (here, the first hold icon f1) are overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. It is a silhouette display. The silhouette display in the curtain production is displayed in a solid black color without a pattern. The frames of the four areas prepared in the hold icon display area f are not displayed in silhouette and cannot be seen, but this frame may also be displayed in silhouette.

In FIG. 240 (c), the curtain display CH is raised to the upper end of the base icon UIb, the entire variable icon e1 is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the entire first hold icon f1 is also overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. , Both icons e1 and f1 are displayed in silhouette as a whole. Further, the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH overlaps a part of the lower frame portion CRf in the closed chance roulette display CR from the front side.

In FIG. 240 (d), the curtain display CH is raised to a height exceeding the chance roulette display CR, and a part of the closed chance roulette display CR (frame portion CRf) is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. However, the silhouette is not displayed and a part of it is not visible.

In FIG. 240 (e), the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following figure (f), the ninja character NJ appears. After deciding the pose, the balloon "I'm going" is displayed. In FIG. 240 (g), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 240 (h), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is displayed behind the curtain portion CHc, and the shuriken is displayed in silhouette. In addition, three lines representing the momentum of the shuriken are displayed straddling the curtain portion CHc. In FIG. 240 (i), the shuriken has flown to a position where it contacts the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette, and in the following FIG. 240 (j), the first hold icon f1s is visible, but the shuriken is visible. I can't see it. However, the three lines that represent the momentum of the shuriken are displayed in silhouette and are visible. In FIG. 240 (j), the silhouette-displayed shuriken overlaps with the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s. That is, as shown in FIG. 229 (k), the shuriken hits the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 240 (k), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s was displayed, and in FIG. 240 (l), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. ing. In the following FIG. 240 (m), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 240 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1 as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 240 (n), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 240 (n) is a success pose taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. I'm taking.

In FIG. 240 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and disappears. In FIG. 240 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ also disappears, returning to a state in which nothing is displayed on the stage SG.

After the character NJ disappears, the curtain display CH starts descending, and in FIG. 240 (q), the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the first hold icon f1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 240 (r), the curtain display CH is lowered to a position where the upper part of the first hold icon f1 can be seen, and the mode of the first hold icon f1 is changed from the default dot pattern mode to the diagonal line pattern mode. You can see that it is changing. That is, it becomes possible to confirm the mode of the hold icon and the variable icon before the lowering of the curtain display CH is completed (before the curtain effect is completed). In FIG. 240 (s), the curtain display CH is completely lowered and the curtain display CH disappears. In this example, the curtain effect is executed from immediately before FIG. 240 (a) to immediately before FIG. 240 (s). The timing at which the entire hold icon and the entire variable icon start to overlap by the curtain portion CHc may be the timing when the character NJ throws the shuriken, or the timing shown in FIG. 240 (h). , The timing shown in FIG. (I) may be used. Further, the timing at which a part of the overlapped hold icon and a part of the variable icon starts to be seen may be the timing of FIG. 240 (n) or the timing of FIG. 240 (o). However, the timing may be the timing shown in the figure (p).

In the curtain effect described above, the pattern and color are not known, but it is possible to know which hold icon the hold change effect is performed on. Further, when the curtain effect is executed, the hold change effect is more likely to be performed or may be always performed as compared with the case where the curtain effect is not executed.

FIG. 240 (p') is a diagram showing an example different from that of FIG. 240 (p). In FIG. 233 (p'), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH is displayed in a grid pattern. The upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH may be displayed in the form of a pattern indicating the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the aspect of the icon has changed. That is, there is a high possibility that the form of the icon changes in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, diamond pattern, checkered pattern, vertical line pattern, and horizontal line pattern. It may be changed. The mode of the upper edge portion CHu may continue to be displayed in the same mode from the time of appearance shown in FIG. 240 (a). Alternatively, the mode of the upper edge portion CHu is the default dot pattern mode at the time of appearance of FIG. 240 (a), and the mode may change at the timing of FIG. 240 (n). That is, at the timing when the mode of the first hold icon f1 may have changed, the mode of the upper edge CHu may also change to a mode indicating the possibility that the mode of the icon has changed. In this case, the character NJ may not take the success pose, or the mode of the icon may not change even if the success pose is taken. In addition, the mode of the upper edge CHu may change at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible, as shown in FIG. 240 (q). Moreover, the mode of the upper edge portion CHu may be displayed in the mode of the pattern of the changing icon. That is, the display itself of the upper edge portion CHu may correspond to the display of the change mode candidate. In this case as well, the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu may continue to be displayed in the same aspect from the time of appearance shown in FIG. 240 (a), or the aspect of the first hold icon f1 changes when the character NJ takes a successful pose. The mode may change at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (n), or the mode may change at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible as shown in FIG. 240 (q). The mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIGS. 240 (a) to 240 (q) is a mode of a diagonal line pattern, and the mode of the first hold icon f1 that has begun to be seen from FIG. 240 (r) is also a mode of a diagonal line pattern. be. Further, since the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 240 (p') is the aspect of the lattice pattern, the aspect of the first hold icon f1 that begins to appear after that is also the aspect of the lattice pattern.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing another example in which the curtain effect and the hold change first effect are combined.

The examples of FIGS. 241 (a) to 241 (e) shown at the left end of FIG. 241 are examples in which the portion of the chance roulette display CR that overlaps the curtain portion CHc is displayed in silhouette. The fact that at least a part (or all) of the chance roulette display CR is displayed in silhouette in this way is a notice that the roulette effect may be started (the chance roulette display CR may open). Corresponds to. However, just because the silhouette is displayed does not mean that the roulette effect is always started, and it may not be started, or when the silhouette is displayed, the roulette effect is always started. You may. FIG. 241 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH has risen to a height exceeding the chance roulette display CR, and the chance roulette display CR in the closed state. A part of (frame part CRf) is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a part of it is displayed in silhouette. In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH is further raised, and the upper edge CHu has reached a position where the lower end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is hidden.

In FIG. 241 (c), the chance roulette display CR in the closed state has begun to vibrate, and the roulette effect has started. In the following FIG. 241 (d), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open and the display spaces CRs begin to be visible, but the portion overlapping the curtain portion CHc is a silhouette display, and the displayed content is unknown. In FIG. 241 (d), only the rightmost question mark is visible. In FIG. 241 (e), the chance roulette display CR is in the fully open state, and the upper frame portion CRf is displayed at a position beyond the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH. Here, too, the portion that overlaps the curtain portion CHc is still a silhouette display, and only the question mark at the right end is visible. After that, as in FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. Eventually, as in FIG. 229 (t), the variable display in the chance roulette display CR ends, and the character display such as the look-ahead notice is displayed in the display space CRs. The excluded part cannot be seen by the silhouette display. After that, as in FIG. 229 (v), the chance roulette display CR returns to the closed state.

The examples of FIGS. 241 (1) to (5) are examples in which the success history display of the hold change effect is displayed. FIG. 241 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (j), and in FIG. 241 (1), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed so far. In FIG. (2), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In the following FIG. 241 (3), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 241 (3), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1 as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 241 (4), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (4) is a success pose taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. By displaying the character NJ in this success pose, it may be confirmed that the hold change effect has been successful. Next, in FIG. 241 (5), a success history display SRH indicating that the hold change effect was successful is displayed on the curtain display CH. This success history display SRH is a display in which the characters "success" are displayed on a blank background, and the silhouette is displayed instead of directly above the first hold icon f1s in which the mode should have changed. It is displayed directly above between the variable icon e1s and the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s.

The examples of FIGS. 241 (A) to 241 (H) are examples in which the hold change effect is performed once more while the success history display SRH of the hold change effect is displayed. FIG. 241 (A) is a continuation from the state after the ninja character NJ displayed in FIG. 241 (5) disappears, and in FIG. 241 (A), the success history display SRH is displayed on the curtain display CH. Is displayed.

In FIG. 241 (B), the ninja character NJ for the first effect of the pending change appears again on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following figure (C), the ninja character NJ appears again. Decides a pose and a balloon of "I'm going" is displayed. After that, although not shown, the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken and hits the first hold icon f1s of the silhouette display, as in FIGS. 240 (g) to 240 (j), in FIG. 241 ( In D), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s has been displayed, and in FIG. 241 (E), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In the following FIG. 241 (F), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 241 (F), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1 as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 241 (G), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (G) is a success pose taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. It is confirmed that the pending change effect was successful again. Next, in FIG. 241 (H), another success history display SRH is displayed on the success history display SRH that has been displayed so far, and a total of two success history display SRHs are displayed. That is, the number of success history display SRHs corresponding to the number of successes of the hold change effect is displayed.

It should be noted that the number of success history display SRHs to be displayed may be displayed more than once due to the success of one pending change effect. In this case, the number of success history display SRHs displayed represents the degree of expectation of a jackpot in which the icon changes. For example, when the default dot pattern icon (here, the first hold icon f1) is targeted, if one success history display SRH is displayed, one step change is performed once and the icon has a diagonal pattern. If two success history display SRHs are displayed, the one-step change is performed twice or the two-step change is performed once and the icon changes to a diamond-shaped pattern. If three success history display SRHs are displayed, the one-step change is performed three times or the three-step change is performed once and the icon changes to a grid pattern. Success history display If four SRHs are displayed, one step change is performed four times or four steps are changed once and the icon changes to a vertical line pattern, and the success history display If five SRHs are displayed, the one-step change is performed five times, or the five-step change is performed once, and the icon changes to a horizontal line pattern.

FIG. 241 (H-1) is a diagram showing another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, the success history display SRH is displayed directly above the corresponding icon. That is, two success history display SRHs indicating that the mode change of the variable icon e1 was successful are displayed directly above the variable icon e1, and the success history indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 was successful. One display SRH is displayed directly above the first hold icon f1. The display mode is the same for all success history display SRHs, and the characters "success" are displayed on a blank background.

FIG. 241 (H-2) is a diagram showing another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, one success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variable icon e1 is successful is displayed directly above the variable icon e1, indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful. One success history display SRH2 is displayed directly above the first hold icon f1. The success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variable icon e1 is successful is a display in which the characters "success" are displayed on the background of the checkered pattern, and the variable icon e1 has the same checkered pattern as the background pattern. It may be a definite display indicating that it is changing. Alternatively, it may be a definite display indicating that the mode has changed to four or more stages. For example, when the variation icon e1 before the change is the default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that the icon has changed to the vertical line pattern or the horizontal line pattern, and the variation before the change. When the icon e1 is an icon with a diagonal line pattern, it may be a definite display indicating that the icon has changed to a horizontal line pattern. Further, the success history display SRH2 indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful is a display in which the characters "success" are displayed on the background of the diagonal line pattern, and the first hold icon f1 is the background pattern. It may be a definite display indicating that the pattern has changed to the same diagonal pattern. Alternatively, it may be a definite display indicating that the mode has changed to two or more stages. For example, when the first hold icon f1 before the change is the default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that the icon has changed to a mode equal to or higher than the diamond pattern, and the first before the change. When the hold icon f1 is a diagonal line pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that the mode has changed to a checkerboard pattern or higher.

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a curtain effect and a hold change effect.

FIGS. 242 (a) to 242 (e) are examples in which the appearance animation of the target icon TI described with reference to FIG. 234 was performed during the execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (a), the curtain display CH is raised to a height exceeding the chance roulette display CR. In this example, of the chance roulette display CR, the portion overlapping the curtain portion CHc is not displayed in silhouette and cannot be seen. In the following FIG. 242 (b), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI is beginning to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI is gradually descending, and in FIG. 242 (c), the target icon TI is considerably close to the curtain display CH. In FIG. 242 (d), the target icon TI is displayed straddling the curtain display CH, and the lower end portion of the target icon TI overlaps the curtain portion CHc to form a silhouette display, while the upper end portion of the target icon TI. Is displayed normally. The middle portion of the target icon TI overlaps with the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH and is not visible. In FIG. 242 (e), the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is accompanied by the silhouette-displayed target icon TIs. In the silhouette display, if the shape changes due to other icons such as the target icon TIs, or if the shape of the icon itself is deformed, it can be judged from the outer shape, but the pattern, color, characters, and symbols Etc. (for example, the mode of roulette display) cannot be determined.

FIGS. 242 (1) to 242 (5) are examples in which the countdown icon described with reference to FIG. 238 is displayed during the execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (1), the curtain display CH is raised to a height exceeding the chance roulette display CR. In FIG. 242 (2), one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230, and the increase animation of the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is not performed, and FIG. 242 (3) shows. Then, the hold increasing sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120, and the silhouette-displayed second hold icon f2s is displayed. The hold increase sound here may be a dedicated hold increase sound that is output only when the countdown icon is displayed due to the hold increase. In the silhouette-displayed second hold icon f2s, the mode of the pattern, color, characters, symbols, etc. is unknown, but the dedicated hold increase sound was output from the speaker 120, and the hold icon increase animation was not performed. From this, it can be inferred that the countdown icon was displayed due to the increase in hold. Actually, although the second hold icon f2 is displayed as a countdown icon here, the countdown display is omitted because the number indicating the countdown cannot be seen at all. A person who can guess that the countdown icon is displayed can look forward to when the second hold icon f2 changes, and the interest of the game may be improved. Eventually, when the number of the countdown icon, which is the second hold icon f2, becomes "0", the silhouette of the effect image mf is at the position where the second hold icon f2s is displayed, as shown in FIG. 242 (4). The display is displayed, and in FIG. 242 (5) that follows, the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller.

FIGS. 242 (A) to 242 (H) are examples in which the curtain effect is executed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 242 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (A), the curtain display CH is raised to a height exceeding the chance roulette display CR. After that, as far as the silhouette display is seen through the curtain portion CHc, the hold change effect is not started, and the illustration is omitted, but the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area 208c. The second stop (temporary stop) is performed at, and as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the temporary stop is also performed in the last remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is performed. Shakes and fluctuates (temporarily displayed). Then, in FIG. 242 (C), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the final display is started. In FIG. 242 (D), the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the erasing animation of the variable icon e1s is started while the silhouette is displayed, and the silhouette is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e shown in FIG. 242 (D). The variable icon e1s of the display is considerably small, and in the following FIG. 242 (E), the erasing animation of the variable icon e1s which was the silhouette display is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. No.

Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 242 (F), the decorative symbol variation display is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol is variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been reduced from "1" to "0". However, one hold icon is displayed in silhouette display, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. The curtain production is still continuing, and it is executed across the continuous variable display of the decorative pattern. Subsequently, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, but the illustration is omitted here. In FIG. 242 (G), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, no hold icon is displayed, and the variable icon is displayed. The variable icon e1s of the silhouette display is also displayed on the stage of the silhouette display in the display area e. Further, the curtain display CH has started to descend, and the curtain display CH has descended to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the variable icon e1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 242 (H), the curtain display CH is lowered to a position where all of the variable icon e1 can be seen, and the mode of the variable icon e1 is changed from the default dot pattern mode to the lattice pattern mode. Can be confirmed. As described above, as far as the silhouette display is seen through the curtain portion CHc, the pending change effect has not been started, but the mode of the variable icon e1 has changed. In this example, the curtain effect itself corresponds to the hold change effect. As described above, since the variable icon e1 can be considered as a kind of hold icon, it is called a hold change effect including the change effect of the variable icon. When the hold change effect is performed by the curtain effect itself, any one or more of the hold change 1st effect to the hold change 6th effect, or some of the hold change effects, or all the hold changes. It may be configured so that it is easy to change to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the production.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing another example of the curtain effect.

FIGS. 243 (a) to 243 (b) are examples in which the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 243 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (d), and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 243 (a), the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol are displayed. The display area 208c is completely covered by the curtain portion CHc. The variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is a state in which nothing is visible without silhouette display.

After that, although not shown, the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, then the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the last remaining middle symbol is performed. Temporary stop is also performed in the display area 208b, and the combination of decorative symbols fluctuates (temporarily displayed). Then, in FIG. 243 (b), the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the final display of the combination of decorative symbols is started. When the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the previously invisible combination of decorative symbols is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. That is, instead of displaying the silhouette, the decorative pattern displayed on the back side of the curtain portion CHc is preferentially displayed on the front side. In FIG. 243 (b), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Therefore, the player can know whether it is a big hit or a loss by combining decorative symbols. The variable icon e1 and the hold icon f1 remain in silhouette display.

FIGS. 243 (1) to 243 (3) are examples of combining the curtain effect and the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 92. FIG. 243 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), in which the curtain display CH is raised to the upper end of the base icon UIb, and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH is a closed chance roulette display. It overlaps a part of the lower frame portion CRf in the CR from the front side. Further, in FIG. 243 (1), a meter display appears on the upper left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the meter display here, the meter frame mf is white, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. In the following description, white is treated as a dot pattern, blue is treated as a diagonal line pattern, green is treated as a diamond pattern, red is treated as a checkered pattern, gold is treated as a vertical line pattern, and rainbow color is treated as the same as a horizontal line pattern. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 243 (1) is an increasing type, has five scales, and fills up at the sixth stage. The meter of this white meter display MW has risen to two scales. The appearance timing of the meter display varies as described in detail in the explanations using FIGS. 80 to 92. For example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol appears. For example, when high-speed fluctuations occur or when symbol fluctuations start. Further, the meter display may be started in an empty state (the state where the meter is 0), or the meters are halfway accumulated as in the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 243 (1). The display may start in the state.

The effect by the meter display here may be a kind of hold change effect in which the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes when the meter is full. The color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may represent the ease of success in changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is easy to succeed in changing the mode in the order of white (dot pattern), blue (diagonal line pattern), green (diamond pattern), red (lattice pattern), gold (vertical line pattern), and rainbow color (horizontal line pattern). If it is a color (horizontal line pattern), it may be successful whenever the meter is full. Alternatively, the color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may represent a color (pattern) in which the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. For example, when the meter frame mf or the meter is red (checkerboard pattern), the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may change to red (checkerboard pattern) when the meter is full. Furthermore, when the meter is full, if the meter frame mf or the meter is white (dot pattern), the mode of the hold icon or variable icon changes to the next higher mode, and it is blue (diagonal pattern). If it is, it changes to a two-step upper mode, if it is green (diamond pattern), it changes to a three-step higher mode, if it is red (lattice pattern), it changes to a four-step higher mode, and it is golden (vertical line). If it is a pattern), it may be changed to a five-step higher mode, and if it is a rainbow color (horizontal line pattern), it may be changed to a six-step higher mode.

In FIG. 243 (2), the curtain display CH continues to rise, and in FIG. 243 (3), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. The upper half of the white meter display MW is not visible because it overlaps with this upper edge CHu, but the lower half of the white meter display MW is covered by the curtain part CHc and is displayed in silhouette in black with no pattern. It is displayed. That is, the meter frame mf, the portion filled with the meter, and the portion not filled with the meter are all displayed in black without any distinction. Therefore, the player cannot grasp how much the meter has been stored. On the other hand, even if the silhouette is displayed in the same manner, as shown in FIG. 243 (3'), the portion filled with the meter and the portion not filled with the meter can be displayed separately. The player can grasp how much the meter has accumulated. In the white meter display MWs displayed in silhouette shown in FIG. 243 (3'), the scale was displayed up to the scale, but the scale may not be displayed.

FIGS. 243 (A) to 243 (E) are examples in which the curtain effect is executed by the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The curtain effect may be executed by the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or the decoration of any two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be executed by the display on the symbol display device, or may be executed by the display on all three decorative symbol display devices.

FIG. 243 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and a change candidate icon HKI in the mode of the diagonal line pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB. In FIG. 243 (B), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. This upper edge CHu overlaps with the character display of "castle town" representing the castle town mode from the front side, and is displayed in the form of a diagonal line pattern.

In FIG. 243 (C), the curtain display CH is raised, the character display of "castle town" is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the silhouette is displayed in black without a pattern, making the characters unreadable.

In FIG. 243 (D), the curtain display CH is raised until it exceeds the treasure box TB, the entire treasure box TB is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the entire treasure box TB is a solid black silhouette display.

In FIG. 243 (E), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change candidate icon HKI displayed on the treasure box TB is on the curtain CHc. It overlaps, and even the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in a black silhouette with no pattern. Therefore, it is not possible to confirm the mode of the change candidate icon HKI. In the state where the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in silhouette, it may be configured so that it can be easily changed to a mode in which the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the state where the silhouette is not displayed, until the curtain effect is started. The change candidate icon HKI, which was displayed in the form of a diagonal line pattern, may have changed to a form equal to or greater than the rhombus pattern when the curtain effect is completed, or has always changed to a form equal to or greater than the rhombus pattern. You may. On the other hand, the variation display of the fifth symbol displayed at the upper end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the upper edge portion CHu. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the fifth symbol of the variable display, which was displayed just behind the upper edge CHu, is preferentially displayed on the front side.

The timing of starting the display of the curtain display CH may be before the treasure box TB is displayed. In this case, the pattern and color of the treasure box TB cannot be grasped from the beginning. Further, the display start timing of the curtain display CH may be after the treasure box TB is displayed and before the change candidate icon HKI appears in the treasure box TB. In this case, the change candidate icon HKI may appear. The pattern and color of the icon HKI cannot be grasped from the beginning.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 described above, the shuriken or arrow comes off without hitting the icon, or the shuriken or arrow comes off without hitting the target icon TI. It may be closed. Moreover, even if it hits, the aspect of the icon may not change. Alternatively, even if the character BC of the Bancho appears to have an icon, the mode of the icon may not change, or even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters representing the pattern are stopped and displayed. The aspect of the roulette icon may not change. On the other hand, if the shuriken or arrow hits, the mode of the icon may always change, if the chief character BC seems to have the icon, or if the roulette icon represents the pattern. Even when the character changes to the stopped display mode, the icon mode may always change.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 described in the present specification will be described with reference to FIG. 244. Here, FIG. 244 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 244 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol confirmation is being displayed (the symbol is stopped), the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the navigation character NC is displayed on the right side of the variable icon h0. The navigation character NC shown in FIG. 244 (a) is a standing Yoshimune character. This navigation character NC is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character NC does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character NC (for example, pre-reading notice, notice in the symbol variation display, and hold of symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character NC is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 244 (a), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as the variable icon, or the variable icon may be expressed as moving. good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain game state (one or two or more of a normal game state, a probability change state, a hidden probability change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is given the letters "large", and the second is given the letters "board". The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, above the decorative pattern display device 208, a Senryobako accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryobako accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 244 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The configuration of these decorative symbol display devices is the same as the configuration of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 195 and the like. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured so as to be able to slide and move in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the effect itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is invisible. The decorative member may be made transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be made visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigator character NC, which is a standing Yoshimune character, is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 244 (b), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 244 (b), the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round patternless and white display mode), but the progress of the game. The display mode may change depending on the situation. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is displayed as stopped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain game state (one or two or more of a normal game state, a probability change state, a hidden probability change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a rule (for example, it changes in order such as background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → .... Here, the rule changes. If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 244 (b), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 244 (b) is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryobako accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 244 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 245 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 245 is a flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol which is lost without reaching the reach state. FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 245 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc., or the number of holds, or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are set to "((. It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example that is out of reach without being in the reach state, "Fig. XX (11) -1", "Fig. XX (11) -2" ... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 245 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of disappointment). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream ghost effect and a chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol, etc. shall be performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the production examples of the embodiments described so far.

In FIG. 245 (b), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol comes off or is a big hit after the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect. The flow from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game is shown. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". , And the period from the fixed stop to the end of the jackpot game may be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the jackpot or the miss is reached after the reach state is reached, the branch numbers in the drawings are "Fig. XX (2) -1", "Fig. XX (2) -2", and so on. "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including a mini game and a look-ahead notice, and a pseudo-ream may be produced, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice by displaying a normal reach or a cut-in image, a group notice, etc. may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image, etc. may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the parts described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

FIGS. 246 to 250 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effect referred to here is an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon (for example, the first hold icon h1), the variable icon h0, the character icon, and the like. Further, the change effect shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 is an effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effect shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 is shown in another drawing. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 250, although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also provided, these are not shown, but the effect examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 are shown in FIGS. It may be an production example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not provided. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 250, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 246 to 250, and the technical idea thereof. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of a change effect including a hold icon change effect, and FIG. 247 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246 up to FIG. Is a diagram showing an example of a change effect including a timer advance notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a navigator character NC, which is a standing Yoshimune character, is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 246 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is shown in special figure 2. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 246 (11) -1, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and any of these three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Is also displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 246 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. Not done. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

When the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is started, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -2, the first decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of the above and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and becomes the first hold icon h11. It is displayed, the third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, among the second hold number displays displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is changed to "2".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -3, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued. The variation display of the decorative symbol started at the timing of FIG. 246 (11) -2 continues until FIG. 246 (11) -17.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -4, the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow appears in the upper left corner. This Yoshimune character YM corresponds to the character of the change effect. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, which is a general term for the hold icon and the variable icon.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -5, a ninja character NJ appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ also corresponds to the character of the change production. More specifically, the ninja character NJ may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, or may change the display mode of another character (for example, Yoshimune's character YM holding a bow). Corresponds to a certain character. The Yoshimune character YM appearing in FIG. 246 (11) -4 may also be a character that may change the display mode of another character (for example, the ninja character NJ). In FIG. 246 (11) -5, both the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

When one display (for example, the display of one character) changes the display of the other (for example, the display of one character), the one displayed first is the one displayed later. May be changed, and conversely, the one displayed later may be changed or the one displayed earlier may be changed. Alternatively, the one displayed later may not change the one displayed earlier, and when displayed at the same time, one may change the other, or at the same time. Even when displayed, one may not change the other. Further, the larger display may change the smaller display, and conversely, the smaller display may change the larger display. In addition, the display with the higher reliability of the jackpot may change the display with the lower reliability of the jackpot, and conversely, the display with the lower reliability may change the display with the higher reliability. It may be changed. The reliability of the jackpot may be the player's advantage (same throughout this specification) and is represented by differences in color, pattern, size, number, and the like.

In FIG. 246 (11) -6, the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow does not start the movement, but the ninja character NJ starts the movement and throws a shuriken. The operation in "starting an operation" here does not include a repetitive operation or a standby operation, and means a new operation different from the previous operation (the same shall apply hereinafter). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -6 displays a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -7, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly turns and flies toward the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow. The scene that looks like is displayed. The Yoshimune character YM holding the bow has not yet started to move, and the back sword eventually hits the Yoshimune character YM. In Fig. 246 (11) -8, at least a part of the Yoshimune character YM is an effect image. Covered by mα, Yoshimune's character YM is more difficult to see than before it was covered by the effect image mα. The effect image mα may cover only a part of Yoshimune's character YM, or may cover the whole.

In FIG. 246 (11) -9, the effect image mα disappears, and the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling appears. That is, Yoshimune's character YM has changed from a display mode with a bow and arrow to a display mode with bowling. Yoshimune's character YM who does this bowling also corresponds to the character of the change production. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, which is a general term for the hold icon and the variable icon. The change in the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM means that the effect has changed, and more specifically, the type of effect is the same but the mode has changed. That is, although the change effect continues, it can be considered that the mode of the change effect has changed and the effect has changed. The change effect may be temporarily interrupted. For example, while the effect image mα is displayed, it can be seen that the change effect is temporarily interrupted. Before and after the change of the effect, the type of effect may be different, for example, a change effect and a character movement effect.

The period during which the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow, in other words, the change effect in which the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow is displayed, is being executed is the start timing and end timing shown below. It can be represented by any combination where the start comes first and the end comes after. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow appears (Fig. 246 (11) -4), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (shuriken). It may be the timing when the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (Fig. 246 (11) -8), or the effect image mα disappears. It may be the timing (the timing when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune changes).

In FIG. 246 (11) -10, the previously displayed ninja character NJ disappears. The period in which the change effect using the ninja character NJ, in other words, the change effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed, is considered to be executed is the start timing and end timing shown below, with the start first and the end after. Can be represented by all combinations. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (Fig. 246 (11) -5), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown). ), The timing when the shuriken hits, or the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ disappears (Fig. 246 (11) -10), or the timing when the ninja character NJ finishes the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown). ), The timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (Fig. 246 (11) -8), or the timing when the effect image mα disappears. (Timing when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune changes) may be used.

Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has failed to change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, and has succeeded in changing other effects instead. .. However, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, changing other effects may fail, or both may succeed. Alternatively, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense and changing the other effects may be sure to succeed in changing one of them, or both of them may be changed. You can be sure to succeed.

At the same time as the ninja character NJ disappears, or after it disappears, Yoshimune's character YM, who has a bowling ball, starts to move and throws the bowling ball. The Yoshimune character YM may start operating before the ninja character NJ disappears. Furthermore, the ninja character NJ may not disappear and may continue to be displayed as it is. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -12 displays a scene in which the bowling ball thrown by the Yoshimune character YM appears to roll toward the hold icon or the variable icon. There is. The bowling ball eventually hits the first hold icon h11, and in FIGS. 246 (11) -13, the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ. Is also difficult to see. The effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11, or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the displayed hold icons, or may cover up to the variable icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or part of the holding frame (first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

In FIGS. 246 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). A plurality of types of hold icon display modes are prepared, and the display mode may change to other characters (for example, Yoshimune or grandfather), or may change to a red or rainbow color display mode. The display mode different from the default display mode is the look-ahead notice display mode, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode. For example, the display mode of the Yoshimune character has higher reliability of the jackpot than the display mode of the Sabohani character, and the jackpot may be confirmed in the rainbow-colored display mode. The reliability of the jackpot indicates the ease with which the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed. Further, in FIG. 246 (11) -14, the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling disappears.

During the period when the change effect using the bowling Yoshimune character YM, in other words, the change effect in which the bowling Yoshimune character YM is displayed, is being executed, the start timing and end timing shown below are started. It can be represented by any combination that ends first and ends later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the back sword hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (Fig. 246 (11) -8), or the timing of bowling Yoshimune. It may be the timing when the character YM appears (Fig. 246 (11) -9), or the timing when the bowling character YM of Yoshimune starts the operation (the timing when the bowling ball is thrown out). , It may be the timing when the bowling ball hits, or it may be the timing when the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -13). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the bowling character YM of Yoshimune disappears (Fig. 246 (11) -14), or the timing when the character YM of bowling Yoshimune ends the operation ( It may be the timing when the bowling ball has been thrown), the timing when the bowling ball hits, or the timing when the effect image mβ appears (Fig. 246 (11) -13). Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the effect image mβ disappears (the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes).

Further, in this example, the change effect using the bowling Yoshimune character YM has succeeded in changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, but may fail. Further, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change, and the display mode of the third hold icon h13 has changed. This may be the case, or the display mode of the plurality of hold icons (which may be all the displayed hold icons) may change. Alternatively, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the variable icon may change. Further, when the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM changes, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes at the changed stage. That is, in this example, it may be confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes at the stage of FIGS. 246 (11) -9.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -17, the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following Fig. (11) -18, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display.

Subsequently, the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani, which is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It moves to the variable icon display area and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, among the second hold number displays displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is changed to "1".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2, the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow corresponding to the character of the change effect appears in the upper left corner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3, a ninja character NJ corresponding to the character of the change effect appears in the upper right corner.

In FIG. 246 (1) -4, the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow does not start the movement, but the ninja character NJ starts the movement and throws a shuriken. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -4 displays a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -5, a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the variable icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -6, the shuriken suddenly turned and did not hit the variable icon h0, but passed over the first hold icon h11. Is displayed, and in Fig. (1) -7, the shuriken disappears and the ninja character NJ also disappears. After all, the change effect here has ended in failure, and the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon has not changed. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the shuriken disappears, or the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (Fig. 246 (1) -3), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown). ) May be. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ disappears (Fig. 246 (1) -7), or the timing when the ninja character NJ finishes the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown). ), Or it may be the timing when the shuriken does not hit and the shuriken disappears.

Also, from the appearance of the ninja character NJ (Fig. 246 (1) -3) to the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon (Fig. 246 (1) -4). From the appearance of the ninja character NJ in Fig. 246 (11) -5 above, to the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon (Fig. 246 (11) -6). It is the same. That is, in the case where the change effect fails and the case where the change effect succeeds, a part including the first part has the same mode, and the mode is different from the middle. In other words, when the change production fails and when the change production succeeds, the first part of the animation of the change production using the ninja character NJ is the same, but it becomes a different scene from the middle. .. If the introduction part is the same in this way, it is difficult for the player to determine which way to develop at first, but eventually it becomes possible to know whether it is likely to fail or succeed, and even after the production is started, that production May be able to draw attention to. In addition, depending on whether the change effect fails or succeeds, the ninja character NJ starts to move until the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. Can be said to be the same. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the process is the same in the case where the change effect fails and the case where the change effect is successful. Even in this case, it may be possible to pay attention to the branching of the production.

At the same time as the ninja character NJ disappears, or after it disappears, Yoshimune's character YM, who has not been moving until then, starts to move and shoots an arrow. The Yoshimune character YM may start operating before the ninja character NJ disappears. Furthermore, the ninja character NJ may not disappear and may continue to be displayed as it is. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -8 displays a scene in which an arrow shot by Yoshimune's character YM is likely to hit the variable icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -9, the arrow hits the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ. It is more difficult to see than before. The effect image mβ may cover only a part of the variable icon h0, or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover a part or all of the displayed hold icon. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or part of the holding frame (first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

In FIG. 246 (1) -10, the effect image mβ disappeared, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 did not change. That is, a plurality of types of display modes of the variable icon h0 are prepared as in the hold icon, and the display modes of other characters (for example, Yoshimune and grandfather) and the display modes of red and rainbow colors are facilitated. The display mode different from the default display mode is a so-called normal notice display mode in which the variable display currently being performed is a notice target, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode. For example, the display mode of the Yoshimune character has higher reliability of the jackpot than the display mode of the Sabohani character, and the jackpot may be confirmed in the rainbow-colored display mode. After all, the change effect here has ended in failure, and the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon has not changed. In this way, the display mode may not change even if the arrow hits, but if the arrow hits, the display mode may always change (success), or the arrow hits. The display mode may or may not change depending on whether or not the effect image mβ appears. That is, if the effect image mβ does not appear, the display mode does not always change (failure), and if the effect image mβ appears, the display mode always changes (success). good. Further, if the display mode of the variable icon changes (successfully), the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, although the variable icon h0 was the target here, the hold icon may be the target.

In FIG. 246 (1) -11, the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow and arrow disappears.

The period during which the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, with the start first and the end after. .. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM appears (Fig. 246 (1) -2), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM starts the operation (the timing when the arrow is fired). ), The timing at which the arrow hits, or the timing at which the effect image mβ appears (FIGS. 246 (1) -9). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM disappears (Fig. 246 (1) -11), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM ends the operation (finished firing the arrow). It may be the timing), the timing when the arrow hits, the timing when the effect image mβ appears (Fig. 246 (1) -9), or the effect image mβ disappears. The timing may be (FIG. 246 (1) -10).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 246 (1) -12, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 246 (1) -13, the second stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (2) -1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it can be developed into super reach. It has been notified. When the Sabohani group notice is started, the hold icon disappears along with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI section 281 and is prepared in the first UI section 280. The variable icon h0 disappears along with the pedestal hs0. Although the display of the navigation character NC remains, the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the character has developed into a swordsman reach. Subsequently, in FIG. 246 (3) -2, the button effect is started in a state where the swordsman reach continues, and the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. This button image 136a overlaps at least a part of the confronting Yoshimune and the swordsman. In addition, the character "push" that promotes the operation is displayed. In FIG. 246 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -4, the weak cut-in image CIw is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, although the character "swordsman reach" is still displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the character "weak cut-in" may be displayed instead of the character "swordsman reach".

Normally, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and a response effect (here, a weak cut-in image CIw is displayed) only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the lapse of the operation valid period. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune collapsed is displayed together with the characters "losing", and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In the abbreviated center of, "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the character will be lost. In addition, the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the sabohani in the first UI unit 280, which have disappeared so far, are also restored. It is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At the timing of this confirmation display, the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is deleted.

In the example described above, the change effect using the boring Yoshimune character YM shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 is a change effect for the hold icon, and the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2. The change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with the character YM was a change effect for the variable icon. Further, the change effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3 was a failure effect, but even if the change effect targets the variable icon, the change effect targets the hold icon. It may be. Further, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who bowls as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 may be a change effect for a variable icon, and all the change effects performed in this example are variable. It may be unified into a change effect targeting an icon. Alternatively, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2 may be a change effect targeting the hold icon, and all the change effects performed in this example are It may be unified into a change effect targeting the hold icon.

In addition, among the Yoshimune character YM and the ninja character NJ, the Yoshimune character YM appears first, but the Yoshimune character YM and the ninja character NJ may appear at the same time. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ may appear first. That is, in the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM and the change effect using the ninja character NJ, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM may be started first or at the same time. Alternatively, a change effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first.

In the example described above, the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow is used for the variable icon h0 changed from the first hold icon h11 whose display mode is changed by the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring. The change production was executed, but it ended in failure, and in the end, it was lost, but the Yoshimune character YM who is boring is more than the case where the change production using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow is performed. It is more likely that the player will be more advantageous when the change effect is performed. The term "prone to an advantageous development" as used herein means that an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state) is likely to occur, a premier production is likely to be started, or a jackpot confirmation production is performed. It may be easy to start, or it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol. For example, the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow changed the display mode of the default display mode variation icon h0 to the display mode of the Sabohani character, but in the end it was a loss in the variation display, whereas boring. Yoshimune's character YM who does Become. The same applies even when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the look-ahead notice is executed, and the variable display of the look-ahead notice target becomes a big hit. In this way, the bowling Yoshimune character YM may not appear unless the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow changes, but may appear from the beginning. In this case, further, the bowling Yoshimune character YM that appeared from the beginning does not tend to be advantageous for the player, and only the bowling Yoshimune character YM that appeared with a change in the production. It may be easy for the player to develop in an advantageous manner. Or conversely, the bowling Yoshimune character YM may be in a mode (directing) that appears only by changing from the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow, or is limited to the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow. It may be a mode (effect) that does not appear and appears only by a change from some effect.

In addition, when the production using the ninja character NJ is started first, and then the change production using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow or the change production using the bowling Yoshimune character YM is started. There may be. In this case, the production using the ninja character NJ does not change the production using the Yoshimune character YM. In addition, even if the effect using the ninja character NJ is completed, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow or the change effect using the bowling Yoshimune character YM may be executed. good.

In addition, the production using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow that appeared in Fig. 246 (1) -2 and the production using the ninja character NJ that appeared in Fig. 246 (1) -3 are both variable icons h0. It can be seen that it was a failure production (gase production) among the common types of production such as a change production targeting. Both effects may be a change effect targeting the hold icon, which is a different type of effect from the change effect targeting the variable icon h0. In addition, of the two effects, only the effect using Yoshimune's character YM may be a successful effect that succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon, and only the effect using the ninja character NJ may be a successful effect. It may be, or both productions may be successful productions. If both effects are successful effects, the display mode of the icon changes twice, or if they change at the same time, the display mode changes to a display mode in which the player's advantage is two or more steps higher.

Next, an example in which an effect using the timer display and a change effect are performed will be described.

Since FIGS. 247 (11) -1 and FIG. 247 (11) -2 are the same as FIGS. 246 (11) -1 and FIG. 246 (11) -2 described above, the description thereof will be omitted. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timer display TMα appears in the upper left. “03:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, suggesting that a certain effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. .. That is, the timer display TMα displayed as "03:00" is a timer advance notice effect in which the countdown starts from 3.00 seconds. The timer display in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying a decimal point of less than 1 second. Further, below the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, the characters “timer is being prepared” are displayed, and it is notified that the countdown has not started yet. Even if the timer display appears, while this "timer preparing" is displayed, the timer notice effect has not started yet, and the preparation notice effect for notifying that the timer notice effect will start is executed. It can be seen that the timer is being displayed, but it can also be seen that the timer advance notice effect has started with the appearance of the timer display. Further, the timer display TMα may be provided with a character icon, and the same applies to another timer display described below.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -4, a ninja character NJ corresponding to the character of the change effect appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense or change other effects (for example, change the mode of the effect or the content of the effect). .. In FIG. 247 (11) -4, both the timer display TMα and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

In FIG. 247 (11) -5, the character "timer is being prepared" is still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started on the timer display TMα, but the ninja character NJ starts the operation and throws a shuriken. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -5 displays a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon. Here, the scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (Fig. 247 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -5) is The scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ described above (Fig. 246 (11) -5 to Fig. (11) -6, Fig. It is the same as 246 (1) -3 to FIG. (1) -4).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -6, a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -7, the shuriken hits the first hold icon h11, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is , It is more difficult to see than before it was covered by the effect image mβ. The effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11, or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the displayed hold icons, or may cover up to the variable icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or part of the holding frame (first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

In FIGS. 247 (11) -8, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). As described above, as the display mode of the hold icon, a plurality of types of pre-reading notice display modes having different jackpot reliability are prepared, and the display mode may change to the display mode of other characters (for example, Yoshimune or old man). , It may change to a red or rainbow-colored display mode. Further, in FIG. 247 (11) -9, the ninja character NJ disappears.

The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is considered to be executed can also be represented by all combinations of the above-mentioned start timing and end timing, in which the start is first and the end is later.

Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has succeeded in changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, but may fail. Further, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change, and the display mode of the third hold icon h13 has changed. This may be the case, or the display mode of the plurality of hold icons (which may be all the displayed hold icons) may change. Alternatively, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the variable icon may change. Further, when the ninja character NJ appears, it may be confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes at the stage of appearance. That is, in this example, it may be confirmed that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes at the stage of FIG. 247 (11) -4.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 247 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 247 (11) -11, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 247 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following Fig. (11) -13, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display. Even after the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, the timer display TMα continues to be displayed, but the characters "timer is being prepared" are still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started on the timer display TMα.

Subsequently, the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani, which is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It moves to the variable icon display area and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, among the second hold number displays displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is changed to "1". On the other hand, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol is newly started, the timer display TMα is still displayed, but the characters "timer is being prepared" are still displayed, and the countdown is started on the timer display TMα. Not. The timer display TMα whose display was started in FIG. 247 (11) -3 is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol while maintaining the display of “03:00”. Although the change effect using the ninja character NJ has been completed, this change effect may be performed over a plurality of consecutive variation displays of the decorative pattern, and further, the change effect may be performed. Both the timer display TMα (timer notice effect) and the display of the ninja character NJ (change effect) may be displayed (executed) over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol. In addition, the display of Yoshimune's character YM with a bow and arrow (change effect) and the display of Yoshimune's character YM bowling (change effect) are also displayed (executed) across multiple consecutive changes in the decorative pattern. May be done. It should be noted that "displaying over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol" may disappear once during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (2) -1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, the character display of "timer is being prepared", the character display of reach, and at least a part of each of the navigation character NC. Sabohani overlaps in. The navigation character NC does not overlap with the navigation character NC, and the navigation character NC may overlap with at least a part of the navigation character NC. Similarly, regarding the character display, the character display may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In the following FIG. 247 (2) -3, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the navigation character will develop into super reach. When the Sabohani group notice is started, the hold icon disappears along with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI section 281 and is prepared in the first UI section 280. The variable icon h0 disappears along with the pedestal hs0. Although the display of the navigation character NC remains, the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the character has developed into a swordsman reach. With the development of Super Reach, the character display of "Timer is being prepared" disappears, and the countdown of the timer display TMα is started. That is, the countdown of the timer display TMα is started at the same time as the start of the super reach effect, but the countdown of the timer display TMα may be started after the start of the super reach effect. In the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (3) -2, "02:67" is displayed, and it is notified that 0.33 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, "00:00" is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a large image imitating the chance button 136. A certain big button image 136ab is displayed. This big button image 136ab overlaps all of Yoshimune and the swordsman who face each other, which is displayed as a production display of Super Reach, and Yoshimune and the swordsman are not visible. In addition, the characters of "push" that promote the operation are displayed in a large size according to the size of the deca button image 136ab. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the characters of "deca button" are displayed instead of the characters of "swordsman reach". The timer display TMα here suggests that the button effect is started. When the countdown of the timer display TMα is completed, the button effect may be started, or the effect other than the button effect may be started.

In FIG. 247 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136ab disappears, and the timer display TMα of "00:00" that has been displayed so far also disappears and is strong. The display switches to the cut-in image CIs display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigator character NC, the character of "swordsman reach" is displayed again instead of the character of "deca button", but the character of "strong cut-in" may be displayed.

Normally, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) is performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation valid period elapses. It may be.

Further, in this example, the timer display TMα is displayed until the chance button 136 is operated, but it may disappear when the chance button 136 is reached, or it disappears when the big button image 136ab appears. May be good.

The period during which the effect using the timer display TMα (timer notice effect) is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is after. That is, the start timing of the change effect is the timing at which the timer display TMα appears (FIG. 247 (11) -3). However, it may be the timing when the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 247 (3) -1). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer advance notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMα becomes “00:00” (FIG. 247 (3) -3), or the timing when the big button image 136ab appears (FIG. 247). It may be the timing (3) -3), the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 247 (3) -4), or the timing when the timer display TMα disappears (FIG. 247 (3)). -4) may be used.

After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -6, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordfighter who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the first decoration is displayed. In the substantially center of the symbol display device 208L, "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is planned to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Is notified.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. At this time, the characters "Big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the big hit will occur. In addition, the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the sabohani in the first UI unit 280, which have disappeared so far, are also restored. It is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At the timing of this confirmation display, the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is deleted.

In this example described above, the effect using the timer display TMα and the effect using the ninja character NJ are independent and different types of effects, but the timer display TMα has appeared. Both effects are common in that they are effects related to the notice for the variable display, which was the first hold of Special Figure 1 at the stage. That is, the change effect using the ninja character NJ is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon representing the first hold of the special figure 1 to the display mode of the look-ahead notice when the timer display TMα appears, and the timer display. The TMα is a notice display of a button effect, which is a notice effect, which is performed in a variable display in which the hold, which was the first hold in FIG. 1 at the time when the timer display TMα appears, is digested.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing an example in which an effect using the timer display and a change effect are combined.

248 (11) -1 to FIG. (11) -5 are the same as those of FIGS. 247 (11) -1 to (11) -5 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here as well. , The scene where the shuriken seems to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (Fig. 248 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -5) has been explained so far. After the appearance of the ninja character NJ, the shuriken seems to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon (Fig. 246 (11) -5 to Fig. (11) -6, Fig. 246 (1). ) -3 to Fig. (1) -4 and Fig. 247 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -5).

The shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly turned around on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -6, and the characters "timer in preparation" were still displayed, and the countdown was started. A scene that seems to fly toward the timer display TMα that has not been started is displayed. "03:00" is still displayed on the timer display TMα, and the shuriken eventually hits the timer display TMα displayed as "03:00". In FIG. 248 (11) -7, the timer display is displayed. At least a part of TMα is covered by a plurality of effect images mα, and the timer display TMα is more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image mα. The effect image mα may cover only a part of the timer display TMα, or may cover the whole.

In FIG. 248 (11) -8, the effect image mα disappears and the timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77” appears. That is, the timer display has changed from the mode (content) of "03:00" to the mode (content) of "07:77". The timer display TMβ displayed as "07:77" is a timer advance notice effect in which the countdown starts from 7.77 seconds. However, the character "timer is being prepared" is still displayed on the timer display TMβ displayed as "07:77" shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8, and the countdown has not yet started.

The change in the mode (content) of the timer display means that the effect has changed, and more specifically, the type of effect is the same but the mode (content) has changed. That is, although the effect using the timer display continues, it can be considered that the mode (content) of the effect has changed and the effect has changed. The timer display may be more likely to be a big hit in the end as the displayed time is longer. For example, the timer display is a display for notifying the start of the button effect, and in the button effect started after the countdown is completed, the effect having different reliability of the jackpot is executed according to the button operation. The effects with different reliability of the jackpot are associated with the time displayed on the timer display, and the longer the displayed time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot will be executed. .. For example, the time of "07:77" is associated with the premier production, and when "07:77" is displayed on the timer display, the jackpot may be rich or the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, between the button image 136a shown in FIG. 246 (3) -2 and the big button image 136ab shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, the big button image 136ab has a higher reliability of the jackpot and is shown in FIG. 246. In the example, when the effect using the timer display is executed instead of the effect using the Yoshimune character YM, the time of "01:00" may be displayed as the timer display. In addition to "size", "color", "pattern", and "number" may also indicate the degree of reliability of the jackpot. For example, the reliability of the jackpot is lowest in "white", highest in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold", and "rainbow" may be the highest, or "dot pattern". Is the lowest, followed by "diagonal pattern", "diamond pattern", "lattice pattern", and "vertical line pattern", and "horizontal line pattern" may be the highest, and the higher the number, the higher. But it may be.

The period during which the effect using the timer display TMα of "03:00" is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. .. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the timer display TMα of "03:00" appears (FIG. 248 (11) -3), or the timing at which the ninja character NJ starts the operation (FIG. 248 (11) -3). It may be the timing when the shuriken is thrown) or the timing when the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the effect using the timer display TMα may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), or the effect. It may be the timing when the image mα disappears (the timing when the mode of the timer display changes).

In FIG. 248 (11) -9, the previously displayed ninja character NJ disappears. The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is considered to be executed can also be represented by all combinations of the above-mentioned start timing and end timing, in which the start is first and the end is later.

Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has failed to change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, and has succeeded in changing other effects instead. .. However, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, changing other effects may fail, or both may succeed. Alternatively, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense and changing the other effects may be sure to succeed in changing one of them, or both of them may be changed. You can be sure to succeed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first hold icon h11, which has been the default display mode until now, changes to the look-ahead notice mode during the variation display started after winning, and changes to the display mode of Sabohani due to the look-ahead notice effect after the next change. .. In the pre-reading notice effect after the next change here, the display mode is changed and the pre-reading notice is started with the first stop as a trigger, but the timing for changing the display mode (the timing for starting the pre-reading notice) is the variable display. It may be at the same time as the start, or at any timing as long as the variable display is in progress. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon may change other than the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM and the change effect using the ninja character NJ, and the same applies to the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 248 (11) to 11, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 248 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following Fig. (11) -13, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display. Even after the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, the timer display TMβ continues to be displayed, but the characters "timer is being prepared" are still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started on the timer display TMβ.

Subsequently, the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani, which is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It moves to the variable icon display area and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, among the second hold number displays displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is changed to "1". On the other hand, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol is newly started, the timer display TMβ continues to be displayed, but the characters "timer is being prepared" are still displayed, and the timer display TMβ starts the countdown. Not. The timer display TMβ whose display was started in FIG. 248 (11) -8 is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol while maintaining the display of “07:77”.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (2) -1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, and in the following FIG. 248 (2) -3, the display of "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC. It has been announced that it will be carried out and will develop into super reach. When the display of "SP development" is performed and it is notified that the system will develop into super reach, the character display of "timer is being prepared" disappears and the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started. In the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 248 (2) -3, "07:40" is displayed. That is, it is notified that 0.37 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In this example, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started before the super reach effect is actually started, in other words, before the display of the effect display of the super reach effect is started. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 247, the countdown of the timer display TMβ was started in response to the start of the super reach effect, but in this example, the timer display is started at the stage when the notification for announcing the development to super reach is started. The TMβ countdown is started. In other words, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started between the start of the normal reach (after entering the reach state) and the start of the super reach effect.

Also in this example, when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281, and the first UI unit 280 is displayed. The variable icon h0 disappears along with the prepared pedestal hs0. Although the display of the navigation character NC remains, the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that the character has developed into a swordsman reach. The timer display TMβ is “05:45” in FIG. 248 (3) -1, and is “02:67” in FIG. 248 (3) -2 where the super reach effect is continuing, and the countdown is progressing. ..

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -3, "00:00" is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, the display of the premier button effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. NS. That is, the button image 136as is displayed together with the image of the character riding the motorcycle, and overlaps at least a part of the confronting Yoshimune and the swordsman. The button image 136as here also displays the character of "push" that promotes the operation. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the characters "premier" are displayed instead of the characters "swordsman reach". The premier production is a production in which the appearance rate of the production is extremely low, and when this premier production is executed, the jackpot is confirmed or the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed.

In this example, the timer display TMβ disappears according to the start of the premier button effect, but it may disappear at the time of "00:00", or the start of the premier button effect. It may disappear at the same time.

In FIG. 248 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -5, the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the premier button effect to the display of the strong cut-in image CIs. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed again instead of the characters "Premier", but the characters "Strong cut-in" may be displayed.

In this example as well, the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect may be performed after the lapse of the operation valid period.

The examples after FIG. (3) -6 following FIG. 248 (3) -5 are the same as the examples after FIG. (3) -6 shown in FIG. 247, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The period during which the effect using the timer display TMβ (timer notice effect) is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is after. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), or "07:77". The timing at which the timer display TMβ of the above appears (FIG. 248 (11) -8) may be used. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 248 (2) -2). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer advance notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMβ becomes “00:00” (FIG. 248 (3) -3), or the timing when the button image 136as appears (FIG. 248). It may be the timing (3) -3), the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 248 (3) -4), or the timing when the timer display TMβ disappears (FIG. 248 (3)). -4) may be used.

Comparing the examples shown after (11) -1 in FIG. 247 with the examples shown in FIG. 248, both are big hits, but the timer advance notice effect is shown in the examples shown after (11) -1 in FIG. 247. , The timer advance notice effect that appeared in the mode of "03:00" was changed, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 248, the timer advance notice effect that appeared in the aspect of "03:00" changed to "07:77". It was a timer notice production that appeared in the mode of. It is more advantageous for the player when the timer notice effect appearing in the "07:77" mode is performed than when the timer notice effect appearing in the "03:00" mode is performed. Prone. The term "prone to an advantageous development" as used herein means that an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state) is likely to occur, a premier production is likely to be started, or a jackpot confirmation production is performed. It may be easy to start, or it may be easy to finally confirm the jackpot symbol. For example, when the timer notice effect that appeared in the mode of "03:00" becomes "00:00", the button effect is started, and in the end, the fluctuation display is lost, whereas "07:77" When the timer notice effect that appears from the beginning in the mode becomes "00:00", the button effect is started, and the variable display becomes a big hit. The same is true even when the button effect is a look-ahead notice, and in this case, the variable display of the look-ahead notice is a big hit. As described above, the timer advance notice effect in the aspect of "07:77" does not appear unless the timer advance notice in the aspect of "03:00" changes, but may appear from the beginning. In this case, further, in the timer advance notice effect of the aspect of "07:77" that appeared from the beginning, it is not easy for the player to develop favorably, and the aspect of "07:77" that appeared with the effect changed. Only in the timer advance notice production of, it may be easy to be advantageous development for the player. Alternatively, conversely, the timer advance notice effect of the "07:77" aspect may be an aspect (effect) that appears only by changing the timer advance notice effect of the "03:00" aspect, or "03:00". The timer advance effect is not limited to the above mode, and may be an aspect (effect) that appears only by a change from some effect.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 248, in which an effect using a timer display and a change effect are combined.

Since FIGS. 249 (11) -1 to FIG. (3) -1 are the same as those of FIGS. 248 (11) -1 to (3) -1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted, but this example. However, the mode (content) of the effect using the timer display is changed by the change effect using the ninja character NJ. That is, the effect of the aspect of "03:00" has been changed to the effect of the aspect of "07:77". Further, the timer display TMβ of “07:77” after the change is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations (FIGS. 249 (11) 13 to 249 (1) -1). Then, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started at the stage when the notification for announcing the development to super reach is started, and the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 249 (2) -3 is subtracted to "07:40". .. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 249 (3) -1 has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character NC. The timer display TMβ continues subtraction during the super reach effect, and is “05:45” in FIG. 249 (3) -1, “04:37” in FIG. 249 (3) -2, followed by FIG. 249 ( In 3) -3, it is "00:50". In the example shown in FIG. 248 earlier, the premier button effect was started when the timer display TMβ became "00:00" (Fig. 248 (3) -3), but in this example, the timer display TMβ was "00: 00:". Even if it becomes "00", the button production will not start, but the premiere production will start. In FIG. 249 (3) -2, it is "04:37", and in the following FIG. 249 (3) -3, it is "00:50". The timer display TMβ that continues the countdown in this way eventually becomes "00:00" during the super reach production. When the timer display TMβ becomes "00:00", a premier production display in which four grandfather characters are lined up in a V shape is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, instead of the characters "Swordsman Reach" The word "premier" is displayed. The premier production here is also a production in which the appearance rate of the production is extremely low, and when this premier production is executed, the jackpot is confirmed or the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed. The display of the premier effect in which the four grandfather characters are lined up in a V shape overlaps with at least a part of the timer display TMβ which is "00:00".

The examples after FIG. (3) -6 following FIG. 249 (3) -5 are the same as the examples after FIG. (3) -6 shown in FIG. 247, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Compared with the examples shown in FIGS. 247 (11) -1 and later, the example shown in FIG. 249 described above shows that the effect using the timer display (timer notice effect) is followed by the effect (developing effect). In the example shown in FIG. 247, the effect was a button effect, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 249, the type of effect is different from that of the button effect, and in the two examples, the effect is the same until the effect using the timer display changes. However, the types of effects that are started after that in relation to the effects using the timer display are different.

In addition, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow, which appeared in Fig. 246 (11) -5, is a change using the boring Yoshimune character YM as shown in Fig. 246 (11) -9. In addition to changing to the effect, it may change to a timer advance effect using the timer display TMβ displayed as "07:77". In this case, it will change depending on the type of production, but the timer advance production of "07:77" is more likely to be more advantageous for the player than the change production of Yoshimune's character YM. .. Further, the timer advance notice effect using the timer display TMα displayed as "03:00" may be changed to the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling. In this case, " The change production of Yoshimune's character YM is more likely to be more advantageous for the player than the timer advance production of "03:00". The term "prone to advantageous development" as described above is the same as described above, and is likely to be an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), or a premier production is likely to be started. Alternatively, the jackpot confirmation effect may be easily started, or the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end. Furthermore, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow may change to the timer advance effect using the timer display TMα displayed as "03:00", and conversely, The timer advance effect of "03:00" may change to the change effect of Yoshimune's character YM, and in this case as well, the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than before the change. Easy to deploy. In addition, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling may be changed to the timer advance effect using the timer display TMβ displayed as "07:77", and conversely, "07". The timer notice effect of ": 77" may be changed to the change effect of Yoshimune's character YM, and in this case as well, the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than before the change. Prone. The change effect of Yoshimune's character YM is a kind of pre-reading notice effect when the hold icon is targeted, and is a kind of normal advance notice effect when the variable icon is targeted. Further, the timer advance notice effect described so far has been an effect related to a normal advance notice, but may be an effect related to a normal advance notice, an effect related to a look-ahead notice, or an effect related to a look-ahead notice. The normal notice effect referred to here is a production in which the cut-in normal notice image appears without sandwiching the button effect when the countdown is completed, and the effect related to the look-ahead notice is through the button effect when the countdown is completed. The pre-reading notice image of the cut-in appears, and the pre-reading notice image of the cut-in appears when the countdown is completed without inserting the button effect.

In addition, the effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first, and then the timer advance effect may be started. In this case, the effect using the ninja character NJ does not change the timer advance effect.

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing an example in which a change effect using the ninja character NJ is performed in different modes.

Since FIGS. 250 (11) -1 to FIG. (11) -6 are the same as those of FIGS. 246 (11) -1 to (11) -6 described above, the description thereof will be omitted here as well. , The scene where the shuriken seems to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (Fig. 250 (11) -5 to Fig. (11) -6) has been explained so far. After the appearance of the ninja character NJ, the shuriken seems to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon (Fig. 246 (11) -5 to Fig. (11) -6, Fig. 246 (1). ) -3 to Fig. (1) -4, Fig. 247 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -5, Fig. 248 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -5, Fig. 248 (11)- It is the same as 4 to (11) -5) of the same figure.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -7 displays a scene in which the shuriken passed over the hold icons h11 and h12 without hitting the variable icon h0. 11) In -8, the shuriken disappears and the ninja character NJ also disappears. After all, the change effect here has ended in failure, and the display mode of Yoshimune's character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon has not changed. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the shuriken disappears, or the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is considered to be executed is the same as the period described in the change effect using the ninja character NJ that appeared in FIG. 246 (11) -5.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -9, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and a scene in which the arrow is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 or the variable icon h0 is displayed. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -10, the arrow did not hit the first hold icon h11 or the variable icon h0, and the arrow did not hit the first hold icon h11 or the variable icon h0. Then, as the arrow disappears, Yoshimune's character YM also disappears. After all, the change effect here has also failed, and the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon has not changed. The timing at which the arrow disappears and the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the arrow disappears, or the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears.

The change effect using Yoshimune's character YM is displayed. The period during which the change effect is considered to be executed should be represented by all combinations of the start timing and end timing shown below, with the start first and the end after. Can be done. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM appears (Fig. 250 (11) -4), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM starts the operation (the timing when the arrow is fired). ) May be. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM disappears (Fig. 250 (11) -11), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM ends the operation (the arrow has been fired). It may be the timing (timing) or the timing when the arrow did not hit (FIG. 250 (11) -10).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -12, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -13, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -14, the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following Fig. (11) -15, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display.

Subsequently, the change effect by the two ninja characters NJ split into two ninja characters NJ will be described with reference to the example shown on the right side of FIG. 250.

Since FIGS. 250 (11) -1 to (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250 are the same as FIGS. 250 (11) -1 to (11) -5 shown on the left side, the description thereof is omitted. However, also in FIG. 250 (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250, one ninja character NJ appears in the upper right.

In the following FIG. 250 (11) -6, the ninja character NJ splits up and two ninja characters NJ appear, and both the two ninja characters NJ are throwing shurikens, and FIG. 250 (11) -6. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (1) displays a scene in which two shurikens appear to fly toward the hold icon or the variable icon.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -7, one of the two shurikens suddenly turns and flies toward the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow. The visible scene is displayed. In addition, the other shuriken is displayed with a scene that is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 by grabbing over the variable icon h0.

After that, one shuriken hits Yoshimune's character YM, and the other shuriken hits the first hold icon h11. In FIGS. 250 (11) -8, at least a part of the Yoshimune character YM is covered by the effect image mα, and the Yoshimune character YM is more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image mα. Further, at least a part of the first hold icon h1 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered with the effect image mβ.

In the following FIG. 250 (11) -9, the effect image mα covering the character YM of Yoshimune disappears, and the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling appears. That is, Yoshimune's character YM has changed from a display mode with a bow and arrow to a display mode with bowling. Further, the effect image mβ covering the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed to the display mode of the character (here, the scary panda character). In this scary panda character display mode, the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that of the Sabohani character display mode.

The timing of the shuriken hitting the Yoshimune character YM and the timing of the other shuriken hitting the first hold icon h11 may be the same, or the timing of hitting the Yoshimune character YM is earlier. Alternatively, the timing of hitting the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. Further, the shuriken may hit the first hold icon h11 after the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM has changed, or the shuriken may hit the Yoshimune character YM after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. May hit.

In FIGS. 250 (11) -10, the two ninja characters NJ that have been displayed up to that point disappear together. The two ninja characters NJ may disappear at different timings, or may disappear after returning to one form.

The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when one ninja character NJ appears (Fig. 250 (11) -5), or the timing when the ninja character NJ splits up (two ninja characters). It may be the timing when the character NJ appears) (Fig. 250 (11) -6), or the timing when the character NJ of one of the two ninjas starts to move (the timing when the shuriken is thrown). It may be the timing when both ninja characters NJ start to move (the timing when the shuriken is thrown), the timing when one shuriken hits, or the timing when both shurikens hit. It may be the timing at which one effect image appears, or it may be the timing at which both effect images appear (FIGS. 250 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when one of the two ninja characters NJ disappears, or the timing when both ninja character NJs disappear (Fig. 246 (11) -10). It may be the timing when one of the two ninja characters NJ finishes the action (the timing when the shuriken finishes throwing), or the timing when both ninja character NJs finish the action. It may be (the timing when the shuriken has been thrown), the timing when one shuriken hits, the timing when both shurikens hit, or one of the effect images has appeared. It may be the timing, the timing when both effect images appear (Fig. 250 (11) -8), the timing when one effect image disappears, or both effects. It may be the timing when the image disappears (FIG. 250 (11) -9).

At the same time as the two ninja characters NJ disappear, or after they disappear, Yoshimune's character YM, who has a bowling ball, starts to move and throws the bowling ball. The Yoshimune character YM may start operating before the two ninja characters NJ disappear. Furthermore, the two ninja character NJs may not disappear and may continue to be displayed as they are, or only the ninja character NJ whose hold icon has been changed among the two ninja character NJs. May disappear and the ninja character NJ who changed the Yoshimune character YM may continue to be displayed, or conversely, only the ninja character NJ who changed the Yoshimune character YM disappears and the hold icon The ninja character NJ who changed the may continue to be displayed.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -12 displays a scene in which the bowling ball thrown by the Yoshimune character YM appears to roll toward the hold icon or the variable icon. There is. The bowling ball eventually hits the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of a scary panda character, and in FIGS. 250 (11) -13, the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is , It is more difficult to see than before it was covered by the effect image mβ.

In FIGS. 250 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the scary panda character to the display mode of the Sabohani character. That is, the change production here is successful and corresponds to the promotion production. Further, in FIGS. 250 (11) -14, the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling disappears.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -17, the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following Fig. (11) -18, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display.

As described above, the pattern of the change effect using the two ninja characters NJ described on the right side of FIG. 250 is a pattern that changes both the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM and the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter). , "A pattern"), a pattern that changes the display mode of Yoshimune's character YM but does not change the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as "B pattern"), and the display mode of Yoshimune's character YM. A pattern that does not change but changes the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as "C pattern"), and a pattern that does not change the display mode of Yoshimune's character YM or the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as "D pattern"). There is. To change the display mode of Yoshimune's character YM, the shuriken thrown by one of the two ninja character NJs, the shuriken, hits Yoshimune's character YM and changes the display mode. To change the display mode of the hold icon means that the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ of the two ninja character NJs hits the hold icon and changes the display mode. That is. The shuriken thrown by one of the two ninja character NJs, the ninja character NJ, may change the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM and the display mode of the hold icon, and vice versa. , You may not do that. Here, the A pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the D pattern. Further, the A pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the B pattern, and the A pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the C pattern. Further, the B pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the D pattern, and the C pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the D pattern. Further, the C pattern may be more likely to be more favorable to the player than the B pattern, or conversely, the B pattern may be more likely to be more favorable to the player than the C pattern. The term "prone to advantageous development" as described above is the same as described above, and is likely to be an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), or a premier production is likely to be started. Alternatively, the jackpot confirmation effect may be easily started, or the jackpot symbol may be easily finalized and displayed in the end. Further, although each of the above patterns is a pattern for the hold icon, the same applies to a variable icon instead of the hold icon. Furthermore, when it is not changed, it includes the case where the arrow or shuriken comes off, and the case where it does not change even if it hits.

In addition, a part of the production using the bowling character YM of Yoshimune and a part of the production using the character NJ of the two ninjas who separated are common types such as a change production targeting the first hold icon h11. It can be seen that it was a successful production of the production. Both effects may be a change effect targeting the variable icon h0, which is a different type of effect from the change effect targeting the first hold icon h11, or may be a change effect targeting the second hold icon h12. It may be a change effect. In addition, of the two effects, only the effect using Yoshimune's character YM may be a successful effect that succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon, and only the effect using the ninja character NJ may be a successful effect. It may be, or both productions may be failure productions.

As described above, as the change effect using the ninja character NJ, two forms of change effect, such as an example shown on the left side of FIG. 250 and an example shown on the right side of FIG. 250, have been described. In the change effect of the mode in which only one ninja character NJ appears, which is shown on the left side of FIG. 250, the change effect of the character YM of Yoshimune fails, whereas the change effect of the character YM shown on the right side of FIG. In the change production of the mode in which the human ninja character NJ appears, the change production of the Yoshimune character YM has been successful, and the change production using the Yoshimune character YM who is boring has been started. In other words, the change production in which only one ninja character NJ appears is different from the change production in which two ninja characters NJ appear separately (here, Yoshimune's character YM). It is easy to change the change effect used.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 250, the change effect of the first hold icon h11 using the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow and arrow has failed, whereas in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 250, boring We have succeeded in changing the first hold icon h11 using the character YM of Yoshimune, and the hold represented by the first hold icon, which is the default display mode shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -15 on the left side, has been digested. While the variation display started in the above is lost, the variation indicated by the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character shown in FIG. 250 (11) -18 on the right side, is digested and started. It will be a big hit on the display.

In addition, the only effect that changes the effect is the effect that uses the ninja character NJ, but as the effect that changes the effect, there is an effect that switches the display screen (wipe effect) and a stage change effect that switches the background image, etc. And so on. In addition, the effect of changing the effect may be an effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow and arrow may be invisible, and the character YM of Yoshimune who bowls while the character YM of Yoshimune is invisible. It may change to, and the production may change.

Further, instead of the timer advance notice effect, a notice regarding the mini item may be given. More specifically, it may be a production in which mini items are stoked, or the number of stocked mini items increases or changes, and a normal notice is given or a look-ahead notice is given depending on the number, mode, and type of mini items. Will be. The notice regarding this mini item may change the stock status of the mini item due to the change effect. For example, the number of mini-items in stock may change (for example, increase), the type may change, or the mode may change.

An example in which a plurality of effects described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 250 are combined can be combined with a transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the roles of Yoshimune's character YM holding a bow displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 and the like, and the ninja character NJ displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 235 and the like. An object is arranged on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N). It may be possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of icon change effects described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 250 are combined.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N) may be used in FIGS. 229 to 250. While performing an effect in which a plurality of effects described with reference to the above are combined, the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45 may be made feasible.

In the above description, the pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been used as an example, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. 266, which will be described later, is used. It may be a machine or a slot machine also shown in FIG. 267, which will be described later.

In the above explanation,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. It is a game table equipped with one or two]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, the first hold icon f1 to the fourth hold icon f4].
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of holds icons displayed.
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal line pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (blue color), a diamond pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (green), and a grid pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (red). , Vertical line pattern (gold) in the look-ahead notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) in the look-ahead notice mode] is an icon that can be displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, any one of the first effect on hold change to the sixth effect on hold change].
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect different from the first effect of the first effect on hold change to the sixth effect on hold change].
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon.
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon.
One of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed [for example, in FIGS. 230 and 231]. While the treasure chest TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed while the hold change second effect is being displayed, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started to be displayed, or the character of the chief is shown in FIG. 232. While the hold change third effect in which BC is displayed is displayed, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started to be displayed, or the Yoshimune character YM shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is displayed. While the hold change fifth effect is displayed, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed starts to be displayed, or during the display of the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 237. Hold change in which the ninja character NJ is displayed Hold change in which the first effect is displayed, or in the display of the fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. The fifth effect is started to be displayed, and the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is displayed while the sixth effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 239.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the second effect may be an effect that may be started to be displayed during the display of the first effect, or the first effect may be started during the display of the second effect. It may be an effect that may start to be displayed.

Further, the first effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon. Further, the second effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon.

The first effect may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that may not change the mode of the hold icon. Further, the second effect may also be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that may not change the mode of the hold icon. Further, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect that is always started to be displayed during the display of the other effect, or is not displayed. It may be a certain production.

again,
"When the first effect and the second effect are effects for the same hold icon [for example, an example shown on the right side of FIG. 230, an example shown on the right side of FIG. 232, and an example shown on the right side of FIG. 235. , The example shown in FIG. 236, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237, the example shown on the left side of FIG. 238, and the example shown on the left side of FIG. 239].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, one of the plurality of hold icons is the first hold icon, and the first effect may be an effect for the first hold icon, and the second effect may be an effect. May be an effect on the first hold icon.

The first effect and the second effect may be the same effect for the hold icon, or may be the effect for different hold icons.

again,
"The first effect is an effect in which a change notice display may be displayed.
The change notice display is a display that gives a notice about the mode change of the hold icon [for example, a change target candidate display or a change mode candidate display].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is the first hold icon [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237].
The first effect [for example, the fourth effect of hold change] may be an effect for the first hold icon.
The second effect [for example, hold change first effect] may be an effect for the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the aspect during the variable display of the roulette icon].
The hold icon displayed in the first aspect is an icon that announces that the mode of the hold icon will change.
As the change notice display, there is a case where the first hold icon is displayed in the first aspect [for example, FIGS. 237 (a) to 237 (e)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

As the change notice display, the first hold icon may always be displayed in the first aspect, or the first hold icon may not be displayed in the first aspect. ..

again,
"The second effect may be started to be displayed with respect to the first hold icon displayed in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the aspect of the first hold icon [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237] displayed in the first aspect is changed as previously announced by the first aspect. [For example, the mode to be changed was unknown, but the mode of the second hold icon f2 was changed as an object to be changed], and then the mode of the first hold icon was changed to the second effect [for example, hold change]. It may be configured so that there is a case where it changes again due to [first effect] [for example, a case where it changes to a vertical striped pattern].

The second effect may be configured to always start to be displayed with respect to the first hold icon displayed in the first aspect, or the second effect may start to be displayed. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

again,
"The change target candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display.
The change target candidate display is a display that suggests which hold icon the hold icon whose mode may change is [for example, a hand sword thrown by the ninja character NJ and hit the icon, and the icon overlaps. Change candidate icon HKI, target icon TI attached to the icon, arrow icon YI, roulette icon hold icon, countdown icon hold icon].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The change target candidate display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variation displays of the decorative symbol [for example, FIGS. 233 (b) to 234 (h), FIG. 234 (6). ) ~ Figure (2),],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the change target candidate display may be a display that is always displayed across a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol, or a display that straddles a continuous plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It may be a display that may not be displayed.

again,
"While displaying the change target candidate display, the second effect for the hold icon suggested by the change target candidate display [for example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed] is started. Cases [for example, FIGS. 235 (2) to (6)] are configured to be present.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, during the display of the change target candidate display, the second effect for the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display may be always started, or the change target candidate display may be configured. The second effect on the suggested hold icon may not be initiated.

again,
"The change mode candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display.
The change mode candidate display is a display suggesting which mode of the hold icon may change [for example, the change candidate icon HKI, the “grid” shown in FIG. 233 (i). A roulette icon with characters stopped and displayed].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display of one of the effects is started while the display of the other effect is displayed than when only one of the effects is displayed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, once again, as a combination of the first effect and the second effect, the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect, the hold change first effect and the hold change third effect, and the hold change first effect. 1 effect and hold change 4th effect, hold change 1st effect and hold change 5th effect, hold change 1st effect and hold change 6th effect, hold change 2nd effect and hold change 3rd effect, hold change 2nd effect And hold change 4th effect, hold change 2nd effect and hold change 5th effect, hold change 2nd effect and hold change 6th effect, hold change 3rd effect and hold change 4th effect, hold change 3rd effect and hold Change 5th production, Hold change 3rd production and Hold change 6th production, Hold change 4th production and Hold change 5th production, Hold change 4th production and Hold change 6th production, Hold change 5th production and Hold change 5th Six productions can be given. In any combination of these combinations, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when one of the effects is started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed. It may have been done. That is, it is easier to make a big hit when the two types of effects are combined (when they overlap) than when they are not combined (when they do not overlap).

again,
"One of the above-mentioned effects [for example, the first effect on hold change in which the ninja character NJ in FIGS. 235 and 236 is displayed, and the fifth effect on hold change in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 238 is displayed] is the other effect. Production [For example, the fifth effect of the hold change in which the character YM of Yoshimune is displayed in FIGS. 235 and 236, the fourth effect of the hold change in which the roulette icon is displayed in FIG. 237, and the hold change in which the roulette icon is displayed in FIG. 238. Although the display is started after the display of [Fourth effect], the display may end before the other effect [for example, FIGS. 235 (7) and 236 (7). ), FIG. 237 (i), FIG. 238 (10)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the one effect may be an effect in which the display always ends before the other effect even though the display is started after the display of the other effect, or the other effect. It may be an effect that the display may not end before the effect of.

again,
"Even if the mode of the hold icon does not change due to the one effect that was started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed, the one effect is not started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the display is started while the other effect is being displayed than in the case where the other effect is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, in any of the examples of the combination of the first effect and the second effect described above, the mode of the hold icon did not change depending on the one effect started to be displayed while the other effect was displayed. Even in this case, it is more final when the one effect is started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed than when the one effect is not started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. That is, when the two types of effects are combined (overlapping), even if the mode of the hold icon does not change, the jackpot is higher than when the two types of effects are not combined (when they do not overlap). Cheap.

again,
"The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed] is displayed, and the one effect [for example, the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed on hold] is displayed. Depending on the change first effect], the mode of the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon f1] may be changed to the third mode [for example, the mode of the diamond pattern].
If the display of the other effect is not started during the display of the other effect, the mode of the hold icon may be changed to the second mode [for example, the mode of the diamond pattern] by the other effect. ,
The third aspect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The other effect [for example, the second effect of the hold change in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed, the fourth effect of the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, and the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 238 is displayed. One of the above-mentioned effects that was started to be displayed during the display of [Four effects] [For example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed, and the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 237 is displayed. Depending on the effect, the fifth effect of the hold change in which the character YM of Yoshimune is displayed in FIG. 238], the other effect that changes the mode of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change. [For example, FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 237 (h), FIG. 238 (10)],
The other effect is an effect in which the mode of the hold icon is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher after the change than before the change.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. It is a game table equipped with one or two]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, the first hold icon f1 to the fourth hold icon f4].
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of holds icons displayed.
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal line pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (blue color), a diamond pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (green), and a grid pattern in the look-ahead notice mode (red). , Vertical line pattern (gold) in the look-ahead notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) in the look-ahead notice mode] is an icon that can be displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, any one of the first effect on hold change to the sixth effect on hold change].
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect different from the first effect of the first effect on hold change to the sixth effect on hold change].
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon.
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon.
One of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be started to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed [for example, in FIGS. 230 and 231]. While the treasure chest TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is displayed, or the roulette icon shown in FIG. 237 is displayed. While the displayed hold change fourth effect is being displayed, the ninja character NJ is displayed. The hold change first effect is displayed, or the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 238. Display of the hold change fourth effect. Inside, the 5th production of pending change in which Yoshimune's character YM is displayed starts to be displayed],
The other effect [for example, the second effect of the hold change in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed, the fourth effect of the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, and the fourth effect of the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 238 is displayed. One of the above-mentioned effects that was started to be displayed during the display of [Effect] [For example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed, and the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 237 is displayed. , The fifth effect of the hold change in which the character YM of Yoshimune is displayed in FIG. 238] may change the other effect of changing the mode of the hold icon even if the mode of the hold icon does not change [for example. , FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 237 (h), FIG. 238 (9)],
The other effect is an effect in which the mode of the hold icon is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher after the change than before the change.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

again,
"One of the above-mentioned effects is an effect using a character [for example, a ninja character NJ or a Yoshimune character YM].
One of the effects is an effect started by the display start of the character [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 231 (a), FIG. 237 (b), FIG. 238 (4)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the above-mentioned effects is an effect using a character [for example, a ninja character NJ or a Yoshimune character YM].
One of the effects is an effect started by the start of operation of the character [for example, FIG. 230 (3), FIG. 231 (c), FIG. 237 (c), FIG. 238 (5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"One of the effects is an effect that ends when the display of the character ends [for example, FIG. 229 (p), FIG. 237 (i), FIG. 238 (10)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"For one of the effects, the first effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7), the effect image mh shown in FIG. 231 (f), and the effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (f)] is displayed. It is a production to be done
One of the effects is an effect that is started by starting the display of the first effect image [for example, FIG. 230 (7), FIG. 231 (f), FIG. 237 (f)].
One of the effects is an effect that ends when the display of the first effect image ends [for example, FIGS. 230 (9), 231 (h), and 237 (h)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The other effect is an effect in which an icon [for example, a treasure box TB icon or a roulette icon] is displayed.
The other effect is an effect started by starting the display of the icon [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 230 (b), FIG. 237 (a), FIG. 237 (4)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The other effect is an effect that ends when the display of the icon ends [for example, FIG. 229 (o)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The other effect is the second effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (5), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 231 (i), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (j), and FIG. 238. The effect image mf shown in (11)] is displayed.
The other effect is the end of display of the second effect image [for example, between FIGS. 230 (6) and FIG. (7), FIGS. 231 (k), 237 (l), and 238 (13). ] Is a production that ends with
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with production means that can perform multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the timer advance effect in which the countdown starts from 3.00 seconds shown in FIG. 247].
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 and the like].
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer advance effect in which the countdown starts from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248].
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, in the case of FIGS. 248 (11) -7].
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3].
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed [for example, the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 248 (4) -2 is determined. display],
At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -3 to (3) -3. Until just before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means. In addition, the second effect may be expected to replace the first effect with the third effect.

Here, "prone to advantageous development" means that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that a premier production is likely to be started, or that a big hit is confirmed. It may be easy to start the production. It also includes the execution of an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may change the mode of the effect or an effect that may change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, the first effect and the third effect may be different types of effects. Further, the first effect and the second effect may be different types of effects, and the third effect and the second effect may be different types of effects.

Further, the second effect may be started after the first effect is started first.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that hides the display of the first effect, or may include an effect that hides the display of the first effect. There may be. In other words, there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is invisible due to the second effect, or there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is hidden.

Further, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7, from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 of the same figure (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses), and the same from FIG. It may be up to Fig. (3) -5. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before FIG. (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9 may be immediately before.

Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from the appearance of the ninja character NJ to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ. Immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation to the same figure (11) -7, or the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ) May be.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIGS. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-. It may be up to just before 3 or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -4 including the button effect (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses). However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -5, including the effect corresponding to the button operation. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11) -13).

The effect means may be a means for always executing a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

Further, both the first effect and the second effect may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays, or only the first effect is executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be an effect, or only the second effect may be an effect executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays.

again,
"The first effect has a bow and arrow shown in one of a certain type of effect [for example, a variable icon change effect] [for example, FIGS. 246 (1) -2 to (1) -10". Directing using the character YM of Yoshimune]
The second effect may be an effect in which the first effect is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, in FIGS. 246 (1) -3 to (1) -6). Directing using the ninja character NJ shown],
As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects [for example, an effect that fails to change the variable icon h0 (gaze effect)] may be performed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect and a fifth effect) are performed as the certain type of effect, so that there are cases where expectations can be expected.

Here, one of the certain types of effects, which is performed as the second effect in the second case, may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of the icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the effects of the above types may be an effect that changes one of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the first effect is the hold icon and the variable icon. It may be an effect that changes either one or the other aspect. Further, one of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variable icon. It may be an effect of changing the mode of the same hold icon, or it may be an effect of changing the mode of different hold icons.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may not change the mode of the effect or an effect that may not change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, the certain type of effect may be a notice regarding a mini item. More specifically, it may be a production in which mini items are stoked, or the number of stocked mini items increases or changes, and a normal notice is given or a look-ahead notice is given depending on the number, mode, and type of mini items. Will be.

As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects may be performed without fail.

again,
"As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type of effect [for example, the hold icon change effect] [for example, FIG. 247 (11)-. 4 to the production using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 (11) -8] may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the certain type of effect is a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started (for example, a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. It may be a button effect advance notice effect), and the other type of effect may be an effect that changes the mode of the icon.

As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type may be performed without fail.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with production means that can perform multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from Fig. 246 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -8]. can be,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ from FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -9, or an effect using the ninja character NJ, or FIG. 246 (1). It is a production using the ninja character NJ from -3 to (1) -6 in the same figure].
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. And
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect may be changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed.
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in the same manner [for example, FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11)-. 6 and FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. 246 (1) -4],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means. In addition, the second effect may be expected to replace the first effect with the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which effect will be performed by the second effect.

Here, "prone to advantageous development" means that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that a premier production is likely to be started, or that a big hit is confirmed. It may be easy to start the production. It also includes the execution of an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may change the mode of the effect or an effect that may change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may not change the mode of the effect or an effect that may not change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, "partially the same mode" means, for example, that a certain period part of the animation is the same, and in the certain period part, the second effect in the first case and the said It means that it is indistinguishable from the second production in the second case, or that it is difficult to distinguish it.

Further, in the second case, the first effect may not be started or the first effect may not be executed.

Further, the start timing of the first effect and the start timing of the second effect may be earlier than the start timing of the first effect, or the start timing of the second effect. The one may come first, or both may have the same timing.

Further, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7, from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 of the same figure (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses), and the same from FIG. It may be up to Fig. (3) -5. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before FIG. (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9 may be immediately before.

Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from the appearance of the ninja character NJ to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ. Immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation to the same figure (11) -7, or the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ) May be.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIGS. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-. It may be up to just before 3 or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -4 including the button effect (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses). However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -5, including the effect corresponding to the button operation. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11) -13).

The effect means may be a means for always executing a plurality of effects.

again,
"The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partly performed in the same manner including the first part [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5. -Fig. (11) -6 and Fig. 246 (1) -3 to Fig. (1) -4],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the introduction part is the same, there is a time when it is difficult for the player to determine which way to develop, and it may be possible to make the player interested in the production.

Here, the first part may be performed in the same mode, the next part may be performed in a different mode, the last part may be performed in the same mode, or the same and different modes may be alternately repeated a plurality of times. You may.

again,
"The first effect has a bow and arrow shown in one of a certain type of effect [for example, a variable icon change effect] [for example, FIGS. 246 (1) -2 to (1) -10". Directing using the character YM of Yoshimune]
As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects [for example, an effect that fails to change the variable icon h0 (gaze effect)] may be performed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect and a fifth effect) are performed as the certain type of effect, so that there are cases where expectations can be expected.

Here, one of the certain types of effects, which is performed as the second effect in the second case, may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of the icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the effects of the above types may be an effect that changes one of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the first effect is the hold icon and the variable icon. It may be an effect that changes either one or the other aspect. Further, one of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variable icon. It may be an effect of changing the mode of the same hold icon, or an effect of changing the mode of different hold icons.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may not change the mode of the effect or an effect that may not change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects may be performed without fail.

again,
"As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type of effect [for example, the hold icon change effect] [for example, FIG. 247 (11)-. 4 to the production using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 (11) -8] may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the certain type of effect is a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started (for example, a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. It may be a button effect advance notice effect), and the other type of effect may be an effect that changes the mode of the icon.

As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type may be performed without fail.

again,
"The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in different modes.
The second effect in the first case [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ] is the first aspect [for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -9. ], And
The second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ] in the second case is the second aspect [for example, the aspect shown in FIGS. 246 (1) -3 to (1) -6). ], And
The first aspect and the second aspect include a part including the first portion [for example, FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -6 and 246 (1) -3 to FIG. 1) -4] is the same aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different from each other in the middle [for example, FIGS. 246 (11) -7 to (11) -9 and 246 (1) -5 to (1)-. 6]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the branching of the production. That is, at the start of the production, even if it is not known whether it will be the first case or the second case, it will be possible to know whether it will be the first case or the second case. Even after it is started, it may be possible to draw attention to the production.

Further, "a mode different from the middle" may mean a different mode from the middle to the end, a mode different only in the middle, and the same mode at the end.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with production means that can perform multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects uses the first effect [for example, the character YJ of Yoshimune having a bow and arrow shown in FIGS. (11) -4 to (11) -10 on the left side of FIG. 250. The production that was performed, the production using the character YJ of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in Fig. (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -7 on the right side of Fig. 250].
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using one ninja character NJ shown in FIGS. (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250. , A production using the two ninja characters NJ shown in FIGS. (11) -6 to (11) -9 on the right side of FIG. 250].
One of the plurality of effects used a third effect [for example, the character YJ of Yoshimune who performs the boring shown in FIGS. (11) -9 to (11) -13 on the right side of FIG. 250. Directing]
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect may be changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed.
The second effect is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, a mode in which only one ninja character NJ shown in FIGS. (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250 appears. ], And
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the character NJ of two ninjas who are separated as shown in FIGS. (11) -6 to (11) -9 on the right side of FIG. 250. Is the mode in which
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The first case is more likely to occur when the second effect is started in the second aspect than when the second effect is started in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means. In addition, the second effect may be expected to replace the first effect with the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which effect will be performed according to the mode of the second effect.

Here, "prone to advantageous development" means that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that a premier production is likely to be started, or that a big hit is confirmed. It may be easy to start the production. It also includes the execution of an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may change the mode of the effect or an effect that may change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7, from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 of the same figure (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses), and the same from FIG. It may be up to Fig. (3) -5. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before FIG. (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9 may be immediately before.

Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from the appearance of the ninja character NJ to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ. Immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation to the same figure (11) -7, or the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ) May be.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIGS. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-. It may be up to just before 3 or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -4 including the button effect (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses). However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -5, including the effect corresponding to the button operation. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11) -13).

The effect means may be a means for always executing a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of modes.

again,
"The first effect is one of a certain type of effect [for example, hold icon change effect] [for example, FIG. (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -10 on the left side of FIG. 250. It is a production that fails to change the first hold icon h1 using the Yoshimune character YJ with the bow and arrow shown in (Gase production)].
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects [for example, shown in FIGS. (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250. A production that fails to change the first hold icon h1 using one ninja character NJ (Gase production)] may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect and a fifth effect) are performed as the certain type of effect, so that there are cases where expectations can be expected.

Here, one of the certain types of effects, which is performed as the second effect in the second case, may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of the icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the effects of the above types may be an effect that changes one of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the first effect is the hold icon and the variable icon. It may be an effect that changes either one or the other aspect. Further, one of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variable icon. It may be an effect of changing the mode of the same hold icon, or it may be an effect of changing the mode of different hold icons.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may not change the mode of the effect or an effect that may not change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects may be performed without fail.

again,
"As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type of effect [for example, the variable icon change effect] may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the certain type of effect is a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started (for example, a timer advance effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. It may be a button effect advance notice effect), and the other type of effect may be an effect that changes the mode of the icon.

As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type may be performed without fail.

again,
"The second effect according to the second aspect [for example, the effect in which two ninja characters NJ appear as alter ego as shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -6 to (11) -9] is , A production that can be performed with multiple patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is the first pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a hold icon. Pattern that does not hit h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is the second pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ corresponds to the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ corresponds to the hold icon h1. Pattern]
The case where the second effect according to the second aspect is performed in the second pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the second effect is performed in the first pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

As a result, the second effect performed in the second aspect is more likely to be produced by the second pattern than the second effect performed in the first aspect.

The second effect according to the second aspect may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of patterns.

again,
"One of the plurality of patterns is the third pattern [For example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is reserved. Pattern corresponding to icon h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is the fourth pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ becomes the hold icon h1. Pattern that does not hit]
The case where the second effect according to the second aspect is performed in the fourth pattern is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the second effect is performed in the third pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

As a result, the second effect performed in the second aspect is more likely to be produced by the fourth pattern than the second effect performed in the first aspect.

The second pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ hits Yoshimune's character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1. May be a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit Yoshimune's character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1. The shuriken thrown by the ninja may hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ may not hit the hold icon h1. The third pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ hits Yoshimune's character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ does not hit the hold icon h1. May be a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1.

Further, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of patterns.
One of the plurality of patterns is a fifth pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a hold icon. Pattern that does not hit h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is the sixth pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a hold icon. Pattern that corresponds to h1]
The case where the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case is performed in the sixth pattern is more advantageous for the player than the case where the second effect is performed in the fifth pattern. It may be easy.

The fifth pattern above is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ does not hit the variable icon h0]. The sixth pattern may be a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the variable icon h0.

Further, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of patterns.

In the above description,
"It is a game console equipped with production means that can perform multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the icon change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from Fig. 246 (1) -2 to Fig. (1) -10. ], And
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 and the like].
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer advance effect in which the countdown starts from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248].
The second effect is when the first effect is changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, when the effect image mα shown in FIGS. 248 (11) -7 is displayed]. It ’s a production,
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3].
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed.
The first effect is a certain type of effect [for example, a hold icon change effect or a variable icon change effect, an icon change effect].
The third effect may be a different type of effect [for example, a timer notice effect] from the certain type of effect.
In the first case, the other type of effect may be executed as the third effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means. In addition, the second effect may be expected to replace the first effect with the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which type of production will be performed.

Here, "prone to advantageous development" means that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that a premier production is likely to be started, or that a big hit is confirmed. It may be easy to start the production. It also includes the execution of an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that may change the mode of the effect or an effect that may change the type of the effect with respect to the first effect. ..

Further, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7, from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 of the same figure (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses), and the same from FIG. It may be up to Fig. (3) -5. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before FIG. (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9 may be immediately before.

Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from the appearance of the ninja character NJ to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ. Immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation to the same figure (11) -7, or the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ) May be.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIGS. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-. It may be up to just before 3 or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -4 including the button effect (until there is a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses). However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3) -5, including the effect corresponding to the button operation. Further, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be the period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11) -13).

The effect means may be a means for always executing a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

Further, the third effect may be a different type of effect from the certain type of effect, and in the first case, the other type of effect is always the third effect. It may be executed.

again,
"The third effect may be the certain type of effect,
In the first case, the certain kind of effect may be executed as the third effect [for example, boring from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -14. Icon change production using Yoshimune's character YM],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"At least one of the certain type of effect [for example, hold icon change effect] and the other type of effect [for example, timer notice effect] [for example, hold icon change effect] is a look-ahead notice. Is the production of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the look-ahead notice includes a case where the look-ahead notice is lost (a fake look-ahead notice).

Further, both the certain type of effect and the other type of effect may be a look-ahead notice effect, or the certain type of effect is a look-ahead notice effect, and the above-mentioned effect. Another type of rendition may be a normal notice rendition.

Further, as an example of the other type of effect, a timer advance notice effect can be given. Here, the timer notice effect may be an effect that announces that a certain effect (for example, a button effect, a super reach effect, or a pseudo continuous effect) will be started.

again,
"At least one of the certain type of effect [for example, the variable icon change effect] and the other type of effect [for example, the timer advance notice effect] [for example, the variable icon change effect] is usually a notice. Is the production of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The normal notice referred to here is an effect of notifying that a big hit will be made by the variable display of the decorative pattern that is performed when the normal notice starts. In addition, the normal notice includes the case where the notice is lost (fake normal notice).

Further, both the certain type of effect and the other type of effect may be a normal advance notice effect, or the certain type of effect is a normal advance notice effect and is described above. Another type of effect may be a look-ahead notice effect.

Further, as an example of the other type of effect, a series of effect from timer notice effect → button effect → strong cut-in display effect can be given. The display effect of the strong cut-in may be a normal notice effect, a notice of development into super reach, or a look-ahead notice.

again,
"The first effect is an effect in which an icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed.
The third effect is also an effect in which the icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed.
The jackpot symbol is displayed when the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the character (sabohani) display mode] rather than the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode]. Is easy to confirm,
The third effect [for example, FIG. 246] rather than the first effect [for example, an effect using Yoshimune's character YM having a bow and arrow shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -4 to 11- (10)]. The icon of the second display mode is more likely to be displayed in (11) -9 to the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who performs bowling shown in FIG. 11- (13).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a variable icon. The hold icon also includes a variable icon in a broad sense. Further, the icon may be a mini item icon or a character icon as long as it is a small display that can be distinguished from other displays.

The first effect may be an effect in which the icon is always displayed, and the third effect may also be an effect in which the icon is always displayed.

again,
"The second effect is also an effect in which an icon may be displayed.
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the first effect and the second effect are effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2, or the first hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0]. good.

The second effect may also be an effect in which the icon is always displayed.

again,
"The first effect is an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1].
The third effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1].
The jackpot symbol is displayed when the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the character (sabohani) display mode] rather than the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode]. Is easy to confirm,
The third effect [for example, FIG. 246] rather than the first effect [for example, an effect using Yoshimune's character YM having a bow and arrow shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -4 to 11- (10)]. (11) -9 to 11- (13) of FIG. 11- (13), the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who performs bowling] makes it easier to change the icon to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a variable icon. The hold icon also includes a variable icon in a broad sense. Further, the icon may be a mini item icon or a character icon.

The first effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the icon, and the third effect may also be an effect that always changes the display mode of the icon.

again,
"The second effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon.
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the first effect and the second effect are effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2, or the first hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0]. good.

The second effect may also be an effect that always changes the display mode of the icon.

again,
"One of the first and second effects [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ] is the other effect [for example, an effect using Yoshimune's character YM with a bow and arrow]. ] Is a production that may be started during execution,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be an effect that may be started during the execution of the second effect, or the second effect may be started during the execution of the first effect. It may be a production that may be performed. Alternatively, the first effect and the second effect may be effects that may be started at the time of movement.

Further, after the second effect is completed, the first effect or the third effect may be started or performed.

again,
"The above-mentioned" the case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed, "says" the first effect. The case where the third effect is performed is larger than the case where the effect is performed [for example, decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 or shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b). The jackpot symbol] is easy to be confirmed and displayed. "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first effect is an effect including the display of the first character [for example, Yoshimune's character YM].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display of the first character can also be seen as the display of an icon.

again,
"The second effect is an effect including the display of the second character [for example, the ninja character NJ].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display of the second character can also be seen as the display of the icon.

Further, the second character may be a different character from the first character, or may be the same character.

again,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above explanation,
"It is a game console equipped with production means that can perform multiple productions.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from Fig. 246 (11) -4 to Fig. (11) -8]. can be,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ from FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -9, or an effect using the ninja character NJ, or FIG. 246 (1). It is a production using the ninja character NJ from -3 to (1) -6 in the same figure].
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. And
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect may be changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed.
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in the same manner [for example, FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11)-. 6 and FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. 246 (1) -4],
The second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ] may be started during the execution of the first effect [for example, an effect using Yoshimune's character YM with a bow and arrow]. Directing [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Furthermore, in the above explanation,
"Multiple effect display capable of displaying display means [for example, a first decorative pattern display devices 208L] a gaming table having a
One of the plurality of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. Display ]
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display [for example, an effect display using the ninja character NJ from FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -9, or FIG. 246. (1) -3 to (1) -6 in the figure [Direction display using the ninja character NJ] .
The second effect display before reporting, the case of changing the first effect display of the display mode (hereinafter. Referred to as "first case") [e.g., the FIGS. 246 (11) -8 (11) -9] is a production display with
In the case of the first, the first effect display of the display mode is the first aspect [e.g., the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune having a bow] third embodiment from the example, the Yosso bowling character Change to YM display mode]
The second effect display is an effect display in which the display mode of the first effect display is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, from FIG. 246 (1) -3). Figure (1) -6] ,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h13].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0].
The display means can display a symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol].
The hold icon of the second display mode [for example, the character (sabohani) display mode] rather than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon of the first display mode [for example, the default display mode]. It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold represented by is digested.
The first effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the hold icon.
The first effect display of the third aspect [for example, the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling ] rather than the first effect display of the first aspect [for example, the display of the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow and arrow]. Display] makes it easier to change the hold icon to the second display mode.
The second effect display, when initiated during the display of the first effect display the first aspect [e.g., FIG. 246 (11) -5] Ri effect display der there is,
The second effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the variable icon in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The first display is a display in which the first character [for example, Yoshimune's character YM] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The icon is a hold icon [for example, hold icon h1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second effect is an effect including a second display [for example, a display of the ninja character NJ throwing a shuriken].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The second display is a display in which the second character [for example, the ninja character NJ] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is an effect that has a case [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -9] that is started during the display of the second display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The third effect is an effect including a third display [for example, display of the character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling].
The third display is a display in which the same character as the first character [for example, Yoshimune's character YM] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, the effect of displaying the operation means display will be described. The game console used in the description here is the same pachinko machine 100 as the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13, and as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 251 to 265 is used. It is possible to apply to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 193 to 243, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 243 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 251 to 265. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the operation means display is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

In FIG. 251 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is shown on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown on the right side.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 251 the family crest accessory, which has been arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, has a size one size larger than the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is arranged in. That is, the lower half of the family crest accessory 224E'shown in FIG. 251 overlaps the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position corresponds to the initial position. The family crest accessory 224E'shown in FIG. 251 can be dropped from the initial position, and when the drop operation is performed, the entire family crest accessory 224E'overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Regarding the front-back relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction) between the family crest accessory 224E'and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the family crest accessory 224E'is on the foremost side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is the rearmost side, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest accessory 224E'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Not shown in FIG. 251, it is executed by the variable display symbol (special figure) executed by the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 193 etc.) and the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 193 etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Further, the variable display symbol (general diagram) executed by the non-illustrated general diagram display device 210 (see FIG. 193 and the like) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 197 (b), which is variablely displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500. As described above, on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side, the timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Therefore, between the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs by a predetermined cycle of the timer interrupt processing on the sub-control unit 400,500 side, but when the first symbol starts the variable display, the third symbol is displayed. The symbol pd3 also starts the variable display, and when the first symbol becomes the stop display, the third symbol pd3 also becomes the stop display. Hereinafter, the description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3, but the same applies even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Here, the fourth symbol pd4 indicates that the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle is in the variable display of the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol), and the display mode of the combination of the black square and the white circle is the third symbol pd3. Indicates that the stop display is in progress. It should be noted that the lighting of the LED lamp or the like on the board may be used to distinguish between the variable display and the stop display. Further, a mini decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is reduced and displayed is shown on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display mode of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and like the fourth symbol pd4, has a role of clearly indicating the variable display and the stop display of the third symbol pd3. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 251 (1), the third symbol pd3 is displaying the variable display, the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode of a combination of a white square and a black circle, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also displayed in a variable display. It is being displayed.

Further, two hold icons h1 and h2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 251 (1), and it is notified that the current number of hold of the special figure is two. Has been done. That is, the hold icons are displayed for the number of hold balls of the special figure. The 1st hold hold icon (1st hold icon) h1 with the old winning timing is displayed in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, but the 2nd hold hold icon (2nd hold icon) with the new winning timing is displayed. ) H2 is displayed in a red display mode, which is a pre-reading notice display mode. In addition to this, the hold icon may be displayed in a display mode of a character or a pattern, and for each display mode, represents the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold. However, even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold does not always result in a big hit, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. Further, the timing at which the hold icon starts to be displayed in the look-ahead notice mode or changes to the look-ahead notice mode is at the start of the change, during the change, at the stop, or at the time of winning the look-ahead target hold. In the example shown in FIG. 251, only four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are prepared, but only the total number (for example, eight) of the number of hold balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of hold balls in Special Figure 2 is provided. It may be prepared. Further, on the left side of the effect display area 208d, an area cs for displaying the variable icon is prepared, and this area cs is a stage one step higher than the area hs for displaying the hold icon. The variation icon c is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon is started. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed in a white display mode, which is the default display mode. The variable icon c may also be displayed in a display mode in which the color is different, or in a display mode of a character or a pattern, and each display mode represents the degree of expectation of a big hit in the running symbol variable display. However, even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, it is not always a big hit in the running symbol variation display, and it may be lost.

Further, a mini character display (hereinafter, referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 251 (1). This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. In the example shown in FIG. It consists of a combination of a character display Lv representing a name and a level (here Lv3) and a gauge display Gm. Of these displays, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm are displayed to the Internet cooperation service user. That is, it is a service for members registered on the Web, and the gauge increases according to the number of times the symbol changes are displayed and the number of big hits, and the level rises when the gauge is full. In addition, a notice production using a mini character may be performed. For example, the jackpot expectation degree (here, the jackpot expectation degree in the symbol variation display currently being performed) may be indicated by the movement or dialogue of the character of the lord. In addition, the change in the way the gauge is increased in the gauge display Gm and the color of the gauge may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the hold (that is, it corresponds to a look-ahead notice). Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed or the display mode of the operation means display described later may be changed by the animation using the character of this lord.

Further, the wipe display Wd is performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 251, the name of the background stage is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "castle town" is displayed on the wipe display Wd, and the townscape of the castle town is commonly displayed on the background of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to N. The wipe display Wd may display the effect mode, the current control state (for example, during probabilistic change), the look-ahead notice, and the currently performed symbol change. A notice (normal notice) for display may be displayed.

In addition, the operation means display is displayed below the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 251 the display imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193 is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is in the variable display or the stop display. There are four types of display of the operation means, and hereinafter, they are referred to as a first operation means display, a second operation means display, a third operation means display, and a fourth operation means display. In FIG. 251 (1), the first operating means display Od1 is displayed. The first operation means display Od1 is a display in which the characters PUSH are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits light in white. For example, a display imitating the chance button 136 that is turned off, etc. It may be a display in which the characters of PUSH are omitted. The first operation means display Od1 may be the default operation means display among a plurality of types of operation means displays. Further, the operation means display may be any operation means that can be operated by the player, and is not limited to the chance button 136. The transparent unit 191 shown in FIG. 202 and the operation key unit shown in FIG. 193 and the like. It may be each key in 181 or a second chance button or the like. Further, the operation means display may be any display related to the operation means, and as an example, an operation such as a display representing the operation means, a display reminiscent of the operation means, for example, a PUSH character display or an arrow display indicating the operation direction. Display prompting to operate the means (hereinafter referred to as "operation promotion display"), for example, display of the remaining period of the operation valid period of the operating means such as meter display, numerical display, number display (hereinafter, "remaining period display"). ".) Etc. can be listed. That is, the operation means display may be all of those listed above, or may be appropriately combined. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 251 the operating means display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, or may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, the number of display of the operation means display is not limited to one, and may be a plurality.

The button image 136a and the button meter also correspond to an example of the operation means display. Whether the button image 136a or the button meter in each figure is classified into the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display will be described in order from the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display. It is appropriately classified according to the characteristics of the display.

Further, the display position, size, and number of displays of the various displays described here are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when a movable means such as the family crest accessory 224E'overlaps the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, a plurality of the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

In FIG. 251 (2), the first operating means display Od1 displayed in FIG. 251 (1) is changed to the second operating means display Od2. The second operating means display Od2 may be a display in which the first operating means display Od1 is developed, or may be a display switched from the first operating means display Od1. Further, the second operation means display Od2 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The different display referred to here may be a display in which the display mode has changed. That is, the display may have the same shape but different at least one of the color, size, pattern, etc., or the shape, color, size, pattern, etc. may be the same. The display may have different operation modes such as vibration and rotation. In these cases, the operating means themselves are unchanged, and the first operating means display Od1 and the second operating means display Od2 are displays for a common operating means (here, chance button 136). Further, the display may have a different shape. When the shape is different, the operating means are the same, but when the operating means itself is deformed (for example, an advanced display or a backward display, an open display or a closed display, a display deformed by being operated, etc. It may be the case where the display imitates the operation means is changed to the character display of PUSH as the operation promotion display, or the meter display indicating the remaining period is displayed as the remaining period display. It may be the case when it changes. Further, the operation means itself may be replaced (for example, the display imitating the chance button 136 is replaced with the display imitating the second chance button). Bao, the matters explained in this paragraph are the same in the following explanations.

However, the second operating means display Od2 may have the same display mode as the first operating means display Od1. In this case, as will be described later, the difference between the second operating means display Od2 and the first operating means display Od1 is that the second operating means display Od2 displays the second operating means display Od2. In the state, the display mode changes when the corresponding operating means is operated, whereas the first operating means display Od1 is the corresponding operating means in the state where the first operating means display Od1 is displayed. The display mode does not change even if is operated. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 enables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state, whereas the first operation means display Od1 invalidates the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state. There may be a difference such as.

The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 251 (2) is a display in which the characters PUSH as an operation promotion display are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light.

The timing at which the first operating means display Od1 changes to the second operating means display Od2 is during the display of the variation display of the third symbol pd3. This change timing was determined from the stage when the display of the first operation means display Od1 was determined by the effect lottery or the like, and the display of the first operation means display Od1 was started. There may be a case where the variation display of the pd3 is finished and the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started next. In this case, the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, and at the same time as the start of the next variable display of the third symbol pd3, the second operation means. The display Od2 is changed, or the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed even at the start of the variation display of the next third symbol pd3, and after the variation display of the next third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od1 is displayed. The operation means display Od2 may be changed. That is, the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed over a plurality of times of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Further, the timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 may be during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3.

Further, the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 251 (2), and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 in order to notify that the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 has changed. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emitting state to the red light emitting state. The output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2, and the change of the chance button 136 itself may be simultaneous, or any one of them may be started first, or any one of them. One may be started later. Further, in addition to the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2 may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED lamp on the board surface, the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 193, or the like.

In FIG. 251 (3), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols being lost (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”). On the other hand, the fifth symbol pd5 displays the state of change, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle indicating the change display.

In FIG. 251 (4), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols being lost. Further, the fifth symbol pd5 also stops and displays (mainly stops) the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol as in the third symbol pd3, and the fourth symbol pd4 shows the display mode of the combination of the black square and the white circle indicating that the stop display is in progress. It has been switched to. The period of FIGS. 251 (4) to 251 (6) is a period of definite display of the first symbol (special symbol) (not shown), and the same display continues for the third symbol pd3 to the fifth symbol pd5. It is displayed. Further, the second operation means display Od2 is also continuously displayed. That is, the display does not return to the first operation means display Od1 before the change, and the display is continued. In addition, in FIG. 251 (5), the number of times of the symbol variation display has increased due to the end of the symbol variation display (the main stop of the third symbol pd3 has been performed), and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased. (See the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 251 (5)). However, the gauge may increase due to the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3. Further, in FIG. 251 (6), the variable icon c disappears from the area cs for displaying the variable icon.

In FIG. 251 (7), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and in the fifth symbol pd5 as well as the third symbol pd3, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is the variable display. The display mode has been switched to a combination of a white square representing the inside and a black circle. However, the shift movement of the hold icon has not started, and the variable icon is not displayed in the area cs where the variable icon is displayed. Further, even if the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 straddles the continuous fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. 251 (8), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon h1 displayed in the area hs for displaying the hold icon of the first hold is changed to the area cs for displaying the variable icon. At the same time, the hold icon h2 displayed in the area hs displaying the hold icon of the second hold starts moving toward the area hs displaying the hold icon of the first hold. At the start of the change of the first symbol, the shift movement of the hold icon is started, the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 is switched, and the change display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started in the order of the start. It may be simultaneous, or either one may come first. However, the timing of switching the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 and the timing of starting the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5 are the same.

In FIG. 251 (9), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed, the change icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs for displaying the change icon, and the hold icon for the first hold is displayed. In the display area hs, the hold icon h1 in the red display mode, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is displayed.

Also in FIG. 251 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the display of the second operating means display Od2 also continues. Here, the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 is changed, and the meter display Tm indicating the remaining period, which is the remaining period display, is added. That is, the second operation means display Od2 is a display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm is combined. Further, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 in order to notify that the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 has changed. Either the change in the display mode or the output of the sound effect may come first, or may be simultaneous. It can be said that the meter display Tm is a display different from the second operating means display Od2, and the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 does not change, and the meter display Tm is added. Further, instead of adding the meter display Tm, or with the addition of the meter display Tm, the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 may be changed. For example, the blinking display may be performed, the color may be changed, or the enlarged display may be performed.

In FIG. 251 (11), the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm decreases a little, and in FIG. 251 (12), it is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operating means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 251 (13), the display returns to the first operating means display Od1. That is, the display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits light in red changes to the display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits light in white. There is. Further, if the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the look-ahead notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) may be started. That is, until now, the wipe display Wd in which "castle town" was displayed as the name of the background stage displayed the characters "heat" as a pre-reading notice display, and further, the third decorative symbol display device 208N wiped. The effect image Ed is added to the display Wd. The effect image Ed is an effect to make it stand out that the pre-reading notice has been started, but here as well, the pre-reading notice is started by the output of the sound effect from the speaker 120, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays. You may notify that. The output of sound effects, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays can also be seen as one of the look-ahead notices (corresponding to the first notice effect). In the state of FIG. 251 (13), since there is only one hold of the special figure, the target of the look-ahead notice by the characters "heat" displayed on the wipe display Wd is the hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 251 (13). It becomes a symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold represented by. Since the hold icon h1 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode, two types of look-ahead notices such as a look-ahead notice by the wipe display Wd and a look-ahead notice by the hold icon display mode are executed. Become. Further, the change in the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the switching to the pre-reading notice display in the wipe display Wd, and the addition of the effect image Ed, as shown in FIG. 251 (13), may be performed at the same time. , Any one may be started first, or any one may be started later. Further, the effect image Ed may be light emission of the pattern of the effect image by the light guide plate.

Here, other possible examples will be described in detail. First, even if the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated while the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed, nothing changes. Does not happen. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the advance notice effect) is started. Not done. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is invalidated, and the first operation means display Od1 is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. can. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operating means is invalid in combination with the fact that the operation of the operating means is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated if it is accepted.

Next, during the period during the variable display of the third symbol pd3 (FIGS. 251 (2) to (3)), which is executed when the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2. Even when the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, is operated, "heat" which is a pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd as described with reference to FIG. Is displayed, the effect image Ed is added, and the pre-reading notice is started. Further, the second operating means display Od2 returns to the first operating means display Od1. In this case, the second operation means display Od2 in the display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. It can be said.

On the other hand, the look-ahead notice may not be started. That is, until the meter display Tm to which the display is added is displayed in FIG. 251 (10), even if the chance button 136 is operated, the same as in the state where the above-mentioned first operation means display Od1 is displayed. No change may occur. In this case, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 including the meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and FIGS. 251 (2) to 251 (9). It can be said that the second operating means display Od2 without the meter display Tm shown in the above is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. It can also be said that the meter display Tm itself is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Further, the pre-reading notice may not be started even if the chance button 136 is operated until the stop display of the third symbol pd3 is performed after the change to the second operation means display Od2. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to 251 (6) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. Further, the pre-reading notice may be started when the chance button 136 is operated only during the variable display of the third symbol pd3 which is being executed when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. .. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to 251 (3) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and the chance button 136 is operated. If not, the second operating means display Od2 may return to the first operating means display Od1 at the timing of FIG. 251 (4). Alternatively, the look-ahead notice may not be started unless the chance button 136 is operated after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed and before the shaking display (temporary stop) of the third symbol pd3. If so, if the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operating means display Od2 returns to the first operating means display Od1 at the timing of the shaking display (temporary stop) shown in FIG. 251 (3). May be good. Further, even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, if the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the look-ahead notice is started. There may be.

Further, the meter with the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) becomes 0 at the timing of FIG. 251 (14), for example, when the chance button 136 is not operated. That is, it becomes 0 by the time the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is started. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, it is assumed that the operation has been performed, and after the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0, the word "heat" which is a pre-reading notice is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Is displayed, the effect image Ed is added, and the pre-reading notice is started. If there is no operation, the mode of the pre-reading notice may be changed. For example, if the effect image Ed is not displayed or if there is an operation, sound output such as a sound effect is also executed, but if there is no operation, the sound output may not be executed.

Although various aspects have been described above, when the pre-reading notice is started, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1. However, it may not return. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 even if the pre-reading notice is not started. However, as long as the pre-reading notice is not started, the pre-reading notice may be started by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 after that. In this case, the second operation is performed until the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 may continue to be displayed as the second operation means display Od2 without returning to the first operation means display Od1.

Further, the fact that the look-ahead notice may be executed after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed corresponds to the display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect) of the second operation means display Od2 itself. It can be said that it does.

In FIG. 251 (14), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) due to the combination of the decorative symbols being lost, but as in FIG. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress. Further, although the effect image Ed has disappeared, the pre-reading notice display (character display of "heat") on the wipe display Wd continues.

In FIG. 251 (15), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol. The 4 symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop display is in progress, and the period (FIGS. 251 (15) to (17)) of the final display of the first symbol (special symbol) (not shown) is started. Even during the period of this confirmation display (during the main stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed. In addition, in FIG. 251 (16), the number of times of the symbol variation display has increased due to the end of the symbol variation display, and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased (see the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 251 (16). ). Further, in FIG. 251 (17), the variable icon c disappears from the area cs for displaying the variable icon.

In FIG. 251 (18), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started again, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5 as well as the third symbol pd3, and the fourth symbol pd4 is changed. The display mode has been switched to indicate that the display is in progress. However, the shift movement of the hold icon has not started. Further, even if the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 also displays the variation of the third symbol pd3 a plurality of times. It is displayed across.

FIG. 252 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed, which continues from FIG. 251.

In FIG. 252 (19) following FIG. 251 (18), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon h1 in the display mode of the look-ahead notice starts moving toward the area cs where the variable icon is displayed. In FIG. 252 (20), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed and the hold icon is not displayed, but the change icon c in the red display mode is displayed in the area cs for displaying the change icon. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 251 (18) is a symbol variation display that is subject to the above-mentioned two types of pre-reading notices (a pre-reading notice by the wipe display Wd and a pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon h1). Even if the symbol variation display that was the target of the look-ahead notice is started, the characters "heat" are displayed on the wipe display Wd, but the symbol variation display that was the target of the look-ahead notice has started. Therefore, the character "heat" of the wipe display Wd becomes a so-called normal notice (the change notice) for the currently performed symbol change display. Further, the variation icon c in the red display mode is also displayed in the display mode of the normal notice (the change notice). That is, the pre-reading notice is switched to the normal notice at the start of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. By switching from the look-ahead notice to the normal notice and continuing the normal notice, it may be possible for many players to notice that the started symbol variation display is hot.

In FIG. 252 (21), the reach effect of the “decoration 7” is started in the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and in FIG. 252 (22), the sound of the “reach” is output from the speaker 120. In addition to the voice, various lamps may emit light or display to notify that the reach effect has been started. In this state, the reach effect is a normal reach effect, but the reach effect of "decoration 7" may be a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect by other numbers. In FIG. 252 (23), the display of the balloon is added to the display Cd of the character pattern displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208M. The display of the balloon is a character display of "development" that suggests or foretells the development to super reach, and is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with the variable display of the third symbol pd3 in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third symbol pd3 is difficult to see. The term "difficult to see" as used herein means a relative meaning such that it is more difficult to see than the state before that (hereinafter, the same applies).

Display of the variable icon display area cs, display of the variable icon c, display of the hold icon display area hs on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, display of the character pattern Cd on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. , Character display Lv, gauge display Gm, character display of "heat" of wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and first operation means display Od1 are all being displayed up to FIG. 252 (23). However, in FIG. 252 (24) in which the display of the balloon "development" disappeared, the character icon display Cd, character display Lv, and gauge display Gm in the second decorative symbol display device 208M are displayed together with the balloon display. All have disappeared, and even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon has all disappeared. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are continuously displayed because they represent the expected degree of the symbol variation display currently being performed. ing. Further, the character display of "heat" of the wipe display Wd and the first operation means display Od1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are still being displayed, and the third symbol pd3 is also being visibly displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 and the 5th symbol pd5 are also being displayed. If the hold icon was displayed in FIG. 252 (23), the hold icon display also disappears. The display of the balloon, the display Cd of the character pattern, the character display Lv, the gauge display Gm, and the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon, which disappeared here, may all disappear at the same time, or the timing of disappearing is different. You may. Alternatively, some displays (for example, balloon display, character pattern display Cd, character display Lv, gauge display Gm) disappear at the same time, and the remaining display (display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon, display of the hold icon) ) May disappear at different timings.

In FIG. 252 (25), the animation in which the display of the area cs for displaying the variable icon and the display of the variable icon c, which were displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, move toward the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed, and in FIG. 252 (26), the animation ends, and the display of the area cs for displaying the variable icon and the display of the variable icon c are displayed by the mini character until then on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is displayed at the position where it was. By doing so, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be widely used to perform an effect with a high expectation of a big hit (here, a super reach effect). Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (26), the dark display is displayed except for the display area of the fifth symbol pd5, and the background display of the third symbol pd3 and the castle town is not visible. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is always displayed so that it can be seen that the variable display is in progress. The fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed by surrounding it with a frame. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (26), the wipe display Wd changes from the character "heat" to the character "swordsman" representing the production name (swordsman reach) of the super reach effect. ing. Therefore, it can be said that the normal notice by the wipe display Wd ends here. On the other hand, the variable icon c moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M continues to be displayed in the red display mode, which is the display mode of the normal notice (the change notice). Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the reduced display pd3'of the third symbol pd3 is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (27), the swordfighter reach production of the super reach effect is started, and the main character's lord is displayed on the full screen, but the fifth symbol pd5 can be visually recognized without being hidden. Is. In FIG. 252 (28), the background display of the wilderness is switched, and the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role have started a confrontation, and the scene after the slashing is continued from the figure (29) to the figure (36). .. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 252 (30) to 252 (32), the first operation means display Od1 which has been continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been changed to the third decorative symbol display. An animation that jumps out of the device 208N and moves to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In FIG. 252 (32), the first operating means display Od1 is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Next, in FIG. 252 (33), in which the swordsman reach effect continues, the first operating means display Od1 changes to the fourth operating means display Od4. That is, it changes to the fourth operation means display Od4 during the variable display of the third symbol pd3. The fourth operating means display Od4 may be a display in which the first operating means display Od1 is developed, or may be a display switched from the first operating means display Od1. Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 252 (33) is a display in which an enlarged display, a change in the display mode, and a meter display indicating the remaining period, which is a remaining period display, are added. That is, the display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged and displayed, and a large meter display Tm'is additionally displayed below the display. As described above, the size of the fourth operating means display Od4 changes as the display mode of the first operating means display Od1 changes, and the display position also changes. The large meter display Tm'can also be viewed as a display different from the fourth operating means display Od4. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (33), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character "swordsman" to the character "press" which is an operation promotion display.

In FIG. 252 (34), the swordsman reach effect continues, the meter of the meter display Tm'decreases a little, in FIG. (35), the meter further decreases, and in FIG. It decreases to the remaining 1/4. In this meter display Tm', a display of chance up (character display of "chance") is hidden, and the display gradually becomes visible as the meter decreases. Increasing the chance here means increasing the expectation of a big hit in the current symbol variation display.

FIG. 253 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed, which continues from FIG. 252.

In FIG. 253 (37) following FIG. 252 (36), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the fourth operation means display Od4, is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, a normal notice (corresponding to the second notice effect) for notifying a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display is started. NS. Further, the fourth operating means display Od4 returns to the first operating means display Od1. In FIG. 253 (38), the family crest accessory 224E'that had been in the initial position so far executes the falling operation, and the entire family crest accessory 224E'overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and further, the first decoration. The effect image Ed1 is displayed in large size on the symbol display device 208L. This effect image Ed1 is displayed so as to almost hide the scene after the swordsman and the lord in the background image of the wilderness, making it difficult for both the lord and the swordsman to see. Further, the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect image Ed1 here is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Has been done. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 returned from the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed again, and on the wipe display Wd, the character "press" is displayed. Changes to the word "win", and the tip of the effect image Ed1 overlaps the wipe display Wd. However, the character "win" is visible, and the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 conversely makes the character "win" in the wipe display Wd stand out. The effect image Ed1 does not overlap with the fifth symbol pd5 that continuously represents the variable display, and the fact that the variable display continues is clearly shown in the fifth symbol pd5 as well as the fourth symbol pd4. It is displayed. As described above, in this example, as the effect of the normal notice, the family crest accessory 224E'executes the falling operation, the effect image Ed1 is displayed, and the wipe display Wd is changed to the character "win". The normal notice effect here is a production with a high expectation of a big hit, and if the expectation of a big hit is low, the family crest character 224E'does not fall, or even if it falls, the effect image Ed1 is not displayed. Or, the wipe display Wd changes to the word "defeat" or changes to a question mark. Further, at the same time as the family crest accessory 224E'falls, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. -"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") has started the shaking display (temporary stop).

In FIG. 253 (39), the family crest accessory 224E'that was in the falling position has risen to the initial position, but the effect image Ed1 is still displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N.

Then, in FIG. 253 (40), the effect image Ed1 disappears, and the result of the swordsman reach effect, which is the super reach effect, is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the scene where the main character, the lord, won is displayed. Therefore, the super reach effect is the effect from FIG. 252 (26) to FIG. 253 (40). The scene in which the main character, the lord, has won, as shown in FIG. 253 (40), is viewed as a part of the normal notice started by operating the chance button 136 while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. You can also do it.

In FIG. 253 (41), the reduced display pd3'of the third symbol pd3, which was displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, returns to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L "Decoration 7" is displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, all of the "decorations 7" are swayed (temporarily stopped), but the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be variablely displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress. .. In addition, the display of the normal notice (display of the characters "win") on the wipe display Wd continues.

In FIG. 253 (42), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"), and the fifth symbol pd5 is also stopped. The combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (main stop), the fourth symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop display is in progress, and the final display of the first symbol (special symbol) (not shown) is started. During this confirmation display period (during the main stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 and the normal notice display (character display of "win") on the wipe display Wd are continuously displayed. There is.

Here, other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in FIGS. 251 (13) to 252 (32) after returning to the first operation means display Od1, even if the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated, No change occurs as in the state of FIG. 251 (1). That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the advance notice effect) is started. Not done.

On the other hand, when the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the normal notice is started as described above. Here, the series of effects of FIGS. 252 (33) to 253 (40), including the display of the fourth operation means display Od4, is the last fortune-telling whether or not a big hit is made in the currently performed symbol variation display. It can be said that it corresponds to the production of (so-called final judge production). Further, the fact that the normal notice may be executed after the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed corresponds to the display of the normal notice (second notice effect) of the fourth operation means display Od4 itself. It can be said that it does.

Further, in this example, the first operating means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operating means display Od4 is displayed, but the fourth operating means is displayed in a state where the first operating means display Od1 is not displayed. The display Od4 may start to be displayed independently, or even if the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, the first operation means display Od1 does not change, but the fourth operation means display Od4 alone. May start to appear. However, when the first operation means display Od1 changes and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the fourth operation means display Od4 starts to be displayed alone. ..

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, in FIG. 253 (38), the fourth operating means display Od4 returns to the first operating means display Od1, but the fourth operating means display Od4 disappears. No operation means display may be displayed once, and the redisplay of the first operation means display Od1 may be started after the jackpot game is completed or when the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. .. Alternatively, conversely, the first operation means display Od1 may not be displayed even when the jackpot game is completed, or the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed even if the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. It may not be displayed.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm'shown in FIG. 252 (33) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm' is assumed to have been operated. After it becomes 0, the effect of the normal notice shown in FIGS. 253 (38) to (40) may be executed.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 251 when the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started, but the chance button 136 is operated. The normal notice for the symbol variation display that is being performed at this time may be started instead of the look-ahead notice.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the first operating means display Od1 changes to the second operating means display Od2 in a pachinko machine provided with a game board having a configuration different from that shown in FIG. 195. Is.

The description here will focus on points different from the examples shown in FIGS. 251 to 253, and the description may be omitted for the same points as the examples shown in FIGS. 251 to 253.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is arranged in. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also a movable means like the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the size of the display screen is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The upper portion of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 254 (a) overlaps the central portion of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position is set to the initial position. Correspondingly, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is a display device capable of ascending / descending operation. In the example shown in FIG. 254, the background image of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also the townscape of the castle town, and four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are displayed. In FIG. 254 (a), all areas hs are displayed. The hold icons h1 to h4 in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, are displayed.

At the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an area cs for displaying a variable icon is prepared, and this area cs is the same low stage as the area hs for displaying a hold icon. In FIG. 254 (a), the variation icon c of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs, and the variation display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. .. Further, in this example, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 254 (a), the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress.

Further, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the right end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 254 (b), the display Cd1 of the character of the main character's lord appears on the variable icon c, and in FIG. 254 (c), the character of the lord descends behind the variable icon c and fluctuates. It is displayed in an upright posture on the area cs where the icon is displayed. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the main character, the lord, carries the variable icon c (FIG. 254 (d)) and throws away the variable icon c (FIG. 254 (e)). That is, the animation here is a movement animation of the variable icon c. The thrown variable icon c crosses the third symbol pd3 in the variable display (FIG. 254 (f)) and corresponds to the first operating means display Od1 (FIG. 254 (g)). Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (h), the effect image Ed2 appears so as to hide a part of the variable icon c and the first operation means display Od1, and in the following FIG. 254 (i), the variable icon c disappears. The first operating means display Od1 is changed, and in FIG. 254 (j), the effect image Ed2 disappears and the second operating means display Od2 is displayed at the position where the first operating means display Od1 was displayed. ing. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emitting state to the blue light emitting state. As the light emitting mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the second operating means display Od2, the red mode is higher than the white mode, and the blue mode is more expected than the red mode. As shown in FIGS. 251 (1) to 251 (2), the character is involved as in this example, rather than the case where the first operating means display Od1 is changed to the second operating means display Od2 alone. When one operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2, the expectation of a big hit is higher. After throwing the variable icon c, the character of the lord continues the same pose until FIG. 254 (j), and in FIG. 254 (k), the character is displayed in an upright posture on the area cs where the variable icon is displayed. There is.

In FIG. 254 (k), the display of a balloon "Chance" is added to the display Cd1 of the character pattern. It can be said that the display of the balloon "Chance" is a kind of operation promotion display, and it can be said that it is a kind of pre-reading notice. Further, also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect).

In FIG. 254 (l), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operating means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 changes in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 254 (m). Return to the first operation means display Od1. In addition, pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice production) is started. In FIG. 254 (m), a change animation is started in which the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and a part or all of the second hold icon h2 is displayed. The effect image Ed3 appears so as to be hidden, and in FIG. 254 (n) that follows, the second hold icon h2 that has changed to the display mode of the fan pattern is displayed on the front side of the effect image Ed3. Then, in FIG. 254 (o), the effect image Ed3 disappears, the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the fan pattern, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is displayed, and the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the look-ahead notice is displayed. Will continue to be displayed until the second hold is exhausted.

In addition, other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in this example, the chance button 136 is operated early after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, but even if the operation timing is delayed, if it is within the operation valid period, FIG. 254 ( m) -The pre-reading notice in the figure (o) is produced. Further, the chance button 136 is pressed until the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is executed when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, is completed, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started. If no operation is performed, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed. That is, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed even during the stop display after the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is executed when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, is completed, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. The second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed even if the next variation display of the three symbol pd3 is started, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed straddling the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3. NS. Further, the second operation means display Od2 may continue to be displayed at the longest until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 254 is completed, unless the chance button 136 is operated.

Further, the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light may be said to correspond to an example of the display of the third operating means. The third operating means display referred to here is an operating means display having a mode different from that of the first operating means display Od1, and the third operating means is displayed in a state where the third operating means display is displayed. It refers to an operation means display in which the display mode does not change even if the operation means corresponding to the display (here, the chance button 136) is operated. In addition, when the operation means corresponding to the third operation means display is operated while the third operation means display is displayed, the advance notice effect may or may not be started. .. Hereinafter, the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits light in blue will be referred to as a blue third operating means display, and the description will be continued. For example, until the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) is added to the blue third operating means display, or until the characters PUSH are added, the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated and the meter display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is operated after Tm is added or after the characters PUSH are added, the look-ahead notice effect shown in FIGS. 254 (m) to 254 (o) may be executed. You may. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 may be switched from the period for disabling the operation to the period for enabling it. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated after the meter display Tm is added or the characters PUSH are added to the blue third operating means display, the first operation means as shown in FIG. 254 (m). Since the operation means display returns to Od1, when the meter display Tm or the characters PUSH are added to the blue third operation means display, the third operation means display is the second operation. It can be said that it has changed to the means display. Further, the blue third operation means display may change to the first operation means display Od1, and in this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is always invalid. If the player operates the chance button 136 while the blue third operation means display is displayed but the look-ahead notice does not start, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively switched? Alternatively, it waits while expecting that the operation means is effectively switched back to the first operation means display Od1 without switching. The high degree of expectation for effective switching may be expressed by the light emitting mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the third operating means display. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher in the blue mode than in the red mode, and in the seven-color change mode (rainbow mode) than in the blue mode. If the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively switched, the look-ahead notice is executed, and the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case where the first operation means display Od1 is returned without switching. Further, during the period when the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated, the display mode of the third operation means display may be changed to raise or lower the degree of expectation for effective switching.

Further, in this example, the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed, but even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the expiration of the valid period, the pre-reading notice effect of FIGS. 254 (m) to (o) may be executed.

Further, in FIG. 254 (j), the display changes to the second operating means display Od2, but the display may change to the fourth operating means display Od4. In this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2, which is the target of the notice, is started, and after the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 is started, the chance is reached. If there is an operation of the button 136, the normal notice may be started.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 254 stepwise.

The description here will focus on points different from the example shown in FIG. 254, and the description may be omitted for the same points as the example shown in FIG. 254.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 255, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 255 (a), and all the hold icons h1 to h4 have a white display mode, which is the default display mode. be. Further, a variable icon c in a white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed at the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 255 (a), and is displayed at the right end thereof. , The first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

In FIG. 255 (b), the display Cd1 of the character of the hero's lord appears on the first operation means display Od1, and in the figure (c), the lord's character displays the first operation means. It descends behind Od1 and is displayed in an upright position. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the main character, the lord, carries the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 255 (d)) and throws away the first operation means display Od1 carried (FIG. 255 (e)). That is, the animation here is a movement animation of the first operation means display Od. The thrown first operation means display Od1 passes in front of the third symbol pd3 during the variable display, and in FIG. 255 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O It is just displayed on the border. That is, the upper half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the lower half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. The first operating means display Od1 falls into the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O as it is (see the arrow extending downward from the first operating means display Od1 shown in FIG. 255 (f)), and FIG. 255 (see In g), it is displayed above the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed side by side. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (h), the first operating means display Od1 changes to the second operating means display Od2 at that location. That is, the display mode changes to a display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. In addition, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes to a blue light emitting state.

In FIG. 255 (i), the display Cd1 of the character of the lord is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, and the display Cd1 of the character's pattern says "press the button". A balloon display is added. It can be said that the display of the balloon "Press the button" is a kind of operation promotion display, and it can be said that it is a kind of pre-reading notice. Further, also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect).

The following is the same as that of FIG. 254 (l) and thereafter, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 255, the destination of the thrown first operation means display Od1 was in the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, but it may be in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 255, the operation means display is moving (thrown away) in a state where the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, but the operation means display is displayed in a state where the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. You may move. That is, the display itself may be moved after changing to the second operation means display Od2, which is also the display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect). However, even if the chance button 136 is operated during movement, the look-ahead notice is not started. Further, as for other possible examples, various examples described as other possible examples in FIG. 254 can be applied.

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of changing from the first operating means display Od1 to the third operating means display Od3, and further changing from the third operating means display Od3 to the second operating means display Od2. be.

The examples after FIG. 256 are examples in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 195, and the description after FIG. 256 mainly describes the points different from the examples shown in FIGS. 251 to 253. The same points as those shown in FIGS. 251 to 253 may be omitted.

The state of FIG. 256 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 251 (a), and variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is a display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress. Further, below the wipe display Wd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

In FIG. 256B, the first operating means display Od1 changes to the third operating means display Od3. The third operating means display Od3 may be a display in which the first operating means display Od1 is developed, or may be a display switched from the first operating means display Od1. Further, the third operation means display Od3 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256B is a display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to a display that imitates a state in which the chance button 136 that emits white light is vibrating. In addition to changing to a different color display, the display may change to a display having a different operation mode such as vibration. The actual chance button 136 itself also vibrates while emitting white light. Further, the word "preparing" is displayed on the wipe display Wd in which "castle town" as the name of the background stage has been displayed so far. The character being prepared here is a character indicating that it is a period of waiting until the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective. That is, it becomes a character indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid (hereinafter, the same applies). Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed as it is, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the advance notice effect) is started. Not done. When the characters "preparing" are displayed, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed (hereinafter, the same applies). By displaying the characters "preparing" on the wipe display Wd, it may be possible to pay attention to changes in the third operation means display Od3 and future developments.

In FIG. 256 (c), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols lost (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”), and is shown in the same figure (d). In), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (main stop) by the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol, and this main stop continues until the same figure (f). Then, in FIG. 256 (g), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started. The third operation means display Od3 is continuously displayed from FIG. 256 (b), is displayed even during the stop display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed over the continuous fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3. There is.

In FIG. 256 (h), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and in the next figure (i), the shift movement is completed. As a result, the first hold icon h1 is a hold icon in a red display mode, which is a look-ahead notice display mode. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed from the start to the completion of the shift movement of the hold icon. From FIG. 256 (b) to FIG. 256 (i), the word "preparing" continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd.

Even in FIG. 256 (j), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues. Here, the third operating means display Od3 changes to the second operating means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 256 (j) is a display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm is combined. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 256 (j), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character "preparing" to the character "press" which is an operation promotion display.

In FIG. 256 (k), the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm decreases a little, and in FIG. 256 (l), it is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operating means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operating means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (m), the display is changed to the first operating means display Od1. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the look-ahead notice as shown in FIG. 256 (m). The animation is started, the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the first hold icon h1 which has been displayed in red so far, and in the following FIG. 256 (n), the effect image Ed4 disappears and the first hold icon is displayed. h1 is changed to a hold icon of 7 color change modes (rainbow mode). In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the rainbow mode than in the red display mode. Therefore, by operating the chance button 136 while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice that has been performed so far is changed to the pre-reading notice with a high expectation of a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 256 described above, when the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2 and the chance button 136 is operated, the pre-reading notice is started, so that the second operation The means display Od2 itself is also a display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect), and after the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, the look-ahead notice may be executed, which is the third operation. It can be said that the means display Od3 itself corresponds to the display of the look-ahead notice (third notice effect).

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 256 (j) becomes 0, it is assumed that the meter display Tm has been operated, and the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect of FIGS. 256 (m) to 256 (n) may be executed.

FIG. 257 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which there is a period during which two types of operation means displays are displayed at the same time.

The first operating means display Od1 shown in FIG. 257 (b) is changed to the second operating means display Od2 in FIG. 257 (c), and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 257 (d), the reach effect of “decoration 4” is started in the third symbol pd3 which was being displayed in a variable manner, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 257 (e), the third symbol pd3 A text image of the reach is displayed so as to hide. However, the 4th symbol pd4 and the 5th symbol pd5 are not hidden, and it is well understood that the variable display is still continued.

Next, in FIG. 257 (f), the button effect is started, and in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a large display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed. Below that, a meter display Tm'representing the remaining period, which is the remaining period display, is also displayed. These displays are a part of the display of the button effect, but correspond to the fourth operation means display Od4. The second operating means display Od2 displayed from FIG. 257 (c) is continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and at the timing of FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operating means is displayed. The display Od4 and the second operating means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. Note that being displayed at the same time does not have to be displayed at the same time until the start time of the display, in other words, it means that they are displayed in a timely overlap (in parallel in time) (in the following). Is the same).

Also in FIG. 257 (g), the fourth operating means display Od4 and the second operating means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. In FIG. 257 (g), the meter of the meter display Tm'is reduced to some extent as in FIG. 252 (35), but in FIG. 257 (g), unlike FIG. 252 (35), the indication of chance up is displayed. I can't see it.

In FIG. 257 (h), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the fourth operation means display Od4, but here, the fourth operation means display Od4 has priority, and FIG. 257. As shown in (i), the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, the decorative symbol "continue", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the third symbol pd3 is the first time in the pseudo-continuous production. Is being temporarily stopped. The pseudo-continuous effect is a notice effect (normal notice effect) for the symbol variation display currently being performed, and corresponds to the second notice effect. On the other hand, there is no change in the second operation means display Od2, and the display continues to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The chance button 136 is operated again almost immediately after the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 257 (h) (FIG. 257 (j)). As shown in FIG. 257 (k), the operation of the chance button 136 here is the same as in FIG. 251 (13), in which the second operating means display Od2 is changed to the first operating means display Od1. The wipe display Wd displayed above the one operation means display Od1 displays the characters "heat" as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 257 (k), the first temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production is continued.

In FIG. 257 (l), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous effect is started, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed disappears, but the pre-reading notice is displayed on the wipe display Wd. (Character display of "heat") continues.

In the example described above, the normal notice production is prioritized among the normal notice production and the look-ahead notice production. The normal notice is associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 on which the meter display Tm'indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed, and the operation valid period is the period of the symbol variation display currently being performed. Limited to within. On the other hand, the look-ahead notice is associated with the second operation means display Od2 that can be displayed across the continuous variable display of the third symbol pd3, and there is a margin in time. Therefore, the normal notice associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 is prioritized and started. By setting the start order (priority order) of the advance notice effect as in this example, it is possible to clearly inform the player of what happened without performing a plurality of advance notice effects at once. There are advantages.

When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 257 (d), the effect of the look-ahead notice as shown in FIG. 257 (k) is immediately started, and the second operation means display Od2 is the first. The operation means display changes to Od1. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operating means display Od4 and the first operating means display Od1 are displayed at the same time. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 257, the second operating means display Od2 is changed in FIG. 257 (c), but the third operating means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256 (b) and the like is changed to FIG. 257. The third operation means display Od3 may be changed to the second operation means display Od2 at the timing of (g) or the timing of (i) of the same figure. In this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operating means display Od4 and the third operating means display Od3 are displayed at the same time.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm'shown in FIG. 257 (f) becomes 0, it is assumed that the meter of the meter display Tm is 0. After that, the pseudo-continuous production may be started. Further, although the remaining period display is not displayed on the second operating means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the chance button 136 was not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Even in this case, assuming that the operation has been performed, the pre-reading notice effect of FIG. 257 (k) may be executed after the lapse of the operation valid period.

Further, even if the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 257 (h) is a so-called long press operation instead of a normal operation such as a single press or a short press, which is called a single press, a normal notice effect by a pseudo continuous effect is produced. However, by temporarily stopping the operation of the chance button 136 and then performing the operation again, the character display of "heat" on the wipe display Wd and the pre-reading advance notice effect by the effect image Ed are started.

Furthermore, for one operation of the chance button 136, only one of the normal advance notice effect by the pseudo continuous effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect by the character display of "heat" and the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is available. Both productions may or may not be started instead of being started.

FIG. 258 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 256, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a display imitating an operating means is displayed at the same time.

The first operating means display Od1 shown in FIG. 258 (a) changes to the third operating means display Od3 in FIG. 258 (b) and is above the third operating means display Od3, as in the example shown in FIG. 256. The word "preparing" is displayed on the wipe display Wd of.

The third operation means display Od3 is also displayed in FIG. 258 (i), and one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230 at the timing of the next figure (j), and in FIG. Two hold icons, which were only displayed once, will now be displayed. In FIG. 258 (k), the second hold icon h2 is increasing. The second hold icon h2 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI in which the characters PUSH are added to a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits red light is added to the hold icon hd in a white display mode. be. The button hold icon referred to here is a hold icon whose display mode changes when the corresponding operation means is operated, and it is not always necessary to imitate the operation means, but only the operation promotion display mode. , Only the mode of displaying the remaining period, or the mode of combining these may be used. The corresponding operating means may be displayed as a pattern on the icon, and here, is the chance button 136. The button hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is different from the first operation means display Od1, the second operation means display Od2, the third operation means display Od3, and the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, although the display is different from the operation means display, the mini item MI is a reduced display of the operation means display (here, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N). ing. That is, the display mode of the second hold icon (button hold icon) h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2 is reduced. The size of the mini item MI may change depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot, or depending on the size of the displayed operation means display, the display mode of the button hold icon may be the operation means display (for example, The display mode may be an enlarged display of the second operating means display Od2). Further, the button hold icon is displayed only during the operation validity period of the chance button 136. That is, while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation of the chance button 136 is treated as valid. However, if the button hold icon is displayed at the same time as the operation means display, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the effect related to the operation means display is performed first, and when the chance button 136 is operated again, the button is displayed. An effect related to the hold icon may be performed. In the following examples as well, the description here can be applied to the button hold icon, and the description here can also be applied to the button variable icon. In addition, the changing display mode is a pre-reading notice display mode that differs depending on the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and the display mode with a low expectation of the big hit includes the default display mode, which is a character of disappointment. The display mode of the symbol is also included. The button hold icon itself can be seen as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the button hold icon is a display different from the operation means display. The third operation means display Od3 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N of FIG. 258 (k), and the chance button 136 that emits white light in the third operation means display Od3 vibrates. A display that imitates the appearance of the user and a display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits red light in the second hold icon h2 (button hold icon) are displayed at the same time. The hold icon in the white display mode may be omitted, and only the mini item MI may be used as the hold icon. Alternatively, the second hold icon h2 is only a hold icon in a white display mode, and can be seen as a mode in which the mini item MI is added to the second hold icon h2, but in any case, it emits white light. A display that imitates the vibrating chance button 136 and a display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 258 (l), the third operating means display Od3 changes to the second operating means display Od2, as in FIG. 256 (j). The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 257 (j) is also a display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm is combined. In addition, the wipe display Wd has also changed from the character "preparing" to the character "press" which is an operation promotion display. In FIGS. 258 (l) to 258 (n), two displays imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. Here, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold represented by the first hold icon h1.

In FIG. 258 (o), the chance button 136 is operated in a state where two displays imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the second hold icon h2 which is a button hold icon, and here, the pre-reading notice for both is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 258 (p), the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the second hold icon h2, which is the button hold icon, and the symbol is subject to the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2. The effect image Ed5 also appears so as to hide all of the first hold icon h1 representing the hold of the variable display, and in the following FIG. 258 (q), the respective effect images Ed4 and Ed5 disappear, and the first hold icon h1 is 7. It has changed to the hold icon of the color change mode (rainbow mode). Further, the second hold icon h2 has changed from the button hold icon to the hold icon in the display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. Therefore, the mini item MI in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light has disappeared. On the other hand, at the stage of FIG. 258 (p), the second operating means display Od2 is changed to the first operating means display Od1. In addition, in the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the display mode showing the face of the character of the lord than in the rainbow mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 258, the period in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the second operation means display Od2 overlap (FIGS. 258 (l) to FIG. )), And in this overlapping period, you can see how the hold icon changes at once with one operation of the chance button 136, which may surprise the player. Further, in this example, two notice effects are performed at the same time, but there may be a case where three or more notice effects are performed at the same time. For example, when a plurality of button hold icons appear due to winning of a plurality of balls, or when a plurality of second operation means display Od2 are displayed (for example, one changes from the first operation means display Od1 and the other One may change from the third operation means display Od3, etc.). The higher the number of advance notices performed at the same time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. If the notice effect performed at the same time is the effect of the look-ahead notice, the target of the look-ahead notice may be different or the same. Alternatively, the fourth operation means display Od4 is also displayed at the same time, and unlike the example shown in FIG. 257 above, a normal notice may be given at the same time as the look-ahead notice. Further, a plurality of fourth operation means display Od4 may be displayed, and a plurality of normal notices may be given at the same time in one operation. In this case, the larger the number of normal notices that are being performed at the same time, the higher the probability that the symbol variation display that is currently being performed will be a big hit.

In this example, the appearance timing of the button hold icon is FIG. 258 (k), which is earlier than the change timing to the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 258 (k) before the change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2, the button which is the second hold icon h2 is first operated. If only the hold icon changes, and then the chance button 136 is operated again after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes this time. Further, contrary to this example, the change timing to the second operation means display Od2 may be earlier than the appearance timing of the button hold icon. In this case, if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes first, and then the chance after the button hold icon appears. If you operate button 136 again, this time only the button hold icon will change. Therefore, the player can choose whether to wait for the button hold icon to appear and change the two hold icons at once or one by one, if the player can be entertained. There is.

Further, even when the second operation means display Od2 and the button hold icon are displayed at the same time, only the button hold icon, which is the second hold icon h2, changes in the first operation of the chance button 136. Only the first hold icon h1 may change in the second operation, or vice versa, only the first hold icon h1 changes in the first operation, and the second hold icon h2 changes in the second operation. Only certain button hold icons may change.

Further, in this example, the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold represented by the first hold icon h1, but is represented by the second hold icon h2. It may be put on hold. In this case, it overlaps with the pre-reading notice by the button hold icon, but when the chance button 136 is operated once, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image and then changes to the hold icon in the rainbow mode. , When the chance button 136 is operated again, the second hold icon h2 is hidden again by the effect image and then changed to the hold icon in the display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. It may be a change of. The two-time operation here may be a continuous striking operation in addition to performing the normal operation twice with an interval, may be limited to an operation in which the normal operation is performed twice with an interval, or is limited to a continuous striking operation. You may. Alternatively, the above two-step change may be performed only by operating the chance button 136 once. The one-time operation here may be a normal operation, a long-press operation, a normal operation, or a long-press operation.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 258 (l) becomes 0, it is assumed that the meter display Tm has been operated, and the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect of FIGS. 258 (p) to 258 (q) may be executed.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed on each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The example shown in FIG. 259 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 256, and the character of the lord, which was displayed in FIG. 256 (a), is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 (a). The mini character consisting of the combination of the pattern display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm is not displayed, and instead, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. Further, the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (a).

In FIG. 259 (b), the first operating means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the third operating means display Od3, and the wipe display on the third operating means display Od3. The characters "preparing" are displayed on Wd. On the other hand, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 (b), and the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed. It will be done. Both the first operating means display Od1 and the third operating means display Od3 continue to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and are displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

In FIG. 259 (i), the first operating means display Od1 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M changes to the second operating means display Od2. On the other hand, the third operation means display Od3 is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (i), and the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed at the same time. It will be displayed.

In FIG. 259 (j), the third operating means display Od3 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operating means display Od2, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M also has a third. The second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. The second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is only a display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The second operating means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a display in which the meter display Tm is added to the same display as the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed between the two. The aspect is different. However, the display mode may be the same.

In FIG. 259 (k), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operating means corresponding to any of the second operating means display Od2, and in FIG. 259 (l), the second operating means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is The display mode has changed, and the display mode is such that the fan pattern Fd is superimposed on the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light. The fan pattern Fd is a look-ahead notice display, and is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit. Here, since only one hold remains, it can be seen that the target of the look-ahead notice is the symbol variation display of the first hold, but if two or more holds remain, the look-ahead by the fan picture Fd is used. In the notice, the symbol change display of the notice target is unknown. In addition, instead of the pre-reading notice by the fan picture Fd, a normal notice by the fan picture Fd may be used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the entire first hold icon h1 is displayed. The effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide it. The appearance timing of the fan pattern Fd on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the appearance timing of the effect image Ed4 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L after operating the chance button 136 may be the same. It may be misaligned. For example, in this example, since both are pre-reading notices and the notice targets are the same, the appearance timings are the same, and if the pre-reading notice targets are different, the one with the higher expectation of the big hit appears first. Or, on the contrary, it may appear later. Further, when one is a look-ahead notice and the other is a normal notice, the normal notice may appear first with priority as in the example shown in FIG. 257, or conversely, the look-ahead notice may appear first. May appear. Further, the priority may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, the operation means display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be started before the operation means display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. , Or vice versa.

In FIG. 259 (m), the fan pattern Fd appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M rises (see the upward arrow shown in FIG. 259 (m)), and the first operating means display Od1 is visible. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect image Ed4 disappears, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord.

In FIG. 259 (n), the effect image Ed is applied to the fan picture Fd on the first operation means display Od1, and then the fan picture Fd disappears together with the effect image Ed (FIG. 259 (o)). That is, the fan design Fd disappears before the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is started, and the pre-reading notice by the fan design Fd is finished in a short time. On the other hand, in both FIG. 259 (n) and FIG. 259 (o), the first hold icon h1 continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. The fan design Fd may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is started, or may be continued to be displayed until the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is completed.

In this example, as in the example of FIG. 258, two types of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136, but only one notice may be started by one operation of the chance button 136. There may be, and the expectation of a big hit may be higher when two types of notices are started by one operation than when only one notice is started by one operation. Further, the period in which the operation means display is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the period displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not overlap and may be deviated. In this case, , The magnitude of the expectation of the jackpot may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated while the operation means display is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the operation means display is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The expectation of the jackpot may be higher or vice versa than when the chance button 136 is operated with.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 259 (j) becomes 0, it is assumed that the meter display Tm has been operated, and the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0. After that, the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 259 (l) to (o) may be executed.

FIG. 260 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the effect is different before and after the change in the operation means display.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is displayed while the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. When is operated, an operation sound such as "pico" is output from the speaker 120. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is not accepted, or even if it is accepted, the operation is not invalidated, the operation is accepted as valid, and as a result, the operation sound is output. There is. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

In FIG. 260 (d), the first operating means display Od1 changes to the third operating means display Od3 regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 260 (b). The third operation means display Od3 is a display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, and is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the second operating means display Od2 and the third operating means display Od3, but when the operating means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, the second operating means display Od2 If so, the display mode changes, and if the third operating means display Od3, the display mode does not change.

When the chance button 136 is operated again after changing to the third operation means display Od3, as shown in FIG. 260 (e), a sound such as "picopico" is output from the speaker 120 this time. Although this sound is different from the operation sound output in FIG. 260 (c) above, it may be an operation sound corresponding to the third operation means display Od3, or it is a pre-reading advance notice effect sound. You may. Again, the display mode of the third operating means display Od3 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed over the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, if the effect sound of the pre-reading notice is output, the third operation means display Od3 itself is pre-read. It can be said that it corresponds to the display of the notice (fourth notice production).

In FIG. 260 (n), the third operating means display Od3 changes to the second operating means display Od2. That is, the display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged and displayed, and a large meter display Tm is additionally displayed below the display. However, there is no change in the display position, and the second operating means display Od2 is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 in order to notify that the operation means display has changed.

In FIG. 260 (o), the meter of the meter display Tm is slightly decreased, and in the following FIG. 260 (p), the chance button 136 is operated. In the operation of the chance button 136 here, as shown in FIG. 260 (q), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the operation is above the changed first operation means display Od1. The word "heat" is displayed on the wipe display Wd displayed on the screen as a look-ahead notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is displayed on the wipe display Wd on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been added. The look-ahead notice in FIG. 260 (q) is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. In this example, the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (f) is different from the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (c). That is, the operation sound is a kind of effect, and the effect is different before the change of the operation means display (FIG. 260 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 260 (f)). If the effect after the operation means display is changed is different from the effect before the change, the expected degree of jackpot in FIG. 260 (q) is subsequently obtained through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 260 (n). High notice may be executed. The output timing of the above sound effect is unknown to the player, and the player can pay attention to the output of the sound effect and the change in the operation means display. ) May be less disappointing.

Even if the effect is different before and after the change in the operation means display, a notice with a low expectation of a big hit may be executed, but a notice with a high expectation of a big hit is more likely to be executed.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period from FIG. 260 (g) to FIG. 260 (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and the speaker 120 makes a “picopico” sound. Is only output again.

Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated by the time the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 260 (n) becomes 0, it is assumed that the meter display Tm has been operated, and the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect of FIG. 260 (q) may be executed.

FIG. 261 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the effect is the same before and after the change in the operation means display. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 260 will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 261 as well, in FIG. 261 (c), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated while the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. As a result, an operation sound such as "pico" is output from the speaker 120.

Further, in FIG. 261 (f), the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed is displayed, so that the speaker 120 “pico”. Sound is output. That is, the same sound is output before and after the change in the operation means display.

In FIG. 261 (n), the third operating means display Od3 changes to the second operating means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 here also includes a display in which the characters PUSH are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, as in the case of FIG. 260 (n). This display is a normal size, not an enlarged display. It also includes a normal size meter display Tm. Further, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 in order to notify that the operation means display has changed.

In FIG. 261 (o), when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation means display which was previously the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means is changed. On the wipe display Wd displayed above the display Od1, the characters "low-grade fever" are displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect). Here, the effect image Ed as shown in FIG. 260 (q) is not added, and the pre-reading notice of "low-grade fever" in FIG. 261 (p) is the pre-reading notice of "heat" shown in FIG. 261 (q). In comparison, it will be a notice with low expectations for big hits. In this example, the effect (here, the output sound from the speaker 120) is the same before the change of the operation means display (FIG. 261 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 261 (f)), which is the same. In that case, after that, through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 261 (n), a notice with a low expectation of a big hit in FIG. 261 (p) may be executed. Even if the effect is the same before and after the change in the operation means display, the notice that the expectation of the big hit is high (the notice shown in FIG. A notice with a very high expectation of a big hit may be executed, but a notice with a low expectation of a big hit is more likely to be executed.

Even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period from FIG. 261 (g) to FIG. 261 (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and the speaker 120 makes a “pico” sound. Is only output again.

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which was performed at the timing when the hold is increased.

In FIG. 262 (a), the third symbol pd3 is variablely displayed without holding, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Then, at the timing of the next figure (b), one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230, and the first hold icon h1 is displayed in the figure (c). The first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI'with PUSH characters added to a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits white light is added to the hold icon hd in a white display mode. Is. The display mode of the mini item MI'here is the same as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (c), no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the first operating means display Od1 does not change, the first operating means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is not started. The effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 also includes a change animation of the button hold icon, and the display mode of the button hold icon does not change at all.

In FIG. 262 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of FIG. 262 (e1). Be manipulated. That is, the chance button 136 is operated before the third symbol pd3, which has been performed at the timing of FIG. 262 (b) where the hold has increased, is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (f1), the second operating means display Od2 changes to the first operating means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed above the changed first operating means display Od1. The character "next" is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and an effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the other hand, the first hold icon h1 is a display mode including the mini item MI', and does not change at all.

In FIG. 262 (g1), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped). Even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the main stop, the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 262 (f1) is executed before the main stop or during the main stop, assuming that the operation has been performed. You may do so.

In FIG. 262 (h1), the first hold represented by the first hold icon h1 is digested, and the third symbol pd3 starts the variable display. In the wipe display Wd, the characters "next" that were displayed as a look-ahead notice disappear, and "castle town" as the name of the background stage is displayed. Further, the button hold icon, which was the first hold icon h1 until then, starts moving toward the area cs where the variable icon is displayed while including the mini item MI', and in FIG. 262 (i1), the variable icon is displayed. Reached the area cs to display, and is displayed as a variable icon c while including the mini item MI'. It should be noted that the icon that was the first hold icon h1 until then is not only regarded as a variable icon when it reaches the area cs for displaying the variable icon, but also when the first symbol (special figure) starts the variable display. It may be regarded as a variable icon, or it may be regarded as a variable icon when it is separated from the area hs where the hold icon is displayed.

In FIG. 262 (j1), the mini item MI'included in the variable icon c changes to a mini item MI in a display mode in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The display mode of the mini item MI here is the same as the display mode of the second operating means display Od2.

When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 262 (k1), the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide the entire variation icon c as shown in FIG. 262 (l1). The effect image Ed6 has disappeared, and the variable icon c has changed to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. The display mode representing the face of the character of the lord corresponds to the display mode of the normal notice in which the expectation of the big hit is quite high, and the normal notice using the variable icon c has been started.

In this example, the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed on the mini item MI, but even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, there is an operation. As a result, the normal notice using the variable icon c may be started after the operation valid period has elapsed.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. 262. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 262 will be described.

In the example shown in FIG. 263, the chance button 136 is not operated during the execution of the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which was performed at the timing when the hold is increased, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 starts. After that, the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 263 (i2)). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the second operation means display Od2, and the variable icon c includes the mini item MI having the same display mode as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2. Then, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (j2), the second operating means display Od2 changes to the first operating means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed above the changed first operating means display Od1. The character "hot" is displayed as a normal notice display (second notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character symbol "CHANGE" is displayed large so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 being displayed in a variable manner from the front side. On the other hand, in the area cs where the variable icon is displayed, the effect image Ed6 that hides the entire variable icon c appears.

In FIG. 263 (k2), the effect image Ed6 disappears, and the variable icon c changes to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. In addition, the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd has also disappeared.

In FIG. 263 (l2), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 started in FIG. 263 (f2) continues, and the variation icon c continues to be displayed in the display mode representing the face of the character of the lord, and the wipe display. The normal notice display (display of "hot" characters) in Wd also continues to be displayed. The character symbol "CHANGE" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has disappeared, and the third symbol pd3 being displayed in a variable manner can be visually recognized. In addition, the normal notice display ("hot" character display) on the wipe display Wd has also been changed to "castle town" as the name of the background stage, and the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is terminated early. You may. After that, the variation display of the third symbol pd3 ends, and the stop display (main stop) is performed by the combination of big hits. Even if the normal notice is executed, the stop display (main stop) may be displayed due to the combination of loss.

In the examples of FIGS. 262 and 263 described above, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted from the time when the second operation means display Od2 is changed, and the sub-control units 400 and 500 side change the symbol to be notified. If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected before the display is started, FIG. 262 (f1) to FIG. When the pre-reading notice shown in (1) is executed and the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the symbol change display of the notice target is started (for example, after receiving the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300), the sub On the control units 400 and 500 side, the effect data of the normal advance notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used, and the effect data for changing the display mode of the variable icon c is used and shown in FIGS. 263 (j2) and later. Usually perform a notice. Therefore, the player may be given the pleasure of choosing when to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the operation means display temporarily disappears after the chance button 136 is operated.

The first operating means display Od1 shown in FIG. 264 (a) is changed to the second operating means display Od2 in FIG. 264 (b), and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm is combined.

When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 264 (d) during the variable display of the third symbol pd3, the wipe display Wd displays a look-ahead notice (first) as shown in the figure (e). The character "next" is displayed as a notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second operation means display Od2 displayed under the wipe display Wd disappears, and no operation means display is displayed under the wipe display Wd.

In FIG. 264 (f), the effect image Ed disappears, but the character "next" continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd. After the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues for a while, in FIG. 264 (i), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 3 The symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols being lost. The stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues until FIG. 264 (m). During this stop display (main stop), as shown in FIG. 264 (k), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character "next" as the pre-reading notice display to "castle town" as the name of the background stage. .. Until the time point of FIG. 264 (k), the operation means display is not displayed.

While the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues, as shown in FIGS. 264 (l) to (m), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed from the bottom. An animation that gradually appears (display start animation) is displayed, and finally, during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed under the wipe display Wd. Will be done.

In this way, the second operating means display Od2 does not have to be immediately switched to the first operating means display Od1 when the corresponding operating means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, and once it disappears, it does not have to be switched to the first operating means display Od1. It may be displayed as the first operation means display Od1.

Further, the timing at which the first operating means display Od1 is displayed may be during the variable display when the second operating means display Od2 disappears during the variable display of the third symbol pd3. It may be at the start of the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, or it may be during the next variation display. Further, the above timing may be during the stop display (main stop) when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, or the third. It may be at the start of the next variation display of the symbol pd3, or during the next variation display.

Further, in this example, although the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, it may be the third operation means display Od3, the fourth operation means display Od4, or first. The second operating means display Od2 may have a different aspect from the displayed second operating means display Od2.

Further, the fourth operating means display Od4 does not immediately switch to the first operating means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 253 (38) when the corresponding operating means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed as the first operation means display Od1 after disappearing once. Further, when the corresponding operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display Od4 is displayed, the operating means display other than the first operating means display Od1 may be displayed.

Further, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be hidden during the big hit game, and may be suddenly displayed without the display start animation when the display is started after the big hit game is completed.

Further, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be temporarily erased and redisplayed during the display. For example, it may disappear once during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 and be redisplayed during the fluctuation display, may be redisplayed at the start of the next fluctuation display, or may be redisplayed during the next fluctuation display. May be done. Alternatively, the third symbol pd3 may be temporarily disappeared during the stop display (main stop) and redisplayed during the stop display (main stop), or may be redisplayed at the start of the next variable display. It may be redisplayed during the next variable display.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing a modified example of how to display the operation means display.

In FIG. 265 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side displays the reduced display pd3'of the third symbol pd3, the area cs for displaying the variable icon, and the variable icon c, and the third symbol pd3 on the right side is displayed. 3 The first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the super reach effect is executed, and the scene after the slashing of the lord and the swordsman is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L.

In FIG. 265 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M has started to move to the right side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has started to move to the left side. That is, both 208M and 208N have started to move in the direction of approaching each other.

FIG. 265 (c) shows the moment when the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the left end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N come into contact with each other at the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the moment when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed is shown. At this stage, there is no change in the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed, the lower portion of the family crest accessory 224E'is the upper right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration. It overlaps the upper left end of the symbol display device 208N from the front side. Further, both the lord and the swordsman displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is visible.

In FIG. 265 (d), with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N completely closed, the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. The display has changed to the second operating means display Od2. That is, as the second operation means display Od2, the display in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light straddles the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this way, the enlarged display is performed, and below that, a large meter display Tm'is also displayed so as to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The first operation means display Od1 has disappeared from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the area cs for displaying the variable icon and the variable icon c have disappeared in order to make the first operating means display Od1 stand out.

In this example, the second operating means display Od2 is enlarged and displayed so as to straddle the two decorative symbol display devices, but may be enlarged and displayed so as to straddle the three decorative symbol display devices. Further, the size is not limited to the enlarged display, and may be the same as the size of the display before the change (here, the first operation means display Od1). Further, the same applies to the operation means display other than the second operation means display Od2. That is, the operation means display may be displayed so as to straddle a plurality of decorative symbol display devices.

As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, the operation means display is displayed even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, so that the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is still displayed. You can make the player think that it is not finished.

In the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, the operation means display is a display corresponding to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193, and the chance button 136 is operated. The means display may be a display corresponding to other operation means such as the second chance button, the transparent unit 191 and the operation key unit 181.

Further, the operation of the chance button 136 may be a normal operation called a single press or a short press, a long press operation, a continuous press operation, or a normal operation. The operation may be performed a plurality of times at intervals.

Further, the notices such as the look-ahead notice and the normal notice described above are not always big hits even if the notice is executed, and may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the lower the possibility of losing and the higher the possibility of a big hit.

Further, in FIGS. 252 (26) to 253 (40), the first operation means display Od1 and the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed during the execution of the super reach effect, but the execution of the super reach effect In some cases, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means displays may be hidden, and it is always non-display. It may be displayed. When there are a plurality of types of super reach effects, only one or a plurality of types of certain super reach effects may be hidden, or may be hidden without fail. Further, in FIG. 257 (i), the second operation means display Od2 is displayed during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, but the first operation means display Od1 to 4 are also displayed during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Operation means display of Od4 At least one operation means display or all operation means display may be hidden, or may be hidden without fail. Further, during the execution of the specific effect, not limited to the super reach effect and the pseudo continuous effect, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means displays are displayed. , It may be hidden, and it may be hidden without fail.

Further, during the execution of the jackpot game opened by the attacker, at least one operation means display or all operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are hidden. There may be, and it may always be hidden. On the other hand, during the non-big hit game during which the big hit game is not being executed, all the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 can be displayed. However, even during the non-big hit game, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state), at least one operation means display or all operations of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are performed. The means display may or may not be hidden. Further, even during the non-big hit game, in the electric support state (high probability state in the normal figure), at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all of the operation means display is displayed. The operation means display may be hidden or may be hidden without fail.

Further, the second operating means display Od2 may be a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display Od1. For example, the second operating means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to 251 (9) differs only in color from the display mode of the first operating means display Od1, but the colors are the same and only the size is different. You may. On the other hand, the second operating means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 260 (n) to (o) is different in color and size from the display mode of the first operating means display Od1, and a meter display Tm is further added. There is.

Further, the third operation means display Od3 may also be a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operation means display Od1. For example, the third operating means display Od3 shown in FIGS. 260 (d) to (m) differs only in color from the display mode of the first operating means display Od1, but the colors are the same and only the size is different. It may be different in both color and size, and may be different in pattern and shape.

Further, all of the operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 include a display imitating the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136), but there is a chance. The display imitating the button 136 does not necessarily have to be included, all the operation means displays may not be included, and only a part of the operation means display (for example, the second operation means display Od2) is included. You don't have to.

In addition, as the effect that is started when the operation means is operated while the operation means display is displayed, the effect related to the symbol change, the effect related to look-ahead, and the effect that the change is stopped (for example, the effect). It is possible to enumerate the effects (which may or may not include the demo effect) in the state of being stopped and not on hold. That is, as the effect that is started when the operating means is operated, all of the above-listed ones may be used, or some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

Further, in FIGS. 258 (k) and FIG. 258 (l), the operation means display and the button hold icon, which is a display related to the operation means but is different from the operation means display, are displayed together. In addition to the button hold icon, the display different from the operation means display Od1 to Od4 includes a button display in the judge effect, a button display in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect, a button display in the conversation notice, and the like. These displays may also be displayed together with the operation means displays Od1 to Od4. In addition, although the display related to the hold icon such as the button hold icon is different, the button display in the judge effect, the button display in the pseudo-continuous fan effect, the button display in the conversation notice, etc. can be regarded as a kind of operation means display. There is also. For example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIGS. 252 (33) to 252 (36) can be regarded as a button display in the judge effect.

The button effect described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265 can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, various operating means display accessories shown in FIGS. 251 to 265 are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and FIGS. 251 to 265 are used. The button effect described may be made executable. Further, even in this case, the accessory of the operation means display may continue to appear by continuing the transparent effect across a plurality of consecutive variable displays, or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed. Even in the state where the number of holds is 0 (for example, the state of the symbol demo in which the decorative symbol is displayed or the state of the animation demo started after the symbol demo), the transparent effect is executed and the transparent liquid crystal display device is displayed. An accessory indicating the operation means may appear on the back side.

Alternatively, conversely, the operating means display is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the button effect described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265 is executed, while FIGS. 14 to 45. The transparency effect described with reference to may be made feasible.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach region or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 266 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 266, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 193 are not provided.

FIG. 267 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 267), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 267) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the inserted medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) arranged behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). It has a structure that appears on the side). Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, the operation means include the bet button 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop button 1037 to 1039, and the like, as well as the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And the effect button 1091 (an example of the second operating means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can be projected toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 267 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, a pushing operation can be performed, and the display panel 1070 functions as an operating means (button) in the same manner as the transparent portion 191 and is an example of the operating means (for example, the first). It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
"Display means [For example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, and the like. One or more],
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent unit 191 and an operation key unit 181].
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, the decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), the fourth symbol pd4, or the fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 197 (b)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI, hd] according to the number of hold balls.
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is the first operation means display [for example, the first operation means display Od1].
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation means display [for example, a second operation means display Od2].
The second operating means display is different from the first operating means display [for example, a display, a shape, a color, a size, which has the same shape but different colors, sizes, patterns, etc. Display with the same pattern but different operation modes such as vibration and rotation, display with different shapes (operation means itself is deformed, display imitating the operation means, operation promotion display, remaining period display, etc. Different types of display, display in which the operation means itself has changed, etc.]
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The first operation means display is a display [for example, FIGS. 251 (13) to 252 (29)] that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the "variable display of the decorative symbol" means that the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display in between. In addition, the period from the start of the variation display to the final display can be regarded as one variation. Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second operating means display may be a display developed from the first operating means display, or may be a display switched from the first operating means display.

Further, the operation means display is a display relating to the operation means, for example, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation promotion display"), or an operation validity period of the operation means. It may be a display of the remaining period of (hereinafter, referred to as “remaining period display”) or a display reminiscent of the operating means.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. Further, the second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the display may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle, or may be continuously disappeared while the stop display is being displayed. It may be displayed as being. Further, the first operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may not end.

Further, the second operating means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the display may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle, or may be continuously disappeared while the stop display is being displayed. It may be displayed as being. Further, the second operating means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may not end.

Further, the second operating means display may have the same display mode as the first operating means display, or may have a different display mode.

The operating means may be a means that is always operated by the player. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays, a means for always displaying a decorative symbol, or a means for always displaying a hold display according to the number of hold balls. It may be a means to do.

again,
"The first operating means display is a display that does not change [for example, FIG. 260 (b)] even when the operating means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the first operating means display. Od1 has not changed],
When the operating means is operated while the first operating means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operating means [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), " Output of operation sound such as "pico"] may be performed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this aspect, although the operation means display does not change even if the operation means is operated (first operation means display), the response operation is performed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort and makes the player interested. You may be able to.

Here, the first operation means display may be the default operation means display among the plurality of types of operation means displays.

Further, the response operation may be some kind of display other than the output from the speaker, the light emission of the light emitting means, the operation of the movable means, or the like, or a combination thereof (hereinafter, the same). .)
When the operating means is operated while the first operating means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operating means may be performed without fail.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display [for example, a third operation means display Od3].
The third operating means display is different from the first operating means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits light in white] [for example, a chance button 136 that emits light in red. Display mode including imitation display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The third operating means display is a display that does not change even when the operating means is operated [for example, the third operating means display Od3 does not change as shown in FIG. 260 (f)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this aspect, since the third operation means display different from the first operation means display is displayed, when the player operates the operation means, the third operation means display is changed in some way. However, since nothing changes, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and interested.

Further, the third operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the display may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears in the middle, or may be continuously disappeared while the stop display is being displayed. It may be displayed as being. Further, the third operating means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may not end.

Further, the third operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, may be a display switched from the first operation means display, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display. The display of the operating means of the above may be changed.

Further, the third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the third operation means while the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The display may change.

Further, the third operating means display may have the same display mode as the second operating means display, or may have a different display mode.

again,
"When the operating means is operated while the third operating means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operating means [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (f)". Output of operation sound such as "picopico"] may be performed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the operating means is operated while the third operating means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operating means may be performed without fail.

again,
"The third operating means display is a display in which the first operating means display is changed.
During the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, there is a case where the first operating means display changes to the third operating means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 260 (d)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display without fail.

again,
"The third operating means display is a display [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (m)] that may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The third operation means display is a display in which there is a case where the display continues to be displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed [for example, when shown in FIGS. 260 (h) to (j)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. Further, the third operating means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

again,
"When the operating means is operated while the third operating means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 260 (e)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 260 (f). ), The output of the pre-reading notice effect sound such as "picopico" is started].
The first notice production is a advance notice production of the look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If the operating means is operated while the third operating means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be started without fail.

Here, the third operation means display itself may be a look-ahead notice display (fourth notice effect).

again,
"The display means includes a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L] and one or a plurality of second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device. It is a means including at least one or more of 208N and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O].
The second display means has a smaller display screen than the first display means.
The first operating means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 251 (1)].
The second operating means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIGS. 251 (2) to (11)].
The third operating means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIGS. 256 (b) to 256 (i)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth operating means display may be a display that may be displayed on the first display means, or may be displayed on the second display means. May be good.

The first operating means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means, and the second operating means display is a display that is always displayed on the second display means. The third operating means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means.

Further, the display means may be a means including only the first display means and one or a plurality of second display means, or may be a means including a third display means and the like.

again,
"The attacker [for example, variable winning openings 234, 235] is configured to be able to execute a big hit game.
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed in a non-big hit game [for example, a normal game state in which a variable display of a decorative symbol can be executed].
The second operating means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game.
The third operating means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth operating means display may be a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game.

In addition, it may be configured so that the jackpot game opened by the attacker is always executed.

again,
"The first operation means display may be hidden during execution of a certain effect [for example, super reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.] even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed. Is a display
The second operation means display is a display that may be hidden during the execution of the certain effect even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.
The third operation means display is a display that may be hidden during the execution of the certain effect even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the certain effect may be a super reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect. That is, the certain effect may be both a super reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect, or may be only one of them. Here, the super reach effect is a variety of reach effects other than the normal reach effect (including, for example, a special reach such as a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, and a special full rotation reach). Further, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol. If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed, the fourth operating means display may disappear and the second notice effect may be started. The second advance notice effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probabilistic state.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, even during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second operation means display may be a display. The display of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed, or the display may be hidden during the super reach, and the third operating means display is displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even if there is, the display may be hidden during the super reach.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the big hit game. Often, the third operating means display may be a display that is always hidden during the jackpot game.

Further, the first operating means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probabilistic state, and the second operating means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probabilistic state. The third operating means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probabilistic state.

Further, the first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state. Often, the third operating means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state.

again,
"The second operating means display is a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display [for example, FIGS. 251 (2) to (9). The second operating means display Od2 shown in), and the second operating means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 260 (n) to (o).
The third operating means display is a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display [for example, FIGS. 260 (d) to (m). Third operation means display Od3] shown in
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second operating means display may be the same display mode as the display mode of the third operating means display, or the display mode of the third operating means display and the color or size. At least one of the two may be displayed in a different display mode.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be the same display mode as the display mode of the second operating means display, or the display mode of the second operating means display and the color or size. At least one of the above may be displayed in a different display mode.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be the same display mode as the display mode of the third operating means display, or the display mode of the third operating means display and the color or size. At least one of the above may be displayed in a different display mode.

The second operation means display may be a display mode in which both the color and the size, or only the color or only the size are different from the display mode of the first operation means display. The third operating means display may be a display mode in which both the color and the size, or only the color or only the size are different from the display mode of the first operating means display.

Further, the second operating means display may be a display mode in which both the color and the size, or only the color or only the size are different from the display mode of the third operating means display. The fourth operating means display may be a display mode in which the display mode of the first operating means display differs from the display mode of the first operating means display in both color and size, or only in color or size.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display mode in which both the color and the size, or only the color or only the size are different from the display mode of the second operating means display. , The display mode of the third operation means display and the display mode in which both the color and the size, or only the color or only the size are different, may be displayed.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4].
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIGS. 252 (33) to (36)] that may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], the second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect relating to a big hit with the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed at the time of starting [for example, the family crest accessory shown in FIGS. 253 (38) to (40). 224E'is a normal notice with the operation etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth operating means display may be a display developed from the first operating means display, may be a display switched from the first operating means display, or may be a display switched from the first operating means display. The display of one operating means may be changed.

Further, the fourth operating means display is a display in which the first operating means display is changed, and the first operating means display is the fourth operating means while the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The display may change.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display in which the display is started independently of other types of operating means display (for example, the first operating means display).

Further, the fourth operating means display may have a display mode different from that of the first operating means display. Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the first operating means display, or may be larger than the size of the first operating means display. The display may be displayed, or may be displayed smaller than the size of the first operating means display.

Further, the fourth operating means display may have the same display mode as the second operating means display, or may have a different display mode. Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the second operating means display, or may be larger than the size of the second operating means display. The display may be displayed, or may be displayed smaller than the size of the second operating means display.

Further, the fourth operating means display may have the same display mode as the third operating means display, or may have a different display mode. Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the third operating means display, or may be larger than the size of the third operating means display. The display may be displayed, or may be displayed smaller than the size of the third operating means display.

If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed, the second advance notice effect may be started without fail.

again,
"The fourth operating means display is a display in which there is a case where it is displayed at the same time as the second operating means display [for example, when it is shown in 40 (f) to the same figure (g)].
When the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display are displayed at the same time, the second operating means display does not change [for example, FIG. 257 (i). ), The second operation means display Od2 remains],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display start timing may be different between the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operating means display.

Further, when the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display are displayed at the same time [for example, FIG. 257 (h)], the fourth operating means Of the second notice effect corresponding to the display and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display, the second notice effect [for example, by the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 257 (i). Ordinary notice effect] may be started only, or only the second notice effect may be started without fail.

Further, when the operating means is operated again after the second notice effect is started, the first notice effect corresponding to the display of the second operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 257 (k)). In the wipe display Wd, the character display of "heat" and the look-ahead notice effect by the effect image Ed] may be started, the first notice effect may always be started, and further, the above-mentioned The second operating means display may be changed [for example, changed to the first operating means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 257 (k)].

Here, when the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display are displayed at the same time, the second operating means corresponding to the fourth operating means display is displayed. Both the advance notice effect and the first advance notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display may be started, or may be started without fail. Further, in this case, the display of the second operating means changes.

again,
"One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4].
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIGS. 252 (33) to (36)] that may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], the second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect relating to a big hit with the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed at the time of starting [for example, the family crest accessory shown in FIGS. 253 (38) to (40). It is a normal notice production with the operation of 224E'],
When the fourth operating means display is displayed at the same time as the first operating means display [for example, the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 257 (d), and the second operating means display Od2 is the first. After changing to the operation means display Od1 of FIG. 257 (f) to FIG. 257 (g)], there is a display.
The fourth operating means display is a display in which there is a case where it is displayed at the same time as the second operating means display [for example, when shown in FIGS. 257 (f) to (g)].
When the fourth operating means display is displayed at the same time as the third operating means display [for example, in FIGS. 257 (f) to 257 (g), the second operating means display Od2 is the third. If the operation means display is Od3], there is a display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display start timing may be different between the fourth operating means display and the first operating means display, and the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display may be displayed. The start timing may be different, and the display start timing may be different between the fourth operating means display and the third operating means display.

Further, the fourth operating means display may be displayed in parallel with the first operating means display, and the fourth operating means display may be displayed in parallel with the second operating means display. The fourth operating means display may be displayed in parallel with the third operating means display.

If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed, the second advance notice effect may be started without fail.

again,
"Even if the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect is not started [for example, the operation sound is output as shown in FIG. 260 (c). Although it will be done, the notice production will not start],
The first notice production is a pre-reading notice notice production.
When the operating means is operated while the second operating means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 251 (12)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 251 (for example, FIG. 251 ()). When the display of the character "heat" on the wipe display Wd, the display of the effect image Ed, the output of the sound effect, etc. are started as shown in 13)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second operation means display itself may be a look-ahead notice display (third notice effect).

If the operating means is operated while the second operating means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be started without fail.

again,
"The second operating means display is a display in which the first operating means display is changed.
During the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, there is a case where the first operating means display changes to the second operating means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 251 (2)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display may be changed to the second operation means display without fail.

again,
"If the operating means is operated while the second operating means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 251 (12)], the second operating means display may change [for example, As shown in FIG. 251 (13), it may change to the first operation means display Od1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If the operating means is operated while the second operating means display is displayed, the second operating means display may be changed without fail.

again,
"The above-mentioned" case where the second operating means display changes "means" when the second operating means display changes to the first operating means display ".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The display of the second operating means may be changed to the display of the first operating means without fail.

again,
"When the display mode of the second operating means display changes" described above, "the second operating means display disappears once [for example, FIGS. 264 (e) to (k)). ] After that, when the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIGS. 264 (l) to (m)] ".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, after the second operation means display disappears once, the first operation means display may be always displayed.

again,
"The second operating means display is a display [for example, FIGS. 251 (2) to 251 (11)] that may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The first operation means display is a display in which there is a case where the display continues even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol [for example, when shown in FIGS. 251 (15) to (17)].
The second operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, when shown in FIGS. 251 (4) to 251 (6)] when the display continues to be displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
The second operating means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

again,
"The first operating means display is a display that may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed [for example, the first operating means display Od1 shown in FIG. 263 (a)]. A game table featuring. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"At least one of the plurality of types of operation means display is a display imitating the operation means [for example, the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 251. It is a display including the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in 252 and the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that all of the display of the plurality of types of operation means may be a display including a display imitating the operation means, or only a part of the display of the plurality of types of operation means is displayed. However, the display may include a display that imitates the operating means.

again,
"The display means displays the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k)], and the operation means display mode [for example, the chance button 136 which is a white display mode and emits red light. It is a means that can be displayed in the display mode in which the mini item MI with the characters PUSH added to the imitated display is added.
The operation means display mode is a display mode in which the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 258 (l)] is enlarged or reduced. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means display mode may be a display mode in which the second operation means display is enlarged or reduced only during the operation validity period of the operation means.

Further, the operation means display mode is not limited to the second operation means display, but other operation means display (for example, the first operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display). The display may be an enlarged or reduced display mode. Alternatively, the operation means display mode may be a display mode in which a part or all of the operation means display is enlarged or reduced. Further, the operation means display mode may be different in color and pattern from the operation means display. Further, in some cases, the operation means display mode may have the same size as the operation means display, may have a different shape from the operation means display, or may be different from the operation means display. If the display mode relates to the same operating means, it may be different from the display mode of the operating means display.

Further, the hold display of the operation means display mode may be displayed at a time different from the operation validity period of the operation means, and while the display is displayed, the operation validity period of the operation means is always displayed. It may be.

Further, if the operation means is operated while the hold display is displayed in the operation means display mode, the hold display displayed in the operation means display mode may change. It may change without fail. For example, it may change to a display mode representing the expectation of a big hit (including a default display mode in which the expectation is 0), or it may change without fail.

In addition, the various limitations described below are recognized.

The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the first operation means display, or the hold may be displayed closer to the hold display than the second operation means display. The display may be displayed near the display (hold icon), or may be displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the third operating means display.

The display means is a display means capable of displaying the hold display as a variable icon corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the fourth operating means display is a display means. The display may be displayed closer to the variable icon than the first operating means display, or may be displayed closer to the variable icon than the second operating means display. However, the display may be displayed closer to the variable icon than the display of the third operating means.

The first operating means display may be a display displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operating means display, and the second operating means display may be a display displayed closer to the specific operating means display, and the second operating means display may be a display displayed closer to the fourth operating means display. The display may be displayed closer to the specific display, or the third operating means display may be displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operating means display. .. As an example of the specific display referred to here, the display of the effect mode, the display of the stage name, the display of the look-ahead notice (display of the first notice effect), and the display of the notice of the change (display of the second notice effect). ), Display of special effects such as super reach, display of operation means (the above operation promotion display, display of operation invalidity (for example, display in preparation), etc.), display of control status (for example, display of probability change, etc.), effect The display etc. can be listed. That is, the specific display may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

The first operating means display and the second operating means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions. The first operating means display and the third operating means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions. The second operating means display and the third operating means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions.

The hold display may be displayed in the operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the first operation means display is simultaneously displayed with the hold display in the operation means display mode for a whole period or a part of the period. The second operation means display may be displayed at the same time as the hold display of the operation means display mode for the entire period or a part of the period. The third operation means display may be displayed at the same time as the hold display of the operation means display mode for a whole period or a part of the period.

The variable icon may be displayed in an operating means display mode relating to the operating means, and the fourth operating means display is simultaneously displayed with the variable icon in the operating means display mode over a whole period or a part of the period. It may be done.

The term "displayed in the operation means display mode" as used herein means that the hold display itself is displayed in a display mode that imitates the operation means, or that the hold display is an icon of a display mode that imitates the operation means (for example,). , Display as a mini item) may be added and displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the above operation promotion display, or the hold display may be displayed as the above operation promotion display (for example, as a mini item). (Display) may be added and displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the above remaining period display, or the above remaining period display (for example, display as a mini item) may be displayed in the hold display. It may be additionally displayed, or may be a combination of two or all of the display imitating the operation means, the operation promotion display, and the remaining period display.

The first operating means display, the second operating means display, the third operating means display, the fourth operating means display, and the hold display or the variable icon display are displays that imitate the operating means. When displayed, the remaining period display may be displayed at intervals (for example, displayed at intervals below) from each display (display imitating the operation means), or each display (display imitating the operation means) may be displayed. The display imitating) and the above remaining period display may be displayed together.

During the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display, the second operation means display, and the third operation means display may be displayed, but the stop display of the decorative symbol may be displayed. There may be a case where a notification that can change the setting or a specific effect is executed during the display of. Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of reserved balls is 0, when the operating means is operated, a certain animation display, a certain sound output, or a certain light emission may be performed. It should be noted that these animation displays, sound outputs, and light emission are performed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, but more specifically, they may be performed during the display of the so-called demonstration display. It may be performed between the time when the decorative symbol is stopped and the time when the demonstration display is started.

The operating means may have a variable mode. As an example of the change in mode, a change in color, a change in light emission mode, a change in movement of the operation surface (for example, a change in the amount of protrusion), a rotation of a frame surrounding the operation surface, and the like can be listed. That is, as the change in the mode of the operating means, all of the above-listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, the operating means may be a button type or a lever type. If it is a button type, the operation surface may be movable in the vertical direction or the front-back direction. Further, if it is a lever type, it may be able to be tilted in one or a plurality of directions.

When the first operating means display changes to the fourth operating means display, the first operating means display displayed on the second display means becomes the first display means. The movement may be started and displayed as the fourth operating means display by the first display means. The movement here may be started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the first operating means display changes to the second operating means display, the first operating means display displayed on the second display means becomes the first display means. The movement may be started and the first display means may be displayed as the second operation means display, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed as the first operation means display. The movement may be started toward the second display means, and the second display means may be displayed as the second operation means display.

When the first operating means display changes to the third operating means display, the first operating means display displayed on the second display means becomes the first display. The movement may be started toward the means and displayed as the third operating means display on the first display means, or the first operating means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. , The movement may be started toward the second display means, and the second display means may be displayed as the third operation means display.

When the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is the same, or the corresponding notice effect mode is the same, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed. It is not displayed, the first operating means display and the third operating means display are not displayed at the same time, and the second operating means display and the third operating means display are also displayed at the same time. You may not do it. On the other hand, when the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is different, or the corresponding notice effect mode is different, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed. It may be displayed at the same time for the whole period or a part of the period, or the first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same time for the whole period or a part of the period. The second operating means display and the third operating means display may also be displayed at the same time for the entire period or a part of the period.

Further, the first operating means display and the fourth operating means display may be displayed at the same time for the entire period or a part of the period, and the second operating means display and the fourth operating means display are also displayed. The third operating means display and the fourth operating means display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 3-1)
Display means and
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of hold balls.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice effects.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the first operation unit display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the second operation unit display.
The second operation unit display is different from the first operation unit display.
The first operation unit display and the second operation unit display are different from the hold display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display that changes the first operation means display to the second operation means display (hereinafter, referred to as "first change display").
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped changing (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is changing (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
The second operating means display is a display that may be displayed in the first state.
The second operating means display is a display that may be displayed in the second state.
The first change display is a display that may be started in the second state.
The first operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid.
The second operating means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operating means is effective.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console described in Appendix 3-1 by displaying the display means even when the fluctuation is stopped, it may be possible to make the fluctuation seem to have not stopped yet.

(Appendix 3-2)
The game console described in Appendix 3-1.
The first operating means display is a display in which the display may not end even if one of the first state and the second state shifts to the other.
The second operating means display is a display that may not end even if one of the first state and the second state shifts to the other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-3)
The game console according to Appendix 3-1 or 3-2.
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 3-1 to 3-3.
The effect can be displayed by the operation of the operating means of the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 3-1 to 3-4.
One of the plurality of types of advance notice effects is the first advance notice effect.
The display means is a means capable of starting the display of the first notice effect by the operation of the operation means by the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 3-1 to 3-5.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the look-ahead notice effect.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the third operation means display.
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display that changes the first operation means display to the third operation means display (hereinafter, referred to as "second change display").
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed as the look-ahead notice.
The third operating means display is a display that may not end even if one of the first state and the second state shifts to the other.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-7)
The game console described in Appendix 3-6.
The third operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid.
The third operating means display is a display different from the first operating means display.
A game table characterized by that.

The third operating means display is a display in which the operating means is invalid like the first operating means display, but may have the same mode as the second operating means display. Further, the display of the third operating means may be different from the display of the second operating means.

(Appendix 3-8)
The game console according to Appendix 3-6 or 3-7.
The first operating means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the second operating means display.
The first operating means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operating means display.
The second operating means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operating means display.
A game table characterized by that.

It is not necessary that two operation means displays (first, second, third) are displayed at the same time in one display means. In addition, the operation means display related to the operation of another operation means may be displayed at the same time.

Further, if the operation of the operating means is executed while the second operating means display is displayed, the second operating means display may return to the first operating means display, or until immediately before the fluctuation stop. It may disappear completely.

(Appendix 3-9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 3-6 to 3-8.
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is the fourth operation means display.
The fourth operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective.
If the player operates the operating means while the fourth operating means display is displayed, the first notice display may start to be displayed.
The fourth operating means display is a display that can be displayed in the second state.
The fourth operating means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the first operating means display.
The fourth operating means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operating means display.
The fourth operating means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operating means display.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, the operation means display may be displayed at the same time as an ordinary button effect (including a judge effect, a pseudo-repeated operation, a button hold, and a button display of a conversation notice) performed other than the operation means display.

Further, the effect performed by the operation during the display of the fourth operation means may be the first notice effect.

(Appendix 3-10)
The game console described in Appendix 3-9.
In the case where the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display are displayed in parallel, if the player operates the operating means once, only the first notice effect is produced. Is started to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, the first notice effect may be a display relating to the operation during the display of the fourth operation means.

Further, the effect (notice) displayed by operating the operation means when the second operation means display is displayed may be the second notice effect.

(Appendix 3-11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 3-1 to 3-10.
The operation means display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-1)
Display means and
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of hold balls.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the first operation means display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the second operation means display.
The second operating means display is a display different from the first operating means display.
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The second operating means display is a display in which the first operating means display is changed.
During the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first operating means display may change to the second operating means display.
It is configured so that the first operating means display may be displayed for a certain period of time.
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of reserved balls is 0.
When the operating means is operated while the first operating means display is displayed for a certain period of time, a response display may be performed according to the operation of the operating means. Has been
A feature is that a notice effect other than reach may be started by operating the operation means while the second operation means display is displayed while the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Amusement table.

(Appendix A3-2)
The game console described in Appendix A3-1.
When the operating means is operated while the first operating means display is displayed, the first operating means display is configured not to change.
When the operating means is operated while the second operating means display is displayed, the second operating means display may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-3)
The game console described in Appendix A3-2.
The "case where the second operating means display changes" described in Appendix A3-2 means "when the second operating means display changes to the first operating means display".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-4)
The game console described in Appendix A3-2.
The "when the second operating means display changes" described in Appendix A3-2 means "when the first operating means display is displayed after the second operating means display disappears once". Is,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-1 to A3-4.
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the decorative symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-6)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A3-1 to A3-5.
The response display is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-1 to A3-6.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the third operation means display.
The third operating means display is a display different from the first operating means display.
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The third operating means display is a display that does not change even if the operating means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-8)
The game console described in Appendix A3-7.
If the operating means is operated while the third operating means display is displayed, a response operation may be performed according to the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-9)
The game console according to Appendix A3-7 or A3-8.
The third operating means display is a display in which the first operating means display is changed.
During the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first operating means display may change to the third operating means display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-7 to A3-9.
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The third operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-7 to A3-10.
The second operating means display is a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display.
The third operating means display is a display mode in which at least one of the color and the size is different from the display mode of the first operating means display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-12)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-1 to A3-11.
The display of one of the plurality of types of operation means display is the fourth operation means display.
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.
If the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display is displayed, the effect of the normal notice may be started.
The effect of the normal notice is an effect relating to a big hit with the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed at the time of starting.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-13)
The game console described in Appendix A3-12.
The fourth operating means display is a display that may be displayed at the same time as the second operating means display.
When the operating means is operated while the fourth operating means display and the second operating means display are displayed at the same time, the second operating means display does not change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-14)
The game console according to any one of Appendix A3-1 to A3-13.
The second operation means display is a display including a display indicating an operation validity period of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-15)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A3-1 to A3-14.
At least one of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display including a display imitating the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-16)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A3-1 to 15.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold display in a mode including an operation means display.
The operation means display is a display in which the second operation means display is enlarged or reduced.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-17)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary A3-1 to A3-16.
The certain period is a period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

The operation means display may be displayed only during the normal game.

In addition, the operation means display may not be displayed during the specific effect (for example, during super reach).

Further, the second operating means display may have a color changed from that of the first operating means display, or the first operating means display may be enlarged and displayed.

Further, the third operation means display may have a color changed from that of the first operation means display, or the first operation means display may be enlarged and displayed.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

(Appendix R0-1)
It is a game table equipped with production means that can execute multiple productions.
One of the plurality of productions is the first production,
One of the plurality of productions is a second production,
One of the plurality of productions is a third production,
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect may be changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed.
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in the same manner.
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of the first effect.
The first effect is one of a certain type of effect.
As the second effect in the second case, one of the certain types of effects may be performed.
As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects different from the certain type may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1.
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partly performed in the same manner including the first part.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1 or R0-2.
The second effect is an effect including the display of the second character.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-3.
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in different modes.
The second effect in the first case is performed in the first aspect.
The second effect in the second case is performed in the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are partially the same aspect including the first part.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different from each other in the middle.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-4.
The first effect is an effect in which an icon may be displayed.
The third effect is also an effect in which an icon may be displayed.
It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the icon is displayed in the second display mode than when the icon is displayed in the first display mode.
The icon of the second display mode is more likely to be displayed in the third effect than in the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-4.
The first effect is an effect that may change the display mode of the icon.
The third effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon.
It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the icon is displayed in the second display mode than when the icon is displayed in the first display mode.
The third effect is easier to change the icon to the second display mode than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-6.
The statement in Appendix R0-1 that "the case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the first effect is performed" is "the first effect." It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the third effect is performed than when the first effect is performed. "
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-7.
The first effect is an effect including the display of the first character.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-8.
The effect means is a display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 181 Operation key unit 191 Transmissive part 208 Decorative symbol display device 208L 1st decorative symbol display device 208M 2nd decorative symbol display device 208N 3rd decorative symbol display device 208O 4th decorative symbol display device 224E Family crest 251 First movable means 2521, 2522 Second movable means 253 Third movable means 254 Fourth movable means 255 Fixed effect means 256 Moving means IL light guide plate 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second secondary Control unit 600 Payout control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol h1 to h4 Hold icon c Fluctuation icon Wd Wipe display Od1 First operation means display Od2 Second operation means display Od3 Third Operation means display Od4 Fourth operation means display

Claims (2)

A amusement machine having a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is the first effect display .
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display .
Before Stories second effect display, the case of changing the first effect display of the display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first case".) And the effect display there is,
In the case of the first, the first effect display of the display mode is changed to the third aspect of the first aspect,
The second effect display is an effect display in which the display mode of the first effect display is not changed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon.
The display means can display a symbol variation display, and can display the symbol variation display.
The symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon in the second display mode is the jackpot symbol than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon in the first display mode. Is easy to confirm,
The first effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the hold icon.
The direction of the first effect display the third aspect of said first effect display than the first embodiment tends to change the Hold icon in the second display mode,
The second effect display is Ri effect display der that may be started during the display of the first effect display the first aspect,
The second effect display is an effect display that may change the display mode of the variable icon in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images